Petersons.
com/publishing
Check out our Web site at www.petersons.com/publishing to see if there is any new information
regarding the test and any revisions or corrections to the content of this book. We’ve made sure the
information in this book is accurate and uptodate; however, the test format or content may have
changed since the time of publication.
About Thomson Peterson’s
Thomson Peterson’s (www.petersons.com) is a leading provider of education information and
advice, with books and online resources focusing on education search, test preparation, and financial
aid. Its Web site offers searchable databases and interactive tools for contacting educational institu
tions, online practice tests and instruction, and planning tools for securing financial aid. Peterson’s
serves 110 million education consumers annually.
For more information, contact Peterson’s, 2000 Lenox Drive, Lawrenceville, NJ 08648; 800338
3282; or find us on the World Wide Web at www.petersons.com/about.
® 2005 Thomson Peterson’s, a part of The Thomson Corporation
Thomson Learning
TM
is a trademark used herein under license.
Editor: Wallie Walker Hammond; Production Editor: Alysha Bullock;
Manufacturing Manager: Judy Coleman; Composition Manager: Melissa Ignatowski;
Cover Design: Greg Wuttke
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be repro
duced or used in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photo
copying, recording, taping, Web distribution, or information storage and retrieval systems—without
the prior written permission of the publisher.
For permission to use material from this text or product, submit a request online at
www.thomsonrights.com
Any additional questions about permissions can be submitted by email to
thomsonrights@thomson.com
ISBN: 0768917174
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 07 06 05
v
Contents
About the SAT............................................................................................................................. vii
1. Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals ................................................................. 1
Diagnostic Test • Addition of Whole Numbers • Subtraction of Whole Numbers •
Multiplication of Whole Numbers • Division of Whole Numbers • Addition or
Subtraction of Decimals • Multiplication of Decimals • Division of Decimals • The
Laws of Arithmetic • Estimating Answers • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
2. Operations with Fractions ................................................................................................... 19
Diagnostic Test • Addition and Subtraction • Multiplication and Division • Simplifying
Fractions • Operations with Mixed Numbers • Comparing Fractions • Retest • Solutions
to Practice Exercises
3. Verbal Problems Involving Fractions.................................................................................. 39
Diagnostic Test • Part of a Whole • Finding Fractions of Fractions • Finding Whole
Numbers • Solving with Letters • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
4. Variation ................................................................................................................................ 53
Diagnostic Test • Ratio and Proportion • Direct Variation • Inverse Variation • Retest •
Solutions to Practice Exercises
5. Percent ................................................................................................................................... 69
Diagnostic Test • Fractional and Decimal Equivalents of Percents • Finding a Percent of
a Number • Finding a Number When a Percent Is Given • To Find What Percent One
Number Is of Another • Percents Greater Than 100 • Retest • Solutions to Practice
Exercises
6. Verbal Problems Involving Percent .................................................................................... 85
Diagnostic Test • Percent of Increase or Decrease • Discount • Commission • Profit and
Loss • Taxes • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
7. Averages.............................................................................................................................. 103
Diagnostic Test • Simple Average • To Find a Missing Number When an Average Is
Given • Weighted Average • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
8. Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations ................................................. 115
Diagnostic Test • Signed Numbers • Solution of Linear Equations • Simultaneous
Equations in Two Unknowns • Quadratic Equations • Equations Containing Radicals •
Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
9. Literal Expressions ............................................................................................................. 133
Diagnostic Test • Communication with Letters • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
Contents vi
www.petersons.com
10. Roots and Radicals ............................................................................................................. 143
Diagnostic Test • Addition and Subtraction of Radicals • Multiplication and Division of
Radicals • Simplifying Radicals Containing a Sum or Difference • Finding the Square
Root of a Number • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
11. Factoring and Algebraic Fractions .................................................................................... 155
Diagnostic Test • Simplifying Fractions • Addition or Subtraction of Fractions •
Multiplication or Division of Fractions • Complex Algebraic Fractions • Using
Factoring to Find Missing Values • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
12. Problem Solving in Algebra............................................................................................... 171
Diagnostic Test • Coin Problems • Consecutive Integer Problems • Age Problems •
Investment Problems • Fraction Problems • Mixture Problems • Motion Problems •
Work Problems • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
13. Geometry ............................................................................................................................ 197
Diagnostic Test • Areas • Perimeter • Right Triangles • Coordinate Geometry • Parallel
Lines • Triangles • Polygons • Circles • Volumes • Similar Polygons • Retest • Solutions
to Practice Exercises
14. Inequalities .......................................................................................................................... 231
Diagnostic Test • Algebraic Inequalities • Geometric Inequalities • Retest • Solutions to
Practice Exercises
15. Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Fractions .......................................................... 243
16. Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability ........................................ 273
Practice Test A .................................................................................................................... 313
Practice Test B .................................................................................................................... 319
Practice Test C .................................................................................................................... 327
Solutions to Practice Tests ................................................................................................ 333
vii
About the SAT
PURPOSE OF THE SAT
The SAT is a standardized exam used by many colleges and universities in the
United States and Canada to help them make their admissions decisions. The test
is developed and administered by Educational Testing Service (ETS) for the Col
lege Entrance Examination Board.
The SAT consists of two different types of exams designated SAT and SAT II.
The SAT tests verbal and mathematical reasoning skills — your ability to under
stand what you read, to use language effectively, to reason clearly, and to apply
fundamental mathematical principles to unfamiliar problems. SAT II tests mastery
of specific subjects such as Chemistry or French or World History.
TAKING THE SAT
The SAT is offered on one Saturday morning in October, November, December,
January, March, May, and June. When you apply to a college, find out whether it
requires you to take the SAT and if so when scores are due. To make sure your
scores arrive in time, sign up for a test date that’s at least six weeks before the
school’s deadline for test scores.
Registration forms for the SAT are available in most high school guidance of
fices. You can also get registration forms and any other SAT information from:
College Board SAT Program
P.O. Box 6200
Princeton, NJ 085416200
6097717600
Monday through Friday, 8:30 a.m. to 9:30 p.m. Eastern Time
www.collegeboard.com
Along with your registration form you will receive a current SAT Student Bulletin.
The bulletin includes all necessary information on procedures, exceptions and spe
cial arrangements, times and places, and fees.
About the SAT viii
www.petersons.com
FORMAT OF THE NEW SAT
The new SAT is a threehour, mostly multiplechoice examination divided into
sections as shown in the chart below. One of the sections is experimental. Your
score on the six nonexperimental sections is the score colleges use to evaluate your
application.
The critical reading sections of the SAT use Sentence Completions to measure
your knowledge of the meanings of words and your understanding of how parts of
sentences go together, and Critical Reading questions (short and long passages) to
measure your ability to read and think carefully about the information presented in
passages.
The mathematical sections use Standard MultipleChoice Math, Quantitative
Comparisons, and StudentProduced Response Questions to test your knowledge
of arithmetic, algebra, and geometry. Many of the formulas that you need will be
given in the test instructions. You are not required to memorize them. SAT math
questions are designed to test your skill in applying basic math principles you
already know to unfamiliar situations.
The experimental section of SAT may test critical reading or mathematical rea
soning, and it can occur at any point during the test. This section is used solely
by the testmakers to try out questions for use in future tests. You won’t know which
section it is. So you’ll have to do your best on all of the sections.
FORMAT OF A TYPICAL SAT
Number of
Section #/Content Questions Time
(1) Writing 1 essay 25 min.
(2) Mathematics 20 25 min.
Standard Multiple Choice
(3)* “Wild Card” an Experimental Section varies 30 min.
(Varies with test)
(4) Critical Reading 16 25 min.
Sentence Completions 8
(5) Writing 35 25 min.
Standard Multiple Choice
(6) Mathematics 25 min.
Standard Multiplechoice 8
GridIns 10
(7) Critical Reading 19 25 min.
Sentence Completions 5
(8) Mathematics 20 min.
Standard Multiple Choice 16
(9) Critical Reading 13 20 min.
Sentence Completions 6
* Can occur in any section
About the SAT ix
www.petersons.com
THE NEW SAT MATH QUESTIONS
The mathematical reasoning sections of the SAT test problem solving in numbers
and operations, algebra I and II, geometry, statistics, probability, and data analysis
using two question types:
• Standard multiplechoice questions give you a problem in arithmetic,
algebra, or geometry. Then you choose the correct answer from the five
choices.
• GridIns do not give you answer choices. You have to compute the answer
and then use the ovals on the answer sheet to fill in your solution.
Although calculators are not required to answer any SAT math questions, students
are encouraged to bring a calculator to the test and to use it wherever it is helpful.
Mathematics tests your knowledge of arithmetic, algebra, and geometry. You
are to select the correct solution to the problem from the five choices given.
Example:
If (x + y)
2
= 17, and xy = 3, then x
2
+ y
2
=
(A) 11
(B) 14
(C) 17
(D) 20
(E) 23
Solution:
The correct answer is (A).
(x
+ y)
2
= 17
(x
+ y)(x
+ y) = 17
x
2
+ 2xy + y
2
= 17
Since xy = 3,
x
2
+ 2(3) + y
2
= 17
x
2
+ 6 + y
2
= 17
x
2
+ y
2
= 11
StudentProduced Responses test your ability to solve mathematical problems when
no choices are offered.
Example:
On a map having a scale of
1
4
inch = 20 miles, how many inches should
there be between towns that are 70 miles apart?
Solution:
The correct answer is
7
8
or .875, depending upon whether you choose
to solve the problem using fractions or decimals.
About the SAT x
www.petersons.com
Using fractions Using decimals
1
4
20 70
20
70
4
70
4
1
20
7
8
=
=
=
=
x
x
x
.
.
.
25
20 70
20 17 5
875
=
=
=
x
x
x
HOW TO USE THE ANSWER GRID
The answer grid for studentproduced response (gridins) questions is similar to
the grid used for your zip code on the personal information section of your answer
sheet. An example of the answer grid is shown below.
The open spaces above the grid are for you to write in the numerical value of your
answer. The first row of ovals has only two ovals in the middle with a “/”. These
allow you to enter numbers in fractional form. Since a fraction must have both a
numerator and a denominator, it is not possible that the leftmost or rightmost posi
tions could have a “/”. To protect you from yourself, there are no “/s” in those
positions. The next row has decimal points. The horizontal bar separates the frac
tion lines and decimal points from the digits 0 to 9. Record your answers to gridin
questions according to the rules that follow.
GRID RULES
1. Write your answer in the boxes at the top of the grid.
Technically this isn’t required by the SAT. Realistically, it gives you something
to follow as you fill in the ovals. Do it—it will help you.
2. Mark the bubbles that correspond to the answer you entered in the boxes.
Mark one bubble per column. The machine that scores the test can only read the
bubbles, so if you don’t fill them in, you won’t get credit. Just entering your
answer in the boxes is not enough.
About the SAT xi
www.petersons.com
3. Start your answer in any column, if space permits.
Unused columns should be left blank. Don’t put in zeroes. Look at this
example:
Here are two ways to enter an answer of “150.”
4. Work with decimals or fractions.
An answer can be expressed as
3
4
or as .75. Do not put a zero in front of a
decimal that is less than 1. Just remember that you have only four spaces to work
with and that a decimal point or a fraction slash uses up one of the spaces.
For decimal answers, be as accurate as possible but keep within the four spaces.
Say you get an answer of .1777. Here are your options:
Fractions do not have to be simplified to simplest form unless they don’t fit in
the answer grid. For example, you can grid
4
10
, but you can’t grid
12
16
because
you’d need five spaces. So, you would simplify it and grid
3
4
.
About the SAT xii
www.petersons.com
5. Express a mixed number as a decimal or as an improper fraction.
If you tried to grid 1
3
4
, it would be read as
13
4
, which would give you a wrong
answer. Instead you should grid this answer as 1.75 or as
7
4
.
6. If more than one answer is possible, grid any one.
Sometimes the problems in this section will have more than one correct answer.
In such cases, choose one answer and grid it. For example, if a question asks
for a prime number between 5 and 13, the answer could be 7 or 11. Grid 7 or
grid 11, but don’t put in both answers.
About the SAT xiii
www.petersons.com
CALCULATORS AND THE SAT
Calculators are allowed on the SAT. You may bring to your exam any of the fol
lowing types of calculators:
• fourfunction
• scientific
• graphing
You may not bring calculators of the following types:
• calculators with paper tape or printers
• laptop computers
• telephones with calculators
• “handheld” microcomputers
Make sure that the calculator you bring is one you are thoroughly familiar with.
WHEN TO USE A CALCULATOR
No question requires the use of a calculator. For some questions a calculator may
be helpful; for others it may be inappropriate. In general, the calculator may be
useful for any question that involves arithmetic computations. Remember, though,
that the calculator is only a tool. It can help you avoid inaccuracies in computation,
but it cannot take the place of understanding how to set up and solve a mathemati
cal problem.
Here is a sample problem for which a calculator would be useful:
Example:
The cost of two dozen apples is $3.60. At this rate, what is the cost of 10
apples?
(A) $1.75
(B) $1.60
(C) $1.55
(D) $1.50
(E) $1.25
Solution:
The correct answer is (D).
Make a ratio of apples to dollars:
apples
dollars
:
.
$ .
24
3 60
10
24 36
36
24
1 50
=
=
= =
x
x
x
A calculator would be useful in solving this problem. Although the calculations
are fairly simple, the calculator can improve your speed and accuracy.
About the SAT xiv
www.petersons.com
Here is a problem for which a calculator would not be useful:
Example:
Joshua travels a distance of d miles in t  6 hours. At this rate, how many
miles will he travel in t
2
 36 hours?
(A) d(t + 6)
(B) d(t  6)
(C)
d
t + 6
(D)
d
t − 6
(E)
t
d
+ 6
Solution:
The correct answer is (A).
rate =
distance
time
Joshua's rate =
d
t − 6
To calculate his new distance, use distance = rate × time
Distance =
d
t
t
d
t
t
−
−
=
−
+
6
36
6
6
2
( )
( ))( )
( )
t
d t
−
= +
6
6
This is an algebra problem. Using a calculator would not be helpful.
SCORING THE SAT
Every correct answer is worth one point. If you leave an answer blank, you score
no point. For incorrect answers to all verbal questions and to regular mathematics
questions, you lose onefourth of a point. For incorrect answers to quantitative
comparisons, you lose onethird of a point. For incorrect answers to studentpro
duced responses, there is no penalty. The penalties for wrong answers are intended
to discourage random guessing.
Regardless of the number of questions on the test, all SAT scores are reported
on a scale of 200 to 800. The scores are based on the nonexperimental sections and
are broken down into separate math and verbal scores.
Five or six weeks after the exam, your scores will be sent to the colleges you
have named on your registration form, to your high school, and to you.
About the SAT xv
www.petersons.com
HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
The math review that follows is designed as a selfteaching text to help you pre
pare for the mathematics sections of the SAT. At the beginning of each chapter,
you will find a tenquestion diagnostic test. Try this test before you read the chap
ter. Check your answers with the solutions provided at the end of the chapter. If
you get eight to ten questions right, you may skip that chapter and go right on to
the next diagnostic test at the beginning of the following chapter. Or you may
prefer to skim the instructional material anyway, just for review, but not bother
with the practice exercises. If you get five to seven questions right, you might do
the practice exercises only in the sections dealing with problems you missed. If
you get fewer than five questions right, you should work carefully through the
entire chapter.
At the end of each chapter you will find a retest that is similar to the diagnostic
test. After working through the chapter, you should do better on the retest. If not,
go back and review any instructional material dealing with errors you made before
proceeding to the next chapter.
Working diligently through each chapter in this manner will strengthen your
weaknesses and prepare you to get your best score on the three Practice new SAT
Math Tests at the end of this book—and on your actual SAT.
Good luck.
1
1
Operations with Whole
Numbers and Decimals
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. Find the sum of 683, 72, and 5429.
(A) 5184
(B) 6184
(C) 6183
(D) 6193
(E) 6284
2. Subtract 417 from 804.
(A) 287
(B) 388
(C) 397
(D) 387
(E) 288
3. Find the product of 307 and 46.
(A) 3070
(B) 14,082
(C) 13,922
(D) 13,882
(E) 14,122
4. Divide 38,304 by 48.
(A) 787
(B) 798
(C) 824
(D) 1098
(E) 1253
5. Add 6.43 + 46.3 + .346.
(A) 14.52
(B) 53.779
(C) 53.392
(D) 53.076
(E) 1452
6. Subtract 81.763 from 145.1.
(A) 64.347
(B) 64.463
(C) 63.463
(D) 63.337
(E) 63.347
7. Multiply 3.47 by 2.3.
(A) 79.81
(B) 7.981
(C) 6.981
(D) 7.273
(E) 7.984
8. Divide 2.163 by .03.
(A) 7210
(B) 721
(C) 72.1
(D) 7.21
(E) 0.721
9. Find 3  16 ÷ 8 + 4 × 2.
(A) 9
(B) 2
1
3
(C) 10
(D) 18
(E)
2
3
10. Which of the following is closest to
8317 91
217 8
×
×.
?
(A) 4
(B) 40
(C) 400
(D) 4000
(E) 40,000
Chapter 1 2
www.petersons.com
In preparing for the mathematics section of your college entrance examination, it is most important to overcome
any fear of mathematics. The level of this examination extends no further than relatively simple geometry. Most
problems can be solved using only arithmetic. By reading this chapter carefully, following the sample problems,
and then working on the practice problems in each section, you can review important concepts and vocabulary, as
well as familiarize yourself with various types of questions. Since arithmetic is basic to any further work in
mathematics, this chapter is extremely important and should not be treated lightly. By doing these problems
carefully and reading the workedout solutions, you can build the confidence needed to do well.
1. ADDITION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
In the process of addition, the numbers to be added are called addends. The answer is called the sum. In writing
an addition problem, put one number underneath the other, being careful to keep columns straight with the units’
digits one below the other. If you find a sum by adding from top to bottom, you can check it by adding from
bottom to top.
Example:
Find the sum of 403, 37, 8314, and 5.
Solution:
403
37
8314
+ 5
8759
Exercise 1
1. Find the sum of 360, 4352, 87, and 205.
(A) 5013
(B) 5004
(C) 5003
(D) 6004
(E) 6013
2. Find the sum of 4321, 2143, 1234, and 3412.
(A) 12,110
(B) 11,011
(C) 11,101
(D) 11,111
(E) 11,110
3. Add 56 + 321 + 8 + 42.
(A) 427
(B) 437
(C) 517
(D) 417
(E) 527
4. Add 99 + 88 + 77 + 66 + 55.
(A) 384
(B) 485
(C) 385
(D) 375
(E) 376
5. Add 1212 + 2323 + 3434 + 4545 + 5656.
(A) 17,171
(B) 17,170
(C) 17,160
(D) 17,280
(E) 17,270
Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 3
www.petersons.com
2. SUBTRACTION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
The number from which we subtract is called the minuend. The number which we take away is called the subtra
hend. The answer in subtraction is called the difference.
If 5 is subtracted from 11, the minuend is 11, the subtrahend is 5, and the difference is 6.
Since we cannot subtract a larger number from a smaller one, we often must borrow in performing a subtrac
tion. Remember that when we borrow, because of our base 10 number system, we reduce the digit to the left by
1, but increase the righthand digit by 10.
Example:
54
– 38
Since we cannot subtract 8 from 4, we borrow 1 from 5 and change the 4 to 14. We are really borrowing 1 from
the tens column and, therefore, add 10 to the ones column. Then we can subtract.
Solution:
4
1
4
– 3 8
1 6
Sometimes we must borrow across several columns.
Example:
503
– 267
We cannot subtract 7 from 3 and cannot borrow from 0. Therefore we reduce the 5 by one and make the 0 into a
10. Then we can borrow 1 from the 10, making it a 9. This makes the 3 into 13.
Solution:
4
1
0 3 4 9
1
3
– 2 6 7 – 2 6 7
2 3 6
Exercise 2
1. Subtract 803 from 952.
(A) 248
(B) 148
(C) 249
(D) 149
(E) 147
2. From the sum of 837 and 415, subtract 1035.
(A) 217
(B) 216
(C) 326
(D) 227
(E) 226
3. From 1872 subtract the sum of 76 and 43.
(A) 1754
(B) 1838
(C) 1753
(D) 1839
(E) 1905
4. Find the difference between 732 and 237.
(A) 496
(B) 495
(C) 486
(D) 405
(E) 497
5. By how much does the sum of 612 and 315
exceed the sum of 451 and 283?
(A) 294
(B) 1661
(C) 293
(D) 197
(E) 193
Chapter 1 4
www.petersons.com
3. MULTIPLICATION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
The answer to a multiplication problem is called the product. The numbers being multiplied are called factors of
the product.
When multiplying by a number containing two or more digits, place value is extremely important when
writing partial products. When we multiply 537 by 72, for example, we multiply first by 2 and then by 7. How
ever, when we multiply by 7, we are really multiplying by 70 and therefore leave a 0 at the extreme right before
we proceed with the multiplication.
Example:
537
× 72
1074
+ 37590
38664
If we multiply by a threedigit number, we leave one zero on the right when multiplying by the tens digit and two
zeros on the right when multiplying by the hundreds digit.
Example:
372
× 461
372
22320
+ 148800
171492
Exercise 3
Find the following products.
1. 526 multiplied by 317
(A) 156,742
(B) 165,742
(C) 166,742
(D) 166,748
(E) 166,708
2. 8347 multiplied by 62
(A) 517,514
(B) 517,414
(C) 517,504
(D) 517,114
(E) 617,114
3. 705 multiplied by 89
(A) 11,985
(B) 52,745
(C) 62,705
(D) 62,745
(E) 15,121
4. 437 multiplied by 607
(A) 265,259
(B) 265,219
(C) 265,359
(D) 265,059
(E) 262,059
5. 798 multiplied by 450
(A) 358,600
(B) 359,100
(C) 71,820
(D) 358,100
(E) 360,820
Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 5
www.petersons.com
1. Divide 391 by 23.
(A) 170
(B) 16
(C) 17
(D) 18
(E) 180
2. Divide 49,523,436 by 9.
(A) 5,502,605
(B) 5,502,514
(C) 5,502,604
(D) 5,502,614
(E) 5,502,603
4. DIVISION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
The number being divided is called the dividend. The number we are dividing by is called the divisor. The answer
to the division is called the quotient. When we divide 18 by 6, 18 is the dividend, 6 is the divisor, and 3 is the
quotient. If the quotient is not an integer, we have a remainder. The remainder when 20 is divided by 6 is 2,
because 6 will divide 18 evenly, leaving a remainder of 2. The quotient in this case is 6
2
6
. Remember that in
writing the fractional part of a quotient involving a remainder, the remainder becomes the numerator and the
divisor the denominator.
When dividing by a singledigit divisor, no long division procedures are needed. Simply carry the remainder
of each step over to the next digit and continue.
Example:
)
6 5 8
9 7 2 4
4
3 4 4
1 2
Exercise 4
3. Find the remainder when 4832 is divided by 15.
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
(E) 5
4. Divide 42,098 by 7.
(A) 6014
(B) 6015
(C) 6019
(D) 6011
(E) 6010
5. Which of the following is the quotient of
333,180 and 617?
(A) 541
(B) 542
(C) 549
(D) 540
(E) 545
Chapter 1 6
www.petersons.com
5. ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION OF DECIMALS
The most important thing to watch for in adding or subtracting decimals is to keep all decimal points underneath
one another. The proper placement of the decimal point in the answer will be in line with all the decimal points
above.
Example:
Find the sum of 8.4, .37, and 2.641
Solution:
8.4
.37
+ 2.641
11.411
Example:
From 48.3 subtract 27.56
Solution:
4 8 3 0
7 12 1
.
– 2 7 . 5 6
2 0 . 7 4
In subtraction, the upper decimal must have as many decimal places as the lower, so we must fill in zeros where
needed.
Exercise 5
1. From the sum of .65, 4.2, 17.63, and 8, subtract
12.7.
(A) 9.78
(B) 17.68
(C) 17.78
(D) 17.79
(E) 18.78
2. Find the sum of .837, .12, 52.3, and .354.
(A) 53.503
(B) 53.611
(C) 53.601
(D) 54.601
(E) 54.611
3. From 561.8 subtract 34.75.
(A) 537.05
(B) 537.15
(C) 527.15
(D) 527.04
(E) 527.05
4. From 53.72 subtract the sum of 4.81 and 17.5.
(A) 31.86
(B) 31.41
(C) 41.03
(D) 66.41
(E) 41.86
5. Find the difference between 100 and 52.18.
(A) 37.82
(B) 47.18
(C) 47.92
(D) 47.82
(E) 37.92
Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 7
www.petersons.com
6. MULTIPLICATION OF DECIMALS
In multiplying decimals, we proceed as we do with integers, using the decimal points only as an indication of
where to place a decimal point in the product. The number of decimal places in the product is equal to the sum of
the number of decimal places in the numbers being multiplied.
Example:
Multiply .375 by .42
Solution:
.375
× .42
750
+ 15000
.15750
Since the first number being multiplied contains three decimal places and the second number contains two deci
mal places, the product will contain five decimal places.
To multiply a decimal by 10, 100, 1000, etc., we need only to move the decimal point to the right the proper
number of places. In multiplying by 10, move one place to the right (10 has one zero), by 100 move two places to
the right (100 has two zeros), by 1000 move three places to the right (1000 has three zeros), and so forth.
Example:
The product of .837 and 100 is 83.7
Exercise 6
Find the following products.
1. 437 × .24 =
(A) 1.0488
(B) 10.488
(C) 104.88
(D) 1048.8
(E) 10,488
2. 5.06 × .7 =
(A) .3542
(B) .392
(C) 3.92
(D) 3.542
(E) 35.42
3. 83 × 1.5 =
(A) 12.45
(B) 49.8
(C) 498
(D) 124.5
(E) 1.245
4. .7314 × 100 =
(A) .007314
(B) .07314
(C) 7.314
(D) 73.14
(E) 731.4
5. .0008 × 4.3 =
(A) .000344
(B) .00344
(C) .0344
(D) 0.344
(E) 3.44
Chapter 1 8
www.petersons.com
7. DIVISION OF DECIMALS
When dividing by a decimal, always change the decimal to a whole number by moving the decimal point to the
end of the divisor. Count the number of places you have moved the decimal point and move the dividend’s
decimal point the same number of places. The decimal point in the quotient will be directly above the one in the
dividend.
Example:
Divide 2.592 by .06
Solution:
)
. .
.
06 2 592
43 2
To divide a decimal by 10, 100, 1000, etc., we move the decimal point the proper number of places to the left. The
number of places to be moved is always equal to the number of zeros in the divisor.
Example:
Divide 43.7 by 1000
Solution:
The decimal point must be moved three places (there are three zeros in 1000) to the left. Therefore,
our quotient is .0437
Sometimes division can be done in fraction form. Always remember to move the decimal point to the end of the
divisor (denominator) and then the same number of places in the dividend (numerator).
Example:
Divide:
.
.
.
.
0175
05
1 75
5
35 = =
Exercise 7
1. Divide 4.3 by 100.
(A) .0043
(B) 0.043
(C) 0.43
(D) 43
(E) 430
2. Find the quotient when 4.371 is divided by .3.
(A) 0.1457
(B) 1.457
(C) 14.57
(D) 145.7
(E) 1457
3. Divide .64 by .4.
(A) .0016
(B) 0.016
(C) 0.16
(D) 1.6
(E) 16
4. Find .12 ÷
2
5 .
.
(A) 4.8
(B) 48
(C) .03
(D) 0.3
(E) 3
5. Find
10 2
03
.
.
÷
1 7
1
.
.
.
(A) .02
(B) 0.2
(C) 2
(D) 20
(E) 200
Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 9
www.petersons.com
8. THE LAWS OF ARITHMETIC
Addition and multiplication are commutative operations, as the order in which we add or multiply does not
change an answer.
Example:
4 + 7 = 7 + 4
5 • 3 = 3 • 5
Subtraction and division are not commutative, as changing the order does change the answer.
Example:
5 – 3 ≠ 3 – 5
20 ÷ 5 ≠ 5 ÷ 20
Addition and multiplication are associative, as we may group in any manner and arrive at the same answer.
Example:
(3 + 4) + 5 = 3 + (4 + 5)
(3 • 4) • 5 = 3 • (4 • 5)
Subtraction and division are not associative, as regrouping changes an answer.
Example:
(5 – 4) – 3 ≠ 5 – (4 – 3)
(100 ÷ 20) ÷ 5 ≠ 100 ÷ (20 ÷ 5)
Multiplication is distributive over addition. If a sum is to be multiplied by a number, we may multiply each
addend by the given number and add the results. This will give the same answer as if we had added first and then
multiplied.
Example:
3(5 + 2 + 4) is either 15 + 6 + 12 or 3(11).
The identity for addition is 0 since any number plus 0, or 0 plus any number, is equal to the given number.
The identity for multiplication is 1 since any number times 1, or 1 times any number, is equal to the given
number.
There are no identity elements for subtraction or division. Although 5 – 0 = 5, 0 – 5 ≠ 5. Although 8 ÷ 1 = 8,
1 ÷ 8 ≠ 8.
When several operations are involved in a single problem, parentheses are usually included to make the order of
operations clear. If there are no parentheses, multiplication and division are always performed prior to addition and
subtraction.
Example:
Find 5 • 4 + 6 ÷ 2 – 16 ÷ 4
Solution:
The + and – signs indicate where groupings should begin and end. If we were to insert parentheses
to clarify operations, we would have (5 · 4) + (6 ÷ 2) – (16 ÷ 4), giving 20 + 3 – 4 = 19.
Chapter 1 10
www.petersons.com
Exercise 8
1. Find 8 + 4 ÷ 2 + 6 · 3  1.
(A) 35
(B) 47
(C) 43
(D) 27
(E) 88
2. 16 ÷ 4 + 2 · 3 + 2  8 ÷ 2.
(A) 6
(B) 8
(C) 2
(D) 4
(E) 10
3. Match each illustration in the lefthand column with the law it illustrates from the righthand column.
a. 475 · 1 = 475 u. Identity for Addition
b. 75 + 12 = 12 + 75 v. Associative Law of Addition
c. 32(12 + 8) = 32(12) + 32(8) w. Associative Law of Multiplication
d. 378 + 0 = 378 x. Identity for Multiplication
e. (7 · 5) · 2 = 7 · (5 · 2) y. Distributive Law of Multiplication
over Addition
z. Commutative Law of Addition
Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 11
www.petersons.com
9. ESTIMATING ANSWERS
On a competitive examination, where time is an important factor, it is essential that you be able to estimate an answer.
Simply round off all answers to the nearest multiples of 10 or 100 and estimate with the results. On multiplechoice
tests, this should enable you to pick the correct answer without any timeconsuming computation.
Example:
The product of 498 and 103 is approximately
(A) 5000
(B) 500,000
(C) 50,000
(D) 500
(E) 5,000,000
Solution:
498 is about 500. 103 is about 100. Therefore the product is about (500) (100) or 50,000 (just move the
decimal point two places to the right when multiplying by 100). Therefore, the correct answer is (C).
Example:
Which of the following is closest to the value of 4831 •
710
2314
?
(A) 83
(B) 425
(C) 1600
(D) 3140
(E) 6372
Solution:
Estimating, we have
( )( ) 5000 700
2000
. Dividing numerator and denominator by 1000, we have
5 700
2
( )
or
3500
2
, which is about 1750. Therefore, we choose answer (C).
Exercise 9
Choose the answer closest to the exact value of each of the following problems. Use estimation in your solutions.
No written computation should be needed. Circle the letter before your answer.
1.
483 1875
119
+
(A) 2
(B) 10
(C) 20
(D) 50
(E) 100
2.
6017 312
364 618
i
+
(A) 18
(B) 180
(C) 1800
(D) 18,000
(E) 180,000
3.
783 491
1532 879
+
−
(A) .02
(B) .2
(C) 2
(D) 20
(E) 200
Chapter 1 12
www.petersons.com
RETEST
1. Find the sum of 86, 4861, and 205.
(A) 5142
(B) 5132
(C) 5152
(D) 5052
(E) 4152
2. From 803 subtract 459.
(A) 454
(B) 444
(C) 354
(D) 344
(E) 346
3. Find the product of 65 and 908.
(A) 59,020
(B) 9988
(C) 58,920
(D) 58,020
(E) 59,920
4. Divide 66,456 by 72.
(A) 903
(B) 923
(C) 911
(D) 921
(E) 925
5. Find the sum of .361 + 8.7 + 43.17.
(A) 52.078
(B) 51.538
(C) 51.385
(D) 52.161
(E) 52.231
6. Subtract 23.17 from 50.9.
(A) 26.92
(B) 27.79
(C) 27.73
(D) 37.73
(E) 37.79
7. Multiply 8.35 by .43.
(A) 3.5805
(B) 3.5905
(C) 3.5915
(D) 35.905
(E) .35905
8. Divide 2.937 by .11.
(A) .267
(B) 2.67
(C) 26.7
(D) 267
(E) 2670
9. Find 8 + 10 ÷ 2 + 4 · 2  21 ÷ 7.
(A) 17
(B) 23
(C) 18
(D) 14
(E)
5
7
10. Which of the following is closest to
2875 932
5817
29
+
?
(A) .02
(B) .2
(C) 2
(D) 20
(E) 200
Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 13
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (B)
683
72
5429
6184
+
2. (D)
8 0 4
4 1 7
3 8 7
7 9
1
–
3. (E)
307
46
1842
12280
14 122
×
,
4. (B)
)
48 38304
798
336
470
432
384
384
5. (D)
6 43
46 3
346
53 076
.
.
.
.
+
6. (D)
14 5 1 0 0
81 7 6 3
63 3 3
4 10 9
1
.
.
.
–
7
7. (B)
3 47
2 3
1041
6940
7 981
.
.
.
×
8. (C)
)
. .
.
03 2 163
72 1
9. (A) 3 – (16 ÷ 8) + (4 × 2) = 3 – 2 + 8 = 9
10. (D) Estimate
8000 100
200 1
⋅
⋅
= 4000
Exercise 1
1. (B)
360
4352
87
205
5004
+
2. (E)
4321
2143
1234
3412
11 110
+
,
3. (A)
56
321
8
42
427
+
4. (C)
99
88
77
66
55
385
+
5. (B)
1212
2323
3434
4545
5656
17 170
+
,
Chapter 1 14
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
1. (D)
9 5 2
8 0 3
1 4 9
4
1
–
2. (A)
8 3 7
4 1 5
1 2 5 2
1 0 3 5
2 1 7
4
1
+
–
3. (C)
76
43
119
18 7 2
1 1 9
17 5 3
6
1
+
–
4. (B)
7 3 2
2 3 7
4 9 5
6 12
1
–
5. (E)
612
315
927
451
283
734
9 27
7 34
1 93
8
1
+
+
–
Exercise 3
1. (C)
526
317
3682
5260
157800
166 742
×
,
2. (A)
8347
62
16694
500820
517 514
×
,
3. (D)
705
89
6345
56400
62 745
×
,
4. (A)
437
607
3059
262200
265 259
×
,
5. (B)
798
450
39900
319200
359 100
×
,
Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 15
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
1. (C)
)
23 391
23
161
161
17
2. (C)
)
9 49 523 436
5 502 604
, ,
, ,
3. (B)
)
15 4832
45
33
30
32
30
2
322
Remainder 2
4. (A)
)
7 42098
6014
5. (D) Since the quotient, when multiplied by 617,
must give 333,180 as an answer, the quotient
must end in a number which, when multiplied
by 617, will end in 0. This can only be (D),
since 617 times (A) would end in 7, (B) would
end in 4, (C) in 3, and (E) in 5.
Exercise 5
1. (C)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
65
4 2
17 63
8
30 48
3 0 48
2 70
1 7
2 9
1
+
–
1
778
2. (B)
.
.
.
.
.
837
12
52 3
354
53 611
+
3. (E)
56 1 7 0
3 4 7 5
5 2 7 0 5
5
1
8
1
–
.
.
4. (B)
4 81 53 72
17 5 22 31
22 31 31 41
. .
. .
. .
+ –
5. (D)
10 0 0 0
5 2 1 8
4 7 8 2
9
9 9
1
1 1
.
.
.
–
Chapter 1 16
www.petersons.com
Exercise 6
1. (C)
437
24
1748
8740
104 88
× .
.
2. (D)
5 06
7
3 542
.
.
.
×
3. (D)
83
1 5
415
830
124 5
× .
.
4. (D)
.
.
7314
100
73 14
×
Just move the decimal point two
places to the right.
5. (B)
.
.
.
0008
4 3
24
320
00344
×
Exercise 7
1. (B) Just move decimal point two places to left,
giving .043 as the answer.
2. (C)
)
. .
.
3 4 371
14 57
3. (D)
)
. .
.
4 64
1 6
4. (C)
.
.
.
. 12
2 0
5
12 ÷ = ÷ 4 = .03
5. (D)
10 20
03
.
.
÷
1.7
.1
= 340 ÷17 = 20
Exercise 8
1. (D) 8 + (4 ÷ 2) + (6 • 3) – 1 =
8 + 2 + 18 – 1 = 27
2. (B) (16 ÷ 4) + (2 • 3) + 2 – (8 ÷ 2) =
4 + 6 + 2 – 4 = 8
3. (a, x)(b, z)(c, y)(d, u)(e, w)
Exercise 9
1. (C) Estimate , closest to
500 2000
100
2500
100
25
+
= = 20
2. (C) Estimate
6000 300
400 600
1 800 000
1000
1800
⋅
+
= =
, ,
3. (C) Estimate about 2
800 500
1500 900
1300
600
+
= =

Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 17
www.petersons.com
Retest
1. (C)
86
4861
205
5152
+
2. (D)
8 0 3
4 5 9
3 4 4
7 9
1
–
3. (A)
908
65
4540
54480
59 020
×
,
4. (B)
)
72 66456
648
165
144
216
216
923
5. (E)
.
.
.
.
361
8 7
43 17
52 231
+
6. (C)
5 0 9 0
2 3 1 7
2 7 7 3
4
1
8
1
.
.
.
–
7. (B)
8 35
43
2505
33400
3 5905
.
.
.
×
8. (C)
. .
11 2 937
2 2
73
66
77
)
777
26 7 .
9. (C) 8 + (10 ÷ 2) + (4 • 2) – (21 ÷ 7) =
8 + 5 + 8 – 3 = 18
10. (A) Estimate
3000 1000
6000
30
4000
180 000
02
+
= =
,
. , which is
closest to .02.
19
2
Operations with Fractions
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. The sum of
3
5
,
2
3
, and
1
4
is
(A)
1
2
(B)
27
20
(C)
3
2
(D)
91
60
(E) 1
5
12
2. Subtract
3
4
from
9
10
.
(A)
3
20
(B) 1
(C)
3
5
(D)
3
40
(E)
7
40
3. The number 582,354 is divisible by
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 8
(D) 9
(E) 10
4.
5
6
4
3
5
4
÷ ⋅
is equal to
(A) 2
(B)
50
36
(C)
1
2
(D)
36
50
(E)
7
12
5. Subtract 32
3
5
from 57.
(A) 24
2
5
(B) 25
3
5
(C) 25
2
5
(D) 24
3
5
(E) 24
1
5
Chapter 2 20
www.petersons.com
6. Divide 4
1
2
by 1
1
8
.
(A)
1
4
(B) 4
(C)
8
9
(D)
9
8
(E) 3
1
2
7. Which of the following fractions is the largest?
(A)
1
2
(B)
11
16
(C)
5
8
(D)
21
32
(E)
3
4
8. Which of the following fractions is closest
to
2
3
?
(A)
11
15
(B)
7
10
(C)
4
5
(D)
1
2
(E)
5
6
9. Simplify
4
2
3
1
2
−
9
10
+
.
(A)
93
5
(B)
93
35
(C)
147
35
(D)
147
5
(E)
97
35
10. Find the value of
1 1
1 1
a b
a b
+
−
when a = 3, b = 4.
(A) 7
(B) 2
(C) 1
(D)
1
7
(E)
2
7
Operations with Fractions 21
www.petersons.com
1. ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION
To add or subtract fractions, they must have the same denominator. To add several fractions, this common de
nominator will be the least number into which each given denominator will divide evenly.
Example:
Add
1
2
+
1
3
+
1
4
+
1
5
Solution:
The common denominator must contain two factors of 2 to accommodate the 4, and also a factor of
3 and one of 5. That makes the least common denominator 60. Rename each fraction to have 60 as
the denominator by dividing the given denominator into 60 and multiplying the quotient by the
given numerator.
30
60
+
20
60
+
15
60
+
12
60
= =
77
60
1
17
60
When only two fractions are being added, a shortcut method can be used:
a
b
c
d
ad bc
bd
+
+
= . That is, in order to add
two fractions, add the two cross products and place this sum over the product of the given denominators.
Example:
4
5
7
12
+
Solution:
4 12
48 35 83
60
1
23
60
( ) ( )
( )
= = =
+5 7
5 12
+
60
A similar shortcut applies to the subtraction of two fractions:
a
b
c
d
ad bc
bd
− =
−
Example:
4
5
7
12
4 12
5 12
13
60
− =
( ) − ( )
( )
=
−
=
5 7
48 35
60
Chapter 2 22
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Subtract
3
5
from
9
11
.
(A) −
12
55
(B)
12
55
(C) 1
(D)
3
8
(E)
3
4
5. Subtract
5
8
from the sum of
1
4
and
2
3
.
(A) 2
(B)
3
2
(C)
11
24
(D)
8
15
(E)
7
24
1. The sum of
1
2
+
2
3
+
3
4
is
(A)
6
9
(B)
23
12
(C)
23
36
(D)
6
24
(E) 2
1
3
2. The sum of
5
17
and
3
15
is
(A)
126
255
(B)
40
255
(C)
8
32
(D)
40
32
(E)
126
265
3. From the sum of
3
4
and
5
6
subtract the sum of
1
4
and
2
3
.
(A) 2
(B)
1
2
(C)
36
70
(D)
2
3
(E)
5
24
Operations with Fractions 23
www.petersons.com
2. MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION
In multiplying fractions, always try to divide out any common factor of any denominator with any numerator to
keep your numbers as small as possible. Remember that if all numbers divide out in the numerator, you are left
with a numerator of 1. The same goes for the denominator. If all numbers in both numerator and denominator
divide out, you are left with
1
1
or 1.
Example:
Multiply
3
5
15
33
11
45
⋅ ⋅
Solution:
3 15
33 45
3
3
1
1
5
11 1
15
15
⋅ ⋅ =
In dividing fractions, we multiply by the multiplicative inverse.
Example:
Divide
5
18
5
9
by
Solution:
5
18
9
5
2
1
2
⋅ =
Chapter 2 24
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Find
2
3
of
7
12
.
(A)
7
8
(B)
7
9
(C)
8
7
(D)
8
9
(E)
7
18
5. Divide 5 by
5
12
.
(A)
25
12
(B)
1
12
(C)
5
12
(D) 12
(E)
12
5
1. Find the product of
3
2
6
4
9
, , , and
1
12
.
(A) 3
(B)
1
3
(C)
14
23
(D)
1
36
(E)
5
12
2. Find
7
8
2
3
1
8
⋅ ÷ .
(A)
3
14
(B)
7
96
(C)
21
128
(D)
14
3
(E)
8
3
3.
3
5
1
2
3
10
÷ ⋅
is equal to
(A) 4
(B)
1
4
(C)
12
5
(D)
5
12
(E)
12
15
Operations with Fractions 25
www.petersons.com
3. SIMPLIFYING FRACTIONS
All fractional answers should be left in simplest form. There should be no factor that can still be divided into
numerator and denominator. In simplifying fractions involving very large numbers, it is helpful to tell at a glance
whether or not a given number will divide evenly into both numerator and denominator. Certain tests for divis
ibility assist with this.
If a number is divisible by Then
2 its last digit is 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8
3 the sum of the digits is divisible by 3
4 the number formed by the last 2 digits is divisible by 4
5 the last digit is 5 or 0
6 the number meets the tests for divisibility by 2 and 3
8 the number formed by the last 3 digits is divisible by 8
9 the sum of the digits is divisible by 9
Example:
By what single digit number should we simplify
135 492
428 376
,
,
?
Solution:
Since both numbers are even, they are at least divisible by 2. The sum of the digits in the numerator
is 24. The sum of the digits in the denominator is 30. Since these sums are both divisible by 3, each
number is divisible by 3. Since these numbers meet the divisibility tests for 2 and 3, they are each
divisible by 6.
Example:
Simplify to simplest form:
43 672
52 832
,
,
Solution:
Since both numbers are even, they are at least divisible by 2. However, to save time, we would like
to divide by a larger number. The sum of the digits in the numerator is 22, so it is not divisible by 3.
The number formed by the last two digits of each number is divisible by 4, making the entire
number divisible by 4. The numbers formed by the last three digits of each number is divisible by 8.
Therefore, each number is divisible by 8. Dividing by 8, we have
5459
6604
. Since these numbers are no
longer even and divisibility by 3 was ruled out earlier, there is no longer a single digit factor
common to numerator and denominator. It is unlikely, at the level of this examination, that you will
be called on to divide by a twodigit number.
Chapter 2 26
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. The fraction
432
801
can be simplified by dividing
numerator and denominator by
(A) 2
(B) 4
(C) 6
(D) 8
(E) 9
5. The number 6,862,140 is divisible by
I. 3
II. 4
III. 5
(A) I only
(B) I and III only
(C) II and III only
(D) I, II, and III
(E) III only
1. Which of the following numbers is divisible by
5 and 9?
(A) 42,235
(B) 34,325
(C) 46,505
(D) 37,845
(E) 53,290
2. Given the number 83,21p, in order for this
number to be divisible by 3, 6, and 9, p must be
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 0
(E) 9
3. If n! means n(n  1)(n  2) ... (4)(3)(2)(1), so that
4! = (4)(3)(2)(1) = 24, then 19! is divisible by
I. 17
II. 54
III. 100
IV. 39
(A) I and II only
(B) I only
(C) I and IV only
(D) I, II, III, and IV
(E) none of the above
Operations with Fractions 27
www.petersons.com
4. OPERATIONS WITH MIXED NUMBERS
To add or subtract mixed numbers, it is again important to find common denominators. If it is necessary to
borrow in subtraction, you must borrow in terms of the common denominator.
Example:
23
1
3
6
2
5
−
Solution:
23
1
3
23
5
15
=
− = − 6
2
5
6
6
15
Since we cannot subtract
6
15
from
5
15
, we borrow
15
15
from 23 and rewrite our problem as
22
20
15
6
6
15
−
In this form, subtraction is possible, giving us an answer of 16
14
15
.
Example:
Add 17
3
4
to 43
3
5
Solution:
Again we first rename the fractions to have a common denominator. This time it will be 20.
17
3
4
17
15
20
=
= +43
3
5
+43
12
20
When adding, we get a sum of 60
27
20
, which we change to 61
7
20
.
To multiply or divide mixed numbers, always rename them as improper fractions first.
Example:
Multiply 3
3
5
1
1
9
2
3
4
⋅ ⋅
Solution:
18
5
10
9 4
2 2
2
⋅ ⋅ =
11
11
Chapter 2 28
www.petersons.com
Example:
Divide 3
3
4
5
5
8
by
Solution:
15
4
45
8
2
3
2
÷ = ⋅ =
15
4
8
45
3
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Find the sum of 1
1
6
, 2
2
3
, and 3
3
4
.
(A) 7
5
12
(B) 6
6
13
(C) 7
7
12
(D) 6
1
3
(E) 7
1
12
2. Subtract 45
5
12
from 61.
(A) 15
7
12
(B) 15
5
12
(C) 16
7
12
(D) 16
5
12
(E) 17
5
12
3. Find the product of 32
1
2
and 5
1
5
.
(A) 26
(B) 13
(C) 169
(D) 160
1
10
(E) 160
2
7
4. Divide 17
1
2
by 70.
(A)
1
4
(B) 4
(C)
1
2
(D) 4
1
2
(E)
4
9
5. Find 1
3
4
· 12 ÷ 8
2
5
.
(A)
2
5
(B)
5
288
(C) 2
1
5
(D)
1
2
(E) 2
1
2
Operations with Fractions 29
www.petersons.com
5. COMPARING FRACTIONS
There are two methods by which fractions may be compared to see which is larger (or smaller).
Method I—Rename the fractions to have the same denominator. When this is done, the fraction with the larger
numerator is the larger fraction.
Example:
Which is larger,
5
6
or
8
11
?
Solution:
The least common denominator is 66.
5
6
55
66
8
11
48
66
= =
Therefore,
5
6
is the larger fraction.
Method II—To compare
a
b
with
c
d
, compare the cross products as follows:
If ad > bc, then
a
b
c
d
>
If ad < bc, then
a
b
c
d
<
If ad = bc, then
a
b
c
d
=
Using the example above, to compare
5
6
with
8
11
, compare 5 · 11 with 6 · 8. Since 5 · 11 is greater,
5
6
is the larger fraction.
Sometimes, a combination of these methods must be used in comparing a series of fractions. When a common
denominator can be found easily for a series of fractions, Method I is easier. When a common denominator would
result in a very large number, Method II is easier.
Example:
Which of the following fractions is the largest?
(A)
3
5
(B)
21
32
(C)
11
16
(D)
55
64
(E)
7
8
Solution:
To compare the last four, we can easily use a common denominator of 64.
21
32
42
64
11
16
44
64
55
64
7
8
56
64
= = =
The largest of these is
7
8
. Now we compare
7
8
with
3
5
using Method II. 7 · 5 > 8 · 3; therefore,
7
8
is the greatest fraction.
Chapter 2 30
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Arrange these fractions in order of size, from
largest to smallest:
4
15
2
5
1
3
, , .
(A)
4
15
2
5
1
3
, ,
(B)
4
15
1
3
2
5
, ,
(C)
2
5
1
3
4
15
, ,
(D)
1
3
4
15
2
5
, ,
(E)
1
3
2
5
4
15
, ,
2. Which of the following fractions is the
smallest?
(A)
3
4
(B)
5
6
(C)
7
8
(D)
19
24
(E)
13
15
3. Which of the following fractions is the largest?
(A)
3
5
(B)
7
10
(C)
5
8
(D)
3
4
(E)
13
20
4. Which of the following fractions is closest to
3
4
?
(A)
1
2
(B)
7
12
(C)
5
6
(D)
11
12
(E)
19
24
5. Which of the following fractions is closest to
1
2
?
(A)
5
12
(B)
8
15
(C)
11
20
(D)
31
60
(E)
7
15
Operations with Fractions 31
www.petersons.com
6. COMPLEX FRACTIONS
To simplify complex fractions, fractions that contain fractions within them, multiply every term by the smallest
number needed to clear all fractions in the given numerator and denominator.
Example:
1
6
1
4
1
2
1
3
+
+
Solution:
The smallest number into which 6, 4, 2, and 3 will divide is 12. Therefore, multiply every term of
the fraction by 12 to simplify the fraction.
2 3
6 4
5
10
1
2
+
+
= =
Example:
3
4
1

2
3
+
1
2
Solution:
Again, we multiply every term by 12. Be sure to multiply the 1 by 12 also.
9 8
12 6
1
18
−
=
+
Exercise 6
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Write as a fraction in simplest form:
2
3
2
3
+
1
6
+
1
4

1
2
(A)
13
2
(B)
7
2
(C)
13
4
(D)
4
13
(E)
49
12
2. Simplify:
5
6
5
12

2
3

1
6
(A)
5
12
(B)
5
6
(C)
2
3
(D)
1
6
(E)
7
12
Chapter 2 32
www.petersons.com
3. Find the value of
1 1
1
a b
ab
+
when a = 2 and b = 3.
(A)
5
6
(B) 5
(C) 4
1
6
(D) 1
1
5
(E) 2
2
5
4. Find the value of
1 1
1
a b
ab
+
when a =
1
2
and b =
1
3
.
(A)
5
6
(B) 5
(C) 4
1
6
(D) 1
1
5
(E) 2
2
5
5. Find the value of
2
1
3
5
1
2
1
3
+ 3
.
(A)
4
17
(B)
21
25
(C)
7
6
(D)
12
51
(E)
14
53
Operations with Fractions 33
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
5. Subtract 62
2
3
from 100.
(A) 37
1
3
(B) 38
1
3
(C) 37
2
3
(D) 38
2
3
(E) 28
2
3
6. Divide 2
2
5
by 4
8
10
.
(A) 2
(B)
1
2
(C)
288
25
(D)
25
288
(E) 2
1
4
7. Which of the following fractions is the smallest?
(A)
7
12
(B)
8
15
(C)
11
20
(D)
5
6
(E)
2
3
8. Which of the following fractions is closest to
1
4
?
(A)
4
15
(B)
3
10
(C)
3
20
(D)
1
5
(E)
1
10
1. The sum of
4
5
,
3
4
, and
1
3
is
(A)
8
12
(B)
113
60
(C)
1
5
(D)
10
9
(E)
11
6
2. Subtract
2
3
from
11
15
.
(A)
3
4
(B)
7
5
(C)
5
7
(D)
1
15
(E)
1
3
3. If 52,34p is divisible by 9, the digit represented
by p must be
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
(E) 5
4.
3
5
34
15
+
1
4
÷
is equal to
(A)
5
3
(B)
5
8
(C)
8
3
(D)
8
5
(E)
3
8
Chapter 2 34
www.petersons.com
9. Simplify:
5
2
3
4
+
2
3
+
5
6
(A) 2
(B)
1
2
(C) 12
(D)
1
4
(E) 4
10. Find the value of
1
1 1
ab
a b
+
when a = 4, b = 5.
(A) 9
(B) 20
(C)
1
9
(D)
1
20
(E)
9
40
Operations with Fractions 35
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Exercise 1
1. (B) Change all fractions to twelfths.
6
12
8
12
9
12
23
12
+ + =
2. (A) Use the cross product method.
5 15 17 3
17 15
75 51
255
126
255
( ) ( )
( )
= =
+
+
3. (D)
3
4
18 38
24
19
12
+
5
6
+ 20
24
= = =
1
4
3 11
12
19
12
11
12
8
12
2
3
+
2
3
+8
12
= =
− = =
4. (B)
9
11
3
5
45 33
55
12
55
− =
−
=
5. (E)
1
4
3 11
12
+
2
3
+8
12
= =
11
12
5
8
88 60
96
28
96
7
24
− =
−
= =
Exercise 2
1. (B)
3
2
6 4
9 12
2
2
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ =
1
1 1
3
3
2. (D)
7 2
3 1
14
3 8
8
⋅ ⋅ =
3. (A)
3
5
3
20
4
4
÷
⋅ =
3
5
20
3
4. (E)
2
12 3
7 7
18
6
⋅ =
5. (D)
5
5 1
12
12 ⋅ =
Diagnostic Test
1. (D) Change all fractions to sixtieths.
36
60
40
60
15
60
91
60
+ + =
2. (A)
9
10
3
4
36 30
40
6
40
3
20
− =
−
= =
3. (D) The sum of the digits is 27, which is
divisible by 9.
4. (C)
5
6
4
3
5
4
5
6
1
2
2
÷ ⋅
= ÷ = ⋅ =
5
3
5
6
3
5
5. (A) 57 56
5
5
32
3
5
32
3
5
24
2
5
=
=
6. (B)
9
2
4
4
÷ = ⋅ =
9
8
9
2
8
9
7. (E) Use a common denominator of 32.
1
2
16
32
11
16
22
32
5
8
20
32
21
32
3
4
24
32
= = =
=
Of these,
3
4
is the largest.
8. (B) Use a common denominator of 30.
11
15
22
30
7
10
21
30
4
5
24
30
1
2
15
30
5
6
25
30
= = =
= =
Since
2
3
20
30
= , the answer closest to
2
3
is
7
10
.
9. (B) Multiply every term of the fraction by 30.
120 27
20 15
93
35
−
=
+
10. (A)
1
3
1
3
+
1
4

1
4
Multiply every term by 12.
4 3
4 3
7
+
−
=
Chapter 2 36
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (D) The digits must add to a number divisible
by 9. All answers are divisible by 5. 3 + 7 + 8 +
4 + 5 = 27, which is divisible by 9.
2. (A) The sum of the digits must be divisible by
9, and the digit must be even. 8 + 3 + 2 + 1 =
14. Therefore, we choose (A) because 14 + 4 =
18, which is divisible by 9.
3. (D) 19! = 19 · 18 · 17 · 16 ... 3 · 2 · 1. This is
divisible by 17, since it contains a factor of 17.
It is divisible by 54, since it contains factors of
9 and 6. It is divisible by 100, since it contains
factors of 10, 5, and 2. It is divisible by 39,
since it contains factors of 13 and 3.
4. (E) The sum of the digits in both the numerator
and denominator are divisible by 9.
5. (D) The sum of the digits is 27, which is
divisible by 3. The number formed by the last
two digits is 40, which is divisible by 4. The
number ends in 0 and is therefore divisible by 5.
Exercise 4
1. (C)
1
1
6
1
2
12
2
2
3
2
8
12
3
3
4
3
9
12
6
19
12
7
7
12
=
=
=
=
2. (A) 61 60
12
12
45
5
12
45
5
12
15
7
12
=
=
3. (C)
65
2
26
5
13 13
169 ⋅ =
4. (A) 17
1
2
70
35
2
70
2
1
4
2
÷ = ÷ = ⋅ =
35 1
70
5. (E)
7
4
12
1
5
42
3
6
2
⋅ ⋅ = =
5
2
2
1
2
Exercise 5
1. (C)
2
5
6
15
1
3
5
15
= =
2. (A) To compare (A), (B), (C), and (D), use a
common denominator of 24.
3
4
18
24
5
6
20
24
7
8
21
24
19
24
= = =
Of these,
3
4
is the smallest. To compare
3
4
with
13
15
, use cross products. Since (3)(15) <
(4)(14),
3
4
13
15
< . Therefore, (A) is the smallest.
3. (D) To compare (A), (B), (D), and (E), use a
common denominator of 20.
3
5
12
20
7
10
14
20
3
4
15
20
13
20
= = =
Of these,
3
4
is the largest. To compare
3
4
with
5
8
, use cross products. Since (3)(8) > (4)(5),
3
4
is the larger fraction.
4. (E) Use a common denominator of 24.
1
2
12
24
7
12
14
24
5
6
20
24
11
12
22
24
19
24
= = = =
Since
3
4
18
24
= , the answer closest to
3
4
is (E),
19
24
.
5. (D) Use a common denominator of 60.
5
12
25
60
8
15
32
60
11
20
33
60
31
60
7
15
28
60
= = =
=
Since
1
2
30
60
= , the answer closest to
1
2
is (D),
31
60
.
Operations with Fractions 37
www.petersons.com
Exercise 6
1. (A) Multiply every term of the fraction by 12.
8 2 3
8 6
13
2
+ +
−
=
2. (C) Multiply every term of the fraction by 12.
10 8
5 2
2
3
−
−
=
3. (B)
1
2
1
6
+
1
3
Multiply every term by 6.
3 2
1
5
+
=
4. (A)
1
2
1
3
1
6
1
2
1
3
1
6
= = =
2 3
6
5
6
+
=
5. (E)
7
3
11
2
+
10
3
Multiply every term by 6.
14
33 20
14
53 +
=
Retest
1. (B) Rename all fractions as sixtieths.
48
60
45
60
20
60
113
60
+ + =
2. (D)
11
15
11
15
1
15

2
3

10
15
= =
3. (D) The sum of the digits must be divisible by 9.
5 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 4 = 18, which is divisible by 9.
4. (E)
17
20
÷
34
15
17
20
15
34
1
4
3
2
3
8
⋅ =
5. (A)
100 99
3
3
62
2
3
62
2
3
37
1
3
=
= –
6. (B)
12
5
48
10
2
4
1
2
1
1
2
4
÷ = ⋅ = =
12
5
10
48
7. (B) Use a common denominator of 60.
7
12
35
60
8
15
32
60
11
20
33
60
5
6
50
60
2
3
40
60
= = = =
=
Of these,
8
15
is the smallest.
8. (A) Use a common denominator of 60.
4
15
16
60
3
10
18
60
3
20
9
60
1
5
12
60
1
10
6
60
= = = =
=
Since
1
4
15
60
= , the answer closest to
1
4
is
4
15
.
9. (A) Multiply every term of the fraction by 12.
30 8
9 10
38
19
2
+
+
= =
10. (C)
1
20
1
4
+
1
5
Multiply every term by 20.
1
5 4
1
9 +
=
39
3
Verbal Problems
Involving Fractions
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. On Monday evening, Channel 2 scheduled 2
hours of situation comedy, 1 hour of news, and
3 hours of movies. What part of the evening’s
programming was devoted to situation
comedy?
(A)
1
3
(B)
2
3
(C)
1
2
(D)
1
6
(E)
2
5
2. What part of a gallon is 2 qt. 1 pt.?
(A)
3
4
(B)
3
10
(C)
1
2
(D)
5
8
(E)
3
8
3. Michelle spent
1
2
of her summer vacation at
camp,
1
5
of her vacation babysitting, and
1
4
visiting her grandmother. What part of her
vacation was left to relax at home?
(A)
1
5
(B)
1
20
(C)
1
3
(D)
3
20
(E)
1
6
4. After doing
1
3
of the family laundry before
breakfast, Mrs. Strauss did
3
4
of the remainder
before lunch. What part of the laundry was left
for the afternoon?
(A)
1
2
(B)
1
4
(C)
2
3
(D)
1
5
(E)
1
6
Chapter 3 40
www.petersons.com
5. Glenn spent
2
5
of his allowance on a hit record.
He then spent
2
3
of the remainder on a gift.
What part of his allowance did he have left?
(A)
1
5
(B)
1
3
(C)
2
5
(D)
3
20
(E)
1
10
6. Barbara’s car has a gasoline tank that holds 20
gallons. When her gauge reads
1
4
full, how
many gallons are needed to fill the tank?
(A) 5
(B) 10
(C) 15
(D) 12
(E) 16
7. 42 seniors voted to hold the prom at the
Copacabana. This represents
2
9
of the senior
class. How many seniors did not vote for the
Copacabana?
(A) 147
(B) 101
(C) 189
(D) 105
(E) 126
8. Steve needs M hours to mow the lawn. After
working for X hours, what part of the job
remains to be done?
(A)
M X
M

(B) M
X
M

(C) M  X
(D) X  M
(E)
X
M
9. Of D dogs in Mrs. Pace’s kennel,
1
3
are
classified as large dogs and
1
4
of the remainder
are classified as mediumsized. How many of
the dogs are classified as small?
(A)
1
2
D
(B)
1
6
D
(C)
5
6
D
(D)
2
3
D
(E)
1
3
D
10. A bookshelf contains A autobiographies and B
biographies. What part of these books are
biographies?
(A)
B
A
(B)
B
A B +
(C)
A
A
B +
(D)
A
B
(E)
B
A
B 
Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 41
www.petersons.com
1. PART OF A WHOLE
A fraction represents a part of a whole. In dealing with fractional problems, we are usually dealing with a part of
a quantity.
Example:
Andrea and Danny ran for president of the Math Club. Andrea got 15 votes, while Danny got the
other 10. What part of the votes did Andrea receive?
Solution:
Andrea got 15 votes out of 25. That is
15
25
3
5
or of the votes.
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. In a class there are 18 boys and 12 girls. What
part of the class is girls?
(A)
2
3
(B)
3
5
(C)
2
5
(D)
1
15
(E)
3
2
2. A team played 40 games and lost 6. What part
of the games played did it win?
(A)
3
20
(B)
3
17
(C)
14
17
(D)
17
20
(E)
7
8
3. What part of an hour elapses between 3:45 p.m.
and 4:09 p.m.?
(A)
6
25
(B)
2
5
(C)
5
12
(D)
1
24
(E) 24
4. A camp employs 4 men, 6 women, 12 girls, and
8 boys. In the middle of the summer, 3 girls are
fired and replaced by women. What part of the
staff is then made up of women?
(A)
1
5
(B)
2
9
(C)
1
3
(D)
3
10
(E)
1
2
Chapter 3 42
www.petersons.com
5. There are three times as many seniors as
juniors at a high school JuniorSenior dance.
What part of the students present are juniors?
(A)
2
5
(B)
3
5
(C)
2
3
(D)
3
4
(E)
1
4
6. What part of a yard is 1 ft. 3 in.?
(A)
5
12
(B)
1
3
(C)
1
2
(D)
5
8
(E)
4
9
7. Manorville High had a meeting of the Student
Senate, which was attended by 10 freshmen, 8
sophomores, 15 juniors, and 7 seniors. What
part of the students present at the meeting were
sophomores?
(A)
1
4
(B)
5
8
(C)
7
40
(D)
1
5
(E)
1
3
8. The Dobkin family budgets its monthly income
as follows:
1
3
for food,
1
4
for rent,
1
10
for
clothing, and
1
5
for savings. What part is left
for other expenses?
(A)
3
7
(B)
1
6
(C)
7
60
(D)
2
15
(E)
3
20
Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 43
www.petersons.com
2. FINDING FRACTIONS OF FRACTIONS
Many problems require you to find a fractional part of a fractional part, such as
3
5
2
3
of . This involves multiply
ing the fractions together,
3
4
2
3
1
2
of is .
Example:
1
4
of the employees of Mr. Brown’s firm earn over $20,000 per year.
1
2
of the remainder earn
between $15,000 and $20,000. What part of the employees earns less than $15,000 per year?
Solution:
1
4
earn over $20,000.
1
2
3
4
3
8
of or earn between $15,000 and $20,000. That accounts for
1
4
3
8
5
8
+ or
of all employees. Therefore, the other
3
8
earn less than $15,000.
Example:
A full bottle of isopropyl alcohol is left open in the school laboratory. If
1
3
of the isopropyl alcohol
evaporates in the first 12 hours and
2
3
of the remainder evaporates in the second 12 hours, what part
of the bottle is full at the end of 24 hours?
Solution:
1
3
evaporates during the first 12 hours.
2
3
2
3
of or
4
9
evaporates during the second 12 hours. This
accounts for
7
9
of the isopropyl alcohol. Therefore,
2
9
of the bottle is still full.
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Mrs. Natt spent
2
3
of the family income one
year and divided the remainder between 4
different savings banks. If she put $2000 into
each bank, what was the amount of her family
income that year?
(A) $8000
(B) $16,000
(C) $24,000
(D) $32,000
(E) $6000
2. After selling
2
5
of the suits in his shop before
Christmas, Mr. Gross sold the remainder of the
suits at the same price per suit after Christmas
for $4500. What was the income from the
entire stock?
(A) $3000
(B) $7500
(C) $1800
(D) $2700
(E) $8000
Chapter 3 44
www.petersons.com
3. Of this year’s graduating seniors at South High,
9
10
will be going to college. Of these,
4
5
will
go to fouryear colleges, while the rest will be
going to twoyear colleges. What part of the
class will be going to twoyear colleges?
(A)
9
50
(B)
1
5
(C)
4
5
(D)
18
25
(E)
4
25
4. Sue and Judy drove from New York to San
Francisco, a distance of 3000 miles. They
covered
1
10
of the distance the first day and
2
9
of the remaining distance the second day. How
many miles were left to be driven?
(A) 600
(B) 2000
(C) 2400
(D) 2100
(E) 2700
5. 800 employees work for the Metropolitan
Transportation Company.
1
4
of these are
college graduates, while
5
6
of the remainder
are high school graduates. What part of the
employees never graduated from high school?
(A)
1
6
(B)
1
8
(C)
7
8
(D)
1
12
(E)
3
4
Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 45
www.petersons.com
3. FINDING WHOLE NUMBERS
When a fractional part of a number is given and we wish to find the number representing the whole, it is often
easiest to translate the words into mathematical symbols and solve the resulting equation.
Example:
Norman buys a used car for $2400, which is
2
5
of the original price. Find the original price.
Solution:
2400 =
2
5
x Multiply by 5.
12000 = 2x
$6000 = x
Example:
The gas gauge on Mary’s car reads
1
8
full. She asks the gasoline attendant to fill the tank and finds
she needs 21 gallons. What is the capacity of her gas tank?
Solution:
7
8
of the tank is empty and requires 21 gallons to fill.
7
8
x = 21 Multiply by 8.
7x = 168
x = 24
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Daniel spent $4.50 for a ticket to the movies. This
represents
3
4
of his allowance for the week. What
did he have left that week for other expenses?
(A) $6.00
(B) $4.00
(C) $3.39
(D) $1.13
(E) $1.50
2. 350 seniors attended the prom. This represents
7
9
of the class. How many seniors did not
attend the prom?
(A) 50
(B) 100
(C) 110
(D) 120
(E) 450
3. A resolution was passed by a ratio of 5:4. If
900 people voted for the resolution, how many
voted against it?
(A) 500
(B) 400
(C) 720
(D) 600
(E) 223
4. Mr. Rich owns
2
7
of a piece of property. If the
value of his share is $14,000, what is the total
value of the property?
(A) $70,000
(B) $49,000
(C) $98,000
(D) $10,000
(E) $35,000
5. The Stone family spends $500 per month for
rent. This is
4
15
of their total monthly income.
Assuming that salaries remain constant, what is
the Stone family income for one year?
(A) $1875
(B) $6000
(C) $60,000
(D) $22,500
(E) $16,000
Chapter 3 46
www.petersons.com
4. SOLVING WITH LETTERS
When problems use letters in place of numbers, the same principles discussed earlier apply. If you are not sure
which operations to use, replace the letters with numbers to determine the steps needed in the solution.
Example:
It takes Mr. Cohen X days to paint his house. If he works for D days, what part of his house must
still be painted?
Solution:
He has X  D days of painting left to do out of a total of X days; therefore,
X D
X

is the correct
answer.
Example:
Sue buys 500 stamps. X of these are 10cent stamps.
1
3
of the remainder are 15cent stamps. How
many 15cent stamps does she buy?
Solution:
She buys 500  X stamps that are not 10cents stamps.
1
3
of these are 15cent stamps. Therefore, she
buys
1
3
500  X ( ) or
500
3
 X
15cent stamps.
Example:
John spent $X on the latest hit record album. This represents
1
M
of his weekly allowance. What is
his weekly allowance?
Solution:
Translate the sentence into an algebraic equation.
Let A = weekly allowance
X =
1
M
·A Multiply by M.
MX = A
Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 47
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Mr. and Mrs. Feldman took t dollars in
travelers checks with them on a trip. During the
first week, they spent
1
5
of their money. During
the second week, they spent
1
3
of the
remainder. How much did they have left at the
end of the second week?
(A)
4
15
t
(B)
t
15
(C)
7
15
t
(D)
11
15
t
(E)
8
15
t
5. Frank’s gas tank was
1
4
full. After putting in G
gallons of gasoline, the tank was
7
8
full. What
was the capacity of the tank.
(A)
5
8
G
(B)
8
5
G
(C)
8
7
G
(D)
7
8
G
(E) 4G
1. A class contains B boys and G girls. What part
of the class is boys?
(A)
B
G
(B)
G
B
(C)
B
B G +
(D)
B G
B
+
(E)
B
B G 
2. M men agreed to rent a ski lodge for a total of D
dollars. By the time they signed the contract, the
price had increased by $100. Find the amount
each man had to contribute as his total share.
(A)
D
M
(B)
D
M
+100
(C)
D
M
+100
(D)
M
D
+100
(E)
M
D
+100
3. Of S students in Bryant High,
1
3
study French.
1
4
of the remainder study Italian. How many of
the students study Italian?
(A)
1
6
S
(B)
1
4
S
(C)
2
3
S
(D)
1
12
S
(E)
3
7
S
Chapter 3 48
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. After typing
1
4
of a term paper on Friday,
Richard completed
2
3
of the remainder on
Saturday. If he wanted to finish the paper that
weekend, what part was left to be typed on
Sunday?
(A)
1
4
(B)
2
3
(C)
1
3
(D)
1
2
(E)
5
6
5. What part of an hour elapses between
6:51 P.M. and 7:27 P.M.?
(A)
1
2
(B)
2
3
(C)
3
5
(D)
17
30
(E)
7
12
6. Laurie spent 8 hours reading a novel. If she
finished
2
5
of the book, how many more hours
will she need to read the rest of the book?
(A) 20
(B) 12
(C) 3
1
5
(D) 18
(E) 10
1. The All Star Appliance Shop sold 10
refrigerators, 8 ranges, 12 freezers, 12 washing
machines, and 8 clothes dryers during January.
Freezers made up what part of the appliances
sold in January?
(A)
12
50
(B)
12
25
(C)
1
2
(D)
12
40
(E)
12
60
2. What part of a day is 4 hours 20 minutes?
(A)
1
6
(B)
13
300
(C)
1
3
(D)
13
72
(E)
15
77
3. Mrs. Brown owns X books.
1
3
of these are
novels,
2
5
of the remainder are poetry, and the
rest are nonfiction. How many nonfiction books
does Mrs. Brown own?
(A)
4
15
X
(B)
2
5
X
(C)
2
3
X
(D)
3
5
X
(E)
7
15
X
Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 49
www.petersons.com
7. Mrs. Bach spent
2
7
of her weekly grocery
money on produce. If she spent $28 on
produce, what was her total grocery bill that
week?
(A) $70
(B) $80
(C) $56
(D) $90
(E) $98
8. After working on a new roof for X hours on
Saturday, Mr. Goldman finished the job by
working Y hours on Sunday. What part of the
total job was done on Sunday?
(A)
Y
X Y +
(B)
Y
X
(C)
X
X Y +
(D)
Y
X Y 
(E)
Y
Y X 
9.
1
2
of the women in the Spring Garden Club
are over 60 years old.
1
4
of the remainder are
under 40. What part of the membership is
between 40 and 60 years old?
(A)
1
4
(B)
3
8
(C)
3
4
(D)
1
8
(E)
5
8
10. A residential city block contains R onefamily
homes, S twofamily homes, and T apartment
houses. What part of the buildings on this block
is made up of one or two family houses?
(A)
R
T
S
T
+
(B)
RS
R S T + +
(C)
R S
R S T
+
+ +
(D)
R S
RST
+
(E) R + S
Chapter 3 50
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Exercise 1
1. (C) There are 30 pupils in the class, of which
12 are girls. Therefore,
12
30
2
5
or of the class is
made up of girls.
2. (D) The team won 34 games out of 40 or
34
40
of
its games. This simplifies to
17
20
.
3. (B) 24 minutes is
24
60
2
5
or of an hour.
4. (D) The number of staff members is still 30. Of
these, 9 are now women. Therefore
9
30
3
10
or
of the staff are women.
5. (E) Let x = the number of juniors at the dance.
3x = the number of seniors at the dance. Then
4x = the number of students at the dance. x out
of these 4x are juniors.
That is
x
x 4
1
4
or of the students present are
juniors.
6. (A) Change all measurements to inches. One
yard is 36 inches. 1 ft. 3 in. is 15 inches.
15
36
5
12
=
7. (D) There were 40 students at the meeting.
8
40
1
5
=
8. (C)
1
3
1
4
1
10
1
5
20
60
15
60
6
60
12
60
53
60
+ + + + + + = =
Therefore,
7
60
is left for other expenses.
Diagnostic Test
1. (A) There was a total of 6 hours of
programming time.
2
6
1
3
=
2. (D) Change all measurements to pints. One
gallon is 8 pints. 2 qt. 1 pt. = 5 pints =
5
8
gallon.
3. (B)
1
2
1
5
1
4
10
20
4
20
5
20
19
20
+ + + + = = . Therefore,
1
20
was left to relax.
4. (E)
3
4
2
3
1
2
of or of the laundry was done before
lunch. Since
1
3
was done before breakfast,
1
3
1
2
5
6
+ or was done before the afternoon,
leaving
1
6
for the afternoon.
5. (A)
2
3
3
5
of or
2
5
of Glenn’s allowance was
spent on a gift. Since
2
5
was spent on a hit
record,
2
5
2
5
4
5
+ or was spent, leaving
1
5
.
6. (C) The tank contained
1
4
20 ⋅ or 5 gallons,
leaving 15 gallons to fill the tank.
7. (C) 42
2
9
378 2
189
=
=
=
x
x
x
Multiply by 9. Divide by 2.
This is the number of seniors. Since 42 seniors
voted for the Copacabana, 147 did not.
8. (A) After working for X hours, M  X hours are
left out of a total of M hours.
9. (A)
1
3
D dogs are large.
1
4
of
2
3
or
1
6
D D are
medium. The total of these dogs is
1
3
1
6
D D + ,
leaving
1
2
D small dogs.
10. (B) There are A + B books. B out of A + B are
biographies.
Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 51
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (E) 4 50
3
4
18 00 3
.
.
=
=
x
x
Multiply by 4. Divide by 3.
x = $6.00, his allowance for the week. $6.00 
$4.50 = $1.50 left for other expenses.
2. (B)
350
7
9
3150 7
450
=
=
=
x
x
x
Multiply by 9. Divide by 7.
This is the number of students in the class. If
350 attend the prom, 100 do not.
3. (C)
5
9
of the voters voted for the resolution.
900
5
9
8100 5
1620
=
=
=
x
x
x
Multiply by 9. Divide by 5.
1620  900 = 720 voted against the resolution.
4. (B)
2
7
14 000
2 98 000
49 000
x
x
x
=
=
=
,
,
$ ,
Multiply by 7. Divide by 2.
5. (D)
4
15
500
4 7500
1875
x
x
x
=
=
= $
Multiply by 15. Divide by
4. This is their monthly
income.
Multiply by 12 to find yearly income: $22,500.
Exercise 2
1. (C) She put $8000 into savings banks.
800
1
3
24 000
=
=
x
x $ ,
Multiply by 3.
2. (B) 4500
3
5
7500
=
=
x
x $
Multiply by
5
3
.
3. (A) Since
4
5
9
10
of will go to fouryear
colleges,
1
5
9
10
9
50
of or will go to twoyear
colleges.
4. (D) They covered
1
10
3000 ⋅ or 300 miles the
first day, leaving 2700 miles still to drive. They
covered
2
9
2700 ⋅ or 600 miles the second day,
leaving 2100 miles still to drive.
5. (B)
5
6
3
4
5
8
of or are high school graduates.
Since
1
4
are college graduates,
1
4
5
8
7
8
+ or of
the employees graduated from high school,
leaving
1
8
who did not.
Chapter 3 52
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
1. (C) There are B + G students in the class. B out
of B + G are boys.
2. (C) The total cost is D + 100, which must be
divided by the number of men to find each
share. Since there are M men, each man must
contribute
D
M
+100
dollars.
3. (A)
1
3
S students study French.
1
4
2
3
1
6
of or S S
study Italian.
4. (E) They spent
1
5
t the first week. They spent
1
3
4
5
4
15
of or t t the second week. During these two
weeks they spent a total of
1
5
4
15
7
15
t t t + or ,
leaving
8
15
t .
5. (B) The G gallons fill
7
8
1
4
5
8
 or of the tank.
5
8
x G = Multiply by
8
5
.
x
G
=
8
5
Retest
1. (A) There were 50 appliances sold in January;
12
50
were freezers.
2. (D) Change all measurements to minutes. One
day is 60 · 24 or 1440 minutes. 4 hr. 20 min. =
260 min.
260
1440
13
72
=
3. (B)
1
3
X books are novels.
2
5
2
3
4
15
of or X X are
poetry. The total of these books is
1
3
4
15
9
15
X X X + or , leaving
6
15
2
5
X X or books
which are nonfiction.
4. (A)
2
3
3
4
1
2
of or of the term paper was
completed on Saturday. Since
1
4
was
completed on Friday,
1
4
1
2
3
4
+ or
was
completed before Sunday, leaving
1
4
to be
typed on Sunday.
5. (C) 36 minutes is
36
60
3
5
or of an hour.
6. (B) 8
2
5
40 2
20
=
=
=
x
x
x
Multiply by 5. Divide by 2.
This is the total number of hours needed to read
the book. Since Laurie already read for 8 hours,
she will need 12 more hours to finish the book.
7. (E)
2
7
28
2 196
98
x
x
x
=
=
= $
Multiply by 7. Divide by 2.
8. (A) Mr. Goldman worked a total of X + Y
hours. Y out of X + Y was done on Sunday.
9. (B)
1
4
1
2
1
8
of or are under 40. Since
1
2
1
8
5
8
+ or are over 60 or under 40,
3
8
are
between 40 and 60.
10. (C) There is a total of R + S + T buildings on
the block. R + S out of R + S + T are one or two
family houses.
53
4
Variation
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. Solve for x:
2
3
5
4
x x
=
+
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 4
1
2
(E) 5
2. Solve for x if a = 7, b = 8, c = 5:
a
x
b
c
– + 3 2
4
=
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
(E) 8
3. A map is drawn using a scale of 2 inches = 25
miles. How far apart in miles are two cities
which are 5
2
5
inches apart on the map?
(A) 60
(B) 65
(C) 67
1
2
(D) 69
(E) 70
4. How many apples can be bought for c cents if n
apples cost d cents?
(A)
nc
d
(B)
nd
c
(C)
cd
n
(D)
d
c
(E) nc
5. Ms. Dehn drove 7000 miles during the first 5
months of the year. At this rate, how many
miles will she drive in a full year?
(A) 16,000
(B) 16,800
(C) 14,800
(D) 15,000
(E) 16,400
6. A gear having 20 teeth turns at 30 revolutions
per minute and is meshed with another gear
having 25 teeth. At how many revolutions per
minute is the second gear turning?
(A) 35
(B) 37
1
2
(C) 22
1
2
(D) 30
(E) 24
7. A boy weighing 90 pounds sits 3 feet from the
fulcrum of a seesaw. His younger brother
weighs 50 pounds. How far on the other side of
the fulcrum should he sit to balance the
seesaw?
(A) 5
3
4
ft.
(B) 5
2
5
ft.
(C) 1
2
3
ft.
(D) 1
1
3
ft.
(E) 4
1
2
ft.
Chapter 4 54
www.petersons.com
8. Alan has enough dog food to last his two dogs
for three weeks. If a neighbor asks him to feed
her dog as well, how long will the dog food
last, assuming that all three dogs eat the same
amount?
(A) 10 days
(B) 12 days
(C) 14 days
(D) 16 days
(E) 18 days
9. A newspaper can be printed by m machines in h
hours. If 2 of the machines are not working,
how many hours will it take to print the paper?
(A)
mh h
m
 2
(B)
m
mh
 2
(C)
mh h
m
+ 2
(D)
mh
m 2
(E)
mh
m+ 2
10. An army platoon has enough rations to last 20
men for 6 days. If 4 more men join the group,
for how many fewer days will the rations last?
(A) 5
(B) 2
(C) 1
(D) 1.8
(E) 4
Variation 55
www.petersons.com
1. RATIO AND PROPORTION
A ratio is a comparison between two quantities. In making this comparison, both quantities must be expressed in
terms of the same units.
Example:
Express the ratio of 1 hour to 1 day.
Solution:
A day contains 24 hours. The ratio is
1
24
, which can also be written 1 : 24.
Example:
Find the ratio of the shaded portion to the unshaded portion.
Solution:
There are 5 squares shaded out of 9. The ratio of the shaded portion to unshaded portion is
5
4
.
A proportion is a statement of equality between two ratios. The denominator of the first fraction and the
numerator of the second are called the means of the proportion. The numerator of the first fraction and the
denominator of the second are called the extremes. In solving a proportion, we use the theorem that states the
product of the means is equal to the product of the extremes. We refer to this as cross multiplying.
Example:
Solve for x:
x x +
5
 3 8
6
=
Solution:
Cross multiply. 6 18 40 5
11 22
2
x x
x
x
+  =
=
=
Example:
Solve for x: 4 : x = 9 : 18
Solution:
Rewrite in fraction form.
4 9
18 x
=
Cross multiply. 9 72
8
x
x
=
=
If you observe that the second fraction is equal to
1
2
, then the first must also be equal to
1
2
. Therefore, the
missing denominator must be 8. Observation often saves valuable time.
Chapter 4 56
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Solve for x:
x +1
8
28
32
=
(A) 6
1
2
(B) 5
(C) 4
(D) 7
(E) 6
5. Solve for y:
2
9
1
3
y y
=

(A) 3
(B)
1
3
(C)
9
15
(D)
9
4
(E)
4
9
1. Find the ratio of 1 ft. 4 in. to 1 yd.
(A) 1 : 3
(B) 2 : 9
(C) 4 : 9
(D) 3 : 5
(E) 5 : 12
2. A team won 25 games in a 40 game season.
Find the ratio of games won to games lost.
(A)
5
8
(B)
3
8
(C)
3
5
(D)
5
3
(E)
3
2
3. In the proportion a : b = c : d, solve for d in
terms of a, b and c.
(A)
ac
b
(B)
bc
a
(C)
ab
c
(D)
a
bc
(E)
bc
d
Variation 57
www.petersons.com
2. DIRECT VARIATION
Two quantities are said to vary directly if they change in the same direction. As the first increases, the second
does also. As the first decreases, the second does also.
For example, the distance you travel at a constant rate varies directly as the time spent traveling. The number
of pounds of apples you buy varies directly as the amount of money you spend. The number of pounds of butter
you use in a cookie recipe varies directly as the number of cups of sugar you use.
Whenever two quantities vary directly, a problem can be solved using a proportion. We must be very careful to
compare quantities in the same order and in terms of the same units in both fractions. If we compare miles with
hours in the first fraction, we must compare miles with hours in the second fraction.
You must always be sure that as one quantity increases or decreases, the other changes in the same direction
before you try to solve using a proportion.
Example:
If 4 bottles of milk cost $2, how many bottles of milk can you buy for $8?
Solution:
The more milk you buy, the more it will cost. This is direct. We are comparing the number of
bottles with cost.
4
2 8
=
x
If we cross multiply, we get 2x = 32 or x = 16.
A shortcut in the above example would be to observe what change takes place in the denominator and apply the
same change to the numerator. The denominator of the left fraction was multiplied by 4 to give the denominator
of the right fraction. Therefore we multiply the numerator by 4 as well to maintain the equality. This method
often means a proportion can be solved at sight with no written computation at all, saving valuable time.
Example:
If b boys can deliver n newspapers in one hour, how many newspapers can c boys deliver in the
same time?
Solution:
The more boys, the more papers will be delivered. This is direct. We are comparing the number of
boys with the number of newspapers.
b
n
c
x
bx cn
x
cn
b
=
=
=
Cross multiply and solve for x.
Chapter 4 58
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Find the cost, in cents, of 8 books if 3 books of
the same kind cost D dollars.
(A)
8
3
D
(B)
3
800D
(C)
3
8D
(D)
800
3
D
(E)
108
3
D
2. On a map
1
2
inch = 10 miles. How many miles
apart are two towns that are 2
1
4
inches apart on
the map?
(A) 11
1
4
(B) 45
(C) 22
1
2
(D) 40
1
2
(E) 42
3. The toll on the Intercoastal Thruway is 8¢ for
every 5 miles traveled. What is the toll for a
trip of 115 miles on this road?
(A) $9.20
(B) $1.70
(C) $1.84
(D) $1.64
(E) $1.76
4. Mark’s car uses 20 gallons of gas to drive 425
miles. At this rate, approximately how many
gallons of gas will he need for a trip of 1000
miles?
(A) 44
(B) 45
(C) 46
(D) 47
(E) 49
5. If r planes can carry p passengers, how many
planes are needed to carry m passengers?
(A)
rm
p
(B)
rp
m
(C)
p
rm
(D)
pm
r
(E)
m
rp
Variation 59
www.petersons.com
3. INVERSE VARIATION
Two quantities are said to vary inversely if they change in opposite directions. As the first increases, the second
decreases. As the first decreases, the second increases.
Whenever two quantities vary inversely, their product remains constant. Instead of dividing one quantity by
the other and setting their quotients equal as we did in direct variation, we multiply one quantity by the other and
set the products equal.
There are several situations that are good examples of inverse variation.
A) The number of teeth in a meshed gear varies inversely as the number of revolutions it makes per minute. The
more teeth a gear has, the fewer revolutions it will make per minute. The less teeth it has, the more revolutions
it will make per minute. The product of the number of teeth and the revolutions per minute remains constant.
B) The distance a weight is placed from the fulcrum of a balanced lever varies inversely as its weight. The heavier
the object, the shorter must be its distance from the fulcrum. The lighter the object, the greater must be the
distance. The product of the weight of the object and its distance from the fulcrum remains constant.
C) When two pulleys are connected by a belt, the diameter of a pulley varies inversely as the number of
revolutions per minute. The larger the diameter, the smaller the number of revolutions per minute. The smaller
the diameter, the greater the number of revolutions per minute. The product of the diameter of a pulley and
the number of revolutions per minute remains constant.
D) The number of people hired to work on a job varies inversely as the time needed to complete the job. The more
people working, the less time it will take. The fewer people working, the longer it will take. The product of
the number of people and the time worked remains constant.
E) How long food, or any commodity, lasts varies inversely as the number of people who consume it. The more
people, the less time it will last. The fewer people, the longer it will last. The product of the number of people
and the time it will last remains constant.
Example:
If 3 men can paint a house in 2 days, how long will it take 2 men to do the same job?
Solution:
The fewer men, the more days. This is inverse.
3 2 2
6 2
3
⋅ = ⋅
=
=
x
x
x days
Chapter 4 60
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Two boys weighing 60 pounds and 80 pounds
balance a seesaw. How many feet from the
fulcrum must the heavier boy sit if the lighter
boy is 8 feet from the fulcrum?
(A) 10
(B) 10
2
3
(C) 9
(D) 7
1
2
(E) 6
5. A gear with 20 teeth revolving at 200
revolutions per minute is meshed with a second
gear turning at 250 revolutions per minute.
How many teeth does this gear have?
(A) 16
(B) 25
(C) 15
(D) 10
(E) 24
1. A field can be plowed by 8 machines in 6
hours. If 3 machines are broken and cannot be
used, how many hours will it take to plow the
field?
(A) 12
(B) 9
3
5
(C) 3
3
4
(D) 4
(E) 16
2. Camp Starlight has enough milk to feed 90
children for 4 days. If 10 of the children do not
drink milk, how many days will the supply
last?
(A) 5
(B) 6
(C) 4
1
2
(D) 4
1
8
(E) 5
1
3
3. A pulley revolving at 200 revolutions per
minute has a diameter of 15 inches. It is belted
to a second pulley which revolves at 150
revolutions per minute. Find the diameter, in
inches, of the second pulley.
(A) 11.2
(B) 20
(C) 18
(D) 16.4
(E) 2
Variation 61
www.petersons.com
In solving variation problems, you must decide whether the two quantities involved change in the same direction,
in which case it is direct variation and should be solved by means of proportions. If the quantities change in
opposite directions, it is inverse variation, solved by means of constant products. In the following exercises,
decide carefully whether each is an example of direct or inverse variation.
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. A recipe calls for
3
4
lb. of butter and 18 oz. of
sugar. If only 10 oz. of butter are available,
how many ounces of sugar should be used?
(A) 13
1
2
(B) 23
(C) 24
(D) 14
(E) 15
5. If 3 kilometers are equal to 1.8 miles, how
many kilometers are equal to 100 miles?
(A) 60
(B) 166
2
3
(C) 540
(D) 150
1
2
(E) 160.4
1. A farmer has enough chicken feed to last 30
chickens for 4 days. If 10 more chickens are
added, how many days will the feed last?
(A) 3
(B) 1
1
3
(C) 12
(D) 2
2
3
(E) 5
1
3
2. At c cents per can, what is the cost of p cases of
soda if there are 12 cans in a case?
(A) 12cp
(B)
cp
12
(C)
12
cp
(D)
12p
c
(E)
12c
p
3. If m boys can put up a fence in d days, how
many days will it take to put up the fence if two
of the boys cannot participate?
(A)
d
–2
(B)
d m
m
( ) – 2
(C)
md
m– 2
(D)
m
md
– 2
(E)
m m
d
( ) – 2
Chapter 4 62
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
6. Ten boys agree to paint the gym in 5 days. If
five more boys join in before the work begins,
how many days should the painting take?
(A) 3
1
3
(B) 3
1
2
(C) 10
(D) 2
1
2
(E) 2
3
4
7. A weight of 120 pounds is placed five feet from
the fulcrum of a lever. How far from the
fulcrum should a 100 pound weight be placed
in order to balance the lever?
(A) 6 ft.
(B) 4
1
6
ft.
(C) 5
1
2
ft.
(D) 6
1
2
ft.
(E) 6
2
3
ft.
8. A photograph negative measures 1
7
8
inches by
2
1
2
inches. The printed picture is to have its
longer dimension be 4 inches. How long should
the shorter dimension be?
(A) 2
3
8
"
(B) 2
1
2
"
(C) 3″
(D) 3
1
8
"
(E) 3
3
8
"
1. Solve for x:
3
8
7
12
x x
=
+
(A)
7
28
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 2
3
4
(E) 1
2. Solve for x if a = 5, b = 8, and c = 3:
a
x
b
c
−
=
3 2
5
+
(A) 5
(B) 20
(C) 2
(D) 3
(E) 6
3. A map is drawn to a scale of
1
2
inch = 20
miles. How many miles apart are two cities that
are 3
1
4
inches apart on the map?
(A) 70
(B) 130
(C) 65
(D) 32
1
2
(E) 35
4. Mr. Weiss earned $12,000 during the first 5
months of the year. If his salary continues at
the same rate, what will his annual income be
that year?
(A) $60,000
(B) $28,000
(C) $27,000
(D) $30,000
(E) $28,800
5. How many pencils can be bought for D dollars
if n pencils cost c cents?
(A)
nD
c
(B)
nD
c 100
(C)
100D
nc
(D)
100nD
c
(E)
nc
D 100
Variation 63
www.petersons.com
10. How many gallons of paint must be purchased
to paint a room containing 820 square feet of
wall space, if one gallon covers 150 square
feet? (Any fraction must be rounded up.)
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
(E) 8
9. A gear with 60 teeth is meshed to a gear with
40 teeth. If the larger gear revolves at 20
revolutions per minute, how many revolutions
does the smaller gear make in a minute?
(A) 13
1
3
(B) 3
(C) 300
(D) 120
(E) 30
Chapter 4 64
www.petersons.com
6. (E) Number of teeth times speed remains
constant.
20 · 30 = x · 25
600 = 25x
x = 24
7. (B) Weight times distance from the fulcrum
remains constant.
90 · 3 = 50 · x
270 = 50x
x = 5
2
5
ft.
8. (C) The more dogs, the fewer days. This is
inverse variation.
2 · 3 = 3 · x
6 = 3x
x = 2 weeks = 14 days
9. (D) Number of machines times hours needed
remains constant.
m h m x
x
mh
m
⋅ = ⋅
=
( – )
–
2
2
10. (C) The more men, the fewer days. This is
inverse variation.
20 · 6 = 24 · x
120 = 24x
x = 5
The rations will last 1 day less.
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (B) 2x(4) = 3(x + 5)
8x = 3x + 15
5x = 15
x = 3
2. (E)
4
x
=
10
20
Cross multiply.
80 = 10x
x = 8
3. (C) We compare inches to miles.
2
25
5
2
5
=
x
Cross multiply.
2x = 135
x = 67
1
2
4. (A) We compare apples to cents.
x
c
n
d
dx nc
x
nc
d
=
=
=
Cross multiply.
5. (B) We compare miles to months.
5
7000
12
=
x
5x = 84,000
x = 16,800
Variation 65
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
1. (C) 1 ft. 4 in. = 16 in.
1 yd. = 36 in.
16
36
4
9
=
2. (D) The team won 25 games and lost 15.
25
15
5
3
=
3. (B)
a
b
c
d
= Cross multiply. Divide by a.
ad = bc
d =
bc
a
4. (E) 32(x + 1) = 28(8)
32x + 32 = 224
32x = 192
x = 6
5. (A) 9(y – 1) = 2y(3)
9y – 9 = 6y
3y = 9
y = 3
Exercise 2
1. (D) We compare books with cents. D dollars is
equivalent to 100D cents.
3
100
8
3 800
800
3
D x
x D
x
D
=
=
=
2. (B) We compare inches to miles.
1
2
10
2
1
4
1
2
22
1
2
45
=
=
=
x
x
x
Cross multiply. Multiply by 2.
3. (C) We compare cents to miles.
8
5 115
5 920
1 84
=
=
=
x
x
x $ .
Cross multiply.
4. (D) We compare gallons to miles.
20
425 1000
425 20 000
17 800
47
1
17
=
=
=
=
x
x
x
x
,
Cross multiply. To avoid
large numbers, divide
by 25.
5. (A) We compare planes to passengers.
r
p
x
m
px rm
x
rm
p
=
=
=
Cross multiply. Divide by p.
Chapter 4 66
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (B) Number of machines times hours needed
remains constant.
8 · 6 = 5 · x
48 = 5x
x = 9
3
5
2. (C) Number of children times days remains
constant.
90 · 4 = 80 · x
80x = 360
x = 4
1
2
3. (B) Diameter times speed remains constant.
15 · 200 = x · 150
3000 = 150x
x = 20
4. (E) Weight times distance from fulcrum
remains constant.
80 · x = 60 · 8
80x = 480
x = 6
5. (A) Number of teeth times speed remains
constant.
20 · 200 = x · 250
250x = 4000
x = 16
Exercise 4
1. (A) The more chickens, the fewer days. This is
inverse.
30 · 4 = 40 · x
40x = 120
x = 3
2. (A) The more cases, the more cents. This is
direct. We compare cents with cans. In p cases
there will be 12p cans.
c x
p
x cp
1 12
12
=
=
3. (C) The fewer boys, the more days. This is
inverse.
m d m x
md
m
x
⋅ = ⋅
=
( ) –
–
2
2
4. (E) The less butter, the less sugar. This is
direct. Change
3
4
lb. to 12 oz.
12
18
10
12 180
15
=
=
=
x
x
x
5. (B) The more kilometers, the more miles. This
is direct.
3
1 8 100
1 8 300
18 3000
166
2
3
.
.
=
=
=
=
x
x
x
x
Variation 67
www.petersons.com
Retest
6. (A) The more boys, the fewer days. This is
inverse.
10 · 5 = 15 · x
15x = 50
x = 3
1
3
7. (A) Weight times distance from the fulcrum
remains constant.
120 · 5 = 100 · x
600 = 100x
x = 6 ft.
8. (C)
2
1
2
4
1
7
8
5
2
15
2
5 15
3
=
=
=
=
x
x
x
x "
Cross multiply. Multiply by 2.
9. (E) Number of teeth times speed remains
constant.
60 · 20 = 40 · x
1200 = 40x
x = 30
10. (C) We compare gallons to square feet.
x
x
820
1
150
150 820
=
=
Cross multiply.
x = 5.47, which means 6 gallons must be
purchased
1. (B) 3x(12) = 8(x + 7)
36x = 8x + 56
28x = 56
x = 2
2. (D)
2 10
15
30 10
3
x
x
x
=
=
=
Cross multiply.
3. (B) We compare inches to miles.
1
2
20
3
1
4
1
2
65
130
=
=
=
x
x
x
Cross multiply. Multiply by 2.
4. (E) We compare dollars to months.
12 000
5 12
144 000 5
28 800
,
,
$ ,
=
=
=
x
x
x
Cross multiply.
5. (D) We compare pencils to dollars. The cost of
n pencils is
c
100
dollars.
x
D
n
c
cx
nD
x
nD
c
=
=
=
100
100
100
Cross multiply.
Multiply by
100
c
.
69
5
Percent
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. Write as a fraction: 4.5%
(A)
9
2
(B)
9
20
(C)
9
200
(D)
9
2000
(E)
4 5
10
.
2. Write
2
5
% as a decimal.
(A) .40
(B) .04
(C) 40.0
(D) .004
(E) 4.00
3. What is 62
1
2
% of 80?
(A) 5000
(B) 500
(C) 50
(D) 5
(E) .5
4. Find 6% of b.
(A) .6b
(B) .06b
(C)
b
6
(D)
b
.06
(E)
100
6
b
5. 80 is 40% of what number?
(A) 3200
(B) 320
(C) 32
(D) 200
(E) 20
6. c is 83
1
3
% of what number?
(A)
5
6
c
(B)
6
5
c
(C)
7
8
c
(D)
8
7
c
(E)
2
3
c
7. How many sixteenths are there in 87
1
2
%?
(A) 7
(B) 8
(C) 10
(D) 12
(E) 14
8. What percent of 40 is 16?
(A) 2
1
2
(B) 25
(C) 30
(D) 40
(E) 45
Chapter 5 70
www.petersons.com
9. Find 112% of 80.
(A) 92
(B) 89.6
(C) 88
(D) 70.5
(E) 91
10. What percent of 60 is 72?
(A) 105
(B) 125
(C) 120
(D) 83
1
3
(E) 110
Percent 71
www.petersons.com
1. FRACTIONAL AND DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS OF
PERCENTS
Percent means “out of 100.” If you understand this concept, it then becomes very easy to change a percent to an
equivalent decimal or fraction.
Example:
5% means 5 out of 100 or
5
100
, which is equal to .05
3.4% means 3.4 out of 100 or
3 4
100
.
, which is equivalent to
34
1000
or .034
c% means c out of 100 or
c
100
, which is equivalent to
1
100
⋅ c or .01c
1
4
% means
1
4
out of 100 or
1
4
100
, which is equivalent to
1
100
25 ⋅. or .0025
To change a percent to a decimal, therefore, we must move the decimal point two places to the left, as we are
dividing by 100.
Example:
62% = .62
.4% = .004
3.2% = .032
To change a decimal to a percent, we must reverse the above steps. We multiply by 100, which has the effect of
moving the decimal point two places to the right, and insert the percent sign.
Example:
.27 = 27%
.012 = 1.2%
.003 = .3%
To change a percent to a fraction, we remove the percent sign and divide by 100. This has the effect of putting the
percent over 100 and then simplifying the resulting fraction.
Example:
25
25
100
1
4
70
70
100
7
10
5
5
100
5
1000
1
2
%
%
. %
.
= =
= =
= = =
000
To change a fraction to a percent, we must reverse the above steps. We multiply by 100 and insert the percent
sign.
Example:
4
5
4
5
80
3
8
3
8
75
2
37
1
2
20
2
25
=
/
⋅ =
=
/
⋅ = =
100
100
% %
% % %
Chapter 5 72
www.petersons.com
Some fractions do not convert easily, as the denominator does not divide into 100. Such fractions must be changed
to decimals first by dividing the numerator by the denominator. Then convert the decimal to a percent as explained
on the previous page. Divide to two places only, unless it clearly comes out even in one or two additional places.
Example:
)
8
17
17 8 00
47
47
1
17
6 8
1 20
1 19
1
= = .
.
% )
4
125
125 4 000
032
3 2
3 75
250
250
= = .
.
. %
Certain fractional and decimal equivalents of common percents occur frequently enough so that they should be
memorized. Learning the values in the following table will make your work with percent problems much easier.
PERCENT DECIMAL FRACTION
50% .5
1
2
25% .25
1
4
75% .75
3
4
10% .1
1
10
30% .3
3
10
70% .7
7
10
90% .9
9
10
33
1
3
%
.33
1
3
66
2
3
%
.66
2
3
16
2
3
%
.16
1
6
83
1
3
%
.83
5
6
20% .2
1
5
40% .4
2
5
60% .6
3
5
80% .8
4
5
12
1
2
% .125
1
8
37
1
2
% .375
3
8
62
1
2
% .625
5
8
87
1
2
% .875
7
8
Percent 73
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. 3
1
2
% may be written as a decimal as
(A) 3.5
(B) .35
(C) .035
(D) .0035
(E) 3.05
2. Write as a fraction in simplest form: 85%.
(A)
13
20
(B)
17
20
(C)
17
10
(D)
19
20
(E)
17
2
3. Write 4.6 as a percent.
(A) 4.6%
(B) .46%
(C) .046%
(D) 46%
(E) 460%
4. Write
5
12
as an equivalent percent.
(A) 41%
(B) 41.6%
(C) 41
2
3
%
(D) 4.1%
(E) .41
2
3
%
5. Write
1
2
% as a decimal.
(A) .5
(B) .005
(C) 5.0
(D) 50.0
(E) .05
Chapter 5 74
www.petersons.com
2. FINDING A PERCENT OF A NUMBER
Most percentage problems can be solved by using the proportion
%
100
=
part
whole
.
Although this method will work, it often yields unnecessarily large numbers that make for difficult computa
tion. As we look at different types of percent problems, we will compare methods of solution. In finding a percent
of a number, it is usually easier to change the percent to an equivalent decimal or fraction and multiply by the
given number.
Example:
Find 32% of 84.
Proportion Method Decimal Method
Change 32% to .32 and multiply.
32
100 84
100 2688
26 88
=
=
=
x
x
x .
84
32
168
252
26 88
× .
.
Example:
Find 12
1
2
% of 112.
Proportion Method Decimal Method Fraction Method
12
1
2
100 112
100 1400
14
=
=
=
x
x
x
112
125
560
2 24
11 2
14 000
× .
.
Change to
112
12
1
2
1
8
1
8
14
14
%
⋅ =
Which method do you think is the easiest? When the fractional equivalent of the required percent is among those
given in the previous chart, the fraction method is by far the least timeconsuming. It really pays to memorize
those fractional equivalents.
Percent 75
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. What is 40% of 40?
(A) .16
(B) 1.6
(C) 16
(D) 160
(E) 1600
2. What is 42% of 67?
(A) 2814
(B) 281.4
(C) 2.814
(D) .2814
(E) 28.14
3. Find 16
2
3
% of 120.
(A) 20
(B) 2
(C) 200
(D) 16
(E) 32
4. What is
1
5
% of 40?
(A) 8
(B) .8
(C) .08
(D) .008
(E) .0008
5. Find r% of s.
(A)
100s
r
(B)
rs
100
(C)
100r
s
(D)
r
s 100
(E)
s
r 100
Chapter 5 76
www.petersons.com
3. FINDING A NUMBER WHEN A PERCENT OF
IT IS GIVEN
This type of problem may be solved using the proportion method, although this may again result in the unneces
sary use of time. It is often easier to translate the words of such a problem into an algebraic statement, using
decimal or fractional equivalents for the percents involved. Then it will become evident that we divide the given
number by the given percent to solve.
Example:
7 is 5% of what number?
Proportion Method Equation Method
5
100
7
5 700
140
=
=
=
x
x
x
7 05
700 5
140
=
=
=
. x
x
x
Example:
40 is 66
2
3
% of what number?
Proportion Method Equation Method
66
2
3
100
40
66
2
3
4000
200
3
4000
200 12000
2
=
=
=
=
x
x
x
x
x ==
=
120
60 x
40
2
3
120 2
60
=
=
=
x
x
x
Just think of the amount of time you will save and the extra problems you will get to do if you know that 66
2
3
%
is
2
3
and use the equation method. Are you convinced that the common fraction equivalents in the previously
given chart should be memorized?
Percent 77
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. 72 is 12% of what number?
(A) 6
(B) 60
(C) 600
(D) 86.4
(E) 8.64
2. 80 is 12
1
2
% of what number?
(A) 10
(B) 100
(C) 64
(D) 640
(E) 6400
3. 37
1
2
% of what number is 27?
(A) 72
(B) 10
1
8
(C) 90
(D) 101.25
(E) 216
4. m is p% of what number?
(A)
mp
100
(B)
100p
m
(C)
m
p 100
(D)
p
m 100
(E)
100m
p
5. 50% of what number is r?
(A)
1
2
r
(B) 5r
(C) 10r
(D) 2r
(E) 100r
Chapter 5 78
www.petersons.com
4. TO FIND WHAT PERCENT ONE NUMBER IS OF
ANOTHER
This type of problem may also be solved using the proportion method. However, this may again result in the use
of an unnecessary amount of time. It is often easier to put the part over the whole, simplify the resulting fraction,
and multiply by 100.
Example:
30 is what percent of 1500?
Proportion Method Fraction Method
x
x
x
100
30
1500
1500 3000
2
=
=
= %
30
1500
3
150
1
50
100 2 = = ⋅ = %
Example:
12 is what percent of 72?
Proportion Method Fraction Method
x
x
100
12
72
72 1200
=
=
12
72
1
6
16
2
3
= = %
Time consuming long division is needed to find x = 16
2
3
%. If you have memorized the fractional equivalents
of common percents, this method requires only a few seconds.
Example:
What percent of 72 is 16?
Proportion Method Fraction Method
x
x
x
100
16
72
72 1600
22
2
9
=
=
= %
16
72
2
9
100
200
9
22
2
9
= ⋅ = = %
Percent 79
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. 4 is what percent of 80?
(A) 20
(B) 2
(C) 5
(D) .5
(E) 40
2.
1
2
of 6 is what percent of
1
4
of 60?
(A) 5
(B) 20
(C) 10
(D) 25
(E) 15
3. What percent of 96 is 12?
(A) 16
2
3
(B) 8
1
3
(C) 37
1
2
(D) 8
(E) 12
1
2
4. What percent of 48 is 48?
(A) 1
(B) 10
(C) 100
(D) 48
(E) 0
5. What percent of y is x?
(A)
x
y
(B)
x
y 100
(C)
xy
100
(D)
100x
y
(E)
100y
x
Chapter 5 80
www.petersons.com
5. PERCENTS GREATER THAN 100
When the percentage involved in a problem is greater than 100, the same methods apply. Remember that 100% =
1; 200% = 2; 300% = 3 and so forth. Therefore 150% will be equal to 100% + 50% or 1
1
2
. Let us look at one
example of each previously discussed problem, using percents greater than 100.
Example:
Find 175% of 60
Proportion Method Decimal Method Fraction Method
175
100 60
100 10500
105
=
=
=
x
x
x
60
300
4200
6000
105 00
× 1.75
.
1
3
4
60
7
4
105
15
⋅
⋅ = 60
Example:
80 is 125% of what number?
Proportion Method Decimal Method Fraction Method
125
100
80
125 8000
64
=
=
=
x
x
x
80 1 25
8000 125
64
=
=
=
. x
x
x
80 1
1
4
80
5
4
320 5
64
=
=
=
=
x
x
x
x
Example:
40 is what percent of 30?
Proportion Method Fraction Method
x
x
x
100
40
30
30 4000
133
1
3
=
=
= %
40
30
4
3
1
1
3
133
1
3
= = = %
Percent 81
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. 500 is 200% of what number?
(A) 250
(B) 1000
(C) 100
(D) 750
(E) 300
5. To multiply a number by 137
1
2
%, the number
should be multiplied by
(A) 137.5
(B) 13750
(C) 1.375
(D) 13.75
(E) .1375
1. 36 is 150% of what number?
(A) 24
(B) 54
(C) 26
(D) 12
(E) 48
2. What is 300% of 6?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 12
(D) 18
(E) 24
3. What percent of 90 is 120?
(A) 75
(B) 133
1
3
(C) 125
(D) 120
(E) 1
1
3
Chapter 5 82
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
6. m is 62
1
2
% of what number?
(A)
5
8
m
(B)
8
5
m
(C) 8m
(D)
5
8m
(E)
8
5m
7. What percent of 12 is 2?
(A) 600
(B) 12
1
2
(C) 16
2
3
(D) 6
2
3
(E) 6
8. What is 140% of 70?
(A) 9800
(B) 980
(C) .98
(D) 9.8
(E) 98
9. How many fifths are there in 280%?
(A) 28
(B) 1.4
(C) 14
(D) 56
(E) 2.8
10. What percent of 12 is 16?
(A) 133
1
3
(B) 125
(C) 75
(D) 80
(E) 1
1
4
1. Write as a fraction in lowest terms: .25%.
(A)
1
4
(B)
1
40
(C)
1
400
(D)
1
4000
(E)
1
25
2. Write
3
4
% as a decimal.
(A) .75
(B) 75.0
(C) .075
(D) .0075
(E) 7.5
3. Find 12% of 80.
(A) 10
(B) .96
(C) .096
(D) 960
(E) 9.6
4. 18 is 20% of what number?
(A) 3.6
(B) 90
(C) 72
(D) 21.6
(E) 108
5. What is b% of 6?
(A)
3
50
b
(B)
3
50b
(C)
50
3
b
(D)
50
3b
(E)
b
150
Percent 83
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (C) 4 5
4 5
100
45
1000
9
200
. %
.
= = =
2. (D)
2
5
4 004 % . % . = =
3. (C)
62
1
2
5
8
5
50
10
%= ⋅ =
8
80
4. (B) 6% = .06 .06 · b = .06b
5. (D) 80 = .40x Divide by .40.
200 = x
6. (B) 83
1
3
5
6
5
6
6 5
6
5
%=
=
=
=
c x
c x
c
x
Multiply by 6. Divide by 5.
7. (E) 87
1
2
7
8
14
16
%= =
8. (D)
16
40
2
5
40 = = %
9. (B) 112% = 1.12
1.12 · 80 = 89.6
10. (C)
72
60
6
5
120 = = %
Exercise 1
1. (C) 3
1
2
% = 3.5% = .035 To change a percent
to a decimal, move the decimal point two
places to the left.
2. (B) 85
85
100
17
20
%= =
3. (E) To change a decimal to a percent, move the
decimal point two places to the right.
4.6 = 460%
4. (C)
5 125
3
41
2
3
3
25
12
100 ⋅ = = %
To change a fraction to a percent, multiply
by 100.
5. (B)
1
2
% = .5% = .005
Exercise 2
1. (C) 40
2
5
2
16
8
%=
⋅ =
5
40
2. (E)
67
42
1 34
26 80
28 14
×.
.
3. (A) 16
2
3
1
6
%=
1
20
20
6
120 ⋅ =
4. (C)
1
5
2 002 % . % . = =
40
× .002
.0800
5. (B) r
r
r
s
rs
%=
⋅ =
100
100 100
Chapter 5 84
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
1. (A) 36 = 1
1
2
x
36 =
3
2
x
72 = 3x
x = 24
2. (D) 300% = 3
6 · 3 = 18
3. (B)
120
90
4
3
133
1
3
= = %
4. (A) 500 = 2x
250 = x
5. (C) 137.5% = 1.375
Retest
1. (C) .25% =
.
,
25
100
25
10 000
1
400
= =
2. (D)
3
4
% = .75% = .0075
3. (E) 12% = .12
.12 · 80 = 9.6
4. (B) 18 = .20x Divide by .20.
90 = x
5. (A) b% =
b b b
100
3
50
50
3
100
6 ⋅ =
6. (B) 62
1
2
5
8
5
8
8 5
8
5
%=
=
=
=
m x
m x
m
x
Multiply by 8.
Divide by 5.
7. (C)
2
12
1
6
16
2
3
= = %
8. (E) 140% = 1.40
1.40 · 70 = 98
9. (C) 280% =
280
100
28
10
14
5
= =
10. (A)
16
12
4
3
133
1
3
= = %
Exercise 3
1. (C) 72 = .12x
7200 = 12x
x = 600
2. (D) 80 =
1
8
x
640 = x
3. (A)
3
8
x = 27
3x = 216
x = 72
4. (E) m =
p
100
· x
100m = px
100m
p
= x
5. (D)
1
2
x = r
x = 2r
Exercise 4
1. (C)
4
80
1
5
5
= ⋅ =
20
100 %
2. (B)
1
2
6 3
1
4
60 15
3
15
1
5
20
of
of
=
=
= = %
3. (E)
12
96
1
8
12
1
2
= = %
4. (C)
48
48
1 100 = = %
5. (D)
x
y
x
y
⋅ = 100
100
85
6
Verbal Problems
Involving Percent
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. A book dealer bought 100 books for $1250. If
she sold 30% of these at $10 each and the rest
at $15 each, what was her total profit?
(A) $350
(B) $1350
(C) $300
(D) $1050
(E) $100
2. The Fishman family income for one month is
$2000. If 25% is spent for lodging, 35% for
food, 5% for clothing, and 10% for savings,
how many dollars are left for other expenses?
(A) $1500
(B) $400
(C) $500
(D) $1600
(E) $600
3. The enrollment of Kennedy High School
dropped from 1200 to 1000 over a threeyear
period. What was the percent of decrease
during this time?
(A) 20
(B) 16
2
3
(C) 25
(D) 200
(E) 2
4. A baseball team won 50 of the first 92 games
played in a season. If the season consists of 152
games, how many more games must the team
win to finish the season winning 62
1
2
% of
games played?
(A) 37
(B) 45
(C) 40
(D) 95
(E) 19
5. The Strauss Insurance Company laid off 20% of
its employees one year and then increased its
staff by 12
1
2
% the following year. If the firm
originally employed 120 workers, what was the
net change in staff over the twoyear period?
(A) Decrease of 12
(B) Increase of 15
(C) Decrease of 9
(D) Decrease of 24
(E) Increase of 12
6. How much money is saved by buying an article
priced at $80 with a 40% discount, rather than
buying an article marked at $90 with a discount
of 35% then 10%?
(A) $4.65
(B) $1.50
(C) $10.50
(D) $3.15
(E) $4.25
Chapter 6 86
www.petersons.com
7. In Central City, a property owner pays school
taxes at the rate of 2% of the first $1500 of
assessed valuation, 3% of the next $2000, 5%
of the next $3000, and 6% of the remainder.
How much must Mr. Williams pay in school
taxes each year if his home is assessed at
$8000?
(A) $300
(B) $230
(C) $600
(D) $330
(E) $195
8. Jeffrey delivers newspapers for a salary of $20
per week plus a 4% commission on all sales.
One week his sales amounted to $48. What was
his income that week?
(A) $19.20
(B) $21.92
(C) $1.92
(D) $39.20
(E) $32
9. At Baker High, 3 out of every 4 graduates go
on to college. Of these, 2 out of every 3
graduate from college. What percent of
students graduating from Baker High will
graduate from college?
(A) 66
2
3
(B) 75
(C) 50
(D) 33
1
3
(E) 25
10. The basic sticker price on Mr. Feldman’s new
car was $3200. The options he desired cost an
additional $1800. What percent of the total
price was made up of options?
(A) 56
1
4
(B) 36
(C) 64
(D) 18
(E) 9
Certain types of business situations are excellent applications of percent. Study the examples on the following
page carefully, as they are problems you will encounter in everyday life as well as on these examinations.
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 87
www.petersons.com
1. PERCENT OF INCREASE OR DECREASE
The percent of increase or decrease is found by putting the amount of increase or decrease over the original
amount and changing this fraction to a percent by multiplying by 100.
Example:
The number of automobiles sold by the Cadcoln Dealership increased from 300 one year to 400 the
following year. What was the percent of increase?
Solution:
There was an increase of 100, which must be compared to the original 300.
100
300
1
3
33
1
3
= = %
Example:
The Sunset School dismisses 20% of its staff of 150 due to budgetary problems. By what percent
must it now increase its staff to return to the previous level?
Solution:
20% =
1
5
1
5
· 150 = 30
The school now has 150 – 30 or 120 employees. To increase by 30, the percent of increase is
30
120
=
1
4
= 25%.
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Mrs. Morris receives a salary raise from $25,000
to $27,500. Find the percent of increase.
(A) 9
(B) 10
(C) 90
(D) 15
(E) 25
2. The population of Stormville has increased
from 80,000 to 100,000 in the last twenty years.
Find the percent of increase.
(A) 20
(B) 25
(C) 80
(D) 60
(E) 10
3. The value of Super Company Stock dropped
from $25 a share to $21 a share. Find the
percent of decrease.
(A) 4
(B) 8
(C) 12
(D) 16
(E) 20
4. The Rubins bought their home for $30,000 and
sold it for $60,000. What was the percent of
increase?
(A) 100
(B) 50
(C) 200
(D) 300
(E) 150
5. During the preholiday rush, Martin’s
Department Store increased its sales staff from
150 to 200 persons. By what percent must it
now decrease its sales staff to return to the
usual number of salespersons?
(A) 25
(B) 33
1
3
(C) 20
(D) 40
(E) 75
Chapter 6 88
www.petersons.com
2. DISCOUNT
A discount is usually expressed as a percent of the marked price, which will be deducted from the marked price
to determine the sale price. If an article is sold at a 20% discount, the buyer pays 80% of the marked price. Instead
of first finding the amount of discount by finding 20% of the marked price and subtracting to find the sale price,
it is shorter and easier to find 80% of the marked price directly.
Example:
A store offers a 25% discount on all appliances for paying cash. How much will a microwave oven
marked at $400 cost if payment is made in cash?
Solution:
We can find 25% or
1
4
of $400, which is $100, then subtract $100 from $400 to get a cash price of
$300. The danger in this method is that the amount of discount, $100, is sure to be among the
multiplechoice answers, as students often look for the first answer they get without bothering to
finish the problem. It is safer, and easier, to realize that a 25% discount means 75% must be paid.
75% =
3
4
and
3
4
of $400 is $300.
Some problems deal with successive discounts. In such cases, the first discount is figured on the marked price,
while the second discount is figured on the intermediate price.
Example:
Johnson’s Hardware Store is having a moving sale in which everything in the store is being marked
down 20% with an additional 5% discount for paying cash. What will be the net cost of a toaster,
paid with cash, marked at $25?
Solution:
The first discount is 20% or
1
5
. We then pay
4
5
of $25 or $20. An additional 5% is given off this
amount.
5
100
=
1
20
off.
19
20
· 20 = $19. The net price is $19.
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 89
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. How much is saved by buying a freezer marked
at $600 with a discount of 20% rather than one
marked at $600 with a discount of 10% then
10%?
(A) $6
(B) $8
(C) $10
(D) $12
(E) $20
2. Mr. Kaplan builds a home at a cost of $60,000.
After pricing the home for sale by adding 25%
of his expenses, he offers a discount of 20% to
encourage sales. What did he make on the
house?
(A) $15,000
(B) $1500
(C) $0
(D) $5000
(E) $1200
3. Christmas cards are sold after Christmas for 90
cents a box instead of $1.20 a box. The rate of
discount is
(A) 20%
(B) 25%
(C) 30%
(D) 33
1
3
%
(E) 40%
4. A television set listed at $160 is offered at a
12
1
2
% discount during a storewide sale. If an
additional 3% is allowed on the net price for
payment in cash, how much can Josh save by
buying this set during the sale for cash?
(A) $24.36
(B) $24.80
(C) $17.20
(D) $24.20
(E) $23.20
5. Pam pays $6 for a sweater after receiving a
discount of 25%. What was the marked price of
the sweater?
(A) $9
(B) $12
(C) $7
(D) $7.50
(E) $8
Chapter 6 90
www.petersons.com
3. COMMISSION
In order to inspire sales, many companies pay their salespeople a percentage of the money the salespeople bring
in. This is called a commission.
Example:
Mr. Silver sells shoes at the Emporium, where he is paid $100 per week plus a 5% commission on
all his sales. How much does he earn in a week in which his sales amount to $1840?
Solution:
Find 5% of $1840 and add this amount to $100.
1840
× .05
$92.00 + $100 = $192
Example:
Audrey sells telephone order merchandise for a cosmetics company. She keeps 12% of all money
collected. One month she was able to keep $108. How much did she forward to the cosmetics company?
Solution:
We must first find the total amount of her sales by asking: 108 is 12% of what number?
108 = .12x
10800 = 12x
900 = x
If Audrey collected $900 and kept $108, she sent the company $792.
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 91
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Janice receives a 6% commission for selling
newspaper advertisements. If she sells 15 ads
for $50 each, how much does she earn?
(A) $30
(B) $40
(C) $45
(D) $18
(E) $450
2. Michael sells appliances and receives a salary
of $125 per week plus a 5% commission on all
sales over $750. How much does he earn in a
week in which his sales amount to $2130?
(A) $69
(B) $294
(C) $106.50
(D) $194
(E) $162.50
3. Mr. Rosen receives a salary of $100 per month
plus a commission of 3% of his sales. What
was the amount of his sales in a month in
which he earned a total salary of $802?
(A) $23,500
(B) $23,400
(C) $7800
(D) $7900
(E) $7700
4. Bobby sent $27 to the newspaper dealer for
whom he delivers papers, after deducting his
10% commission. How many papers did he
deliver if they sell for 20 cents each?
(A) 150
(B) 135
(C) 600
(D) 160
(E) 540
5. Mrs. Mitherz wishes to sell her home. She must
pay the real estate agent who makes the sale
8% of the selling price. At what price must she
sell her home if she wishes to net $73,600?
(A) $79,488
(B) $75,000
(C) $80,000
(D) $82,400
(E) $84,322
Chapter 6 92
www.petersons.com
4. PROFIT AND LOSS
When a merchant purchases an item, he adds a percent of this cost to what he paid to arrive at a selling price. This
amount is called his profit.
Example:
A radio sells for $40, giving the dealer a 25% profit. What was his cost?
Solution:
If the dealer gets back all of his cost plus an extra 25%, then the $40 sales price represents 125% of
his cost.
1.25x = 40
125x = 4000
x = $32
Example:
Joan’s Boutique usually sells a handbag for $80, which yields a 33
1
3
% profit. During a special sale,
the profit is cut to 10%. What is the sale price of the handbag?
Solution:
$80 represents 133
1
3
% of the cost.
4
3
x = 80
4x =240
x = 60
If the cost was $60 and the dealer wishes to add 10% for profit, he must add 10% of $60 or $6,
making the sale price $66.
If a merchant sells an article for less than his cost, he takes a loss. A loss is figured as a percent of his cost in the
same manner we figured a profit in the previous examples.
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 93
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. If a music store sells a clarinet at a profit of
20% based on the selling price, what percent is
made on the cost?
(A) 20
(B) 40
(C) 25
(D) 80
(E) none of these
5. Radio House paid $60 for a tape player. At
what price should it be offered for sale if the
store offers customers a 10% discount but still
wants to make a profit of 20% of the cost?
(A) $64.80
(B) $72
(C) $79.20
(D) $80
(E) $84.20
1. Steve buys a ticket to the opera. At the last
moment, he finds he cannot go and sells the
ticket to Judy for $10, which was a loss of
16
2
3
%. What was the original price of the
ticket?
(A) $8.33
(B) $16.66
(C) $12
(D) $11.66
(E) $15
2. Alice bought a bicycle for $120. After using it
for only a short time, she sold it to a bike store
at a 20% loss. How much money did the bike
store give Alice?
(A) $24
(B) $96
(C) $144
(D) $100
(E) $108
3. Julie’s Dress Shop sold a gown for $150,
thereby making a 25% profit. What was the
cost of the gown to the dress shop?
(A) $120
(B) $112.50
(C) $117.50
(D) $187.50
(E) $125
Chapter 6 94
www.petersons.com
5. TAXES
Taxes are a percent of money spent, money earned, or value.
Example:
Broome County has a 4% sales tax on appliances. How much will Mrs. Steinberg have to pay for a
new dryer marked at $240?
Solution:
Find 4% of $240 to figure the tax and add this amount to $240. This can be done in one step by
finding 104% of $240.
240
× 1.04
960
24000
$249.60
Example:
The Social Security tax is 7
1
4
%. How much must Mrs. Grossman pay in a year if her salary is
$2000 per month?
Solution:
Her annual salary is 12(2000) or $24,000. Find 7
1
4
% of $24,000.
24,000
× .0725
12 0000
48 0000
1680 0000
$1740.0000
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 95
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Eric pays r% tax on an article marked at s
dollars. How many dollars tax does he pay?
(A)
s
r 100
(B) rs
(C)
100s
r
(D) 100rs
(E)
rs
100
5. The sales tax on luxury items is 8%. If Mrs.
Behr purchases a mink coat marked at $4000,
what will be the total price for the coat,
including tax?
(A) $320
(B) $4032
(C) $4320
(D) $4500
(E) $500
1. In Manorville, the current rate for school taxes
is 7.5% of property value. Find the tax on a
house assessed at $20,000.
(A) $150
(B) $1500
(C) $15,000
(D) $1250
(E) $105
2. The income tax in a certain state is figured at
2% of the first $1000, 3% of the next $2000,
4% of the next $3000, and 5% thereafter. Find
the tax on an income of $25,000.
(A) $1150
(B) $1015
(C) $295
(D) $280
(E) $187
3. The sales tax in Nassau County is 7%. If Mrs.
Gutman paid a total of $53.50 for new curtains,
what was the marked price of the curtains?
(A) $49.75
(B) $49
(C) $57.25
(D) $50
(E) $45.86
Chapter 6 96
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
6. How much money is saved by buying a car
priced at $6000 with a single discount of 15%
rather than buying the same car with a discount
of 10% then 5%?
(A) $51.30
(B) $30
(C) $780
(D) $87
(E) $900
7. At the Acme Cement Company, employees
contribute to a welfare fund at the rate of 4% of
the first $1000 earned, 3% of the next $1000,
2% of the next $1000, and 1% of any additional
income. What will Mr. Morris contribute in a
year in which he earns $20,000?
(A) $290
(B) $200
(C) $90
(D) $260
(E) $240
8. A salesman receives a commission of c% on a
sale of D dollars. Find his commission.
(A) cD
(B)
cD
100
(C) 100cD
(D)
c
D 100
(E)
100c
D
9. John buys a tape player for $54 after receiving
a discount of 10%. What was the marked price?
(A) $48.60
(B) $59.40
(C) $60
(D) $61.40
(E) $64
10. What single discount is equivalent to two
successive discounts of 15% and 10%?
(A) 25%
(B) 24.5%
(C) 24%
(D) 23.5%
(E) 23%
1. A TV sells for $121. What was the cost if the
profit is 10% of the cost?
(A) $110
(B) $108.90
(C) $120
(D) $116
(E) $111.11
2. Green’s Sport Shop offers its salespeople an
annual salary of $10,000 plus a 6% commission
on all sales above $20,000. Every employee
receives a Christmas bonus of $500. What are
Mr. Cahn’s total earnings in a year in which his
sales amounted to $160,000?
(A) $18,900
(B) $18,400
(C) $19,600
(D) $20,100
(E) $8900
3. A car dealer purchased 40 new cars at $6500
each. He sold 40% of them at $8000 each and
the rest at $9000 each. What was his total profit?
(A) $24,000
(B) $60,000
(C) $84,000
(D) $344,000
(E) $260,000
4. Mr. Adams’ income rose from $20,000 one
year to $23,000 the following year. What was
the percent of increase?
(A) 3%
(B) 12%
(C) 15%
(D) 13%
(E) 87%
5. The enrollment at Walden School is 1400. If
20% of the students study French, 25% study
Spanish, 10% study Italian, 15% study German,
and the rest study no language, how many
students do not study a language, assuming
each student may study only one language?
(A) 30
(B) 42
(C) 560
(D) 280
(E) 420
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 97
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
6. (A) 40% =
2
5
2
5
· 80 = $32 off
$48 net price
35% =
7
20
7
20
· 90 = $31.50 off
$58.50 net price
10% =
1
10
1
10
· 58.50 = $5.85 off
$52.65 net price
$52.65 – $48 = $4.65 was saved.
7. (D) 2% of $1500 = $30
3% of $2000 = $60
5% of $3000 = $150
6% of ($8000 – $6500)
= 6% of $1500 = $90
Total tax = $330
8. (B) He earns 4% of $48.
48
× .04
$1.92
Add this to his base salary of $20: $21.92.
9. (C)
2
3
3
4
1
2
2
⋅ =
= 50% of the students will
graduate from college.
10. (B) Total price is $5000.
Percent of total that was options =
1800
5000
=
9
25
= 36%
1. (E) 30% =
3
10
3
10
· 100 = 30 books at $10 each
= $300 in sales
100 – 30 = 70 books at $15 each
= $1050 in sales
Total sales $300 + $1050 = $1350
Total profit $1350 – $1250 = $100
2. (C) 25% + 35% + 5% + 10% = 75%
100% – 75% = 25% for other expenses
25% =
1
4
1
4
· $2000 = $500
3. (B) Amount of decrease = 200
Percent of decrease =
200
1200
=
1
6
= 16
2
3
%
4. (B) 62
1
2
% =
5
8
5
8
· 152 = 95 total wins needed
95 – 50 = 45 wins still needed
5. (A) 20% =
1
5
1
5
· 120 = 24 employees laid off
New number of employees = 96
12
1
2
% =
1
8
1
8
· 96 = 12 employees added to staff
Therefore, the final number of employees is
108. Net change is 120 – 108 = decrease of 12.
Chapter 6 98
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
1. (B) Amount of increase = $2500
Percent of increase = [amount of increase/
original]
2500
25000
=
1
10
= 10%
2. (B) Amount of increase = 20,000
Percent of increase =
20 000
80 000
,
,
=
1
4
= 25%
3. (D) Amount of decrease = $4
Percent of decrease =
4
25
=
16
100
= 16%
4. (A) Amount of increase $30,000
Percent of increase =
30 000
30 000
,
,
= 1 = 100%
5. (A) Amount of decrease = 50
Percent of decrease =
50
200
=
1
4
= 25%
Exercise 2
1. (A) 20% =
1
5
1
5
· 600 = $120 off
$480 net price
10% =
1
10
1
10
· 600 = $60 off
$540 first net price
1
10
· 540 = $54 off
$486 net price
Therefore, $6 is saved.
2. (C) 25% =
1
4
1
4
· 60,000 = $15,000 added cost
Original sale price = $75,000
20% =
1
5
1
5
· 75,000 = 15,000 discount
Final sale price $60,000
Therefore he made nothing on the sale.
3. (B) Discount = 30 cents. Rate of discount is
figured on the original price.
30
120
=
1
4
= 25%
4. (D) 12
1
2
% =
1
8
1
8
· 160 = $20 discount
New sale price = $140
3% =
3
100
3
100
· 140 =
420
100
= $4.20 second discount
$135.80 final sale price
Therefore, $160 – $135.80 or $24.20 was saved.
Note: The amount saved is also the sum of the
two discounts—$20 and $4.20.
5. (E) $6 is 75% of the marked price.
6 =
3
4
x
24 = 3x
x = $8
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 99
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (C) She sells 15 ads at $50 each for a total of
$750. She earns 6% of this amount.
750 × .06 = $45.00
2. (D) He earns 5% of ($2130  $750).
1380 × .05 = $69.00
Add this to his base salary of $125: $194.
3. (B) If his base salary was $100, his commission
amounted to $702. 702 is 3% of what?
702 = .03x
70,200 = 3x
$23,400 = x
4. (A) $27 is 90% of what he collected.
27 = .90x
270 = 9x
x = $30
If each paper sells for 20 cents, he sold
30 00
20
.
.
or 150 papers.
5. (C) $73,600 is 92% of the selling price.
73,600 = .92x
7,360,000 = 92x
$80,000 = x
Exercise 4
1. (C) 16
2
3
% =
1
6
$10 is
5
6
of the original price.
10 =
5
6
x
60 = 5x
x = 12
2. (B) The store gave Alice 80% of the price she
paid.
80% =
4
5
4
5
· 120 = $96
3. (A) $150 is 125% of the cost.
150 = 1.25x
15,000 = 125x
x = $120
4. (C) Work with an easy number such as $100
for the selling price.
20% =
1
5
1
5
· 100 = $20 profit, thereby
making the cost $80.
20
80
=
1
4
= 25%
5. (D) The dealer wishes to make 20% or
1
5
of
$60, which is $12 profit. The dealer wishes to
clear $60 + $12 or $72. $72 will be 90% of the
marked price.
72 = .90x
720 = 9x
x = $80
Chapter 6 100
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
1. (B) 20,000
× .075
100 000
1400 000
1500.000
2. (A) 2% of $1000 = $20
3% of $2000 = $60
4% of $3000 = $120
5% of ($25,000 – $6,000)
= 5% of $19,000 = $950
Total tax = $1150
3. (D) $53.50 is 107% of the marked price
53.50 = 1.07x
5350 = 107x
x = $50
4. (E) r% =
r
100
r
100
· s =
rs
100
5. (C) 4000
× .08
320.00 tax Total price $4320
Retest
1. (A) $121 is 110% of the cost.
121 = 1.10x
1210 = 11x
x = $110
2. (A) He earns 6% of ($160,000 – $20,000).
140,000
× .06
$8400.00
Add this to his base salary of $10,000 and his
Christmas bonus of $500: $18,900.
3. (C) 40% =
2
5
2
5
· 40 = 16 cars at $8000
each = $128,000 in sales
40 – 16 = 24 cars at
$9000 each
= $216,000 in sales
Total sales: $128,000 + $216,000 = $344,000
Total expense: $6500 · 40 = $260,000
Total profit: $344,000 – $260,000 = $84,000
4. (C) Amount of increase = $3000
Percent of increase =
3000
20 000 ,
=
3
20
= 15%
5. (E) 20% + 25% + 10% + 15% = 70%
100%  70% = 30% study no language
30% =
3
10
3
10
· 1400 = 420
6. (B) 15% =
3
20
3
20
· $6000 = $900 off
$5100 net price
10% =
1
10
1
10
· $6000 = $600 off
$5400 first net price
5% =
1
20
1
20
· 5400 = $270 off
$5130 net price
$5130 – $5100 = $30 was saved.
Verbal Problems Involving Percent 101
www.petersons.com
7. (D) 4% of $1000 = $40
3% of $1000 = $30
2% of $1000 = $20
1% of $17,000 = $170
Total contribution = $260
8. (B) c% =
c
100
c
100
· D =
cD
100
9. (C) $54 is 90% of the marked price.
54 =
9
10
x
540 = 9x
x = $60
10. (D) Work with an easy number such as $100.
15% =
3
20
3
20
· $100 = $15 off
$85 first net price
10% =
1
10
1
10
· $85 = $8.50 off
$76.50 net price
$100 – $76.50 = $23.50 total discount
23 50
100
.
= 23.5%
103
7
Averages
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. Find the average of the first ten positive even
integers.
(A) 9
(B) 10
(C) 11
(D) 12
(E) 5
1
2
2. What is the average of x – 4, x, and x + 4?
(A) 3x
(B) x
(C) x  1
(D) x + 1
(E)
3 8
3
x –
3. Find the average of .09 , .4, and
1
2
.
(A) .31
(B) .35
(C) .04
(D) .4
(E) .45
4. Valerie received test grades of 93 and 88 on her
first two French tests. What grade must she get
on the third test to have an average of 92?
(A) 95
(B) 100
(C) 94
(D) 96
(E) 92
5. The average of W and another number is A.
Find the other number.
(A) A – W
(B) A + W
(C)
1
2
(A – W)
(D)
1
2
(A + W)
(E) 2A – W
6. The weight of three packages are 4 lb. 10 oz.,
6 lb. 13 oz, and 3 lb. 6 oz. Find the average
weight of these packages.
(A) 4 lb. 43 oz.
(B) 4 lb. 7
1
2
oz.
(C) 4 lb. 15 oz.
(D) 4 lb. 6 oz.
(E) 4 lb. 12 oz.
7. If Barbara drove for 4 hours at 50 miles per
hour and then for 2 more hours at 60 miles per
hour, what was her average rate, in miles per
hour, for the entire trip?
(A) 55
(B) 53
1
3
(C) 56
2
3
(D) 53
(E) 54
1
2
Chapter 7 104
www.petersons.com
8. Mr. Maron employs three secretaries at a salary
of $140 per week and five salespeople at a
salary of $300 per week. What is the average
weekly salary paid to an employee?
(A) $55
(B) $190
(C) $240
(D) $200
(E) $185
9. Which of the following statements are always
true?
I. The average of any three consecutive
even integers is the middle integer.
II. The average of any three consecutive odd
integers is the middle integer.
III. The average of any three consecutive
multiples of 5 is the middle number.
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) I and II only
(D) I and III only
(E) I, II, and III
10. Mark has an average of 88 on his first four
math tests. What grade must he earn on his fifth
test in order to raise his average to 90?
(A) 92
(B) 94
(C) 96
(D) 98
(E) 100
Averages 105
www.petersons.com
1. SIMPLE AVERAGE
Most students are familiar with the method for finding an average and use this procedure frequently during the
school year. To find the average of n numbers, find the sum of all the numbers and divide this sum by n.
Example:
Find the average of 12, 17, and 61.
Solution:
12
17
61
3 90
30
+
)
When the numbers to be averaged form an evenly spaced series, the average is simply the middle number. If we
are finding the average of an even number of terms, there will be no middle number. In this case, the average is
halfway between the two middle numbers.
Example:
Find the average of the first 40 positive even integers.
Solution:
Since these 40 addends are evenly spaced, the average will be half way between the 20th and 21st
even integers. The 20th even integer is 40 (use your fingers to count if needed) and the 21st is 42, so
the average of the first 40 positive even integers that range from 2 to 80 is 41.
The above concept must be clearly understood as it would use up much too much time to add the 40 numbers and
divide by 40. Using the method described, it is no harder to find the average of 100 evenly spaced terms than it is
of 40 terms.
In finding averages, be sure the numbers being added are all of the same form or in terms of the same units. To
average fractions and decimals, they must all be written as fractions or all as decimals.
Example:
Find the average of 87
1
2
%,
1
4
, and .6
Solution:
Rewrite each number as a decimal before adding.
.
.
.
) .
.
875
25
6
3 1 725
575
+
Chapter 7 106
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Find the average of .49 ,
3
4
, and 80%.
(A) .72
(B) .75
(C) .78
(D) .075
(E) .073
2. Find the average of the first 5 positive integers
that end in 3.
(A) 3
(B) 13
(C) 18
(D) 23
(E) 28
3. The five men on a basketball team weigh 160,
185, 210, 200, and 195 pounds. Find the
average weight of these players.
(A) 190
(B) 192
(C) 195
(D) 198
(E) 180
4. Find the average of a, 2a, 3a, 4a, and 5a.
(A) 3a
5
(B) 3a
(C) 2.8a
(D) 2.8a
5
(E) 3
5. Find the average of
1
2
,
1
3
, and
1
4
.
(A)
1
9
(B)
13
36
(C)
1
27
(D)
13
12
(E)
1
3
Averages 107
www.petersons.com
2. TO FIND A MISSING NUMBER WHEN AN
AVERAGE IS GIVEN
In solving this type of problem, it is easiest to use an algebraic equation that applies the definition of average.
That is,
average =
sumof terms
number of terms
Example:
The average of four numbers is 26. If three of the numbers are 50, 12, and 28, find the fourth
number.
Solution:
50 12 28
4
26
50 12 28 104
90 104
14
+ + +
+ + +
+
x
x
x
x
=
=
=
=
An alternative method of solution is to realize that the number of units below 26 must balance the number of units
above 26. 50 is 24 units above 26. 12 is 14 units below 26. 28 is 2 units above 26. Therefore, we presently have
26 units (24 + 2) above 26 and only 14 units below 26. Therefore the missing number must be 12 units below 26,
making it 14. When the numbers are easy to work with, this method is usually the fastest. Just watch your
arithmetic.
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Dick’s average for his freshman year was 88,
his sophomore year was 94, and his junior year
was 91. What average must he have in his
senior year to leave high school with an
average of 92?
(A) 92
(B) 93
(C) 94
(D) 95
(E) 96
2. The average of X, Y, and another number is M.
Find the missing number.
(A) 3M – X + Y
(B) 3M – X – Y
(C)
M X Y + +
3
(D) M – X – Y
(E) M – X + Y
3. The average of two numbers is 2x. If one of the
numbers is x + 3, find the other number.
(A) x – 3
(B) 2x – 3
(C) 3x – 3
(D) –3
(E) 3x + 3
4. On consecutive days, the high temperature in
Great Neck was 86°, 82°, 90°, 92°, 80°, and 81°.
What was the high temperature on the seventh
day if the average high for the week was 84°?
(A) 79°
(B) 85°
(C) 81°
(D) 77°
(E) 76°
5. If the average of five consecutive integers is 17,
find the largest of these integers.
(A) 17
(B) 18
(C) 19
(D) 20
(E) 21
Chapter 7 108
www.petersons.com
3. WEIGHTED AVERAGE
When some numbers among terms to be averaged occur more than once, they must be given the appropriate
weight. For example, if a student received four grades of 80 and one of 90, his average would not be the average
of 80 and 90, but rather the average of 80, 80, 80, 80, and 90.
Example:
Mr. Martin drove for 6 hours at an average rate of 50 miles per hour and for 2 hours at an average
rate of 60 miles per hour. Find his average rate for the entire trip.
Solution:
6 50 2 60
8
300 120
8
420
8
52
1
2
( ) ( )
= = =
+
+
Since he drove many more hours at 50 miles per hour than at 60 miles per hour, his average rate should be closer
to 50 than to 60, which it is. In general, average rate can always be found by dividing the total distance covered
by the total time spent traveling.
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. In a certain gym class, 6 girls weigh 120
pounds each, 8 girls weigh 125 pounds each,
and 10 girls weigh 116 pounds each. What is
the average weight of these girls?
(A) 120
(B) 118
(C) 121
(D) 122
(E) 119
2. In driving from San Francisco to Los Angeles,
Arthur drove for three hours at 60 miles per hour
and for 4 hours at 55 miles per hour. What was his
average rate, in miles per hour, for the entire trip?
(A) 57.5
(B) 56.9
(C) 57.1
(D) 58.2
(E) 57.8
3. In the Linwood School, five teachers earn
$15,000 per year, three teachers earn $17,000 per
year, and one teacher earns $18,000 per year.
Find the average yearly salary of these teachers.
(A) $16,667
(B) $16,000
(C) $17,000
(D) $16,448
(E) $16,025
4. During the first four weeks of summer
vacation, Danny worked at a camp earning $50
per week. During the remaining six weeks of
vacation, he worked as a stock boy earning
$100 per week. What was his average weekly
wage for the summer?
(A) $80
(B) $75
(C) $87.50
(D) $83.33
(E) $82
5. If M students each received a grade of P on a
physics test and N students each received a
grade of Q, what was the average grade for this
group of students?
(A)
P Q
M N
+
+
(B)
PQ
M N +
(C)
MP NQ
M N
+
+
(D)
MP NQ
P Q
+
+
(E)
M N
P Q
+
+
Averages 109
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Find the average of the first 14 positive odd integers.
(A) 7.5
(B) 13
(C) 14
(D) 15
(E) 14.5
2. What is the average of 2x  3, x + 1, and 3x + 8?
(A) 6x + 6
(B) 2x  2
(C) 2x + 4
(D) 2x + 2
(E) 2x  4
3. Find the average of
1
5
, 25%, and .09.
(A)
2
3
(B) .18
(C) .32
(D) 20%
(E)
1
4
4. Andy received test grades of 75, 82, and 70 on
three French tests. What grade must he earn on
the fourth test to have an average of 80 on these
four tests?
(A) 90
(B) 93
(C) 94
(D) 89
(E) 96
5. The average of 2P, 3Q, and another number is S.
Represent the third number in terms of P, Q,
and S.
(A) S – 2P – 3Q
(B) S – 2P + 3Q
(C) 3S – 2P + 3Q
(D) 3S – 2P – 3Q
(E) S + 2P – 3Q
6. The students of South High spent a day on the
street collecting money to help cure birth defects.
In counting up the collections, they found that 10
cans contained $5.00 each, 14 cans contained
$6.50 each, and 6 cans contained $7.80 each.
Find the average amount contained in each of
these cans.
(A) $6.14
(B) $7.20
(C) $6.26
(D) $6.43
(E) $5.82
7. The heights of the five starters on the Princeton
basketball team are 6′ 6″, 6′ 7″, 6′ 9″, 6′ 11″,
and 7′. Find the average height of these men.
(A) 6′ 8
1
5
″
(B) 6′ 9″
(C) 6′ 9
3
5
″
(D) 6′ 9
1
5
″
(E) 6′ 9
1
2
″
8. Which of the following statements is always true?
I. The average of the first twenty odd
integers is 10.5
II. The average of the first ten positive
integers is 5.
III. The average of the first 4 positive
integers that end in 2 is 17.
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) III only
(D) I and III only
(E) I, II, and III
Chapter 7 110
www.petersons.com
9. Karen drove 40 miles into the country at 40
miles per hour and returned home by bus at 20
miles per hour. What was her average rate in
miles per hour for the round trip?
(A) 30
(B) 25
1
2
(C) 26
2
3
(D) 20
(E) 27
1
3
10. Mindy’s average monthly salary for the first
four months she worked was $300. What must
be her average monthly salary for each of the
next 8 months so that her average monthly
salary for the year is $350?
(A) $400
(B) $380
(C) $390
(D) $375
(E) $370
Averages 111
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (C) The integers are 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16,
18, 20. Since these are evenly spaced, the
average is the average of the two middle
numbers, 10 and 12, or 11.
2. (B) These numbers are evenly spaced, so the
average is the middle number x.
3. (D) . .
.
. .
) .
.
09 3
1
2
5
4 4
3 1 2
4
=
=
=
4. (A) 93 is 1 above 92; 88 is 4 below 92. So far,
she has 1 point above 92 and 4 points below 92.
Therefore, she needs another 3 points above 92,
making a required grade of 95.
5. (E)
W x +
2
= A
W + x = 2A
x = 2A – W
6. (C) 4 lb. 10 oz.
6 lb. 13 oz.
+ 3 lb. 6 oz.
13 lb. 29 oz.
13 29
3
12 45
3
lb oz. lb. oz. .
= = 4 lb. 15 oz.
7. (B) 4 50 200
2 60 120
6 320
53
1
3
( ) =
( ) =
)
8. (C)
3 140 420
5 300 1500
8 1920
240
( ) =
( ) =
)
9. (E) The average of any three numbers that are
evenly spaced is the middle number.
10. (D) Since 88 is 2 below 90, Mark is 8 points
below 90 after the first four tests. Thus, he
needs a 98 to make the required average of 90.
Exercise 1
1. (B) . .
.
% .
) .
.
49 7
3
4
75
80 80
3 2 25
75
=
=
=
2. (D) The integers are 3, 13, 23, 33, 43. Since
these are evenly spaced, the average is the
middle integer, 23.
3. (A) 160 + 185 + 210 + 200 + 195 = 950
950
5
= 190
4. (B) These numbers are evenly spaced, so the
average is the middle number, 3a.
5. (B)
1
2
1
3
1
4
6
12
4
12
3
12
13
12
+ + + + = =
To divide this sum by 3, multiply by
1
3
13
12
1
3
13
36
⋅ =
Chapter 7 112
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
1. (D) 88 is 4 below 92; 94 is 2 above 92; 91
is 1 below 92. So far, he has 5 points below
92 and only 2 above. Therefore, he needs
another 3 points above 92, making the
required grade 95.
2. (B)
X Y x + +
3
= M
X + Y + x = 3M
x = 3M – X – Y
3. (C)
x n
x
x n x
n x
+ +
+ +
–
3
2
2
3 4
3 3
( )
=
=
=
4. (D) 86°is 2 above the average of 84; 82°is 2
below; 90°is 6 above; 92°is 8 above; 80°is 4
below; and 81°is 3 below. So far, there are 16°
above and 9°below. Therefore, the missing
term is 7°below the average, or 77°.
5. (C) 17 must be the middle integer, since the
five integers are consecutive and the average is,
therefore, the middle number. The numbers are
15, 16, 17, 18, and 19.
Exercise 3
1. (A) 6 120 720
8 125 1000
10 116 1160
24 2880
120
( ) =
( ) =
( ) =
)
2. (C) 3 60 180
4 55 220
7 400
57
1
7
( ) =
( ) =
)
,
which is 57.1 to the nearest tenth.
3. (B) 5 15 000 75 000
3 17 000 51 000
1 18 000 1
, ,
, ,
,
( ) =
( ) =
( ) = 88 000
9 144 000
16 000
,
) ,
,
4. (A)
4 50 200
6 100 600
10 800
80
( ) =
( ) =
)
5. (C) M(P) = MP
N(Q) = NQ
MP + NQ
Divide by the number of students, M + N.
Averages 113
www.petersons.com
Retest
7. (B) 6′6″ + 6′7″ + 6′11″ + 6′9″ + 7′ = 31′33″ =
33′9″
33
6 9
′9″
5
′ ″ =
8. (C) I. The average of the first twenty positive
integers is 10.5.
II. The average of the first ten positive
integers is 5.5.
III. The first four positive integers that
end in 2 are 2, 12, 22, and 32. Their
average is 17.
9. (C) Karen drove for 1 hour into the country and
returned home by bus in 2 hours. Since the total
distance traveled was 80 miles, her average rate
for the round trip was
80
3
26
2
3
or miles per
hour.
10. (D) Since $300 is $50 below $350, Mindy’s
salary for the first four months is $200 below
$350. Therefore, her salary for each of the next
8 months must be
$200
8
or $25 above the
average of $350, thus making the required
salary $375.
1. (C) The integers are 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17,
19, 21, 23, 25, 27. Since these are evenly
spaced, the average is the average of the two
middle numbers 13 and 15, or 14.
2. (D)
2 3
1
3 8
6 6
6 6
3
2 2
x
x
x
x
x
x

+
+ +
+
+
+ =
3. (B)
1
5
20
25 25
09 09
3 54
18
=
=
=
.
% .
. .
).
.
4. (B) 75 is 5 below 80; 82 is 2 above 80; 70 is
10 below 80. So far, he is 15 points below and
2 points above 80. Therefore, he needs another
13 points above 80, or 93.
5. (D)
2 3
3
2 3 3
3 2 3
P Q x
S
P Q x S
x S P Q
+ +
+ +
–
=
=
= –
6. (C) 10 5 00 50
14 6 50 91
6 7 80 46 80
30
$ . $
$ . $
$ . $ .
( ) =
( ) =
( ) =
))$ .
$ .
187 80
6 26
115
8
Concepts of Algebra—Signed
Numbers and Equations
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. When +4 is added to –6, the sum is
(A) –10
(B) +10
(C) –24
(D) –2
(E) +2
2. The product of (–3)(+4)
–
1
2
–
1
3
is
(A) –1
(B) –2
(C) +2
(D) –6
(E) +6
3. When the product of (–12) and
+
1
4
is
divided by the product of (–18) and
–
1
3
, the
quotient is
(A) +2
(B) –2
(C) +
1
2
(D) –
1
2
(E) –
2
3
4. Solve for x: ax + b = cx + d
(A)
d b
ac
–
(B)
d b
a c
–
+
(C)
d b
a c
–
–
(D)
b d
ac
–
(E)
b d
a c
–
–
5. Solve for y: 7x – 2y = 2
3x + 4y = 30
(A) 2
(B) 6
(C) 1
(D) 11
(E) –4
6. Solve for x: x + y = a
x – y = b
(A) a + b
(B) a – b
(C)
1
2
(a + b)
(D)
1
2
ab
(E)
1
2
(a – b)
Chapter 8 116
www.petersons.com
7. Solve for x: 4x
2
– 2x = 0
(A)
1
2
only
(B) 0 only
(C) –
1
2
only
(D)
1
2
or 0
(E) –
1
2
or 0
8. Solve for x: x
2
– 4x – 21 = 0
(A) 7 or 3
(B) –7 or –3
(C) –7 or 3
(D) 7 or –3
(E) none of these
9. Solve for x: x +1 – 3 = –7
(A) 15
(B) 47
(C) 51
(D) 39
(E) no solution
10. Solve for x: x
2
7 + – 1 = x
(A) 9
(B) 3
(c) –3
(D) 2
(E) no solution
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 117
www.petersons.com
1. SIGNED NUMBERS
The rules for operations with signed numbers are basic to successful work in algebra. Be sure you know, and can
apply, the following rules.
Addition: To add numbers with the same sign, add the magnitudes of the numbers and keep the same sign. To
add numbers with different signs, subtract the magnitudes of the numbers and use the sign of the number with the
greater magnitude.
Example:
Add the following:
+ – – +
+ – + –
+ – + –
4 4 4 4
7 7 7 7
11 11 3 3
Subtraction: Change the sign of the number to be subtracted and proceed with the rules for addition. Remem
ber that subtracting is really adding the additive inverse.
Example:
Subtract the following:
+ – – +
+ – + –
– +3 –11 +11
4 4 4 4
7 7 7 7
3
Multiplication: If there is an odd number of negative factors, the product is negative. An even number of
negative factors gives a positive product.
Example:
Find the following products:
(+4)(+7) = +28 (–4)(–7) = +28
(+4)(–7) = –28 (–4)(+7) = –28
Division: If the signs are the same, the quotient is positive. If the signs are different, the quotient is negative.
Example:
Divide the following:
+
+
+
–
+
–
–
–
+
+
–
–
28
4
7
28
4
7
28
4
7
28
4
7
= =
= =
Chapter 8 118
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. At 8 a.m. the temperature was –4°. If the
temperature rose 7 degrees during the next
hour, what was the thermometer reading at
9 a.m.?
(A) +11°
(B) –11°
(C) +7°
(D) +3°
(E) –3°
2. In Asia, the highest point is Mount Everest,
with an altitude of 29,002 feet, while the lowest
point is the Dead Sea, 1286 feet below sea
level. What is the difference in their elevations?
(A) 27,716 feet
(B) 30,288 feet
(C) 28,284 feet
(D) 30,198 feet
(E) 27,284 feet
3. Find the product of (–6)( –4)( –4) and (–2).
(A) –16
(B) +16
(C) –192
(D) +192
(E) –98
4. The temperatures reported at hour intervals
on a winter evening were +4°, 0°, –1°, –5°,
and –8°. Find the average temperature for
these hours.
(A) –10°
(B) –2°
(C) +2°
(D) –2
1
2
°
(E) –3°
5. Evaluate the expression 5a – 4x – 3y if a = –2,
x = –10, and y = 5.
(A) +15
(B) +25
(C) –65
(D) –35
(E) +35
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 119
www.petersons.com
2. SOLUTION OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Equations are the basic tools of algebra. The techniques of solving an equation are not difficult. Whether an
equation involves numbers or only letters, the basic steps are the same.
1. If there are fractions or decimals, remove them by multiplication.
2. Remove any parentheses by using the distributive law.
3. Collect all terms containing the unknown for which you are solving on the same side of the equal sign.
Remember that whenever a term crosses the equal sign from one side of the equation to the other, it must pay
a toll. That is, it must change its sign.
4. Determine the coefficient of the unknown by combining similar terms or factoring when terms cannot be
combined.
5. Divide both sides of the equation by the coefficient.
Example:
Solve for x: 5x – 3 = 3x + 5
Solution:
2x = 8
x = 4
Example:
Solve for x:
2
3
x – 10 =
1
4
x + 15
Solution:
Multiply by 12. 8x – 120 = 3x + 180
5x = 300
x = 60
Example:
Solve for x: .3x + .15 = 1.65
Solution:
Multiply by 100. 30x + 15 = 165
30x = 150
x = 5
Example:
Solve for x: ax – r = bx – s
Solution:
ax – bx = r – s
x(a – b) = r – s
x =
r s
a b
–
–
Example:
Solve for x: 6x – 2 = 8(x – 2)
Solution:
6x – 2 = 8x – 16
14 = 2x
x = 7
Chapter 8 120
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Solve for x: 3x – 2 = 3 + 2x
(A) 1
(B) 5
(C) –1
(D) 6
(E) –5
2. Solve for a: 8 – 4(a – 1) = 2 + 3(4 – a)
(A) –
5
3
(B) –
7
3
(C) 1
(D) –2
(E) 2
3. Solve for y:
1
8
y + 6 =
1
4
y
(A) 48
(B) 14
(C) 6
(D) 1
(E) 2
4. Solve for x: .02(x – 2) = 1
(A) 2.5
(B) 52
(C) 1.5
(D) 51
(E) 6
5. Solve for x: 4(x – r) = 2x + 10r
(A) 7r
(B) 3r
(C) r
(D) 5.5r
(E) 2
1
3
r
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 121
www.petersons.com
3. SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS IN TWO UNKNOWNS
In solving equations with two unknowns, it is necessary to work with two equations simultaneously. The object
is to eliminate one of the unknowns, resulting in an equation with one unknown that can be solved by the methods
of the previous section. This can be done by multiplying one or both equations by suitable constants in order to
make the coefficients of one of the unknowns the same. Remember that multiplying all terms in an equation by
the same constant does not change its value. The unknown can then be removed by adding or subtracting the two
equations. When working with simultaneous equations, always be sure to have the terms containing the un
knowns on one side of the equation and the remaining terms on the other side.
Example:
Solve for x: 7x + 5y = 15
5x – 9y = 17
Solution:
Since we wish to solve for x, we would like to eliminate the y terms. This can be done by
multiplying the top equation by 9 and the bottom equation by 5. In doing this, both y coefficients
will have the same magnitude.
Multiplying the first by 9, we have
63x + 45y = 135
Multiplying the second by 5, we have
25x – 45y = 85
Since the y terms now have opposite signs, we can eliminate y by adding the two equations. If they
had the same signs, we would eliminate by subtracting the two equations.
Adding, we have
63x + 45y = 135
25x – 45y = 85
88x = 220
x =
220
88
= 2
1
2
Since we were only asked to solve for x, we stop here. If we were asked to solve for both x and y,
we would now substitute 2
1
2
for x in either equation and solve the resulting equation for y.
7(2.5) + 5y = 15
17.5 + 5y = 15
5y = –2.5
y = –.5 or –
1
2
Example:
Solve for x: ax + by = r
cx – dy = s
Solution:
Multiply the first equation by d and the second by b to eliminate the y terms by addition.
adx + bdy = dr
bcx – bdy = bs
adx + bcx = dr + bs
Factor out x to determine the coefficient of x.
x(ad + bc) = dr + bs
x =
dr bs
ad bc
+
+
Chapter 8 122
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Solve for x: x – 3y = 3
2x + 9y = 11
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
(E) 6
2. Solve for x: .6x + .2y = 2.2
.5x – .2y = 1.1
(A) 1
(B) 3
(C) 30
(D) 10
(E) 11
3. Solve for y: 2x + 3y = 12b
3x – y = 7b
(A) 7
1
7
b
(B) 2b
(C) 3b
(D) 1
2
7
(E) –b
4. If 2x = 3y and 5x + y = 34, find y.
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 6.5
(E) 10
5. If x + y = –1 and x – y = 3, find y.
(A) 1
(B) –2
(C) –1
(D) 2
(E) 0
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 123
www.petersons.com
4. QUADRATIC EQUATIONS
In solving quadratic equations, there will always be two roots, even though these roots may be equal. A complete
quadratic equation is of the form ax
2
+ bx + c = 0, where a, b, and c are integers. At the level of this examination,
ax
2
+ bx + c can always be factored. If b and/or c is equal to 0, we have an incomplete quadratic equation, which
can still be solved by factoring and will still have two roots.
Example:
x
2
+ 5x = 0
Solution:
Factor out a common factor of x.
x(x + 5) = 0
If the product of two factors is 0, either factor may be set equal to 0, giving x = 0 or x + 5 = 0.
From these two linear equations, we find the two roots of the given quadratic equation to be x = 0
and x = –5.
Example:
6x
2
– 8x = 0
Solution:
Factor out a common factor of 2x.
2x(3x – 4) = 0
Set each factor equal to 0 and solve the resulting linear equations for x.
2x = 0 3x – 4 = 0
x = 0 3x = 4
x =
4
3
The roots of the given quadratic are 0 and
4
3
.
Example:
x
2
– 9 = 0
Solution:
x
2
= 9
x = ± 3
Remember there must be two roots. This equation could also have been solved by factoring x
2
– 9
into (x + 3)(x – 3) and setting each factor equal to 0. Remember that the difference of two perfect
squares can always be factored, with one factor being the sum of the two square roots and the
second being the difference of the two square roots.
Example:
x
2
– 8 = 0
Solution:
Since 8 is not a perfect square, this cannot be solved by factoring.
x
2
= 8
x = ± 8
Simplifying the radical, we have 4 · 2 , or x = ±2 2
Chapter 8 124
www.petersons.com
Example:
16x
2
– 25 = 0
Solution:
Factoring, we have (4x – 5) (4x + 5) = 0
Setting each factor equal to 0, we have x = ±
5
4
If we had solved without factoring, we would have found 16x
2
= 25
x
2
=
25
16
x = ±
5
4
Example:
x
2
+ 6x + 8 = 0
Solution:
(x + 2)(x + 4) = 0
If the last term of the trinomial is positive, both binomial factors must have the same sign, since the
last two terms multiply to a positive product. If the middle term is also positive, both factors must be
positive since they also add to a positive sum. Setting each factor equal to 0, we have x = –4 or x = –2
Example:
x
2
– 2x – 15 = 0
Solution:
We are now looking for two numbers that multiply to –15; therefore they must have opposite signs.
To give –2 as a middle coefficient, the numbers must be –5 and +3.
(x – 5)(x + 3) = 0
This equation gives the roots 5 and –3.
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Solve for x: x
2
– 8x – 20 = 0
(A) 5 and –4
(B) 10 and –2
(C) –5 and 4
(D) –10 and –2
(E) –10 and 2
2. Solve for x: 25x
2
– 4 = 0
(A)
4
25
and –
4
25
(B)
2
5
and –
2
5
(C)
2
5
only
(D) –
2
5
only
(E) none of these
3. Solve for x: 6x
2
– 42x = 0
(A) 7 only
(B) –7 only
(C) 0 only
(D) 7 and 0
(E) –7 and 0
4. Solve for x: x
2
– 19x + 48 = 0
(A) 8 and 6
(B) 24 and 2
(C) –16 and –3
(D) 12 and 4
(E) none of these
5. Solve for x: 3x
2
= 81
(A) 9 3
(B) ±9 3
(C) 3 3
(D) ±3 3
(E) ±9
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 125
www.petersons.com
5. EQUATIONS CONTAINING RADICALS
In solving equations containing radicals, it is important to get the radical alone on one side of the equation. Then
square both sides to eliminate the radical sign. Solve the resulting equation. Remember that all solutions to
radical equations must be checked, as squaring both sides may sometimes result in extraneous roots. In squaring
each side of an equation, do not make the mistake of simply squaring each term. The entire side of the equation
must be multiplied by itself.
Example:
x – 3
= 4
Solution:
x – 3 = 16
x = 19
Checking, we have 16 = 4, which is true.
Example:
x – 3 = –4
Solution:
x – 3 = 16
x = 19
Checking, we have 16 = –4, which is not true, since the radical sign means the principal, or
positive, square root only. is 4, not –4; therefore, this equation has no solution.
Example:
x
2
7 – + 1 = x
Solution:
First get the radical alone on one side, then square.
x
2
7 – = x – 1
x
2
– 7 = x
2
– 2x + 1
– 7 = – 2x + 1
2x = 8
x = 4
Checking, we have 9 + 1 = 4
3 + 1 = 4,
which is true.
Chapter 8 126
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Solve for y: 26 = 3 2y + 8
(A) 6
(B) 18
(C) 3
(D) –6
(E) no solution
5. Solve for x:
2
5
x
= 4
(A) 10
(B) 20
(C) 30
(D) 40
(E) no solution
1. Solve for y: 2y + 11 = 15
(A) 4
(B) 2
(C) 8
(D) 1
(E) no solution
2. Solve for x: 4 2 1 x – = 12
(A) 18.5
(B) 4
(C) 10
(D) 5
(E) no solution
3. Solve for x: x
2
35 – = 5 – x
(A) 6
(B) –6
(C) 3
(D) –3
(E) no solution
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 127
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
6. Solve for x: 3x + 2y = 5a + b
4x – 3y = a + 7b
(A) a + b
(B) a – b
(C) 2a + b
(D) 17a + 17b
(E) 4a – 6b
7. Solve for x: 8x
2
+ 7x = 6x + 4x
2
(A) –
1
4
(B) 0 and
1
4
(C) 0
(D) 0 and –
1
4
(E) none of these
8. Solve for x: x
2
+ 9x – 36 = 0
(A) –12 and +3
(B) +12 and –3
(C) –12 and –3
(D) 12 and 3
(E) none of these
9. Solve for x: x
2
3 + = x + 1
(A) ±1
(B) 1
(C) –1
(D) 2
(E) no solution
10. Solve for x: 2 x = –10
(A) 25
(B) –25
(C) 5
(D) –5
(E) no solution
1. When –5 is subtracted from the sum of –3 and
+7, the result is
(A) +15
(B) –1
(C) –9
(D) +9
(E) +1
2. The product of
–
1
2
(–4)(+12)
–
1
6
is
(A) 2
(B) –2
(C) 4
(D) –4
(E) –12
3. When the sum of –4 and –5 is divided by the
product of 9 and –
1
27
, the result is
(A) –3
(B) +3
(C) –27
(D) +27
(E) –
1
3
4. Solve for x: 7b + 5d = 5x – 3b
(A) 2bd
(B) 2b + d
(C) 5b + d
(D) 3bd
(E) 2b
5. Solve for y: 2x + 3y = 7
3x – 2y = 4
(A) 6
(B) 5
4
5
(C) 2
(D) 1
(E) 5
1
3
Chapter 8 128
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
6. (C) Add the two equations.
x + y = a
x – y = b
2x = a + b
x =
1
2
(a + b)
7. (D) 2x(2x – 1) = 0
2x = 0 2x – 1 = 0
x = 0 or
1
2
8. (D) (x – 7)(x + 3) = 0
x – 7 = 0 x + 3 = 0
x = 7 or –3
9. (E) x +1 – 3 = –7
x +1
= –4
x + 1 = 16
x = 15
Checking, 16 – 3 = –7, which is not true.
10. (B) x
2
7 + – 1 = x
x
2
7 + = x + 1
x
2
+ 7 = x
2
+ 2x + 1
7 = 2x + 1
6 = 2x
x = 3
Checking, 16 – 1 = 3, which is true.
1. (D) (+4) + (–6) = –2
2. (B) An odd number of negative signs gives a
negative product.
( )( ) – +4 – –
2
3
1
2
1
3
= –2
3. (D) The product of (–12) and
+
1
4
is –3.
The product of (–18) and
–
1
3
is 6.
–
3
6
= –
1
2
4. (C) ax + b = cx + d
ax – cx = d – b
(a – c)x = d – b
x =
d b
a c
–
–
5. (B) Multiply the first equation by 3, the
second by 7, and subtract.
21x – 6y = 6
21x + 28y = 210
–34y = –204
y = 6
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 129
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
1. (D) (–4) + (+7) = +3
2. (B) (29,002) – (–1286) = 30,288
3. (D) An even number of negative signs gives a
positive product.
6 × 4 × 4 × 2 = 192
4. (B)
+ + + – + –5 + –8
–
4 0 1
5
10
5
( ) ( ) ( )
=
5. (A) 5(–2) – 4(–10) – 3(5) =
–10 + 40 – 15 =
+15
Exercise 2
1. (B) 3x – 2 = 3 + 2x
x = 5
2. (D) 8 – 4a + 4 = 2 + 12 – 3a
12 – 4a = 14 – 3a
–2 = a
3. (A) Multiply by 8 to clear fractions.
y + 48 = 2y
48 = y
4. (B) Multiply by 100 to clear decimals.
2(x – 2) = 100
2x – 4 = 100
2x = 104
x = 52
5. (A) 4x + 4r = 2x + 10r
2x = 14r
x = 7r
Chapter 8 130
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (C) Multiply first equation by 3, then add.
3x – 9y = 9
2x + 9y = 11
5x = 20
x = 4
2. (B) Multiply each equation by 10, then add.
6x + 2y = 22
5x – 2y = 11
11x = 33
x = 3
3. (B) Multiply first equation by 3, second by 2,
then subtract.
6x + 9y = 36b
6x – 2y = 14b
11y = 22b
y = 2b
4. (A) 2x – 3y = 0
5x + y = 34
Multiply first equation by 5, second by 2, and
subtract.
10x – 15y = 0
10x + 2y = 68
–17y = –68
y = 4
5. (B) Subtract equations.
x + y = –1
x – y = 3
2y = –4
y = –2
Exercise 4
1. (B) (x – 10) (x + 2) = 0
x – 10 = 0 x + 2 = 0
x = 10 or –2
2. (B) (5x – 2) (5x + 2) = 0
5x – 2 = 0 5x + 2 = 0
x =
2
5
or –
2
5
3. (D) 6x(x – 7) = 0
6x = 0 x – 7 = 0
x = 0 or 7
4. (E) (x – 16) (x – 3) = 0
x – 16 = 0 x – 3 = 0
x = 16 or 3
5. (D) x
2
= 27
x = ± 27
But 27 = 9 · 3 = 3 3
Therefore, x = ±3 3
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 131
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
1. (C)
2y
= 4
2y = 16
y = 8
Checking, 16 = 4, which is true.
2. (D) 4 2 1 x – = 12
2 1 x – = 3
2x – 1 = 9
2x = 10
x = 5
Checking, 4 9 = 12, which is true.
3. (E) x
2
– 35 = 25 – 10x + x
2
–35 = 25 – 10x
10x = 60
x = 6
Checking, 1 = 5 – 6, which is not true.
4. (B) 18 = 3 2y
6 = 2y
36 = 2y
y = 18
Checking 26 = 3 36 + 8,
26 = 3(6) + 8, which is true.
5. (D)
2
5
x
= 16
2x = 80
x = 40
Checking,
80
5
=
16
= 4, which is true.
Retest
1. (D) (–3) + (+7) – (–5) = (+9)
2. (D) An odd number of negative signs gives a
negative product.
– – + 2 –
1 2 1
2
4
6
2
( )( ) 1
= –4
3. (D) The sum of (–4) and (–5) is (–9). The
product of 9 and –
1
27
is –
1
3
.
–
–
9
1
3
= +27
4. (B) 7b + 5d = 5x – 3b
10b + 5d = 5x
x = 2b + d
5. (D) Multiply first equation by 3, second by 2,
then subtract.
6x + 9y = 21
6x – 4y = 8
13y = 13
y = 1
6. (A) Multiply first equation by 3, second by 2,
then add.
9x + 6y = 15a + 3b
8x – 6y = 2a + 14b
17x = 17a + 17b
x = a + b
Chapter 8 132
www.petersons.com
7. (D) 4x
2
+ x = 0
x(4x + 1) = 0
x = 0 4x + 1 = 0
x = 0 or –
1
4
8. (A) (x + 12)(x – 3) = 0
x + 12 = 0 x – 3 = 0
x = –12 or +3
9. (B)
x
2
3 +
= x + 1
x
2
+ 3 = x
2
+ 2x + 1
3 = 2x + 1
2 = 2x
x = 1
Checking, 4 = 1 + 1, which is true.
10. (E) 2 x = –10
x
= –5
x = 25
Checking, 2 25 = –10, which is not true.
133
9
Literal Expressions
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. If one book costs c dollars, what is the cost, in
dollars, of m books?
(A) m + c
(B)
m
c
(C)
c
m
(D) mc
(E)
mc
100
2. Represent the cost, in dollars, of k pounds of
apples at c cents per pound.
(A) kc
(B) 100kc
(C)
kc
100
(D) 100k + c
(E)
k
c
100
+
3. If p pencils cost c cents, what is the cost of one
pencil?
(A)
c
p
(B)
p
c
(C) pc
(D) p – c
(E) p + c
4. Express the number of miles covered by a train
in one hour if it covers r miles in h hours.
(A) rh
(B)
h
r
(C)
r
h
(D) r + h
(E) r – h
5. Express the number of minutes in h hours and
m minutes.
(A) mh
(B)
h
60
+ m
(C) 60(h + m)
(D)
h m +
60
(E) 60h + m
6. Express the number of seats in the school
auditorium if there are r rows with s seats each
and s rows with r seats each.
(A) 2rs
(B) 2r + 2s
(C) rs + 2
(D) 2r + s
(E) r + 2s
Chapter 9 134
www.petersons.com
7. How many dimes are there in n nickels and q
quarters?
(A) 10nq
(B)
n q +
10
(C)
1
2
5
2
n q +
(D) 10n + 10q
(E) 2
10
n
q
+
8. Roger rents a car at a cost of D dollars per day
plus c cents per mile. How many dollars must
he pay if he uses the car for 5 days and drives
1000 miles?
(A) 5D + 1000c
(B) 5D +
c
1000
(C) 5D + 100c
(D) 5D + 10c
(E) 5D + c
9. The cost of a longdistance telephone call is c
cents for the first three minutes and m cents for
each additional minute. Represent the price of a
call lasting d minutes if d is more than 3.
(A) c + md
(B) c + md – 3m
(C) c + md + 3m
(D) c + 3md
(E) cmd
10. The sales tax in Morgan County is m%. Represent
the total cost of an article priced at $D.
(A) D + mD
(B) D + 100mD
(C) D +
mD
100
(D) D +
m
100
(E) D + 100m
Literal Expressions 135
www.petersons.com
1. COMMUNICATING WITH LETTERS
Many students who have no trouble computing with numbers panic at the sight of letters. If you understand the
concepts of a problem in which numbers are given, you simply need to apply the same concepts to letters. The
computational processes are exactly the same. Just figure out what you would do if you had numbers and do
exactly the same thing with the given letters.
Example:
Express the number of inches in y yards, f feet, and i inches.
Solution:
We must change everything to inches and add. Since a yard contains 36 inches, y yards will contain
36y inches. Since a foot contains 12 inches, f feet will contain 12f inches. The total number of
inches is 36y + 12f + i.
Example:
Find the number of cents in 2x – 1 dimes.
Solution:
To change dimes to cents we must multiply by 10. Think that 7 dimes would be 7 times 10 or 70
cents. Therefore the number of cents in 2x – 1 dimes is 10(2x – 1) or 20x – 10.
Example:
Find the total cost of sending a telegram of w words if the charge is c cents for the first 15 words
and d cents for each additional word, if w is greater than 15.
Solution:
To the basic charge of c cents, we must add d for each word over 15. Therefore, we add d for (w –
15) words. The total charge is c + d(w – 15) or c + dw – 15d.
Example:
Kevin bought d dozen apples at c cents per apple and had 20 cents left. Represent the number of
cents he had before this purchase.
Solution:
In d dozen, there are 12d apples. 12d apples at c cents each cost 12dc cents. Adding this to the 20
cents he has left, we find he started with 12dc + 20 cents.
Chapter 9 136
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. How many quarters are equivalent to n nickels
and d dimes?
(A) 5n + 10d
(B) 25n + 50d
(C)
n d +
25
(D) 25n + 25d
(E)
n d + 2
5
5. A salesman earns a base salary of $100 per
week plus a 5% commission on all sales over
$500. Find his total earnings in a week in
which he sells r dollars worth of merchandise,
with r being greater than 500.
(A) 125 + .05r
(B) 75 + .05r
(C) 125r
(D) 100 + .05r
(E) 100 – .05r
1. Express the number of days in w weeks and
w days.
(A) 7w
2
(B) 8w
(C) 7w
(D) 7 + 2w
(E) w
2
2. The charge on the Newport Ferrry is D dollars
for the car and driver and m cents for each
additional passenger. Find the charge, in
dollars, for a car containing four people.
(A) D + .03m
(B) D + 3m
(C) D + 4m
(D) D + 300m
(E) D + 400m
3. If g gallons of gasoline cost m dollars, express
the cost of r gallons.
(A)
mr
g
(B)
rg
m
(C) rmg
(D)
mg
r
(E)
m
rg
Literal Expressions 137
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. In a group of m men, b men earn D dollars per
week and the rest earn half that amount each.
Represent the total number of dollars paid to
these men in a week.
(A) bD + b – m
(B)
1
2
D(b + m)
(C)
3
2
bD + mD
(D)
3
2
D(b + m)
(E) bD +
1
2
mD
5. Ken bought d dozen roses for r dollars.
Represent the cost of one rose.
(A)
r
d
(B)
d
r
(C)
12d
r
(D)
12r
d
(E)
r
d 12
6. The cost of mailing a package is c cents for the
first b ounces and d cents for each additional
ounce. Find the cost, in cents, for mailing a
package weighing f ounces if f is more than b.
(A) (c + d) (f – b)
(B) c + d (f – b)
(C) c + bd
(D) c + (d – b)
(E) b + (f – b)
7. Josh’s allowance is m cents per week. Represent
the number of dollars he gets in a year.
(A)
3
25
m
(B) 5200m
(C) 1200m
(D)
13
25
m
(E)
25
13
m
1. If a school consists of b boys, g girls, and t
teachers, represent the number of students in
each class if each class contains the same
number of students. (Assume that there is one
teacher per class.)
(A)
b g
t
+
(B) t(b + g)
(C)
b
t
+ g
(D) bt + g
(E)
bg
t
2. Represent the total cost, in cents, of b books at
D dollars each and r books at c cents each.
(A)
bD
100
+ rc
(B)
bD rc +
100
(C) 100bD + rc
(D) bD + 100rc
(E) bD
rc
+
100
3. Represent the number of feet in y yards, f feet,
and i inches.
(A)
y
3
+ f + 12i
(B)
y
f
i
3
+ +
12
(C) 3y + f + i
(D) 3y + f +
i
12
(E) 3y + f + 12i
Chapter 9 138
www.petersons.com
10. The cost for developing and printing a roll of
film is c cents for processing the roll and d
cents for each print. How much will it cost, in
cents, to develop and print a roll of film with 20
exposures?
(A) 20c + d
(B) 20(c + d)
(C) c + 20d
(D) c +
d
20
(E)
c d +
20
8. If it takes T tablespoons of coffee to make c
cups, how many tablespoons of coffee are
needed to make d cups?
(A)
Tc
d
(B)
T
dc
(C)
Td
c
(D)
d
Tc
(E)
cd
T
9. The charge for renting a rowboat on Loon Lake
is D dollars per hour plus c cents for each
minute into the next hour. How many dollars
will Mr. Wilson pay if he used a boat from 3:40
P.M. to 6:20 P.M.?
(A) D + 40c
(B) 2D + 40c
(C) 2D + 4c
(D) 2D + .4c
(E) D + .4c
Literal Expressions 139
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
6. (A) r rows with s seats each have a total of rs
seats. s rows with r seats each have a total of sr
seats. Therefore, the school auditorium has a
total of rs + sr or 2rs seats.
7. (C) In n nickels, there are 5n cents. In q
quarters, there are 25q cents. Altogether we
have 5n + 25q cents. To see how many dimes
this is, divide by 10.
5 25
10
5
2
1
2
5
2
n q n q
n q
+ +
+ = =
8. (D) The daily charge for 5 days at D dollars
per day is 5D dollars. The charge, in cents, for
1000 miles at c cents per mile is 1000c cents.
To change this to dollars, we divide by 100 and
get 10c dollars. Therefore, the total cost in
dollars is 5D + 10c.
9. (B) The cost for the first 3 minutes is c cents.
The number of additional minutes is (d – 3) and
the cost at m cents for each additional minute is
thus m(d – 3) or md – 3m. Therefore, the total
cost is c + md – 3m.
10. (C) The sales tax is
m
D
100
⋅
or
mD
100
.
Therefore, the total cost is D +
mD
100
.
1. (D) This can be solved by a proportion,
comparing books to dollars.
1
c
m
x
x mc
=
=
2. (C) The cost in cents of k pounds at c cents
per pound is kc. To convert this to dollars, we
divide by 100.
3. (A) This can be solved by a proportion,
comparing pencils to cents.
p
c x
x
c
p
=
=
1
4. (C) This can be solved by a proportion,
comparing miles to hours.
r
h
x
r
h
x
=
=
1
5. (E) There are 60 minutes in an hour. In h
hours there are 60h minutes. With m additional
minutes, the total is 60h + m.
Chapter 9 140
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
1. (B) There are 7 days in a week. w weeks
contain 7w days. With w additional days, the
total number of days is 8w.
2. (A) The charge is D dollars for car and driver.
The three additional persons pay m cents each,
for a total of 3m cents. To change this to dollars,
divide by 100, for a total of
3
100
m
dollars. This
can be written in decimal form as .03m. The
total charge in dollars is then D + .03m.
3. (A) This can be solved by a proportion,
comparing gallons to dollars.
g
m
r
x
gx mr
x
mr
g
=
=
=
4. (E) In n nickels, there are 5n cents. In d
dimes, there are 10d cents. Altogether, we have
5n + 10d cents. To see how many quarters this
gives, divide by 25.
5 10
25
2
5
n d n d + +
= , since a fraction can be
simplified when every term is divided by the
same factor, in this case 5.
5. (B) Commission is paid on (r – 500) dollars.
His commission is .05(r – 500) or .05r – 25.
When this is added to his base salary of 100,
we have 100 + .05r – 25, or 75 + .05r.
Retest
1. (A) The total number of boys and girls is b +
g. Since there are t teachers, and thus t classes,
the number of students in each class is
b g
t
+
.
2. (C) The cost, in dollars, of b books at D
dollars each is bD dollars. To change this to
cents, we multiply by 100 and get 100bD cents.
The cost of r books at c cents each is rc cents.
Therefore, the total cost, in cents, is 100bD + rc.
3. (D) In y yards there are 3y feet. In i inches
there are
i
12
feet. Therefore, the total number
of feet is 3y + f +
i
12
.
4. (B) The money earned by b men at D dollars
per week is bD dollars. The number of men
remaining is (m – b), and since they earn
1
2
D
dollars per week, the money they earn is
1
2
D(m – b) =
1
2
mD –
1
2
bD. Therefore, the
total amount earned is bD +
1
2
mD –
1
2
bD =
1
2
bD +
1
2
mD =
1
2
D(b + m).
5. (E) This can be solved by a proportion,
comparing roses to dollars. Since d dozen roses
equals 12d roses,
12 1
12
12
d
r x
d x r
x
r
d
=
⋅ =
=
Literal Expressions 141
www.petersons.com
6. (B) The cost for the first b ounces is c cents.
The number of additional ounces is (f – b), and
the cost at d cents for each additional ounce is
(f – b)d. Therefore, the total cost is c + d(f – b).
7. (D) Since there are 52 weeks in a year, his
allowance in cents is 52m. To change to dollars,
we divide by 100 and get
52
100
m
or
13
25
m
.
8. (C) This can be solved by a proportion
comparing tablespoons to cups.
T
c
x
d
cx Td
x
Td
c
=
=
=
9. (D) The amount of time from 3:40 P.M. to
6:20 P.M. is 2 hrs. 40 min. Therefore, the
charge at D dollars per hour and c cents per
minute into the next hour is 2D dollars + 40c
cents or 2D + .4c dollars.
10. (C) The cost for processing the roll is c cents.
The cost for printing 20 exposures at d cents
per print is 20d cents. Therefore, the total cost
is c + 20d.
143
10
Roots and Radicals
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. The sum of 75 and 12 is
(A) 87
(B) 7 3
(C) 3 5 3 2 +
(D) 29 3
(E) 3 3
2. The difference between 125 and 45 is
(A) 4 5
(B) 2 5
(C) 2
(D) 5 2
(E) 10
3. The product of 9x and 4x is
(A) 6 x
(B) 36 x
(C) 36x
(D) 6x
(E) 6x
2
4. If
2
16
x
= . , then x equals
(A) 50
(B) 5
(C) .5
(D) .05
(E) .005
5. The square root of 17,956 is exactly
(A) 132
(B) 133
(C) 134
(D) 135
(E) 137
6. The square root of 139.24 is exactly
(A) 1.18
(B) 11.8
(C) 118
(D) .118
(E) 1180
7. Find
x x
2 2
36 25
+ .
(A)
11
30
x
(B)
9
30
x
(C)
x
11
(D)
2
11
x
(E) x
61
30
8. x y
2 2
+ is equal to
(A) x + y
(B) x  y
(C) (x + y) (x  y)
(D) x y
2 2
+
(E) none of these
Chapter 10 144
www.petersons.com
9. Divide 8 12 by 2 3 .
(A) 16
(B) 9
(C) 8
(D) 12
(E) 96
10.
( ) 2
5
is equal to
(A) 2
(B)
2 2
(C) 4
(D)
4 2
(E) 8
Roots and Radicals 145
www.petersons.com
1. ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF RADICALS
The conditions under which radicals can be added or subtracted are much the same as the conditions for letters in
an algebraic expression. The radicals act as a label, or unit, and must therefore be exactly the same. In adding or
subtracting, we add or subtract the coefficients, or rational parts, and carry the radical along as a label, which
does not change.
Example:
2 + 3
2 +
+5
3
cannot be added
cannot be added 2
4 2 22 = 9 2
Often, when radicals to be added or subtracted are not the same, simplification of one or more radicals will make
them the same. To simplify a radical, we remove any perfect square factors from underneath the radical sign.
Example:
12 4 3 2 3
27 9 3 3 3
= ⋅ =
= ⋅ =
If we wish to add 12 27 + , we must first simplify each one. Adding the simplified radicals gives a sum of 5 3 .
Example:
125 20 500 + −
Solution:
25 5 4 5 100 5
5 5 5 10 5
3 5
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
=
+
+ 2
−
−
= −
Chapter 10 146
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Combine
1
2
180
1
3
45
2
5
20 ⋅ + ⋅ − ⋅
(A) 3 10 + 15 + 2 2
(B)
16
5
5
(C)
97
(D)
24
5
5
(E) none of these
5. Combine 5 3 2 mn mn mn − −
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) mn
(D) mn
(E) − mn
1. Combine 4 27 2 48 147 − +
(A) 27 3
(B) −3 3
(C) 9 3
(D) 10 3
(E) 11 3
2. Combine
80 45 20 + −
(A) 9 5
(B) 5 5
(C) − 5
(D) 3 5
(E) −2 5
3. Combine 6 5 2 4 + 3 + 2 − 5
(A) 8
(B) 2 5 + 3 2
(C) 2 5 + 4 2
(D) 5 7
(E) 5
Roots and Radicals 147
www.petersons.com
2. MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION OF RADICALS
In multiplication and division, we again treat the radicals as we would treat letters in an algebraic expression.
They are factors and must be treated as such.
Example:
2 3 6 ⋅ =
Example:
4 2 5 3 20 6 ⋅ = ⋅
Example:
( ) 3 2 3 2 3 2 9 2 18
2
= ⋅ = ⋅ =
Example:
8
2
4 2 = =
Example:
10 20
2 4
5 5 =
Example:
2 8 18 16 36 4 6 10 ( ) + + + = = =
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Multiply and simplify:
2 18 6 2 ⋅
(A) 72
(B) 48
(C) 12 6
(D) 8 6
(E) 36
2. Find 3 3
3
( )
(A) 27 3
(B) 81 3
(C) 81
(D) 9 3
(E) 243
3. Multiply and simplify:
1
2
2 6 2 ( ) +
1
2
(A) 3
1
2
+
(B)
1
2
3 ⋅
(C)
6 1 +
(D) 6
1
2
+
.
(E)
6 2 +
4. Divide and simplify:
32
8
3
b
b
(A) 2 b
(B) 2b
(C) 2b
(D)
2
2
b
(E) b b 2
5. Divide and simplify:
15 96
5 2
(A) 7 3
(B) 7 12
(C) 11 3
(D) 12 3
(E) 40 3
Chapter 10 148
www.petersons.com
3. SIMPLIFYING RADICALS CONTAINING A SUM
OR DIFFERENCE
In simplifying radicals that contain several terms under the radical sign, we must combine terms before taking the
square root.
Example:
16 9 25 5 + = =
It is not true that 16 9 16 9 + + = , which would be 4 + 3, or 7.
Example:
x x x x x x
2 2 2 2 2
16 25
25 16
400
9
400
3
20
−
−
= = =
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Simplify
x x
2 2
9 16
+
(A)
25
144
2
x
(B)
5
12
x
(C)
5
12
2
x
(D)
x
7
(E)
7
12
x
2. Simplify 36 64
2 2
y x +
(A) 6y + 8x
(B) 10xy
(C) 6y
2
+ 8x
2
(D) 10x
2
y
2
(E) cannot be done
3. Simplify
x x
2 2
64 100
−
(A)
x
40
(B) −
x
2
(C)
x
2
(D)
3
40
x
(E)
3
80
x
4. Simplify
y y
2 2
2 18
−
(A)
2
3
y
(B)
y
5
(C)
10
3
y
(D)
y 3
6
(E) cannot be done
5. a b
2 2
+ is equal to
(A) a + b
(B) a – b
(C) a b
2 2
+
(D) (a + b) (a  b)
(E) none of these
Roots and Radicals 149
www.petersons.com
4. FINDING THE SQUARE ROOT OF A NUMBER
In finding the square root of a number, the first step is to pair off the digits in the square root sign in each direction
from the decimal point. If there is an odd number of digits before the decimal point, insert a zero at the beginning
of the number in order to pair digits. If there is an odd number of digits after the decimal point, add a zero at the
end. It should be clearly understood that these zeros are place holders only and in no way change the value of the
number. Every pair of numbers in the radical sign gives one digit of the square root.
Example:
Find the number of digits in the square root of 328,329.
Solution:
Pair the numbers beginning at the decimal point.
32 83 29 .
Each pair will give one digit in the square root. Therefore the square root of 328,329 has three digits.
If we were asked to find the square root of 328,329, we would look among the multiplechoice answers for a
threedigit number. If there were more than one, we would have to use additional criteria for selection. Since our
number ends in 9, its square root must end in a digit that, when multiplied by itself, ends in 9. Going through the
digits from 0 to 9, this could be 3 (3 · 3 = 9) or 7 (7 · 7 = 49). Only one of these would appear among the choices,
as this examination will not call for extensive computation, but rather for sound mathematical reasoning.
Example:
The square root of 4624 is exactly
(A) 64
(B) 65
(C) 66
(D) 67
(E) 68
Solution:
Since all choices contain two digits, we must reason using the last digit. It must be a number that,
when multiplied by itself, will end in 4. Among the choices, the only possibility is 68 as 64
2
will
end in 6, 65
2
will end in 5, 66
2
in 6, and 67
2
in 9.
Chapter 10 150
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. The square root of 25.6036 is exactly
(A) 5.6
(B) 5.06
(C) 5.006
(D) 5.0006
(E) 5.00006
5. Which of the following square roots can be
found exactly?
(A)
.4
(B)
.9
(C)
.09
(D)
.02
(E)
.025
1. The square root of 17,689 is exactly
(A) 131
(B) 132
(C) 133
(D) 134
(E) 136
2. The number of digits in the square root of
64,048,009 is
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
(E) 8
3. The square root of 222.01 is exactly
(A) 14.3
(B) 14.4
(C) 14.6
(D) 14.8
(E) 14.9
Roots and Radicals 151
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
6. Find
a
b
a
b
2
2
2
2
+
(A)
a
b
2
2
(B)
a
b
(C)
2a
b
(D)
a
b
2
(E)
a
b
2
2
7. The square root of 213.16 is exactly
(A) 14.2
(B) 14.3
(C) 14.8
(D) 14.9
(E) 14.6
8. The number of digits in the square root of
14,161 is
(A) 5
(B) 4
(C) 3
(D) 2
(E) 6
9. ( ) 2 3
5
is equal to
(A) 32 3
(B) 288 3
(C) 10 3
(D) 90 3
(E) 16 3
10. Find
25
36
4
64 16
m
c d
(A)
5
6
2
8 4
m
c d
(B)
5
6
2
32 4
m
c d
(C)
5
6
2
32 8
m
c d
(D)
5
6
2
8 8
m
c d
(E)
5
6
16 4
m
c d
1. The sum of 2 8 4 50 , , and 3 18 is
(A) 33 6
(B) 9 76
(C) 33 2
(D) 135 6
(E) 136 2
2. The difference between
1
2
180 and
2
5
20 is
(A)
1
10
160
(B) 16
2
5
5
(C) 16
2
5
(D)
11
5
5
(E)
2
5
5
3. The product of
a x 2
and
x x 6
is
(A) 2 3
2
ax
(B) 12ax
3
(C)
( ) 2 3
2
ax
(D) 12ax
2
(E) 12ax
4. Divide 42 40
3 6
r t by 3 5
2
rt
(A) 56 2
2
rt
(B) 28 2 rt rt
(C) 28 2
2
rt
(D) 28 2 rt t
(E) 56 2 rt t
5. Solve for x:
3
09
x
= .
(A) 10
(B) 1
(C) .1
(D) .01
(E) 1.1
Chapter 10 152
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Exercise 1
1. (E)
4 27 4 9 3 12 3 = ⋅ =
2 48 2 16 3 8 3
147 49 3 7 3
12 3 8 3 7 3 11 3
= ⋅ =
= ⋅ =
= − +
2. (B)
80 16 5 4 5 = ⋅ =
45 9 5 3 5
20 4 5 2 5
4 5 5 5
= ⋅ =
= ⋅ =
= + 3 5 − 2 5
3. (C) Only terms with the same radical may be
combined.
6 5 4 5 2 5
3 2 4 2
−
+ 2
=
=
Therefore we have 2 5 4 2 +
4. (B)
1
2
180
1
2
36 5 3 5 ⋅ = ⋅ ⋅ =
1
3
45
1
3
9 5 5
2
5
20
2
5
4 5
4
5
5
3 5 5
4
5
5 4 5
⋅ = ⋅ ⋅ =
⋅ = ⋅ ⋅ =
+ − ⋅ = −
44
5
5
3
1
5
5
16
5
5 = =
5. (A) 5 5 0 mn mn − =
Diagnostic Test
1. (B)
75 25 3 5 3 = ⋅ =
12 4 3 2 3
5 3 7 3
= ⋅ =
= + 2 3
2. (B)
125 25 5 5 5 = ⋅ =
45 9 5 3 5
5 5 3 5 2 5
= ⋅ =
= −
3. (D)
9 4 36 6
2
x x x x ⋅ = =
4. (B)
. . 16 4 =
2
4
2 4
5
x
x
x
x
=
=
=
.
.
Multiply by .
5. (C) Since the last digit is 6, the square root
must end in 4 or 6.
6. (B) Since the number has two digits to the
right of the decimal point, its square root will
have one digit to the right of the decimal point.
7. (E)
25 36
900
61
900
61
30
2 2 2
x x x
x
+
= =
8. (E) It is not possible to find the square root of
separate terms.
9. (C)
8 12
2 3
4 4 4 2 8 = = ⋅ =
10. (D) ( )( ) 2 2 2 = . Therefore,
( ) ( ) 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ =
Roots and Radicals 153
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
1. (A) 2 18 6 2 12 36 12 6 72 ⋅ = = ⋅ =
2. (B) 3 3 3 3 3 3 27 3 3 81 3 ⋅ ⋅ = = ⋅ ( )
3. (A) Using the distributive law, we have
1
2
12 2
1
2
4 3 3 +
1
4
+
1
2
+
1
2
⋅ = ⋅ =
4. (C) Dividing the numbers in the radical sign,
we have 4 2
2
b b =
5. (D)
3 48 3 16 3 12 3 = ⋅ =
Exercise 3
1. (B)
16 9 25
144
5
12
2 2 2
x x x x +
144
= =
2. (E) The terms cannot be combined and it is
not possible to take the square root of separated
terms.
3. (D)
100 64
6400
36
6400
6
80
3
40
2 2 2
x x x x x 
= = =
4. (A)
18 2 16
36
4
6
2
3
2 2 2
y y y y y 
36
= = =
5. (E) It is not possible to find the square root of
separate terms.
Chapter 10 154
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
1. (C) Since the last digit is 9, the square root
must end in 3 or 7.
2. (A) Every pair of digits in the given number
gives one digit of the square root.
3. (E) Since the number ends in 1, its square
root must end in 1 or 9.
4. (B) Since the number has four digits to the
right of the decimal point, its square root will
have two digits to the right of the decimal
point.
5. (C) In order to take the square root of a
decimal, it must have an even number of
decimal places so that its square root will have
exactly half as many. In addition to this, the
digits must form a perfect square ( . . ) 09 3 = .
Retest
1. (C)
2 8 2 4 2 4 2 = ⋅ =
4 50 4 25 2 20 2
3 18 3 9 2 9 2
4 2 20 2 9 2 33 2
= ⋅ =
= ⋅ =
= + +
2. (D)
1
2
180
1
2
36 5 3 5 = ⋅ =
2
5
20
2
5
4 5
4
5
5
3 5
4
5
5
11
5
5
= ⋅ =
− =
3. (A)
a x x x ax x ax 2 6 12 2 3
2 2
⋅ = =
4. (C) 42 40
3 5
14 8
14 8 28 2
3 6
2
2 4
2 4 2
r t
rt
r t
r t rt
=
=
5. (A)
. . 09 3 =
3
3
3 3
10
x
x
x
x
=
=
=
. .
.
Multiply by
6. (D)
2 2
2
2
a
b
a
b
=
7. (E) Since the last digit is 6, the square root
must end in 4 or 6.
8. (C) A fivedigit number has a threedigit
square root.
9. (B)
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 32 9 3 288 3 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ = = ( )
10. (C)
25
36
5
6
4
64 16
2
32 8
m
c d
m
c d
=
155
11
Factoring and
Algebraic Fractions
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. Find the sum of
n
4
and
2
3
n
.
(A)
2
7
2
n
(B)
3
7
n
(C)
11
12
n
(D)
2
12
2
n
(E)
9
12
n
2. Combine into a single fraction: 2 −
a
b
.
(A)
2 − a
b
(B)
2 −
2 −
a
b
(C)
a b
b
− 2
(D)
2b a
b
−
(E)
2a b
b
−
3. Divide
x
x
x
x
− 5
+ 5
−
by
5
5+
.
(A) 1
(B) –1
(C)
x
x
−
+
5
5
2
2
( )
( )
(D)
−
−
+
x
x
5
5
2
2
( )
( )
(E) 0
4. Find an expression equivalent to
3
2
3
x
y
.
(A)
27
3
5
x
y
(B)
9
6
3
x
y
(C)
9
5
3
x
y
(D)
27
5
3
x
y
(E)
27
6
3
x
y
5. Simplify 2
1
+
a
b
a
(A)
2 1 a
b
+
(B)
2 1 a
a
+
(C)
2 1 a
ab
+
(D)
4 1
2
a
xy
+
(E)
2 1 b
b
+
Chapter 11 156
www.petersons.com
6. Simplify
1 1
2
a b
−
(A)
b a −
2
(B)
a b −
2
(C)
b a
ab
−
2
(D)
ba
2
(E)
2ab
b a +
7. If x + y = 16 and x
2
– y
2
= 48, then x – y equals
(A) 3
(B) 32
(C) 4
(D) 36
(E) 6
8. If (x + y)
2
= 100 and xy = 20, find x
2
+ y
2
.
(A) 100
(B) 20
(C) 40
(D) 60
(E) 80
9. If
1 1 1
2 x y
+ =
and
1 1 1
4 x y
− =
, find
1 1
2 2
x y
−
(A)
3
4
(B)
1
4
(C)
3
16
(D)
1
8
(E)
7
8
10. The trinomial x
2
– x – 20 is exactly divisible by
(A) x – 4
(B) x – 10
(C) x + 4
(D) x – 2
(E) x + 5
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 157
www.petersons.com
1. SIMPLIFYING FRACTIONS
In simplifying fractions, we must divide the numerator and denominator by the same factor. We can multiply or
divide both the numerator and denominator of a fraction by the same number without changing the value of the
fraction. However, if we were to add or subtract the same number in the numerator and denominator, the value of
the fraction would not remain the same. When we simplify
9
12
to
3
4
, we are really saying that
9
12
3 3
3 4
=
⋅
⋅
and then
dividing the numerator and denominator by 3. We may not say that
9
12
5
=
+ 4
5+ 7
and then say that
9
12
4
7
= . This is
a serious error in algebra as well.
9
12
3
4
t
t
= because we divide numerator and denominator by 3t. However,
9 +
12 +
t
t
cannot be simplified, as there is no factor that divides into the entire numerator as well as the entire denominator.
Never cancel terms! That is, never cancel parts of numerators or denominators containing + or – signs unless they
are enclosed in parentheses as parts of factors. This is one of the most frequent student errors. Be very careful to
avoid it.
Example:
Simplify
4
3
2
3 2
b b
b b
+8
+ 6
Solution:
Factoring the numerator and denominator by removing the largest common factor in both cases, we
have
4
3 2
2
b b
b b
+ 2
+
( )
( )
The factors common to both numerator and denominator are b and (b + 2). Dividing these out, we have
4
3b
.
Example:
Simplify
x x
x x
2
2
12
+ 6 +8
+ −
to simplest form.
Solution:
There are no common factors here, but both numerator and denominator may be factored as
trinomials.
x x
x x
+ 4 + 2
+ 4
( )( )
( )( ) − 3
gives
x
x
+ 2 ( )
( ) − 3
as a final answer. Remember not to cancel the x’s as they are
terms and not factors.
Example:
Simplify
10 2
4
2
−
− − 5
x
x x
to simplest form.
Solution:
The numerator contains a common factor, while the denominator must be factored as a trinomial.
2
5
5
−
− +1
x
x x ( )( )
When numbers are reversed around a minus sign, they may be turned around by factoring out a (–1).5 – x =
(– 1)(x – 5). Doing this will enable us to simplify the fraction to
−
+
2
1 x
. Remember that if the terms had been
reversed around a plus sign, the factors could have been divided without factoring further, as a + b = b + a, by the
cummutative law of addition. Subtraction, however, is not commutative, necessitating the factoring of –1.
Chapter 11 158
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Simplify to simplest form:
3 3
9 9
3 2
2
x x y
x xy
−
−
(A)
x
6
(B)
x
3
(C)
2
3
x
(D) 1
(E)
x y −
3
2. Simplify to simplest form:
2 8
12 3
x
x
−
−
(A) −
2
3
(B)
2
3
(C) −
4
3
(D)
4
3
(E) −
3
2
3. Find the value of
3x y
y x
−
− 3
when x =
2
7
and
y =
3
10
.
(A)
24
70
(B)
11
70
(C) 0
(D) 1
(E) –1
4. Simplify to simplest form:
b b
b b
2
2
12
15
+
+ 2
−
−
(A)
4
5
(B) −
4
3
(C)
b
b
+
+5
4
(D)
b
b
−
−
4
5
(E) −
+
+
b
b
4
5
5. Simplify to simplest form:
2
6
x y
x y
+ 4
+12
(A)
2
3
(B) −
2
3
(C) −
1
3
(D)
1
3
(E) 3
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 159
www.petersons.com
2. ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION OF FRACTIONS
In adding or subtracting fractions, it is necessary to have the fractions expressed in terms of the same common
denominator. When adding or subtracting two fractions, use the same shortcuts used in arithmetic. Remember
that
a
b
c
d
ad bc
bd
+
+
= , and that
a
b
c
d
ad bc
bd
−
−
= . All sums or differences should be simplified to simplest form.
Example:
Add
3 2
a b
+
Solution:
Add the two cross products and put the sum over the denominator product:
3b a
ab
+ 2
Example:
Add
2
3
+
4 a a
5
Solution:
10 12
15
22
15
a a a +
=
Example:
Add
5a
a b
b
a b +
+
5
+
Solution:
Since both fractions have the same denominator, we must simply add the numerators and put the
sum over the same denominator.
5 5
5
a b
a b
a b
a b
+5
+
+
+
= =
( )
Example:
Subtract
4
6
2 7
6
r s r s −
−
−
Solution:
Since both fractions have the same denominator, we subtract the numerators and place the
difference over the same denominator. Be very careful of the minus sign between the fractions as it
will change the sign of each term in the second numerator.
4 2 7
6
4 2 7
6
2 6
6
2 3
6
r s r s r s r s r s r s r − − − − − + + + ( ) ( )
= = = =
++ 3
3
s
Chapter 11 160
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Add
x +
+
4
6
1
2
(A)
x + 7
6
(B)
x +5
8
(C)
x + 4
12
(D)
x +5
12
(E)
x +5
6
5. Subtract
3
4
7
10
b b
−
(A) −
2
3
b
(B)
b
5
(C)
b
20
(D) b
(E)
2
3
b
1. Subtract
6 5
2
4
2
x y
x
x y
x
+ +
−
(A) 1 + 4y
(B) 4y
(C) 1 + 2y
(D)
x y
x
+ 2
(E)
x y
x
+ 3
2. Add
3 3 c
c d
d
c d +
+
+
(A)
6cd
c d +
(B)
3cd
c d +
(C)
3
2
(D) 3
(E)
9cd
c d +
3. Add
a a
5 10
+
3
(A)
4
15
a
(B)
a
2
(C)
3
50
2
a
(D)
2
25
a
(E)
3
15
2
a
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 161
www.petersons.com
3. MULTIPLICATION OR DIVISION OF FRACTIONS
In multiplying or dividing fractions, we must first factor all numerators and denominators and may then divide all
factors common to any numerator and any denominator. Remember always to invert the fraction following the
division sign. Where exponents are involved, they are added in multiplication and subtracted in division.
Example:
Find the product of
x
y
3
2
and
y
x
3
2
.
Solution:
Factors common to both numerator and denominator are x
2
in the first numerator and second
denominator and y
2
in the first denominator and second numerator. Dividing by these common
factors, we are left with
x y
1 1
⋅ . Finally, we multiply the resulting fractions, giving an answer of xy.
Example:
Divide
15
2
2
a b
by 5a
3
.
Solution:
We invert the divisor and multiply.
15
2
1
5
2
3
a b
a
⋅
We can divide the first numerator and second denominator by 5a
2
, giving
3
2
1 b
a
⋅ or
3
2
b
a
.
Chapter 11 162
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Divide 4abc by
2
3
2
2
a b
d
(A)
8
3
3 2
2
a b c
d
(B)
a
cd 6
2
(C)
2
2
ac
bd
(D)
6
2
cd
a
(E)
5
2
cd
a
5. Divide
3
4
2 4
2
a c
b
by 6ac
2
(A)
ac
b
2
2
8
(B)
ac
b
2
2
4
(C)
4
2
2
b
ac
(D)
8
2
2
b
ac
(E)
ac
b
2
2
6
1. Find the product of
x
y
2
3
and
y
x
4
5
(A)
y
x
2
3
(B)
y
x
3
(C)
x
y
3
(D)
x
y
8
7
(E)
x
y
2. Multiply c by
b
c
(A)
b
c
2
(B)
c
b
2
(C) b
(D) c
(E) bc
2
3. Divide
ax
by
by
x
y
(A)
ax
by
2
2
(B)
b
a
(C)
a
b
(D)
by
ax
2
2
(E)
ay
bx
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 163
www.petersons.com
4. COMPLEX ALGEBRAIC FRACTIONS
Complex algebraic fractions are simplified by the same methods reviewed earlier for arithmetic fractions. To
eliminate the fractions within the fraction, multiply each term of the entire complex fraction by the lowest quan
tity that will eliminate them all.
Example:
Simplify
3
+
2
x y
6
Solution:
We must multiply each term by xy, giving
3 2
6
y x
xy
+
.
No more simplification is possible beyond this. Remember never to cancel terms or parts of terms.
We may only simplify by dividing factors.
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Simplify
1
5
−
3
2
3
4
(A)
15
26
(B) −
15
26
(C) 2
(D)
26
15
(E) −
26
15
2. Simplify
a
x
a
x
2
2
(A)
x
a
(B)
1
2
a x
(C)
1
ax
(D) ax
(E)
a
x
3. Simplify
1 1
1 1
x y
x y
−
+
(A)
x y
x y
−
+
(B)
x y
x y
+
−
(C)
y x
x y
−
+
(D) –1
(E) –xy
4. Simplify 1
1
1
+
x
y
(A)
x y
x
+
(B) 2y
(C) x + 1
(D)
y
x
+1
(E)
x
y
+1
5. Simplify 2
1
2
2
+
t
t
(A) t
2
+ t
(B) t
3
(C)
2 1
2
t +
(D) t + 1
(E)
4
2
+ t
Chapter 11 164
www.petersons.com
5. USING FACTORING TO FIND MISSING VALUES
Certain types of problems may involve the ability to factor in order to evaluate a given expression. In particular,
you should be able to factor the difference of two perfect squares. If an expression consists of two terms that are
separated by a minus sign, the expression can always be factored into two binomials, with one containing the sum
of the square roots and the other their difference. This can be stated by the identity x
2
– y
2
= (x + y)(x – y).
Example:
If m
2
– n
2
= 48 and m + n = 12, find m – n.
Solution:
Since m
2
– n
2
is equal to (m + n) (m – n), these two factors must multiply to 48. If one of them is 12,
the other must be 4.
Example:
If (a + b)
2
= 48 and ab = 6, find a
2
+ b
2
.
Solution:
(a + b)
2
is equal to a
2
+ 2ab + b
2
. Substituting 6 for ab, we have a
2
+ 2(6) + b
2
= 48 and a
2
+ b
2
= 36.
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If a b + =
1
3
and a b − =
1
4
, find a
2
– b
2
.
(A)
1
12
(B)
1
7
(C)
2
7
(D)
1
6
(E) none of these
2. If (a – b)
2
= 40 and ab = 8, find a
2
+ b
2
.
(A) 5
(B) 24
(C) 48
(D) 56
(E) 32
3. If a + b = 8 and a
2
– b
2
= 24, then a – b =
(A) 16
(B) 4
(C) 3
(D) 32
(E) 6
4. The trinomial x
2
+ 4x – 45 is exactly divisible
by
(A) x + 9
(B) x – 9
(C) x + 5
(D) x + 15
(E) x – 3
5. If
1 1
5
c d
− = and
1 1
3
c d
+ = , then
1 1
2 2
c d
− =
(A) 16
(B) 34
(C) 2
(D) 15
(E) cannot be determined
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 165
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
5. Simplify
3
1
−
x
y
x
(A)
2
y
(B)
2x
y
(C)
3− x
y
(D)
3 1 x
x
−
(E)
3 1 x
y
−
6.
3
3
1
2
−
x
x
is equal to
(A)
x x
2
3
−
(B)
3
3
2
x x −
(C) x
2
– x
(D)
3 1
3
x −
(E)
3
3
− x
7. If a
2
– b
2
= 100 and a + b = 25, then a – b =
(A) 4
(B) 75
(C) –4
(D) –75
(E) 5
8. The trinomial x
2
– 8x – 20 is exactly divisible by
(A) x – 5
(B) x – 4
(C) x – 2
(D) x – 10
(E) x – 1
9. If
1 1
6
a b
− = and
1 1
5
a b
+ = , find
1 1
2 2
a b
−
.
(A) 30
(B) –11
(C) 61
(D) 11
(E) 1
10. If (x – y)
2
= 30 and xy = 17, find x
2
+ y
2
.
(A) –4
(B) 4
(C) 13
(D) 47
(E) 64
1. Find the sum of
2
5
n
and
n
10
.
(A)
3
50
n
(B)
1
2
n
(C)
2
50
2
n
(D)
2
10
2
n
(E)
1
2
n
2. Combine into a single fraction:
x
y
− 3
(A)
x y
y
− 3
(B)
x
y
− 3
(C)
x
y
− 9
3
(D)
x y − 3
3
(E)
x y
y
− 3
3
3. Divide
x x
x
2
2 8
4
+
+
−
by
2
3
− x
.
(A) 3
(B) –3
(C) 3(x – 2)
(D)
3
2 − x
(E) none of these
4. Find an expression equivalent to
5
3
3
a
b
.
(A)
15
6
3
a
b
(B)
15
9
3
a
b
(C)
125
6
3
a
b
(D)
125
9
3
a
b
(E)
25
6
3
a
b
Chapter 11 166
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (C)
3 8
12
11
12
n n n +
=
2. (D)
2
1
2
−
− a
b
b a
b
=
3. (B)
x
x
x
x
−
+
+
−
5
5
5
5
⋅ cancel x + 5’s.
x
x
x
x
−
−
−
− −
−
5
5
5
1 5
1 = =
( )
4. (E)
3 3 3 27
2 2 2 6
3
x
y
x
y
x
y
x
y
⋅ ⋅ =
5. (E) Multiply every term by a.
2 2
1
2
1 2 1
1
+ = + ⋅
= + =
a
b
a
a
a
b
b
b
b
+
6. (C) Multiply every term by ab.
b a
ab
−
2
7. (A) x
2
– y
2
= (x + y) (x – y) = 48
Substituting 16 for x + y, we have
16 48
3
( ) x y
x y
− =
− =
8. (D) (x + y)
2
= x
2
+ 2xy + y
2
= 100
Substituting 20 for xy, we have
x y
x y
2 2
2 2
40 100
60
+ + =
+ =
9. (D)
1 1 1 1 1 1
1
2
1
4
2 2
x y x y x y
+
=
− −
=
=
1 1
1
8
1 1
2 2
2 2
x y
x y
−
−
10. (C) x
2
– x – 20 = (x – 5)(x + 4)
Exercise 1
1. (B)
3
9 3
2
x x y
x x y
x ( )
( )
−
−
=
2. (A)
2 4
3 4
2
3
( )
( )
x
x
−
−
= −
3. (E)
3
3
1
x y
y x
−
−
− =
regardless of the values of x
and y, as long as the denominator is not 0.
4. (C)
( )( )
( )( )
( )
( )
b b
b b
b
b
+
+
+
+
4 3
5 3
4
5
−
−
=
5. (D)
2 2
6 2
2
6
1
3
( )
( )
x y
x y
+
+
= =
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 167
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
1. (D)
6 5
2
4
2
x y
x
x y
x
+ +
−
= =
= =
6 4
2
2 4
2
2 2
2
2
x x y
x
x y
x
x y
x
x y
x
+5y +
+ +
− −
( )
2. (D)
3 3 3
3
c d
c d
c d
c d
+
+
+
+
= =
( )
3. (B)
2 3
10
5
10 2
a a a a +
= =
4. (A)
x x + 4 + 3
6
+
=
7
6
5. (C)
3 10 4 7
4 10
30 28
40
2
40 20
b b b b
b b
( ) ( )
( )
− −
=
= =
Exercise 3
1. (B) Divide x
2
and y
3
.
1
1
3 3
⋅ =
y
x
y
x
2. (C) c
b
c
b ⋅ =
3. (C)
ax
by
y
x
⋅
Divide y and x.
a
b
4. (D) 4
3
2
2
2
abc
d
a b
⋅ Divide 2, a, and b.
2
3 6
2 2
c
d
a
cd
a
⋅ =
5. (A)
3
4
1
6
2 4
2 2
a c
b ac
⋅ Divide 3, a, and c
2
.
ac
b
ac
b
2
2
2
2
4
1
2 8
⋅ =
Chapter 11 168
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
1. (E) Multiply every term by 20.
4 30
15
26
15
− −
=
2. (C) Multiply every term by x
2
.
a
a x ax
2
1
=
3. (C) Multiply every term by xy.
y x
y x
−
+
4. (A) Multiply every term by xy.
x y
x
+
5. (E) Multiply every term by
t
2
2
.
4
2
+ t
Exercise 5
1. (A) (a + b) (a – b) = a
2
– b
2
1
3
1
4
1
12
2
2
=
=
a b
a b
−
−
2
2
2. (D) (a – b)
2
= a
2
– 2ab + b
2
= 40
Substituting 8 for ab, we have
a b
a b
2 2
2 2
16 40
56
− +
+
=
=
3. (C) (a + b) (a – b) = a
2
– b
2
8 24
3
( )
( )
a b
a b
−
−
=
=
4. (A) x
2
+ 4x – 45 = (x + 9) (x – 5)
5. (D)
1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3
1 1
2 2
2
c d c d c d
c d
− + −
−
=
( )( ) =
22
2 2
15
1 1
=
c d
−
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 169
www.petersons.com
Retest
1. (B)
4
10
5
10 2
1
2
n n n n
n
+
= = =
2. (A)
x
y
x y
y
−
− 3
1
3
=
3. (B)
x x
x x
2
2 8 3
2
+
+
−
4 −
⋅
= ⋅
( )( ) x x
x x
+
+
4 2
4
3
2
−
−
Divide x + 4.
3 2
2
3 2
1 2
3
( ) ( )
( )
x
x
x
x
−
−
−
−
− =
−
=
4. (D)
5 5 5 125
3 3 3 9
3
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
⋅ ⋅ =
5. (E) Multiply every term by x.
3 1 x
y
−
6. (B) Multiply every term by x
2
.
3
3
2
x x −
7. (A) a
2
– b
2
= (a + b)(a – b) = 100
Substituting 25 for a + b, we have
25(a – b) = 100
a – b = 4
8. (D) x
2
– 8x – 20 = (x – 10)(x + 2)
9. (A)
1 1 1 1 1 1
6 5
1 1
2 2
2
a b a b a b
a b
− + −
−
=
( )( ) =
22
2 2
30
1 1
=
a b
−
10. (E) (x – y)
2
= x
2
– 2xy + y
2
= 30
Substituting 17 for xy, we have
x y
x y
2 2
2 2
34 30
64
− +
+
=
=
171
12
Problem Solving in Algebra
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. Find three consecutive odd integers such that
the sum of the first two is four times the third.
(A) 3, 5, 7
(B) –3, –1, 1
(C) –11, –9, –7
(D) –7, –5, –3
(E) 9, 11, 13
2. Find the shortest side of a triangle whose
perimeter is 64, if the ratio of two of its sides is
4 : 3 and the third side is 20 less than the sum
of the other two.
(A) 6
(B) 18
(C) 20
(D) 22
(E) 24
3. A purse contains 16 coins in dimes and
quarters. If the value of the coins is $2.50, how
many dimes are there?
(A) 6
(B) 8
(C) 9
(D) 10
(E) 12
4. How many quarts of water must be added to 18
quarts of a 32% alcohol solution to dilute it to a
solution that is only 12% alcohol?
(A) 10
(B) 14
(C) 20
(D) 30
(E) 34
5. Danny drove to Yosemite Park from his home
at 60 miles per hour. On his trip home, his rate
was 10 miles per hour less and the trip took one
hour longer. How far is his home from the
park?
(A) 65 mi.
(B) 100 mi.
(C) 200 mi.
(D) 280 mi.
(E) 300 mi.
6. Two cars leave a restaurant at the same time
and travel along a straight highway in opposite
directions. At the end of three hours they are
300 miles apart. Find the rate of the slower car,
if one car travels at a rate 20 miles per hour
faster than the other.
(A) 30
(B) 40
(C) 50
(D) 55
(E) 60
7. The numerator of a fraction is one half the
denominator. If the numerator is increased by 2
and the denominator is decreased by 2, the
value of the fraction is
2
3
. Find the numerator
of the original fraction.
(A) 4
(B) 8
(C) 10
(D) 12
(E) 20
Chapter 12 172
www.petersons.com
8. Darren can mow the lawn in 20 minutes, while
Valerie needs 30 minutes to do the same job.
How many minutes will it take them to mow
the lawn if they work together?
(A) 10
(B) 8
(C) 16
(D) 6
1
2
(E) 12
9. Meredith is 3 times as old as Adam. Six years
from now, she will be twice as old as Adam
will be then. How old is Adam now?
(A) 6
(B) 12
(C) 18
(D) 20
(E) 24
10. Mr. Barry invested some money at 5% and an
amount half as great at 4%. His total annual
income from both investments was $210. Find
the amount invested at 4%.
(A) $1000
(B) $1500
(C) $2000
(D) $2500
(E) $3000
In the following sections, we will review some of the major types of algebraic problems. Although not every
problem you come across will fall into one of these categories, it will help you to be thoroughly familiar with
these types of problems. By practicing with the problems that follow, you will learn to translate words into
mathematical equations. You should then be able to handle other types of problems confidently.
In solving verbal problems, it is most important that you read carefully and know what it is that you are trying
to find. Once this is done, represent your unknown algebraically. Write the equation that translates the words of
the problem into the symbols of mathematics. Solve that equation by the techniques previously reviewed.
Problem Solving in Algebra 173
www.petersons.com
1. COIN PROBLEMS
In solving coin problems, it is best to change the value of all monies to cents before writing an equation. Thus, the
number of nickels must be multiplied by 5 to give the value in cents, dimes by 10, quarters by 25, half dollars by
50, and dollars by 100.
Example:
Sue has $1.35, consisting of nickels and dimes. If she has 9 more nickels than dimes, how many
nickels does she have?
Solution:
Let x = the number of dimes
x + 9 = the number of nickels
10x = the value of dimes in cents
5x + 45 = the value of nickels in cents
135 = the value of money she has in cents
10x + 5x + 45 = 135
15x = 90
x = 6
She has 6 dimes and 15 nickles.
In a problem such as this, you can be sure that 6 would be among the multiple choice answers given. You must
be sure to read carefully what you are asked to find and then continue until you have found the quantity sought.
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Marie has $2.20 in dimes and quarters. If the
number of dimes is
1
4
the number of quarters,
how many dimes does she have?
(A) 2
(B) 4
(C) 6
(D) 8
(E) 10
2. Lisa has 45 coins that are worth a total of $3.50.
If the coins are all nickels and dimes, how many
more dimes than nickels does she have?
(A) 5
(B) 10
(C) 15
(D) 20
(E) 25
3. A postal clerk sold 40 stamps for $5.40. Some
were 10cent stamps and some were 15cent
stamps. How many 10cent stamps were there?
(A) 10
(B) 12
(C) 20
(D) 24
(E) 28
4. Each of the 30 students in Homeroom 704
contributed either a nickel or a quarter to the
Cancer Fund. If the total amount collected was
$4.70, how many students contributed a nickel?
(A) 10
(B) 12
(C) 14
(D) 16
(E) 18
5. In a purse containing nickels and dimes, the
ratio of nickels to dimes is 3 : 4. If there are 28
coins in all, what is the value of the dimes?
(A) 60¢
(B) $1.12
(C) $1.60
(D) 12¢
(E) $1.00
Chapter 12 174
www.petersons.com
2. CONSECUTIVE INTEGER PROBLEMS
Consecutive integers are one apart and can be represented algebraically as x, x + 1, x + 2, and so on. Consecutive
even and odd integers are both two apart and can be represented by x, x + 2, x + 4, and so on. Never try to represent
consecutive odd integers by x, x + 1, x + 3, etc., for if x is odd, x + 1 would be even.
Example:
Find three consecutive odd integers whose sum is 219.
Solution:
Represent the integers as x, x + 2, and x + 4. Write an equation stating that their sum is 219.
3x + 6 = 219
3x = 213
x = 71, making the integers 71, 73, and 75.
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If n + 1 is the largest of four consecutive
integers, represent the sum of the four integers.
(A) 4n + 10
(B) 4n – 2
(C) 4n – 4
(D) 4n – 5
(E) 4n – 8
2. If n is the first of two consecutive odd integers,
which equation could be used to find these
integers if the difference of their squares is
120?
(A) (n + 1)
2
– n
2
= 120
(B) n
2
– (n + 1)
2
= 120
(C) n
2
– (n + 2)
2
= 120
(D) (n + 2)
2
– n
2
= 120
(E) [(n + 2)– n]
2
= 120
3. Find the average of four consecutive odd
integers whose sum is 112.
(A) 25
(B) 29
(C) 31
(D) 28
(E) 30
4. Find the second of three consecutive integers if
the sum of the first and third is 26.
(A) 11
(B) 12
(C) 13
(D) 14
(E) 15
5. If 2x – 3 is an odd integer, find the next even
integer.
(A) 2x – 5
(B) 2x – 4
(C) 2x – 2
(D) 2x – 1
(E) 2x + 1
Problem Solving in Algebra 175
www.petersons.com
3. AGE PROBLEMS
In solving age problems, you are usually called upon to represent a person’s age at the present time, several years
from now, or several years ago. A person’s age x years from now is found by adding x to his present age. A
person’s age x years ago is found by subtracting x from his present age.
Example:
Michelle was 15 years old y years ago. Represent her age x years from now.
Solution:
Her present age is 15 + y. In x years, her age will be her present age plus x, or 15 + y + x.
Example:
Jody is now 20 years old and her brother, Glenn, is 14. How many years ago was Jody three times
as old as Glenn was then?
Solution:
We are comparing their ages x years ago. At that time, Jody’s age (20 – x) was three times Glenn’s
age (14 – x). This can be stated as the equation
20 – x = 3(14 – x)
20 – x = 42 – 3x
2x = 22
x = 11
To check, find their ages 11 years ago. Jody was 9 while Glenn was 3. Therefore, Jody was three
times as old as Glenn was then.
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Mark is now 4 times as old as his brother
Stephen. In 1 year Mark will be 3 times as old
as Stephen will be then. How old was Mark
two years ago?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 6
(D) 8
(E) 9
2. Mr. Burke is 24 years older than his son Jack.
In 8 years, Mr. Burke will be twice as old as
Jack will be then. How old is Mr. Burke now?
(A) 16
(B) 24
(C) 32
(D) 40
(E) 48
3. Lili is 23 years old and Melanie is 15 years old.
How many years ago was Lili twice as old as
Melanie?
(A) 7
(B) 16
(C) 9
(D) 5
(E) 8
4. Two years from now, Karen’s age will be 2x + 1.
Represent her age two years ago.
(A) 2x – 4
(B) 2x – 1
(C) 2x + 3
(D) 2x – 3
(E) 2x – 2
5. Alice is now 5 years younger than her brother
Robert, whose age is 4x + 3. Represent her age
3 years from now.
(A) 4x – 5
(B) 4x – 2
(C) 4x
(D) 4x + 1
(E) 4x – 1
Chapter 12 176
www.petersons.com
4. INVESTMENT PROBLEMS
All interest referred to is simple interest. The annual amount of interest paid on an investment is found by
multiplying the amount invested, called the principal, by the percent of interest, called the rate.
PRINCIPAL · RATE = INTEREST INCOME
Example:
Mrs. Friedman invested some money in a bank paying 4% interest annually and a second amount,
$500 less than the first, in a bank paying 6% interest. If her annual income from both investments
was $50, how much money did she invest at 6%?
Solution:
Represent the two investments algebraically.
x = amount invested at 4%
x – 500 = amount invested at 6%
.04x = annual interest from 4% investment
.06(x – 500) = annual interest from 6% investment
.04x + .06(x – 500) = 50
Multiply by 100 to remove decimals.
4 6 500 5000
4 6 3000 5000
10 8000
80
x x
x x
x
x
+
+
−
−
( ) =
=
=
= 00
500 300 x − =
She invested $300 at 6%.
Problem Solving in Algebra 177
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Marion invested $7200, part at 4% and the rest
at 5%. If the annual income from both
investments was the same, find her total annual
income from these investments.
(A) $160
(B) $320
(C) $4000
(D) $3200
(E) $1200
5. Mr. Maxwell inherited some money from his
father. He invested
1
2
of this amount at 5%,
1
3
of this amount at 6%, and the rest at 3%. If the
total annual income from these investments
was $300, what was the amount he inherited?
(A) $600
(B) $60
(C) $2000
(D) $3000
(E) $6000
1. Barbara invested x dollars at 3% and $400
more than this amount at 5%. Represent the
annual income from the 5% investment.
(A) .05x
(B) .05 (x + 400)
(C) .05x + 400
(D) 5x + 40000
(E) none of these
2. Mr. Blum invested $10,000, part at 6% and the
rest at 5%. If x represents the amount invested
at 6%, represent the annual income from the
5% investment.
(A) 5(x – 10,000)
(B) 5(10,000 – x)
(C) .05(x + 10,000)
(D) .05(x – 10,000)
(E) .05(10,000 – x)
3. Dr. Kramer invested $2000 in an account
paying 6% interest annually. How many more
dollars must she invest at 3% so that her total
annual income is 4% of her entire investment?
(A) $120
(B) $1000
(C) $2000
(D) $4000
(E) $6000
Chapter 12 178
www.petersons.com
5. FRACTION PROBLEMS
A fraction is a ratio between two numbers. If the value of a fraction is
3
4
, it does not mean that the numerator is
3 and the denominator 4. The numerator and denominator could be 9 and 12, respectively, or 1.5 and 2, or 45 and
60, or an infinite number of other combinations. All we know is that the ratio of numerator to denominator will be
3 : 4. Therefore, the numerator may be represented by 3x and the denominator by 4x. The fraction is then repre
sented by
3
4
x
x
.
Example:
The value of a fraction is
2
3
. If one is subtracted from the numerator and added to the denominator,
the value of the fraction is
1
2
. Find the original fraction.
Solution:
Represent the original fraction as
2
3
x
x
. If one is subtracted from the numerator and added to the
denominator, the new fraction is
2 1
3 1
x
x
−
+
. The value of this new fraction is
1
2
.
2 1
3 1
1
2
x
x
−
+
=
Cross multiply to eliminate fractions.
4 2 3 1
3
x x
x
− + =
=
The original fraction is
2
3
x
x
, which is
6
9
.
Problem Solving in Algebra 179
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. The denominator of a certain fraction is 5 more
than the numerator. If 3 is added to both
numerator and denominator, the value of the
new fraction is
2
3
. Find the original fraction.
(A)
3
8
(B)
4
9
(C)
11
16
(D)
12
17
(E)
7
12
5. The denominator of a fraction is twice as large
as the numerator. If 4 is added to both the
numerator and denominator, the value of the
fraction is
5
8
. Find the denominator of the
original fraction.
(A) 6
(B) 10
(C) 12
(D) 14
(E) 16
1. A fraction is equivalent to
4
5
. If the numerator
is increased by 4 and the denominator is
increased by 10, the value of the resulting
fraction is
2
3
. Find the numerator of the
original fraction.
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 12
(D) 16
(E) 20
2. What number must be added to both the
numerator and the denominator of the fraction
5
21
to give a fraction equal to
3
7
?
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
(E) 7
3. The value of a certain fraction is
3
5
. If both the
numerator and denominator are increased by 5,
the new fraction is equivalent to
7
10
. Find the
original fraction.
(A)
3
5
(B)
6
10
(C)
9
15
(D)
12
20
(E)
15
25
Chapter 12 180
www.petersons.com
6. MIXTURE PROBLEMS
There are two kinds of mixture problems with which you should be familiar. The first is sometimes referred to as
dry mixture, in which we mix dry ingredients of different values, such as nuts or coffee. Also solved by the same
method are problems dealing with tickets at different prices, and similar problems. In solving this type of prob
lem it is best to organize the data in a chart with three rows and columns, labeled as illustrated in the following
example.
Example:
Mr. Sweet wishes to mix candy worth 36 cents a pound with candy worth 52 cents a pound to make
300 pounds of a mixture worth 40 cents a pound. How many pounds of the more expensive candy
should he use?
Solution:
No. of pounds · Price per pound = Total value
More expensive x 52 52x
Less expensive 300 – x 36 36(300 – x)
Mixture 300 40 12000
The value of the more expensive candy plus the value of the less expensive candy must be equal to
the value of the mixture. Almost all mixture problems derive their equation from adding the final
column in the chart.
52x + 36(300 – x) = 12000
Notice that all values were computed in cents to avoid decimals.
52 10 800 36 12 000
16 1200
75
x x
x
x
+ , , − =
=
=
He should use 75 pounds of the more expensive candy.
In solving the second type of mixture problem, we are dealing with percents instead of prices and amounts of a
certain ingredient instead of values. As we did with prices, we may omit the decimal point from the percents, as
long as we do it in every line of the chart.
Example:
How many quarts of pure alcohol must be added to 15 quarts of a solution that is 40% alcohol to
strengthen it to a solution that is 50% alcohol?
Solution:
No. of quarts · Percent Alcohol = Amount of Alcohol
Diluted 15 40 600
Pure x 100 100x
Mixture 15 + x 50 50(15 + x)
Notice that the percent of alcohol in pure alcohol is 100. If we had added pure water to weaken the
solution, the percent of alcohol in pure water would have been 0. Again, the equation comes from
adding the final column since the amount of alcohol in the original solution plus the amount of
alcohol added must equal the amount of alcohol in the new solution.
600 100 50 15
600 100 750 50
50 150
3
+ +
+ +
x x
x x
x
x
= ( )
=
=
=
3 quarts of alcohol should be added.
Problem Solving in Algebra 181
www.petersons.com
Exercise 6
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Express, in terms of x, the value, in cents, of x
pounds of 40–cent cookies and (30 – x) pounds
of 50cent cookies.
(A) 150 + 10x
(B) 150 – 50x
(C) 1500 – 10x
(D) 1500 – 50x
(E) 1500 + 10x
2. How many pounds of nuts selling for 70 cents a
pound must be mixed with 30 pounds of nuts
selling at 90 cents a pound to make a mixture
that will sell for 85 cents a pound?
(A) 7.5
(B) 10
(C) 22.5
(D) 40
(E) 12
3. A container holds 10 pints of a solution which
is 20% acid. If 3 quarts of pure acid are added
to the container, what percent of the resulting
mixture is acid?
(A) 5
(B) 10
(C) 20
(D) 50
(E) 33
1
3
4. A solution of 60 quarts of sugar and water is
20% sugar. How much water must be added to
make a solution that is 5% sugar?
(A) 180 qts.
(B) 120 qts.
(C) 100 qts.
(D) 80 qts.
(E) 20 qts.
5. How much water must be evaporated from 240
pounds of a solution that is 3% alcohol to
strengthen it to a solution that is 5% alcohol?
(A) 120 lbs.
(B) 96 lbs.
(C) 100 lbs.
(D) 84 lbs.
(E) 140 lbs.
Chapter 12 182
www.petersons.com
7. MOTION PROBLEMS
The fundamental relationship in all motion problems is that rate times time is equal to distance.
RATE · TIME = DISTANCE
The problems at the level of this examination usually deal with a relationship between distances. Most motion
problems fall into one of three categories.
A. Motion in opposite directions
This can occur when objects start at the same point and move apart, or when they start at a given distance apart
and move toward each other. In either case, the distance covered by the first object plus the distance covered by
the second is equal to the total distance covered. This can be shown in the following diagram.
In either case, d
1
+ d
2
= total distance covered.
B. Motion in the same direction
This type of problem is sometimes referred to as a “catch up” problem. Usually two objects leave the same
place at different times and at different rates, but the one that leaves later “catches up” to the one that leaves
earlier. In such cases the two distances must be equal. If one is still ahead of the other, then an equation must be
written expressing this fact.
C. Round trip
In this type of problem, the rate going is different from the rate returning. The times are also different. But if
we go somewhere and then return to the starting point, the distances must be equal.
To solve any type of motion problem, it is helpful to organize the information in a chart with columns for rate,
time, and distance. A separate line should be used for each moving object. Be very careful of units used. If the
rate is given in miles per hour, the time must be in hours and the distance will be in miles.
Example:
A passenger train and a freight train leave at 10:30 A.M. from stations that are 405 miles apart and
travel toward each other. The rate of the passenger train is 45 miles per hour faster than that of the
freight train. If they pass each other at 1:30 P.M., how fast was the passenger train traveling?
Solution:
Notice that each train traveled exactly 3 hours.
Rate · Time = Distance
Passenger x + 45 3 3 x + 135
Freight x 3 3x
3 135 3 405
6 270
45
x x
x
x
+ + =
=
=
The rate of the passenger train was 90 m.p.h.
Problem Solving in Algebra 183
www.petersons.com
Example:
Susie left her home at 11 A.M., traveling along Route 1 at 30 miles per hour. At 1 P.M., her brother
Richard left home and started after her on the same road at 45 miles per hour. At what time did
Richard catch up to Susie?
Solution:
Rate · Time = Distance
Susie 30 x 30x
Richard 45 x – 2 45x – 90
Since Richard left 2 hours later than Susie, he traveled for x – 2 hours, while Susie traveled for x
hours. Notice that we do not fill in 11 and 1 in the time column, as these are times on the clock and
not actual hours traveled. Since Richard caught up to Susie, the distances must be equal.
30 45
90 15
6
x x
x
x
=
=
=
− 90
Susie traveled for 6 hours, which means it was 6 hours past 11 A.M., or 5 P.M. when Richard
caught up to her.
Example:
How far can Scott drive into the country if he drives out at 40 miles per hour and returns over the
same road at 30 miles per hour and spends 8 hours away from home including a onehour stop for
lunch?
Solution:
His actual driving time is 7 hours, which must be divided into two parts. If one part is x, the other is
what is left, or 7 – x.
Rate · Time = Distance
Going 40 x 40x
Return 30 7 – x 210x – 30x
The distances are equal.
40 210 30
70 210
3
x x
x
x
=
=
=
−
If he traveled 40 miles per hour for 3 hours, he went 120 miles.
Chapter 12 184
www.petersons.com
Exercise 7
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. At 10 A.M. two cars started traveling toward
each other from towns 287 miles apart. They
passed each other at 1:30 P.M. If the rate of the
faster car exceeded the rate of the slower car by
6 miles per hour, find the rate, in miles per
hour, of the faster car.
(A) 38
(B) 40
(C) 44
(D) 48
(E) 50
2. A motorist covers 350 miles in 8 hours. Before
noon he averages 50 miles per hour, but after
noon he averages only 40 miles per hour. At
what time did he leave?
(A) 7 A.M.
(B) 8 A.M.
(C) 9 A.M.
(D) 10 A.M.
(E) 11 A.M.
3. At 3 P.M. a plane left Kennedy Airport for Los
Angeles traveling at 600 m.p.h. At 3:30 P.M.
another plane left the same airport on the same
route traveling at 650 m.p.h. At what time did
the second plane overtake the first?
(A) 5:15 P.M.
(B) 6:45 P.M.
(C) 6:50 P.M.
(D) 7:15 P.M.
(E) 9:30 P.M.
4. Joe left home at 10 A.M. and walked out into
the country at 4 miles per hour. He returned on
the same road at 2 miles per hour. If he arrived
home at 4 P.M., how many miles into the
country did he walk?
(A) 6
(B) 8
(C) 10
(D) 11
(E) 12
5. Two cars leave a restaurant at the same time
and proceed in the same direction along the
same route. One car averages 36 miles per hour
and the other 31 miles per hour. In how many
hours will the faster car be 30 miles ahead of
the slower car?
(A) 3
(B) 3
1
2
(C) 4
(D) 6
(E) 6
1
4
Problem Solving in Algebra 185
www.petersons.com
8. WORK PROBLEMS
In most work problems, a job is broken up into several parts, each representing a fractional portion of the entire
job. For each part represented, the numerator should represent the time actually spent working, while the denomi
nator should represent the total time needed to do the job alone. The sum of all the individual fractions must be 1
if the job is completed.
Example:
John can complete a paper route in 20 minutes. Steve can complete the same route in 30 minutes.
How long will it take them to complete the route if they work together?
Solution:
John Steve
Time actually spent
Time needed to do
entire jjob alone
x
20
+
x
30
= 1
Multiply by 60 to clear fractions.
3 2 60
5 60
12
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
Example:
Mr. Powell can mow his lawn twice as fast as his son Mike. Together they do the job in 20 minutes.
How many minutes would it take Mr. Powell to do the job alone?
Solution:
If it takes Mr. Powell x hours to mow the lawn, Mike will take twice as long, or 2x hours, to mow
the lawn.
Mr. Powell Mike
20
x
+
20
2x
= 1
Multiply by 2x to clear fractions.
40 20 2
60 2
30
+ =
=
=
x
x
x minutes
Chapter 12 186
www.petersons.com
Exercise 8
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Mr. Jones can plow his field with his tractor in
4 hours. If he uses his manual plow, it takes
three times as long to plow the same field.
After working with the tractor for two hours, he
ran out of gas and had to finish with the manual
plow. How long did it take to complete the job
after the tractor ran out of gas?
(A) 4 hours
(B) 6 hours
(C) 7 hours
(D) 8 hours
(E) 8
1
2
hours
5. Michael and Barry can complete a job in 2
hours when working together. If Michael
requires 6 hours to do the job alone, how many
hours does Barry need to do the job alone?
(A) 2
(B) 2
1
2
(C) 3
(D) 3
1
2
(E) 4
1. Mr. White can paint his barn in 5 days. What
part of the barn is still unpainted after he has
worked for x days?
(A)
x
5
(B)
5
x
(C)
x
x
− 5
(D)
5− x
x
(E)
5
5
− x
2. Mary can clean the house in 6 hours. Her
younger sister Ruth can do the same job in 9
hours. In how many hours can they do the job if
they work together?
(A) 3
1
2
(B) 3
3
5
(C) 4
(D) 4
1
4
(E) 4
1
2
3. A swimming pool can be filled by an inlet pipe
in 3 hours. It can be drained by a drainpipe in 6
hours. By mistake, both pipes are opened at the
same time. If the pool is empty, in how many
hours will it be filled?
(A) 4
(B) 4
1
2
(C) 5
(D) 5
1
2
(E) 6
Problem Solving in Algebra 187
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Three times the first of three consecutive odd
integers is 10 more than the third. Find the
middle integer.
(A) 7
(B) 9
(C) 11
(D) 13
(E) 15
2. The denominator of a fraction is three times the
numerator. If 8 is added to the numerator and 6
is subtracted from the denominator, the resulting
fraction is equivalent to
8
9
. Find the original
fraction.
(A)
16
18
(B)
1
3
(C)
8
24
(D)
5
3
(E)
8
16
3. How many quarts of water must be added to 40
quarts of a 5% acid solution to dilute it to a 2%
solution?
(A) 80
(B) 40
(C) 60
(D) 20
(E) 50
4. Miriam is 11 years older than Charles. In three
years she will be twice as old as Charles will be
then. How old was Miriam 2 years ago?
(A) 6
(B) 8
(C) 9
(D) 17
(E) 19
5. One printing press can print the school
newspaper in 12 hours, while another press can
print it in 18 hours. How long will the job take
if both presses work simultaneously?
(A) 7 hrs. 12 min.
(B) 6 hrs. 36 min.
(C) 6 hrs. 50 min.
(D) 7 hrs. 20 min.
(E) 7 hrs. 15 min.
6. Janet has $2.05 in dimes and quarters. If she
has four fewer dimes than quarters, how much
money does she have in dimes?
(A) 30¢
(B) 80¢
(C) $1.20
(D) 70¢
(E) 90¢
7. Mr. Cooper invested a sum of money at 6%. He
invested a second sum, $150 more than the
first, at 3%. If his total annual income was $54,
how much did he invest at 3%?
(A) $700
(B) $650
(C) $500
(D) $550
(E) $600
8. Two buses are 515 miles apart. At 9:30 A.M.
they start traveling toward each other at rates of
48 and 55 miles per hour. At what time will
they pass each other?
(A) 1:30 P.M.
(B) 2:30 P.M.
(C) 2 P.M.
(D) 3 P.M.
(E) 3:30 P.M.
Chapter 12 188
www.petersons.com
9. Carol started from home on a trip averaging 30
miles per hour. How fast must her mother drive
to catch up to her in 3 hours if she leaves 30
minutes after Carol?
(A) 35 m.p.h.
(B) 39 m.p.h.
(C) 40 m.p.h.
(D) 55 m.p.h.
(E) 60 m.p.h.
10. Dan has twice as many pennies as Frank. If
Frank wins 12 pennies from Dan, both boys
will have the same number of pennies. How
many pennies did Dan have originally?
(A) 24
(B) 12
(C) 36
(D) 48
(E) 52
Problem Solving in Algebra 189
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
6. (B) R · T = D
Slow x 3 3x
Fast x + 20 3 3x + 60
3 3 60 300
6 240
40
x x
x
x
+ + =
=
=
7. (C) Represent the original fraction by
x
x 2
.
x
x
+ 2
2
2
3 − 2
=
Cross multiply.
3 6 4 4
10
x x
x
+ =
=
−
8. (E) Darren Valerie
x x
20 30
1 + =
Multiply by 60.
3 2 60
5 60
12
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
9. (A) Let Adam's age now
Meredith's age now
x
x
x
=
= 3
+ 66
6
=
=
Adam's age in 6 years
3 Meredith's age x + in 6 years
3 6 2 6
3 6 2 12
6
x x
x x
x
+ +
+ +
= ( )
=
=
10. (B) Let amount invested at 4%
amount invest
x
x
=
= 2 eed at 5%
. . 04 05 2 210 x x + ( ) =
Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals.
4 5 2 21 000
14 21 000
1500
x x
x
x
+ ( ) =
=
=
,
,
$
1. (D) Represent the integers as x, x + 2, and x + 4.
x x x
x x
x
x x x
+ + +
+ +
+ +
2 4 4
2 2 4 16
14 2
7 2 5 4
= ( )
=
=
= =
−
− − , , == −3
2. (B) Represent the first two sides as 4x and 3x,
then the third side is 7x – 20.
4 7 64
14 20 64
14 84
6
x x x
x
x
x
+ 3 + 20 −
−
( ) =
=
=
=
The shortest side is 3(6) = 18.
3. (D) Let the number of dimes
the number of
x
x
=
= 16 − quarters
value of dimes in cents 10
400 25
x =
− xx
x x
=
=
value of quarters in cents
10 400 25 25 +  00
15 150
10
  x
x
=
=
4. (D) No of Percent Amount of
Quarts · Alcohol = Alcohol
Original 18 32 576
Added x 0 0
New 18 + x 12 216 + 12x
576 216 12
360 12
30
=
=
=
+ x
x
x
5. (E) R · T = D
Going 60 x 60x
Return 50 x + 1 50x + 50
60 50 50
10 50
5
x x
x
x
=
=
=
+
If he drove for 5 hours at 60 miles per hour, he
drove 300 miles.
Chapter 12 190
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
1. (A) Let number of dimes
number of quarters
x
x
=
= 4
100x
x
=
=
value of dimes in cents
100 value of qua arters in cents
10 100 220
100 220
2
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
2. (A) Let number of nickels
number of dimes
x
x
=
= 45−
55x
x
=
=
value of nickels in cents
450 10 value − oof dimes in cents
5 450 10 350
5 100
20
x x
x
x
+ −
− −
=
=
=
20 nickels and 25 dimes
3. (B) Let number of 10cent stamps
number o
x
x
=
= 40 − ff 15cent stamps
value of 10cent stamp 10x = ss
value of 15cent stamps 600 15 − x =
10 600 15 540
5 60
12
x x
x
x
+ −
− −
=
=
=
4. (C) Let number of nickels
number of quart
x
x
=
= 30 − eers
value of nickels in cents
val
5
750 25
x
x
=
= − uue of quarters in cents
5 750 25 470
20 280
14
x x
x
x
+ −
− −
=
=
=
5. (C) Let number of nickels
number of dimes
3
4
x
x
=
=
3 4 28
7 28
4
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
There are 16 dimes, worth $1.60.
Exercise 2
1. (B) Consecutive integers are 1 apart. If the
fourth is n + 1, the third is n, the second is n – 1,
and the first is n – 2. The sum of these is 4n – 2.
2. (D) The other integer is n + 2. If a difference
is positive, the larger quantity must come first.
3. (D) To find the average of any 4 numbers,
divide their sum by 4.
4. (C) Represent the integers as x, x + 1, and
x + 2.
x x
x
x
x
+ +
+
2 26
2 24
12
1 13
=
=
=
=
5. (C) An even integer follows an odd integer,
so simply add 1.
Problem Solving in Algebra 191
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (C) Let Stephen's age now
Mark's age now
x
x
x
=
= 4
1 + ==
=
Stephen's age in 1 year
Mark's age in 4 1 x + 1 year
4 1 3 1
4 1 3 3
2
x x
x x
x
+ +
+ +
= ( )
=
=
Mark is now 8, so 2 years ago he was 6.
2. (D) Let Jack's age now
Mr. Burke's age no
x
x
=
= + 24 ww
Jack's age in 8 years
Mr. Burke's
x
x
+
+
8
32
=
= age in 8 years
x x
x x
x
+ +
+ +
32 2 8
32 2 16
16
= ( )
=
=
Jack is now 16, Mr. Burke is 40.
3. (A) The fastest reasoning here is from the
answers. Subtract each number from both ages,
to see which results in Lili being twice as old as
Melanie. 7 years ago, Lili was 16 and Melanie
was 8.
Let x = number of years ago
Then 23 – x = 2(15 – x)
23 – x = 30 – 2x
7 = x
4. (D) Karen’s age now can be found by
subtracting 2 from her age 2 years from now.
Her present age is 2x – 1. To find her age 2
years ago, subtract another 2.
5. (D) Alice’s present age is 4x – 2. In 3 years
her age will be 4x + 1.
Exercise 4
1. (B) She invested x + 400 dollars at 5%. The
income is .05(x + 400).
2. (E) He invested 10,000 – x dollars at 5%. The
income is .05(10,000 – x).
3. (D) Let amount invested at 3%
her total
x
x
=
= 2000 + investment
. . . 06 2000 03 04 2000 ( ) = ( ) + + x x
Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals.
6 2000 3 4 2000
12 000 3 8000 4
4000
( ) = ( )
=
=
+ +
+ +
x x
x x
x
,
4. (B) Let amount invested at 4%
amount in
x
x
=
= 7200 − vvested at 5%
. . 04 05 7200 x x =  ( )
Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals.
4 5 7200
4 36 000 5
9 36 000
4000
x x
x x
x
x
= ( )
=
=
=
−
− ,
,
Her income is .04(4000) + .05(3200). This is
$160 + $160, or $320.
5. (E) In order to avoid fractions, represent his
inheritance as 6x. Then
1
2
his inheritance is 3x
and
1
3
his inheritance is 2x.
Let 3 amount invested at 5%
amount inves
x
x
=
= 2 tted at 6%
amount invested at 3% x =
.05(3x) + .06(2x) + .03(x) = 300
Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals.
5 3 6 2 3 30 000
15 12 3 30 000
30
x x x
x x x
x
( ) ( ) ( ) =
=
+ +
+ +
,
,
==
=
30 000
1000
,
x
His inheritance was 6x, or $6000.
Chapter 12 192
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
1. (D) Represent the original fraction as
4
5
x
x
.
4 4
5 10
2
3
x
x
+
+
=
Cross multiply.
12 12 10 20
2 8
4
x x
x
x
+ + =
=
=
The original numerator was 4x, or 16.
2. (E) While this can be solved using the
equation
5
21
3
7
+
+
x
x
= , it is probably easier to
work from the answers. Try adding each choice
to the numerator and denominator of
5
21
to see
which gives a result equal to
3
7
.
5 7
21 7
12
28
3
7
+
+
= =
3. (C) Here again, it is fastest to reason from the
answers. Add 5 to each numerator and
denominator to see which will result in a new
fraction equal to
7
10
.
9 5
15 5
14
20
7
10
+
+
= =
4. (E) Here again, add 3 to each numerator and
denominator of the given choices to see which
will result in a new fraction equal to
2
3
.
7 3
12 3
10
15
2
3
+
+
= =
5. (C) Represent the original fraction by
x
x 2
.
x
x
+
+
4
2 4
5
8
=
Cross multiply.
8 32 10 20
12 2
6
x x
x
x
+ + =
=
=
The original denominator is 2x, or 12.
Exercise 6
1. (C) Multiply the number of pounds by the
price per pound to get the total value.
40 50 30
40 1500 50
1500 10
x x
x x
x
( ) ( ) =
=
+
+
−
−
−
2. (B) No. of Price per Total
Pounds · Pound = Value
x 70 70x
30 90 2700
x + 30 85 85(x + 30)
70 2700 85 30
70 2700 85 2550
150 15
x x
x x
x
x
+ +
+ +
= ( )
=
=
= 110
3. (D) No. of % of Amount of
Pints Acid = Acid
Original 10 .20 2
Added 6 1.00 6
New 16 8
Remember that 3 quarts of acid are 6 pints. There
are now 8 pints of acid in 16 pints of solution.
Therefore, the new solution is
1
2
or 50% acid.
4. (A) No. of % of Amount of
Quarts · Sugar = Sugar
60 20 1200
x 0 0
60 + x 5 5(60 + x )
1200 5 60
1200 300 5
900 5
180
= ( )
=
=
=
+
+
x
x
x
x
5. (B) No. of % of Amount of
Pounds · Alcohol = Sugar
240 3 720
x 0 0
240 – x 5 5(240 – x )
Notice that when x quarts were evaporated, x
was subtracted from 240 to represent the
number of pounds in the mixture.
720 5 240
720 1200 5
5 480
96
= ( )
=
=
=
−
−
x
x
x
x
Problem Solving in Algebra 193
www.petersons.com
Exercise 7
1. (C) R · T = D
Slow x 3.5 3.5x
Fast x + 6 3.5 3.5(x + 6)
The cars each traveled from 10 A.M. to
1:30 P.M., which is 3
1
2
hours.
3.5x + 3.5(x + 6) = 287
Multiply by 10 to eliminate decimals.
35 35 6 2870
35 35 210 2870
70 2660
3
x x
x x
x
x
+ +
+ +
( ) =
=
=
= 88
The rate of the faster car was x + 6 or 44 m.p.h.
2. (C) R · T = D
Before noon 50 x 50x
After noon 40 8 – x 40(8 – x )
The 8 hours must be divided into 2 parts.
50 40 8 350
50 320 40 350
10 30
3
x x
x x
x
x
+
+
−
−
( ) =
=
=
=
If he traveled 3 hours before noon, he left at 9 A.M.
3. (E) R · T = D
600 x 600x
650 x –
1
2
650(x –
1
2
)
The later plane traveled
1
2
hour less.
600 650
1
2
600 650 325
325 50
6
1
2
x x
x x
x
x
=
=
=
=
−
−
The plane that left at 3 P.M. traveled for 6
1
2
hours. The time is then 9:30 P.M.
4. (B)
R · T = D
Going 4 x 4x
Return 2 6 – x 2(6 – x )
He was gone for 6 hours.
4 2 6
4 12 2
6 12
2
x x
x x
x
x
= ( )
=
=
=
−
−
If he walked for 2 hours at 4 miles per hour, he
walked for 8 miles.
5. (D)
R · T = D
36 x 36x
31 x 31x
They travel the same number of hours.
36 31 30
5 30
6
x x
x
x
− =
=
=
This problem may be reasoned without an
equation. If the faster car gains 5 miles per hour
on the slower car, it will gain 30 miles in 6
hours.
Chapter 12 194
www.petersons.com
Exercise 8
1. (E) In x days, he has painted
x
5
of the barn.
To find what part is still unpainted, subtract the
part completed from 1. Think of 1 as
5
5
.
5
5 5
5
5
−
− x x
=
2. (B) Mary Ruth
x x
6 9
1 + =
Multiply by 18.
3 2 18
5 18
3
3
5
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
3. (E) Inlet Drain
x x
3 6
1 − =
Multiply by 6.
2 6
6
x x
x
− =
=
Notice the two fractions are subtracted, as the
drainpipe does not help the inlet pipe but works
against it.
4. (B) Tractor Plow
2
4 12
1 +
x
=
This can be done without algebra, as half the
job was completed by the tractor; therefore, the
second fraction must also be equal to
1
2
. x is
therefore 6.
5. (C) Michael Barry
2
6
2
1 +
x
=
Multiply by 6x.
2 12 6
12 4
3
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
Retest
1. (B) Represent the integers as x, x + 2, and x + 4.
3 4 10
2 14
7
2 9
x x
x
x
x
= ( )
=
=
=
+ +
+
2. (C) Represent the original fraction by
x
x 3
.
x
x
+8
3 6
8
9 −
=
Cross multiply.
9 72 24 48
120 15
8
3 24
x x
x
x
x
+ =
=
=
=
−
The original fraction is
8
24
.
3. (C) No. of Percent Amount of
Quarts · Alcohol = Alcohol
Original 40 5 200
Added x 0 0
New 40 + x 2 80 + 2x
200 = 80 + 2
120 2
60
x
x
x
=
=
4. (D) Let Charles' age now
Miriam's age now
x
x
=
= +11
xx
x
+
+
3
14
=
=
Charles' age in 3 years
Miriam's ag ge in 3 years
x x
x x
x
+14 = +
+ +
2 3
14 2 6
8
( )
=
=
Therefore, Miriam is 19 now and 2 years ago
was 17.
Problem Solving in Algebra 195
www.petersons.com
5. (A) Fast Press SlowPress
x x
12 18
1 + =
Multiply by 36.
3 2 36
5 36
7
1
5
7
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
=
hours
hours 12 minutes
6. (A) Let the number of dimes
the number of
x
x
=
= + 4 qquarters
the value of dimes in cents 10
25
x
x
=
++100 = the value of quarters in cents
10 25 100 205
35 105
3
x x
x
x
+ + =
=
=
She has 30¢ in dimes.
7. (A) Let x = amount invested at 6%
x + 150 = amount invested at 3%
.06x + .03(x + 150) = 54
Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals
6 3 150 5400
6 3 450 5400
9 4950
550
x x
x x
x
x
+ +
+ +
( ) =
=
=
= $
xx +150 700 = $
8. (B)
R · T = D
Slow 48 x 48x
Fast 55 x 55x
48 55 515
103 515
5
x x
x
x
+ =
=
= hours
Therefore, they will pass each other 5 hours
after 9:30 A.M., 2:30 P.M.
9. (A)
R · T = D
Carol 30 3.5 105
Mother x 3 3x
3 105
35
x
x
=
= m.p.h.
10. (D) Let number of pennies Frank has
number
x
x
=
= 2 oof pennies Dan has
x x
x
+12 2 12
24
=
=
−
Therefore, Dan originally had 48 pennies.
197
13
Geometry
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. If the angles of a triangle are in the ratio 5 : 6 :
7, the triangle is
(A) acute
(B) isosceles
(C) obtuse
(D) right
(E) equilateral
2. A circle whose area is 4 has a radius of x. Find
the area of a circle whose radius is 3x.
(A) 12
(B) 36
(C) 4 3
(D) 48
(E) 144
3. A spotlight is attached to the ceiling 2 feet from
one wall of a room and 3 feet from the wall
adjacent. How many feet is it from the
intersection of the two walls?
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 3 2
(D) 13
(E) 2 3
4. In parallelogram ABCD, angle B is 5 times as
large as angle C. What is the measure in
degrees of angle B?
(A) 30
(B) 60
(C) 100
(D) 120
(E) 150
5. A rectangular box with a square base contains
24 cubic feet. If the height of the box is 18
inches, how many feet are there in each side of
the base?
(A) 4
(B) 2
(C)
2 3
3
(D)
3
2
(E)
3
6. In triangle ABC, AB = BC. If angle B contains x
degrees, find the number of degrees in angle A.
(A) x
(B) 180 – x
(C) 180
2
−
x
(D) 90
2
−
x
(E) 90 – x
Chapter 13 198
www.petersons.com
7. In the diagram below, AB is perpendicular to
BC. If angle XBY is a straight angle and angle
XBC contains 37°, find the number of degrees
in angle ABY.
(A) 37
(B) 53
(C) 63
(D) 127
(E) 143
8. If AB is parallel to CD , angle 1 contains 40°,
and angle 2 contains 30°, find the number of
degrees in angle FEG.
(A) 110
(B) 140
(C) 70
(D) 40
(E) 30
9. In a circle whose center is O, arc AB contains
100°. Find the number of degrees in angle
ABO.
(A) 50
(B) 100
(C) 40
(D) 65
(E) 60
10. Find the length of the line segment joining the
points whose coordinates are (–3, 1) and (5, –5).
(A) 10
(B)
2 5
(C)
2 10
(D) 100
(E)
10
The questions in the following area will expect you to recall some of the numerical relationships learned in
geometry. If you are thoroughly familiar with these relationships, you should not find these questions difficult.
As mentioned earlier, be particularly careful with units. For example, you cannot multiply a dimension given in
feet by another given in inches when you are finding area. Read each question very carefully for the units given.
In the following sections, all the needed formulas with illustrations and practice exercises are to help you prepare
for the geometry questions on your test.
Geometry 199
www.petersons.com
1. AREAS
A. Rectangle = base · altitude = bh
Area = 40
B. Parallelogram = base · altitude = bh
Area = 40
Notice that the altitude is different from the side. It is always shorter than the second side of the parallelogram,
as a perpendicular is the shortest distance from a point to a line.
C. Rhombus =
1
2
· product of the diagonals =
1
2
1 2
d d
If AC = 20 and BD = 30, the area of ABCD =
1
2
(20)(30) = 300
Chapter 13 200
www.petersons.com
D. Square = side · side = s
2
Area = 25
Remember that every square is a rhombus, so that the rhombus formula may be used for a square if the
diagonal is given. The diagonals of a square are equal.
Area =
1
2
(8)(8) = 32
Remember also that a rhombus is not a square. Therefore do not use the s
2
formula for a rhombus. A
rhombus, however, is a parallelogram, so you may use bh if you do not know the diagonals.
E. Triangle =
1
2
· base · altitude =
1
2
bh
A =
1
2
(8)(3) = 12
F. Equilateral Triangle =
1
4
· side squared · 3
4
3
2
=
s
A = =
36
4
3 9 3
G. Trapezoid =
1
2
· altitude · sum of bases =
1
2
1 2
h b b + ( )
A =
1
2
(3)(14) = 21
Geometry 201
www.petersons.com
H. Circle = π · radius squared = π · r
2
A = π · (5)
2
= 25π
Remember that π is the ratio of the circumference of any circle and its diameter. π =
c
d
. The approximations
you have used for π in the past (3.14 or
22
7
) are just that—approximations. π is an irrational number and cannot
be expressed as a fraction or terminating decimal. Therefore all answers involving π should be left in terms of π
unless you are given a specific value to substitute for π.
A word about units—Area is measured in square units. That is, we wish to compute how many squares one
inch on each side (a square inch) or one foot on each side (a square foot), etc., can be used to cover a given
surface. To change from square inches to square feet or square yards, remember that
144 1
9
square inches square foot
square fee
=
tt square yard =1
12" = 1' 3' = 1 yd.
12 one inch squares in a row 3 one foot squares in a row
12 rows 3 rows
144 square inches in 1 sq. ft. 9 square feet in 1 sq. yd.
Chapter 13 202
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. If the diagonals of a rhombus are represented
by 4x and 6x, the area may be represented by
(A) 6x
(B) 24x
(C) 12x
(D) 6x
2
(E) 12x
2
5. A circle is inscribed in a square whose side is 6.
Express the area of the circle in terms of π.
(A) 6π
(B) 3π
(C) 9π
(D) 36π
(E) 12π
1. The dimensions of a rectangular living room
are 18 feet by 20 feet. How many square yards
of carpeting are needed to cover the floor?
(A) 360
(B) 42
(C) 40
(D) 240
(E) 90
2. In a parallelogram whose area is 15, the base is
represented by x + 7 and the altitude is x – 7.
Find the base of the parallelogram.
(A) 8
(B) 15
(C) 1
(D) 34
(E) 5
3. The sides of a right triangle are 6, 8, and 10.
Find the altitude drawn to the hypotenuse.
(A) 2.4
(B) 4.8
(C) 3.4
(D) 3.5
(E) 4.2
Geometry 203
www.petersons.com
2. PERIMETER
The perimeter of a figure is the distance around the outside. If you were fencing in an area, the number of feet of
fencing you would need is the perimeter. Perimeter is measured in linear units, that is, centimeters, inches, feet,
meters, yards, etc.
A. Any polygon = sum of all sides
P = 9 + 10 + 11 = 30
B. Circle = π · diameter = πd
or
2 · π · radius = 2πr
Since 2r = d, these formulas are the same. The perimeter of a circle is called its circumference.
C = π · 8 = 8π
or
C = 2 · π · 4 = 8π
The distance covered by a wheel in one revolution is equal to the circumference of the wheel. In making one
revolution, every point on the rim comes in contact with the ground. The distance covered is then the same as
stretching the rim out into a straight line.
The distance covered by this wheel in one revolution is 2
7
14 ⋅ ⋅ = π
π
feet.
Chapter 13 204
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appear before your answer.
4. The radius of a wheel is 18 inches. Find the
number of feet covered by this wheel in 20
revolutions.
(A) 360π
(B) 360
(C) 720π
(D) 720
(E) 60π
5. A square is equal in area to a rectangle whose
base is 9 and whose altitude is 4. Find the
perimeter of the square.
(A) 36
(B) 26
(C) 13
(D) 24
(E) none of these
1. The area of an equilateral triangle is 16 3 .
Find its perimeter.
(A) 24
(B) 16
(C) 48
(D)
24 3
(E)
48 3
2. The hour hand of a clock is 3 feet long. How
many feet does the tip of this hand move
between 9:30 P.M. and 1:30 A.M. the
following day?
(A) π
(B) 2π
(C) 3π
(D) 4π
(E) 24π
3. If the radius of a circle is increased by 3, the
circumference is increased by
(A) 3
(B) 3π
(C) 6
(D) 6π
(E) 4.5
Geometry 205
www.petersons.com
3. RIGHT TRIANGLES
A. Pythagorean theorem
(leg)
2
+ (leg)
2
= (hypotenuse)
2
5 2
25 4
29
29
2 2
2
2
2
( ) ( ) =
=
=
=
+
+
x
x
x
x
B. Pythagorean triples
These are sets of numbers that satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem. When a given set of numbers such as 3, 4, 5
forms a Pythagorean triple (3
2
+ 4
2
= 5
2
), any multiples of this set such as 6, 8, 10 or 30, 40, 50 also form a
Pythagorean triple. Memorizing the sets of Pythagorean triples that follow will save you valuable time in solving
problems, for, if you recognize given numbers as multiples of Pythagorean triples, you do not have to do any
arithmetic at all. The most common Pythagorean triples that should be memorized are
3, 4, 5
5, 12, 13
8, 15, 17
7, 24, 25
Squaring 34 and 16 to apply the Pythagorean theorem would take too much time. Instead, recognize the hypot
enuse as 2(17). Suspect an 8, 15, 17 triangle. Since the given leg is 2(8), the missing leg will be 2(15) or 30,
without any computation at all.
Chapter 13 206
www.petersons.com
C. 30°–60°–90°triangle
a) The leg opposite the 30°angle is onehalf the hypotenuse.
b) The leg opposite the 60°angle is onehalf the hypotenuse ·
3 .
c) An altitude in an equilateral triangle forms a 30°–60°–90°triangle and is therefore equal to onehalf the
side · 3 .
D. 45°–45°–90°triangle (isosceles right triangle)
a) Each leg is onehalf the hypotenuse times 2 .
b) Hypotenuse is leg times 2 .
c) The diagonal of a square forms a 45°–45°–90°triangle and is therefore equal to a side times 2 .
Geometry 207
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. A farmer uses 140 feet of fencing to enclose a
rectangular field. If the ratio of length to width
is 3 : 4, find the diagonal, in feet, of the field.
(A) 50
(B) 100
(C) 20
(D) 10
(E) cannot be determined
2. Find the altitude of an equilateral triangle
whose side is 20.
(A) 10
(B) 20 3
(C) 10 3
(D) 20 2
(E) 10 2
3. Two boats leave the same dock at the same time,
one traveling due west at 8 miles per hour and
the other due north at 15 miles per hour. How
many miles apart are the boats after three hours?
(A) 17
(B) 69
(C) 75
(D) 51
(E) 39
4. Find the perimeter of a square whose diagonal
is
6 2
.
(A) 24
(B)
12 2
(C) 12
(D) 20
(E)
24 2
5. Find the length of DB.
(A) 8
(B) 10
(C) 12
(D) 15
(E) 20
Chapter 13 208
www.petersons.com
4. COORDINATE GEOMETRY
A. Distance between two points =
x x y y
2 1
2
2 1
2
− + ( ) ( ) 
The distance between (–3, 2) and (5, –1) is
− − + + 3 +9 3 5 8 64 73
2 2 2 2
]
]
( )
]
]
= ( ) ( ) = = 2 1 
B. The midpoint of a line segment =
x x y y
1 2 1 2
2 2
+ +
,

.
`
·
Since a midpoint is in the middle, its coordinates are found by averaging the x coordinates and averaging the y
coordinates. Remember that to find the average of two numbers, you add them and divide by two. Be very careful
of signs in adding signed numbers. Review the rules given earlier if necessary.
The midpoint of the segment joining (–4, 1) to (–2, –9) is
− + + 4
2
1
2 2 2
2 9
6 8
3,4
( ) ( )

.
`
·
=

.
`
·
=( , , ))
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. AB is the diameter of a circle whose center is
O. If the coordinates of A are (2, 6) and the
coordinates of B are (6, 2), find the coordinates
of O.
(A) (4, 4)
(B) (4, –4)
(C) (2, –2)
(D) (0, 0)
(E) (2, 2)
2. AB is the diameter of a circle whose center is
O. If the coordinates of O are (2, 1) and the
coordinates of B are (4, 6), find the coordinates
of A.
(A)
3 3
1
2
,

.
`
·
(B)
1 2
1
2
,

.
`
·
(C) (0, –4)
(D)
2
1
2
1 ,

.
`
·
(E)
−1 − , 2
1
2

.
`
·
3. Find the distance from the point whose
coordinates are (4, 3) to the point whose
coordinates are (8, 6).
(A) 5
(B) 25
(C)
7
(D)
67
(E) 15
4. The vertices of a triangle are (2, 1), (2, 5), and
(5, 1). The area of the triangle is
(A) 12
(B) 10
(C) 8
(D) 6
(E) 5
5. The area of a circle whose center is at (0,0) is
16π. The circle passes through each of the
following points except
(A) (4, 4)
(B) (0, 4)
(C) (4, 0)
(D) (–4, 0)
(E) (0, –4)
Geometry 209
www.petersons.com
5. PARALLEL LINES
A. If two lines are parallel and cut by a transversal, the alternate interior angles are
congruent.
If AB is parallel to CD , then angle 1 ≅ angle 3 and
angle 2 ≅ angle 4.
B. If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, the corresponding angles are congruent.
If AB is parallel to CD , then angle 1 ≅ angle 5
angle 2 ≅ angle 6
angle 3 ≅ angle 7
angle 4 ≅ angle 8
C. If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, interior angles on the same side of the
transversal are supplementary.
If AB is parallel to CD , angle 1 + angle 4 = 180°
angle 2 + angle 3 = 180°
Chapter 13 210
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If AB is parallel to
CD
,
BC
is parallel to ED ,
and angle B = 30°, find the number of degrees
in angle D.
(A) 30
(B) 60
(C) 150
(D) 120
(E) none of these
2. If AB is parallel to CD , angle A = 35°, and
angle C = 45°, find the number of degrees in
angle AEC.
(A) 35
(B) 45
(C) 70
(D) 80
(E) 100
3. If AB is parallel to CD and angle 1 = 130°,
find angle 2.
(A) 130°
(B) 100°
(C) 40°
(D) 60°
(E) 50°
4. If AB is parallel to CD EF , bisects angle BEG,
and GF bisects angle EGD, find the number of
degrees in angle EFG.
(A) 40
(B) 60
(C) 90
(D) 120
(E) cannot be determined
5. If AB is parallel to CD and angle 1 = x°, then
the sum of angle 1 and angle 2 is
(A) 2x°
(B) (180 – x)°
(C) 180°
(D) (180 + x)°
(E) none of these
Geometry 211
www.petersons.com
6. TRIANGLES
A. If two sides of a triangle are congruent, the angles opposite these sides are congruent.
If AB AC ≅ , then angle B ≅ angle C.
B. If two angles of a triangle are congruent, the sides opposite these angles are congruent.
If angle S ≅ angle T, then RS RT ≅ .
C. The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180°.
Angle F = 180º – 100º – 30º = 50º.
Chapter 13 212
www.petersons.com
D. The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of the measures of
the two remote interior angles.
Angle 1 = 140°
E. If two angles of one triangle are congruent to two angles of a second triangle, the
third angles are congruent.
Angle A will be congruent to angle R.
Geometry 213
www.petersons.com
Exercise 6
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. The angles of a triangle are in the ratio 1 : 5 : 6.
This triangle is
(A) acute
(B) obtuse
(C) isosceles
(D) right
(E) equilateral
2. If the vertex angle of an isosceles triangle is
50°, find the number of degrees in one of the
base angles.
(A) 50
(B) 130
(C) 60
(D) 65
(E) 55
3. In triangle ABC, angle A is three times as large
as angle B. The exterior angle at C is 100°.
Find the number of degrees in angle A.
(A) 60
(B) 80
(C) 20
(D) 25
(E) 75
4. If a base angle of an isosceles triangle is
represented by x°, represent the number of
degrees in the vertex angle.
(A) 180 – x
(B) x – 180
(C) 2x – 180
(D) 180 – 2x
(E) 90 – 2x
5. In triangle ABC,
AB BC =
. If angle A =
(4x – 30)°and angle C = (2x + 10)°, find the
number of degrees in angle B.
(A) 20
(B) 40
(C) 50
(D) 100
(E) 80
Chapter 13 214
www.petersons.com
7. POLYGONS
A. The sum of the measures of the angles of a polygon of n sides is (n – 2)180°.
Since ABCDE has 5 sides, angle A + angle B + angle C + angle D + angle E = (5 – 2)180°= 3(180)°= 540°
B. Properties of a parallelogram
a) Opposite sides are parallel
b) Opposite sides are congruent
c) Opposite angles are congruent
d) Consecutive angles are supplementary
e) Diagonals bisect each other
C. Properties of a rectangle
a) All 5 properties of a parallelogram
b) All angles are right angles
c) Diagonals are congruent
D. Properties of a rhombus
a) All 5 properties of a parallelogram
b) All sides are congruent
c) Diagonals are perpendicular to each other
d) Diagonals bisect the angles
E. Properties of a square
a) All 5 parallelogram properties
b) Two additional rectangle properties
c) Three additional rhombus properties
Geometry 215
www.petersons.com
Exercise 7
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Find the number of degrees in the sum of the
interior angles of a hexagon.
(A) 360
(B) 540
(C) 720
(D) 900
(E) 1080
2. In parallelogram ABCD, AB = x + 4, BC = x –
6, and CD = 2x – 16. Find AD.
(A) 20
(B) 24
(C) 28
(D) 14
(E) 10
3. In parallelogram ABCD, AB = x + 8, BC = 3x,
and CD = 4x – 4. ABCD must be a
(A) rectangle
(B) rhombus
(C) trapezoid
(D) square
(E) pentagon
4. The sum of the angles in a rhombus is
(A) 180°
(B) 360°
(C) 540°
(D) 720°
(E) 450°
5. Which of the following statements is false?
(A) A square is a rhombus.
(B) A rhombus is a parallelogram.
(C) A rectangle is a rhombus.
(D) A rectangle is a parallelogram.
(E) A square is a rectangle.
Chapter 13 216
www.petersons.com
8. CIRCLES
A. A central angle is equal in degrees to its intercepted arc.
If arc AB = 50°, then angle AOB = 50°.
B. An inscribed angle is equal in degrees to onehalf its intercepted arc.
If arc AC = 100°, then angle ABC = 50°.
C. An angle formed by two chords intersecting in a circle is equal in degrees to
onehalf the sum of its intercepted arcs.
If arc AD = 30°and arc CB = 120°, then angle AED = 75°.
D. An angle outside the circle formed by two secants, a secant and a tangent, or two
tangents is equal in degrees to onehalf the difference of its intercepted arcs.
If arc AD = 120°and arc BD = 30°, then angle C = 45°.
E. Two tangent segments drawn to a circle from the same external point are congruent.
If AC and AE are tangent to circle O at B and D, then AB ≅ AD.
Geometry 217
www.petersons.com
Exercise 8
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If circle O is inscribed in triangle ABC, find the
length of side AB.
(A) 12
(B) 14
(C) 9
(D) 10
(E) 7
2. Find angle x.
(A) 40°
(B) 20°
(C) 50°
(D) 70°
(E) 80°
3. Find angle x.
(A) 120°
(B) 50°
(C) 70°
(D) 40°
(E) 60°
4. Find the number of degrees in arc AC.
(A) 60
(B) 50
(C) 25
(D) 100
(E) 20
5. The number of degrees in angle ABC is
(A)
1
2
y
(B) y
(C)
1
2
x
(D)
1
2
x y − ( )
(E)
1
2
x y + ( )
Chapter 13 218
www.petersons.com
9. VOLUMES
A. The volume of a rectangular solid is equal to the product of its length, width, and height.
V = (10)(6)(5) = 300
B. The volume of a cube is equal to the cube of an edge, since the length, width, and
height are all equal.
V = (3)
3
= 27
C. The volume of a cylinder is equal to π times the square of the radius of the base
times the height.
V = π (4)
2
(5) = 80π
Geometry 219
www.petersons.com
Exercise 9
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. A rectangular tank 10 inches by 8 inches by 4
inches is filled with water. If the water is to be
transferred to smaller tanks in the form of
cubes 4 inches on a side, how many of these
tanks are needed?
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
(E) 8
5. The base of a rectangular tank is 6 feet by 5
feet and its height is 16 inches. Find the
number of cubic feet of water in the tank when
it is
5
8
full.
(A) 25
(B) 40
(C) 480
(D) 768
(E) 300
1. The surface area of a cube is 96 square feet.
How many cubic feet are there in the volume of
the cube?
(A) 16
(B) 4
(C) 12
(D) 64
(E) 32
2. A cylindrical pail has a radius of 7 inches and a
height of 10 inches. Approximately how many
gallons will the pail hold if there are 231 cubic
inches to a gallon? (Use π =
22
7
)
(A) .9
(B) 4.2
(C) 6.7
(D) 5.1
(E) 4.8
3. Water is poured into a cylindrical tank at the
rate of 9 cubic inches a minute. How many
minutes will it take to fill the tank if its
radius is 3 inches and its height is 14 inches?
(Use π =
22
7
)
(A) 14
2
3
(B) 44
(C) 30
(D) 27
2
9
(E) 35
Chapter 13 220
www.petersons.com
10. SIMILAR POLYGONS
A. Corresponding angles of similar polygons are congruent.
B. Corresponding sides of similar polygons are in proportion.
If triangle ABC is similar to triangle DEF and the sides and angles are given as marked, then EF must be equal to
12 as the ratio of corresponding sides is 2 : 6 or 1 : 3.
C. When figures are similar, all ratios between corresponding lines are equal. This
includes the ratios of corresponding sides, medians, altitudes, angle bisectors, radii,
diameters, perimeters, and circumferences. The ratio is referred to as the linear ratio
or ratio of similitude.
If triangle ABC is similar to triangle DEF and the segments are given as marked, then EH is equal to 2.5
because the linear ratio is 6 : 3 or 2 : 1.
D. When figures are similar, the ratio of their areas is equal to the square of the linear ratio.
If triangle ABC is similar to triangle DEF, the area of triangle ABC will be 9 times as great as the area of
triangle DEF. The linear ratio is 12 : 4 or 3 : 1. The area ratio will be the square of this or 9 : 1. If the area of
triangle ABC had been given as 27, the area of triangle DEF would be 3.
Geometry 221
www.petersons.com
E. When figures are similar, the ratio of their volumes is equal to the cube of their
linear ratio.
The volume of the larger cube is 8 times the volume of the smaller cube. The ratio of sides is 4 : 2 or 2 : 1. The
ratio of areas would be 4 : 1. The ratio of volumes would be 8 : 1.
Exercise 10
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If the area of a circle of radius x is 5π, find the
area of a circle of radius 3x.
(A) 10π
(B) 15π
(C) 20π
(D) 30π
(E) 45π
2. If the length and width of a rectangle are each
doubled, the area is increased by
(A) 50%
(B) 100%
(C) 200%
(D) 300%
(E) 400%
3. The area of one circle is 9 times as great as the
area of another. If the radius of the smaller
circle is 3, find the radius of the larger circle.
(A) 9
(B) 12
(C) 18
(D) 24
(E) 27
4. If the radius of a circle is doubled, then
(A) the circumference and area are both
doubled
(B) the circumference is doubled and the area
is multiplied by 4
(C) the circumference is multiplied by 4 and
the area is doubled
(D) the circumference and area are each
multiplied by 4
(E) the circumference stays the same and the
area is doubled
5. The volumes of two similar solids are 250 and
128. If a dimension of the larger solid is 25,
find the corresponding side of the smaller solid.
(A) 12.8
(B) 15
(C) 20
(D) 40
(E) cannot be determined
Chapter 13 222
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. The area of a trapezoid whose bases are 10 and
12 and whose altitude is 3 is
(A) 66
(B) 11
(C) 33
(D) 25
(E) 16
1
2
2. The circumference of a circle whose area is
16π is
(A) 8π
(B) 4π
(C) 16π
(D) 8
(E) 16
3. Find the perimeter of a square whose diagonal
is 8.
(A) 32
(B) 16
(C) 32 2
(D) 16 2
(E) 32 3
4. The length of the line segment joining the point
A(4, –3) to B(7, –7) is
(A)
221
(B)
185
(C) 7
(D) 6
1
2
(E) 5
5. Find angle x if AB is parallel to CD .
(A) 35°
(B) 80°
(C) 245°
(D) 65°
(E) 55°
6. In triangle ABC, the angles are in a ratio of
1 : 1 : 2. The largest angle of the triangle is
(A) 45°
(B) 60°
(C) 90°
(D) 120°
(E) 100°
7. Find the number of degrees in each angle of a
regular pentagon.
(A) 72
(B) 108
(C) 60
(D) 180
(E) 120
8. Find the number of degrees in arc AB.
(A) 80
(B) 20
(C) 60
(D) 100
(E) 90
9. Find the edge, in inches, of a cube whose
volume is equal to the volume of a rectangular
solid 2 in. by 6 in. by 18 in.
(A) 4
(B) 8
(C) 5
(D) 6
(E) 7
10. If the volume of one cube is 8 times as great as
another, then the ratio of the area of a face of
the larger cube to the area of a face of the
smaller cube is
(A) 2 : 1
(B) 4 : 1
(C)
2 1 :
(D) 8 : 1
(E)
2 2 1 :
Geometry 223
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (A) Represent the angles as 5x, 6x, and 7x.
They must add up to 180°.
18 180
10
x
x
=
=
The angles are 50°, 60°, and 70°, an acute
triangle.
2. (B) The area of a circle is πr
2
. The area of a
circle with radius x is πx
2
, which equals 4.
The area of a circle with radius 3x is π (3x)
2
= 9πx
2
= 9 · 4 = 36.
3. (D)
2 3
4 9
13
13
2 2 2
2
2
+
+
=
=
=
=
x
x
x
x
4. (E)
The sum of the angles in a parallelogram is 360°.
12 360
30
x
x
= °
= °
Angle B = 5x = 5 · 30°= 150°
5. (A) The volume of a rectangular box is the
product of its length, width, and height. Since
the height is 18 inches, or 1
1
2
feet, and the
length and width of the square base are the
same, we have
x x
x
x
⋅ ⋅ =
=
=
1
1
2
24
16
4
2
6. (D) The remaining degrees of the triangle are
180 – x. Since the triangle is isosceles, the
remaining angles are equal, each
180
2
90
2
−
−
x x
=
.
7. (D)
Angle ABX = 90°– 37°= 53°
Angle ABY = 180°– 53°= 127°
8. (C)
Extend FE to H. ∠EHG = ∠AFE = 40°.
∠HEG must equal 110°because there are 180°
in a triangle. Since ∠FEG is the supplement of
∠HEG, ∠FEG = 70°.
9. (C)
Angle O is a central angle equal to its arc, 100°.
This leaves 80°for the other two angles. Since the
triangle is isosceles (because the legs are both
radii and therefore equal), angle ABO is 40°.
10. (A) d = ( ) ( ) ( )
= ( ) ( ) =
= =
5 5 1
8 6 64 36
100 10
2 2
2 2
− 3 +
+ +
 

Chapter 13 224
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
1. (C) Find the area in square feet and then
convert to square yards by dividing by 9.
Remember there are 9 square feet in one square
yard.
(18 · 20) ÷ 9 = 360 ÷ 9 = 40 square yards
2. (B) Area of parallelogram = b · h
x x
x
x
x
x
+
+
7 7 15
49 15
64
8
7 15
2
2
( )( ) =
=
=
=
= =
−
−
Base
3. (B) Area of triangle =
1
2
⋅ ⋅ b h
Using one leg as base and the other as altitude,
the area is
1
2
· 6 · 8 = 24. Using the hypotenuse
as base and the altitude to the hypotenuse will
give the same area.
1
2
10 24
5 24
4 8
1
2
10 4 8 24
⋅ ⋅ =
=
= ∴ ⋅ ⋅ =
h
h
h . .
4. (E) Area of rhombus =
1
2
· product of
diagonals
Area = ( )( ) =
( )
=
1
2
4 6
1
2
24 12
2 2
x x x x
5. (C)
radius of circle = 3
Area = πr
2
= 9π
Exercise 2
1. (A) Area of equilateral triangle =
s
2
4
3
Therefore,
s
2
4
must equal 16
s
2
= 64
s = 8
Perimeter is 8 + 8 + 8 = 24
2. (B) In 4 hours the hour hand moves through
onethird of the circumference of the clock.
C r = = ( ) =
⋅ =
2 2 3 6
1
3
6 2
π π π
π π
3. (D) Compare 2πr with 2π (r + 3).
2π (r + 3) = 2πr + 6π
Circumference was increased by 6π. Trying
this with a numerical value for r will give the
same result.
4. (E) In one revolution, the distance covered is
equal to the circumference.
C = 2πr = 2π (18) = 36π inches
To change this to feet, divide by 12.
36
12
3
π
π = feet
In 20 revolutions, the wheel will cover 20(3π)
or 60π feet.
5. (D) Area of rectangle = b · h = 36
Area of square = s
2
= 36
Therefore, s = 6 and perimeter = 24
Geometry 225
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (A)
14 140
10
x
x
=
=
The rectangle is 30′ by 40′. This is a 3, 4, 5
right triangle, so the diagonal is 50′.
2. (C) The altitude in an equilateral triangle is
always
1
2
3 side⋅ .
3. (D) This is an 8, 15, 17 triangle, making the
missing side (3)17, or 51.
4. (A) The diagonal in a square is equal to the
side times
2
. Therefore, the side is 6 and the
perimeter is 24.
5. (C)
Triangle ABC is a 3, 4, 5 triangle with all sides
multiplied by 5. Therefore CB = 20. Triangle
ACD is an 8, 15, 17 triangle. Therefore CD= 8.
CB – CD = DB = 12.
Exercise 4
1. (A) Find the midpoint of AB by averaging the
x coordinates and averaging the y coordinates.
6 2
2
2 6
2
4 4
+ +
, ,

.
`
·
=( )
2. (C) O is the midpoint of AB.
x
x x
y
y y
+
+
+
+
4
2
2 4 4 0
6
2
1 6 2 4
= = =
= = =
,
, −
A is the point (0, –4).
3. (A)
d = ( ) ( ) =
= = =
8 4 6 3 4 3
16 9 25 5
2 2
2 2
− + +
+

4. (D) Sketch the triangle and you will see it is a
right triangle with legs of 4 and 3.
Area = ⋅ ⋅ = ⋅ ⋅ =
1
2
1
2
4 3 6 b h
5. (A) Area of a circle = πr
2
πr
2
= 16π r = 4
The point (4, 4) lies at a distance of
( ) ( ) 4 0 4 0 32
2 2
− + − = units from (0, 0). All
the other points lie 4 units from (0, 0).
Chapter 13 226
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
1. (A) Angle B = Angle C because of alternate
interior angles. Then Angle C = Angle D for
the same reason. Therefore, Angle D = 30°.
2. (D)
Extend AE to F. ∠A = ∠EFC
∠CEF must equal 100°because there are
180°in a triangle. ∠ AEC is supplementary
to ∠CEF. ∠ AEC = 80°
3. (E)
∠ = ∠
∠ ∠ = °
∠ = °
1 3
2 3 180
2 50
+
4. (C) Since ∠BEG and ∠EGD add to 180°,
halves of these angles must add to 90°. Triangle
EFG contains 180°, leaving 90°for ∠EFG.
5. (C)
∠ = ∠
∠ = ∠
∠ ∠ = ∠ ∠
1 3
2 4
1 2 3 4 + +
But ∠3 + ∠4 = 180°. Therefore, ∠1 + ∠2 = 180°
Exercise 6
1. (D) Represent the angles as x, 5x, and 6x.
They must add to 180°.
12 180
15
x
x
=
=
The angles are 15°, 75°, and 90°. Thus, it is a
right triangle.
2. (D) There are 130°left to be split evenly
between the base angles (the base angles must
be equal). Each one must be 65°.
3. (E)
The exterior angle is equal to the sum of the
two remote interior angles.
4 100
25
3 75
x
x
A x
=
=
= = ° Angle
4. (D) The other base angle is also x. These two
base angles add to 2x. The remaining degrees
of the triangle, or 180 – 2x, are in the vertex
angle.
5. (E)
∠ = ∠
=
=
=
A C
x x
x
x
4 30 2 10
2 40
20
− +
∠ A and ∠ C are each 50°, leaving 80°for ∠ B.
Geometry 227
www.petersons.com
Exercise 7
1. (C) A hexagon has 6 sides. Sum = (n – 2) 180
= 4(180) = 720
2. (D) Opposite sides of a parallelogram are
congruent, so AB = CD.
x x
x
AD BC x
+ 4 2 16
20
6 14
=
=
= = =
−
−
3. (B) AB = CD
x x
x
x
AB BC CD
+ = −
=
=
= = =
8 4 4
12 3
4
12 12 12
If all sides are congruent, it must be a rhombus.
Additional properties would be needed to make
it a square.
4. (B) A rhombus has 4 sides. Sum = (n – 2)
180 = 2(180) = 360
5. (C) Rectangles and rhombuses are both types
of parallelograms but do not share the same
special properties. A square is both a rectangle
and a rhombus with added properties.
Exercise 8
1. (C) Tangent segments drawn to a circle from
the same external point are congruent. If CE =
5, then CF = 5, leaving 7 for BF. Therefore BD
is also 7. If AE = 2, then AD = 2.
BD + DA = BA = 9
2. (D) Angle O is a central angle equal to its arc,
40°. This leaves 140°for the other two angles.
Since the triangle is isosceles, because the legs
are equal radii, each angle is 70°.
3. (E) The remaining arc is 120°. The inscribed
angle x is
1
2
its intercepted arc.
4. (A)
50
1
2
40
100 40
60
°= ° ( )
°= °
°=
+
+
AC
AC
AC
5. (D) An angle outside the circle is
1
2
the
difference of its intercepted arcs.
Chapter 13 228
www.petersons.com
Exercise 9
1. (D) There are 6 equal squares in the surface
area of a cube. Each square will have an area of
96
6
or 16. Each edge is 4.
V = e
3
= 4
3
= 64
2. (C) V = πr
2
h =
22
7
· 49 · 10 = 1540 cubic
inches
Divide by 231 to find gallons.
3. (B) V = πr
2
h =
22
7
· 9 · 14 = 396 cubic inches
Divide by 9 to find minutes.
4. (B) V = l · w · h = 10 · 8 · 4 = 320 cubic
inches
Each small cube = 4
3
= 64 cubic inches.
Therefore it will require 5 cubes.
5. (A) Change 16 inches to 1
1
3
feet.
V = 6 · 5 · 1
1
3
= 40 cubic feet when full.
5
8
· 40 = 25
Exercise 10
1. (E) If the radius is multiplied by 3, the area is
multiplied by 3
2
or 9.
2. (D) If the dimensions are all doubled, the area
is multiplied by 2
2
or 4. If the new area is 4
times as great as the original area, is has been
increased by 300%.
3. (A) If the area ratio is 9 : 1, the linear ratio is
3 : 1. Therefore, the larger radius is 3 times the
smaller radius.
4. (B) Ratio of circumferences is the same as
ratio of radii, but the area ratio is the square of
this.
5. (C) We must take the cube root of the volume
ratio to find the linear ratio. This becomes
much easier if you simplify the ratio first.
250
128
125
64
=
The linear ratio is then 5 : 4.
5
4
25
5 100
20
=
=
=
x
x
x
Geometry 229
www.petersons.com
Retest
1. (C) Area of trapezoid =
1
2
1 2
h b b + ( )
Area = ⋅ ( ) =
1
2
3 10 12 33 +
2. (A) Area of circle = πr
2
= 16π
Therefore, r
2
= 16 or r = 4
Circumference of circle = 2πr = 2π (4) = 8π
3. (D) The side of a square is equal to the
diagonal times
2
2
. Therefore, the side is
4 2
and the perimeter is
16 2
.
4. (E) d = ( ) ( ) ( )
= ( ) ( ) =
= =
7 4 7
3 4 9 16
25 5
2 2
2 2
− +
+ +
  3

5. (D)
∠CDE must equal 65°because there are 180°
in a triangle. Since AB is parallel to CD , ∠x =
∠CDE = 65°.
6. (C) Represent the angles as x, x, and 2x. They
must add to 180°.
4 180
45
x
x
=
=
Therefore, the largest angle is 2x = 2(45°) = 90°.
7. (B) A pentagon has 5 sides. Sum (n – 2)180 =
3(180) = 540°
In a regular pentagon, all the angles are equal.
Therefore, each angle =
540
5
108 = °.
8. (D)
An angle outside the circle is
1
2
the difference
of its intercepted arcs.
40
1
2
20
80 20
100
=
=
=
( ) x
x
x
−
−
9. (D) V = l · w · h = 2 · 6 · 18 = 216
The volume of a cube is equal to the cube of an
edge.
V e
e
e
=
=
=
3
3
216
6
10. (B) If the volume ratio is 8 : 1, the linear ratio
is 2 : 1, and the area ratio is the square of this,
or 4:1.
231
14
Inequalities
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. If 4x < 6, then
(A) x = 1.5
(B) x <
2
3
(C) x >
2
3
(D) x <
3
2
(E) x >
3
2
2. a and b are positive numbers. If a = b and
c > d, then
(A) a + c < b + d
(B) a + c > b + d
(C) a – c > b – d
(D) ac < bd
(E) a + c < b – d
3. Which value of x will make the following
expression true?
3
5 10
4
5
< <
x
(A) 5
(B) 6
(C) 7
(D) 8
(E) 9
4. In triangle ABC, AB = AC and EC < DB. Then
(A) DB < AE
(B) DB < AD
(C) AD > AE
(D) AD < AE
(E) AD > EC
5. In triangle ABC, ∠1 > ∠2 and ∠2 > ∠3. Then
(A) AC < AB
(B) AC > BC
(C) BC > AC
(D) BC < AB
(E) ∠3 > ∠1
6. If point C lies between A and B on line segment
AB, which of the following is always true?
(A) AC = CB
(B) AC > CB
(C) CB > AC
(D) AB < AC + CB
(E) AB = CB + AC
Chapter 14 232
www.petersons.com
7. If AC is perpendicular to BD, which of the
following is always true?
I. AC = BC
II. AC < AB
III. AB > AD
(A) I only
(B) II and III only
(C) II only
(D) III only
(E) I and II only
8. If x < 0 and y > 0, which of the following is
always true?
(A) x + y > 0
(B) x + y < 0
(C) y – x < 0
(D) x – y < 0
(E) 2x > y
9. In triangle ABC, BC is extended to D. If ∠A =
50° and ∠ACD = 120°, then
(A) BC > AB
(B) AC > AB
(C) BC > AC
(D) AB > AC
(E) ∠B < ∠A
10. In right triangle ABC, ∠A < ∠B and ∠B < ∠C.
Then
(A) ∠A > 45°
(B) ∠B = 90°
(C) ∠B > 90°
(D) ∠C = 90°
(E) ∠C > 90°
Inequalities 233
www.petersons.com
1. ALGEBRAIC INEQUALITIES
Algebraic inequality statements are solved in the same manner as equations. However, do not forget that when
ever you multiply or divide by a negative number, the order of the inequality, that is, the inequality symbol must
be reversed. In reading the inequality symbol, remember that it points to the smaller quantity. a < b is read a is
less than b. a > b is read a is greater than b.
Example:
Solve for x: 12 – 4x < 8
Solution:
Add –12 to each side.
–4x < –4
Divide by –4, remembering to reverse the inequality sign.
x > 1
Example:
6x + 5 > 7x + 10
Solution:
Collect all the terms containing x on the left side of the equation and all numerical terms on the
right. As with equations, remember that if a term comes from one side of the inequality to the other,
that term changes sign.
–x > 5
Divide (or multiply) by –1.
x < –5
Chapter 14 234
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Solve for x: 8x < 5(2x + 4)
(A) x > – 10
(B) x < – 10
(C) x > 10
(D) x < 10
(E) x < 18
2. Solve for x: 6x + 2 – 8x < 14
(A) x = 6
(B) x = –6
(C) x > –6
(D) x < –6
(E) x > 6
3. A number increased by 10 is greater than 50.
What numbers satisfy this condition?
(A) x > 60
(B) x < 60
(C) x > –40
(D) x < 40
(E) x > 40
4. Solve for x: –.4x < 4
(A) x > –10
(B) x > 10
(C) x < 8
(D) x < –10
(E) x < 36
5. Solve for x: .03n > –.18
(A) n < –.6
(B) n > .6
(C) n > 6
(D) n > –6
(E) n < –6
6. Solve for b: 15b < 10
(A) b <
3
2
(B) b >
3
2
(C) b < −
3
2
(D) b <
2
3
(E) b >
2
3
7. If x
2
< 4, then
(A) x > 2
(B) x < 2
(C) x > –2
(D) –2 < x < 2
(E) –2 ≤ x ≤ 2
8. Solve for n: n + 4.3 < 2.7
(A) n > 1.6
(B) n > –1.6
(C) n < 1.6
(D) n < –1.6
(E) n = 1.6
9. If x < 0 and y < 0, which of the following is
always true?
(A) x + y > 0
(B) xy < 0
(C) x – y > 0
(D) x + y < 0
(E) x = y
10. If x < 0 and y > 0, which of the following will
always be greater than 0?
(A) x + y
(B) x – y
(C)
x
y
(D) xy
(E) –2x
Inequalities 235
www.petersons.com
2. GEOMETRIC INEQUALITIES
In working with geometric inequalities, certain postulates and theorems should be reviewed.
A. If unequal quantities are added to unequal quantities of the same order, the sums
are unequal in the same order.
If and
then
AC AD
AB AE
BC ED
>
+ >
>
( )
B. If equal quantities are added to unequal quantities, the sums are unequal in the
same order.
AB AE
BC ED
and
then
AC AD
>
+ =
>
( )
C. If equal quantities are subtracted from unequal quantities, the differences are
unequal in the same order.
If and
then
AB AE
AC AD
BC ED
>
=
>
( ) −
D. If unequal quantities are subtracted from equal quantities, the results are unequal
in the opposite order.
AB AC
DB EC
=
<
>
(−) AD AE
E. Doubles of unequals are unequal in the same order.
M is the midpoint of AB
N is the midpoint of CD
AM > CN
Therefore, AB > CD
Chapter 14 236
www.petersons.com
F. Halves of unequals are unequal in the same order.
∠ABC > ∠DEF
BG
bisects ∠ABC
EH bisects ∠DEF
Therefore, ∠1 > ∠2
G. If the first of three quantities is greater than the second, and the second is greater
than the third, then the first is greater than the third.
If ∠A > ∠B and ∠B > ∠C, then ∠A > ∠C.
H. The sum of two sides of a triangle must be greater than the third side.
AB + BC > AC
I. If two sides of a triangle are unequal, the angles opposite are unequal, with the
larger angle opposite the larger side.
If AB > AC, then ∠C > ∠B.
J. If two angles of a triangle are unequal, the sides opposite these angles are unequal,
with the larger side opposite the larger angle.
If ∠C > ∠B, then AB > AC.
Inequalities 237
www.petersons.com
K. An exterior angle of a triangle is greater than either remote interior angle.
∠ACD > ∠B and ∠ACD > ∠A
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. Which of the following statements is true
regarding triangle ABC?
(A) AC > AB
(B) AB > BC
(C) AC > BC
(D) BC > AB
(E) BC > AB + AC
2. In triangle RST, RS = ST. If P is any point on RS,
which of the following statements is always true?
(A) PT < PR
(B) PT > PR
(C) PT = PR
(D) PT =
1
2
PR
(E) PT ≤ PR
3. If ∠A > ∠C and ∠ABD = 120°, then
(A) AC < AB
(B) BC < AB
(C) ∠C > ∠ABC
(D) BC > AC
(E) ∠ABC > ∠A
4. If AB ⊥ CD and ∠1 > ∠4, then
(A) ∠1 > ∠2
(B) ∠4 > ∠3
(C) ∠2 > ∠3
(D) ∠2 < ∠3
(E) ∠2 < ∠4
5. Which of the following sets of numbers could
be the sides of a triangle?
(A) 1, 2, 3
(B) 2, 2, 4
(C) 3, 3, 6
(D) 1, 1.5, 2
(E) 5, 6, 12
Chapter 14 238
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If 2x > –5, then
(A) x >
5
2
(B) x > −
5
2
(C) x > −
2
5
(D) x <
5
2
(E) x < −
5
2
2. m, n > 0. If m = n and p < q, then
(A) m – p < n – q
(B) p – m > q –n
(C) m – p > n – q
(D) mp > nq
(E) m + q < n + p
3. If ∠3 > ∠2 and ∠1 = ∠2, then
(A) AB > BD
(B) AB < BD
(C) DC = BD
(D) AD > BD
(E) AB < AC
4. If ∠1> ∠2 and ∠2 > ∠3, then
(A) AB > AD
(B) AC > AD
(C) AC < CD
(D) AD > AC
(E) AB > BC
5. If
x
2
> 6, then
(A) x > 3
(B) x < 3
(C) x > 12
(D) x < 12
(E) x > –12
6. If AB = AC and ∠1 > ∠B, then
(A) ∠B > ∠C
(B) ∠1 > ∠C
(C) BD > AD
(D) AB > AD
(E) ∠ADC > ∠ADB
7. Which of the following sets of numbers may be
used as the sides of a triangle?
(A) 7, 8, 9
(B) 3, 5, 8
(C) 8, 5, 2
(D) 3, 10, 6
(E) 4, 5, 10
8. In isosceles triangle RST, RS = ST. If A is the
midpoint of RS and B is the midpoint of ST, then
(A) SA > ST
(B) BT > BS
(C) BT = SA
(D) SR > RT
(E) RT > ST
Inequalities 239
www.petersons.com
10. In triangle ABC, AD is the altitude to BC. Then
(A) AD > DC
(B) AD < BD
(C) AD > AC
(D) BD > DC
(E) AB > BD
9. If x > 0 and y < 0, which of the following is
always true?
(A) x – y > y – x
(B) x + y > 0
(C) xy > 0
(D) y > x
(E) x – y < 0
Chapter 14 240
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
6. (E)
AB = CB + AC
7. (C) In right triangle ACB, the longest side is the
hypotenuse AB. Therefore, side AC is less than
AB.
8. (D) A positive subtracted from a negative is
always negative.
9. (B)
AB = CB + AC
∠ACB is the supplement of ∠ACD. Therefore,
∠ACB = 60°. ∠ABC must equal 70° because
there are 180° in a triangle. Since ∠ABC is the
largest angle in the triangle, AC must be the
longest side. Therefore, AC > AB.
10. (D) In a right triangle, the largest angle is
the right angle. Since ∠C is the largest angle,
∠C = 90°.
1. (D)
4 6
6
4
3
2
x
x
x
<
<
< Simplify to
2. (B) If equal quantities are added to unequal
quantities, the sums are unequal in the same
order.
c d
a b
a c b d
>
+
+ > +
( ) =
3. (C)
3
5 10
4
5
< <
x
Multiply through by 10.
6 < x < 8 or x must be between 6 and 8.
4. (D)
If unequal quantities are subtracted from equal
quantities, the results are unequal in the
opposite order.
AC AB
EC DB
AE AD AD AE
=
<
> <
− ( )
or
5. (C) If two angles of a triangle are unequal,
the sides opposite these angles are unequal,
with the larger side opposite the larger angle.
Since ∠1 > ∠2, BC > AC.
Inequalities 241
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
1. (A) 8 10 20
2 20
10
x x
x
x
<
<
>
+
−
−
2. (C)
−
−
2 12
6
x
x
<
>
3. (E)
x
x
+10 50
40
>
>
4. (A) –.4x < 4
Multiply by 10 to remove decimals.
−
−
4 40
10
x
x
<
>
5. (D) .03n > –.18
Multiply by 100
3 18
6
n
n
>
>
−
−
6. (D) Divide by 15
b
b
<
<
10
15
2
3
Simplify to
7. (D) x must be less than 2, but can go no lower
than –2, as (–3)
2
would be greater than 4.
8. (D) n + 4.3 < 2.7
Subtract 4.3 from each side.
n < –1.6
9. (D) When two negative numbers are added,
their sum will be negative.
10. (E) The product of two negative numbers is
positive.
Exercise 2
1. (D) Angle A will contain 90°, which is the
largest angle of the triangle. The sides from
largest to smallest will be BC, AB, AC.
2. (B) Since ∠SRT = ∠STR, ∠SRT will have to
be greater than ∠PTR. Therefore, PT > PR in
triangle PRT.
3. (D) Angle ABC = 60°. Since there are 120°
left for ∠A and ∠C together and, also ∠A > ∠
C, then ∠A must contain more than half of
120° and ∠C must contain less than half of
120°. This makes ∠A the largest angle of the
triangle. The sides in order from largest to
smallest are BC, AC, AB.
4. (D) ∠ABC = ∠ABD as they are both right
angles. If ∠1 > ∠4, then ∠2 will be less than ∠3
because we are subtracting unequal quantities
(∠1 and ∠4) from equal quantities (∠ABC and
∠ABD).
5. (D) The sum of any two sides (always try the
shortest two) must be greater than the third side.
Chapter 14 242
www.petersons.com
Retest
1. (B) 2 5
5
2
x
x
>
>
−
−
2. (C) If unequal quantities are subtracted from
equal quantities, the differences are unequal in
the opposite order.
m n
p q
m p n q
=
( ) <
>
−
− −
3. (A) Since ∠3 > ∠2 and ∠1 = ∠2, ∠3 > ∠1.
If two angles of a triangle are unequal, the sides
opposite these angles are unequal, with the
larger side opposite the larger angle. Therefore,
AB > BD.
4. (D) Since ∠1 > ∠2 and ∠2 > ∠3, ∠1 > ∠3.
In triangle ACD side AD is larger than side AC,
since AD is opposite the larger angle.
5. (C)
x
x
2
6
12
>
>
6. (B) If two sides of a triangle are equal, the
angles opposite them are equal. Therefore ∠C
= ∠B. Since ∠1 > ∠B, ∠1 > ∠C.
7. (A) The sum of any two sides (always try the
shortest two) must be greater than the third side.
8. (C)
BT =
1
2
ST and SA =
1
2
SR. Since ST = SR,
BT = SA.
9. (A) A positive minus a negative is always
greater than a negative minus a positive.
10. (E) In right triangle ADB, the longest side is
the hypotenuse AB. Therefore, AB > BD.
243
15
Numbers and Operations,
Algebra, and Functions
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Answer the following 10 questions, limiting your time to 15 min
utes. Note that question 1 is a gridin question, in which you provide the
numerical solution. (All other questions are in multiplechoice format.)
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. The population of Urbanville has always
doubled every five years. Urbanville’s current
population is 25,600. What was its population
20 years ago?
2. Which of the following describes the union of
the factors of 15, the factors of 30, and the
factors of 75?
(A) The factors of 15
(B) The factors of 30
(C) The factors of 45
(D) The factors of 75
(E) None of the above
3. –1 – 2 – 5 – 6 – –3 + 4 =
(A) –5
(B) –3
(C) 1
(D) 3
(E) 5
4. For all x ≠ 0 and y ≠ 0,
x y y
y x x
6 3
6 3
is equivalent to:
(A)
y
x
2
2
(B) xy
(C) 1
(D)
x
y
2
2
(E)
x
y
3
3
5. If f(x) = x + 1, then
1 1
f x
f
x ( )
×
=
(A) 1
(B)
1
x
(C) x
(D)
x
x +1
(E) x
2
6. If the domain of f(x) =
x
x
5
−
is the set {–2, –1, 0,
2}, then f(x) CANNOT equal
(A)
−
2
25
(B)
−
1
5
(C) 0
(D) 5
(E) 50
7. Which of the following equations defines a
function containing the (x,y) pairs (–1,–1) and
(–
1
2
,0)?
(A) y = 3x + 2
(B) y = 2x + 1
(C) y = 6x + 5
(D) y = –4x – 2
(E) y = 4x + 3
Chapter 15 244
www.petersons.com
8. The figure below shows the graph of a linear
function on the xyplane.
If the xintercept of line l is 4, what is the slope
of l ?
(A)
2
3
(B)
3
4
(C)
5
6
(D)
6
5
(E) Not enough information to answer the
question is given.
9. The figure below shows a parabola in the xy
plane.
Which of the following equations does the
graph best represent?
(A) y = –x
2
+ 6x – 9
(B) y = x
2
– 2x + 6
(C) y =
2
3
x
2
– 4x + 6
(D) y = –x
2
+ x – 3
(E) y = x
2
+ 3x + 9
10. Which of the following best describes the
relationship between the graph of y
x
=
2
2
and
the graph of x
y
=
2
2
in the xyplane?
(A) Mirror images symmetrical about the
xaxis
(B) Mirror images symmetrical about the
yaxis
(C) Mirror images symmetrical about the line
of the equation x = y
(D) Mirror images symmetrical about the line
of the equation x = –y
(E) None of the above
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 245
www.petersons.com
1. SEQUENCES INVOLVING EXPONENTIAL
GROWTH (GEOMETRIC SEQUENCES)
In a sequence of terms involving exponential growth, which the testing service also calls a geometric sequence,
there is a constant ratio between consecutive terms. In other words, each successive term is the same multiple of
the preceding one. For example, in the sequence 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, . . . , notice that you multipy each term by 2 to
obtain the next term, and so the constant ratio (multiple) is 2.
To solve problems involving geometric sequence, you can apply the following standard equation:
a · r
(n – 1)
= T
In this equation:
The variable a is the value of the first term in the sequence
The variable r is the constant ratio (multiple)
The variable n is the position number of any particular term in the sequence
The variable T is the value of term n
If you know the values of any three of the four variables in this standard equation, then you can solve for the
fourth one. (On the SAT, geometric sequence problems generally ask for the value of either a or T.)
Example (solving for T when a and r are given):
The first term of a geometric sequence is 2, and the constant multiple is 3. Find the second, third,
and fourth terms.
Solution:
2nd term (T) = 2 · 3
(2 – 1)
= 2 · 3
1
= 6
3rd term (T) = 2 · 3
(3 – 1)
= 2 · 3
2
= 2 · 9 = 18
4th term (T) = 2 · 3
(4 – 1)
= 2 · 3
3
= 2 · 27 = 54
To solve for T when a and r are given, as an alternative to applying the standard equation, you can
multiply a by r
(n – 1)
times. Given a = 2 and r = 3:
2nd term (T) = 2 · 3 = 6
3rd term (T) = 2 · 3 = 6 · 3 = 18
4th term (T) = 2 · 3 = 6 · 3 = 18 · 3 = 54
NOTE: Using the alternative method, you may wish to use your calculator to find T if a and/or r are large
numbers.
Example (solving for a when r and T are given):
The fifth term of a geometric sequence is 768, and the constant multiple is 4. Find the 1st term (a).
Solution:
a
a
a
a
a
× =
× =
× =
=
=
−
4 768
4 768
256 768
768
256
3
5 1
4
( )
Chapter 15 246
www.petersons.com
Example (solving for T when a and another term in the sequence are given):
To find a particular term (T) in a geometric sequence when the first term and another term are
given, first determine the constant ratio (r), and then solve for T. For example, assume that the first
and sixth terms of a geometric sequence are 2 and 2048, respectively. To find the value of the fourth
term, first apply the standard equation to determine r :
Solution:
2 2048
2 2048
2048
2
1024
1024
6 1
5
5
5
× =
× =
=
=
=
−
r
r
r
r
r
( )
55
4 r =
The constant ratio is 4. Next, in the standard equation, let a = 2, r = 4, and n = 4, and then solve for T :
2 4
2 4
2 64
128
4 1
3
× =
× =
× =
=
− ( )
T
T
T
T
The fourth term in the sequence is 128.
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. For questions 1–3, circle the letter that appears before your answer. Questions 4 and 5
are gridin questions.
1. On January 1, 1950, a farmer bought a certain
parcel of land for $1,500. Since then, the land
has doubled in value every 12 years. At this
rate, what will the value of the land be on
January 1, 2010?
(A) $7,500
(B) $9,000
(C) $16,000
(D) $24,000
(E) $48,000
2. A certain type of cancer cell divides into two
cells every four seconds. How many cells are
observable 32 seconds after observing a total of
four cells?
(A) 1,024
(B) 2,048
(C) 4,096
(D) 5,512
(E) 8,192
3. The seventh term of a geometric sequence with
constant ratio 2 is 448. What is the first term of
the sequence?
(A) 6
(B) 7
(C) 8
(D) 9
(E) 11
4. Three years after an art collector purchases a
certain painting, the value of the painting is
$2,700. If the painting increased in value by an
average of 50 percent per year over the three
year period, how much did the collector pay for
the painting, in dollars?
5. What is the second term in a geometric series
with first term 3 and third term 147?
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 247
www.petersons.com
2. SETS (UNION, INTERSECTION, ELEMENTS)
A set is simply a collection of elements; elements in a set are also referred to as the “members” of the set. An SAT
problem involving sets might ask you to recognize either the union or the intersection of two (or more) sets of
numbers.
The union of two sets is the set of all members of either or both sets. For example, the union of the set of all
negative integers and the set of all nonnegative integers is the set of all integers. The intersection of two sets is
the set of all common members – in other words, members of both sets. For example, the intersection of the set
of integers less than 11 and the set of integers greater than 4 but less than 15 is the following set of six consecutive
integers: {5,6,7,8,9,10}.
On the new SAT, a problem involving either the union or intersection of sets might apply any of the following
concepts: the real number line, integers, multiples, factors (including prime factors), divisibility, or counting.
Example:
Set A is the set of all positive multiples of 3, and set B is the set of all positive multiples of 6.
What is the union and intersection of the two sets?
Solution:
The union of sets A and B is the set of all postitive multiples of 3.
The intersection of sets A and B is the set of all postitive multiples of 6.
Chapter 15 248
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Note that question 2 is a gridin question. For all other questions, circle the letter that
appears before your answer.
4. The set of all multiples of 10 could be the
intersection of which of the following pairs of
sets?
(A) The set of all multiples of
5
2
; the set of
all multiples of 2
(B) The set of all multiples of
3
5
; the set of
all multiples of 5
(C) The set of all multiples of
3
2
; the set of
all multiples of 10
(D) The set of all multiples of
3
4
; the set of
all multiples of 2
(E) The set of all multiples of
5
2
; the set of
all multiples of 4
5. For all real numbers x, sets P, Q, and R are
defined as follows:
P:{x ≥ –10}
Q:{x ≥ 10}
R:{x ≤ 10}
Which of the following indicates the
intersection of sets P, Q, and R ?
(A) x = any real number
(B) x ≥ –10
(C) x ≥ 10
(D) x = 10
(E) –10 ≤ x ≤ 10
1. Which of the following describes the union of
the set of integers less than 20 and the set of
integers greater than 10?
(A) Integers 10 through 20
(B) All integers greater than 10 but less than
20
(C) All integers less than 10 and all integers
greater than 20
(D) No integers
(E) All integers
2. Set A consists of the positive factors of 24, and
set B consists of the positive factors of 18.
The intersection of sets A and B is a set
containing how many members?
3. The union of sets X and Y is a set that contains
exactly two members. Which of the following
pairs of sets could be sets X and Y ?
(A) The prime factors of 15; the prime factors
of 30
(B) The prime factors of 14; the prime factors
of 51
(C) The prime factors of 19; the prime factors
of 38
(D) The prime factors of 22; the prime factors
of 25
(E) The prime factors of 39; the prime factors
of 52
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 249
www.petersons.com
3. ABSOLUTE VALUE
The absolute value of a real number refers to the number’s distance from zero (the origin) on the realnumber
line. The absolute value of x is indicated as x. The absolute value of a negative number always has a positive
value.
Example:
–2 – 3 – 2 – 3 =
(A) –2
(B) –1
(C) 0
(D) 1
(E) 4
Solution:
The correct answer is (E). –2 – 3 = –5 = 5, and 2 – 3 = –1 = 1. Performing subtraction: 5 – 1 = 4.
The concept of absolute value can be incorporated into many different types of problems on the new SAT, includ
ing those involving algebraic expressions, equations, and inequalities, as well as problems involving functional
notation and the graphs of functions.
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears
before your answer.
1. 7 – 2 – 2 – 7 =
(A) –14
(B) –9
(C) –5
(D) 0
(E) 10
2. For all integers a and b, where b ≠ 0,
subtracting b from a must result in a positive
integer if:
(A) a – b is a positive integer
(B)
a
b
( )
is a positive integer
(C) (b – a) is a negative integer
(D) (a + b) is a positive integer
(E) (ab) is a positive integer
3. What is the complete solution set for the
inequality x – 3 > 4 ?
(A) x > –1
(B) x > 7
(C) –1 < x < 7
(D) x < –7, x > 7
(E) x < –1, x > 7
4. The figure below shows the graph of a certain
equation in the xyplane.
Which of the following could be the equation?
(A) x = y – 1
(B) y = x – 1
(C) y = x – 1
(D) y = x + 1
(E) x = y – 1
5. If f(x) = 
1
x
– 3 – x , then f
1
2
( ) =
(A) –1
(B) –
1
2
(C) 0
(D)
1
2
(E) 1
Chapter 15 250
www.petersons.com
4. EXPONENTS (POWERS)
An exponent, or power, refers to the number of times that a number (referred to as the base number) is multiplied
by itself, plus 1. In the number 2
3
, the base number is 2 and the exponent is 3. To calculate the value of 2
3
, you
multiply 2 by itself twice: 2
3
= 2 · 2 · 2 = 8. In the number
2
3
4
( )
, the base number is
2
3
and the exponent is 4. To
calculate the value of
2
3
4
( )
, you multiply
2
3
by itself three times:
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
16
81
4
( )
= × × × = .
An SAT problem might require you to combine two or more terms that contain exponents. Whether you can
you combine base numbers—using addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division—before applying exponents
to the numbers depends on which operation you’re performing. When you add or subtract terms, you cannot
combine base numbers or exponents:
a
x
+ b
x
≠ (a + b)
x
a
x
– b
x
≠ (a – b)
x
Example:
If x = –2, then x
5
– x
2
– x =
(A) 26
(B) 4
(C) –34
(D) –58
(E) –70
Solution:
The correct answer is (C). You cannot combine exponents here, even though the base number is the
same in all three terms. Instead, you need to apply each exponent, in turn, to the base number, then
subtract:
x
5
– x
2
– x = (–2)
5
– (–2)
2
– (–2) = –32 – 4 +
2 = –34
There are two rules you need to know for combining exponents by multiplication or division. First, you can
combine base numbers first, but only if the exponents are the same:
a
x
· b
x
= (ab)
x
a
b
a
b
x
x
x
=
Second, you can combine exponents first, but only if the base numbers are the same. When multiplying these
terms, add the exponents. When dividing them, subtract the denominator exponent from the numerator exponent:
a
x
· a
y
= a
(x + y)
a
a
a
x
y
x y
=
− ( )
When the same base number (or term) appears in both the numerator and denominator of a fraction, you can
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 251
www.petersons.com
factor out, or cancel, the number of powers common to both.
Example:
Which of the following is a simplified version of
x y
x y
2 3
3 2
?
(A)
y
x
(B)
x
y
(C)
1
xy
(D) 1
(E) x
5
y
5
Solution:
The correct answer is (A). The simplest approach to this problem is to cancel, or factor out, x
2
and y
2
from numerator and denominator. This leaves you with x
1
in the denominator and y
1
in the
denominator.
You should also know how to raise exponential numbers to powers, as well as how to raise base numbers to
negative and fractional exponents. To raise an exponential number to a power, multiply exponents together:
a a
x
y
xy
( )
=
Raising a base number to a negative exponent is equivalent to 1 divided by the base number raised to the exponent’s
absolute value:
a
a
x
x
−
=
1
To raise a base number to a fractional exponent, follow this formula:
a a
x
y x
y
=
Also keep in mind that any number other than 0 (zero) raised to the power of 0 (zero) equals 1:
a
0
= 1 [a ≠ 0]
Example:
(2
3
)
2
· 4
–3
=
(A) 16
(B) 1
(C)
2
3
(D)
1
2
(E)
1
8
Solution:
The correct answer is (B). (2
3
)
2
· 4
–3
= 2
(2)(3)
·
1
4
2
4
2
2
1
3
6
3
6
6
= = =
Chapter 15 252
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. For questions 1–4, circle the letter that appears before your answer. Question 5 is a grid
in question.
4. If x = –1, then x
–3
+ x
–2
+ x
2
+ x
3
=
(A) –2
(B) –1
(C) 0
(D) 1
(E) 2
5. What integer is equal to 4 4
3 2 3 2
+ ?
1.
a b
b c
a c
bc
2
2
2
2
÷
=
(A)
1
a
(B)
1
b
(C)
b
a
(D)
c
b
(E) 1
2. 4
n
+ 4
n
+ 4
n
+ 4
n
=
(A) 4
4n
(B) 16
n
(C) 4
(n · n · n · n)
(D) 4
(n+1)
(E) 16
4n
3. Which of the following expressions is a
simplified form of (–2x
2
)
4
?
(A) 16x
8
(B) 8x
6
(C) –8x
8
(D) –16x
6
(E) –16x
8
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 253
www.petersons.com
5. FUNCTION NOTATION
In a function (or functional relationship), the value of one variable depends upon the value of, or is “a function
of,” another variable. In mathematics, the relationship can be expressed in various forms. The new SAT uses the
form y = f(x)—where y is a function of x. (Specific variables used may differ.) To find the value of the function for
any value x, substitute the xvalue for x wherever it appears in the function.
Example:
If f(x) = 2x – 6x, then what is the value of f(7) ?
Solution:
The correct answer is –28. First, you can combine 2x – 6x, which equals –4x. Then substitute (7) for
x in the function: –4(7) = –28. Thus, f(7) = –28.
A problem on the new SAT may ask you to find the value of a function for either a number value (such as 7, in
which case the correct answer will also be a number value) or for a variable expression (such as 7x, in which case
the correct answer will also contain the variable x). A more complex function problem might require you to apply
two different functions or to apply the same function twice, as in the next example.
Example:
If f(x) =
2
2
x
, then
f f
x
1
2
1
×
=
(A) 4x
(B)
1
8x
(C) 16x
(D)
1
4
2
x
(E) 16x
2
Solution:
The correct answer is (E). Apply the function to each of the two xvalues (in the first instance,
you’ll obtain a numerical value, while in the second instance you’ll obtain an variable expression:
f
1
2
2 2
2 4 8
1
2
2 1
4
=
( )
= = × =
f
x
x
x
x
1 2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
=
=
=
Then, combine the two results according to the operation specified in the question:
f f
x
x x
1
2
1
8 2 16
2 2
×
= × =
Chapter 15 254
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If f(x) = 2x x , then for which of the following
values of x does f(x) = x ?
(A)
1
4
(B)
1
2
(C) 2
(D) 4
(E) 8
2. If f(a) = a
–3
– a
–2
, then f
1
3
( ) =
(A) –
1
6
(B)
1
6
(C) 6
(D) 9
(E) 18
3. If f(x) = x
2
+ 3x – 4, then f(2 + a) =
(A) a
2
+ 7a + 6
(B) 2a
2
– 7a – 12
(C) a
2
+ 12a + 3
(D) 6a
2
+ 3a + 7
(E) a
2
– a + 6
4. If f(x) = x
2
and g(x) = x + 3, then g(f(x)) =
(A) x + 3
(B) x
2
+ 6
(C) x + 9
(D) x
2
+ 3
(E) x
3
+ 3x
2
5. If f(x) =
x
2
, then f(x
2
) ÷ f x ( ) ( )
2
=
(A) x
3
(B) 1
(C) 2x
2
(D) 2
(E) 2x
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 255
www.petersons.com
6. FUNCTIONS—DOMAIN AND RANGE
A function consists of a rule along with two sets—called the domain and the range. The domain of a function f(x)
is the set of all values of x on which the function f(x) is defined, while the range of f(x) is the set of all values that
result by applying the rule to all values in the domain.
By definition, a function must assign exactly one member of the range to each member of the domain, and
must assign at least one member of the domain to each member of the range. Depending on the function’s rule
and its domain, the domain and range might each consist of a finite number of values; or either the domain or
range (or both) might consist of an infinite number of values.
Example:
In the function f(x) = x + 1, if the domain of x is the set {2,4,6}, then applying the rule that f(x) = x +
1 to all values in the domain yields the function’s range: the set {3,5,7}. (All values other than 2, 4,
and 6 are outside the domain of x, while all values other than 3, 5, and 7 are outside the function’s
range.)
Example:
In the function f(x) = x
2
, if the domain of x is the set of all real numbers, then applying the rule that
f(x) = x
2
to all values in the domain yields the function’s range: the set of all nonnegative real
numbers. (Any negative number would be outside the function’s range.)
Exercise 6
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. If f(x) = x +1 , and if the domain of x is the set
{3,8,15}, then which of the following sets
indicates the range of f(x) ?
(A) {–4, –3, –2, 2, 3, 4}
(B) {2, 3, 4}
(C) {4, 9, 16}
(D) {3, 8, 15}
(E) {all real numbers}
2. If f(a) = 6a – 4, and if the domain of a consists
of all real numbers defined by the inequality
–6 < a < 4, then the range of f(a) contains all of
the following members EXCEPT:
(A) –24
(B)
1
6
(C) 0
(D) 4
(E) 20
3. If the range of the function f(x) = x
2
– 2x – 3 is
the set R = {0}, then which of the following
sets indicates the largest possible domain of x ?
(A) {–3}
(B) {3}
(C) {–1}
(D) {3, –1}
(E) all real numbers
4. If f(x) = x x
2
5 6 − + , which of the following
indicates the set of all values of x at which the
function is NOT defined?
(A) {x  x < 3}
(B) {x  2 < x < 3}
(C) {x  x < –2}
(D) {x  –3 < x < 2}
(E) {x  x < –3}
5. If f(x) =
1
3
x
, then the largest possible domain
of x is the set that includes
(A) all nonzero integers.
(B) all nonnegative real numbers.
(C) all real numbers except 0.
(D) all positive real numbers.
(E) all real numbers.
Chapter 15 256
www.petersons.com
7. LINEAR FUNCTIONS—EQUATIONS AND GRAPHS
A linear function is a function f given by the general form f(x) = mx + b, in which m and b are constants. In
algebraic functions, especially where defining a line on the xyplane is involved, the variable y is often used to
represent f(x), and so the general form becomes y = mx + b. In this form, each xvalue (member of the domain set)
can be paired with its corresponding yvalue (member of the range set) by application of the function.
Example:
In the function y = 3x + 2, if the domain of x is the set of all positive integers less than 5, then
applying the function over the entire domain of x results in the following set of (x,y) pairs: S =
{(1,5), (2,8), (3,11), (4,14)}.
In addition to questions requiring you to solve a system of linear equations (by using either the substitution or
additionsubtraction method), the new SAT includes questions requiring you to recognize any of the following:
• A linear function (equation) that defines two or more particular (x,y) pairs (members of the domain set and
corresponding members of the range set). These questions sometimes involve reallife situations; you may be
asked to construct a mathematical “model” that defines a relationship between, for example, the price of a
product and the number of units of that product.
• The graph of a particular linear function on the xyplane
• A linear function that defines a particular line on the xyplane.
Variations on the latter two types of problems may involve determining the slope and/or yintercept of a line
defined by a function, or identifying a function that defines a given slope and yintercept.
Example:
In the linear function f, if f(–3) = 3 and if the slope of the graph of f in the xyplane is 3, what is the
equation of the graph of f ?
(A) y = 3x – 3
(B) y = 3x + 12
(C) y = x – 6
(D) y = –x
(E) y = 3x – 12
Solution:
The correct answer is (B). In the general equation y = mx + b, slope (m) is given as 3. To
determine b, substitute –3 for x and 3 for y, then solve for b: 3 = 3(–3) + b; 12 = b. Only in choice
(B) does m = 3 and b = 12.
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 257
www.petersons.com
Exercise 7
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
1. XYZ Company pays its executives a starting
salary of $80,000 per year. After every two
years of employment, an XYZ executive
receives a salary raise of $1,000. Which of the
following equations best defines an XYZ
executive’s salary (S) as a function of the
number of years of employment (N) at XYZ?
(A) S
N
= +
1 000
80 000
,
,
(B) S = N + 80,000
(C) S
N
= +
80 000
1 000
,
,
(D) S = 1,000N + 80,000
(E) S = 500N + 80,000
2. In the linear function g, if g(4) = –9 and g(–2) =
6, what is the yintercept of the graph of g in
the xyplane?
(A) –
9
2
(B) –
5
2
(C)
2
5
(D) 1
(E)
3
2
3. If two linear function f and g have identical
domains and ranges, which of the following,
each considered individually, could describe
the graphs of f and g in the xyplane?
I. two parallel lines
II. two perpendicular lines
III. two vertical lines
(A) I only
(B) I and II only
(C) II only
(D) II and III only
(E) I, II, and III
4. In the xyplane below, if the scales on both axes
are the same, which of the following could be
the equation of a function whose graph is l
1
?
(A) y =
2
3
x – 3
(B) y = –2x + 1
(C) y = x + 3
(D) y = –3x −
2
3
(E) y = −
2
3
x – 3
5. If h is a linear function, and if h(2) = 3 and
h(4) = 1, then h(–101) =
(A) –72
(B) –58
(C) 49
(D) 92
(E) 106
Chapter 15 258
www.petersons.com
8. QUADRATIC FUNCTIONS—EQUATIONS AND
GRAPHS
In Chapter 8, you learned to solve quadratic equations in the general form ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 by factoring the
expression on the lefthand side of this equation to find the equation’s two roots— the values of x that satisfy the
equation. (Remember that the two roots might be the same.) The new SAT may also include questions involving
quadratic functions in the general form f(x) = ax
2
+ bx + c. (Note that a, b, and c are constants and that a is the
only essential constant.) In quadratic functions, especially where defining a graph on the xyplane is involved, the
variable y is often used to represent f(x), and x is often used to represent f(y).
The graph of a quadratic equation of the basic form y = ax
2
or x = ay
2
is a parabola, which is a Ushaped curve.
The point at which the dependent variable is at its minimum (or maximum) value is the vertex. In each of the
following four graphs, the parabola’s vertex lies at the origin (0,0). Notice that the graphs are constructed by
tabulating and plotting several (x,y) pairs, and then connecting the points with a smooth curve:
The graph of a quadratic equation of the basic form
x
y
=
1
2 or
y
x
=
1
2
is a hyperbola, which consists of two U
shaped curves that are symmetrical about a particular line, called the axis of symmetry. The axis of symmetry of
the graph of
x
y
=
1
2 is the xaxis, while the axis of symmetry in the graph of
y
x
=
1
2
is the yaxis, as the next
figure shows. Again, the graphs are constructed by tabulating and plotting some (x,y) pairs, then connecting the
points:
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 259
www.petersons.com
The new SAT might include a variety of question types involving quadratic functions—for example, questions
that ask you to recognize a quadratic equation that defines a particular graph in the xyplane or to identify certain
features of the graph of a quadratic equation, or compare two graphs
Example:
The graph shown in the xyplane above could represent which of the following equations?
(A)  x
2
 =  y
2

(B) x = y
2

(C)  y  = x
2
(D) y = x
2

(E)  x  = y
2
Solution:
The correct answer is (C). The equation  y  = x
2
represents the union of the two equations y = x
2
and
–y = x
2
. The graph of y = x
2
is the parabola extending upward from the origin (0,0) in the figure,
while the graph of –y = x
2
is the parabola extending downward from the origin.
Chapter 15 260
www.petersons.com
Example:
In the xyplane, the graph of y
x
+ = 2
2
2
shows a parabola that opens
(A) downward.
(B) upward.
(C) to the right.
(D) to the left.
(E) either upward or downward.
Solution:
The correct answer is (B). Plotting three or more points of the graph on the xyplane should show
the parabola’s orientation. First, it is helpful to isolate y in the equation y
x
= −
2
2
2 . In this equation,
substitute some simple values for x and solve for y in each case. For example, substituting 0, 2, and
–2 for x gives us the three (x,y) pairs (0,–2), (2,0), and (–2,0). Plotting these three points on the xy
plane, then connecting them with a curved line, suffices to show a parabola that opens upward.
An SAT question might also ask you to identify a quadratic equation that defines two or more domain members
and the corresponding members of the function’s range (these questions sometimes involve “models” of reallife
situations).
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 261
www.petersons.com
Exercise 8
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Which of the following is the equations best
defines the graph shown below in the xyplane?
(A)
y
x
=
1
2
(B)
x
y
=
1
2
(C)
x
y
=
1
2
(D)
  x
y
=
1
2
(E)
y
x
=
1
2
5. ABC Company projects that it will sell 48,000
units of product X per year at a unit price of $1,
12,000 units per year at $2 per unit, and 3,000
units per year at $4 per unit. Which of the
following equations could define the projected
number of units sold per year (N), as a function
of price per unit (P)?
(A)
N
P
=
+
48 000
2
2
,
(B)
N
P
=
48 000
2
,
(C) N
P
=
+
48 000
14
,
(D) N
P
=
+
48 000
4
,
(E)
N
P
=
+
48 000
8
2
,
1. Which of the following equations defines a
function containing the (x,y) pairs (1,–1), (2,–
4), (3,–9), and (4,–16) ?
(A) y = –2x
(B) y = 2x
(C) y = x
2
(D) y = –x
2
(E) y = –2x
2
2. The figure below shows a parabola in the xy
plane.
Which of the following equations does the
graph best represent?
(A) x = (y – 2)
2
– 2
(B) x = (y + 2)
2
– 2
(C) x = –(y – 2)
2
– 2
(D) y = (x – 2)
2
+ 2
(E) y = (x – 2)
2
– 2
3. In the xyplane, which of the following is an
equation whose graph is the graph of y
x
=
2
3
translated three units horizontally and to the
left?
(A) y = x
2
(B) y
x
= +
2
3
3
(C) y
x
= −
2
3
3
(D) y
x
=
− ( ) 3
3
2
(E) y
x
=
+ ( ) 3
3
2
Chapter 15 262
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Answer the following 10 questions, limiting your time to 15 minutes. Note that question 1 is a gridin question,
in which you provide the numerical solution. (All other questions are in multiplechoice format.)
1. What is the fourth term in a geometric series
with first term 2 and third term 72?
2. What is the intersection of the set of all positive
integers divisible by 4 and the set of all positive
integers divisible by 6?
(A) All positive multiples of 4
(B) All positive multiples of 6
(C) All positive multiples of 8
(D) All positive multiples of 12
(E) All positive multiples of 24
3. The shaded regions of the xyplane shown
below represent certain values of x.
Which of the following inequalities accounts
for all such values of x ?
(A) y ≥ 3
(B) x ≥ 3
(C) x ≤ 3
(D) y ≤ 3
(E) y ≤ –3
4. If –32 =
−
( )
1
2
M
, then what is the value of M ?
(A) –16
(B) –6
(C) –5
(D) 5
(E) 16
5. If f(x) =
1
1 x +
, then
f
x
1
1 +
( )
=
(A) x
(B)
x +1
2
(C) 1
(D) x + 1
(E)
x
x
+
+
1
2
6. If f(x) = y = 1 – x
2
, and if the domain of x is all
real numbers, which of the following sets
indicates the range of the function?
(A) {y  y ≥ 1}
(B) {y  y > 1}
(C) {y  y ≤ 1}
(D) {y  y < 1}
(E) {y  y ≥ –2}
7. In the linear function f, if f(–6) = –2 and the
slope of the graph of f in the xyplane is –2,
which of the following is true?
(A) f(–10) = –6
(B) f(–6) = 0
(C) f(–8) = 2
(D) f(6) = 2
(E) f(8) = 4
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 263
www.petersons.com
8. Once a certain airplane attains its maximum
speed of 300 miles per hour (mph), it begins
decreasing speed as it approaches its
destination. After every 50 miles, the plane
decreases its airspeed by 20 mph. Which of the
following equations best defines the number of
miles the plane has traveled (m) after beginning
to decrease speed as a function of the airplane’s
airspeed (s)?
(A) s
m
= − +
5
2
750
(B) s
m
= − +
2
5
300
(C) m
s
= − +
5
2
750
(D) m
s
= − +
5
2
300
(E) m
s
= +
2
5
300
9. In the xyplane, the graph of 3x = 2y
2
shows a
parabola with vertex at the point defined by the
(x,y) pair:
(A) (0,0)
(B) (0,2)
(C) (2,0)
(D) (3,2)
(E) (2,3)
10. A model rocket is shot straight up in the air
from ground level. After 2 seconds and then
again after 3 seconds, its height is 96 feet.
Which of the following equations could define
rocket’s height, (h), as a function of the number
of seconds after launch (t)?
(A) h = 10t
2
– 74t
(B) h = 8t
2
– 64t
(C) h = 64t – 8t
2
(D) h = 80t – 16t
2
(E) h = 96t – 10t
2
Chapter 15 264
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
5. (B) Substitute the expression (x + 1) for x in
1 1
f x
f
x ( )
×
, then combine terms:
1 1 1
1
1 1
f x
f
x x
x
x x ( )
×
=
+
+
=
6. (D) The question asks which number among
the five listed is outside the function’s range.
First, simplify the function. Note that
5
1
5
−
=
x
x
,
and therefore that
x x
x
x
x
x
5
5
1
5
−
= = ( )( ) . To
determine the function’s range, apply the rule
that f(x) = (x)(5
x
) to each member of the
domain, in turn:
f ( ) ( )( ) − = − =
−
= −
−
2 2 5
2
5
2
25
2
2
f ( ) ( )( ) − = − =
−
= −
−
1 1 5
1
5
1
5
1
1
f(0) = (0)(5
0
) = (0)(1) = 0
f(2) = (2)(5
2
) = (2)(25) = 50
The range of f(x) =
x
x
5
−
is the set {
−
2
25
,
−
1
5
,
0, 50 }. Only answer choice (D) provides a
number that is not in this range.
7. (B) To solve this problem, consider each
answer choice in turn, substituting the (x,y)
pairs provided in the question for x and y in the
equation. Among the five equations, only the
equation in choice (B) holds for both pairs:
y x = +
− = − +
= − +
2 1
1 2 1 1
0 2 1
1
2
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
8. (A) One point on l is defined by (–5,–6). A
second point on l is defined by (4,0), which is
the point of xintercept. With two points
defined, you can find the line’s slope (m) as
follows:
m =
y y
x x
2 1
2 1
0 6
4 5
6
9
2
3
−
−
=
− −
− −
= =
( )
( )
.
1. The correct answer is 16,000. Solve for a in the
general equation a · r
(n – 1)
= T. Let T = 256,000,
r = 2, and n = 5 (the number of terms in the
sequence that includes the city’s population 20,
15, 10, and 5 years ago, as well as its current
population). Solving for a:
a
a
a
a
× =
× =
× =
=
−
2 256 000
2 256 000
16 256 000
2
5 1
4
( )
,
,
,
556 000 16
16 000
,
,
÷
= a
Twenty years ago, Urbanville’s population was
16,000.
2. (E) The union of the three sets of factors is a
set that contains all factors of any one or more
of the three sets. The factors of 30 include all
factors of 15, as well as the integer 6 and 30
(but not the integer 25). Choice (B) desribes the
union of the factors of 15 and the factors of 30,
but not the factors of 75 (which include 25).
The factors of 75 include all factors of 15, as
well as the integer 25 (but not integers 6 and
30). Choice (D) desribes the union of the
factors of 15 and the factors of 75, but not the
factors of 30 (which include 6 and 30). Thus,
among answer choices (A) through (D), none
describes the intersection of all three sets.
3. (C) First, determine each of the three absolute
values:
–1 – 2 = –3 = 3
5 – 6 = –1 = 1
–3 + 4 = 1 = 1
The combine the three results: 3 – 1 – 1 = 1.
4. (D) Multiply like base numbers by adding
exponents, and divide like base numbers by
subtracting the denominator exponent from the
numerator exponent:
x y y
y x x
x y
y x
x
y
6 3
6 3
6 4
6 4
2
2
= =
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 265
www.petersons.com
9. (C) The graph shows a parabola opening
upward with vertex at (3,0). Of the five
choices, only (A) and (C) provide equations
that hold for the (x,y) pair (3,0). Eliminate
choices (B), (D), and (E). In the equation given
by choice (A), substituting any nonzero
number for x yields a negative yvalue.
However, the graph shows no negative y
values. Thus, you can eliminate choice (A), and
the correct answer must be (C).
Also, when a parabola extends upward, the
coefficient of x
2
in the equation must be
positive.
10. (E) The following figure shows the graphs of
the two equations:
As you can see, the graphs are not mirror
images of each other about any of the axes
described in answer choices (A) through (D).
Exercise 1
1. (E). Solve for T in the general equation a · r
(n – 1)
= T. Let a = 1,500, r = 2, and n = 6 (the number
of terms in the sequence that includes the value
in 1950 and at every 12year interval since then,
up to and including the expected value in 2010).
Solving for T:
1 500 2
1 500 2
1 500 32
48 000
6 1
5
,
,
,
,
( )
× =
× =
× =
=
−
T
T
T
T
Doubling every 12 years, the land’s value will
be $48,000 in 2010.
2. (A) Solve for T in the general equation
a · r
(n – 1)
= T. Let a = 4, r = 2, and n = 9 (the
number of terms in the sequence that includes
the number of cells observable now as well as
in 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, and 32 seconds).
Solving for T:
4 2
4 2
4 256
1 024
9 1
8
× =
× =
× =
=
− ( )
,
T
T
T
T
32 seconds from now, the number of
observable cancer cells is 1,024.
3. (B) In the standard equation, let T = 448,
r = 2, and n = 7. Solve for a :
a
a
a
a
a
× =
× =
× =
=
=
−
2 448
2 448
64 448
448
64
7
7 1
6
( )
Chapter 15 266
www.petersons.com
4. The correct answer is $800. Solve for a in the
general equation a · r
(n – 1)
= T. Let T = 2,700.
The value at the date of the purchase is the first
term in the sequence, and so the value three
years later is the fourth term; accordingly, n =
4. Given that painting’s value increased by
50% (or
1
2
) per year on average, r = 1.5 =
3
2
.
Solving for a:
a
a
a
a
×
( )
=
×
( )
=
× =
=
−
3
2
2 700
3
2
2 700
27
8
2 700
4 1
3
( )
,
,
,
22 700
8
27
800
, ×
= a
At an increase of 50% per year, the collector
must have paid $800 for the painting three
years ago.
5. The correct answer is 21. First, find r:
3 147
3 147
49
7
3 1
2
2
× =
× =
=
=
−
r
r
r
r
( )
To find the second term in the sequence,
multiply the first term (3) by r : 3 · 7 = 21.
Exercise 2
1. (E) The union of the two sets is the set that
contains all integers — negative, positive, and
zero (0).
2. The correct answer is 4. The positive factors of
24 are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, and 24. The positive
factors of 18 are 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, and 18.The two
sets have in common four members: 1, 2, 3,
and 6.
3. (C) 19 is a prime number, and therefore has
only one prime factor: 19. There are two prime
factors of 38: 2 and 19. The union of the sets
described in choice (C) is the set that contains
two members: 2 and 19.
4. (A) Through 10, the multiples of
5
2
, or 2
1
2
,
are 2
1
2
, 5, 2
1
2
, and 10. Through 10, the
multiples of 2 are 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10. As you can
see, the two sets desribed in choice (A)
intersect at, but only at, every multiple of 10.
5. (D) You can express set R:{x ≤ 10} as
R:{–10 ≤ x ≤ 10}. The three sets have only
one real number in common: the integer 10.
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 267
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (D) 7 – 2 – 2 – 7 = 5 – –5 = 5 – 5 = 0
2. (C) If b – a is a negative integer, then a > b,
in which case a – b must be a positive integer.
(When you subtract one integer from another,
the result is always an integer.) Choice (A),
which incorporates the concept of absolute
value, cannot be the correct answer, since the
absolute value of any integer is by definition a
positive integer.
3. (E) Either x – 3 > 4 or x – 3 < –4. Solve for x
in both inequalities: x > 7; x < –1.
4. (B) If x = 0, y = –1. The point (0,–1) on the
graph shows this functional pair. For all
negative values of x, y is the absolute value of
x, minus 1 (the graph is translated down one
unit). The portion of the graph to the left of the
yaxis could show these values. For all positive
values of x, y = x, minus 1 (the graph is
translated down one unit). The portion of the
graph to the right of the yaxis could show
these values.
5. (D) Substitute
1
2
for x in the function:
f
1
2 1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
2 3
1
1
( )
= − −
= − −
= − −
= −
=
Exercise 4
1. (E) First, cancel common factors in each
term. Then, multiply the first term by the
reciprocal of the second term. You can now see
that all terms cancel out:
a b
b c
a c
bc
a
bc
a
bc
a
bc
bc
a
2
2
2
2
2 2 2
2
1 ÷ = ÷ = × =
2. (D) The expression given in the question is
equivalent to 4 · 4
n
. In this expression, base
numbers are the same. Since the terms are
multiplied together, you can combine
exponents by adding them together: 4 · 4
n
=
4
(n+1)
.
3. (A) Raise both the coefficient –2 and variable
x
2
to the power of 4. When raising an exponent
to a power, multiply together the exponents:
(–2x
2
)
4
= (–2)
4
x
(2)(4)
= 16x
8
4. (C) Any term to a negative power is the same
as “one over” the term, but raised to the
positive power. Also, a negative number raised
to a power is negative if the exponent is odd,
yet positive if the exponent is even:
–1
(–3)
+ [–1
(–2)
] + [–1
2
] + [–1
3
] = − +
1
1
1
1
+ 1 – 1
= 0
5. The correct answer is 16. Express fractional
exponents as roots, calculate the value of each
term, and then add:
4 4 4 4 64 64 8 8 16
3 2 3 2 3 3
+ = + = + = + =
Chapter 15 268
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
1. (A) One way to approach this problem is to
substitute each answer choice for x in the
function, then find f(x). Only choice (A)
provides a value for which f(x) = x:
f
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
2
1
2
1
4
2
( )
=
( ) ( )
=
( )( )
=
Another way to solve the problem is to let x =
2x x
, then solve for x by squaring both sides
of the equation (look for a root that matches
one of the answer choices):
x x x
x
x
x
=
=
=
=
2
1 2
1
2
1
4
2. (E) First, note that any term raised to a
negative power is equal to 1 divided by the
term to the absolute value of the power. Hence:
a a
a a
− −
− = −
3 2
3 2
1 1
Using this form of the function, substitute
1
3
for a , then simplify and combine terms:
f
1
3
1
3
3
1
3
2 1
27
1
9
1 1 1 1
27 9 18
( )
=
( )
−
( )
= − = − =
3. (A) In the function, substitute (2 + a) for x.
Since each of the answer choices indicates a
quadratic expression, apply the distributive
property of arithmetic, then combine terms:
f a a a
a a a
( ) ( ) ( )
( )( )
2 2 3 2 4
2 2 6 3 4
4
2
+ = + + + −
= + + + + −
= +44 6 3 4
7 6
2
2
a a a
a a
+ + + −
= + +
4. (D) Substitute f(x) for x in the function g(x) =
x + 3:
g(f(x)) = f(x) + 3
Then substitute x
2
for f(x):
g(f(x)) = x
2
+ 3
5. (D) f(x
2
) =
x
2
2
, and f x ( ) ( )
2
=
x
2
2
( )
.
Accordingly, f(x
2
) ÷ f x ( ) ( )
2
=
x
2
2
÷
x
2
2
( )
=
x
2
2
·
4
2
x
= 2.
Exercise 6
1. (B) To determine the function’s range, apply
the rule x +1 to 3, 8, and 15:
( )
( )
( )
3 1 4 2
8 1 9 3
15 1 16 4
+ = = +
+ = = +
+ = = +
Choice (B) provides the members of the range.
Remember that x means the positive square
root of x.
2. (E) To determine the function’s range, apply
the rule (6a – 4) to –6 and to 4. The range
consists of all real numbers between the two
results:
6(–6) – 4 = –40
6(4) – 4 = 20
The range of the function can be expressed as
the set R = {b  –40 < b < 20}. Of the five
answer choices, only (E) does not fall within
the range.
3. (D) The function’s range contains only one
member: the number 0 (zero). Accordingly, to
find the domain of x, let f(x) = 0, and solve for
all possible roots of x:
x x
x x
x x
x x
2
2 3 0
3 1 0
3 0 1 0
3 1
− − =
− + =
− = + =
= = −
( )( )
,
,
Given that f(x) = 0, the largest possible domain
of x is the set {3, –1}.
4. (B) The question asks you to recognize the
set of values outside the domain of x. To do so,
first factor the trinomial within the radical into
two binomials:
f x x x x x ( ) ( )( ) = − + = − −
2
5 6 3 2
The function is undefined for all values of x such
that (x – 3)(x – 2) < 0 because the value of the
function would be the square root of a negative
number (not a real number). If (x – 3)(x – 2) < 0,
then one binomial value must be negative while
the other is positive. You obtain this result with
any value of x greater than 2 but less than 3—
that is, when 2 < x < 3.
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 269
www.petersons.com
5. (C) If x = 0, then the value of the fraction is
undefined; thus, 0 is outside the domain of x.
However, the function can be defined for any
other realnumber value of x. (If x > 0, then
applying the function yields a positive number;
if x < 0, then applying the function yields a
negative number.)
Exercise 7
1. (E) After the first 2 years, an executive’s
salary is raised from $80,000 to $81,000. After
a total of 4 years, that salary is raised to
$82,000. Hence, two of the function’s (N,S)
pairs are (2, $81,000) and (4, $82,000).
Plugging both of these (N,S) pairs into each of
the five equations, you see that only the
equation in choice (E) holds (try plugging in
additional pairs to confirm this result):
(81,000) = (500)(2) + 80,000
(82,000) = (500)(4) + 80,000
(83,000) = (500)(6) + 80,000
2. (D) The points (4,–9) and (–2,6) both lie on
the graph of g, which is a straight line. The
question asks for the line’s yintercept (the
value of b in the general equation y = mx + b).
First, determine the line’s slope:
slope ( )
( )
m
y y
x x
=
−
−
=
− −
− −
=
−
= −
2 1
2 1
6 9
2 4
15
6
5
2
In the general equation (y = mx + b), m = –
5
2
.
To find the value of b, substitute either (x,y)
value pair for x and y, then solve for b.
Substituting the (x,y) pair (–2,6):
y x b
b
b
b
= − +
= − − +
= +
=
5
2
5
2
6 2
6 5
1
( )
3. (B) In the xyplane, the domain and range of
any line other than a vertical or horizontal line
is the set of all real numbers. Thus, option III
(two vertical lines) is the only one of the three
options that cannot describe the graphs of the
two functions.
4. (E) The line shows a negative yintercept (the
point where the line crosses the vertical axis)
and a negative slope less than –1 (that is,
slightly more horizontal than a 45º angle). In
equation (E), −
2
3
is the slope and –3 is the y
intercept. Thus, equation (E) matches the graph
of the function.
Chapter 15 270
www.petersons.com
5. (E) The function h includes the two
functional pairs (2,3) and (4,1). Since h is a
linear function, its graph on the xyplane is a
straight line. You can determine the equation of
the graph by first finding its slope (m):
m =
y y
x x
2 1
2 1
1 3
4 2
2
2
1
−
−
=
−
−
=
−
= −
.
Plug either (x,y) pair into the standard equation
y = mx + b to define the equation of the line.
Using the pair (2,3):
y x b
b
b
= − +
= − +
=
3 2
5
The line’s equation is y = –x + 5. To determine
which of the five answer choices provides a
point that also lies on this line, plug in the value
–101 (as provided in the question) for x:
y = –(–101) + 5 = 101 + 5 = 106.
Exercise 8
1. (D) To solve this problem, consider each
answer choice in turn, substituting the (x,y)
pairs provided in the question for x and y in the
equation. Among the five equations, only the
equation in choice (D) holds for all four pairs.
2. (A) The graph shows a parabola opening to
the right with vertex at (–2,2). If the vertex
were at the origin, the equation defining the
parabola might be x = y
2
. Choices (D) and (E)
define vertically oriented parabolas (in the
general form y = x
2
) and thus can be eliminated.
Considering the three remaining equations, (A)
and (C) both hold for the (x,y) pair (–2,2), but
(B) does not. Eliminate (B). Try substituting 0
for y in equations (A) and (C), and you’ll see
that only in equation (A) is the corresponding
xvalue greater than 0, as the graph suggests.
3. (E) The equation y
x
=
2
3
is a parabola with
vertex at the origin and opening upward. To see
that this is the case, substitute some simple
values for x and solve for y in each case. For
example, substituting 0, 3, and –3 for x gives us
the three (x,y) pairs (0,0), (3,3), and (–3,3).
Plotting these three points on the xyplane, then
connecting them with a curved line, suffices to
show a parabola with vertex (0,0) — opening
upward. Choice (E) provides an equation
whose graph is identical to the graph of y
x
=
2
3
,
except translated three units to the left. To
confirm this, again, substitute simple values for
x and solve for y in each case. For example,
substituting 0, –3, and –6 for x gives us the
three (x,y) pairs (0,3), (–3,0), and (–6,–3).
Plotting these three points on the xyplane, then
connecting them with a curved line, suffices to
show the same parabola as the previous one,
except with vertex (–3,0) instead of (0,0).
4. (D) The equation
  x
y
=
1
2 represents the
union of the two equations
x
y
=
1
2 and
− = x
y
1
2 . The graph of the former equation is
the hyperbola shown to the right of the yaxis in
the figure, while the graph of the latter equation
is the hyperbola shown to the left of the yaxis
in the figure.
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions 271
www.petersons.com
5. (B) In this problem, S is a function of P. The
problem provides three (P,S) number pairs that
satisfy the function: (1, 48,000), (2, 12,000)
and (4, 3,000). For each of the answer choices,
plug each of these three (P,S) pairs in the
equation given. Only the equation given in
choice (B) holds for all three (P,S) pairs:
48 000
48 000
1
48 000
12 000
48 000
2
4
2
2
,
,
( )
,
,
,
( )
= =
= =
88 000
4
12 000
3 000
48 000
4
48 000
16
3 0
2
,
,
,
,
( )
,
,
=
= = = 000
Retest
1. The correct answer is 432. First, find r:
2 72
2 72
36
6
3 1
2
2
× =
× =
=
=
−
r
r
r
r
( )
To find the fourth term in the sequence, solve
for T in the standard equation (let r = 6 and
n = 4):
2 6
2 6
2 216
432
4 1
3
× =
× =
× =
=
− ( )
T
T
T
T
2. (D) The set of positive integers divisible by 4
includes all multiples of 4: 4, 8, 12, 16, . . . .
The set of positive integers divisible by 6
includes all multiples of 6: 6, 12, 18, 24, . . . .
The least common multiple of 4 and 6 is 12.
Thus, common to the two sets are all multiples
of 12, but no other elements.
3. (B) The shaded region to the left of the yaxis
accounts for all values of x that are less than or
equal to –3 . In other words, this region is the
graph of x ≤ –3. The shaded region to the right
of the yaxis accounts for all values of x that are
greater than or equal to 3 . In other words, this
region is the graph of x ≥ 3.
4. (C) Note that (–2)
5
= –32. So, the answer to
the problem must involve the number 5.
However, the 2 in the number
1
2
is in the
denominator, and you must move it to the
numerator. Since a negative number
reciprocates its base, −
( )
= −
−
1
2
32
5
.
5. (E) Substitute
1
1 x +
for x, then simplify:
f
x
x
x x
x
x
x
x
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
+
( )
=
+
=
+
=
=
+
+ +
+
+
+ +
+
( )
11
1 1
1
2 + +
=
+
+ ( ) x
x
x
Chapter 15 272
www.petersons.com
6. (C) According to the function, if x = 0, then
y = 1. (The function’s range includes the
number 1.) If you square any real number x
other than 0, the result is a number greater
than 0. Accordingly, for any nonzero value of
x, 1 – x
2
< 1. The range of the function
includes 1 and all numbers less than 1.
7. (C) The graph of f is a straight line, one point
on which is (–6,–2). In the general equation y =
mx + b, m = –2. To find the value of b,
substitute the (x,y) value pair (–6,–2) for x and
y, then solve for b:
y x b
b
b
b
= − +
− = − − +
− = +
− =
2
2 2 6
2 12
14
( ) ( )
The equation of the function’s graph is
y = –2x – 14. Plugging in each of the five (x,y)
pairs given, you can see that this equation holds
only for choice (C).
8. (C) You can easily eliminate choices (A) and
(B) because each one expresses speed (s) as a
function of miles (m), just the reverse of what
the question asks for. After the first 50 miles,
the plane’s speed decreases from 300 mph to
280 mph. After a total of 100 miles, the speed
has decreased to 260. Hence, two of the
function’s (s,m) pairs are (280,50) and
(260,100). Plugging both of these (s,m) pairs
into each of the five equations, you see that
only the equation in choice (C) holds (try
plugging in additional pairs to confirm this
result):
( )
( )
50
5 280
2
750
50
1400
2
750
50 700 750
50
= − +
= − +
= − +
== 50
( )
( )
100
5 260
2
750
100
1300
2
750
100 650 7
= − +
= − − +
= − + 550
100 100 =
9. (A) The graph of any quadratic equation of
the incomplete form x = ay
2
(or y = ax
2
) is a
parabola with vertex at the origin (0,0).
Isolating x in the equation 3x = 2y
2
shows that
the equation is of that form:
x
y
=
2
3
2
To confirm that the vertex of the graph of
x
y
=
2
3
2
lies at (0,0), substitute some simple
values for y and solve for x in each case. For
example, substituting 0, 1, and –1 for y gives us
the three (x,y) pairs (0,0), (
2
3
,1), and (
2
3
,–1).
Plotting these three points on the xyplane, then
connecting them with a curved line, suffices to
show a parabola with vertex (0,0) — opening to
the right.
10. (D) The question provides two (t,h) number
pairs that satisfy the function: (2,96) and (3,96).
For each of the answer choices, plug each of
these two (t,h) pairs in the equation given. Only
the equation given in choice (D) holds for both
(t,h) pairs:
(96) = 80(2) – 16(2)
2
= 160 – 64 = 96
(96) = 80(3) – 16(3)
2
= 240 – 144 = 96
Note that the equation in choice (C) holds for
f(2) = 96 but not for f(3) = 96.
273
16
Additional Geometry Topics,
Data Analysis, and Probability
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Directions: Answer multiplechoice questions 1–11, as well as question
12, which is a “gridin” (studentproduced response) question. Try to an
swer questions 1 and 2 using trigonometry.
Answers are at the end of the chapter.
1. In the triangle shown below, what is the value
of x?
(A) 4
3
(B) 5
2
(C) 8
(D) 6
2
(E) 5
3
2. In the triangle shown below, what is the value
of x ?
(A) 5
(B) 6
(C) 4
3
(D) 8
(E) 6
2
3. The figure below shows a regular hexagon
tangent to circle O at six points.
If the area of the hexagon is
6 3
, the
circumference of circle O =
(A)
3 3
2
π
(B)
12 3
π
(C)
2 3 π
(D) 12
(E) 6π
Chapter 16 274
www.petersons.com
4. In the xyplane, which of the following (x,y) pairs
defines a point that lies on the same line as the
two points defined by the pairs (2,3) and (4,1)?
(A) (7,–3)
(B) (–1,8)
(C) (–3,2)
(D) (–2,–4)
(E) (6,–1)
5. In the xyplane, what is the slope of a line that
is perpendicular to the line segment connecting
points A(–4,–3) and B(4,3)?
(A) –
3
2
(B) –
4
3
(C) 0
(D)
3
4
(E) 1
6. In the xyplane, point (a,5) lies along a line of
slope
1
3
that passes through point (2,–3). What
is the value of a ?
(A) –26
(B) –3
(C) 3
(D) 26
(E) 35
7. The figure below shows the graph of a certain
equation in the xyplane. At how many
different values of x does y = 2 ?
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 4
(E) Infinitely many
8. If f(x) = x, then the line shown in the xyplane
below is the graph of
(A) f(–x)
(B) f(x + 1)
(C) f(x – 1)
(D) f(1 – x)
(E) f(–x – 1)
9. The table below shows the number of bowlers
in a certain league whose bowling averages are
within each of six specified point ranges, or
intervals. If no bowler in the league has an
average less than 80 or greater than 200, what
percent of the league’s bowlers have bowling
averages within the interval 161–200?
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 275
www.petersons.com
10. Average annual rainfall and temperatures for
five cities are plotted in the figure below. The
cities are labeled by the letters A through E in
order according to their eastwest location; for
example, City A is further east than City B,
which is further east than City C. Based on the
figure, which of the following statements is
most accurate?
(A) The further west a city, the more annual
rainfall it receives.
(B) The further east a city, the higher its
average annual temperature.
(C) The more annual rainfall a city receives,
the lower its average annual temperature.
(D) The higher a city’s average annual
temperature, the more annual rainfall it
receives.
(E) The further east a city, the lower its
average annual temperature.
11. One marble is to be drawn randomly from a
bag that contains three red marbles, two blue
marbles, and one green marble. What is the
probability of drawing a blue marble?
(A)
1
6
(B)
1
5
(C)
2
7
(D)
1
3
(E)
2
5
12. The figure below shows two concentric circles,
each divided into eight congruent segments.
The area of the large circle is exactly twice that
of the smaller circle. If a point is selected at
random from the large circular region, what is
the probability that the point will lie in a shaded
portion of that circle?
Chapter 16 276
www.petersons.com
1. RIGHT TRIANGLES AND TRIGONOMETRIC
FUNCTIONS
Righttriangle trigonometry involves the ratios between sides of right triangles and the angle measures that
correspond to these ratios. Refer to the following right triangle, in which the sides opposite angles A, B, and C
are labeled a, b, and c, respectively (∠A and ∠B are the two acute angles):
Here are the general definitions of the three trigonometric functions sine, cosine, and tangent, and how you
would express these three functions in terms of ∠A and ∠B in ∆ABC:
sine
opposite
hypotenuse
(sin ; sin = = = A B
a
c
b
cc
b
c
cosine
adjacent
hypotenuse
(cos ;
)
= = A ccos
tangent
opposite
adjacent
(tan
B
A
=
= =
a
c
)
aa
b
b
a
; tanB = )
In right triangles with angles 45°45°90°and 30°60°90°, the values of these trigonometric functions are
easily determined. The following figure shows the ratios among the sides of these two uniquely shaped triangles:
In a 45°45°90°triangle, the lengths of the sides opposite those angles are in the ratio 1 1 2 : : , respectively.
In a 30°60°90°triangle, the lengths of the sides opposite those angles are in the ratio 1 3 2 : : , respectively.
Accordingly, the sine, cosine, and tangent functions of the 30°, 45°, and 60°angles of any right triangle are as
follows:
45°45°90°triangle: 30°60°90°triangle:
sin45°= cos45°=
2
2
sin30°= cos60°=
1
2
tan45°= 1 sin60°= cos30°=
3
2
tan30°=
3
3
tan60°=
3
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 277
www.petersons.com
In SAT problems involving 30°60°90°and 45°45°90°right triangles, as long as the length of one side is
provided, you can use these trigonometric functions to determine the length of any other side—as an alternative
to applying the Pythagorean Theorem.
Example:
In the triangle shown below, what is the value of x ?
(A)
3
(B) 2
(C)
3 2
2
(D)
5 2
3
(E) 2
2
Solution:
The correct answer is (B). Since the figure shows a 45°45°90°triangle in which the length of one
leg is known, you can easily apply either the sine or cosine function to determine the length of the
hypotenuse. Applying the function sin45°=
2
2
, set the value of this function equal to
2
x
opposite
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
2
2
2
; 2 2 ; = = =
x
x x 2 2 .
Example:
In the triangle shown below, what is the value of x ?
(A)
5 3
3
(B) 3
(C)
10
3
(D) 2
3
(E) 3
2
Solution:
The correct answer is (D). Since the figure shows a 30°60°90°triangle, you can easily apply either
the sine or the cosine function to determine the length of either leg. Applying the function sin60°=
3
2
, set the value of this function equal to
x
4
opposite
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
3
2
; ; = = =
x
x x
4
2 4 3 2 3
Chapter 16 278
www.petersons.com
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. What is the area of the triangle shown below?
(A) 5 2
(B) 7.5
(C)
13 3
3
(D)
9 3
2
(E) 5 3
5. Two trains depart at the same time from the
same terminal, one traveling due north and the
other due east, each along a straight track. If the
trains travel at the same average speed, which
of the following most closely approximates the
number of miles each train has traveled when
the shortest distance between the two trains is
70 miles?
(A) 49
(B) 55
(C) 60
(D) 70
(E) 140
1. In the triangle shown below what is the value
of x ?
(A) 3 2
(B)
7 2
2
(C) 5
(D) 3 3
(E) 4 2
2. In the triangle shown below, what is the value
of x ?
(A) 4
(B) 3 2
(C) 5
(D) 3 3
(E)
10
3
3. If two interior angles of a triangle measure 30°
and 60°, and if the side of the triangle opposite
the 60°angle is 6 units long, how many units
long is the side opposite the 30°angle?
(A) 3
(B) 2 3
(C) 4
(D) 3 2
(E)
5 3
2
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 279
www.petersons.com
2. TANGENT LINES AND INSCRIBED CIRCLES
A circle is tangent to a line (or line segment) if it intersects the line (or line segment) at one and only one point
(called the point of tangency). In addition to the rules you learned in Chapter 13 involving tangents, for the new
SAT you should know the following two rules:
1. A line (or line segment) that is tangent to a circle is always perpendicular to a radius drawn from the circle’s
center to the point of tangency. Thus, in the next figure, which shows a circle with center O, OP 9 AB :
2. For any regular polygon (in which all sides are congruent) that circumscribes a circle, the point of tangency
between each line segment and the circle bisects the segment. Thus, in the next figure, which shows three
circles, each circumscribed by a regular polygon (shown from left to right, an equilateral triangle, a square,
and a regular pentagon), all line segments are bisected by the points of tangency highlighted along the circles’
circumferences:
These two additional rules involving tangents allow for a variety of additional types of SAT questions.
Example:
In the figure below, AB
passes through the center of circle O and
AC
is tangent to the circle at P.
If the radius of the circle is 3 and m∠OAC = 30°, what is the area of the shaded region?
(A)
3
2
3 3 ( ) −π
(B)
1
2
3 3 ( ) − π
(C)
4 3 −π
(D)
2
3
3 3 ( ) π −
(E)
4 3 π −
Chapter 16 280
www.petersons.com
Solution:
The correct answer is (A). Draw a radius from O to P. Since AC
is tangent to the circle at P,
AC PO
⊥ , and drawing the radius from O to P forms a right triangle (∆AOP), whose area =
1
2
9
2
3 3 3 3 ( )
( )
= . Since m∠OAP = 30°, m∠OAP = 60°(one sixth the total number of degrees in the
circle, 360), and hence the segment of the circle bound by ∠OAC is onesixth the circle’s area, or
1
6
2 9
6
3
2
3 π π π = = . To answer the question, subtract the area of this segment of the circle from the
area of ∆AOP:
9
2
3
2
3
2
3 3 3 − = − π π ( ) .
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 281
www.petersons.com
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
3. In the figure below, C lies on the circumference
of a circle with center O and radius 6.
If m∠BOA = 90°and OA OB ≅ , what is the
perimeter of ∆ABO ?
(A) 6 + 12 3
(B) 12 + 12 2
(C) 18 3
(D) 24 2
(E) 36
4. The figure below shows an equilateral triangle
(∆ABC) tangent to circle O at three points.
If the perimeter of ∆ABC is 18, the area of
circle O =
(A) 2π
(B)
5
2
π
(C)
2 2π
(D) 3π
(E)
2 3 π
1. The figure below shows a regular pentagon
tangent to circle O at five points.
If the perimeter of the pentagon is 10, what is
the length of AP ?
2. In the figure below, AC is tangent to the circle
at point B. The length of BD equals the
diameter of the circle, whose center is O.
What is the degree measure of minor arc DE ?
(A) 40
(B) 110
(C) 120
(D) 130
(E) 220
Chapter 16 282
www.petersons.com
5. In the figure below, a circle with center O is
tangent to AB at point D and tangent to AC at
point C.
If m∠A = 40°, then x =
(A) 140
(B) 145
(C) 150
(D) 155
(E) It cannot be determined from the
information given.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 283
www.petersons.com
3. EQUATIONS AND GRAPHS OF LINES IN THE XY
PLANE
You can define any line in the standard xycoordinate plane by the equation y = mx + b. In this equation, m is the
slope of the line, b is the line’s yintercept (where the line crosses the y axis), and x and y are the coordinates of
any point on the line. (Any (x,y) pair defining a point on the line can substitute for the variables x and y.)
You can determine the slope of a line from any two pairs of (x,y) coordinates. In general, if (x
1
,y
1
) and (x
2
,y
2
)
lie on the same line, calculate the line’s slope as follows (notice that you can subtract either pair from the other):
slope or ( ) m
y y
x x
y y
x x
=
−
−
−
−
2 1
2 1
1 2
1 2
Be careful to subtract corresponding values. For example, a careless testtaker calculating the slope might
subtract y
1
from y
2
but subtract x
2
from x
1
.
In the xyplane:
• A line sloping upward from left to right has a positive slope (m). A line with a slope of 1 slopes upward from
left to right at a 45°angle in relation to the xaxis. A line with a fractional slope between 0 and 1 slopes upward
from left to right but at less than a 45°angle in relation to the xaxis. A line with a slope greater than 1 slopes
upward from left to right at more than a 45°angle in relation to the xaxis.
• A line sloping downward from left to right has a negative slope (m). A line with a slope of –1 slopes downward
from left to right at a 45°angle in relation to the xaxis. A line with a fractional slope between 0 and –1 slopes
downward from left to right but at less than a 45°angle in relation to the xaxis. A line with a slope less than
–1 (for example, –2) slopes downward from left to right at more than a 45°angle in relation to the xaxis.
• A horizontal line has a slope of zero (m = 0, and mx = 0)
• A vertical line has either an undefined or an indeterminate slope (the fraction’s denominator is 0), so the m
term in the equation is ignored.
• Parallel lines have the same slope (the same mterm in the general equation).
• The slope of a line perpendicular to another is the negative reciprocal of the other line’s slope. (The product
of the two slopes is 1.) For example, a line with slope
3
2
is perpendicular to a line with slope −
2
3
.
On the new SAT, a question involving the equation or graph of a line might ask you to apply one or more of the
preceding rules in order to perform tasks such as:
• Identifying the slope of a line defined by a given equation (in which case you simply put the equation in the
standard form y = mx + b, then identify the mterm.
• Determining the equation of a line, or just the line’s slope (m) or yintercept (b), given the coordinates of two
points on the line.
• Determining the point at which two nonparallel lines intersect on the coordinate plane (in which case you
determine the equation for each line, and then solve for x and y by either substitution or additionsubtraction)
• Recognizing the slope or the equation of a line based on the line’s graph.
Chapter 16 284
www.petersons.com
Example:
In the xyplane, what is the slope of the line defined by the two points P(2,1) and Q(–3,4)?
(A) –3
(B)
−
5
3
(C)
−
3
5
(D)
3
5
(E) 3
Solution:
The correct answer is (C). Here are two ways to find the slope:
slope
slope
( )
( )
( )
m
m
=
−
− −
=
−
=
−
− −
=
4 1
3 2
3
5
1 4
2 3
−−3
5
Example:
In the xyplane, at what point along the yaxis does the line passing through points (5,–2) and (3,4)
intersect that axis?
(A) –8
(B) –
5
2
(C) 3
(D) 7
(E) 13
Solution:
The correct answer is (E). The question asks for the line’s yintercept (the value of b in the general
equation y = mx + b). First, determine the line’s slope:
slope ( )
( )
m
y y
x x
=
−
−
=
− −
−
=
−
= −
2 1
2 1
4 2
3 5
6
2
3
In the general equation (y = mx + b), m = –3. To find the value of b, substitute either (x,y) value pair
for x and y, then solve for b. Substituting the (x,y) pair (3,4):
y x b
b
b
b
= − +
= − +
= − +
=
3
4 3 3
4 9
13
( )
Example:
In the xyplane, the (x,y) pairs (0,2) and (2,0) define a line, and the (x,y) pairs (–2,–1) and (2,1)
define another line. At which of the following (x,y) points do the two lines intersect?
(A)
4
3
2
3
,
( )
(B)
3
2
4
3
,
( )
(C) −
( )
1
2
3
2
,
(D)
3
4
2
3
, −
( )
(E) − −
( )
3
4
2
3
,
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 285
www.petersons.com
Solution:
The correct answer is (A). For each line, formulate its equation by determining slope (m), then y
intercept (b). For the pairs (0,2) and (2,0):
y x b
b
b
=
( )
+ = −
= − +
=
−
−
0 2
2 0
1
0 2
2
(slope )
The equation for the line is y = –x + 2. For the pairs (–2,–1) and (2,1):
y x b
b
b
=
( )
+ =
= +
=
− −
− −
1 1
2 2
1
2
1
2
1 2
0
( )
( )
)
( )
(slope
The equation for the line is y =
1
2
x. To find the point of intersection, solve for x and y by
substitution. For example:
1
2
3
2
4
3
2
3
2
2
x x
x
x
y
= − +
=
=
=
The point of intersection is defined by the coordinate pair (
4
3
,
2
3
).
Example:
Referring to the xyplane above, if the scales on both axes are the same, which of the following
could be the equation of line P ?
(A) y =
2
5
x –
5
2
(B) y = –
5
2
x +
5
2
(C) y =
5
2
x –
5
2
(D) y =
2
5
x +
2
5
(E) y = –
5
2
x –
5
2
Solution:
The correct answer is (E). Notice that line P slopes downward from left to right at an angle greater
than 45°. Thus, the line’s slope (m in the equation y = mx + b) < –1. Also notice that line P crosses
the yaxis at a negative yvalue (that is, below the xaxis). That is, the line’s yintercept (b in the
equation y = mx + b) is negative. Only choice (E) provides an equation that meets both conditions.
Chapter 16 286
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
4. Referring to the xyplane below, if the scales on
both axes are the same, which of the following
could be the equation of line P ?
(A) y =
2
3
x – 6
(B) y =
3
2
x – 6
(C) y = –
3
2
x + 6
(D) y =
2
3
x + 6
(E) y = –
2
3
x – 6
5. What is the equation of the line that is the
perpendicular bisector of the line segment
connecting points (4,–2) and (–3,5) in the xy
plane?
(A) y = –x +
3
2
(B) y = x +
1
2
(C) y =
3
2
x – 1
(D) y = –x + 2
(E) y = x + 1
1. In the xyplane, what is the slope of the line
described by the equation 2y = –9 ?
(A) –
9
2
(B) –
2
9
(C) 0
(D)
9
2
(E) The slope is undefined.
2. In the xyplane, what is the slope of a line that
contains the points (–1,4) and (3,–6)?
(A) −
5
2
(C) –2
(B) −
1
2
(D) 1
(E) 2
3. In the xyplane, what is the equation of the line
with slope 3, if the line contains the point
defined by the xycoordinate pair (–3,3)?
(A) y = 3x – 3
(B) y = 3x + 12
(C) y = x + 6
(D) y = –3x – 12
(E) y = 6x – 6
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 287
www.petersons.com
4. GRAPHS OF FUNCTIONS AND OTHER
EQUATIONS—FEATURES AND TRANSFORMATIONS
On the new SAT, a question might show a graph of a quadratic function or other equation in the xyplane, and then
ask you to identify or recognize certain features of the graph—for example, minimum or maximum points on the
graph. You might encounter the graph of a circle, an ellipse, a parabola, or even a trigonometric function (appearing
as a wave). To answer these questions, you do not need to know the equations that define such graphs; simply apply
your knowledge of the xycoordinate system and, for some questions, function notation (see Chapter 15).
Example:
The figure above shows the graph of a certain equation in the xyplane. The graph is a circle with
center O and circumference 6π. At how many different values of y does x = –7.5 ?
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 4
(E) Infinitely many
Solution:
The correct answer is (C). First, find the circle’s radius from its circumference: C = 6π = 2πr; r = 3.
Since the circle’s center (0) lies at (–5,–6), the minimum value in the domain of x is –8. In other
words, the leftmost point along the circle’s circumference is at (–8,–6), 3 units to the left of O.
Thus, the graph of x = –7.5, which is a vertical line passing through (–7.5, 0), intersects the circle at
exactly two points. That is, when x = –7.5, there are two different corresponding values of y.
Other questions on the new SAT will involve transformations of linear and quadratic functions and the effect
of transformations on the graphs of such functions. The function f(x) is transformed by substituting an expression
containing the variable x for x in the function — for example:
If f(x) = 2x, then f(x + 1) = 2(x + 1), or 2x + 2
Transforming a function alters the graph of the function in the xyplane. The effect of a transformation might
be any of the following:
* To move, or translate, the graph (either vertically, horizontally, or both) to another position in the plane
* To alter the slope of a line (in the case of a linear function)
* To alter the shape of a curve (in the case of a quadratic function)
Chapter 16 288
www.petersons.com
For example, if f(x) = x, then f(x + 1) = x + 1. In the xyplane, the graph of f(x) = x (or y = x), is a line with slope
1 passing through the origin (0,0). The effect of transforming f(x) to f(x + 1) on the graph of f(x) is the translation
of the line one unit upward. (The yintercept becomes 1 instead of 0.) Remember: In determining the graph of a
function in the xyplane, use y to signify f(x) and, conversely, use x to signify f(y).
Example:
If f(x) = x + 3, then the line shown in the xyplane above is the graph of
(A) f(x)
(B) f(x – 6)
(C) f(x + 6)
(D) f(x + 3)
(E) f(x – 3)
Solution:
The correct answer is (E). The figure shows the graph of the function f(x) = x (or y = x). To
determine which of the five answer choices transforms the original function f(x) = x + 3 to the
function f(x) = x, substitute the variable expression in each choice, in turn, for x in the original
function. Choice (E) is the only one that provides an expression that achieves this transformation:
f x x
f x x
y x
( ) ( )
( )
− = − +
− =
=
3 3 3
3
To help you determine the effect of a function’s transformation on the function’s graph, you can tabulate some
(x,y) pairs based on the new function, plot the points on the xyplane, and then connect them.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 289
www.petersons.com
Example:
If f(x) = x
2
, then the graph shown in the xyplane above best represents which of the following
functions?
(A) f(–x)
(B) f(x – 1)
(C) f(x + 1)
(D) f(x
2
+ 1)
(E) f(x
2
– 1)
Solution:
The correct answer is (B). The figure shows the graph of y = x
2
, but translated to the right.
Substitute the variable expression given in each answer choice, in turn, for x in the function f(x) =
x
2
. Performing this task for choice (B) yields the equation f(x) = (x – 1)
2
, or y = (x – 1)
2
. Identify and
plot some (x,y) pairs. (Since the vertex in the graph lies along the xaxis, let x = 0 in order to
establish the vertex’s coordinates.) Here are some (x,y) pairs for the equation y = (x – 1)
2
:
(0,1)(1,0), (2,1), (3,4), (–1,4)
Plotting these points in the xyplane reveals a graph whose key features match those of the figure
provided in the question.
Chapter 16 290
www.petersons.com
Exercise 4
Work out each problem. Question 1 is a gridin question. For questions 2–5, circle the letter that appears before
your answer.
3. If f(x) = 2x – 2, then which of the following is
the graph of f
x −
( )
2
2
?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
1. The figure below shows a portion of the graph
of a certain function in the xyplane. For the
portion shown, at how many different values of
x is  f(x) at its maximum value?
2. If f(x) = 2, then the line shown in the xyplane
below is the graph of
(A) f(x + 1)
(B) f(x – 1)
(C) f(x + 2)
(D) f(x – 2)
(E) All of the above
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 291
www.petersons.com
4. If f(x) = (x – 1)
2
+ 1, what is the yintercept of
the graph of f(x+ 1) in the xyplane?
(A) –2
(B) –1
(C) 0
(D) 1
(E) 2
5. If f(y) = –(y
2
+ 1), then the graph shown in the
xyplane below best represents which of the
following functions?
(A) f(–y)
(B) f(y + 1)
(C) f(y – 1)
(D) f(y – 2)
(E) f(y
2
– 2)
Chapter 16 292
www.petersons.com
5. DATA ANALYSIS
The new SAT includes questions involving the analysis of data displayed in graphical formats such as tables, pie
graphs, line charts, bar graphs, and scatter plots. To answer a dataanalysis question, you’ll need to:
* Understand how the data are displayed
* Know which data are relevant to the question
* Know how to process the relevant data to solve the problem (answer the question correctly)
A data analysis question might require a simple arithmetic calculation (addition or subtraction) and/or a simple
calculation of a percent, average, fraction, or ratio.
In handling SAT data analysis, be careful to read the question very carefully, so that you select the appropriate
graphical data and perform the appropriate calculation — one that yields the answer to the precise question being
asked. In analyzing a line chart, bar graph, or scatter plot (see the examples below), estimating number values in
the display will suffice to answer the question correctly. To answer any data analysis question asking for an
approximation, rounding off your calculations will suffice.
Example (Table):
According to the table above, of the total number of automobiles sold to U.S. and foreign
institutions during the 2002–03 model year, which of the following most closely approximates the
percent that were standard models?
(A) 24%
(B) 36%
(C) 41%
(D) 59%
(E) 68%
Solution:
The correct answer is (D). The total number of units sold to institutions = (3.6 + 8.5 + 1.9) +
(1.7 + 4.9 + 2.2) = 22.8. The number of these units that were standard models = (8.5 + 4.9) = 13.4.
To answer the question, divide 13.4 by 22.8 (round off the quotient): 22.8 ÷ 13.4 ≈ .59, or 59%.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 293
www.petersons.com
Example (Pie Graph):
Based on the data shown above, the combined area of Unit B and Unit D is approximately
(A) 51,000 square feet
(B) 57,500 square feet
(C) 70,000 square feet
(D) 74,500 square feet
(E) 108,000 square feet
Solution:
The correct answer is (D). The size of Unit B is 42% of 140,000 square feet, or about 59,000 square
feet. Thus, the combined size of Unit B and Unit D is approximately 74,500 square feet.
Example (Line Chart):
Referring to the graph above, approximately what was the greatest dollar amount by which the
share price of ABC common stock exceeded the share price of XYZ common stock at the same time
during year X?
(A) $1.80
(B) $2.60
(C) $3.00
(D) $3.60
(E) It cannot be determined from the information given.
Chapter 16 294
www.petersons.com
Solution:
The correct answer is (B). You’re looking for the point at which the dotted line (ABC’s stock price)
is furthest above the solid line (XYZ’s stock price). The dotted line lies above the solid line only
during the second half of the 2nd quarter and the first half of the 3rd quarter; the end of the 2nd
quarter marks the greatest difference between prices during that period. At that time, ABC stock
was priced at approximately $7.60, while XYZ stock was priced at approximately $5.00 per share.
The difference between those two prices is $2.60.
Example (Bar Graph):
Referring to the data shown above, what is the approximate ratio of the average number of hours
per week that the youngest age group spent watching entertainment to the average number of hours
that the other two groups combined spent watching entertainment?
(A) 3:4
(B) 1:1
(C) 6:5
(D) 5:3
(E) 5:2
Solution:
The correct answer is (D). You’re task here is to compare the size of the entertainment portion of
the lefthand bar to the combined sizes of the same portion of the other to bars. Size up the ratio
visually. The portion on the first chart is a bit larger than the other two combined, and so you’re
looking for a ratio that’s greater than 1:1. Approximate the height of each three portions:
13–18 age group: 25 hours
19–24 age group: 5 hours
25–30 age group: 10 hours
The ratio in question is 25:15, or 5:3.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 295
www.petersons.com
Example (Scatter Plot):
Companies A, B, C, D, and E all manufacturer and sell a similar product. The graph above
compares manufacturing costs and sales prices per unit among the five companies. If all five
companies have sold the same number of units, which company has earned the greatest profit from
those sales?
(A) A
(B) B
(C) C
(D) D
(E) E
Solution:
The correct answer is (E). Since the number of units sold was the same for all five companies, the
greatest profit was earned by the company with the highest pricetocost ratio. You can compare
ratios by drawing a line segment from point 0 to each of the five plotted points. The segment with
the steepest slope (vertical change divided by horizontal change) indicates the greatest pricetocost
ratio. Segment OE has the steepest slope, and hence company E earned the greatest profit.
Chapter 16 296
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
3. Referring to the graph below, during the two
month period over which the average daily
temperature in City X increased by the greatest
percentage, City Y’s highest daily temperature
was approximately:
(A) 38 degrees
(B) 42 degrees
(C) 52 degrees
(D) 62 degrees
(E) 66 degrees
1. According to the data shown below, by
approximately what amount did Division D’s
income exceed Division C’s income during
year X?
WEBCO’S INCOME DURING YEAR X —
DIVISIONS A, B, C, AND D
(A) $125,000
(B) $127,000
(C) $140,000
(D) $156,000
(E) $312,000
2. Among the years covered in the graph below,
during the year in which aggregate awards of
nonminority and minority funds was greatest,
the dollar difference between nonminority and
minority awards was approximately:
(A) $130,000
(B) $160,000
(C) $220,000
(D) $270,000
(E) $400,000
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 297
www.petersons.com
Questions 4 and 5 are based on the following figure,
which compares the race times of ten different cy
clists, all of whom competed in the same two races
(race 1 and race 2).
4. Among the five cyclists identified in the figure
as A, B, C, D, and E, which had the fastest
combined (total) race time for races 1 and 2?
(A) A
(B) B
(C) C
(D) D
(E) E
5. Considering the ten cyclists as a group, which
of the following most closely approximates the
ratio of the average time for race 1 to the
average time for race 2?
(A) 1:2
(B) 2:3
(C) 1:1
(D) 3:2
(E) 2:1
Chapter 16 298
www.petersons.com
6. PROBABILITY
The new SAT includes simple questions involving probability, which refers to the statistical chances, or “odds,”
of an event occurring (or not occurring). By definition, probability ranges from 0 to 1. (Probability is never
negative, and it’s never greater than 1.) You can express probability either as either a fraction or a percent. Here’s
the basic formula:
Probability =
number of ways the event can occur
total numbber of possible occurrences
Example:
A standard deck of 52 playing cards contains 12 face cards. What is the probability of selecting a
face card from such a deck?
Solution:
The correct answer is
12
52
, or
3
13
. There are 12 ways that a face card could be selected at random
from the standard 52card deck.
To calculate the probability of an event NOT occurring, just subtract the probability of the event occurring from
1. Referring to the preceding example, the probability of NOT selecting a face card would be
40
52
, or
10
13
. (Sub
tract
12
52
from 1.)
An SAT probability problem might involve the probability of two independent events both occurring. Two
events are “independent” if neither event affects the probability that the other will occur. Here are two general
situations:
* The random selection of one object from each of two groups (for example, the outcome of throwing a pair of
dice)
* The random selection of one object from a group, then replacing it and selecting again (as in a “second round”
or “another turn” of a game)
To determine the probability of two independent events both occurring, multiply individual probabilities.
Example:
If you randomly select one letter from each of two sets: {A,B} and {C,D,E}, what is the probability
of selecting A and C?
Solution:
The correct answer is
1
6
. The probability of selecting A from the set {A,B} is
1
2
, while the
probability of selecting C from the set {C,D,E} is
1
3
. Hence, the probability of selecting A and C is
1
2
1
3
×
, or
1
6
.
An SAT probability problem might be accompanied by a geometry figure or other figure that provides a visual
display of the possibilities from which you are to calculate a probability.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 299
www.petersons.com
Example:
If a point is selected at random from the circular region shown above, what is the probability that
the point will lie in a shaded portion of the circle?
Solution:
The correct answer is .25 (or
1
4
). The angles opposite each of the three 45°angles identified in the
figure must also measure 45°each. Given a total of 360°in a circle, all of the eight small angles
formed at the circle’s center measure 45°, and hence all eight segments of the circle are congruent.
The two shaded segments comprise
2
8
, or
1
4
(.25) of the circle’s area. The probability of selecting a
point at random in a shaded area is also
1
4
(or .25).
Chapter 16 300
www.petersons.com
Exercise 6
Work out each problem. For questions 1–4, circle the letter that appears before your answer. Question 5 is a grid
in question.
4. A piggybank contains a certain number of
coins, of which 53 are dimes and 19 are
nickels. The remainder of the coins in the bank
are quarters. If the probability of selecting a
quarter from this bank is
1
4
, how many
quarters does the bank contain?
(A) 16
(B) 21
(C) 24
(D) 27
(E) 30
5. The figure below shows two concentric circles,
each divided into six congruent segments. The
area of the large circle is exactly 3 times that of
the smaller circle.
If a point is selected at random from the large
circular region, what is the probability that the
point will lie in a shaded portion of that circle?
1. If you randomly select one candy from a jar
containing two cherry candies, two licorice
candies, and one peppermint candy, what is the
probability of selecting a cherry candy?
(A)
1
6
(B)
1
5
(C)
1
3
(D)
2
5
(E)
3
5
2. Patrons at a certain restaurant can select two of
three appetizers—fruit, soup and salad—along
with two of three vegetables—carrots, squash
and peas. What is the probability that any
patron will select fruit, salad, squash, and peas?
(A)
1
12
(B)
1
9
(C)
1
6
(D)
1
3
(E)
1
2
3. If one student is chosen randomly out of a
group of seven students, then one student is
again chosen randomly from the same group of
seven, what is the probability that two different
students will be chosen?
(A)
36
49
(B)
6
7
(C)
19
21
(D)
13
14
(E)
48
49
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 301
www.petersons.com
RETEST
Answer questions 1–12. Question 9 is a “gridin” (studentproduced response) question; all other questions are
standard multiplechoice. Try to answer questions 1 and 2 using trigonometry.
1. In the triangle shown below, what is the value
of x ?
(A) 2
(B) 2 2
(C) 3
(D)
5 2
2
(E) 4
2. Two planes depart at the same time from the
same terminal, one traveling due north and the
other due west, each on a straight flight path.
When the shortest distance between the planes
is 40 miles, one plane would need to turn 120°
to either the left or right to point directly at the
other plane. Which of the following most
closely approximates the number of miles the
faster of the two planes has traveled at this
point in time?
(A) 25
(B) 30
(C) 35
(D) 40
(E) 45
3. In the figure below, O
1
and O
2
are concentric
circles and AB is tangent to O
1
at C.
If the radius of O
1
is r and the radius of O
2
is
twice as long, what is the area of the shaded
region?
(A)
1
2
πr
2
(B) πr
2
(C)
3
2
πr
2
(D) 2πr
2
(E) 3πr
2
4. In the xyplane below, if the scales on both axes
are the same, which of the following could be
the equation of l
1
?
(A) y =
2
3
x – 3
(B) y = –2x + 1
(C) y = x + 3
(D) y = –3x −
2
3
(E) y = −
2
3
x – 3
Chapter 16 302
www.petersons.com
5. In the xyplane, if lines a and b intersect at
point (5,–2) and lines b and c intersect at point
(–3,3), what is the slope of line b ?
(A) −
5
2
(B) −
5
8
(C) −
2
5
(D)
1
2
(E) It cannot be determined from the
information given.
6. Which of the following is the equation of a
straight line that has yintercept 3 and is
perpendicular to the line 4x – 2y = 6 ?
(A) 2y + 3x = –3
(B) y + 3x = 2
(C) 2y – x = 6
(D) y – 2x = 4
(E) 2y + x = 6
7. If f(x) =
−
1
2
x, then the line shown in the xy
plane below is the graph of
(A) f(x)
(B) f(x – 3)
(C) f(x + 3)
(D) f(–4x)
(E) f(x + 6)
8. If f(x) = 2x
2
+ 2, then the graph shown in the
xyplane below best represents which of the
following functions?
(A) f
1
2
( )
(B) f
−
( )
1
x
(C) f(–2x)
(D) f
−
( )
x
4
(E) f
−
( )
x
2
9. Based on the data shown below, how many
chickens at Hill Farm laid 10 eggs from
June 1st through June 7th?
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 303
www.petersons.com
10. According to the data shown below, during
what year was the dollar amount of Country
Y’s exports approximately twice that of
Country X’s imports?
(A) 1985
(B) 1987
(C) 1988
(D) 1989
(E) 1990
11. A bag of marbles contains twice as many red
marbles as blue marbles, and twice as many
blue marbles as green marbles. If these are the
only colors of marbles in the bag, what is the
probability of randomly picking a blue marble
from the bag?
(A)
1
6
(B)
2
9
(C)
1
4
(D)
2
7
(E)
1
3
12. The figure below shows two Tshaped
cardboard pieces, both to be folded into a pair
of cubeshaped dice.
On a fair throw of both dice, what is the
probability that NEITHER die will show either
a solid white or solid black surface facing up?
(A)
1
6
(B)
1
5
(C)
1
4
(D)
1
3
(E)
2
5
Chapter 16 304
www.petersons.com
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (B) Since the figure shows a 45°45°90°
triangle in which the length of one leg is
known, you can easily apply either the sine or
cosine function to determine the length of the
hypotenuse. Applying the function sin45°=
2
2
, set the value of this function equal to
5
x
opposite
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
2
2
; 2 ; = = = = =
5
10
10
2
10 2
2
5 2
x
x x .
2. (D) Since the figure shows a 30°60°90°
triangle, you can easily apply either the sine or
the cosine function to determine the length of
the hypotenuse. Applying the function sin30°=
1
2
, set the value of this function equal to
4 opposite
hypotenuse x
, then solve for x:
1
2
= =
4
8
x
x ; .
3. (C) Since the hexagon is regular (all sides are
congruent), the area of ∆AOP in the following
figure is 3 — one sixth the area of the
hexagon.
∆AOP is equilateral; hence you can divide it
into two 1: 3 :2 triangles, as shown in the
figure. Since the common leg, whose length is
3 , is also the circle’s radius, the circle’s
circumference must be 2 3 π .
4. (E) The line’s slope (m) =
y y
x x
2 1
2 1
1 3
4 2
2
2
1
−
−
=
−
−
=
−
= − . Substitute the (x,y)
pair for either point to define the equation of
the line. Using the pair (2,3):
y x b
b
b
= − +
= − +
=
3 2
5
The line’s equation is y = –x + 5. To determine
which of the five answer choices provides a
point that also lies on this line, plug in the
values of x and y provided each answer choice,
in turn. Only choice (E) provides a solution to
the equation: –1 = –6 + 5.
5. (B) The slope of AB =
y y
x x
2 1
2 1
3 3
4 4
6
8
3
4
−
−
=
− −
− −
= =
( )
( )
. The slope of the line
perpendicular to AB is the negative reciprocal
of
3
4
, which is –
4
3
.
6. (D) Given any two xycoordinate points, a
line’s slope
m
y y
x x
=
−
−
1 2
1 2
. Accordingly,
1
3
5 3
2
=
− −
−
( )
a
. Simplify, then crossmultiply to
solve for a:
1
3
8
2
2 3 8
2 24
26
=
−
− =
− =
=
a
a
a
a
( )( )
7. (B) By visual inspection, you can see that the
maximum value of y is 2, and this value occurs
only once in the set of yvalues — when x = 0.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 305
www.petersons.com
8. (B) Substitute the variable expression
provided in each answer choice, in turn, for x in
the function, and you’ll find that only choice
(B) provides an expression that transforms the
function into one whose graph matches the one
in the figure: f(x + 1) = x + 1. To confirm that
the line in the figure is in fact the graph of y = x
+ 1, substitute the two (x,y) pairs plotted along
the line for x and y in the equation. The
equation holds for both pairs: (3) = (2) + 1; (–2)
= (–3) + 1.
9. The correct answer is 25. The total number of
bowlers in the league is 240, which is the total
of the six numbers in the frequency column.
The number of bowlers whose averages fall
within the interval 161–200 is 60 (37 + 23).
These 60 bowlers account for
60
240
, or 25%, of
the league’s bowlers.
10. (C) In the scatter plot, B and D are further to
the left and further up than all of the other three
points (A, C, and E), which means that City B
and City D receive less rainfall but higher
temperatures than any of the other three cities.
Statement (C) provides an accurate general
statement, based on this information.
11. (D) Of six marbles altogether, two are blue.
Hence, the chances of drawing a blue marble
are 2 in 6, or 1 in 3, which can be expressed as
the fraction
1
3
.
12. The correct answer is 3/16. Given that the ratio
of the large circle’s area to the small circle’s
area is 2:1, the small circle must comprise 50%
of the total area of the large circle. The shaded
areas comprise
3
8
the area of the small circle,
and so the probability of randomly selecting a
point in one of these three regions is
3
8
1
2
3
16
× =
.
Exercise 1
1. (B) Since the figure shows a 45°45°90°
triangle in which the length of one leg is
known, you can easily apply either the sine or
cosine function to determine the length of the
hypotenuse. Applying the function sin45°=
2
2
, set the value of this function equal to
x
7
opposite
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
2
2
; 2 2 ; = = =
x
x x
7
7
7 2
2
.
2. (C) Since the figure shows a 30°60°90°
triangle, you can easily apply either the sine or
the cosine function to determine the length of
the hypotenuse. Applying the function cos60°=
1
2
, set the value of this function equal to
x
10
adjacent
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
1
2
=
x
10
; 2x
= 10 ; x = 5.
3. (B) The question describes the following 30°
60°90°triangle:
Since the length of one leg is known, you can
easily apply the tangent function to determine
the length of the other leg (x). Applying the
function tan30°=
3
3
, set the value of this
function equal to
x
6
opposite
adjacent
, then solve for
x:
3
3
; ; = = =
x
x x
6
3 6 3 2 3 .
Chapter 16 306
www.petersons.com
4. (D) The area of a triangle =
1
2
× base ×
height. Since the figure shows a 30°60°90°
triangle with base 3, you can easily apply the
tangent function to determine the height (the
vertical leg). Applying the function tan60°=
3
, let x equal the triangle’s height, set the
value of this function equal to
x
3
opposite
adjacent
,
then solve for x:
3
1
; = =
x
x
3
3 3 . Now you
can determine the triangle’s area:
1
2
3 3
9
2
3
9 3
2
× × = 3 , or .
5. (A) The two tracks form the legs of a right
triangle, the hypotenuse of which is the shortest
distance between the trains. Since the trains
traveled at the same speed, the triangle’s two
legs are congruent (equal in length), giving us a
1:1:
2
with angles 45°, 45°, and 90°, as the
next figure shows:
To answer the question, you can solve for the
length of either leg (x) by applying either the
sine or cosine function. Applying the function
cos45°=
2
2
, set the value of this function
equal to
2
x
adjacent
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
2
2
; 2 2 ; 2 = = =
x
x x
70
70 35 . The question
asks for an approximate distance in miles.
Using 1.4 as the approximate value of
2
: x ≈
(35)(1.4) = 49.
Exercise 2
1. The correct answer is 1. AB is tangent to
PO
;
therefore,
AB PO ⊥
. Since the pentagon is
regular (all sides are congruent), P bisects AB .
Given that the perimeter of the pentagon is 10,
the length of each side is 2, and hence AP = 1.
2. (D) Since
AC
is tangent to the circle, m∠OBC
= 90°. ∠BCO is supplementary to the 140°angle
shown; thus, m∠BCO = 40°and, accordingly,
m∠BOE = 50°. Since ∠BOE and ∠DOE are
supplementary, m∠DOE = 130°. (This angle
measure defines the measure of minor arc DE.)
3. (B) Since AB is tangent to circle O at C, you
can draw a radius of length 6 from O to C ,
forming two congruent 45°45°90°triangles
(∆ACO and ∆BCO), each with sides in the ratio
1:1: 2 . Thus, OA = OB = 6 2 , and AC = CB
= 6. The perimeter of ∆ABO = 12 + 6 2 +
6 2 = 12 + 12 2 .
4. (D) To find the circle’s area, you must first
find its radius. Draw a radius from O to any of
the three points of tangency, and then construct
a right triangle—for example, ∆ABC in the
following figure:
Since m∠BAC = 60°, m∠OAD = 30°, and
∆AOD is a 1: 3 :2 triangle. Given that the
perimeter of ∆ABC is 18, AD = 3. Letting
x = OD:
3 3
1
3 3
3
3
3
x
x x = = = ; ; , or .
The circle’s radius =
3
. Hence, its area =
π π 3 3
2
( )
= .
5. (A) Since
AC
is tangent to the circle,
AC ⊥ BC . Accordingly, ∆ABC is a right
triangle, and m∠B = 50°. Similarly, AB ⊥ DO ,
∆DBO is a right triangle, and m∠DOB = 40°.
∠DOC (the angle in question) is supplementary
to ∠DOB. Thus, m∠DOB = 140°. (x = 140.)
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 307
www.petersons.com
Exercise 3
1. (C) For all values of x, y = –
9
2
. Thus, the
equation describes a horizontal line with y
intercept –
9
2
. The slope of a horizontal line is
0 (zero).
2. (A) Apply the formula for determining a
line’s slope (m):
m
y y
x x
=
−
−
=
− −
− −
=
−
= −
2 1
2 1
6 4
3 1
10
4
5
2 ( )
3. (B) In the general equation y = mx + b, the
slope (m) is given as 3. To determine b,
substitute –3 for x and 3 for y, then solve for b:
3 = 3(–3) + b; 12 = b.
4. (D) Line P slopes upward from left to right at
an angle less than 45°. Thus, the line’s slope (m
in the equation y = mx + b) is a positive fraction
less than 1. Also, line P crosses the yaxis at a
positive yvalue (above the xaxis). Thus, the
line’s yintercept (b in the equation y = mx + b)
is positive. Only choice (D) provides an
equation that meets both conditions.
5. (E) First, find the midpoint of the line
segment, which is where it intersects its
perpendicular bisector. The midpoint’s x
coordinate is
4 3
2
1
2
−
= , and its ycoordinate is
− +
=
2 5
2
3
2
. Next, determine the slope of the
line segment:
5 2
3 4
7
7
1
− −
− −
=
−
= −
( )
. Since the
slope of the line segment is –1, the slope of its
perpendicular bisector is 1. Plug (x,y) pair
( , )
1
2
3
2
and slope (m) 1 into the standard form of
the equation for a line (y = mx + b), then solve
for b (the yintercept):
3
2
1
1
2
1
=
+
=
( ) b
b
You now know the equation of the line:
y = x + 1.
Exercise 4
1. The correct answer is 4. For every value of x,
f(x) is the corresponding yvalue. By visual
inspection, you can see that the maximum y
value is 4 and that the graph attains this value
twice, at (–8,4) and (4,4). Similarly, the
minimum value of y is –4 and the graph attains
this value twice, at (–4,–4) and (8,–4); in both
instances, the absolute value of y is 4. Thus, the
absolute value of y is at its maximum at four
different xvalues.
2. (E) The figure shows the graph of y = 2. For
any real number x, f(x) = 2. Thus, regardless of
what number is added to or subtracted from x,
the result is still a number whose function is 2
(y = 2).
3. (D) To determine the features of the
transformed line, substitute
x − 2
2
for x in the
function:
f
x x
x x
−
( )
=
−
( )
− = − − = −
2
2
2
2
2 2 2 4
The correct figure should show the graph of the
equation y = x – 4. Choice (D) shows the graph
of a line with slope 1 and yintercept –4, which
matches the features of this equation. No other
answer choice provides a graph with both these
features.
4. (D) Substitute (x+ 1) for x in the function:
f(x + 1) = [(x + 1) – 1]
2
+ 1 = x
2
+ 1
In the xyplane, the equation of f(x + 1) is y = x
2
+ 1. To find the yintercept of this equation’s
graph, let x = 0, then solve for y:
y = (0)
2
+ 1 = 1
5. (A) The graph of x = –(y
2
) is a parabola
opening to the left with vertex at the origin
(0,0). The function f(y) = –(y
2
+ 1) is equivalent
to f(y) = –y
2
– 1, the graph of which is the graph
of x = –(y
2
), except translated one unit to the
left, as the figure shows. [Since (–y)
2
= y
2
for
any real number y, substituting –y for y in the
function f(y) = –(y
2
+ 1) does not transform the
function in any way.]
Chapter 16 308
www.petersons.com
Exercise 5
1. (D) Division D’s income accounted for 30%
of $1,560,000, or $468,000. Income from
Division C was 20% of $1,560,000, or
$312,000. To answer the question, subtract:
$468,000 – $312,000 = $156,000.
2. (A) Visual inspection reveals that the
aggregate amount awarded in 1995 exceeded
that of any of the other 3 years shown. During
that year, minority awards totaled
approximately $730,000 and nonminority
awards totaled approximately $600,000. The
difference between the two amounts is
$130,000.
3. (E) The two greatest twomonth percent
increases for City X were from 1/1 to 3/1 and
from 5/1 to 7/1. Although the temperature
increased by a greater amount during the latter
period, the percent increase was greater from 1/
1 to 3/1:
January–March: from 30 degrees to 50 degrees,
a 66% increase
May–July: from 60 degrees to 90 degrees, a
50% increase
During the period from 1/1 to 3/1, the highest
daily temperature for City Y shown on the
chart is appoximately 66 degrees.
4. (A) To answer the question, you can add
together the “rise” (vertical distance) and the
“run” (horizontal distance) from point O to
each of the five lettered points (A–E). The
shortest combined length represents the
fastest combined (total) race time. Or, you
can draw a line segment from point O to each
of the five points—the shortest segment
indicating the fastest combined time. As you
can see, OA is the shortest segment, showing
that cyclist A finished the two races in the
fastest combined time.
5. (C) You can approximate the (race 1):(race 2)
time ratio for the ten cyclists as a group by
drawing a ray extending from point O through
the “middle” of the cluster of points—as nearly
as possible. Each of the five answer choices
suggests a distinct slope for the ray. Choice (C)
suggests a ray with slope 1 (a 45°angle), which
does in fact appear to extend through the
middle of the points:
(Although six points are located above the ray,
while only four are located below the ray, the
ones below the ray, as a group, are further from
the ray; so the overall distribution of values is
fairly balanced above versus below the ray.)
Any ray with a significantly flatter slope
(answer choice A or B) or steeper slope
(answer choice D or E) would not extend
through the “middle” of the ten points and
therefore would not indicate an accurate
average (race 1):(race 2) ratio.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 309
www.petersons.com
Exercise 6
1. (D) There are two ways among five possible
occurrences that a cherry candy will be
selected. Thus, the probability of selecting a
cherry candy is
2
5
.
2. (B) In each set are three distinct member
pairs. Thus the probability of selecting any pair
is one in three, or
1
3
. Accordingly, the
probability of selecting fruit and salad from the
appetizer menu along with squash and peas
from the vegetable menu is
1
3
1
3
1
9
× = .
3. (E) You must first calculate the chances of
picking the same student twice, by multiplying
together the two individual probabilities for the
student:
1
7
1
7
1
49
× =
. The probability of picking
the same student twice, added to the probability
of not picking the same student twice, equals 1.
So to answer the question, subtract
1
49
from 1.
4. (C) Let x = the number of quarters in the
bank (this is the numerator of the probability
formula’s fraction), and let x + 72 = the total
number of coins (the fraction’s denominator).
Solve for x:
1
4 72
72 4
72 3
24
=
+
+ =
=
=
x
x
x x
x
x
5. The correct answer is 1/6. Given that the ratio
of the large circle’s area to the small circle’s
area is 3:1, the area of the “ring” must be twice
that of the small circle. Hence the probability of
randomly selecting a point in the outer ring is
2
3
. The shaded area accounts for
1
4
of the ring,
and so the probability of selecting a point in the
shaded area is
2
3
1
4
2
12
1
6
× = = .
Retest
1. (E) Since the figure shows a 45°45°90°
triangle in which the length of the hypotenuse
is known, you can easily apply either the sine
or cosine function to determine the length of
either leg. Applying the function cos45°=
2
2
,
set the value of this function equal to
2
x
adjacent
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
2
2
2
; 2 2 2 ; 2 ; = =
( )( )
= =
x
x x x
4
4 8 4
.
2. (C) The two flight paths form the legs of a
right triangle, the hypotenuse of which is the
shortest distance between the trains (40 miles).
As the next figure shows, a 120°turn to either
the left or right allows for two scenarios (point
T is the terminal):
As the figures show, the two flight paths, along
with a line segment connecting the two planes,
form a 30°60°90° triangle with sides in the
ratio 1:
3
:2. To answer the question, solve for
the length of the longer leg (x), which is
opposite the 60°angle. One way to solve for x
is by applying either the sine or cosine
function. Applying the function sin60°=
3
2
,
set the value of this function equal to
x
40
opposite
hypotenuse
, then solve for x:
Chapter 16 310
www.petersons.com
3
2
; 2 3 ; 3 = = =
x
x x
40
40 20 . The question
asks for an approximate distance in miles.
Using 1.7 as the approximate value of 3 : x ≈
(20)(1.7) = 34.
3. (D) The entire area between the two circles is
the area of the larger minus the area of the
smaller. Letting that area equal A:
A r r
r r
r
= ( ) −
= −
=
π π
π π
π
2
4
3
2
2
2 2
2
Drawing a line segment from C to O forms two
right triangles, each with hypotenuse 2r. Since
OC = r, by the Pythagorean Theorem, the ratios
among the triangle’s sides are 1: 3 :2, with
corresponding angle ratios 90°:60°:30°. ∠A and
∠B each = 30°. Accordingly, interior ∠AOB
measures 120°, or one third the degree measure
of the circle. Hence, the area of the shaded
region is two thirds of area A and must equal
2πr
2
.
4. (E) The line shows a negative yintercept (the
point where the line crosses the vertical axis)
and a negative slope less than –1 (that is,
slightly more horizontal than a 45°angle). In
equation (E), −
2
3
is the slope and –3 is the y
intercept. Thus, equation (E) matches the graph
of the line.
5. (B) Points (5,–2) and (–3,3) are two points on
line b. The slope of b is the change in the y
coordinates divided by the corresponding
change in the xcoordinate:
m
b
=
− −
− −
=
−
−
3 2
3 5
5
8
5
8
( )
, or
6. (E) Put the equation given in the question
into the form y = mx + b:
4 2 6
2 4 6
2 3
x y
y x
y x
− =
= −
= −
The line’s slope (m) is 2. Accordingly, the
slope of a line perpendicular to this line is –
1
2
.
Given a yintercept of 3, the equation of the
perpendicular line is y = –
1
2
x + 3. Reworking
this equation to match the form of the answer
choices yields 2y + x = 6.
7. (D) The figure shows the graph of y = 2x,
whose slope (2) is twice the negative reciprocal
of
−
1
2
, which is the slope of the graph of f(x) =
−
1
2
x. You obtain this slope by substituting –4x
for x in the function: f(–4x) =
−
1
2
(–4x) = 2x.
8. (E) Substitute the variable expression given
in each answer choice, in turn, for x in the
function f(x) = –2x
2
+ 2. Substituting
−
x
2
(given in choice E) for x yields the equation
y
x
= − +
2
4
2 :
f
x x x
x
−
( )
= − ( ) −
( )
+ = − ( )
+ =
− +
2
2
2
2 2
4
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
,, or − +
x
2
4
2
The graph of
y
x
= −
2
4
is a downward opening
parabola with vertex at the origin (0,0). The
figure shows the graph of that equation, except
translated 2 units up. To confirm that (E) is the
correct choice, substitute the (x,y) pairs (–4,–2)
and (4,–2), which are shown in the graph, for x
and y in the equation
y
x
= − +
2
4
2
, and you’ll
find that the equation holds for both value pairs.
9. The correct answer is 6. By multiplying the
number of chickens by the number of eggs they
lay per week, then adding together the
products, you can find the number of eggs laid
by chickens laying 9 or fewer eggs per week:
(2)(9) + (4)(8) + (5)(7) + (3)(6) + (2)(5) +
(0)(4) + (2)(3) = 119 eggs.
To find the number of chickens that laid 10
eggs during the week, subtract 119 from 179
(the total number of eggs): 179 – 119 = 60.
Then divide 60 by 10 to get 6 chickens.
Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability 311
www.petersons.com
10. (E) For each year, visually compare the
difference in height between Country X’s white
bar and Country Y’s dark bar. (For each year,
the lefthand bars represent data for Country X,
while the righthand bars represent data for
Country Y.) A quick inspection reveals that
only for the year 1990 is Country Y’s dark bar
approximately twice the height of Country X’s
white bar. Although you don’t need to
determine dollar amounts, during 1990,
Country Y’s imports totaled about $55 million,
while Country X’s exports totaled about $28
million.
11. (D) Regardless of the number of marbles in
the bag, the red : blue : green marble ratio is
4:2:1. As you can see, blue marbles account for
2
7
of the total number of marbles. Thus, the
probability of picking a blue marble is
2
7
.
12. (A) The probability that the lefthand die will
NOT show a solid face is 3 in 6, or
1
2
. The
probability that the righthand die will NOT
show a solid face is 2 in 6, or
1
3
. To calculate
the combined probability of these two
independent events occurring, multiply:
1
2
1
3
1
6
× =
.
313
17
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST A
Answer Sheet
Directions: For each question, darken the oval that corresponds to your answer choice. Mark only one
oval for each question. If you change your mind, erase your answer completely.
Section 1
1. abcde 8. abcde 15. abcde 22. abcde
2. abcde 9. abcde 16. abcde 23. abcde
3. abcde 10. abcde 17. abcde 24. abcde
4. abcde 11. abcde 18. abcde 25. abcde
5. abcde 12. abcde 19. abcde
6. abcde 13. abcde 20. abcde
7. abcde 14. abcde 21. abcde
Section 2
Note: Only the answers entered on the grid are scored. Handwritten answers at the top of the column are not scored.
315
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST A
Section 1
25 Questions
Time: 30 Minutes
1. If 20% of a number is 8, what is 25% of the
number?
(A) 2
(B) 10
(C) 12
(D) 11
(E) 15
2. If x + 3 is a multiple of 3, which of the
following is not a multiple of 3?
(A) x
(B) x + 6
(C) 6x + 18
(D) 2x + 6
(E) 3x + 5
3. In the figure below, AB = AC. Then x =
(A) 40°
(B) 80°
(C) 100°
(D) 60°
(E) 90°
4.
2
5
2
3
1
2
1
10
÷
= + −
(A) −
1
10
(B) −
1
7
(C)
19
15
(D)
1
5
(E) 1
5. The toll on the Islands Bridge is $1.00 for car
and driver and $.75 for each additional
passenger. How many people were riding in a
car for which the toll was $3.25?
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
(E) none of these
6. If y
3
= 2y
2
and y ≠ 0, then y must be equal to
(A) 1
(B)
1
2
(C) 2
(D) 3
(E) –1
Chapter 17 316
www.petersons.com
7. If x and y are negative integers and x – y = 1,
what is the least possible value for xy?
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
(E) 4
8. A park is in the shape of a square, a triangle,
and a semicircle, attached as in the diagram
below. If the area of the square is 144 and the
perimeter of the triangle is 28, find the
perimeter of the park.
(A) 52 + 12π
(B) 52 + 6π
(C) 40 + 6π
(D) 34 + 12π
(E) 32 + 6π
9. An oil tank has a capacity of 45 gallons. At the
beginning of October it is 80% full. At the end
of October it is
1
3
full. How many gallons of
oil were used in October?
(A) 21
(B) 25
(C) 41
(D) 27
(E) 30
10. AB and CD are diameters of circle O. The
number of degrees in angle CAB is
(A) 50
(B) 100
(C) 130
(D) 12
1
2
(E) 25
11. If
a
b
b
c
c
d
d
e
x ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ =1, then x must equal
(A)
a
e
(B)
e
a
(C) e
(D)
1
a
(E) none of these
12. If the sum of x and y is z and the average of m,
n, and p is q, find the value of x + y + m + n + p
in terms of z and q.
(A) 2z + 3q
(B) z + 3q
(C) z z
q
+ +
3
(D)
z q
2 3
+
(E) none of these
13. Isosceles triangle ABC is inscribed in square
BCDE as shown. If the area of square BCDE is
4, the perimeter of triangle ABC is
(A) 8
(B) 2 5 +
(C) 2 2 5 +
(D) 2 10 +
(E) 12
14. If a is not 0 or 1, a fraction equivalent to
1
2
2
a
a
−
is
(A)
1
2 2 a −
(B)
2
2 a −
(C)
1
2 a −
(D)
1
a
(E)
2
2a −1
15. At 3:30 P.M. the angle between the hands of a
clock is
(A) 90°
(B) 80°
(C) 75°
(D) 72°
(E) 65°
317
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
16. A clerk’s weekly salary is $320 after a 25% raise.
What was his weekly salary before the raise?
(A) $256
(B) $260
(C) $300
(D) $304
(E) $316
17. The figure below is composed of 5 equal
squares. If the area of the figure is 125, find its
perimeter.
(A) 60
(B) 100
(C) 80
(D) 75
(E) 20
18. Which of the following is equal to
1
2
3
5
of ?
(A) 3%
(B) 33
1
3
%
(C) 30%
(D) 83
1
3
%
(E) 120%
19. The length of an arc of a circle is equal to
1
5
of
the circumference of the circle. If the length of
the arc is 2π, the radius of the circle is
(A) 2
(B) 1
(C) 10
(D) 5
(E) 10
20. If two sides of a triangle are 3 and 4 and the
third side is x, then
(A) x = 5
(B) x > 7
(C) x < 7
(D) 1 < x < 7
(E) x > 7 or x < 1
21. The smallest integer that, when squared, is less
than 5 is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
(E) none of these
22. Mr. Prince takes his wife and two children to
the circus. If the price of a child’s ticket is
1
2
the price of an adult ticket and Mr. Prince pays
a total of $12.60, find the price of a child’s
ticket.
(A) $4.20
(B) $3.20
(C) $1.60
(D) $2.10
(E) $3.30
23. If
b
a
c
is defined as being equal to ab – c,
then
4
3
5 6
5
7
+
is equal to
(A) 30
(B) 40
(C) 11
(D) 6
(E) 15
24. The diameter of a circle is increased by 50%.
The area is increased by
(A) 50%
(B) 100%
(C) 125%
(D) 200%
(E) 250%
25. Of the students at South High,
1
3
are seniors.
Of the seniors,
3
4
will go to college next year.
What percent of the students at South High will
go to college next year?
(A) 75
(B) 25
(C) 33
1
3
(D) 50
(E) 45
Chapter 17 318
www.petersons.com
Section 2
25 Questions
Time: 30 Minutes
Directions: Solve each of the following problems. Write the answer in the corresponding grid on the
answer sheet and fill in the ovals beneath each answer you write. Here are some examples.
Answer: 3/4 (–.75; show answer either way) Answer : 325
Note: A mixed number such as 3 1/2 must be gridded Note: Either position is correct.
as 7/2 or as 3.5. If gridded as “3 1/2,” it will be read
as “thirty–one halves.”
1. If a = 4, what is the value of a
2
9 + ?
2. When a certain number is divided by 2, there is
no remainder. If there is a remainder when the
number is divided by 4, what must the
remainder be?
3. If a = x
2
and x = 8 , what is the value of a?
4. If
2
5
5
2
x y = , what is the value of
y
x
?
5. If there are 30 students at a meeting of the
Forum Club, and 20 are wearing white, 17 are
wearing black and 14 are wearing both black
and white, how many are wearing neither black
nor white?
6. If a ❒ b means a · b + (a – b), find the value of
4 ❒ 2.
7. A drawer contains 4 red socks and 4 blue
socks. Find the least number of socks that must
be drawn from the drawer to be assured of
having a pair of red socks.
8. How many 2inch squares are needed to fill a
border around the edge of the shaded square
with a side of 6" as shown in the figure below?
9. If 3x + 3x – 3x = 12, what is the value of
3x + 1?
10. If ab = 10 and a
2
+ b
2
= 30, what is the value of
(a + b)
2
?
319
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST B
Answer Sheet
Directions: For each question, darken the oval that corresponds to your answer choice. Mark only one
oval for each question. If you change your mind, erase your answer completely.
Section 1
1. abcde 8. abcde 15. abcde 22. abcde
2. abcde 9. abcde 16. abcde 23. abcde
3. abcde 10. abcde 17. abcde 24. abcde
4. abcde 11. abcde 18. abcde 25. abcde
5. abcde 12. abcde 19. abcde
6. abcde 13. abcde 20. abcde
7. abcde 14. abcde 21. abcde
Section 2
Note: Only the answers entered on the grid are scored. Handwritten answers at the top of the column are not scored.
321
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST B
Section 1
25 Questions
Time: 30 Minutes
1. A musical instrument depreciates by 20% of its
value each year. What is the value, after 2
years, of a piano purchased new for $1200?
(A) $768
(B) $912
(C) $675
(D) $48
(E) $1152
2. Which of the following has the largest
numerical value?
(A)
3
5
(B)
2
3
3
4
(C)
.25
(D) (.9)
2
(E)
2
3 .
3.
1
4
% written as a decimal is
(A) 25
(B) 2.5
(C) .25
(D) .025
(E) .0025
4. Which of the following fractions is equal to
1
4
%?
(A)
1
25
(B)
4
25
(C)
1
4
(D)
1
400
(E)
1
40
5. Roger receives a basic weekly salary of $80
plus a 5% commission on his sales. In a week
in which his sales amounted to $800, the ratio
of his basic salary to his commission was
(A) 2:1
(B) 1:2
(C) 2:3
(D) 3:2
(E) 3:1
6. The value of
1
2
1
3
1
4
−
is
(A) 6
(B)
1
6
(C) 1
(D) 3
(E)
3
2
Chapter 17 322
www.petersons.com
7. The sum of Alan’s age and Bob’s age is 40.
The sum of Bob’s age and Carl’s age is 34. The
sum of Alan’s age and Carl’s age is 42. How
old is Bob?
(A) 18
(B) 24
(C) 20
(D) 16
(E) 12
8. On a map having a scale of
1
4
inch : 20 miles,
how many inches should there be between
towns 325 miles apart?
(A) 4
1
16
(B) 16
1
4
(C) 81
1
4
(D) 32
1
2
(E) 6
1
4
9. In Simon’s General Score, there are m male
employees and f female employees. What part
of the staff is men?
(A)
m f
m
+
(B)
m f
f
+
(C)
m
f
(D)
m
m f +
(E)
f
m
10. If the angles of a triangle are in the ratio 2:3:4,
the triangle is
(A) acute
(B) isosceles
(C) right
(D) equilateral
(E) obtuse
11. If the length and width of a rectangle are each
multiplied by 2, then
(A) the area and perimeter are both multiplied
by 4
(B) the area is multiplied by 2 and the
perimeter by 4
(C) the area is multiplied by 4 and the
perimeter by 2
(D) the area and perimeter are both multiplied
by 2
(E) the perimeter is multiplied by 4 and the
area by 8
12. Paul needs m minutes to mow the lawn. After
he works for k minutes, what part of the lawn is
still unmowed?
(A)
k
m
(B)
m
k
(C)
m k
k
−
(D)
m k
m
−
(E)
k m
m
−
13. Mr. Marcus earns $250 per week. If he spends
20% of his income for rent, 25% for food, and
10% for savings, how much is left each week
for other expenses?
(A) $112.50
(B) $125
(C) $137.50
(D) $132.50
(E) $140
14. What is the area of the shaded portion if the
perimeter of the square is 32? (The four circles
are tangent to each other and the square, and
are congruent.)
(A) 32 – 16π
(B) 64 – 16π
(C) 64 – 64π
(D) 64 – 8π
(E) 32 – 4π
323
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
15. How far is the point (–3, –4) from the origin?
(A) 2
(B) 2.5
(C) 4 2
(D) 4 3
(E) 5
16. The product of 3456 and 789 is exactly
(A) 2726787
(B) 2726785
(C) 2726781
(D) 2726784
(E) 2726786
17. Susan got up one morning at 7:42 A.M. and
went to bed that evening at 10:10 P.M. How
much time elapsed between her getting up and
going to bed that day?
(A) 18 hrs. 2 min.
(B) 14 hrs. 18 min.
(C) 15 hrs. 18 min.
(D) 9 hrs. 22 min.
(E) 14 hrs. 28 min.
18. Find the perimeter of right triangle ABC if the
area of square AEDC is 100 and the area of square
BCFG is 36.
(A) 22
(B) 24
(C) 16 6 3 +
(D) 16 6 2 +
(E) cannot be determined from information
given
19. Find the number of degrees in angle 1 if AB =
AC, DE = DC, angle 2 = 40°, and angle 3 = 80°.
(A) 60
(B) 40
(C) 90
(D) 50
(E) 80
20. If p pencils cost 2D dollars, how many pencils
can be bought for c cents?
(A)
pc
D 2
(B)
pc
D 200
(C)
50pc
D
(D)
2Dp
c
(E) 200pcD
21. Two trains start from the same station at 10
A.M., one traveling east at 60 m.p.h. and the
other west at 70 m.p.h. At what time will they
be 455 miles apart?
(A) 3:30 P.M.
(B) 12:30 P.M.
(C) 1:30 P.M.
(D) 1 P.M.
(E) 2 P.M.
22. If x < 0 and y < 0, then
(A) x + y > 0
(B) x = –y
(C) x > y
(D) xy > 0
(E) xy < 0
23. Which of the following is the product of 4327
and 546?
(A) 2362541
(B) 2362542
(C) 2362543
(D) 2362546
(E) 2362548
Chapter 17 324
www.petersons.com
24. If a classroom contains 20 to 24 students and
each corridor contains 8 to 10 classrooms, what
is the minimum number of students on one
corridor at a given time, if all classrooms are
occupied?
(A) 200
(B) 192
(C) 160
(D) 240
(E) 210
25. If the area of each circle enclosed in rectangle
ABCD is 9π, the area of ABCD is
(A) 108
(B) 27
(C) 54
(D) 54π
(E) 108π
325
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
Section 2
25 Questions
Time: 30 Minutes
Directions: Solve each of the following problems. Write the answer in the corresponding grid on the
answer sheet and fill in the ovals beneath each answer you write. Here are some examples
Answer: 3/4 (–.75; show answer either way) Answer : 325
Note: A mixed number such as 3 1/2 must be gridded Note: Either position is correct.
as 7/2 or as 3.5. If gridded as “3 1/2,” it will be read
as “thirty–one halves.”
1. Simplified as a fraction to simplest form, what
part of a dime is a quarter?
2. Marion is paid $24 for 5 hours of work in the
school office. Janet works 3 hours and makes
$10.95. How much more per hour does Marion
make than Janet?
3. If the outer diameter of a cylindrical oil tank is
54.28 inches and the inner diameter is 48.7
inches, what is the thickness of the wall of the
tank, in inches?
4. What number added to 40% of itself is equal
to 84?
5. If r = 25 – s, what is the value of 4r + 4s?
6. A plane flies over Denver at 11:20 A.M. It
passes over Coolidge, 120 miles from Denver,
at 11:32 A.M. Find the rate of the plane in
miles per hour.
7. 53% of the 1000 students at Jackson High are
girls. How many boys are there in the school?
8. How many digits are there in the square root of
a perfect square of 12 digits?
9. In May, Carter’s Appliances sold 40 washing
machines. In June, because of a special
promotion, the store sold 80 washing machines.
What is the percent of increase in the number
of washing machines sold?
10. Find the value of 3 2
2
( )
.
327
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST C
Answer Sheet
Directions: For each question, darken the oval that corresponds to your answer choice. Mark only one
oval for each question. If you change your mind, erase your answer completely.
Section 1
1. abcde 8. abcde 15. abcde 22. abcde
2. abcde 9. abcde 16. abcde 23. abcde
3. abcde 10. abcde 17. abcde 24. abcde
4. abcde 11. abcde 18. abcde 25. abcde
5. abcde 12. abcde 19. abcde
6. abcde 13. abcde 20. abcde
7. abcde 14. abcde 21. abcde
Section 2
Note: Only the answers entered on the grid are scored. Handwritten answers at the top of the column are not scored.
329
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST C
Section 1
25 Questions
Time: 30 Minutes
1. 8 · 8 = 4
x
. Find x
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
(E) 6
2. If a > 2, which of the following is the smallest?
(A)
2
a
(B)
a
2
(C)
a +1
2
(D)
2
1 a +
(E)
2
1 a −
3. Which of the following has the greatest value?
(A)
1
2
(B)
.2
(C) .2
(D) (.2)
2
(E) (.02)
3
4. If
a
b
=
3
4
, then 12a =
(A) 3b
(B) b
(C) 9b
(D) 12b
(E) 16b
5. If a = b and
1
c
b = , then c =
(A) a
(B) –a
(C) b
(D)
1
a
(E) –b
6. If a building B feet high casts a shadow F feet
long, then, at the same time of day, a tree T feet
high will cast a shadow how many feet long?
(A)
FT
B
(B)
FB
T
(C)
B
FT
(D)
TB
F
(E)
T
FB
7. The vertices of a triangle are (3,1) (8,1) and
(8,3). The area of this triangle is
(A) 5
(B) 10
(C) 7
(D) 20
(E) 14
Chapter 17 330
www.petersons.com
8. Of 60 employees at the Star Manufacturing
Company, x employees are female. If
2
3
of the
remainder are married, how many unmarried
men work for this company?
(A) 40
2
3
− x
(B) 40
1
3
− x
(C) 40
1
3
+ x
(D) 20
2
3
− x
(E) 20
1
3
− x
9. A circle whose center is at the origin passes
through the point whose coordinates are (1,1).
The area of the circle is
(A) π
(B) 2 π
(C) 2π
(D) 2 2π
(E) 4 π
10. In triangle ABC, AB = BC and AC is extended
to D. If angle BCD contains 100°, find the
number of degrees in angle B.
(A) 50
(B) 80
(C) 60
(D) 40
(E) 20
11.
4
1
2
10
1
8
(A)
2
5
(B)
4
9
(C)
4
81
(D)
3
7
(E)
15
23
12. Which of the following is greater than
1
3
?
(A) .33
(B)
1
3
2
(C)
1
4
(D)
1
3 .
(E)
.3
2
13. What percent of a half dollar is a penny, a
nickel, and a dime?
(A) 16
(B) 8
(C) 20
(D) 25
(E) 32
14. If
1 1 1
a b c
+ = then c =
(A) a + b
(B) ab
(C)
a b
ab
+
(D)
ab
a b +
(E)
1
2
ab
15. What percent of a is b?
(A)
100b
a
(B)
a
b
(C)
b
a 100
(D)
b
a
(E)
100a
b
16. The average of two numbers is A. If one of the
numbers is x, the other number is
(A) A – x
(B)
A
x
2
−
(C) 2A – x
(D)
A x +
2
(E) x – A
331
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
17. If a = 5b, then
3
5
a =
(A)
5
3
b
(B) 3b
(C)
3
5
b
(D)
b
3
(E)
b
5
18. A rectangular door measures 5 feet by 6 feet 8
inches. The distance from one corner of the
door to the diagonally opposite corner is
(A) 9'4"
(B) 8'4"
(C) 8'3"
(D) 9'6"
(E) 9'
19. Two ships leave from the same port at
11:30 A.M. If one sails due east at 20 miles per
hour and the other due south at 15 miles per
hour, how many miles apart are the ships at
2:30 P.M.?
(A) 25
(B) 50
(C) 75
(D) 80
(E) 35
20. If m men can paint a house in d days, how
many days will it take m + 2 men to paint the
same house?
(A) d + 2
(B) d – 2
(C)
m
md
+ 2
(D)
md
m+ 2
(E)
md d
m
+ 2
21. Ken received grades of 90, 88, and 75 on three
tests. What grade must he receive on the next
test so that his average for these 4 tests is 85?
(A) 87
(B) 92
(C) 83
(D) 85
(E) 88
22. There is enough food at a picnic to feed 20
adults or 32 children. If there are 15 adults at
the picnic, how many children can still be fed?
(A) 10
(B) 8
(C) 16
(D) 12
(E) 4
23. In parallelogram ABCD, angle A contains 60°.
The sum of angle B and angle D must be
(A) 120°
(B) 300°
(C) 240°
(D) 60°
(E) 180°
24. The area of circle O is 64π. The perimeter of
square ABCD is
(A) 32
(B) 32π
(C) 64
(D) 16
(E) 64π
25. If a train covers 14 miles in 10 minutes, then
the rate of the train in miles per hour is
(A) 140
(B) 112
(C) 84
(D) 100
(E) 98
Chapter 17 332
www.petersons.com
Section 2
25 Questions
Time: 30 Minutes
Directions: Solve each of the following problems. Write the answer in the corresponding grid on the
answer sheet and fill in the ovals beneath each answer you write. Here are some examples.
Answer: 3/4 (–.75; show answer either way) Answer : 325
Note: A mixed number such as 3 1/2 must be gridded Note: Either position is correct.
as 7/2 or as 3.5. If gridded as “3 1/2,” it will be read
as “thirty–one halves.”
1. If
8
8
of
3
8
is added to
3
8
, what is the result?
2. If 2
n–3
= 32 what is the value of n?
3. In a group of 40 students, 25 applied to
Columbia and 30 applied to Cornell. If 3
students applied to neither Columbia nor
Cornell, how many students applied to both
schools?
4. If x
2
– y
2
= 100 and x – y = 20, what is the value
of x + y?
5. A gallon of water is added to 6 quarts of a
solution that is 50% acid. What percent of the
new solution is acid?
6. A gasoline tank is
1
4
full. After adding 10
gallons of gasoline, the gauge indicates that the
tank is
2
3
full. Find the capacity of the tank in
gallons.
7. If (x – y)
2
= 40 and x
2
+ y
2
= 60, what is the
value of xy?
8. If 2.5 cm = 1 in. and 36 in. = 1 yd., how many
centimeters are in 1 yard?
9. How much more is
1
4
of
1
3
than
1
3
of
1
4
?
10. If the average of 5 consecutive even integers is
82, what is the largest of these integers?
333
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE TESTS
PRACTICE TEST A
Section 1
1. (B)
1
5
8
40
1
4
40 10
x
x
=
=
= ( )
2. (E) Multiples of 3 are 3 apart x is 3 below x +
3. x + 6 is 3 above x + 3. 6x + 18 = 6(x + 3),
2x + 6 = 2(x + 3). 3x + 5 does not have a factor
of 3, nor can it be shown to differ front x + 3 by
a multiple of 3.
3. (C) Angle C = 40º (Congruent angles.)
Angle BAC = 100º (Sum of the angles in a
triangle is 180º.)
Angle x = 100º (Vertical angles are congruent.)
4. (E)
2
5
3
2
3
5
1
2
1
10
10 2
20
8
20
2
5
3
5
2
5
⋅ =
−
−
= = =
+ =1
5. (C) Basic toll $1.00.
Extra toll $2.25, which is 3($.75).
Therefore, the car holds a driver and 3 extra
passengers, for a total of 4 persons.
6. (C) Divide by y
2
: y = 2.
7. (C) x = y + 1
Using the largest negative integers will give the
smallest product. Let y = –2, x = –1, then
xy = 2.
8. (C) Side of square = 12 = diameter of
semicircle.
Remaining 2 sides of triangle add up to 16.
Perimeter of semicircle =
1
2
1
2
12 6 π π π d = = ⋅ ⋅
2 sides of square in perimeter = 24
Total perimeter of park = 16 + 6π + 24 = 40 + 6 π
9. (A) 80
4
5
4
5
45 36
1
3
45 15
%= =
=
⋅
⋅
Used in October = 36 – 15 = 21
10. (E) Angle AOD = 50º
Angle COB = 50º
Arc CB = 50º
Angle CAB is an inscribed angle = 25º
11. (B)
a
b
b
c
c
d
d
e
x
a
e
x
x
e
a
⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅
=
=
=
1
1
12. (B)
m n p
q
m n p q
x y z
m n p x y q z
+ +
=
+ + =
+ =
+ + + + = +
3
3
3
13. (C) Side of square = 2
If BE = 2, EA = 1, then by the Pythagorean
theorem, BA and AC each equal
5 .
Perimeter of triangle ABC = 2 + 2 5 .
14. (A) Multiply every term by a.
1
2 2 a −
15. (C) There are 30º in each of the 12 even
spaces between numbers on the clock. At 3:30,
the minute hand points to 6 and the hour hand
is halfway between 3 and 4. The angle between
the hands is 2
1
2
30 75 ( )
= .
16. (A) $320 is 125% of his former salary.
320 1 25
32000 125
256
=
=
.
$
x
x
x =
Chapter 17 334
www.petersons.com
17. (A) Area of each square =
1
5
125 25 ⋅ =
Side of each square = 5
Perimeter is made up of 12 sides. 12(5) = 60
18. (C)
1
2
3
5
3
10
30 ⋅ = = %
19. (D) Circumference is 5 times arc.
5(2 π) = 10π = π d
d = 10 r = 5
20. (D) The sum of any two sides of a triangle
must be greater than the third side. Therefore, x
must be less than 7 (4 + 3 > x); however, x
must be greater than 1, as 3 + x > 4.
21. (E) x can be negative as (–2)
2
= 4, which is
less than 5.
22. (D) The two children’s tickets equal one adult
ticket. Mr. Prince pays the equivalent of 3 adult
tickets.
3 12 60
4 20
a
a
=
=
.
.
Child’s ticket =
1
2
4 20 2 10 ( . ) $ . =
23. (A)
3
4 5
12 5 7
5
6 7
30 7 23
7 23 30
= =
= =
+ =
−
−
24. (C) If the linear ratio is 1:1.5, then the area
ratio is (1)
2
: (1.5)
2
or 1:2.25. The increase is
1.25 or 125% of the original area.
25. (B)
3
4
1
3
of will go on to college next year.
3
4
1
3
1
4
⋅ = = 25% .
Section 2
1. 4 9 25 5
2
+ = = (answer)
2. The number must be an even number, as there
is no remainder when divided by 2. If division
by 4 does give a remainder, it must be 2, since
even numbers are 2 apart. 2 (answer)
3. 8 8
2
( )
= (answer)
4.
y
x
= = ⋅ =
2
5
5
2
2
5
2
5
4
25
(answer)
5. Illustrate the given facts as follows.
This accounts for 23 students, leaving 7.
(answer)
6. 4 ❒ 2 = 4 · 2 + (4 – 2) = 8 + 2 = 10 (answer)
7. It is possible for the first four to be blue, but
then the next two must be red. Of course it is
possible that two red socks could be drawn
earlier, but with 6 we are assured of a pair of
red socks. 6 (answer)
8. 16 (answer)
9. 3x = 12
x = 4
3x + 1 = 13 (answer)
10. a b a ab b
a b
ab
a ab b
+ + +
+
+ +
( ) =
=
=
=
2
2 2
2 2
2 2
2
30
2 20
2 50 (aanswer)
335
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST B
Section 1
8. (A) Use a proportion comparing inches to
miles.
1
4
20 325
20
325
4
325
4
1
20
325
80
4
5
80
4
1
16
=
=
= ⋅ = = =
x
x
x
9. (D) There are m + f people on the staff. Of
these, m are men.
m
m f +
of the staff is men.
10. (A) Represent the angles as 2x, 3x, and 4x.
9 180
20
x
x
=
=
The angles are 40°, 60°, and 80°, all acute.
11. (C) The linear ratio stays constant, so the
perimeter is also multiplied by 2. The area ratio
is the square of the linear ratio, so the area is
multiplied by 2
2
or 4.
12. (D) In k minutes,
k
m
of the lawn is mowed.
Still undone is 1−
− k
m
m k
m
or
13. (A) 55% of his salary is spent. 45% is left.
There is only one answer among the choices
less than
1
2
of his salary.
14. (B) Each side of square = 8
Radius circle = 2
Area of square = 8
2
= 64
Area of 4 circles = 4π r
2
= 4 · π · 2
2
= 16π
Shaded area = 64 – 16π
15. (E) Plotting the point shows a 3, 4, 5 triangle.
16. (D) Since 6 times 9 is 54, the product must
end in 4.
1. (A) 20
1
5
%=
1
5
1200 240 ⋅ = $ depreciation first year.
$1200 – $240 = $960 value after 1 year.
1
5
960 192 ⋅ = $ depreciation second year.
$960 – $192 = $768 value after 2 years.
2. (E)
3
5
6
2
3
3
4
1
2
5
25 5
9 81
2
2
=
= =
=
( ) =
.
.
. .
. .
..
.
3
20
3
6 6 = =
3. (E)
1
4
25
1
4
25 0025
=
= =
.
% . % .
4. (D)
1
4
1
4
100
1
4
1
100
1
400
%= ÷ = ⋅ =
5. (A) .05 (800) = $40 commission
80:40 = 2:1
6. (A) Multiply every term by 12.
6
4 3
6
−
=
7. (D) A B
B C
A C
+
+
+
=
=
=
40
34
42
Subtract second equation from third.
A – B = 8
Subtract from first equation.
2B = 32
B = 16
Chapter 17 336
www.petersons.com
17. (E) Figure the time elapsed on either side of
12 noon. From 7:42 A.M. to 12 noon is 4 hrs.
18 min. From 12 noon, to 10:10 P.M. is 10 hrs.
10 min. The sum of the two is 14 hrs. 28 min.
18. (B) Each side of square AEDC is 10.
Each side of square BCFG is 6.
Triangle ABC is a 6, 8, 10 triangle, making the
perimeter 24.
19. (C) There are 90°left for angle 1 since angle
BCD is a straight angle.
20. (B) Use a proportion comparing pencils to
cents. Change 2D dollars to 200D cents.
p
D
x
c
pc
D
x
200
200
=
=
21. (C) Distance of first train = 60x
Distance of second train = 70x
60 70 455
130 455
3
1
2
x x
x
x
+ =
=
=
In 3
1
2
hours, the time will be 1:30 P.M.
22. (D) When two negative numbers are
multiplied, their product is positive.
23. (B) Since 7 times 6 is 42, the product must
end in 2.
24. (C) The minimum is 20 students in 8
classrooms.
25. (A) The radius of each circle is 3, making the
dimensions of the rectangle 18 by 6, and the
area (18)(6), or 108.
Section 2
1.
25
10
5
2
= (answer)
2. Marion’s hourly wage is
$
$ .
24
5
4 80 or .
Janet’s hourly wage is
$ . 10 95
3
or $3.65.
$4.80 – $3.65 = $1.15. (answer)
3. The difference of 5.58 must be divided between
both ends. The thickness on each side is 2.79.
(answer)
4. x x
x
x
x
+.
.
40 84
1 40 84
14 840
60
=
=
=
= (answer)
5. r + s = 25
4(r + s) = 4(25) = 100 (answer)
6. The plane covers 120 miles in 12 minutes or
1
5
hour. In
5
5
or 1 hour, it covers 5(120), or 600
miles. 600 (answer)
7. 47% of 1000 are boys.
(.47)(1000) = 470 boys (answer)
8. For every pair of digits in a number, there will
be one digit in the square root. 6 (answer)
9. Increase of 40
Percent of Increase
Amount of increase
Orig
=
iinal
⋅
⋅ =
100
40
40
100 100
%
% %
(answer)
10. 3 2 3 2 9 2 18
( )( )
= ⋅ = (answer)
337
www.petersons.com
Practice Tests
PRACTICE TEST C
Section 1
9. (B) 1
2
+ 1
2
= r
2
2 = r
2
Area = πr
2
= 2π
10. (E) Angle BCA = Angle BAC = 80°
There are 20°left for angle B.
11. (B)
9
2
81
8
9
2
8
81
4
9
÷ = ⋅ =
12. (D)
1
3
10
3
3
1
3 .
= =
13. (E)
16
50
32 =
32
100
= %
14. (D) Multiply by abc.
bc ac ab
c b a ab
c
ab
b a
+
+
+
=
( ) =
=
15. (A)
b
a
b
a
⋅ = 100
100
16. (C)
x y
A
x y A
y A x
+
+
2
2
2
=
=
= −
17. (B)
3
5
5 3
/
⋅ / = b b
18. (B) 5 feet = 60 inches
6 feet 8 inches = 80 inches
This is a 6, 8, 10 triangle, making the diagonal
100 inches, which is 8 feet 4 inches.
19. (C) In 3 hours, one ship went 60 miles, the
other 45 miles. This is a 3, 4, 5 triangle as 45 =
3(15), 60 = 4(15). The hypotenuse will be
5(15), or 75.
20. (D) This is inverse variation.
1. (B) 64 = 4
x
x = 3 (4 · 4 · 4 = 64)
2. (D) B and C are greater than 1. A, D, and E
all have the same numerator. In this case, the
one with the largest denominator will be the
smallest fraction.
3. (A)
1
2
5
2 04
2
=
( ) =
.
. .
. .
. .
2 45
02 000008
3
=
( ) =
4. (C) Cross multiply.
4a = 3b
Multiply by 3.
12a = 9b
5. (D)
a b
c
a
c
ac
c
a
= =
=
=
=
1
1
1
1
6. (A) The ratio of height to shadow is constant.
B
F
T
x
Bx FT
x
FT
B
=
=
=
7. (A) Right triangle area =
1
2
5 2 5 ⋅ ⋅ =
8. (E) 60 – x employees are male
1
3
of these unmarried
1
3
60 20
1
3
− − x x ( ) =
Chapter 17 338
www.petersons.com
m d m x
md
m
x
⋅ =( )⋅
=
+
+
2
2
21. (A) He must score as many points above 85
as below. So far he has 8 above and 10 below.
He needs another 2 above.
22. (B) If 15 adults are fed,
3
4
of the food is
gone.
1
4
of the food will feed
1
4
32 ⋅ , or 8,
children.
23. (C) If angle A = 60°, then angle B = 120°.
Angle B = Angle D. Their sum is 240°.
24. (C) Area of circle = 64π = r
2
Radius of circle = 8
Side of square = 16
Perimeter of square = 64
25. (C) 10 minutes =
1
6
hour
In one hour, the train will cover 6(14), or 84
miles.
Section 2
1.
3
8
6
8
3
4
+
3
8
= or (answer; both acceptable)
2. 2
n–3
= 2
5
n – 3 = 5
n = 8 (answer)
3. 25 – x + x + 30 – x = 37
55 – x = 37
18 = x
18 (answer)
4. x
2
– y
2
= (x – y)(x + y)
100 = 20(x + y)
5 = (x + y)
5 (answer)
5.
3
10
30 = % (answer)
No. of % = Amount
quarts acid of acid
Original 6 .50 3
Added 4 0 0
New 10 3
6. 10 gallons is
2
3
1
4
− of the tank.
2
3
1
4
8 3
12
5
12
5
12
10
5 120
24
−
−
= =
=
=
=
x
x
x
(answer)
7. x y x xy y
xy
xy
xy
− −
−
( ) =
=
=
=
2
2 2
2
40 60 2
2 20
10
+
(answer)
8. 36(2.5) = 90 (answer)
9.
1
4
1
3
1
12
1
3
1
4
1
12
⋅ = ⋅ =
0 (answer)
10. The average is the middle integer. If 82 is the
third, 86 is the last.
86 (answer)
Petersons.com/publishing Check out our Web site at www.petersons.com/publishing to see if there is any new information regarding the test and any revisions or corrections to the content of this book. We’ve made sure the information in this book is accurate and uptodate; however, the test format or content may have changed since the time of publication.
About Thomson Peterson’s Thomson Peterson’s (www.petersons.com) is a leading provider of education information and advice, with books and online resources focusing on education search, test preparation, and financial aid. Its Web site offers searchable databases and interactive tools for contacting educational institutions, online practice tests and instruction, and planning tools for securing financial aid. Peterson’s serves 110 million education consumers annually. For more information, contact Peterson’s, 2000 Lenox Drive, Lawrenceville, NJ 08648; 8003383282; or find us on the World Wide Web at www.petersons.com/about. ® 2005 Thomson Peterson’s, a part of The Thomson Corporation Thomson LearningTM is a trademark used herein under license. Editor: Wallie Walker Hammond; Production Editor: Alysha Bullock; Manufacturing Manager: Judy Coleman; Composition Manager: Melissa Ignatowski; Cover Design: Greg Wuttke ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, Web distribution, or information storage and retrieval systems—without the prior written permission of the publisher. For permission to use material from this text or product, submit a request online at www.thomsonrights.com Any additional questions about permissions can be submitted by email to thomsonrights@thomson.com ISBN: 0768917174 Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
07 06 05
Contents
About the SAT ............................................................................................................................. vii 1. Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals ................................................................. 1
Diagnostic Test • Addition of Whole Numbers • Subtraction of Whole Numbers • Multiplication of Whole Numbers • Division of Whole Numbers • Addition or Subtraction of Decimals • Multiplication of Decimals • Division of Decimals • The Laws of Arithmetic • Estimating Answers • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
2. Operations with Fractions ................................................................................................... 19
Diagnostic Test • Addition and Subtraction • Multiplication and Division • Simplifying Fractions • Operations with Mixed Numbers • Comparing Fractions • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
3. Verbal Problems Involving Fractions .................................................................................. 39
Diagnostic Test • Part of a Whole • Finding Fractions of Fractions • Finding Whole Numbers • Solving with Letters • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
4. Variation ................................................................................................................................ 53
Diagnostic Test • Ratio and Proportion • Direct Variation • Inverse Variation • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
5. Percent ................................................................................................................................... 69
Diagnostic Test • Fractional and Decimal Equivalents of Percents • Finding a Percent of a Number • Finding a Number When a Percent Is Given • To Find What Percent One Number Is of Another • Percents Greater Than 100 • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
6. Verbal Problems Involving Percent .................................................................................... 85
Diagnostic Test • Percent of Increase or Decrease • Discount • Commission • Profit and Loss • Taxes • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
7. Averages .............................................................................................................................. 103
Diagnostic Test • Simple Average • To Find a Missing Number When an Average Is Given • Weighted Average • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
8. Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations ................................................. 115
Diagnostic Test • Signed Numbers • Solution of Linear Equations • Simultaneous Equations in Two Unknowns • Quadratic Equations • Equations Containing Radicals • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
9. Literal Expressions ............................................................................................................. 133
Diagnostic Test • Communication with Letters • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
v
vi
Contents
10. Roots and Radicals ............................................................................................................. 143
Diagnostic Test • Addition and Subtraction of Radicals • Multiplication and Division of Radicals • Simplifying Radicals Containing a Sum or Difference • Finding the Square Root of a Number • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
11. Factoring and Algebraic Fractions .................................................................................... 155
Diagnostic Test • Simplifying Fractions • Addition or Subtraction of Fractions • Multiplication or Division of Fractions • Complex Algebraic Fractions • Using Factoring to Find Missing Values • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
12. Problem Solving in Algebra ............................................................................................... 171
Diagnostic Test • Coin Problems • Consecutive Integer Problems • Age Problems • Investment Problems • Fraction Problems • Mixture Problems • Motion Problems • Work Problems • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
13. Geometry ............................................................................................................................ 197
Diagnostic Test • Areas • Perimeter • Right Triangles • Coordinate Geometry • Parallel Lines • Triangles • Polygons • Circles • Volumes • Similar Polygons • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
14. Inequalities .......................................................................................................................... 231
Diagnostic Test • Algebraic Inequalities • Geometric Inequalities • Retest • Solutions to Practice Exercises
15. Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Fractions .......................................................... 243 16. Additional Geometry Topics, Data Analysis, and Probability ........................................ 273 Practice Test A .................................................................................................................... 313 Practice Test B .................................................................................................................... 319 Practice Test C .................................................................................................................... 327 Solutions to Practice Tests ................................................................................................ 333
www.petersons.com
About the SAT
PURPOSE OF THE SAT
The SAT is a standardized exam used by many colleges and universities in the United States and Canada to help them make their admissions decisions. The test is developed and administered by Educational Testing Service (ETS) for the College Entrance Examination Board. The SAT consists of two different types of exams designated SAT and SAT II. The SAT tests verbal and mathematical reasoning skills — your ability to understand what you read, to use language effectively, to reason clearly, and to apply fundamental mathematical principles to unfamiliar problems. SAT II tests mastery of specific subjects such as Chemistry or French or World History.
TAKING THE SAT
The SAT is offered on one Saturday morning in October, November, December, January, March, May, and June. When you apply to a college, find out whether it requires you to take the SAT and if so when scores are due. To make sure your scores arrive in time, sign up for a test date that’s at least six weeks before the school’s deadline for test scores. Registration forms for the SAT are available in most high school guidance offices. You can also get registration forms and any other SAT information from: College Board SAT Program P.O. Box 6200 Princeton, NJ 085416200 6097717600 Monday through Friday, 8:30 a.m. to 9:30 p.m. Eastern Time www.collegeboard.com Along with your registration form you will receive a current SAT Student Bulletin. The bulletin includes all necessary information on procedures, exceptions and special arrangements, times and places, and fees.
vii
25 min. 25 min.com . and StudentProduced Response Questions to test your knowledge of arithmetic. The critical reading sections of the SAT use Sentence Completions to measure your knowledge of the meanings of words and your understanding of how parts of sentences go together. 30 min. This section is used solely by the testmakers to try out questions for use in future tests. mostly multiplechoice examination divided into sections as shown in the chart below. 20 min. FORMAT OF A TYPICAL SAT Section #/Content (1) (2) Writing Mathematics Standard Multiple Choice Number of Questions 1 essay 20 varies 16 8 35 Time 25 min. and Critical Reading questions (short and long passages) to measure your ability to read and think carefully about the information presented in passages. You are not required to memorize them. 25 min. algebra. and it can occur at any point during the test. So you’ll have to do your best on all of the sections. 25 min. Quantitative Comparisons. 25 min. Many of the formulas that you need will be given in the test instructions. The mathematical sections use Standard MultipleChoice Math.petersons. (3)* “Wild Card” an Experimental Section (Varies with test) (4) (5) (6) Critical Reading Sentence Completions Writing Standard Multiple Choice Mathematics Standard Multiplechoice GridIns Critical Reading Sentence Completions Mathematics Standard Multiple Choice Critical Reading Sentence Completions (7) (8) (9) * Can occur in any section www. SAT math questions are designed to test your skill in applying basic math principles you already know to unfamiliar situations. 8 10 19 5 16 13 6 20 min.viii About the SAT FORMAT OF THE NEW SAT The new SAT is a threehour. Your score on the six nonexperimental sections is the score colleges use to evaluate your application. One of the sections is experimental. The experimental section of SAT may test critical reading or mathematical reasoning. You won’t know which section it is. and geometry.
Example: If (x + y)2 = 17. algebra. depending upon whether you choose to solve the problem using fractions or decimals. geometry. or geometry. You have to compute the answer and then use the ovals on the answer sheet to fill in your solution. and data analysis using two question types: • Standard multiplechoice questions give you a problem in arithmetic. You are to select the correct solution to the problem from the five choices given. Although calculators are not required to answer any SAT math questions. probability. Then you choose the correct answer from the five choices.com . • GridIns do not give you answer choices. and geometry. how many inches should there be between towns that are 70 miles apart? 11 14 17 20 23 Solution: 7 The correct answer is 8 or . statistics. x2 + 2(3) + y2 = 17 x2 + 6 + y2 = 17 x2 + y2 = 11 StudentProduced Responses test your ability to solve mathematical problems when no choices are offered.875. algebra. algebra I and II.petersons. students are encouraged to bring a calculator to the test and to use it wherever it is helpful. www.About the SAT ix THE NEW SAT MATH QUESTIONS The mathematical reasoning sections of the SAT test problem solving in numbers and operations. Example: 1 On a map having a scale of 4 inch = 20 miles. Mathematics tests your knowledge of arithmetic. (x + y)2 = 17 (x + y)(x + y) = 17 x2 + 2xy + y2 = 17 Since xy = 3. and xy = 3. then x2 + y2 = (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (A).
To protect you from yourself. Record your answers to gridin questions according to the rules that follow. Mark the bubbles that correspond to the answer you entered in the boxes. These allow you to enter numbers in fractional form.875 x 20 70 70 20 x = 4 70 1 7 x= = 4 20 8 = 1 4 HOW TO USE THE ANSWER GRID The answer grid for studentproduced response (gridins) questions is similar to the grid used for your zip code on the personal information section of your answer sheet. Just entering your answer in the boxes is not enough. Mark one bubble per column. it is not possible that the leftmost or rightmost positions could have a “/”.com . there are no “/s” in those positions. www. The open spaces above the grid are for you to write in the numerical value of your answer.petersons. you won’t get credit. Technically this isn’t required by the SAT. Realistically. The horizontal bar separates the fraction lines and decimal points from the digits 0 to 9. The machine that scores the test can only read the bubbles.25 x = 20 70 20 x = 17. so if you don’t fill them in. The next row has decimal points. it gives you something to follow as you fill in the ovals. Since a fraction must have both a numerator and a denominator. Write your answer in the boxes at the top of the grid. 2. Do it—it will help you.x About the SAT Using fractions Using decimals . An example of the answer grid is shown below. The first row of ovals has only two ovals in the middle with a “/”.5 x = . GRID RULES 1.
So. For example.1777.com . you can grid 10 . Unused columns should be left blank. if space permits. Look at this example: Here are two ways to enter an answer of “150. Don’t put in zeroes. Just remember that you have only four spaces to work with and that a decimal point or a fraction slash uses up one of the spaces.” 4. be as accurate as possible but keep within the four spaces. www. Work with decimals or fractions. you would simplify it and grid 4 .75. 3 An answer can be expressed as 4 or as . Start your answer in any column. Do not put a zero in front of a decimal that is less than 1. Here are your options: Fractions do not have to be simplified to simplest form unless they don’t fit in 4 the answer grid. For decimal answers.About the SAT xi 3. but you can’t grid 12 because 16 3 you’d need five spaces. Say you get an answer of .petersons.
75 or as 4 . Sometimes the problems in this section will have more than one correct answer. In such cases.petersons. Instead you should grid this answer as 1. Express a mixed number as a decimal or as an improper fraction. 3 If you tried to grid 1 4 . grid any one.com .xii About the SAT 5. if a question asks for a prime number between 5 and 13. choose one answer and grid it. Grid 7 or grid 11. but don’t put in both answers. If more than one answer is possible. 6. the answer could be 7 or 11. it would be read as 13 . For example. www. which would give you a wrong 4 7 answer.
WHEN TO USE A CALCULATOR No question requires the use of a calculator. though. Make a ratio of apples to dollars: apples 24 10 : = dollars 3. the calculator can improve your speed and accuracy. In general. You may bring to your exam any of the following types of calculators: • fourfunction • scientific • graphing You may not bring calculators of the following types: • calculators with paper tape or printers • laptop computers • telephones with calculators • “handheld” microcomputers Make sure that the calculator you bring is one you are thoroughly familiar with. Remember. that the calculator is only a tool. www. At this rate.50 x= 24 A calculator would be useful in solving this problem.75 (B) $1.50 (E) $1. what is the cost of 10 apples? (A) $1.25 Solution: The correct answer is (D). It can help you avoid inaccuracies in computation.60 (C) $1.com .60. Here is a sample problem for which a calculator would be useful: Example: The cost of two dozen apples is $3. the calculator may be useful for any question that involves arithmetic computations.60 x 24 x = 36 36 = $1.petersons.55 (D) $1. for others it may be inappropriate. Although the calculations are fairly simple.About the SAT xiii CALCULATORS AND THE SAT Calculators are allowed on the SAT. but it cannot take the place of understanding how to set up and solve a mathematical problem. For some questions a calculator may be helpful.
distance time d Joshua's rate = t−6 rate = To calculate his new distance. and to you.petersons. use distance = rate × time d 2 Distance = (t − 36) t − 6 d = (t + 6)(t − 6) t − 6 = d (t + 6) This is an algebra problem. At this rate.6) d t+6 d t−6 t+6 d SCORING THE SAT Every correct answer is worth one point. www.36 hours? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (A).com . you lose onefourth of a point. all SAT scores are reported on a scale of 200 to 800. to your high school. d(t + 6) d(t . The scores are based on the nonexperimental sections and are broken down into separate math and verbal scores. If you leave an answer blank. For incorrect answers to quantitative comparisons. Using a calculator would not be helpful. For incorrect answers to all verbal questions and to regular mathematics questions.6 hours. Regardless of the number of questions on the test. you score no point.xiv About the SAT Here is a problem for which a calculator would not be useful: Example: Joshua travels a distance of d miles in t . your scores will be sent to the colleges you have named on your registration form. you lose onethird of a point. The penalties for wrong answers are intended to discourage random guessing. there is no penalty. Five or six weeks after the exam. For incorrect answers to studentproduced responses. how many miles will he travel in t2 .
Good luck.About the SAT xv HOW TO USE THIS BOOK The math review that follows is designed as a selfteaching text to help you prepare for the mathematics sections of the SAT. Working diligently through each chapter in this manner will strengthen your weaknesses and prepare you to get your best score on the three Practice new SAT Math Tests at the end of this book—and on your actual SAT.petersons. If you get fewer than five questions right. you should do better on the retest. Check your answers with the solutions provided at the end of the chapter. you will find a tenquestion diagnostic test.com . At the end of each chapter you will find a retest that is similar to the diagnostic test. If you get eight to ten questions right. you might do the practice exercises only in the sections dealing with problems you missed. just for review. but not bother with the practice exercises. you should work carefully through the entire chapter. If not. www. At the beginning of each chapter. you may skip that chapter and go right on to the next diagnostic test at the beginning of the following chapter. If you get five to seven questions right. Try this test before you read the chapter. go back and review any instructional material dealing with errors you made before proceeding to the next chapter. After working through the chapter. Or you may prefer to skim the instructional material anyway.
.
347 (B) 64.47 by 2. (A) 5184 (B) 6184 (C) 6183 (D) 6193 (E) 6284 Subtract 417 from 804.337 (E) 63.981 (C) 6. (A) 287 (B) 388 (C) 397 (D) 387 (E) 288 Find the product of 307 and 46. 7.346.43 + 46.21 (E) 0. 5. Subtract 81. Find the sum of 683.779 (C) 53.882 (E) 14. (A) 3070 (B) 14.922 (D) 13. and 5429.984 Divide 2. 1 3 (C) 10 (D) 18 2 (E) 3 10. 3.Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 1 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem.000 8317×91 217×. 72.3 + .273 (E) 7. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. (A) 7210 (B) 721 (C) 72.721 Find 3 .163 by . (A) 79.304 by 48.463 (C) 63. 4.3.763 from 145. 1.81 (B) 7.8 ? 1 . (A) 64. 8. Which of the following is closest to (A) 4 (B) 40 (C) 400 (D) 4000 (E) 40.1 (D) 7. 9.076 (E) 1452 6. (A) 14.981 (D) 7.392 (D) 53. Answers are at the end of the chapter.082 (C) 13.463 (D) 63.122 Divide 38.03. (A) (B) 9 2 2. (A) 787 (B) 798 (C) 824 (D) 1098 (E) 1253 Add 6.52 (B) 53.16 ÷ 8 + 4 × 2.1.347 Multiply 3.
In writing an addition problem. it is most important to overcome any fear of mathematics. as well as familiarize yourself with various types of questions. The answer is called the sum. and then working on the practice problems in each section. Find the sum of 360. the numbers to be added are called addends.160 (D) 17. Add 99 + 88 + 77 + 66 + 55. Solution: 403 37 8314 + 5 8759 Exercise 1 1.101 (D) 11. 8314. being careful to keep columns straight with the units’ digits one below the other. (A) 427 (B) 437 (C) 517 (D) 417 (E) 527 4. The level of this examination extends no further than relatively simple geometry. By reading this chapter carefully. 5.111 (E) 11. 3.com . (A) 5013 (B) 5004 (C) 5003 (D) 6004 (E) 6013 Find the sum of 4321. 2143. (A) 17.280 (E) 17. 87. you can build the confidence needed to do well. you can check it by adding from bottom to top.110 Add 56 + 321 + 8 + 42. and 3412.270 2. ADDITION OF WHOLE NUMBERS In the process of addition. By doing these problems carefully and reading the workedout solutions. you can review important concepts and vocabulary. this chapter is extremely important and should not be treated lightly. Since arithmetic is basic to any further work in mathematics. Example: Find the sum of 403.2 Chapter 1 In preparing for the mathematics section of your college entrance examination.170 (C) 17. (A) 12. Most problems can be solved using only arithmetic. 37. 1. If you find a sum by adding from top to bottom.petersons. put one number underneath the other.110 (B) 11. 1234.011 (C) 11.171 (B) 17. and 205. (A) 384 (B) 485 (C) 385 (D) 375 (E) 376 Add 1212 + 2323 + 3434 + 4545 + 5656. 4352. following the sample problems. www. and 5.
Therefore we reduce the 5 by one and make the 0 into a 10. 3. and the difference is 6. we borrow 1 from 5 and change the 4 to 14. The number which we take away is called the subtrahend. This makes the 3 into 13. 5. If 5 is subtracted from 11. add 10 to the ones column. (A) 496 (B) 495 (C) 486 (D) 405 (E) 497 By how much does the sum of 612 and 315 exceed the sum of 451 and 283? (A) 294 (B) 1661 (C) 293 (D) 197 (E) 193 2. we often must borrow in performing a subtraction. Example: 503 – 267 We cannot subtract 7 from 3 and cannot borrow from 0. Find the difference between 732 and 237. Since we cannot subtract a larger number from a smaller one. Remember that when we borrow. Solution: 4 10 3 – 2 67 4 9 13 – 26 7 23 6 Exercise 2 1. SUBTRACTION OF WHOLE NUMBERS The number from which we subtract is called the minuend. Subtract 803 from 952. www. Example: 54 – 38 Since we cannot subtract 8 from 4. The answer in subtraction is called the difference. (A) 217 (B) 216 (C) 326 (D) 227 (E) 226 From 1872 subtract the sum of 76 and 43. Then we can borrow 1 from the 10. Then we can subtract. we reduce the digit to the left by 1. the subtrahend is 5.com .Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 3 2. (A) 1754 (B) 1838 (C) 1753 (D) 1839 (E) 1905 4. Solution: 4 14 – 3 8 1 6 Sometimes we must borrow across several columns. making it a 9. We are really borrowing 1 from the tens column and.petersons. the minuend is 11. therefore. but increase the righthand digit by 10. because of our base 10 number system. subtract 1035. (A) 248 (B) 148 (C) 249 (D) 149 (E) 147 From the sum of 837 and 415.
742 (B) 165.742 (C) 166. When multiplying by a number containing two or more digits.820 5. However.745 (E) 15.504 (D) 517.100 (E) 360. for example.708 8347 multiplied by 62 (A) 517.121 4. The numbers being multiplied are called factors of the product. we leave one zero on the right when multiplying by the tens digit and two zeros on the right when multiplying by the hundreds digit. we are really multiplying by 70 and therefore leave a 0 at the extreme right before we proceed with the multiplication.4 Chapter 1 3.359 (D) 265.514 (B) 517. 526 multiplied by 317 (A) 156. 3. when we multiply by 7.820 (D) 358. place value is extremely important when writing partial products.742 (D) 166.114 705 multiplied by 89 (A) 11.600 (B) 359. we multiply first by 2 and then by 7.com . 2.100 (C) 71.petersons.059 798 multiplied by 450 (A) 358. www. Example: 372 × 461 372 22320 + 148800 171492 Exercise 3 Find the following products. 1. 437 multiplied by 607 (A) 265.414 (C) 517.219 (C) 265.114 (E) 617. Example: 537 × 72 1074 + 37590 38664 If we multiply by a threedigit number.745 (C) 62.059 (E) 262.985 (B) 52.705 (D) 62. When we multiply 537 by 72.748 (E) 166. MULTIPLICATION OF WHOLE NUMBERS The answer to a multiplication problem is called the product.259 (B) 265.
523.436 by 9. Remember that in writing the fractional part of a quotient involving a remainder. The quotient in this case is 6 6 . Divide 391 by 23.502.502. If the quotient is not an integer.Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 5 4. 4. 5. we have a remainder.614 (E) 5.502. (A) 5. The number we are dividing by is called the divisor.petersons. DIVISION OF WHOLE NUMBERS The number being divided is called the dividend. www. (A) 170 (B) 16 (C) 17 (D) 18 (E) 180 Divide 49. leaving a remainder of 2.514 (C) 5.605 (B) 5.180 and 617? (A) 541 (B) 542 (C) 549 (D) 540 (E) 545 2. Simply carry the remainder of each step over to the next digit and continue. and 3 is the quotient.098 by 7. Find the remainder when 4832 is divided by 15. (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5 Divide 42.603 3. the remainder becomes the numerator and the divisor the denominator. Example: 9 7 2 4 6 5 84 31 4 2 4 ) Exercise 4 1. 6 is the divisor.502.com . 18 is the dividend.604 (D) 5. The remainder when 20 is divided by 6 is 2. When we divide 18 by 6. 2 because 6 will divide 18 evenly. no long division procedures are needed. The answer to the division is called the quotient. When dividing by a singledigit divisor.502. (A) 6014 (B) 6015 (C) 6019 (D) 6011 (E) 6010 Which of the following is the quotient of 333.
17.18 (C) 47.611 From 561.7. 4.82 (E) 37. (A) 537.8 subtract 34.79 (E) 18.com .37. subtract 12.78 (D) 17. Exercise 5 1.86 Find the difference between 100 and 52.3. (A) 53.72 subtract the sum of 4.641 11.41 (E) 41.18.75.78 Find the sum of .4 .601 (E) 54.81 and 17.611 (C) 53. .56 Solution: 7 12 1 48.37 + 2. and 8.601 (D) 54. From the sum of .6 Chapter 1 5.86 (B) 31. Example: Find the sum of 8. www.354.82 (B) 47.411 Example: From 48.3 subtract 27.30 – 27. (A) 37.15 (C) 527.641 Solution: 8. (A) 31.65. 2.63.petersons. 3.68 (C) 17. ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION OF DECIMALS The most important thing to watch for in adding or subtracting decimals is to keep all decimal points underneath one another. so we must fill in zeros where needed.837.5.4.92 5. and .12.41 (C) 41.05 (B) 537.74 In subtraction. 52. From 53. (A) 9.503 (B) 53. The proper placement of the decimal point in the answer will be in line with all the decimal points above. and 2.2.04 (E) 527.15 (D) 527.78 (B) 17.56 20. the upper decimal must have as many decimal places as the lower.92 (D) 47. .03 (D) 66.05 4.
44 5.007314 (B) . www.245 4. the product will contain five decimal places.344 (E) 3.392 (C) 3. using the decimal points only as an indication of where to place a decimal point in the product.Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 7 6.88 (D) 1048.0344 (D) 0. etc.42 83 × 1.07314 (C) 7.8 (E) 10.42 750 + 15000 . Example: Multiply .06 × .5 = (A) 12. 1000. .15750 Since the first number being multiplied contains three decimal places and the second number contains two decimal places. 1.4 .488 5.0008 × 4. The number of decimal places in the product is equal to the sum of the number of decimal places in the numbers being multiplied. we proceed as we do with integers.5 (E) 1.42 Solution: . 437 × .375 by .petersons. 3.7 Exercise 6 Find the following products.00344 (C) .000344 (B) .14 (E) 731.7 = (A) .0488 (B) 10.7314 × 100 = (A) .314 (D) 73.45 (B) 49. In multiplying by 10.8 (C) 498 (D) 124. we need only to move the decimal point to the right the proper number of places. 100.com .375 × .488 (C) 104.837 and 100 is 83. move one place to the right (10 has one zero). by 100 move two places to the right (100 has two zeros). To multiply a decimal by 10.92 (D) 3..542 (E) 35.3 = (A) . and so forth. by 1000 move three places to the right (1000 has three zeros). MULTIPLICATION OF DECIMALS In multiplying decimals.24 = (A) 1. Example: The product of .3542 (B) . 2.
12 ÷ (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. always change the decimal to a whole number by moving the decimal point to the end of the divisor.1 .3 3 10. Find (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4.6 (E) 16 4.05 5 Exercise 7 1. etc. The decimal point in the quotient will be directly above the one in the dividend.02 0. (A) .57 (D) 145. Example: Divide 2. The number of places to be moved is always equal to the number of zeros in the divisor. Find .4.1457 (B) 1.0437 Sometimes division can be done in fraction form. Therefore.592 ) To divide a decimal by 10. (A) .75 = = .03 2 . Count the number of places you have moved the decimal point and move the dividend’s decimal point the same number of places. 1000..8 48 .43 (D) 43 (E) 430 Find the quotient when 4.371 is divided by . we move the decimal point the proper number of places to the left. our quotient is . www.043 (C) 0.592 by .64 by . 100.2 2 20 200 3. Example: Divide: .3.2 .0016 (B) 0.5 . 2. Example: Divide 43.35 .8 Chapter 1 7.2 . DIVISION OF DECIMALS When dividing by a decimal. Always remember to move the decimal point to the end of the divisor (denominator) and then the same number of places in the dividend (numerator).7 (E) 1457 Divide .petersons.06 Solution: 43.7 by 1000 Solution: The decimal point must be moved three places (there are three zeros in 1000) to the left. .457 (C) 14.0043 (B) 0.0175 1. (A) 0.3 by 100. Divide 4.06 2.16 (D) 1. ÷ 1.com .03 0.016 (C) 0.7 .
If there are no parentheses. If we were to insert parentheses to clarify operations. The identity for multiplication is 1 since any number times 1. is equal to the given number. www. Example: 4+7=7+4 5•3=3•5 Subtraction and division are not commutative. as we may group in any manner and arrive at the same answer.Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 9 8. Example: Find 5 • 4 + 6 ÷ 2 – 16 ÷ 4 Solution: The + and – signs indicate where groupings should begin and end. as regrouping changes an answer. multiplication and division are always performed prior to addition and subtraction.com . THE LAWS OF ARITHMETIC Addition and multiplication are commutative operations. parentheses are usually included to make the order of operations clear. The identity for addition is 0 since any number plus 0. or 0 plus any number. Although 5 – 0 = 5. as changing the order does change the answer.petersons. Although 8 ÷ 1 = 8. 0 – 5 ≠ 5. There are no identity elements for subtraction or division. is equal to the given number. we may multiply each addend by the given number and add the results. Example: (3 + 4) + 5 = 3 + (4 + 5) (3 • 4) • 5 = 3 • (4 • 5) Subtraction and division are not associative. This will give the same answer as if we had added first and then multiplied. giving 20 + 3 – 4 = 19. If a sum is to be multiplied by a number. Example: 3(5 + 2 + 4) is either 15 + 6 + 12 or 3(11). as the order in which we add or multiply does not change an answer. When several operations are involved in a single problem. Example: (5 – 4) – 3 ≠ 5 – (4 – 3) (100 ÷ 20) ÷ 5 ≠ 100 ÷ (20 ÷ 5) Multiplication is distributive over addition. Example: 5–3≠3–5 20 ÷ 5 ≠ 5 ÷ 20 Addition and multiplication are associative. 1 ÷ 8 ≠ 8. we would have (5 · 4) + (6 ÷ 2) – (16 ÷ 4). or 1 times any number.
8 ÷ 2. Match each illustration in the lefthand column with the law it illustrates from the righthand column. 16 ÷ 4 + 2 · 3 + 2 . 32(12 + 8) = 32(12) + 32(8) w. a. Identity for Multiplication e. (A) 35 (B) 47 (C) 43 (D) 27 (E) 88 2.1. Associative Law of Addition c. Commutative Law of Addition www. Identity for Addition b. (A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 2 (D) 4 (E) 10 3. Associative Law of Multiplication d. 75 + 12 = 12 + 75 v.10 Chapter 1 Exercise 8 1. 378 + 0 = 378 x.com . 475 · 1 = 475 u. Find 8 + 4 ÷ 2 + 6 · 3 . (7 · 5) · 2 = 7 · (5 · 2) y.petersons. Distributive Law of Multiplication over Addition z.
Simply round off all answers to the nearest multiples of 10 or 100 and estimate with the results.Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 11 9. we choose answer (C). 783+ 491 1532−879 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. where time is an important factor. 1. Example: Which of the following is closest to the value of 4831 • (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: Estimating.000 Solution: 498 is about 500. it is essential that you be able to estimate an answer. Therefore.000 (C) 50.000 www. Therefore the product is about (500) (100) or 50.000 (D) 500 (E) 5.000 180. ESTIMATING ANSWERS On a competitive examination. Therefore. 2 10 20 50 100 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) .com . Example: The product of 498 and 103 is approximately (A) 5000 (B) 500.petersons. On multiplechoice tests.2 2 20 200 6017 i 312 364 +618 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 18 180 1800 18. we have 3500 2 ( 5000 )( 700 ) 2000 710 2314 ? 83 425 1600 3140 6372 5( 700 ) 2 . Exercise 9 Choose the answer closest to the exact value of each of the following problems.000 (just move the decimal point two places to the right when multiplying by 100). the correct answer is (C). No written computation should be needed. 483+1875 119 3.02 . Use estimation in your solutions. Dividing numerator and denominator by 1000. 103 is about 100. which is about 1750. Circle the letter before your answer. we have or .000. this should enable you to pick the correct answer without any timeconsuming computation.
(A) 59.35 by .73 (E) 37.456 by 72.73 (D) 37.267 (B) 2.538 (C) 51.35905 Divide 2. Subtract 23.920 (D) 58. (A) . 8.905 (E) . 7. (A) 52. 9.11. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 17 23 18 14 5 7 2.67 (C) 26.17 from 50. (A) 3.920 Divide 66.21 ÷ 7. 4861.com .02 (B) .078 (B) 51. Find the sum of 86.7 + 43.5915 (D) 35.5805 (B) 3.2 (C) 2 (D) 20 (E) 200 2875+932 5817 29 ? www.9.79 Multiply 8. 4.12 Chapter 1 RETEST 1.17.937 by . Which of the following is closest to (A) .7 (D) 267 (E) 2670 Find 8 + 10 ÷ 2 + 4 · 2 .petersons.79 (C) 27. 903 923 911 921 925 6.361 + 8.020 (B) 9988 (C) 58.020 (E) 59.92 (B) 27.385 (D) 52.43. (A) 454 (B) 444 (C) 354 (D) 344 (E) 346 Find the product of 65 and 908. and 205.161 (E) 52. (A) 5142 (B) 5132 (C) 5152 (D) 5052 (E) 4152 From 803 subtract 459. 3. Find the sum of .5905 (C) 3. (A) 26.231 10.
com . 163 ) 336 4. 110 1.1 (C) . 8 0 14 (D) – 4 1 7 38 7 307 × 46 (E) 1842 12280 14. 7.981 3. (E) 5. 170 2. 6.petersons. 3 3 7 3.Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 13 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 683 72 (B) + 5429 6184 7 9 1. 72. 4. ) 8. 122 798 48 38304 6. 56 321 8 (A) + 42 427 www. 9.346 53.076 4 10 9 2.43 46.47 × 2.3 1041 (B) 6940 7. 1 0 1 0 (D) – 81 .03 2. (B) 470 432 384 384 (A) 3 – (16 ÷ 8) + (4 × 2) = 3 – 2 + 8 = 9 10. 14 5 .3 (D) + . (B) 3. 5. 99 88 77 (C) 66 + 55 385 1212 2323 3434 4545 + 5656 17. 7 6 3 63. (D) Estimate 8000 ⋅ 100 = 4000 200 ⋅ 1 Exercise 1 360 4352 87 (B) + 205 5004 4321 2143 1234 + 3412 11.
6 8347 62 (A) × 16694 500820 517. 514 (D) × 18 7 1 2 – 11 9 17 5 3 705 89 6345 56400 62. 798 (B) × 450 39900 319200 359. 745 6 12 4. 612 (E) + 315 927 451 + 283 734 8 5.com .14 Chapter 1 Exercise 2 4 Exercise 3 526 1. (C) × 1. 100 9 1 27 – 7 34 1 93 www. 7 3 12 (B) –2 3 7 49 5 4.petersons. 9 5 12 (D) –8 0 3 14 9 83 7 (A) + 4 1 5 4 317 3682 5260 157800 166. 3. 259 5. 1 2 5 12 –1 0 3 5 2 17 2. 76 (C) + 43 119 3. 742 2. 437 (A) × 607 3059 262200 265.
30.2 17.8 2 www. 604 (C) 9 49. 523.81 +17.48 2 9 1. 56 11 7 1 0 (E) – 3 4.41 9 9 10 0 . 436 ) 3 0 . 53.611 5 8 4. and (E) in 5.63 (C) + 8.65 4.78 3. 0 5 4. when multiplied by 617. 6014 (A) 7 42098 ) 3. .5 (B) 22. (C) in 3. 7 5 5 2 7. ) 1. since 617 times (A) would end in 7. the quotient must end in a number which. 5. must give 333. 0 1 0 5. 1 8 4 7 . (B) would end in 4. when multiplied by 617. will end in 0. 502.3 (B) + . (D) –5 2 .72 –22.354 53.180 as an answer.31 9 1 1 (D) Since the quotient.70 1 7 . This can only be (D).Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 15 Exercise 4 17 (C) 23 391 23 161 161 Exercise 5 .1 48 –1 2 .com . 5.12 52.petersons.837 . 2. 4. 322 (B) 15 4832 Remainder 2 45 33 30 32 30 2 ) 2.31 31.
3. y)(d.7 3.5 5. 2.06 (D) × . w) 5.24 1748 (C) 8740 104. 14. 3.4 . (C) (C) (C) Estimate 500 + 2000 100 6000 ⋅ 300 400 + 600 800 + 500 1500 .900 = 2500 100 = 25. closest to 20 Estimate = 1. z)(c. 2. 2. (D) (B) 8 + (4 ÷ 2) + (6 • 3) – 1 = 8 + 2 + 18 – 1 = 27 (16 ÷ 4) + (2 • 3) + 2 – (8 ÷ 2) = 4+6+2–4=8 4.com .542 83 (D) × 1.12 ÷ 4 = . Exercise 8 1.7314 × 100 73.7 ÷ = 340 ÷ 17 = 20 .64 ) 4. Exercise 7 1.6 (D) .57 (C) . 1. 371 ) 3. 1.5 (D) .16 Chapter 1 Exercise 6 437 × . 3 4.043 as the answer.00344 Exercise 9 1.14 Just move the decimal point two places to the right. u)(e.0008 (B) × 4. . x)(b.1 3. 2. giving .03 .3 24 320 . (a. (D) 10.petersons. (C) .20 1.0 = . (B) Just move decimal point two places to left. 800.5 415 830 124.88 5. 000 1000 1300 600 = 1800 Estimate = = about 2 www.12 ÷ 2.03 .
020 923 (B) 72 66456 648 165 144 216 216 66 77 77 9. which is 5. (B) 8. ) 3000 + 1000 10.com . (A) Estimate closest to .361 8.231 4 8 6. ) 3.937 (C) 22 73 8. 7 3 www. (C) 86 4861 + 205 5152 7 9 7.5905 8 0 13 2.17 52. 1 7 2 7. (C) 8 + (10 ÷ 2) + (4 • 2) – (21 ÷ 7) = 8 + 5 + 8 – 3 = 18 4.02.7 . 9 1 0 (C) – 2 3.35 × .7 + 43. 1 1 2. 000 = .Operations with Whole Numbers and Decimals 17 Retest 1. (D) – 4 5 9 34 4 26. 5 1 0.43 2505 33400 3. 6000 30 = 4000 180. (E) .0 2.petersons. 908 (A) × 65 4540 54480 59.
.
and is 5 3 4 4. . Answers are at the end of the chapter.354 is divisible by (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 5 8 9 10 19 . 1 2 27 20 3 2 91 60 5 1 12 3 9 from . 2 50 36 1 2 36 50 7 12 3 from 57. 1. 5 4 5 ÷ ⋅ 6 3 4 is equal to (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 5 Subtract (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 20 Subtract 32 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 5 3 25 5 2 25 5 3 24 5 1 24 5 24 1 3 5 3 40 7 40 3. The number 582. The sum of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. 4 10 3 2 1 .Operations with Fractions 2 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem.
+ 3 2 93 (A) 5 93 (B) 35 147 (C) 35 147 (D) 5 97 (E) 35 4− 6. Which of the following fractions is closest to 2 ? 3 11 15 7 10 4 5 1 2 5 6 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) www. Which of the following fractions is the largest? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 2 11 16 5 8 21 32 3 4 1 1 + a b 10. b = 4. Find the value of 1 1 when a = 3. − a b (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7 2 1 1 7 2 7 8.petersons.20 Chapter 2 9 10 Simplify 2 1 . 4 8 9 9 8 3 1 2 7.com . Divide 4 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 4 1 1 by 1 . 2 8 9.
That makes the least common denominator 60. a shortcut method can be used: a c ad + bc + = . in order to add b d bd two fractions. 30 20 15 12 77 17 + + + = =1 60 60 60 60 60 60 1 1 1 1 + + + 2 3 4 5 When only two fractions are being added. ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION To add or subtract fractions. Example: Add Solution: The common denominator must contain two factors of 2 to accommodate the 4. they must have the same denominator.Operations with Fractions 21 1. and also a factor of 3 and one of 5. That is.petersons.com . Rename each fraction to have 60 as the denominator by dividing the given denominator into 60 and multiplying the quotient by the given numerator. this common denominator will be the least number into which each given denominator will divide evenly. Example: 4 7 + 5 12 Solution: 4 (12 ) + 5( 7 ) 5(12 ) = 48 + 35 83 23 = =1 60 60 60 A similar shortcut applies to the subtraction of two fractions: a c ad − bc − = b d bd Example: 4 7 4 (12 ) − 5( 7 ) 48 − 35 13 = = − = 60 5 12 60 5 (12 ) www. To add several fractions. add the two cross products and place this sum over the product of the given denominators.
5 3 The sum of and is 17 15 126 (A) 255 40 (B) 255 8 (C) 32 40 (D) 32 126 (E) 265 3 5 From the sum of and subtract the sum of 4 6 1 2 5. 1.com . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 1 2 36 70 2 3 5 24 www. 5 11 12 − 55 12 55 1 3 8 3 4 5 1 2 from the sum of and . Circle the letter that appears before your answer. The sum of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. 6 9 23 12 23 36 6 24 1 2 3 1 2 3 + + is 2 3 4 4. Subtract (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 9 from . 8 4 3 3.22 Chapter 2 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. Subtract (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 3 2 11 24 8 15 7 24 4 and 3 .petersons.
always try to divide out any common factor of any denominator with any numerator to keep your numbers as small as possible.Operations with Fractions 23 2.com . we multiply by the multiplicative inverse. Remember that if all numbers divide out in the numerator.petersons. 1 1 3 1 3 15 11 ⋅ ⋅ = 5 33 45 15 3 1 15 In dividing fractions. The same goes for the denominator. MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION In multiplying fractions. you are left with Example: Multiply Solution: 3 15 11 ⋅ ⋅ 5 33 45 1 or 1. If all numbers in both numerator and denominator divide out. Example: Divide Solution: 5 9 1 ⋅ = 18 5 2 2 5 5 by 18 9 www. you are left with a numerator of 1.
6. . Find the product of (A) (B) 3 3 4 1 . and . 8 3 8 3 (A) 14 7 (B) 96 21 (C) 128 14 (D) 3 8 (E) 3 3 1 3 ÷ ⋅ is equal to 5 2 10 5.24 Chapter 2 Exercise 2 Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons. 2 9 12 4. 1. 3. 2. 2 7 of . 12 25 (A) 12 1 (B) 12 5 (C) 12 Find (D) (E) 12 12 5 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 1 4 12 5 5 12 12 15 www. 1 3 14 (C) 23 1 (D) 36 5 (E) 12 7 2 1 Find ⋅ ÷ .com . 3 12 7 (A) 8 7 (B) 9 8 (C) 7 8 (D) 9 7 (E) 18 5 Divide 5 by .
www. The sum of the digits in the numerator is 24. Since these sums are both divisible by 3. each number is divisible by 3. or 8 the sum of the digits is divisible by 3 the number formed by the last 2 digits is divisible by 4 the last digit is 5 or 0 the number meets the tests for divisibility by 2 and 3 the number formed by the last 3 digits is divisible by 8 the sum of the digits is divisible by 9 longer even and divisibility by 3 was ruled out earlier.com . there is no longer a single digit factor common to numerator and denominator. so it is not divisible by 3.Operations with Fractions 25 3. they are each divisible by 6. we would like to divide by a larger number. that you will be called on to divide by a twodigit number. Dividing by 8. If a number is divisible by 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 Example: By what single digit number should we simplify 428. we have 5459 . to save time. 672 135. 4. 376 ? Solution: Since both numbers are even. However. Since these numbers are no 6604 43. The numbers formed by the last three digits of each number is divisible by 8. Therefore. The sum of the digits in the denominator is 30. it is helpful to tell at a glance whether or not a given number will divide evenly into both numerator and denominator. Example: Simplify to simplest form: 52. each number is divisible by 8. Certain tests for divisibility assist with this. making the entire number divisible by 4. The sum of the digits in the numerator is 22.petersons. at the level of this examination. 2. In simplifying fractions involving very large numbers. SIMPLIFYING FRACTIONS All fractional answers should be left in simplest form. The number formed by the last two digits of each number is divisible by 4. It is unlikely. There should be no factor that can still be divided into numerator and denominator. 492 Then its last digit is 0. they are at least divisible by 2. Since these numbers meet the divisibility tests for 2 and 3. they are at least divisible by 2. 6. 832 Solution: Since both numbers are even.
39 (A) I and II only (B) I only (C) I and IV only (D) I. 3 II. 1. 6.845 (E) 53. in order for this number to be divisible by 3. The fraction (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.862. 4 III..1)(n .26 Chapter 2 Exercise 3 Work out each problem. (4)(3)(2)(1). so that 4! = (4)(3)(2)(1) = 24. 5 (A) I only (B) I and III only (C) II and III only (D) I.290 Given the number 83.140 is divisible by I.com .. 17 II. and IV (E) none of the above 4. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. then 19! is divisible by I. 100 IV.505 (D) 37.325 (C) 46.2) . 54 III. The number 6.21p. 3.petersons. and 9.235 (B) 34. II. 2 4 6 8 9 432 can be simplified by dividing 801 numerator and denominator by 2. p must be (A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 0 (E) 9 If n! means n(n . III. II. Which of the following numbers is divisible by 5 and 9? (A) 42. and III (E) III only www.
which we change to 61 . 20 20 To multiply or divide mixed numbers. 3 15 17 = 17 4 20 3 12 +43 = +43 5 20 When adding. Example: 1 2 23 − 6 3 5 Solution: 1 5 23 = 23 3 15 2 6 −6 = −6 5 15 Since we cannot subtract 6 5 15 from . 15 In this form. This time it will be 20. subtraction is possible. you must borrow in terms of the common denominator. we get a sum of 60 27 7 . giving us an answer of 16 Example: Add 17 Solution: 3 3 to 43 4 5 Again we first rename the fractions to have a common denominator. OPERATIONS WITH MIXED NUMBERS To add or subtract mixed numbers. always rename them as improper fractions first. it is again important to find common denominators. we borrow from 23 and rewrite our problem as 15 15 15 22 20 15 6 −6 15 14 .Operations with Fractions 27 4.petersons.com . Example: Multiply 3 ⋅ 1 ⋅ 2 Solution: 2 2 3 5 1 9 3 4 18 10 11 ⋅ ⋅ = 11 5 9 4 2 www. If it is necessary to borrow in subtraction.
Find the sum of 1 . Find the product of 32 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 26 13 169 1 10 2 160 7 1 1 and 5 . 5 12 6 6 13 7 7 12 1 6 3 1 7 12 1 6 2 3 . Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 2 5 (E) 160 www. and 3 . 4 5 2 5 5 288 1 2 5 1 2 1 2 2 3.petersons.28 Chapter 2 Example: Divide 3 Solution: 2 3 5 by 5 4 8 15 45 15 8 2 ÷ = ⋅ = 4 45 3 4 8 3 Exercise 4 Work out each problem.com . 3 4 4. Divide 17 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 4 1 by 70. Find 1 (A) (B) (C) (D) 3 2 · 12 ÷ 8 . 2 7 4 1 2 4 4 9 1 2 Subtract 45 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7 15 12 5 15 12 7 16 12 5 16 12 5 17 12 5 from 61. 1. 12 5. 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.
6 a c Method II—To compare with . Example: Which of the following fractions is the largest? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: To compare the last four. to compare 5 is the larger fraction. Since 5 · 11 is greater. Method I is easier. is the larger fraction. compare the cross products as follows: b d a c > b d a c If ad < bc. 11 44 55 7 56 = = 16 64 64 8 64 7 7 3 7 The largest of these is . compare 5 · 11 with 6 · 8. 7 · 5 > 8 · 3. COMPARING FRACTIONS There are two methods by which fractions may be compared to see which is larger (or smaller). we can easily use a common denominator of 64. 8 8 5 8 21 42 = 32 64 3 5 21 32 11 16 55 64 7 8 is the greatest fraction.com . Method II is easier. www. then = b d 5 8 or ? 6 11 5 55 = 6 66 If ad > bc. 8 48 = 11 66 5 Therefore. a combination of these methods must be used in comparing a series of fractions.Operations with Fractions 29 5. then < b d a c If ad = bc. Solution: The least common denominator is 66. 6 11 Sometimes. therefore. then Using the example above. Example: Which is larger. the fraction with the larger numerator is the larger fraction. Method I—Rename the fractions to have the same denominator. 6 5 8 with . When this is done. When a common denominator would result in a very large number. When a common denominator can be found easily for a series of fractions. Now we compare with using Method II.petersons.
30
Chapter 2
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1. Arrange these fractions in order of size, from largest to smallest: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.
4 2 1 , , 15 5 3 4 1 2 , , 15 3 5 2 1 4 , , 5 3 15 1 4 2 , , 3 15 5 1 2 4 , , 3 5 15
4 2 1 , , . 15 5 3
4.
Which of the following fractions is closest to (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
1 2 7 12 5 6 11 12 19 24
3 ? 4
5.
Which of the following fractions is closest to (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
5 12 8 15 11 20 31 60 7 15
1 ? 2
Which of the following fractions is the smallest? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
3 4 5 6 7 8 19 24 13 15 3 5 7 10 5 8 3 4 13 20
3.
Which of the following fractions is the largest? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
www.petersons.com
Operations with Fractions
31
6. COMPLEX FRACTIONS
To simplify complex fractions, fractions that contain fractions within them, multiply every term by the smallest number needed to clear all fractions in the given numerator and denominator. Example:
1 1 + 6 4 1 1 + 2 3
Solution: The smallest number into which 6, 4, 2, and 3 will divide is 12. Therefore, multiply every term of the fraction by 12 to simplify the fraction.
2+3 5 1 = = 6 + 4 10 2
Example:
3 2 4 3 1 1+ 2
Solution: Again, we multiply every term by 12. Be sure to multiply the 1 by 12 also.
9−8 1 = 12 + 6 18
Exercise 6
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
2 1 1 + + 3 6 4 Write as a fraction in simplest form: 2 1 3 2
1.
2.
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
13 2 7 2 13 4 4 13 49 12
5 2 6 3 Simplify: 5 1 12 6 5 (A) 12 5 (B) 6 2 (C) 3 1 (D) 6 7 (E) 12
www.petersons.com
32
Chapter 2
3.
1 1 + a b Find the value of 1 when a = 2 and b = 3. ab 5 (A) 6
2
1 3
5.
Find the value of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
4 17 21 25 7 6 12 51 14 53
1 1. 5 +3 2 3
(B) (C) (D) (E)
5 4
1 6 1 1 5 2 2 5
4.
1 1 + a b 1 1 Find the value of 1 when a = and b = . 2 3 ab 5 (A) 6
(B) (C) (D) (E)
5 4
1 6 1 1 5 2 2 5
www.petersons.com
Operations with Fractions
33
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1. The sum of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
8 12 113 60 1 5 10 9 11 6
4 3 1 , , and is 5 4 3
5.
Subtract 62 (A) 37
2 from 100. 3
6. 2.
2 11 Subtract from . 3 15 3 (A) 4 7 (B) 5 5 (C) 7 1 (D) 15 1 (E) 3
1 3 1 (B) 38 3 2 (C) 37 3 2 (D) 38 3 2 (E) 28 3 2 8 Divide 2 by 4 . 5 10
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7.
2
1 2 288 25 25 288 1 2 4 7 12 8 15 11 20 5 6 2 3
Which of the following fractions is the smallest? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
3.
If 52,34p is divisible by 9, the digit represented by p must be (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5
3 1 34 5 + 4 ÷ 15 is equal to 5 (A) 3 5 (B) 8 8 (C) 3 8 (D) 5 3 (E) 8
4.
8.
Which of the following fractions is closest to (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
4 15 3 10 3 20 1 5 1 10
1 ? 4
www.petersons.com
34
Chapter 2
9.
5 2 + 2 3 Simplify: 3 5 + 4 6
1 ab
10. Find the value of 1 1 when a = 4, b = 5.
a + b
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
2
1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
9 20
1 9 1 20 9 40
12
1 4
4
www.petersons.com
Operations with Fractions
35
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. (D) Change all fractions to sixtieths.
36 40 15 91 + + = 60 60 60 60
Exercise 1
1. (B) Change all fractions to twelfths.
6 8 9 23 + + = 12 12 12 12
2. 3.
(A)
9 3 36 − 30 6 3 − = = = 10 4 40 40 20
2.
(A) Use the cross product method.
5 (15) + 17 ( 3) 17 (15) = 75 + 51 126 = 255 255
(D) The sum of the digits is 27, which is divisible by 9. (C) 6 ÷ 3 ⋅ 4 = 6 ÷ 3 = 6 ⋅ 5 = 2 2 (A) 57 = 56
5 5 3 3 32 = 32 5 5 2 24 5
5 4 5 5 5 5 3 1
3.
(D)
3 5 18 + 20 38 19 + = = = 24 4 6 24 12
4. 5.
1 2 3 + 8 11 + = = 4 3 12 12 19 11 8 2 − = = 12 12 12 3
4.
4
5.
6. 7.
(B)
9 9 9 8 ÷ = ⋅ =4 2 8 2 9
9 3 45 − 33 12 − = = 11 5 55 55 1 2 3 + 8 11 = (E) + = 4 3 12 12 11 5 88 − 60 28 7 − = = = 12 8 96 96 24
(B)
(E) Use a common denominator of 32.
1 16 = 2 32 3 24 = 4 32 11 22 = 16 32 5 20 = 8 32 21 32
Exercise 2
2
1. 2. 3.
1 3 6 4 1 (B) 2 ⋅ 1 ⋅ 9 ⋅ 12 = 3
3 2
3 Of these, is the largest. 4
7 2 8 14 (D) 8 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 1 = 3
8.
(B) Use a common denominator of 30.
11 22 7 21 4 24 = = = 15 30 10 30 5 30 1 15 5 25 = = 2 30 6 30 2 20 2 7 Since = , the answer closest to is . 3 30 3 10
(A)
3 3 ÷ 5 20
4
3 20 ⋅ =4 5 3
4. 5.
= (E) 3 ⋅ 12 18
6
2
7
7
9.
(B) Multiply every term of the fraction by 30.
120 − 27 93 = 20 + 15 35 10. (A) 1 + 1 3 4 1 1 3 4
5 12 (D) 1 ⋅ 5 = 12
Multiply every term by 12.
4+3 =7 4−3
www.petersons.com
36
Chapter 2
Exercise 3
1. (D) The digits must add to a number divisible by 9. All answers are divisible by 5. 3 + 7 + 8 + 4 + 5 = 27, which is divisible by 9. (A) The sum of the digits must be divisible by 9, and the digit must be even. 8 + 3 + 2 + 1 = 14. Therefore, we choose (A) because 14 + 4 = 18, which is divisible by 9. (D) 19! = 19 · 18 · 17 · 16 ... 3 · 2 · 1. This is divisible by 17, since it contains a factor of 17. It is divisible by 54, since it contains factors of 9 and 6. It is divisible by 100, since it contains factors of 10, 5, and 2. It is divisible by 39, since it contains factors of 13 and 3. (E) The sum of the digits in both the numerator and denominator are divisible by 9. (D) The sum of the digits is 27, which is divisible by 3. The number formed by the last two digits is 40, which is divisible by 4. The number ends in 0 and is therefore divisible by 5.
Exercise 5
1. 2. (C)
2 6 = 5 15 1 5 = 3 15
2.
(A) To compare (A), (B), (C), and (D), use a common denominator of 24.
3 18 = 4 24 5 20 = 6 24 7 21 = 8 24 19 24
3.
Of these, with
3 3 is the smallest. To compare 4 4
13 , use cross products. Since (3)(15) < 15 3 13 (4)(14), < . Therefore, (A) is the smallest. 4 15
3.
4. 5.
(D) To compare (A), (B), (D), and (E), use a common denominator of 20.
3 12 = 5 20 7 14 = 10 20 3 15 = 4 20 13 20
Of these,
3 3 is the largest. To compare with 4 4 5 3 , use cross products. Since (3)(8) > (4)(5), 8 4
Exercise 4
1. (C) 1 = 1
1 2 6 12 2 8 2 =2 12 3 3 9 3 =3 4 12 19 7 6 =7 12 12 12 = 60 12 5 5 45 = 45 12 12 7 15 12
13 13
is the larger fraction. 4. (E) Use a common denominator of 24.
1 12 = 2 24 19 24 7 14 = 12 24 5 20 = 6 24 11 22 = 12 24
Since
19 . 24
3 18 3 = , the answer closest to is (E), 4 24 4
2.
(A) 61
5.
(D) Use a common denominator of 60.
5 25 = 12 60 7 28 = 15 60 8 32 = 15 60 11 33 = 20 60 31 60
3.
65 26 (C) ⋅ = 169 2 5
Since 4. (A) 17 ÷ 70 =
3
1 30 1 = , the answer closest to is (D), 2 60 2
1 2
35 35 1 1 ÷ 70 = ⋅ = 2 2 70 4
2
31 . 60
5.
(E)
5 1 7 12 5 ⋅ ⋅ = =2 2 4 1 42 2
6 2
www.petersons.com
Operations with Fractions
37
Exercise 6
1. (A) Multiply every term of the fraction by 12.
8 + 2 + 3 13 = 8−6 2
Retest
1. (B) Rename all fractions as sixtieths.
48 45 20 113 + + = 60 60 60 60
2.
(C) Multiply every term of the fraction by 12.
10 − 8 2 = 5− 2 3
2. 3.
(D)
11 2 11 10 1  =  = 15 3 15 15 15
3.
1 1 + 2 3 (B) 1 Multiply every term by 6. 6
3+ 2 =5 1
(D) The sum of the digits must be divisible by 9. 5 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 4 = 18, which is divisible by 9. (E)
1
4.
17 34 ÷ 20 15
3
17
1
4.
(A)
1 2
=2
1
1 3
=3
1
1 6
20 34
⋅
15
2
=
3 8
=6
4
5.
(A) 100 = 99
2+3 5 = 6 6
7 3
3 3 2 2 – 62 = 62 3 3 1 37 3
1 2
5.
(E) 11 10 Multiply every term by 6.
2 3 14 14 = 33 + 20 53 +
6. 7.
12 48 12 10 2 1 (B) 5 ÷ 10 = 5 ⋅ 48 = 4 = 2
1 4
(B) Use a common denominator of 60.
7 35 = 12 60 2 40 = 3 60 8 32 = 15 60 11 33 = 20 60 5 50 = 6 60
Of these, 8.
8 is the smallest. 15
(A) Use a common denominator of 60.
4 16 = 15 60 1 6 = 10 60 3 18 = 10 60 3 9 = 20 60 1 12 = 5 60
Since 9.
1 15 1 4 = , the answer closest to is . 4 60 4 15
(A) Multiply every term of the fraction by 12.
30 + 8 38 = =2 9 + 10 19
1 20 10. (C) 1 1 Multiply every term by 20. + 4 5 1 1 = 5+ 4 9
www.petersons.com
.
On Monday evening. Strauss did of the remainder 4 before lunch. 1 hour of news. What part of the evening’s programming was devoted to situation comedy? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. 1. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Michelle spent 1 of her summer vacation at 2 1 1 camp. 1 pt. and 3 hours of movies. Channel 2 scheduled 2 hours of situation comedy. and 5 4 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. Mrs.Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 3 3. Answers are at the end of the chapter. What part of the laundry was left for the afternoon? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 2 1 4 2 3 1 5 1 6 39 . 1 3 2 3 1 2 1 6 2 5 visiting her grandmother. of her vacation babysitting.? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 4 3 10 1 2 5 8 3 8 After doing 1 of the family laundry before 3 3 breakfast. What part of her vacation was left to relax at home? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4. 1 5 1 20 1 3 3 20 1 6 What part of a gallon is 2 qt.
com .40 Chapter 3 5. How many of the dogs are classified as small? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 D 2 1 D 6 5 D 6 2 D 3 1 D 3 Barbara’s car has a gasoline tank that holds 20 gallons.petersons. This represents Copacabana? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 147 101 189 105 126 class. After working for X hours. How many seniors did not vote for the 8. classified as large dogs and 1 of the remainder 4 1 are 3 What part of his allowance did he have left? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6. what part of the job remains to be done? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) MX M X MM MX XM X M www. 3 Glenn spent 9. When her gauge reads (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 10 15 12 16 2 of the senior 9 many gallons are needed to fill the tank? 10. Of D dogs in Mrs. 2 of his allowance on a hit record. A bookshelf contains A autobiographies and B biographies. how 4 are classified as mediumsized. Steve needs M hours to mow the lawn. Pace’s kennel. 1 5 1 3 2 5 3 20 1 10 1 full. 42 seniors voted to hold the prom at the Copacabana. What part of these books are biographies? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) B A B A+ B A +B A A B B B A 7. 5 2 He then spent of the remainder on a gift.
1. In dealing with fractional problems. What part of the class is girls? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. Example: Andrea and Danny ran for president of the Math Club. What part of the games played did it win? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 20 3 17 14 17 17 20 7 8 4. 3 girls are fired and replaced by women. 25 5 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.m. 2 3 3 5 2 5 1 15 3 2 3.m. In the middle of the summer.? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6 25 2 5 5 12 1 24 24 A team played 40 games and lost 6. What part of the staff is then made up of women? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 5 2 9 1 3 3 10 1 2 www. Andrea got 15 votes. In a class there are 18 boys and 12 girls. What part of an hour elapses between 3:45 p. A camp employs 4 men. and 8 boys. and 4:09 p. we are usually dealing with a part of a quantity.petersons.com . What part of the votes did Andrea receive? Solution: Andrea got 15 votes out of 25. That is 15 3 or of the votes. PART OF A WHOLE A fraction represents a part of a whole. 12 girls. while Danny got the other 10.Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 41 1. 6 women.
? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 12 1 3 1 2 5 8 4 9 8. for 3 4 10 1 clothing. What part of the students present at the meeting were sophomores? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 4 5 8 7 40 1 5 1 3 6. 15 juniors. What part is left 5 as follows: for other expenses? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 7 1 6 7 60 2 15 3 20 www.42 Chapter 3 5. and for savings. for rent. There are three times as many seniors as juniors at a high school JuniorSenior dance. 8 sophomores. which was attended by 10 freshmen. 3 in.com .petersons. Manorville High had a meeting of the Student Senate. and 7 seniors. What part of a yard is 1 ft. What part of the students present are juniors? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 5 3 5 2 3 3 4 1 4 7. The Dobkin family budgets its monthly income 1 1 1 for food.
Therefore. What was the income from the entire stock? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $3000 $7500 $1800 $2700 $8000 www. This 3 3 3 9 7 2 accounts for of the isopropyl alcohol. what part 3 1 of the isopropyl alcohol 3 Exercise 2 Work out each problem.000 $24.000 per year.000. what was the amount of her family income that year? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $8000 $16. of or evaporates during the second 12 hours. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons.000 and $20. That accounts for + or earn over $20. Gross sold the remainder of the suits at the same price per suit after Christmas for $4500. such as ing the fractions together.000 $32. the other earn less than $15. Therefore.000 $6000 Christmas. 4 2 4 8 4 8 8 3 of all employees.000. 9 9 2 of the remainder evaporates in the second 12 hours. Brown’s firm earn over $20.000 per year? Solution: 1 1 3 3 1 3 5 of or earn between $15. Natt spent 2 of the family income one 3 2 of the suits in his shop before 5 2.000 and $20.000. of the bottle is still full. FINDING FRACTIONS OF FRACTIONS Many problems require you to find a fractional part of a fractional part. Mr. Example: 1 1 of the employees of Mr. Mrs.000. If evaporates in the first 12 hours and of the bottle is full at the end of 24 hours? Solution: 1 2 2 4 evaporates during the first 12 hours. 1. After selling year and divided the remainder between 4 different savings banks.com .Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 43 2. If she put $2000 into each bank. This involves multiply5 3 between $15. 8 Example: A full bottle of isopropyl alcohol is left open in the school laboratory. of the remainder earn 4 2 3 2 1 of is . 4 3 2 3 2 of . What part of the employees earns less than $15.
Of this year’s graduating seniors at South High. How many miles were left to be driven? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 600 2000 2400 2100 2700 www. 9 50 1 5 4 5 18 25 4 25 Transportation Company.com . a distance of 3000 miles.petersons. 800 employees work for the Metropolitan 1 go to fouryear colleges. 4 of these are 5 college graduates. 9 4 will be going to college. They covered 1 2 of the distance the first day and 10 9 of the remaining distance the second day. while the rest will be going to twoyear colleges. What part of the class will be going to twoyear colleges? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4. while of the remainder 6 are high school graduates. What part of the employees never graduated from high school? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 6 1 8 7 8 1 12 3 4 Sue and Judy drove from New York to San Francisco. Of these. will 10 5 5.44 Chapter 3 3.
This represents 7 of the class.Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 45 3. Daniel spent $4. 1.000 3. 5 Multiply by 5. it is often easiest to translate the words into mathematical symbols and solve the resulting equation.000 2 350 seniors attended the prom. What 4 did he have left that week for other expenses? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. This 3 represents of his allowance for the week. Example: Norman buys a used car for $2400. This is of their total monthly income. She asks the gasoline attendant to fill the tank and finds 8 she needs 21 gallons.000 $35.000 $98. which is Solution: 2400 = 5 x 12000 = 2x $6000 = x Example: 2 2 of the original price.petersons. how many voted against it? (A) 500 (B) 400 (C) 720 (D) 600 (E) 223 www. what is the total value of the property? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $70. Mr. 8 1 7x = 168 x = 24 Exercise 3 Work out each problem. The gas gauge on Mary’s car reads full. If the 7 value of his share is $14. 8 7 x = 21 Multiply by 8. Find the original price. If 900 people voted for the resolution.000 $10. 15 Assuming that salaries remain constant.000 $49. How many seniors did not 9 attend the prom? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 50 100 110 120 450 The Stone family spends $500 per month for 4 rent. What is the capacity of her gas tank? Solution: 7 of the tank is empty and requires 21 gallons to fill. FINDING WHOLE NUMBERS When a fractional part of a number is given and we wish to find the number representing the whole. $6.500 $16.50 5. 4. A resolution was passed by a ratio of 5:4.50 for a ticket to the movies.39 $1.13 $1.000.000 $22. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.00 $4.00 $3. Rich owns of a piece of property.com . what is the Stone family income for one year? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $1875 $6000 $60.
the same principles discussed earlier apply. X of these are 10cent stamps.petersons.D days of painting left to do out of a total of X days. Example: It takes Mr.X ) or 5003. Let A = weekly allowance X= 1 ·A M 1 (500 . This represents of his weekly allowance. Cohen X days to paint his house. SOLVING WITH LETTERS When problems use letters in place of numbers. therefore. MX = A www. If you are not sure which operations to use. Therefore. 3 XD is the correct X 1 1 of these are 15cent stamps. buys Example: John spent $X on the latest hit record album. Example: Sue buys 500 stamps.X 15cent stamps. she 3 1 Multiply by M. answer.46 Chapter 3 4. If he works for D days. replace the letters with numbers to determine the steps needed in the solution. what part of his house must still be painted? Solution: He has X .X stamps that are not 10cents stamps.com . of the remainder are 15cent stamps. How 3 many 15cent stamps does she buy? Solution: She buys 500 . What is M his weekly allowance? Solution: Translate the sentence into an algebraic equation.
1. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) D M D + 100 M D + 100 M M + 100 D M + 100 D 1 study French. B G G B B B+G B+G B B BG 4. After putting in G 4 7 gallons of gasoline. Feldman took t dollars in travelers checks with them on a trip. During 5 1 the second week.Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 47 Exercise 4 Work out each problem. Mr.com . How many of 4 the students study Italian? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 S 6 1 S 4 2 S 3 1 S 12 3 S 7 4G www. they spent remainder. and Mrs. 1 of the remainder study Italian. What part of the class is boys? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. the tank was full. 4t 15 t 15 7t 15 11t 15 8t 15 M men agreed to rent a ski lodge for a total of D dollars. 3 1 full. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. What 8 Frank’s gas tank was was the capacity of the tank. How much did they have left at the end of the second week? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. they spent of the 3 first week. the price had increased by $100. Of S students in Bryant High. A class contains B boys and G girls. By the time they signed the contract. Find the amount each man had to contribute as his total share. During the 1 of their money. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5G 8 8G 5 8G 7 7G 8 3.petersons.
1 Mrs. 1 4 2 3 1 3 1 2 5 6 What part of a day is 4 hours 20 minutes? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 6 13 300 1 3 13 72 15 77 What part of an hour elapses between 6:51 P. 12 50 12 25 1 2 12 40 12 60 4. 1.M. of these are 3 2 novels. rest are nonfiction. The All Star Appliance Shop sold 10 refrigerators. 12 washing machines. and 8 clothes dryers during January.com . how many more hours 5 3. and the 6.petersons. and 7:27 P. If he wanted to finish the paper that weekend.? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 2 2 3 3 5 17 30 7 12 2 of the book. How many nonfiction books does Mrs. 5 of the remainder are poetry.48 Chapter 3 RETEST Work out each problem. 12 freezers. 8 ranges.M. what part was left to be typed on Sunday? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. Freezers made up what part of the appliances sold in January? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. If she finished (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 20 12 3 1 5 will she need to read the rest of the book? 18 10 www. After typing 1 of a term paper on Friday. Brown owns X books. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Brown own? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 X 15 2 X 5 2 X 3 3 X 5 7 X 15 Laurie spent 8 hours reading a novel. 4 2 Richard completed of the remainder on 3 Saturday.
If she spent $28 on produce. money on produce.Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 49 7. and T apartment houses. S twofamily homes.petersons. What part of the buildings on this block is made up of one or two family houses? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) R S + T T RS R+S+T R+S R+S+T R+S RST R+S www.com . Mrs. What part of the membership is between 40 and 60 years old? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 4 3 8 3 4 1 8 5 8 After working on a new roof for X hours on Saturday. 1 of the women in the Spring Garden Club 2 1 4 of the remainder are under 40. Bach spent 2 of her weekly grocery 7 9. Mr. A residential city block contains R onefamily homes. $70 $80 $56 $90 $98 are over 60 years old. What part of the total job was done on Sunday? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Y X +Y Y X X X +Y Y X Y Y Y X 10. what was her total grocery bill that week? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 8. Goldman finished the job by working Y hours on Sunday.
www. One yard is 36 inches. Since was spent on a hit 5 2 2 4 1 record. 8 12 2 or of the class is 30 5 34 of 40 2. (B) 24 minutes is 17 . 3 6 1 leaving D small dogs. = 6 3 Exercise 1 1.petersons. (D) There were 40 students at the meeting. M . One gallon is 8 pints. 8 1 = 40 5 1 1 1 1 20 15 6 12 53 (C) + + + = + + + = 3 4 10 5 60 60 60 60 60 7 Therefore. (D) Change all measurements to pints. x out of these 4x are juniors. (C) Multiply by 9. of which 12 are girls. 5 5 5 5 (E) Let x = the number of juniors at the dance. Since was done before breakfast. 5. is 15 inches. Then 4x = the number of students at the dance. or That is of the students present are 4x 4 juniors. 60 5 (D) The number of staff members is still 30. 5 gallon. 3 2 6 1 leaving for the afternoon. (E) 5. Therefore. 2 3 2 of or of Glenn’s allowance was 3 5 5 2 spent on a gift. 1 1 1 10 4 5 19 . 4 (A) Change all measurements to inches.com . 7. 9 are now women.X hours are left out of a total of M hours. 3 1 1 5 + or was done before the afternoon. made up of girls. 6.50 Chapter 3 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. Therefore. + or was spent. 9 3 or 30 10 4. 8. (A) There was a total of 6 hours of 2 1 programming time. (A) 10. (C) There are 30 pupils in the class. 3x = the number of seniors at the dance. 1 ft. Divide by 2. 4. B out of A + B are biographies. 1 pt. 7. = 5 pints = 2. 147 did not. is left for other expenses. 60 8. Therefore of the staff are women. 2 9. (B) + + = + + = 2 5 4 20 20 20 20 1 was left to relax. This simplifies to 3. (A) After working for X hours. (D) The team won 34 games out of 40 or its games. of D or D are 3 4 3 6 1 1 medium. 20 3 2 1 of or of the laundry was done before 4 3 2 1 lunch. Since 42 seniors voted for the Copacabana. (B) There are A + B books. x 1 (A) 6. 6 24 2 or of an hour. 1 1 2 1 D dogs are large. 15 5 = 36 12 leaving 15 gallons to fill the tank. The total of these dogs is D + D . 2 qt. This is the number of seniors. Of these. (C) The tank contained 2 x 9 378 = 2 x 189 = x 42 = 1 ⋅ 20 or 5 gallons. 3 in. leaving . 20 3.
8 Multiply by 7. 100 do not.00 $4.900 = 720 voted against the resolution. (A) Since 4 9 of will go to fouryear 5 10 1 9 9 or colleges.00 = 3x 4. colleges. leaving 1 who did not. 5. 2. 1 800 = x 3 $24. 3 Multiply by 4.50 = Multiply by 3. Divide by 7. 000 = x Exercise 3 1. 4. 4. 000 the employees graduated from high school. 5. (D) They covered 1 ⋅ 3000 or 300 miles the 10 first day. 000 7 2 x = 98. 5 . 2. + or of 4 4 8 8 (B) 1620 = x 1620 . leaving 2700 miles still to drive.50 left for other expenses. (D) 4 x = 500 Multiply by 15. (C) 5 of the voters voted for the resolution. (B) 2 x = 14. Divide by 15 4. This is their monthly 4 x = 7500 income. $6. (E) 3 x 4 18. If 350 attend the prom. x = $1875 Multiply by 12 to find yearly income: $22. 9 This is the number of students in the class. (B) 4500 = x 3 5 $7500 = x Multiply by x = $6. Divide by 2. his allowance for the week. 000 x = $49.Verbal Problems Involving Fractions 51 Exercise 2 1. 9 5 Multiply by 9. Divide by 3.com .petersons. 900 = x 9 8100 = 5 x leaving 2100 miles still to drive.500.50 = $1. Divide by 5. (B) 7 x 9 3150 = 7 x 450 = x 350 = 3. www. of will go to twoyear 5 10 50 Multiply by 9. 3.00. (C) She put $8000 into savings banks. 6 4 8 1 1 5 7 Since are college graduates. They covered 2 ⋅ 2700 or 600 miles the second day. 5 3 5 of or are high school graduates.
5 15 15 8 leaving t . between 40 and 60. (A) D + 100 dollars. 8. 4. 4. B out of B + G are boys. (B) 1 1 2 1 S students study French. (A) 2 3 1 of or of the term paper was 3 4 2 1 completed on Saturday. 60 5 4 2 4 1 to be 4 5. 2. Y out of X + Y was done on Sunday. each man must contribute 3. R + S out of R + S + T are one or two family houses. Since 4 2 8 1 1 5 3 + or are over 60 or under 40. Divide by 2. 5. (C) There is a total of R + S + T buildings on the block. During these two 3 5 15 1 4 7 weeks they spent a total of t + t or t . 4 hr. (A) Mr. 15 7 1 5 (B) The G gallons fill . 6. (C) There are B + G students in the class. www. which must be divided by the number of men to find each share. One day is 60 · 24 or 1440 minutes. 7.petersons. They spent 5 1 4 4 of t or t the second week. 20 min. (A) There were 50 appliances sold in January. Goldman worked a total of X + Y hours. (B) 8 = x Multiply by 5. leaving X or X books 3 15 15 15 5 study Italian. (C) 36 minutes is 2 5 40 = 2 x 20 = x 36 3 or of an hour.com . of X or X are 3 5 3 15 poetry. 1 (E) They spent t the first week. 260 13 = 1440 72 3. she will need 12 more hours to finish the book. Divide by 2. 8 4 8 5 8 x =G Multiply by . 8 5 8G x= 5 which are nonfiction. The total of these books is 1 4 9 6 2 X + X or X . (E) 2 x = 28 7 2 x = 196 x = $98 Multiply by 7. Since 4 was completed on Friday. (D) Change all measurements to minutes. (C) The total cost is D + 100. leaving typed on Sunday.or of the tank. Since Laurie already read for 8 hours. are 2 8 8 8 9. 12 were freezers. = 260 min.52 Chapter 3 Exercise 4 1. (B) 1 1 1 of or are under 40. M Retest 1. This is the total number of hours needed to read the book. 50 2. of S or S 3 4 3 6 1 2 2 4 X books are novels. 10. Since there are M men. 1 + 1 or 3 was completed before Sunday.
At how many revolutions per minute is the second gear turning? (A) 35 (B) (C) (D) (E) 7. Answers are at the end of the chapter. how many miles will she drive in a full year? (A) 16.Variation 4 5. A map is drawn using a scale of 2 inches = 25 miles. c = 5: (A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 7 (E) 8 6. 4 2 5 a–3 b+2 = x 4c 1 Solve for x if a = 7. = Solve for x: 3 4 (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 2x x+5 1.800 (C) 14. How far apart in miles are two cities which are 5 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 60 65 67 2 69 70 1 37 2 inches apart on the map? 5 30 24 4. ft.000 (E) 16. 3.400 A gear having 20 teeth turns at 30 revolutions per minute and is meshed with another gear having 25 teeth. How far on the other side of the fulcrum should he sit to balance the seesaw? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 4 2 5 5 2 1 3 1 1 3 1 4 2 5 ft.000 (B) 16. ft. Dehn drove 7000 miles during the first 5 months of the year. b = 8. ft. His younger brother weighs 50 pounds. nc 53 . 1 2 1 22 2 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. How many apples can be bought for c cents if n apples cost d cents? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) nc d nd c cd n d c A boy weighing 90 pounds sits 3 feet from the fulcrum of a seesaw. ft. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Ms. At this rate. (D) (E) 2.800 (D) 15.
If a neighbor asks him to feed her dog as well.54 Chapter 4 8.2h m m2 mh mh + 2h m mh m2 mh m+2 10. how long will the dog food last.petersons. If 4 more men join the group.8 (E) 4 9. for how many fewer days will the rations last? (A) 5 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 1.com . how many hours will it take to print the paper? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) mh . An army platoon has enough rations to last 20 men for 6 days. If 2 of the machines are not working. assuming that all three dogs eat the same amount? (A) 10 days (B) 12 days (C) 14 days (D) 16 days (E) 18 days A newspaper can be printed by m machines in h hours. www. Alan has enough dog food to last his two dogs for three weeks.
In solving a proportion. Example: Express the ratio of 1 hour to 1 day. 6 x + 18 = 40 .com . The numerator of the first fraction and the denominator of the second are called the extremes.x = 5 6 Example: Solve for x: 4 : x = 9 : 18 Solution: Rewrite in fraction form. the 2 2 missing denominator must be 8. RATIO AND PROPORTION A ratio is a comparison between two quantities.5 x 11x = 22 x=2 x +3 8. The ratio is Example: Find the ratio of the shaded portion to the unshaded portion. 4 A proportion is a statement of equality between two ratios. Example: Solve for x: Solution: Cross multiply. We refer to this as cross multiplying. www. The ratio of the shaded portion to unshaded portion is 5 . then the first must also be equal to . Observation often saves valuable time. 24 Solution: There are 5 squares shaded out of 9.Variation 55 1. which can also be written 1 : 24. we use the theorem that states the product of the means is equal to the product of the extremes.petersons. = x 18 Cross multiply. both quantities must be expressed in terms of the same units. In making this comparison. The denominator of the first fraction and the numerator of the second are called the means of the proportion. Solution: A day contains 24 hours. Therefore. 9 x = 72 x =8 4 9 If you observe that the second fraction is equal to 1 1 . 1 .
1. (A) 1 : 3 (B) 2 : 9 (C) 4 : 9 (D) 3 : 5 (E) 5 : 12 A team won 25 games in a 40 game season. 5 8 3 8 3 5 5 3 3 2 4. b and c.56 Chapter 4 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. Solve for x: 1 (A) 6 2 (B) 5 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 6 x + 1 28 = 8 32 2. to 1 yd. = Solve for y: 9 3 (A) 3 2y y 1 (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 3 9 15 9 4 4 9 In the proportion a : b = c : d. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Find the ratio of 1 ft. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) ac b bc a ab c a bc bc d www. 4 in.petersons. solve for d in terms of a. Find the ratio of games won to games lost. 5. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3.com .
the more papers will be delivered. A shortcut in the above example would be to observe what change takes place in the denominator and apply the same change to the numerator. We must be very careful to compare quantities in the same order and in terms of the same units in both fractions. The number of pounds of butter you use in a cookie recipe varies directly as the number of cups of sugar you use. the more it will cost.Variation 57 2. how many newspapers can c boys deliver in the same time? Solution: The more boys. the other changes in the same direction before you try to solve using a proportion. If we compare miles with hours in the first fraction.com . Example: If b boys can deliver n newspapers in one hour. The denominator of the left fraction was multiplied by 4 to give the denominator of the right fraction. The number of pounds of apples you buy varies directly as the amount of money you spend. As the first decreases. As the first increases. b c Cross multiply and solve for x. 4 x = 2 8 If we cross multiply. the distance you travel at a constant rate varies directly as the time spent traveling. we must compare miles with hours in the second fraction. This method often means a proportion can be solved at sight with no written computation at all. saving valuable time. = n x bx = cn cn x= b www.petersons. Whenever two quantities vary directly. how many bottles of milk can you buy for $8? Solution: The more milk you buy. Example: If 4 bottles of milk cost $2. the second does also. For example. DIRECT VARIATION Two quantities are said to vary directly if they change in the same direction. a problem can be solved using a proportion. we get 2x = 32 or x = 16. This is direct. We are comparing the number of bottles with cost. This is direct. the second does also. You must always be sure that as one quantity increases or decreases. We are comparing the number of boys with the number of newspapers. Therefore we multiply the numerator by 4 as well to maintain the equality.
84 (D) $1. Find the cost. 1. How many miles 2 1 4.70 (C) $1.petersons. 2.76 www.64 (E) $1. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.58 Chapter 4 Exercise 2 Work out each problem.20 (B) $1. of 8 books if 3 books of the same kind cost D dollars. approximately how many gallons of gas will he need for a trip of 1000 miles? (A) 44 (B) 45 (C) 46 (D) 47 (E) 49 If r planes can carry p passengers. 11 45 22 1 2 1 40 2 42 The toll on the Intercoastal Thruway is 8¢ for every 5 miles traveled. What is the toll for a trip of 115 miles on this road? (A) $9.com . in cents. At this rate. apart are two towns that are 2 1 4 4 inches apart on the map? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. (A) 8D 3 3 (B) 800D 3 (C) 8D 800 D (D) 3 108 D (E) 3 1 On a map inch = 10 miles. Mark’s car uses 20 gallons of gas to drive 425 miles. how many planes are needed to carry m passengers? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) rm p rp m p rm pm r m rp 5.
the diameter of a pulley varies inversely as the number of revolutions per minute.petersons. This is inverse. The fewer people working. The smaller the diameter. the less time it will last.Variation 59 3. C) When two pulleys are connected by a belt. the longer it will last. 3⋅ 2 = 2 ⋅ x 6 = 2x x = 3 days www. The more people. the less time it will take. The product of the number of teeth and the revolutions per minute remains constant. The lighter the object. the greater must be the distance. or any commodity. As the first decreases. how long will it take 2 men to do the same job? Solution: The fewer men. The less teeth it has. The heavier the object. the greater the number of revolutions per minute. Instead of dividing one quantity by the other and setting their quotients equal as we did in direct variation. the fewer revolutions it will make per minute. the more revolutions it will make per minute. The product of the weight of the object and its distance from the fulcrum remains constant. Example: If 3 men can paint a house in 2 days. The more teeth a gear has. the second increases. we multiply one quantity by the other and set the products equal. As the first increases. A) The number of teeth in a meshed gear varies inversely as the number of revolutions it makes per minute. Whenever two quantities vary inversely. There are several situations that are good examples of inverse variation. the shorter must be its distance from the fulcrum. the longer it will take. D) The number of people hired to work on a job varies inversely as the time needed to complete the job. The product of the number of people and the time it will last remains constant. the second decreases.com . The product of the number of people and the time worked remains constant. The larger the diameter. their product remains constant. the more days. The more people working. The product of the diameter of a pulley and the number of revolutions per minute remains constant. the smaller the number of revolutions per minute. INVERSE VARIATION Two quantities are said to vary inversely if they change in opposite directions. E) How long food. lasts varies inversely as the number of people who consume it. The fewer people. B) The distance a weight is placed from the fulcrum of a balanced lever varies inversely as its weight.
in inches.2 (B) 20 (C) 18 (D) 16. Two boys weighing 60 pounds and 80 pounds balance a seesaw. of the second pulley. how many hours will it take to plow the field? (A) 12 (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. how many days will the supply last? (A) 5 (B) 6 (C) (D) (E) 4 1 2 1 4 8 1 5 3 5. How many feet from the fulcrum must the heavier boy sit if the lighter boy is 8 feet from the fulcrum? (A) 10 (B) (C) (D) (E) 10 3 9 7 2 6 1 2 9 4 16 Camp Starlight has enough milk to feed 90 children for 4 days. How many teeth does this gear have? (A) 16 (B) 25 (C) 15 (D) 10 (E) 24 3.com . It is belted to a second pulley which revolves at 150 revolutions per minute.petersons. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 3 5 3 3 4 4. A gear with 20 teeth revolving at 200 revolutions per minute is meshed with a second gear turning at 250 revolutions per minute. 1.60 Chapter 4 Exercise 3 Work out each problem. A pulley revolving at 200 revolutions per minute has a diameter of 15 inches.4 (E) 2 www. (A) 11. If 10 of the children do not drink milk. Find the diameter. If 3 machines are broken and cannot be used. A field can be plowed by 8 machines in 6 hours.
solved by means of constant products. how many days will it take to put up the fence if two of the boys cannot participate? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) d –2 d (m – 2) m md m–2 m–2 md m(m – 2) d www. how many ounces of sugar should be used? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 13 23 24 14 15 1 2 3 12 2 3 1 5 3 2 5. in which case it is direct variation and should be solved by means of proportions. If 10 more chickens are added. what is the cost of p cases of soda if there are 12 cans in a case? (A) 12cp (B) (C) (D) (E) cp 12 12 cp 12 p c 12c p If 3 kilometers are equal to 1. A farmer has enough chicken feed to last 30 chickens for 4 days. If m boys can put up a fence in d days. Exercise 4 Work out each problem. In the following exercises. it is inverse variation. If the quantities change in opposite directions. If only 10 oz. A recipe calls for lb. 1.8 miles. of 4 sugar. 3 1 1 3 4.petersons. At c cents per can. of butter and 18 oz. how many days will the feed last? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.com . decide carefully whether each is an example of direct or inverse variation.4 3.Variation 61 In solving variation problems. you must decide whether the two quantities involved change in the same direction. how many kilometers are equal to 100 miles? (A) 60 (B) (C) (D) (E) 166 540 150 1 2 2 3 160. of butter are available. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
000 (C) $27.com . 2 4 7 28 3 3x x + 7 = 8 12 6. 10 1 2 3 2 4 2 3. ft. what will his annual income be that year? (A) $60.000 during the first 5 months of the year. how many days should the painting take? (A) (B) 1 3 1 3 2 3 2 4 1 Solve for x if a = 5. Weiss earned $12.petersons. The printed picture is to have its 2 longer dimension be 4 inches. b = 8.000 (B) $28. ft. Solve for x: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 6 1 5 2 1 6 2 2 6 3 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4. If five more boys join in before the work begins.000 (D) $30. A map is drawn to a scale of inch = 20 2 miles. and c = 3: (A) 5 (B) 20 (C) 2 (D) 3 (E) 6 1 a−3 b+2 = x 5c (C) (D) (E) 7. 3″ 1 8 3 3 " 8 3 " www. How many miles apart are two cities that 1 are 3 inches apart on the map? 4 A weight of 120 pounds is placed five feet from the fulcrum of a lever.62 Chapter 4 RETEST Work out each problem.000 (E) $28. 1. Ten boys agree to paint the gym in 5 days. A photograph negative measures 1 2 1 inches. 7 inches by 8 Mr. How long should the shorter dimension be? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 8 1 2 " 2 2 " 5. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. How far from the fulcrum should a 100 pound weight be placed in order to balance the lever? (A) 6 ft. ft. 70 130 65 1 32 2 35 4 ft. If his salary continues at the same rate.800 How many pencils can be bought for D dollars if n pencils cost c cents? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) nD c nD 100c 100D nc 100nD c nc 100 D 8.
Variation 63 9. how many revolutions does the smaller gear make in a minute? 1 (A) 13 3 (B) 3 (C) 300 (D) 120 (E) 30 10.com .petersons. A gear with 60 teeth is meshed to a gear with 40 teeth. How many gallons of paint must be purchased to paint a room containing 820 square feet of wall space. If the larger gear revolves at 20 revolutions per minute. if one gallon covers 150 square feet? (Any fraction must be rounded up.) (A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 7 (E) 8 www.
petersons.com . This is inverse variation. 8. 1 2 (C) The more dogs. (C) The more men.800 10. (B) We compare miles to months. (E) Cross multiply.64 Chapter 4 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. 9. 80 = 10x x=8 3. (E) Number of teeth times speed remains constant. www. 2x = 135 x = 67 4. 7. the fewer days. 5 12 = 7000 x 5x = 84. m ⋅ h = (m – 2) ⋅ x mh x= m–2 5. (C) We compare inches to miles. the fewer days. 20 · 6 = 24 · x 120 = 24x x=5 The rations will last 1 day less. (B) 2x(4) = 3(x + 5) 8x = 3x + 15 5x = 15 x=3 4 10 = x 20 6. 5 Cross multiply. 2·3=3·x 6 = 3x x = 2 weeks = 14 days (A) We compare apples to cents.000 x = 16. 2 2 = 5 25 x 5 (B) Weight times distance from the fulcrum remains constant. 90 · 3 = 50 · x 270 = 50x x=5 2 ft. x n = c d dx = nc nc x= d Cross multiply. (D) Number of machines times hours needed remains constant. 20 · 30 = x · 25 600 = 25x x = 24 2. This is inverse variation.
(A) We compare planes to passengers. (E) 32(x + 1) = 28(8) 32x + 32 = 224 32x = 192 x=6 (A) 9(y – 1) = 2y(3) 9y – 9 = 6y 3y = 9 y=3 3. (D) We compare books with cents. (D) We compare gallons to miles. (B) We compare inches to miles. www.84 5. 1 yd. 4 in. divide by 25.com . (C) We compare cents to miles. bc a Cross multiply. = 36 in. b d 2. Divide by a. Divide by p. 20 x = 425 1000 425 x = 20. (B) a c = Cross multiply.Variation 65 Exercise 1 1. 4. (C) 1 ft. D dollars is equivalent to 100D cents.petersons. 16 4 = 36 9 Exercise 2 1. 3 8 = 100 D x 3x = 800 D 800 D x= 3 2. To avoid large numbers. = 16 in. 25 5 = 15 3 3. 8 x = 5 115 5 x = 920 x = $1. 1 1 2 2 = 4 10 x 1 1 x = 22 2 2 x = 45 ad = bc d= 4. 000 17 x = 800 1 x = 47 17 Cross multiply. (D) The team won 25 games and lost 15. Cross multiply. r x = p m px = rm rm x= p Cross multiply. 5. Multiply by 2.
the fewer days. (B) Diameter times speed remains constant. This is inverse.66 Chapter 4 Exercise 3 1. 4 5. (C) The fewer boys.8 x = 300 18 x = 3000 2 x = 166 3 www. In p cases there will be 12p cans.com .8 100 1. 3 x = 1. the less sugar.petersons. (A) The more cases. 8·6=5·x 48 = 5x x=9 2. (B) Number of machines times hours needed remains constant. This is direct. the more days. (A) Number of teeth times speed remains constant. c x = 1 12 p x = 12cp (C) Number of children times days remains constant. 30 · 4 = 40 · x 40x = 120 x=3 2. 3 5 Exercise 4 1. the more miles. This is direct. 90 · 4 = 80 · x 80x = 360 1 x=4 2 3. (E) Weight times distance from fulcrum remains constant. 20 · 200 = x · 250 250x = 4000 x = 16 5. 80 · x = 60 · 8 80x = 480 x=6 4. 15 · 200 = x · 150 3000 = 150x x = 20 3. Change 12 10 = 18 x 12 x = 180 x = 15 3 lb. to 12 oz. This is direct. the more cents. (A) The more chickens. (E) The less butter. m ⋅ d = (m – 2) ⋅ x md =x m–2 4. This is inverse. (B) The more kilometers. We compare cents with cans.
The cost of n pencils is c dollars. This is inverse. 8. which means 6 gallons must be purchased www.Variation 67 Retest 1. 100 (E) Number of teeth times speed remains constant. x 1 = 820 150 Cross multiply. 10 · 5 = 15 · x 15x = 50 1 x=3 3 2. (B) We compare inches to miles. 5. (C) 2 7 1 1 2= 8 4 x 5 15 x= 2 2 5 x = 15 x = 3" Cross multiply.47. 000 x = 5 12 144. Multiply by c cx = nD 100 100 nD x= c 10. 000 = 5 x x = $28.petersons. 800 Cross multiply. (C) We compare gallons to square feet. 60 · 20 = 40 · x 1200 = 40x x = 30 x n Cross multiply. = c D 100 100 . (A) The more boys. Multiply by 2. = x 15 30 = 10 x x=3 6. 12. 1 1 3 2 = 4 20 x 1 x = 65 2 x = 130 Cross multiply. 3. 7. (A) Weight times distance from the fulcrum remains constant. 150 x = 820 x = 5. (D) We compare pencils to dollars. 4. Multiply by 2. (B) 3x(12) = 8(x + 7) 36x = 8x + 56 28x = 56 x=2 (D) 2 10 Cross multiply. the fewer days. 120 · 5 = 100 · x 600 = 100x x = 6 ft. (E) We compare dollars to months.com . 9.
.
06b (C) (D) (E) b 6 b . (A) .00 1 What is 62 % of 80? 2 (A) 5000 (B) 500 (C) 50 (D) 5 (E) .5% (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.004 4. 8.40 . How many sixteenths are there in 87 %? 2 (A) 7 (B) 8 (C) 10 (D) 12 (E) 14 What percent of 40 is 16? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 1 2 1 4. 5 6. 1. 80 is 40% of what number? (A) 3200 (B) 320 (C) 32 (D) 200 (E) 20 c is 83 % of what number? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 3 5c 6 6c 5 7c 8 8c 7 2c 3 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem.06 100 b 6 7.6b (B) .5 Find 6% of b.04 40. 9 2 9 20 9 200 9 2000 4. Write as a fraction: 4. .5 10 2 % as a decimal. 25 30 40 45 69 .0 . Circle the letter that appears before your answer.Percent 5 5. Write (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. Answers are at the end of the chapter.
6 (C) 88 (D) 70.5 (E) 91 10. Find 112% of 80. What percent of 60 is 72? (A) 105 (B) 125 (C) 120 (D) (E) 83 1 3 110 www.petersons. (A) 92 (B) 89.70 Chapter 5 9.com .
Example: 4 4 = ⋅ 100 % = 80% / 5 5 25 3 3 75 1 = ⋅ 100 % = % = 37 % / 8 8 2 2 2 20 www. it then becomes very easy to change a percent to an equivalent decimal or fraction.5% = = = 100 1000 200 To change a fraction to a percent. FRACTIONAL AND DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS OF PERCENTS Percent means “out of 100. Example: 5 . which is equivalent to or . therefore. we must reverse the above steps. Example: 62% = .4% means 3.25 or .4 out of 100 or .5 . This has the effect of putting the percent over 100 and then simplifying the resulting fraction.012 = 1. which is equal to .com .01c c% means c out of 100 or . we must move the decimal point two places to the left. which is equivalent to 4 4 100 100 5% means 5 out of 100 or To change a percent to a decimal. which is equivalent to 100 1 100 1 1 1 ⋅.27 = 27% .4 34 3.3% To change a percent to a fraction. which has the effect of moving the decimal point two places to the right.0025 % means out of 100 or 4 .032 To change a decimal to a percent.05 100 3.034 100 1000 c 1 ⋅c or . as we are dividing by 100. We multiply by 100. Example: 25% = 25 1 = 100 4 70 7 70% = = 100 10 5 1 . we must reverse the above steps.Percent 71 1.” If you understand this concept.62 .2% = .petersons. We multiply by 100 and insert the percent sign.2% .4% = . and insert the percent sign. we remove the percent sign and divide by 100.003 = .004 3. Example: .
1 .9 .83 20% 40% 60% 80% 1 2 1 37 % 2 1 62 % 2 1 87 % 2 .375 .000 = 3.com .8 . Then convert the decimal to a percent as explained on the previous page. PERCENT 50% 25% 75% 10% 30% 70% 90% 1 3 2 66 % 3 2 16 % 3 1 83 % 3 DECIMAL .66 .petersons.3 . Learning the values in the following table will make your work with percent problems much easier. as the denominator does not divide into 100.2% 125 3 75 250 250 ) 1 Certain fractional and decimal equivalents of common percents occur frequently enough so that they should be memorized. Example: .16 FRACTION 1 2 1 4 3 4 1 10 3 10 7 10 9 10 1 3 2 3 1 6 5 6 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 1 8 3 8 5 8 7 8 33 % .032 4 = 125 4.875 12 % www.72 Chapter 5 Some fractions do not convert easily.75 . Such fractions must be changed to decimals first by dividing the numerator by the denominator.7 . Divide to two places only.6 .125 .5 .47 8 1 = 17 8.4 .625 .2 .25 . unless it clearly comes out even in one or two additional places.33 .00 = 47 % 17 17 68 1 20 1 19 ) .
41 % 1 % as a decimal.0035 3. 3 1 % may be written as a decimal as 2 5 as an equivalent percent. 1.046% (D) 46% (E) 460% www. (A) 4.46% (C) . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.05 3.005 5.5 .petersons.05 13 20 17 20 17 10 19 20 17 2 41% 41.6% (B) .5 . 12 4. 2 3 Write (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) .Percent 73 Exercise 1 Work out each problem.0 50.0 .35 .6% 41 2 % 3 4.com .1% .035 . Write (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Write 4. 3.6 as a percent. 2 Write as a fraction in simplest form: 85%.
Example: Find 32% of 84. Proportion Method 32 x = 100 84 100 x = 2688 x = 26. As we look at different types of percent problems. it is usually easier to change the percent to an equivalent decimal or fraction and multiply by the given number. www.74 Chapter 5 2. FINDING A PERCENT OF A NUMBER Most percentage problems can be solved by using the proportion % part = .125 560 2 24 11 2 14.88 Example: Find 12 1 % of 112. 2 Proportion Method 1 2= x 100 112 100 x = 1400 x = 14 12 Decimal Method 112 × . it often yields unnecessarily large numbers that make for difficult computation. 100 whole Although this method will work.petersons. In finding a percent of a number. It really pays to memorize those fractional equivalents. we will compare methods of solution.32 168 252 26.com .32 and multiply.88 Decimal Method Change 32% to . 84 × .000 Fraction Method 1 1 Change 12 % to 2 8 14 1 ⋅ 112 = 14 8 Which method do you think is the easiest? When the fractional equivalent of the required percent is among those given in the previous chart. the fraction method is by far the least timeconsuming.
com . Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons.14 2 Find 16 % of 120.008 (E) .8 (C) . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 100s r rs 100 100r s r 100 s s 100r 1 2. 1.2814 (E) 28.Percent 75 Exercise 2 Work out each problem.16 (B) 1. What is % of 40? 5 (A) 8 (B) . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 20 2 200 16 32 www. What is 40% of 40? (A) .6 (C) 16 (D) 160 (E) 1600 What is 42% of 67? (A) 2814 (B) 281.4 (C) 2. 3. 5.0008 Find r% of s.08 (D) . 3 4.814 (D) .
76 Chapter 5 3. Are you convinced that the common fraction equivalents in the previously 3 2 3 given chart should be memorized? www. using decimal or fractional equivalents for the percents involved. Example: 7 is 5% of what number? Proportion Method 5 7 = 100 x 5 x = 700 x = 140 Equation Method 7 = . although this may again result in the unnecessary use of time.05 x 700 = 5 x 140 = x Example: 40 is 66 % of what number? Proportion Method 2 3 = 40 100 x 2 66 x = 4000 3 200 x = 4000 3 200 x = 12000 2 x = 120 66 x = 60 2 3 Equation Method 2 x 3 120 = 2 x 60 = x 40 = Just think of the amount of time you will save and the extra problems you will get to do if you know that 66 % is 2 and use the equation method. Then it will become evident that we divide the given number by the given percent to solve.com . It is often easier to translate the words of such a problem into an algebraic statement.petersons. FINDING A NUMBER WHEN A PERCENT OF IT IS GIVEN This type of problem may be solved using the proportion method.
4 (E) 8. 37 10 100 64 640 6400 (D) (E) 5.petersons.64 80 is 12 % of what number? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. 50% of what number is r? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 r 2 1 % of what number is 27? 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 72 1 10 8 5r 10r 2r 100r 90 101. 1 2 4. m is p% of what number? (A) (B) (C) mp 100 100 p m m 100 p p 100 m 100m p 2.com .25 216 www. 72 is 12% of what number? (A) 6 (B) 60 (C) 600 (D) 86. 1.Percent 77 Exercise 3 Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
If you have memorized the fractional equivalents 3 Time consuming long division is needed to find x = 16 of common percents. this may again result in the use of an unnecessary amount of time. simplify the resulting fraction.78 Chapter 5 4. It is often easier to put the part over the whole.com . this method requires only a few seconds. Example: What percent of 72 is 16? Proportion Method x 16 = 100 72 72 x = 1600 2 x = 22 % 9 Fraction Method 16 2 200 2 = ⋅ 100 = = 22 % 72 9 9 9 www. and multiply by 100.petersons. However. Example: 30 is what percent of 1500? Proportion Method x 30 = 100 1500 1500 x = 3000 x = 2% Fraction Method 30 3 1 = = ⋅ 100 = 2% 1500 150 50 Example: 12 is what percent of 72? Proportion Method x 12 = 100 72 72 x = 1200 Fraction Method 12 1 2 = = 16 % 72 6 3 2 %. TO FIND WHAT PERCENT ONE NUMBER IS OF ANOTHER This type of problem may also be solved using the proportion method.
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3.com . Circle the letter that appears before your answer. What percent of 48 is 48? (A) 1 (B) 10 (C) 100 (D) 48 (E) 0 What percent of y is x? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) x y x 100 y xy 100 100x y 100 y x 2.5 (E) 40 1 1 of 6 is what percent of of 60? 2 4 4. 4 is what percent of 80? (A) 20 (B) 2 (C) 5 (D) . 5. 1.Percent 79 Exercise 4 Work out each problem.petersons. 5 20 10 25 15 What percent of 96 is 12? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 16 8 1 3 1 2 2 3 37 8 12 1 2 www.
the same methods apply. using percents greater than 100.25 x 8000 = 125 x x = 64 Fraction Method 1 80 = 1 x 4 5 80 = x 4 320 = 5 x x = 64 Example: 40 is what percent of 30? Proportion Method x 40 = 100 30 30 x = 4000 1 x = 133 % 3 Fraction Method 40 4 1 1 = = 1 = 133 % 30 3 3 3 www.75 300 4200 6000 105. Therefore 150% will be equal to 100% + 50% or 1 . Example: Find 175% of 60 Proportion Method Decimal Method 60 175 x = 100 60 100 x = 10500 x = 105 Fraction Method × 1. 200% = 2. PERCENTS GREATER THAN 100 When the percentage involved in a problem is greater than 100.petersons. Remember that 100% = 1 1.com . 300% = 3 and so forth.80 Chapter 5 5.00 3 1 ⋅ 60 4 15 7 ⋅ 60 = 105 4 Example: 80 is 125% of what number? Proportion Method 125 80 = 100 x 125 x = 8000 x = 64 Decimal Method 80 = 1. Let us look at one 2 example of each previously discussed problem.
375 13. www. the number 2 should be multiplied by (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 137.1375 1 2. 36 is 150% of what number? (A) 24 (B) 54 (C) 26 (D) 12 (E) 48 What is 300% of 6? (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 12 (D) 18 (E) 24 What percent of 90 is 120? (A) 75 (B) (C) (D) (E) 133 125 120 1 1 3 1 3 4.Percent 81 Exercise 5 Work out each problem.5 13750 1. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 500 is 200% of what number? (A) 250 (B) 1000 (C) 100 (D) 750 (E) 300 To multiply a number by 137 %.75 .petersons. 3.com . 1. 5.
82 Chapter 5 RETEST Work out each problem.98 (D) 9.8 1 3 9.6 (E) 108 What is b% of 6? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3b 50 3 50b 50 b 3 50 3b b 150 6 8.75 75. 4 6. 4.5 12 Find 12% of 80.25%. 10. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. What is 140% of 70? (A) 9800 (B) 980 (C) . Write as a fraction in lowest terms: . 1 4 1 (B) 40 1 (C) 400 1 (D) 4000 1 (E) 25 3 Write % as a decimal. What percent of 12 is 16? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 133 125 75 80 1 1 4 www.0 .8 (E) 98 How many fifths are there in 280%? (A) 28 (B) 1. .com .096 (D) 960 (E) 9. 7. (A) 10 (B) .96 (C) .4 (C) 14 (D) 56 (E) 2. 1.075 . What percent of 12 is 2? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 600 1 2 2 16 3 2 6 3 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3.6 (B) 90 (C) 72 (D) 21.6 18 is 20% of what number? (A) 3.petersons. 5.0075 7. m is 62 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (A) 1 % of what number? 2 5m 8 8m 5 8m 5 8m 8 5m 2.
035 To change a percent 2 to a decimal.42 1 34 26 80 28. (B) r 100 r rs ⋅s = 100 100 r% = www. 5.002 .12 · 80 = 89.005 2 Exercise 2 1. To change a fraction to a percent.petersons.5% = .12 1.5 45 9 = = 100 1000 200 Exercise 1 1.004 5 2. 5.06b Divide by . 3. (A) 20 2 1 16 % = 3 6 4.06 · b = . (C) 4. move the decimal point two places to the left.40.0800 5.5% = . 9. (E) (D) (B) 1 7 14 87 % = = 2 8 16 16 2 = = 40% 40 5 2 5 2 ⋅ 40 = 16 5 2. 4. (C) 62 % = (B) 1 2 5 5 ⋅ 80 = 50 8 8 10 6% = . (E) 112% = 1. 4. 8. (B) 1 % = .com .2% = . (C) 40% = 8 7.14 3.5% = (D) 4.06 . 1 ⋅ 120 = 20 6 1 % = . 2.6 72 6 = = 120% 60 5 10. (E) To change a decimal to a percent.40x 200 = x (B) 1 5 83 % = 3 6 5 c= x 6 6c = 5 x 6c =x 5 (C) 12 3 ⋅ 100 = 125 2 = 41 % 3 3 6. (C) 67 ×.002 (C) 5 40 × .6 = 460% 5 25 (D) 80 = . move the decimal point two places to the right. Divide by 5. (B) 85% = 85 17 = 100 20 1 2 % = . multiply by 100.4% = .Percent 83 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. 3. (C) 3 % = 3. 4. Multiply by 6.
(E) m= p ·x 100 3.25 25 1 Exercise 4 4 1 5 1. 000 = 400 3 % = . 10.25% = 100 = 10. (D) 1 x=r 2 x = 2r Retest 1.20x 90 = x b 100 4. (D) 640 = x 3. (C) 137. (D) 300% = 3 6 · 3 = 18 (B) (A) 120 4 1 = = 133 % 3 90 3 3x = 216 x = 72 4. (C) (D) (E) .20. (C) 72 = . (C) = ⋅ 100 = 5% 80 20 2. (B) 1 of 6 =3 2 1 of 60 = 15 4 3 1 = = 20% 15 5 3. (A) 36 = 1 x 36 = 3 x 2 1 2 2.com . (A) 16 4 1 = = 133 % 12 3 3 www.0075 4 .12x 7200 = 12x x = 600 80 = 1 x 8 Exercise 5 1. (C) 1 5 62 % = 2 8 5 m = x Multiply by 8.40 · 70 = 98 (C) 280% = 280 28 14 = = 100 10 5 9. 3. (A) 3 x = 27 8 72 = 3x x = 24 2. 8 8m = 5 x Divide by 5. (A) b% = (B) b 100 50 ⋅6 = 3 3b 50 12 1 1 = = 12 % 96 8 2 48 = 1 = 100% 48 x 100 x y 4. (E) 2. 100m = px 100m =x p 500 = 2x 250 = x 5.5% = 1. (B) Divide by .12 . 8.75% = .petersons.375 5. (C) 2 1 2 = = 16 % 12 6 3 (E) 140% = 1.40 1.84 Chapter 5 Exercise 3 1. 5.12 · 80 = 9. 12% = . 8m =x 5 5.6 18 = . (D) y ⋅ 100 = 7. 4. 6.
15 (E) $4. If the firm 2 originally employed 120 workers.50 (C) $10. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. The Strauss Insurance Company laid off 20% of its employees one year and then increased its 1 staff by 12 % the following year. what was her total profit? (A) $350 (B) $1350 (C) $300 (D) $1050 (E) $100 The Fishman family income for one month is $2000. rather than buying an article marked at $90 with a discount of 35% then 10%? (A) $4.25 85 . What was the percent of decrease during this time? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 20 2 16 3 2. 37 45 40 95 19 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. A book dealer bought 100 books for $1250. and 10% for savings.65 (B) $1. 1. how many dollars are left for other expenses? (A) $1500 (B) $400 (C) $500 (D) $1600 (E) $600 The enrollment of Kennedy High School dropped from 1200 to 1000 over a threeyear period. Answers are at the end of the chapter. If 25% is spent for lodging. 25 200 2 How much money is saved by buying an article priced at $80 with a 40% discount. 6. what was the net change in staff over the twoyear period? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Decrease of 12 Increase of 15 Decrease of 9 Decrease of 24 Increase of 12 3. A baseball team won 50 of the first 92 games played in a season. 35% for food. If the season consists of 152 games.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 6 4.50 (D) $3. 5% for clothing. If she sold 30% of these at $10 each and the rest at $15 each. how many more games must the team 1 win to finish the season winning 62 % of 2 games played? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.
What percent of the total price was made up of options? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 56 36 64 18 9 1 4 Certain types of business situations are excellent applications of percent. How much must Mr.92 (C) $1. At Baker High. 3 out of every 4 graduates go on to college. 10. 5% of the next $3000. Study the examples on the following page carefully.20 (E) $32 9. a property owner pays school taxes at the rate of 2% of the first $1500 of assessed valuation. Of these. Williams pay in school taxes each year if his home is assessed at $8000? (A) $300 (B) $230 (C) $600 (D) $330 (E) $195 Jeffrey delivers newspapers for a salary of $20 per week plus a 4% commission on all sales. The basic sticker price on Mr. In Central City. Feldman’s new car was $3200. and 6% of the remainder.86 Chapter 6 7.92 (D) $39. 2 out of every 3 graduate from college. as they are problems you will encounter in everyday life as well as on these examinations.20 (B) $21.com . www. 3% of the next $2000. What percent of students graduating from Baker High will graduate from college? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 66 75 50 33 25 1 3 2 3 8. The options he desired cost an additional $1800. What was his income that week? (A) $19.petersons. One week his sales amounted to $48.
Circle the letter that appears before your answer. What was the percent of increase? (A) 100 (B) 50 (C) 200 (D) 300 (E) 150 During the preholiday rush.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 87 1. By what percent must it now decrease its sales staff to return to the usual number of salespersons? (A) 25 (B) (C) (D) (E) 33 20 40 75 1 3 2. Mrs. the percent of increase is 30 1 = = 25%. 100 1 1 = = 33 % 3 300 3 Example: The Sunset School dismisses 20% of its staff of 150 due to budgetary problems. (A) 4 (B) 8 (C) 12 (D) 16 (E) 20 4. Example: The number of automobiles sold by the Cadcoln Dealership increased from 300 one year to 400 the following year.000 to $27. (A) 9 (B) 10 (C) 90 (D) 15 (E) 25 The population of Stormville has increased from 80. Find the percent of increase.500. To increase by 30. By what percent must it now increase its staff to return to the previous level? Solution: 20% = 1 5 1 · 150 = 30 5 The school now has 150 – 30 or 120 employees. 3. www.com . Martin’s Department Store increased its sales staff from 150 to 200 persons. (A) 20 (B) 25 (C) 80 (D) 60 (E) 10 The value of Super Company Stock dropped from $25 a share to $21 a share. The Rubins bought their home for $30.000 in the last twenty years. 5. Morris receives a salary raise from $25.petersons. Find the percent of decrease. What was the percent of increase? Solution: There was an increase of 100. which must be compared to the original 300. 120 4 Exercise 1 Work out each problem.000 to 100. 1.000. Find the percent of increase.000 and sold it for $60. PERCENT OF INCREASE OR DECREASE The percent of increase or decrease is found by putting the amount of increase or decrease over the original amount and changing this fraction to a percent by multiplying by 100.
· 20 = $19. paid with cash. as students often look for the first answer they get without bothering to finish the problem.petersons.com . How much will a microwave oven marked at $400 cost if payment is made in cash? Solution: We can find 25% or 4 of $400. which will be deducted from the marked price to determine the sale price. while the second discount is figured on the intermediate price. $100. 5 1 19 = off. The danger in this method is that the amount of discount. marked at $25? Solution: The first discount is 20% or amount. it is shorter and easier to find 80% of the marked price directly. is sure to be among the multiplechoice answers. 100 20 20 1 4 . We then pay of $25 or $20. An additional 5% is given off this 5 5 www. then subtract $100 from $400 to get a cash price of $300. the first discount is figured on the marked price. In such cases. 75% = 3 and 3 of $400 is $300. the buyer pays 80% of the marked price. Example: Johnson’s Hardware Store is having a moving sale in which everything in the store is being marked down 20% with an additional 5% discount for paying cash. which is $100. DISCOUNT A discount is usually expressed as a percent of the marked price. Instead of first finding the amount of discount by finding 20% of the marked price and subtracting to find the sale price. It is safer.88 Chapter 6 2. What will be the net cost of a toaster. Example: A store offers a 25% discount on all appliances for paying cash. and easier. The net price is $19. If an article is sold at a 20% discount. to realize that a 25% discount means 75% must be paid. 4 4 1 Some problems deal with successive discounts.
The rate of discount is (A) 20% (B) 25% (C) 30% (D) (E) 33 % 40% 1 3 4. After pricing the home for sale by adding 25% of his expenses. How much is saved by buying a freezer marked at $600 with a discount of 20% rather than one marked at $600 with a discount of 10% then 10%? (A) $6 (B) $8 (C) $10 (D) $12 (E) $20 Mr.20 a box.50 (E) $8 3. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.20 2. 1. A television set listed at $160 is offered at a 12 1 % discount during a storewide sale.petersons.000 (B) $1500 (C) $0 (D) $5000 (E) $1200 Christmas cards are sold after Christmas for 90 cents a box instead of $1.20 $23. how much can Josh save by buying this set during the sale for cash? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. What did he make on the house? (A) $15. www. If an 2 additional 3% is allowed on the net price for payment in cash.20 $24. Pam pays $6 for a sweater after receiving a discount of 25%.com . Kaplan builds a home at a cost of $60. he offers a discount of 20% to encourage sales.80 $17.000.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 89 Exercise 2 Work out each problem. What was the marked price of the sweater? (A) $9 (B) $12 (C) $7 (D) $7. $24.36 $24.
How much does he earn in a week in which his sales amount to $1840? Solution: Find 5% of $1840 and add this amount to $100. she sent the company $792.05 $92. where he is paid $100 per week plus a 5% commission on all his sales. many companies pay their salespeople a percentage of the money the salespeople bring in. How much did she forward to the cosmetics company? Solution: We must first find the total amount of her sales by asking: 108 is 12% of what number? 108 = .90 Chapter 6 3. She keeps 12% of all money collected. One month she was able to keep $108. This is called a commission.petersons. COMMISSION In order to inspire sales. Example: Mr. Silver sells shoes at the Emporium.com . 1840 × . www.12x 10800 = 12x 900 = x If Audrey collected $900 and kept $108.00 + $100 = $192 Example: Audrey sells telephone order merchandise for a cosmetics company.
400 (C) $7800 (D) $7900 (E) $7700 4.000 (C) $80. Bobby sent $27 to the newspaper dealer for whom he delivers papers. If she sells 15 ads for $50 each. how much does she earn? (A) $30 (B) $40 (C) $45 (D) $18 (E) $450 Michael sells appliances and receives a salary of $125 per week plus a 5% commission on all sales over $750.500 (B) $23. She must pay the real estate agent who makes the sale 8% of the selling price. 3. 5.50 Mr. How much does he earn in a week in which his sales amount to $2130? (A) $69 (B) $294 (C) $106. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons. www. Janice receives a 6% commission for selling newspaper advertisements.488 (B) $75.600? (A) $79. At what price must she sell her home if she wishes to net $73.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 91 Exercise 3 Work out each problem.400 (E) $84.50 (D) $194 (E) $162. What was the amount of his sales in a month in which he earned a total salary of $802? (A) $23. Mitherz wishes to sell her home. How many papers did he deliver if they sell for 20 cents each? (A) 150 (B) 135 (C) 600 (D) 160 (E) 540 Mrs.000 (D) $82. 1.322 2. after deducting his 10% commission.com . Rosen receives a salary of $100 per month plus a commission of 3% of his sales.
making the sale price $66. he takes a loss. he adds a percent of this cost to what he paid to arrive at a selling price. Example: A radio sells for $40. he must add 10% of $60 or $6. 1. If a merchant sells an article for less than his cost. which yields a 33 % profit. www. During a special sale. then the $40 sales price represents 125% of his cost. PROFIT AND LOSS When a merchant purchases an item.petersons.92 Chapter 6 4. This amount is called his profit. A loss is figured as a percent of his cost in the same manner we figured a profit in the previous examples. 4 x = 80 3 1 1 3 4x =240 x = 60 If the cost was $60 and the dealer wishes to add 10% for profit. giving the dealer a 25% profit. What was his cost? Solution: If the dealer gets back all of his cost plus an extra 25%. 3 the profit is cut to 10%. What is the sale price of the handbag? Solution: $80 represents 133 % of the cost.25x = 40 125x = 4000 x = $32 Example: Joan’s Boutique usually sells a handbag for $80.com .
After using it for only a short time.20 3.80 $72 $79.20 $80 $84. What was the original price of the 3 ticket? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. At what price should it be offered for sale if the store offers customers a 10% discount but still wants to make a profit of 20% of the cost? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $64.50 (E) $125 Radio House paid $60 for a tape player.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 93 Exercise 4 Work out each problem. what percent is made on the cost? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. What was the cost of the gown to the dress shop? (A) $120 (B) $112. If a music store sells a clarinet at a profit of 20% based on the selling price. she sold it to a bike store at a 20% loss. thereby making a 25% profit.com .50 (C) $117. www. he finds he cannot go and sells the ticket to Judy for $10.50 (D) $187. At the last moment. $8. How much money did the bike store give Alice? (A) $24 (B) $96 (C) $144 (D) $100 (E) $108 Julie’s Dress Shop sold a gown for $150.66 $12 $11.petersons. which was a loss of 2 16 %. 20 40 25 80 none of these Alice bought a bicycle for $120. Steve buys a ticket to the opera. 1.33 $16.66 $15 4.
0000 1 4 1 www. This can be done in one step by finding 104% of $240.0725 12 0000 48 0000 1680 0000 $1740.com .000. 240 × 1.petersons.000 × . or value. 24.94 Chapter 6 5.60 Example: The Social Security tax is 7 %. Example: Broome County has a 4% sales tax on appliances.000. How much will Mrs. Grossman pay in a year if her salary is 4 $2000 per month? Solution: Her annual salary is 12(2000) or $24. Find 7 % of $24. TAXES Taxes are a percent of money spent. money earned. Steinberg have to pay for a new dryer marked at $240? Solution: Find 4% of $240 to figure the tax and add this amount to $240. How much must Mrs.04 960 24000 $249.
50 for new curtains.86 4. 3% of the next $2000. the current rate for school taxes is 7.75 (B) $49 (C) $57.5% of property value. How many dollars tax does he pay? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. If Mrs. Behr purchases a mink coat marked at $4000. what will be the total price for the coat. Find the tax on an income of $25. and 5% thereafter. including tax? (A) $320 (B) $4032 (C) $4320 (D) $4500 (E) $500 www.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 95 Exercise 5 Work out each problem.000 (D) $1250 (E) $105 The income tax in a certain state is figured at 2% of the first $1000. 4% of the next $3000. 1. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. s 100r rs 100s r 2.petersons. what was the marked price of the curtains? (A) $49. (A) $1150 (B) $1015 (C) $295 (D) $280 (E) $187 The sales tax in Nassau County is 7%. If Mrs.000. (A) $150 (B) $1500 (C) $15.000. In Manorville.25 (D) $50 (E) $45. 100rs rs 100 3. Eric pays r% tax on an article marked at s dollars. The sales tax on luxury items is 8%. Gutman paid a total of $53. Find the tax on a house assessed at $20.com .
100 (E) $8900 A car dealer purchased 40 new cars at $6500 each. 7.60 (B) $59.40 (E) $64 10. What are Mr. how many students do not study a language. cD 100 2.000 one year to $23.000? (A) $290 (B) $200 (C) $90 (D) $260 (E) $240 A salesman receives a commission of c% on a sale of D dollars. 8.000? (A) $18.90 (C) $120 (D) $116 (E) $111. What single discount is equivalent to two successive discounts of 15% and 10%? (A) 25% (B) 24. Cahn’s total earnings in a year in which his sales amounted to $160.000 (E) $260. 3% of the next $1000.000 the following year. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 5. 2% of the next $1000.000 (D) $344.000 (B) $60. What was the marked price? (A) $48. and 1% of any additional income. employees contribute to a welfare fund at the rate of 4% of the first $1000 earned. How much money is saved by buying a car priced at $6000 with a single discount of 15% rather than buying the same car with a discount of 10% then 5%? (A) $51. John buys a tape player for $54 after receiving a discount of 10%. Adams’ income rose from $20. 3.petersons. If 20% of the students study French.11 Green’s Sport Shop offers its salespeople an annual salary of $10. What will Mr. 100cD c 100 D 100c D 4.5% (C) 24% (D) 23. What was the cost if the profit is 10% of the cost? (A) $110 (B) $108. Morris contribute in a year in which he earns $20. (A) cD (B) (C) (D) (E) 9. What was his total profit? (A) $24. 15% study German.900 (B) $18. 25% study Spanish. What was the percent of increase? (A) 3% (B) 12% (C) 15% (D) 13% (E) 87% The enrollment at Walden School is 1400.com . 1. He sold 40% of them at $8000 each and the rest at $9000 each. A TV sells for $121. assuming each student may study only one language? (A) 30 (B) 42 (C) 560 (D) 280 (E) 420 6. Every employee receives a Christmas bonus of $500.600 (D) $20.5% (E) 23% www. Find his commission. and the rest study no language.30 (B) $30 (C) $780 (D) $87 (E) $900 At the Acme Cement Company.000 plus a 6% commission on all sales above $20.000 Mr.000.96 Chapter 6 RETEST Work out each problem.000 (C) $84.400 (C) $19.40 (C) $60 (D) $61. 10% study Italian.
65 – $48 = $4. 7. Percent of total that was options = 1800 9 = = 36% 5000 25 New number of employees = 96 12 1 1 %= 2 8 1 · 96 = 12 employees added to staff 8 Therefore. (D) 2% of $1500 = $30 3% of $2000 = $60 5% of $3000 = $150 6% of ($8000 – $6500) = 6% of $1500 = $90 Total profit $1350 – $1250 = $100 2.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 97 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. (C) 25% + 35% + 5% + 10% = 75% 100% – 75% = 25% for other expenses 25% = 3.com .65 net price $52. (B) He earns 4% of $48.50 net price 10% = 1 · 58.50 off 20 = $300 in sales 100 – 30 = 70 books at $15 each = $1050 in sales Total sales $300 + $1050 = $1350 $58.85 off 10 $52.50 = $5.petersons. www. (A) 40% = 2 5 2 · 80 = $32 off 5 3 · 100 = 30 books at $10 each 10 $48 net price 7 35% = 20 1 10 7 · 90 = $31.65 was saved.04 $1. 9. (E) 30% = 3 10 6. the final number of employees is 108. 10. (B) Total price is $5000.92. 1 4 1 · $2000 = $500 4 (B) Amount of decrease = 200 200 1 2 Percent of decrease = = = 16 % 1200 6 3 Total tax = $330 8. 48 × . (B) 62 1 5 %= 2 8 5 · 152 = 95 total wins needed 8 95 – 50 = 45 wins still needed 5. Net change is 120 – 108 = decrease of 12. (A) 20% = 1 5 1 · 120 = 24 employees laid off 5 graduate from college.92 Add this to his base salary of $20: $21. (C) 2 3 1 ⋅ = 3 4 2 = 50% of the students will 2 4.
3. Note: The amount saved is also the sum of the two discounts—$20 and $4.20 was saved. 5.000 20. (A) Amount of decrease = 50 50 1 Percent of decrease = = = 25% 200 4 1 · 60.000 added cost 4 Original sale price = $75. $160 – $135. (B) Amount of increase = $2500 Exercise 2 1.000 20% = 1 5 1 · 75. (C) 25% = 1 4 3. (A) 20% = 1 5 1 · 600 = $120 off 5 Percent of increase = [amount of increase/ original] 2500 1 = = 10% 25000 10 $480 net price 1 10% = 10 1 · 600 = $60 off 10 $540 first net price 1 · 540 = $54 off 10 2. 000 Percent of increase = 30. (E) $6 is 75% of the marked price. Rate of discount is figured on the original price.000 discount 5 Final sale price $60.com . 000 = = 25% 4 $486 net price Therefore.000 = $15. (D) 12 % = 1 2 1 8 1 · 160 = $20 discount 8 New sale price = $140 3% = 3 100 3 420 · 140 = 100 100 = $4. $6 is saved. 30 1 = = 25% 120 4 4. 000 1 Percent of increase = 80.000 Therefore he made nothing on the sale.80 final sale price Therefore. 2. 6= 3 x 4 24 = 3x x = $8 www.80 or $24.20 second discount $135.petersons.000 = 15. (B) Amount of increase = 20.20. (D) Amount of decrease = $4 4 16 = = 16% 25 100 Percent of decrease = 4. (A) Amount of increase $30. (B) Discount = 30 cents. 000 = 1 = 100% 5.98 Chapter 6 Exercise 1 1.000 30.
360. (A) 4 5 4 · 120 = $96 5 $150 is 125% of the cost. 5. $72 will be 90% of the marked price.05 = $69. (B) If his base salary was $100. 6 $10 is 10 = 5 x 6 60 = 5x x = 12 2. 750 × .00 If each paper sells for 20 cents.000 = 92x $80. thereby 5 20 1 80 or 150 papers. She earns 6% of this amount.000 = 125x x = $120 4. (D) He earns 5% of ($2130 .com .petersons.$750). which is $12 profit.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 99 Exercise 3 1.92x 7.600 = . his commission amounted to $702. (C) 16 2 1 %= 3 6 5 of the original price. 80% = 3.06 = $45. 3. 27 = . 73.200 = 3x $23. 72 = .90x 720 = 9x x = $80 1 www.90x 270 = 9x x = $30 30.400 = x 4.25x 15. making the cost $80.600 is 92% of the selling price. 702 is 3% of what? 702 = . (B) The store gave Alice 80% of the price she paid. = 4 = 25% (C) $73. he sold .00 2.03x 70. 150 = 1. (C) Work with an easy number such as $100 for the selling price. 1380 × .20 Exercise 4 1. (A) $27 is 90% of what he collected.00 Add this to his base salary of $125: $194. (C) She sells 15 ads at $50 each for a total of $750. 5.000 = x (D) The dealer wishes to make 20% or of 5 $60. The dealer wishes to clear $60 + $12 or $72. 20% = 1 5 1 · 100 = $20 profit.
100 Chapter 6 Exercise 5 1.075 100 000 1400 000 1500. 121 = 1.07x 5350 = 107x x = $50 4. (D) $53.000 2% of $1000 = $20 3% of $2000 = $60 4% of $3000 = $120 5% of ($25.000 = $950 Retest 1.000 × . 140. (B) 15% = $5100 net price 1 10% = 10 1 20 1 · $6000 = $600 off 10 $5400 first net price 5% = 1 · 5400 = $270 off 20 $5130 net price $5130 – $5100 = $30 was saved.000 – $260.10x 1210 = 11x x = $110 (A) He earns 6% of ($160.000 Total expense: $6500 · 40 = $260.70% = 30% study no language 30% = 3 10 3 20 3 · 1400 = 420 10 3 · $6000 = $900 off 20 6. (C) 40% = 2 5 2 · 40 = 16 cars at $8000 5 2. (E) (C) r% = r 100 r rs ·s= 100 100 = $216.06 $8400. (A) $121 is 110% of the cost. www.000 – $20.000 (C) Amount of increase = $3000 Percent of increase = 20.com .50 = 1.50 is 107% of the marked price each = $128. 2. 5.000 × .000 + $216. (B) 20. 3. 000 = 5.000 = $344. (A) Total tax = $1150 3.00 Add this to his base salary of $10.00 tax Total price $4320 4.000) = 5% of $19.000 in sales Total sales: $128.petersons.000 = $84.900.000 in sales 40 – 16 = 24 cars at $9000 each 53.000 and his Christmas bonus of $500: $18. Total profit: $344.000 4000 × .000).000 – $6. 3 = 15% 20 3000 (E) 20% + 25% + 10% + 15% = 70% 100% .08 320.
50 = $23.petersons. (D) Work with an easy number such as $100.Verbal Problems Involving Percent 101 7.5% 100 www. (B) (C) $54 is 90% of the marked price. 54 = 9 x 10 540 = 9x x = $60 10.50 net price $100 – $76.000 = $170 Total contribution = $260 c% = c 100 c cD ·D= 100 100 8. (D) 4% of $1000 = $40 3% of $1000 = $30 2% of $1000 = $20 1% of $17.50 total discount 23. 3 20 3 · $100 = $15 off 20 15% = $85 first net price 1 10% = 10 1 · $85 = $8.50 off 10 $76. 9.50 = 23.com .
.
and x + 4? (A) 3x (B) x (C) x . 6 oz. 2 3. 15 oz. what was her average rate. and 3 lb.Averages 7 5. (A) 4 lb. . Find the average of . The average of W and another number is A. 6 oz. Find the other number. 5 1 2 What is the average of x – 4.45 Valerie received test grades of 93 and 88 on her first two French tests. 6 lb. 2 (A) .4. x.04 (D) . (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 lb. and . 7 1 oz. 4 lb. 12 oz. 1.35 (C) . (A) A – W (B) A + W (C) (D) (E) 6. 1 (A – W) 2 1 (A + W) 2 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. for the entire trip? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 55 1 3 2 56 3 4. 43 oz. 7. Find the average weight of these packages. Find the average of the first ten positive even integers. 13 oz. What grade must she get on the third test to have an average of 92? (A) 95 (B) 100 (C) 94 (D) 96 (E) 92 4 lb. (A) 9 (B) 10 (C) 11 (D) 12 (E) 2.09 . in miles per hour. Answers are at the end of the chapter.1 (D) x + 1 (E) 3x – 8 3 1 2A – W The weight of three packages are 4 lb.31 (B) . 10 oz. 4 lb. 53 53 54 1 2 103 .4 (E) .. If Barbara drove for 4 hours at 50 miles per hour and then for 2 more hours at 60 miles per hour.
com . The average of any three consecutive even integers is the middle integer. www. Mark has an average of 88 on his first four math tests. (A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) I and III only (E) I. III. The average of any three consecutive multiples of 5 is the middle number. What is the average weekly salary paid to an employee? (A) $55 (B) $190 (C) $240 (D) $200 (E) $185 Which of the following statements are always true? I. II. II. and III 10.petersons. Mr.104 Chapter 7 8. What grade must he earn on his fifth test in order to raise his average to 90? (A) 92 (B) 94 (C) 96 (D) 98 (E) 100 9. Maron employs three secretaries at a salary of $140 per week and five salespeople at a salary of $300 per week. The average of any three consecutive odd integers is the middle integer.
Example: Find the average of the first 40 positive even integers. find the sum of all the numbers and divide this sum by n. they must all be written as fractions or all as decimals. SIMPLE AVERAGE Most students are familiar with the method for finding an average and use this procedure frequently during the school year. Solution: 12 + 17 61 3)90 30 When the numbers to be averaged form an evenly spaced series. 1 2 1 .575 Find the average of 87 %. .com . the average will be half way between the 20th and 21st even integers.25 + .petersons. it is no harder to find the average of 100 evenly spaced terms than it is of 40 terms.6 4 www. there will be no middle number.6 3)1. To average fractions and decimals.Averages 105 1. the average is halfway between the two middle numbers. The 20th even integer is 40 (use your fingers to count if needed) and the 21st is 42. be sure the numbers being added are all of the same form or in terms of the same units.875 . Example: Solution: Rewrite each number as a decimal before adding.725 . Example: Find the average of 12. The above concept must be clearly understood as it would use up much too much time to add the 40 numbers and divide by 40. the average is simply the middle number. Using the method described. In this case. and 61. If we are finding the average of an even number of terms. To find the average of n numbers. and . In finding averages. 17. Solution: Since these 40 addends are evenly spaced. so the average of the first 40 positive even integers that range from 2 to 80 is 41.
4a. Find the average of a. Find the average of .073 Find the average of the first 5 positive integers that end in 3. (A) 190 (B) 192 (C) 195 (D) 198 (E) 180 3 4.75 (C) .075 (E) . 1.49 . 4 (A) . 3a.com . and 195 pounds. 2 3 4 2. www. 5. and 80%. 3. and .72 (B) . Circle the letter that appears before your answer. (A) 3a5 (B) 3a (C) 2. .8a5 (E) 3 Find the average of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 9 13 36 1 27 13 12 1 3 1 1 1 . .106 Chapter 7 Exercise 1 Work out each problem.8a (D) 2.petersons. 200. 185. 2a. Find the average weight of these players. 210.78 (D) . (A) 3 (B) 13 (C) 18 (D) 23 (E) 28 The five men on a basketball team weigh 160. and 5a.
What was the high temperature on the seventh day if the average high for the week was 84°? (A) 79° (B) 85° (C) 81° (D) 77° (E) 76° If the average of five consecutive integers is 17.com . 92°. this method is usually the fastest. M–X–Y M–X+Y 5. and another number is M. (A) 17 (B) 18 (C) 19 (D) 20 (E) 21 4. What average must he have in his senior year to leave high school with an average of 92? (A) 92 (B) 93 (C) 94 (D) 95 (E) 96 The average of X. 82°. 12 is 14 units below 26. That is. Y. 1. find the other number. his sophomore year was 94. (A) x – 3 (B) 2x – 3 (C) 3x – 3 (D) –3 (E) 3x + 3 On consecutive days. TO FIND A MISSING NUMBER WHEN AN AVERAGE IS GIVEN In solving this type of problem. we presently have 26 units (24 + 2) above 26 and only 14 units below 26. Therefore the missing number must be 12 units below 26. average = Example: The average of four numbers is 26. Dick’s average for his freshman year was 88. the high temperature in Great Neck was 86°. Therefore. find the fourth number. 50 is 24 units above 26. Find the missing number.Averages 107 2. and his junior year was 91. 12. 80°. 2. If one of the numbers is x + 3. making it 14. The average of two numbers is 2x. (A) 3M – X + Y (B) 3M – X – Y (C) (D) (E) M + X +Y 3 3. and 81°. it is easiest to use an algebraic equation that applies the definition of average. Exercise 2 Work out each problem. Solution: 50 + 12 + 28 + x = 26 4 50 + 12 + 28 + x = 104 90 + x = 104 x = 14 sum of terms number of terms An alternative method of solution is to realize that the number of units below 26 must balance the number of units above 26. When the numbers are easy to work with. and 28. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons. www. 90°. Just watch your arithmetic. find the largest of these integers. 28 is 2 units above 26. If three of the numbers are 50.
what was the average grade for this group of students? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) P+Q M+N PQ M+N MP + NQ M+N MP + NQ P+Q M+N P+Q 2.9 (C) 57. During the remaining six weeks of vacation. they must be given the appropriate weight. in miles per hour. which it is.8 In the Linwood School. Find his average rate for the entire trip.50 (D) $83. 3.33 (E) $82 If M students each received a grade of P on a physics test and N students each received a grade of Q.petersons. For example. his average would not be the average of 80 and 90. Find the average yearly salary of these teachers. 80.com .025 4. Danny worked at a camp earning $50 per week. five teachers earn $15. www. During the first four weeks of summer vacation.000 per year.5 (B) 56.000 per year. Martin drove for 6 hours at an average rate of 50 miles per hour and for 2 hours at an average rate of 60 miles per hour.108 Chapter 7 3.000 (C) $17. 6 girls weigh 120 pounds each. and 90. and 10 girls weigh 116 pounds each. three teachers earn $17. 5. In general. and one teacher earns $18. (A) $16.1 (D) 58. What was his average weekly wage for the summer? (A) $80 (B) $75 (C) $87. 80. but rather the average of 80. What was his average rate. 1. Arthur drove for three hours at 60 miles per hour and for 4 hours at 55 miles per hour. What is the average weight of these girls? (A) 120 (B) 118 (C) 121 (D) 122 (E) 119 In driving from San Francisco to Los Angeles.000 (D) $16. his average rate should be closer to 50 than to 60. for the entire trip? (A) 57. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.448 (E) $16. average rate can always be found by dividing the total distance covered by the total time spent traveling. 80. Exercise 3 Work out each problem. if a student received four grades of 80 and one of 90. he worked as a stock boy earning $100 per week. Solution: 6 ( 50 ) + 2 ( 60 ) 8 = 300 + 120 420 1 = = 52 8 8 2 Since he drove many more hours at 50 miles per hour than at 60 miles per hour. In a certain gym class.000 per year. Example: Mr. 8 girls weigh 125 pounds each.2 (E) 57.667 (B) $16. WEIGHTED AVERAGE When some numbers among terms to be averaged occur more than once.
and another number is S. Q.petersons. 2. 6′ 11″.43 (E) $5. (A) I only (B) II only (C) III only (D) I and III only (E) I. (A) 7.com . The average of the first 4 positive integers that end in 2 is 17. x + 1. 6′ 7″. and 6 cans contained $7. (A) $6. The average of the first ten positive integers is 5. The students of South High spent a day on the street collecting money to help cure birth defects.5 II. 2 3 1 .82 The heights of the five starters on the Princeton basketball team are 6′ 6″.Averages 109 RETEST Work out each problem.5 (B) 13 (C) 14 (D) 15 (E) 14. What grade must he earn on the fourth test to have an average of 80 on these four tests? (A) 90 (B) 93 (C) 94 (D) 89 (E) 96 The average of 2P. The average of the first twenty odd integers is 10.32 20% 1 4 Andy received test grades of 75. and 70 on three French tests. (A) S – 2P – 3Q (B) S – 2P + 3Q (C) 3S – 2P + 3Q (D) 3S – 2P – 3Q (E) S + 2P – 3Q 8. 14 cans contained $6. and 7′. 25%. In counting up the collections. 1. Find the average height of these men. and 3x + 8? (A) 6x + 6 (B) 2x .80 each. 3Q.14 (B) $7.5 What is the average of 2x .3. II. and S. . Which of the following statements is always true? I. 7.00 each.4 Find the average of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4. Represent the third number in terms of P. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6′ 8 ″ 6′ 9″ 6′ 9 ″ 3 5 1 6′ 9 ″ 5 1 6′ 9 ″ 2 1 5 3.26 (D) $6.2 (C) 2x + 4 (D) 2x + 2 (E) 2x . and . Find the average amount contained in each of these cans. III. 5 6. 82.50 each.09.20 (C) $6. and III www. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 5. 6′ 9″. Find the average of the first 14 positive odd integers.18 . they found that 10 cans contained $5.
com . What must be her average monthly salary for each of the next 8 months so that her average monthly salary for the year is $350? (A) $400 (B) $380 (C) $390 (D) $375 (E) $370 20 27 1 3 www. Mindy’s average monthly salary for the first four months she worked was $300. Karen drove 40 miles into the country at 40 miles per hour and returned home by bus at 20 miles per hour.petersons.110 Chapter 7 9. What was her average rate in miles per hour for the round trip? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 30 1 2 2 26 3 25 10.
49 = .com . (A) 93 is 1 above 92. (E) The average of any three numbers that are evenly spaced is the middle number. 15 oz. 18. 20. 29 oz.petersons. 2.4 Exercise 1 1. 23. = = 4 lb.7 3 = . the average is the average of the two middle numbers. 13lb. (D) . (B) 1 1 1 6 4 3 13 + + = + + = 2 3 4 12 12 12 12 1 3 5. so the average is the middle number. she needs another 3 points above 92. 43. (E) W+x =A 2 4. 4. 6. So far. Thus. (D) The integers are 3. 14. 5. 4.25 . or 11. Mark is 8 points below 90 after the first four tests. (C) 4 lb. 13 oz.4 3) 1. (A) 160 + 185 + 210 + 200 + 195 = 950 950 = 190 5 3. 6 lb. she has 1 point above 92 and 4 points below 92. (B) These numbers are evenly spaced. 3a.4 = .2 . 10 oz. (B) These numbers are evenly spaced. 23. the average is the middle integer. 3 3 7. www. 3. making a required grade of 95.80 3)2.09 = .3 1 = . 16. 10. Since these are evenly spaced. 12lb.Averages 111 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. To divide this sum by 3. 12. 13 lb. 29oz. he needs a 98 to make the required average of 90. 10. 6 oz. Since these are evenly spaced. Therefore. 13. 10 and 12. 33. (C) The integers are 2.75 4 80% = . so the average is the middle number x. 88 is 4 below 92.5 2 . (C) 3(140 ) = 420 8)1920 240 5 ( 300 ) = 1500 9. (B) 4 ( 50 ) = 200 2 ( 60 ) = 120 6)320 53 1 3 8. multiply by 13 1 13 ⋅ = 12 3 36 W + x = 2A x = 2A – W 6. (D) Since 88 is 2 below 90. 45oz. + 3 lb. (B) . 8.75 2.
since the five integers are consecutive and the average is. Therefore. the middle number. 9)144. 82° is 2 below. 91 is 1 below 92. (C) 4 ( 55) = 220 7)400 1 57 . (A) 5. www. making the required grade 95. the missing term is 7° below the average. (B) 5 (15. he has 5 points below 92 and only 2 above. 000 ) = 18. (B) X +Y + x =M 3 Exercise 3 1. 17. 000 ) = 51. 90° is 6 above. 000 1 (18. 92° is 8 above. 16. 7 ( x + 3) + n = 2 x 2 x + 3 + n = 4x n = 3x – 3 which is 57.112 Chapter 7 Exercise 2 1. 6 (100 ) = 600 4 ( 50 ) = 200 10)800 80 5.1 to the nearest tenth.petersons. (D) 88 is 4 below 92. 80° is 4 below. he needs another 3 points above 92. The numbers are 15. 000 ) = 75. (D) 86° is 2 above the average of 84. 000 16. (C) X + Y + x = 3M x = 3M – X – Y 3. So far. 000 3(17. (A) 8 (125) = 1000 24)2880 120 3( 60 ) = 180 6 (120 ) = 720 10 (116 ) = 1160 2. 2. 000 4. and 81° is 3 below. 94 is 2 above 92. 3. and 19. 18. So far. there are 16° above and 9° below. (C) M(P) = MP N(Q) = NQ MP + NQ Divide by the number of students. therefore. (C) 17 must be the middle integer. or 77°. 000 4. Therefore.com . M + N.
(C) I.80 ) = $46.80 30)$187. (D) 2 P + 3Q + x =S 3 2 P + 3Q + x = 3S x = 3S – 2 P – 3Q 10.09 3). II. thus making the required www. The first four positive integers that end in 2 are 2. 13. So far. The average of the first twenty positive integers is 10. 15. 7. 80 2 or 26 miles per 3 3 4. he is 15 points below and 2 points above 80. 70 is 10 below 80. Therefore.20 5 25% = . 12. 3. and 32. Their average is 17. 21.26 average of $350.25 . he needs another 13 points above 80. (C) 10 ( $5.Averages 113 Retest 1. (D) Since $300 is $50 below $350. her salary for each of the next 8 months must be salary $375. (B) 9. or 14.18 7.petersons. 17. 8. (C) Karen drove for 1 hour into the country and returned home by bus in 2 hours. 6.5.com . (B) 75 is 5 below 80. 23.50 ) = $91 6 ( $7. Therefore. (B) 6′6″ + 6′7″ + 6′11″ + 6′9″ + 7′ = 31′33″ = 33′9″ 33′9″ = 6′9″ 5 2.09 = . 22. the average is the average of the two middle numbers 13 and 15.00 ) = $50 14 ( $6.5. 19. 11.3 x+ 1 +3x + 8 6x + 6 6x + 6 = 2x + 2 3 1 = . (D) 2x . or 93. $200 or $25 above the 8 5. Since the total distance traveled was 80 miles. The average of the first ten positive integers is 5. 3. III. 5. (C) The integers are 1. Mindy’s salary for the first four months is $200 below $350. Since these are evenly spaced. 9. 82 is 2 above 80.80 $6. her average rate for the round trip was hour. 25. 27.54 .
.
Answers are at the end of the chapter. divided by the product of (–18) and – 3 . the sum is (A) –10 (B) +10 (C) –24 (D) –2 (E) +2 4. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. The product of (–3)(+4) – 2 – 3 is (A) –1 (B) –2 (C) +2 (D) –6 (E) +6 When the product of (–12) and + 4 is 1 1 1 3.Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 8 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. the quotient is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) +2 –2 + 1 2 1 – 2 2 – 3 1 Solve for y: 7x – 2y = 2 3x + 4y = 30 (A) 2 (B) 6 (C) 1 (D) 11 (E) –4 Solve for x: x + y = a x–y=b (A) a + b (B) a – b (C) (D) (E) 1 (a + b) 2 1 ab 2 1 (a – b) 2 6. d –b ac d –b a+c d –b a–c b–d ac b–d a–c 2. Solve for x: ax + b = cx + d (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. When +4 is added to –6. 1. 115 .
petersons.116 Chapter 8 7. Solve for x: 4x2 – 2x = 0 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 only 2 9. Solve for x: x2 – 4x – 21 = 0 (A) 7 or 3 (B) –7 or –3 (C) –7 or 3 (D) 7 or –3 (E) none of these 10.com . 0 only – 1 only 2 Solve for x: x + 1 – 3 = –7 (A) 15 (B) 47 (C) 51 (D) 39 (E) no solution 1 or 0 2 1 – or 0 2 8. Solve for x: x 2 + 7 – 1 = x (A) 9 (B) 3 (c) –3 (D) 2 (E) no solution www.
Example: Find the following products: (+4)(+7) = +28 (–4)(–7) = +28 (+4)(–7) = –28 (–4)(+7) = –28 Division: If the signs are the same. Example: Subtract the following: +4 +7 –3 –4 –7 +3 –4 +7 –11 +4 –7 +11 Multiplication: If there is an odd number of negative factors. SIGNED NUMBERS The rules for operations with signed numbers are basic to successful work in algebra. add the magnitudes of the numbers and keep the same sign. Example: Add the following: +4 +7 +11 –4 –7 –11 –4 +7 +3 +4 –7 –3 Subtraction: Change the sign of the number to be subtracted and proceed with the rules for addition. the following rules. Addition: To add numbers with the same sign. Example: Divide the following: +28 = +7 +4 –28 = +7 –4 –28 = –7 +4 +28 = –7 –4 www. the product is negative. the quotient is positive. and can apply. An even number of negative factors gives a positive product. subtract the magnitudes of the numbers and use the sign of the number with the greater magnitude. Remember that subtracting is really adding the additive inverse. Be sure you know.Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 117 1.com . If the signs are different. the quotient is negative. To add numbers with different signs.petersons.
0°. At 8 a. (A) –16 (B) +16 (C) –192 (D) +192 (E) –98 4.petersons.118 Chapter 8 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. and –8°. If the temperature rose 7 degrees during the next hour. The temperatures reported at hour intervals on a winter evening were +4°. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1286 feet below sea level.m.288 feet (C) 28. the highest point is Mount Everest.716 feet (B) 30.284 feet Find the product of (–6)( –4)( –4) and (–2). (A) +15 (B) +25 (C) –65 (D) –35 (E) +35 3.com . www. x = –10.284 feet (D) 30. what was the thermometer reading at 9 a.002 feet.m. the temperature was –4°.? (A) +11° (B) –11° (C) +7° (D) +3° (E) –3° In Asia. and y = 5. –5°. while the lowest point is the Dead Sea.198 feet (E) 27. –3° Evaluate the expression 5a – 4x – 3y if a = –2. (A) –10° (B) –2° (C) +2° (D) (E) 5. –2 1 ° 2 2. 1. with an altitude of 29. What is the difference in their elevations? (A) 27. Find the average temperature for these hours. –1°.
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 119 2. the basic steps are the same. That is.3x + . Remember that whenever a term crosses the equal sign from one side of the equation to the other. Collect all terms containing the unknown for which you are solving on the same side of the equal sign. 1. If there are fractions or decimals. 2. Remove any parentheses by using the distributive law. 30x + 15 = 165 30x = 150 x=5 2 1 x – 10 = x + 15 3 4 Example: Solve for x: ax – r = bx – s Solution: ax – bx = r – s x(a – b) = r – s x= Example: Solve for x: 6x – 2 = 8(x – 2) Solution: 6x – 2 = 8x – 16 14 = 2x x=7 r–s a–b www. Determine the coefficient of the unknown by combining similar terms or factoring when terms cannot be combined. it must change its sign. 4. Example: Solve for x: 5x – 3 = 3x + 5 Solution: 2x = 8 x=4 Example: Solve for x: Solution: Multiply by 12. remove them by multiplication. Whether an equation involves numbers or only letters. SOLUTION OF LINEAR EQUATIONS Equations are the basic tools of algebra. 3.com .65 Solution: Multiply by 100. 8x – 120 = 3x + 180 5x = 300 x = 60 Example: Solve for x: . it must pay a toll. 5.15 = 1.petersons. Divide both sides of the equation by the coefficient. The techniques of solving an equation are not difficult.
petersons.5 (B) 52 (C) 1. – 1 –2 2 48 14 6 1 2 1 1 y+6= y 8 4 Solve for y: www.02(x – 2) = 1 (A) 2.com . 1. Solve for x: 3x – 2 = 3 + 2x (A) 1 (B) 5 (C) –1 (D) 6 (E) –5 Solve for a: 8 – 4(a – 1) = 2 + 3(4 – a) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. Solve for x: .5 (D) 51 (E) 6 Solve for x: 4(x – r) = 2x + 10r (A) 7r (B) 3r (C) r (D) 5. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 3 7 – 3 4.5r (E) 2 r 1 3 2. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.120 Chapter 8 Exercise 2 Work out each problem. 5.
both y coefficients will have the same magnitude.Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 121 3. we stop here.5 1 y = –. Example: Solve for x: 7x + 5y = 15 5x – 9y = 17 Solution: Since we wish to solve for x. This can be done by multiplying the top equation by 9 and the bottom equation by 5. it is necessary to work with two equations simultaneously. If they had the same signs. we can eliminate y by adding the two equations. we have 63x + 45y = 135 25x – 45y = 85 88x = 220 x= 220 1 =2 88 2 1 for x in either equation and solve the resulting equation for y.com . Adding. we would like to eliminate the y terms.5 + 5y = 15 5y = –2. adx + bdy = dr bcx – bdy = bs adx + bcx = dr + bs Factor out x to determine the coefficient of x. always be sure to have the terms containing the unknowns on one side of the equation and the remaining terms on the other side. When working with simultaneous equations. x(ad + bc) = dr + bs x = dr + bs ad + bc www. Multiplying the first by 9.petersons. we would eliminate by subtracting the two equations. we would now substitute 2 7(2. we have 63x + 45y = 135 Multiplying the second by 5. Remember that multiplying all terms in an equation by the same constant does not change its value. This can be done by multiplying one or both equations by suitable constants in order to make the coefficients of one of the unknowns the same. 2 Since we were only asked to solve for x. we have 25x – 45y = 85 Since the y terms now have opposite signs.5) + 5y = 15 17. In doing this.5 or – 2 Example: Solve for x: ax + by = r cx – dy = s Solution: Multiply the first equation by d and the second by b to eliminate the y terms by addition. resulting in an equation with one unknown that can be solved by the methods of the previous section. The unknown can then be removed by adding or subtracting the two equations. SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS IN TWO UNKNOWNS In solving equations with two unknowns. If we were asked to solve for both x and y. The object is to eliminate one of the unknowns.
(A) 1 (B) –2 (C) –1 (D) 2 (E) 0 5. find y.2 .5 (E) 10 If x + y = –1 and x – y = 3. 1. 2x + 3y = 12b 3x – y = 7b –b www.petersons. 2. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. (A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 6. 3.6x + . If 2x = 3y and 5x + y = 34.com .2y = 1. Solve for x: x – 3y = 3 2x + 9y = 11 (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5 (E) 6 Solve for x: .1 (A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 30 (D) 10 (E) 11 Solve for y: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7 b 2b 3b 1 2 7 1 7 4.122 Chapter 8 Exercise 3 Work out each problem. find y.2y = 2.5x – .
either factor may be set equal to 0. we have 4 · 2 . or x = ±2 2 www. From these two linear equations. even though these roots may be equal. and c are integers. Example: 6x2 – 8x = 0 Solution: Factor out a common factor of 2x.petersons.Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 123 4. we have an incomplete quadratic equation. x2 = 8 x=± 8 Simplifying the radical. ax2 + bx + c can always be factored.com . we find the two roots of the given quadratic equation to be x = 0 and x = –5. 2x = 0 3x – 4 = 0 x=0 3x = 4 x= 4 3 4 . At the level of this examination. where a. which can still be solved by factoring and will still have two roots. A complete quadratic equation is of the form ax2 + bx + c = 0. Remember that the difference of two perfect squares can always be factored. QUADRATIC EQUATIONS In solving quadratic equations. with one factor being the sum of the two square roots and the second being the difference of the two square roots. x(x + 5) = 0 If the product of two factors is 0. this cannot be solved by factoring. Example: x2 – 8 = 0 Solution: Since 8 is not a perfect square. giving x = 0 or x + 5 = 0. This equation could also have been solved by factoring x2 – 9 into (x + 3)(x – 3) and setting each factor equal to 0. 2x(3x – 4) = 0 Set each factor equal to 0 and solve the resulting linear equations for x. 3 The roots of the given quadratic are 0 and Example: x2 – 9 = 0 Solution: x2 = 9 x=±3 Remember there must be two roots. Example: x2 + 5x = 0 Solution: Factor out a common factor of x. there will always be two roots. b. If b and/or c is equal to 0.
we would have found 16x2 = 25 x2 = 25 16 5 x=± 4 Example: x2 + 6x + 8 = 0 Solution: (x + 2)(x + 4) = 0 If the last term of the trinomial is positive. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 4. If the middle term is also positive. we have (4x – 5) (4x + 5) = 0 x=± 5 4 Setting each factor equal to 0. Solve for x: x2 – 8x – 20 = 0 (A) 5 and –4 (B) 10 and –2 (C) –5 and 4 (D) –10 and –2 (E) –10 and 2 Solve for x: 25x2 – 4 = 0 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 4 and – 25 25 2 2 and – 5 5 2 only 5 2 – only 5 3. Setting each factor equal to 0. Solve for x: x2 – 19x + 48 = 0 (A) 8 and 6 (B) 24 and 2 (C) –16 and –3 (D) 12 and 4 (E) none of these Solve for x: 3x2 = 81 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 9 3 ±9 3 3 3 ±3 3 ±9 5. 1. since the last two terms multiply to a positive product.com . we have If we had solved without factoring. none of these www. To give –2 as a middle coefficient.124 Chapter 8 Example: 16x2 – 25 = 0 Solution: Factoring.petersons. both factors must be positive since they also add to a positive sum. the numbers must be –5 and +3. both binomial factors must have the same sign. we have x = –4 or x = –2 Example: x2 – 2x – 15 = 0 Solution: We are now looking for two numbers that multiply to –15. (x – 5)(x + 3) = 0 This equation gives the roots 5 and –3. Solve for x: 6x2 – 42x = 0 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7 only –7 only 0 only 7 and 0 –7 and 0 2. Exercise 4 Work out each problem. therefore they must have opposite signs.
Example: x2 – 7 + 1 = x Solution: First get the radical alone on one side. In squaring each side of an equation. is 4. which is true. x2 – 7 = x – 1 x2 – 7 = x2 – 2x + 1 – 7 = – 2x + 1 2x = 8 x=4 Checking. Solve the resulting equation. or positive. Remember that all solutions to radical equations must be checked.Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 125 5. which is not true. not –4. Example: x –3 = 4 Solution: x – 3 = 16 x = 19 Checking. therefore. The entire side of the equation must be multiplied by itself. Then square both sides to eliminate the radical sign. which is true. Example: x – 3 = –4 Solution: x – 3 = 16 x = 19 Checking. square root only. we have 9 + 1 = 4 3 + 1 = 4. EQUATIONS CONTAINING RADICALS In solving equations containing radicals. we have 16 = –4. we have 16 = 4.com . www. since the radical sign means the principal. it is important to get the radical alone on one side of the equation. then square. as squaring both sides may sometimes result in extraneous roots. do not make the mistake of simply squaring each term. this equation has no solution.petersons.
5 (B) 4 (C) 10 (D) 5 (E) no solution Solve for x: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) x 2 – 35 = 5 – x 4. 10 20 30 40 no solution 6 –6 3 –3 no solution www. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1.126 Chapter 8 Exercise 5 Work out each problem. 3. 5.petersons.com . Solve for y: 26 = 3 2y + 8 (A) 6 (B) 18 (C) 3 (D) –6 (E) no solution Solve for x: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2x =4 5 2. Solve for y: 2y + 11 = 15 (A) 4 (B) 2 (C) 8 (D) 1 (E) no solution Solve for x: 4 2 x – 1 = 12 (A) 18.
Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 127 RETEST Work out each problem. Solve for x: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. Solve for x: 2 x = –10 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 25 –25 5 –5 no solution www. Solve for x: 8x2 + 7x = 6x + 4x2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) – 0 and 0 3.petersons. –3 +3 –27 +27 – 1 3 1 . 1. ±1 1 –1 2 no solution 10. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 0 and – 1 4 none of these 8. the result is (A) +15 (B) –1 (C) –9 (D) +9 (E) +1 The product of – 2 (–4)(+12) – 6 is (A) 2 (B) –2 (C) 4 (D) –4 (E) –12 When the sum of –4 and –5 is divided by the product of 9 and – (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4. When –5 is subtracted from the sum of –3 and +7. Solve for x: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3x + 2y = 5a + b 4x – 3y = a + 7b a+b a–b 2a + b 17a + 17b 4a – 6b 1 4 1 4 2. 1 1 7. Solve for x: x2 + 9x – 36 = 0 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) –12 and +3 +12 and –3 –12 and –3 12 and 3 none of these x2 + 3 = x + 1 Solve for x: 7b + 5d = 5x – 3b (A) 2bd (B) 2b + d (C) 5b + d (D) 3bd (E) 2b Solve for y: 2x + 3y = 7 3x – 2y = 4 (A) 6 (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 2 1 5 1 3 4 5 9.com . the result is 27 6.
10. (C) (B) An odd number of negative signs gives a negative product. (D) (x – 7)(x + 3) = 0 x–7=0 x = 7 or –3 x+3=0 (C) ax + b = cx + d ax – cx = d – b (a – c)x = d – b x= d –b a–c 9.128 Chapter 8 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. x+y=a x–y=b 2x = a + b 1 x = (a + b) 2 3. the second by 7. which is not true.com .petersons. 16 – 1 = 3. and subtract. 21x – 6y = 6 21x + 28y = 210 –34y = –204 y=6 Checking. 16 – 3 = –7. (D) The product of (–12) and + 4 is –3. (E) x + 1 – 3 = –7 x + 1 = –4 x + 1 = 16 x = 15 5. (B) Multiply the first equation by 3. (D) The product of (–18) and – 3 is 6. – 4. 1 1 ( –3 )(+4 2 ) – – = –2 2 3 Add the two equations. www. (D) (+4) + (–6) = –2 6. 1 1 7. which is true. 3 1 =– 6 2 2x(2x – 1) = 0 2x = 0 2x – 1 = 0 1 x = 0 or 2 8. 2. (B) x2 + 7 – 1 = x x2 + 7 = x + 1 x2 + 7 = x2 + 2x + 1 7 = 2x + 1 6 = 2x x=3 Checking.
= –10 5 (A) 4. (D) (B) (–4) + (+7) = +3 (29.002) – (–1286) = 30. 2.Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 129 Exercise 1 1.petersons. 2(x – 2) = 100 2x – 4 = 100 2x = 104 x = 52 5. 5. (B) (A) +4 + 0 + ( –1) + ( –5) + ( –8) 5 5(–2) – 4(–10) – 3(5) = –10 + 40 – 15 = +15 www.com . (B) Multiply by 100 to clear decimals. 6 × 4 × 4 × 2 = 192 3. 3. y + 48 = 2y 48 = y 4. 2.288 Exercise 2 1. (A) 4x + 4r = 2x + 10r 2x = 14r x = 7r (D) An even number of negative signs gives a positive product. (B) (D) 3x – 2 = 3 + 2x x=5 8 – 4a + 4 = 2 + 12 – 3a 12 – 4a = 14 – 3a –2 = a Multiply by 8 to clear fractions.
6x + 9y = 36b 6x – 2y = 14b 11y = 22b y = 2b 4. then add. second by 2. x+y x–y 2y y = –1 =3 = –4 = –2 www.130 Chapter 8 Exercise 3 1. (D) 6x(x – 7) = 0 6x = 0 x = 0 or 7 x–7=0 (B) Multiply first equation by 3. (B) x+2=0 (5x – 2) (5x + 2) = 0 5x – 2 = 0 2 2 x= or – 5 5 2. and subtract. then add. (B) 5x + 2 = 0 3. 3x – 9y = 9 2x + 9y = 11 5x = 20 x=4 Multiply each equation by 10.com . then subtract. 10x – 15y 10x + 2y –17y y 5. (C) Multiply first equation by 3. (A) 2x – 3y = 0 5x + y = 34 But 27 = 9 · 3 =3 3 Multiply first equation by 5. second by 2. 6x + 2y 5x – 2y 11x x 3. (B) (x – 10) (x + 2) = 0 x – 10 = 0 x = 10 or –2 2. (B) =0 = 68 = –68 =4 Therefore. x = ±3 3 Subtract equations. (D) x2 = 27 x = ± 27 4. = 22 = 11 = 33 =3 Exercise 4 1.petersons. (E) (x – 16) (x – 3) = 0 x – 16 = 0 x = 16 or 3 x–3=0 5.
www. 16 = 4. 2 1 1 2 – ( –4 )(+ 12 ) – 6 = –4 2 Checking. (D) Multiply first equation by 3. (B) 7b + 5d = 5x – 3b 10b + 5d = 5x x = 2b + d Checking. 9x + 6y = 15a + 3b 8x – 6y = 2a + 14b 17x = 17a + 17b x=a+b 5. 80 = 5 16 = 4. 4. (E) x2 – 35 = 25 – 10x + x2 –35 = 25 – 10x 10x = 60 x=6 4.com . The 1 1 is – . 4 9 = 12. then subtract. which is not true. (D) 2x = 16 5 2x = 80 x = 40 Checking. 27 3 product of 9 and – –9 1 – = +27 3 Checking. which is true. second by 2. which is true. (D) 4 2 x – 1 = 12 2x – 1 = 3 2x – 1 = 9 2x = 10 x=5 3. (D) (–3) + (+7) – (–5) = (+9) 2y = 16 y=8 (D) An odd number of negative signs gives a negative product. (A) Multiply first equation by 3. which is true.petersons. 2. 2. 5. (B) 18 = 3 2y 6 = 2y 36 = 2y y = 18 Checking 26 = 3 36 + 8. 1 = 5 – 6. 26 = 3(6) + 8. (D) The sum of (–4) and (–5) is (–9). which is true. second by 2. 3. 6x + 9y = 21 6x – 4y = 8 13y = 13 y=1 6. then add.Concepts of Algebra—Signed Numbers and Equations 131 Exercise 5 1. (C) 2y = 4 Retest 1.
10. which is not true. www. (B) x2 + 3 = x2 + 2x + 1 3 = 2x + 1 2 = 2x x=1 Checking. 2 25 = –10.petersons.com . (D) 4x2 + x = 0 x(4x + 1) = 0 x=0 1 x = 0 or – 4 4x + 1 = 0 8. 4 = 1 + 1. (E) 2 x = –10 x = –5 x = 25 Checking.132 Chapter 8 7. (A) (x + 12)(x – 3) = 0 x + 12 = 0 x = –12 or +3 x2 + 3 = x + 1 x–3=0 9. which is true.
Circle the letter that appears before your answer. m+c m c c m mc mc 100 r+h r–h Represent the cost. in dollars. Express the number of miles covered by a train in one hour if it covers r miles in h hours. in dollars. what is the cost. 1. If one book costs c dollars.Literal Expressions 9 4. what is the cost of one pencil? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) c p p c Express the number of seats in the school auditorium if there are r rows with s seats each and s rows with r seats each. 3. of m books? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. h r r h DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. (A) mh (B) (C) (D) (E) h +m 60 60(h + m) h+m 60 100k + c k +c 100 60h + m 6. (A) 2rs (B) 2r + 2s (C) rs + 2 (D) 2r + s (E) r + 2s pc p–c p+c 133 . (A) kc (B) 100kc (C) (D) (E) kc 100 Express the number of minutes in h hours and m minutes. of k pounds of apples at c cents per pound. Answers are at the end of the chapter. (A) rh (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. If p pencils cost c cents.
com . The sales tax in Morgan County is m%. (A) c + md (B) c + md – 3m (C) c + md + 3m (D) c + 3md (E) cmd 8. How many dollars must he pay if he uses the car for 5 days and drives 1000 miles? (A) 5D + 1000c (B) (C) (D) (E) c 5D + 1000 10. Roger rents a car at a cost of D dollars per day plus c cents per mile. (A) D + mD (B) D + 100mD (C) (D) (E) D+ mD 100 m D+ 100 D + 100m 5D + 100c 5D + 10c 5D + c www. How many dimes are there in n nickels and q quarters? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 10nq n+q 10 1 5 n+ q 2 2 9. 10n + 10q 2n + q 10 The cost of a longdistance telephone call is c cents for the first three minutes and m cents for each additional minute.134 Chapter 9 7. Represent the price of a call lasting d minutes if d is more than 3.petersons. Represent the total cost of an article priced at $D.
Example: Find the number of cents in 2x – 1 dimes. we find he started with 12dc + 20 cents. COMMUNICATING WITH LETTERS Many students who have no trouble computing with numbers panic at the sight of letters. Since a foot contains 12 inches. Solution: To the basic charge of c cents. f feet. Therefore the number of cents in 2x – 1 dimes is 10(2x – 1) or 20x – 10. www. Example: Express the number of inches in y yards.petersons. there are 12d apples. we add d for (w – 15) words. Think that 7 dimes would be 7 times 10 or 70 cents. Example: Kevin bought d dozen apples at c cents per apple and had 20 cents left. if w is greater than 15. If you understand the concepts of a problem in which numbers are given. we must add d for each word over 15. Therefore. f feet will contain 12f inches. Since a yard contains 36 inches. Adding this to the 20 cents he has left. Just figure out what you would do if you had numbers and do exactly the same thing with the given letters.Literal Expressions 135 1. Solution: To change dimes to cents we must multiply by 10. Solution: We must change everything to inches and add. and i inches. 12d apples at c cents each cost 12dc cents. Solution: In d dozen. Example: Find the total cost of sending a telegram of w words if the charge is c cents for the first 15 words and d cents for each additional word.com . The total number of inches is 36y + 12f + i. Represent the number of cents he had before this purchase. y yards will contain 36y inches. you simply need to apply the same concepts to letters. The total charge is c + d(w – 15) or c + dw – 15d. The computational processes are exactly the same.
(A) 7w2 (B) 8w (C) 7w (D) 7 + 2w (E) w2 The charge on the Newport Ferrry is D dollars for the car and driver and m cents for each additional passenger.05r (C) 125r (D) 100 + .com . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) mr g rg m 4. for a car containing four people.136 Chapter 9 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.05r rmg mg r m rg www. (A) 125 + . 5.05r (E) 100 – .03m (B) D + 3m (C) D + 4m (D) D + 300m (E) D + 400m If g gallons of gasoline cost m dollars. (A) D + . How many quarters are equivalent to n nickels and d dimes? (A) 5n + 10d (B) 25n + 50d (C) (D) (E) n+d 25 25n + 25d n + 2d 5 2. express the cost of r gallons. 1. Find the charge. in dollars. Find his total earnings in a week in which he sells r dollars worth of merchandise. 3.05r (B) 75 + . with r being greater than 500.petersons. Express the number of days in w weeks and w days. A salesman earns a base salary of $100 per week plus a 5% commission on all sales over $500.
Represent the number of feet in y yards. 3y + f + 12i 5200m 1200m 13m 25 25m 13 www. Represent the total number of dollars paid to these men in a week. in cents. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) y + f + 12i 3 y i +f+ 3 12 3y + f + i 3y + f + i 12 The cost of mailing a package is c cents for the first b ounces and d cents for each additional ounce. In a group of m men. of b books at D dollars each and r books at c cents each. If a school consists of b boys. and t teachers. g girls. Represent the total cost.) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. represent the number of students in each class if each class contains the same number of students. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Represent the cost of one rose. (A) (c + d) (f – b) (B) c + d (f – b) (C) c + bd (D) c + (d – b) (E) b + (f – b) Josh’s allowance is m cents per week. b men earn D dollars per week and the rest earn half that amount each.Literal Expressions 137 RETEST Work out each problem. 1. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) bD + b – m 1 D(b + m) 2 3 bD + mD 2 3 D(b + m) 2 1 bD + mD 2 t(b + g) b +g t bt + g bg t 5.com . 3. Represent the number of dollars he gets in a year. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3m 25 7. Find the cost.petersons. b+g t 4. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) bD + rc 100 bD + rc 100 Ken bought d dozen roses for r dollars. for mailing a package weighing f ounces if f is more than b. f feet. (A) (B) (C) (D) r d d r 12d r 12r d r 12d 100bD + rc bD + 100rc bD + rc 100 (E) 6. (Assume that there is one teacher per class. and i inches. in cents.
to 6:20 P. How much will it cost.138 Chapter 9 8. to develop and print a roll of film with 20 exposures? (A) 20c + d (B) 20(c + d) (C) c + 20d (D) (E) c+ d 20 c+d 20 9. If it takes T tablespoons of coffee to make c cups.M. The cost for developing and printing a roll of film is c cents for processing the roll and d cents for each print.? (A) D + 40c (B) 2D + 40c (C) 2D + 4c (D) 2D + .M.com . The charge for renting a rowboat on Loon Lake is D dollars per hour plus c cents for each minute into the next hour. Wilson pay if he used a boat from 3:40 P. in cents.4c www.4c (E) D + . how many tablespoons of coffee are needed to make d cups? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Tc d T dc Td c d Tc cd T 10.petersons. How many dollars will Mr.
Literal Expressions 139 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. the total is 60h + m. there are 5n cents. (A) This can be solved by a proportion. Therefore. To convert this to dollars. we divide by 100. the total cost in dollars is 5D + 10c. comparing books to dollars. p 1 = c x c x= p 7. m mD 9. the school auditorium has a total of rs + sr or 2rs seats. To see how many dimes this is. To change this to dollars. (C) www. Therefore. (E) There are 60 minutes in an hour.com . in cents. (C) The cost in cents of k pounds at c cents per pound is kc. In q quarters. The charge.petersons. the total cost is D + 100 . (B) The cost for the first 3 minutes is c cents. divide by 10. Therefore. comparing miles to hours. The number of additional minutes is (d – 3) and the cost at m cents for each additional minute is thus m(d – 3) or md – 3m. (D) This can be solved by a proportion. we divide by 100 and get 10c dollars. The sales tax is 100 ⋅ D or 100 . (C) In n nickels. 5. mD Therefore. there are 25q cents. the total cost is c + md – 3m. 10. In h hours there are 60h minutes. Altogether we have 5n + 25q cents. for 1000 miles at c cents per mile is 1000c cents. r x = h 1 r =x h (D) The daily charge for 5 days at D dollars per day is 5D dollars. 4. 3. (C) This can be solved by a proportion. (A) r rows with s seats each have a total of rs seats. 5n + 25q n + 5q 1 5 = = n+ q 10 2 2 2 2. 8. s rows with r seats each have a total of sr seats. With m additional minutes. 1 m = c x x = mc 6. comparing pencils to cents.
3m (C) The cost. 2 4. The total charge in dollars is then D + . there are 5n cents. comparing gallons to dollars. In i inches i there are 12 feet. is 100bD + rc.03m. of b books at D dollars each is bD dollars. (D) In y yards there are 3y feet. Therefore. we have 100 + . the total cost. divide by 25. To see how many quarters this gives.com .petersons. To change this to cents. With w additional days. (E) This can be solved by a proportion. To change this to dollars. comparing roses to dollars. His commission is .140 Chapter 9 Exercise 1 1. When this is added to his base salary of 100.05(r – 500) or . and thus t classes. The number of men remaining is (m – b). for a total of 3m cents. The three additional persons pay m cents each. Therefore. 4. 3. Retest 1. we have 5n + 10d cents. there are 10d cents. Since there are t teachers.05r. we multiply by 100 and get 100bD cents. (E) In n nickels. This can be written in decimal form as . divide by 100.05r – 25. the 2 1 1 total amount earned is bD + 2 mD – 2 bD = 1 1 1 bD + 2 mD = 2 D(b + m). 5. the number of students in each class is 2.05r – 25. in cents. per week is bD dollars. the total number i of feet is 3y + f + 12 . The cost of r books at c cents each is rc cents. (A) The total number of boys and girls is b + b+g . 12d 1 = r x 12d ⋅ x = r r x= 12d www. (A) This can be solved by a proportion. 5n + 10 d n + 2d = . since a fraction can be 25 5 simplified when every term is divided by the same factor. and since they earn 2 D dollars per week. in dollars.03m. (A) The charge is D dollars for car and driver. (B) Commission is paid on (r – 500) dollars. w weeks contain 7w days. t g. (B) The money earned by b men at D dollars 1 3. or 75 + . In d dimes. 5. Altogether. g r = m x gx = mr mr x= g 2. (B) There are 7 days in a week. in this case 5. the total number of days is 8w. the money they earn is 1 1 1 D(m – b) = 2 mD – 2 bD. for a total of 100 dollars. Therefore. Since d dozen roses equals 12d roses.
Therefore. to 6:20 P. and the cost at d cents for each additional ounce is (f – b)d. The cost for printing 20 exposures at d cents per print is 20d cents. The number of additional ounces is (f – b). (C) The cost for processing the roll is c cents.M. To change to dollars. (D) The amount of time from 3:40 P. is 2 hrs. Therefore. (D) Since there are 52 weeks in a year. the charge at D dollars per hour and c cents per minute into the next hour is 2D dollars + 40c cents or 2D + . 40 min. Therefore.petersons. 9. (C) This can be solved by a proportion comparing tablespoons to cups. the total cost is c + 20d. his allowance in cents is 52m. www. (B) The cost for the first b ounces is c cents. 52m 13m we divide by 100 and get 100 or 25 . 8.Literal Expressions 141 6.4c dollars. T x = c d cx = Td Td x= c 7. 10. the total cost is c + d(f – b).M.com .
.
8 (C) 118 (D) .24 is exactly (A) 1. The square root of 17. then x equals x (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 50 5 .18 (B) 11.005 8. 2 5 2 10 9x and 4x is The square root of 139. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. The sum of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. If 2 = .y) x 2 + y2 none of these 143 . 87 7 3 3 5+3 2 29 3 3 3 45 is 75 and 12 is The difference between 125 and (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 5 2 5 6. 36x 6x 6x2 4. The product of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6 x 36 x 7. 1. 36 25 11x 30 9x 30 x 11 2x 11 61 x 30 3.956 is exactly (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 132 133 134 135 137 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. Answers are at the end of the chapter.Roots and Radicals 10 5.16 .118 (E) 1180 Find (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) x2 x2 + .05 .5 . x 2 + y 2 is equal to (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) x+y xy (x + y) (x .
( 2 )5 is equal to (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 2 2 4 4 2 8 www.petersons. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 16 9 8 12 96 10. Divide 8 12 by 2 3 .144 Chapter 10 9.com .
In adding or subtracting. simplification of one or more radicals will make them the same. Adding the simplified radicals gives a sum of 5 3 . or unit. when radicals to be added or subtracted are not the same. or rational parts. which does not change. The radicals act as a label. Example: 125 + 20 − 500 Solution: 25 ⋅ 5 + 4 ⋅ 5 − 100 ⋅ 5 = 5 5 + 2 5 − 10 5 = −3 5 www. To simplify a radical. we add or subtract the coefficients. we must first simplify each one.com . ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF RADICALS The conditions under which radicals can be added or subtracted are much the same as the conditions for letters in an algebraic expression. we remove any perfect square factors from underneath the radical sign. Example: 2 + 3 cannot be added 2 + 3 2 cannot be added 4 2 +5 2 = 9 2 Often.Roots and Radicals 145 1. and carry the radical along as a label.petersons. and must therefore be exactly the same. Example: 12 = 4 ⋅ 3 = 2 3 27 = 9 ⋅ 3 = 3 3 If we wish to add 12 + 27 .
Combine 6 5 + 3 2 − 4 5 + 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 8 2 5+3 2 2 5+4 2 5 7 mn − mn 5 www.com . Combine 5 mn − 3 mn − 2 mn (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 0 1 mn 3.petersons. Combine 4 27 − 2 48 + 147 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. Combine (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 1 2 ⋅ 180 + ⋅ 45 − ⋅ 20 2 3 5 3 10 + 15 + 2 2 16 5 5 Combine (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 9 5 5 5 − 5 3 5 −2 5 97 24 5 5 none of these 5. 27 3 −3 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 80 + 45 − 20 4. 1.146 Chapter 10 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.
( ) 81 9 3 3 b 2b Divide and simplify: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7 3 7 12 11 3 12 3 40 3 15 96 5 2 27 3 81 3 243 1 1 2( 6 + 2) 2 2 Multiply and simplify: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3+ 1 2 1 ⋅ 3 2 6 +1 1 6+ . 1. Multiply and simplify: 2 18 ⋅ 6 2 (A) 72 (B) 48 (C) 12 6 (D) 8 6 (E) 36 Find 3 3 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3.Roots and Radicals 147 2. Example: 2⋅ 3= 6 Example: 4 2 ⋅ 5 3 = 20 ⋅ 6 Example: (3 2 )2 = 3 2 ⋅ 3 2 = 9 ⋅ 2 = 18 Example: 8 2 = 4=2 Example: 10 20 2 4 =5 5 Example: 2 ( 8 + 18 ) = 16 + 36 = 4 + 6 = 10 Exercise 2 Work out each problem.com . we again treat the radicals as we would treat letters in an algebraic expression.2 6+2 www. 4. Divide and simplify: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.petersons. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. They are factors and must be treated as such. 2 b 2b 32b 3 8b 2b 2b 2 2. MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION OF RADICALS In multiplication and division.
Simplify (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) x 40 x − 2 x 2 3x 40 3x 80 www. SIMPLIFYING RADICALS CONTAINING A SUM OR DIFFERENCE In simplifying radicals that contain several terms under the radical sign. Example: x2 x2 − = 16 25 25 x 2 − 16 x 2 9 x 2 3x = = 400 400 20 Exercise 3 Work out each problem. we must combine terms before taking the square root.com .148 Chapter 10 3. Example: 16 + 9 = 25 = 5 It is not true that 16 + 9 = 16 + 9 . 25 x 2 144 5x 12 5x 2 12 x 7 7x 12 36 y 2 + 64 x 2 x2 x2 + 9 16 4. which would be 4 + 3. Simplify (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.b) none of these 3. a 2 + b 2 is equal to Simplify (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6y + 8x 10xy 6y2 + 8x2 10x2y2 cannot be done x2 x2 − 64 100 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) a+b a–b a2 + b2 (a + b) (a . Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons. or 7. 1. Simplify (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2y 3 y 5 10 y 3 y 3 6 y2 y2 − 2 18 cannot be done 5.
its square root must end in a digit that. Each pair will give one digit in the square root. It should be clearly understood that these zeros are place holders only and in no way change the value of the number. ends in 9.Roots and Radicals 149 4. If we were asked to find the square root of 328. Solution: Pair the numbers beginning at the decimal point.329. Every pair of numbers in the radical sign gives one digit of the square root. when multiplied by itself. Among the choices. when multiplied by itself. Going through the digits from 0 to 9. FINDING THE SQUARE ROOT OF A NUMBER In finding the square root of a number.329 has three digits. 652 will end in 5. Only one of these would appear among the choices. and 672 in 9. Example: The square root of 4624 is exactly (A) 64 (B) 65 (C) 66 (D) 67 (E) 68 Solution: Since all choices contain two digits. this could be 3 (3 · 3 = 9) or 7 (7 · 7 = 49). as this examination will not call for extensive computation. insert a zero at the beginning of the number in order to pair digits.petersons. www. If there were more than one. the only possibility is 68 as 642 will end in 6. 662 in 6.329. Example: Find the number of digits in the square root of 328. we would look among the multiplechoice answers for a threedigit number. the first step is to pair off the digits in the square root sign in each direction from the decimal point. will end in 4. Since our number ends in 9. add a zero at the end. we would have to use additional criteria for selection. If there is an odd number of digits after the decimal point. It must be a number that. If there is an odd number of digits before the decimal point. Therefore the square root of 328. 32 83 29 . but rather for sound mathematical reasoning.com . we must reason using the last digit.
4 14.006 5.6 5.4 . The square root of 17.06 5. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.689 is exactly (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. 1.048.petersons.00006 The number of digits in the square root of 64.025 3.com . The square root of 25.6036 is exactly (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.02 .09 . 4.8 14.9 www.0006 5.9 . The square root of 222.01 is exactly (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 14.009 is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 5 6 7 8 Which of the following square roots can be found exactly? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) . 131 132 133 134 136 5.3 14.6 14.150 Chapter 10 Exercise 4 Work out each problem.
09 x (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 10.1 www.com . Find (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) The difference between (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 160 10 2 16 5 5 2 16 5 11 5 5 2 5 5 a2 a2 + b2 b2 a2 b2 a b 2a b a 2 b a 2 b2 7.6 The number of digits in the square root of 14.161 is (A) 5 (B) 4 (C) 3 (D) 2 (E) 6 (2 3 )5 is equal to 3. 33 6 9 76 33 2 135 6 136 2 1 2 180 and 20 is 2 5 6. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.2 (B) 14.petersons. 1.16 is exactly (A) 14. and 3 18 is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.1 .8 (D) 14.01 1. 12ax3 (2ax )2 3 12ax2 12ax 9. The sum of 2 8 . 4 50 .Roots and Radicals 151 RETEST Work out each problem. 4. The square root of 213.3 (C) 14. Find (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 32 3 288 3 10 3 90 3 16 3 25m 4 36c64 d 16 5m 2 6c8 d 4 5m 2 6c32 d 4 5m 2 6c32 d 8 5m 2 6c8 d 8 5m 6c16 d 4 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 10 1 .9 (E) 14. Divide 42 40r 3t 6 by 3 5rt 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 56rt 2 2 28rt 2rt 28rt 2 2 28rt 2t 5. The product of a 2 x and x 6 x is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2ax 2 3 8. 56rt 2t 3 Solve for x: = .
(C) Only terms with the same radical may be combined. (A) 5 mn − 5 mn = 0 ( 2) ⋅( 2) ⋅ 2 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 2 = 4 2 www. 6. the square root must end in 4 or 6. 6 5−4 5 =2 5 3 2+ 2 =4 2 5. (B) 125 = 25 ⋅ 5 = 5 5 45 = 9 ⋅ 5 = 3 5 5 5−3 5 = 2 5 2. 4.com .152 Chapter 10 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1.4 x 2 = .16 = . 1 1 ⋅ 45 = ⋅ 9 ⋅ 5 = 3 3 2 2 ⋅ 20 = ⋅ 4 ⋅ 5 = 5 5 4 3 5+ 5− ⋅ 5=4 5 1 16 =3 5= 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 4 5 5− 5 10. its square root will have one digit to the right of the decimal point. (E) 4 27 = 4 9 ⋅ 3 = 12 3 12 = 4 ⋅ 3 = 2 3 5 3+2 3=7 3 2 48 = 2 16 ⋅ 3 = 8 3 147 = 49 ⋅ 3 = 7 3 12 3 − 8 3 + 7 3 = 11 3 2. (B) 1 1 ⋅ 180 = ⋅ 36 ⋅ 5 = 3 5 2 2 7. Therefore. (D) ( 2 )( 2 ) = 2 .4 Multiply by x. (B) 75 = 25 ⋅ 3 = 5 3 Exercise 1 1. (E) 25 x 2 + 36 x 2 61x 2 61 = =x 900 900 30 Therefore we have 2 5 + 4 2 4. 3.4 x x=5 9 x ⋅ 4 x = 36 x 2 = 6 x 45 = 9 ⋅ 5 = 3 5 20 = 4 ⋅ 5 = 2 5 4 5+3 5−2 5 =5 5 . 8. 5. (C) 8 12 2 3 = 4 4 = 4⋅2 = 8 9. (B) 80 = 16 ⋅ 5 = 4 5 3. (B) Since the number has two digits to the right of the decimal point. (D) (B) 2 = .petersons. (E) It is not possible to find the square root of separate terms. (C) Since the last digit is 6.
(A) (B) (A) 2 18 ⋅ 6 2 = 12 36 = 12 ⋅ 6 = 72 Exercise 3 1. 2. we have 3.Roots and Radicals 153 Exercise 2 1. (D) (A) 100 x 2 . (C) Dividing the numbers in the radical sign.2 y 2 16 y 2 4 y 2 y = = = 36 36 6 3 1 1 1 1 1 12 + ⋅ 2 = 4⋅ 3+ = 3+ 2 4 2 2 2 4. (D) 3 48 = 3 16 ⋅ 3 = 12 3 (E) It is not possible to find the square root of separate terms. (B) 16 x 2 + 9 x 2 = 144 25 x 2 5 x = 144 12 3 3 ⋅ 3 3 ⋅ 3 3 = 27(3 3 ) = 81 ⋅ 3 Using the distributive law.com .petersons. 4 b 2 = 2b we have 5. 3. 5. 4. 2.64 x 2 36 x 2 6 x 3x = = = 6400 6400 80 40 18 y 2 . www. (E) The terms cannot be combined and it is not possible to take the square root of separated terms.
4.09 = . (D) 3.com . it must have an even number of decimal places so that its square root will have exactly half as many. (A) (C) 5. (B) Since the number has four digits to the right of the decimal point. In addition to this. (C) 25m 4 5m 2 = 32 8 64 16 36c d 6c d www. 7. its square root must end in 1 or 9. the square root must end in 4 or 6. the digits must form a perfect square ( . the square root must end in 3 or 7. 6.154 Chapter 10 Exercise 4 1.3 Multiply by x.3 x 3 = . 9.3) . (A) Every pair of digits in the given number gives one digit of the square root.3 x x = 10 .petersons. (B) 2 3 ⋅ 2 3 ⋅ 2 3 ⋅ 2 3 ⋅ 2 3 = 32(9 3 ) = 288 3 10.09 = . 2. (D) 2a 2 a 2 = b b2 (E) Since the last digit is 6. (E) Since the number ends in 1. 42 40r 3t 6 3 5rt 2 = 14 8r 2 t 4 14 8r 2 t 4 = 28rt 2 2 5. (C) In order to take the square root of a decimal. (C) 2 8 =2 4⋅ 2 =4 2 4 50 = 4 25 ⋅ 2 = 20 2 3 18 = 3 9 ⋅ 2 = 9 2 4 2 + 20 2 + 9 2 = 33 2 1 1 180 = 36 ⋅ 5 = 3 5 2 2 2 2 4 20 = 4⋅ 5= 5 5 5 5 4 11 3 5− 5= 5 5 5 a 2 x ⋅ x 6 x = ax 12 x 2 = 2ax 2 3 2. Retest 1. (A) 3 = . 8. (C) A fivedigit number has a threedigit square root. 3. its square root will have two digits to the right of the decimal point. (C) Since the last digit is 9. 4.
b 5. Find the sum of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. x+5 5+ x a . Circle the letter that appears before your answer.Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 11 4. 2n 2 7 3n 7 11n 12 2n 2 12 9n 12 n 2n and . 1. Answers are at the end of the chapter. Find an expression equivalent to y . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 27 x 5 3y 9x6 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. Divide (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 –1 ( x − 5 )2 ( x + 5 )2 ( x − 5 )2 − ( x + 5 )2 0 155 . 4 3 3x 2 3 y3 9x5 y3 27 x 5 y3 27 x 6 y3 Combine into a single fraction: 2 − (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2−a b 2−a 2−b a − 2b b 2b − a b 2a − b b x−5 5− x by . 1 Simplify 2 + a b a 2a + 1 (A) b (B) (C) (D) (E) 2a + 1 a 2a + 1 ab 4a2 + 1 xy 2b + 1 b 3.
The trinomial x2 – x – 20 is exactly divisible by (A) x – 4 (B) x – 10 (C) x + 4 (D) x – 2 (E) x + 5 8.156 Chapter 11 1 1 − a b Simplify 2 b−a (A) 2 a−b (B) 2 b−a (C) 2ab ba (D) 2 2ab (E) b+a 6.petersons. find x 2 − y 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 4 1 4 3 16 1 8 7 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7. 9. find x2 + y2. www. If x + y = 2 and x − y = 4 . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 100 20 40 60 80 10. If x + y = 16 and x2 – y2 = 48. then x – y equals (A) 3 (B) 32 (C) 4 (D) 36 (E) 6 If (x + y)2 = 100 and xy = 20.com .
This is dividing the numerator and denominator by 3. Remember that if the terms had been x +1 www. Subtraction.com . by the cummutative law of addition. however. but both numerator and denominator may be factored as 4 . We may not say that and then say that 12 5 + 7 12 7 9t 3 9+t = because we divide numerator and denominator by 3t. while the denominator must be factored as a trinomial. −2 . Remember not to cancel the x’s as they are ( )( ) ( ) terms and not factors. x2 − 4x − 5 ( x + 4)( x + 2) ( x + 2) When numbers are reversed around a minus sign. we have Example: Simplify Solution: There are no common factors here. Example: Simplify Solution: The numerator contains a common factor. When we simplify cannot be simplified. SIMPLIFYING FRACTIONS In simplifying fractions. 5− x 2 ( x − 5)( x + 1) 10 − 2 x to simplest form. the factors could have been divided without factoring further.Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 157 1. Never cancel terms! That is. is not commutative. they may be turned around by factoring out a (–1). we are really saying that and then 12 4 12 3 ⋅ 4 9 5+ 4 9 4 = = . 3b x 2 + 6x + 8 to simplest form.5 – x = (– 1)(x – 5).petersons. we must divide the numerator and denominator by the same factor. This is one of the most frequent student errors. Example: Simplify Solution: Factoring the numerator and denominator by removing the largest common factor in both cases. However. Dividing these out. a serious error in algebra as well. 12t 4 12 + t the fraction would not remain the same. as a + b = b + a. if we were to add or subtract the same number in the numerator and denominator. Be very careful to avoid it. necessitating the factoring of –1. never cancel parts of numerators or denominators containing + or – signs unless they are enclosed in parentheses as parts of factors. as there is no factor that divides into the entire numerator as well as the entire denominator. We can multiply or divide both the numerator and denominator of a fraction by the same number without changing the value of the fraction. However. Doing this will enable us to simplify the fraction to reversed around a plus sign. x 2 + x − 12 trinomials. we have 3b 2 ( b + 2 ) 4b ( b + 2) 4 b 2 + 8b 3b 3 + 6b 2 The factors common to both numerator and denominator are b and (b + 2). the value of 9 3 9 3⋅3 = to . x + 4 x − 3 gives x − 3 as a final answer.
158 Chapter 11 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. Simplify to simplest form: 6 x + 12 y (A) (B) (C) (D) 2 3 − 2 3 1 − 3 1 3 2x + 4 y 3. Find the value of y − 3 x when x = and 7 3 . 3x 3 − 3x 2 y Simplify to simplest form: 9 x 2 − 9 xy x (A) 6 x (B) 3 2x (C) 3 4. 10 24 (A) 70 11 (B) 70 y= 2 (E) 3 (C) (D) (E) 0 1 –1 www. 1 x−y 3 Simplify to simplest form: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 − 3 2 3 4 − 3 4 3 3 − 2 3x − y 2x − 8 12 − 3x 5. 1.com .petersons. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Simplify to simplest form: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 5 − 4 3 b+4 b+5 b−4 b−5 b+4 − b+5 b 2 + b − 12 b 2 + 2b − 15 (D) (E) 2.
we must simply add the numerators and put the sum over the same denominator. Remember a c ad + bc a c ad − bc that + = .Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 159 2. and that − = .petersons. 4r − s − (2r − 7s) 4r − s − 2r + 7s 2r + 6s 2(r + 3s) r + 3s = = = = 6 6 6 6 3 www. All sums or differences should be simplified to simplest form. it is necessary to have the fractions expressed in terms of the same common denominator. b d bd b d bd Example: Add Solution: Add the two cross products and put the sum over the denominator product: Example: Add Solution: 10 a + 12a 22a = 15 15 3b + 2a ab 3 2 + a b 2a 4a + 5 3 Example: Add Solution: Since both fractions have the same denominator. Be very careful of the minus sign between the fractions as it will change the sign of each term in the second numerator. we subtract the numerators and place the difference over the same denominator. 5a + 5b 5(a + b) = =5 a+b a+b 5a 5b + a+b a+b Example: Subtract Solution: 4r − s 2r − 7s − 6 6 Since both fractions have the same denominator. ADDITION OR SUBTRACTION OF FRACTIONS In adding or subtracting fractions.com . When adding or subtracting two fractions. use the same shortcuts used in arithmetic.
160 Chapter 11 Exercise 2 Work out each problem.petersons. Subtract (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) − 3b 7b − 4 10 2b 3 3 9cd c+d b 5 b 20 b 2b 3 a 3a Add + 5 10 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4a 15 a 2 3a 2 50 2a 25 3a 2 15 www. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Add (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. 6x + 5y 4 x + y − 2x 2x x+4 1 + 6 2 x+7 (A) 6 x +5 (B) 8 x+4 (C) 12 x +5 (D) 12 x +5 (E) 6 4. Add 1 + 4y 4y 1 + 2y x + 2y x x + 3y x 3c 3d + c+d c+d 6cd c+d 3cd c+d 3 2 5.com . 1. Subtract (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.
we must first factor all numerators and denominators and may then divide all factors common to any numerator and any denominator.Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 161 3. Example: Find the product of Solution: Factors common to both numerator and denominator are x2 in the first numerator and second denominator and y2 in the first denominator and second numerator. we are left with ⋅ . 15a 2 b 1 ⋅ 3 2 5a We can divide the first numerator and second denominator by 5a2. they are added in multiplication and subtracted in division. Remember always to invert the fraction following the division sign. we multiply the resulting fractions. MULTIPLICATION OR DIVISION OF FRACTIONS In multiplying or dividing fractions.petersons. 2 a 2a www. 1 1 x3 y3 . Dividing by these common x y factors.com . 2 We invert the divisor and multiply. giving 3b 1 3b ⋅ or . 2 and y x2 Example: Divide Solution: 15a 2 b by 5a3. Finally. Where exponents are involved. giving an answer of xy.
Divide (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) b c bc2 3. Divide 4abc by (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 8a 3 b 2 c 3d 2 a 2a 2 b 3d 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. x2 y4 Find the product of 3 and 5 y x y2 4.com .162 Chapter 11 Exercise 3 Work out each problem. x y 3 x3 x3 y x8 y7 x y b c 6cd 2 2ac bd 2 6cd 2 a 5cd 2 a 3a 2 c 4 by 6ac2 4b2 Multiply c by (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) b c2 c2 b 5. ax x Divide by by y ax 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) by 2 b a a b by 2 ax 2 ay bx ac 2 8b 2 ac 2 4b2 4b2 ac 2 8b 2 ac 2 ac 2 6b 2 www. 1. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons.
1 3 − 5 2 Simplify 3 4 15 (A) 26 15 (B) − 26 3. 1. (C) (D) (E) 2 26 15 26 − 15 1 1 − x y Simplify 1 1 + x y x−y (A) x + y x+y (B) x − y y− x (C) x+y (D) (E) 4. multiply each term of the entire complex fraction by the lowest quantity that will eliminate them all. To eliminate the fractions within the fraction.petersons. COMPLEX ALGEBRAIC FRACTIONS Complex algebraic fractions are simplified by the same methods reviewed earlier for arithmetic fractions. a x2 Simplify a 2 x x (A) a 1 1 Simplify 1 + x 1 y x+y (A) x (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. giving 3y + 2 x .com . Remember never to cancel terms or parts of terms. We may only simplify by dividing factors. 6 xy No more simplification is possible beyond this.Factoring and Algebraic Fractions 163 4. Example: 3 Simplify x Solution: + 6 2 y We must multiply each term by xy. Exercise 4 Work out each problem. –1 –xy 2. 2y x+1 y +1 x x +1 y (B) (C) a2 x 1 ax (D) (E) ax a x 1 Simplify 2 + t 2 t2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) t2 + t t3 2t + 1 2 t+1 4+t 2 www.
164
Chapter 11
5. USING FACTORING TO FIND MISSING VALUES
Certain types of problems may involve the ability to factor in order to evaluate a given expression. In particular, you should be able to factor the difference of two perfect squares. If an expression consists of two terms that are separated by a minus sign, the expression can always be factored into two binomials, with one containing the sum of the square roots and the other their difference. This can be stated by the identity x2 – y2 = (x + y)(x – y). Example: If m2 – n2 = 48 and m + n = 12, find m – n. Solution: Since m2 – n2 is equal to (m + n) (m – n), these two factors must multiply to 48. If one of them is 12, the other must be 4. Example: If (a + b)2 = 48 and ab = 6, find a2 + b2. Solution: (a + b)2 is equal to a2 + 2ab + b2. Substituting 6 for ab, we have a2 + 2(6) + b2 = 48 and a2 + b2 = 36.
Exercise 5
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1. If a + b = (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.
1 12 1 7 2 7 1 6 1 1 and a − b = , find a2 – b2. 3 4
4.
The trinomial x2 + 4x – 45 is exactly divisible by (A) x + 9 (B) x – 9 (C) x + 5 (D) x + 15 (E) x – 3 If
1 1 1 1 1 1 − = 5 and + = 3 , then 2 − 2 = c d c d c d
none of these
5.
If (a – b)2 = 40 and ab = 8, find a2 + b2. (A) 5 (B) 24 (C) 48 (D) 56 (E) 32 If a + b = 8 and a2 – b2 = 24, then a – b = (A) 16 (B) 4 (C) 3 (D) 32 (E) 6
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
16 34 2 15 cannot be determined
3.
www.petersons.com
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions
165
RETEST
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1.
2n n and . Find the sum of 5 10 3n (A) 50 1 n (B) 2 2n 2 (C) 50 2n 2 (D) 10 1 n (E) 2
5.
Simplify (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
3−
3−
1 x
y 2 x y 2x y 3− x y 3x − 1 x 3x − 1 y
2.
x Combine into a single fraction: y − 3 x − 3y (A) y x−3 (B) y x−9 (C) 3y x − 3y (D) 3 x − 3y (E) 3y
6.
1 x
3 x2
is equal to
x2 − x 3 3x 2 − x 3
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7.
x2 – x
3x − 1 3 3− x 3
3.
Divide (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
2− x x 2 + 2x − 8 by . 3 4+ x
3 –3 3(x – 2) none of these
3
3 2− x
If a2 – b2 = 100 and a + b = 25, then a – b = (A) 4 (B) 75 (C) –4 (D) –75 (E) 5 The trinomial x2 – 8x – 20 is exactly divisible by (A) x – 5 (B) x – 4 (C) x – 2 (D) x – 10 (E) x – 1 If
1 1 1 1 1 1 − = 6 and + = 5 , find 2 − 2 . a b a b a b
8.
4.
5a 3 Find an expression equivalent to b .
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
15a 6 b3 15a 9 b3 125a 6 b3 125a 9 b3 25a 6 b3
9.
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
30 –11 61 11 1
10. If (x – y)2 = 30 and xy = 17, find x2 + y2. (A) –4 (B) 4 (C) 13 (D) 47 (E) 64
www.petersons.com
166
Chapter 11
SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES
Diagnostic Test
1. 2. 3. (C) (D) (B)
3n + 8n 11n = 12 12 2 a 2b − a − = 1 b b
Exercise 1
1. 2. 3. (B) (A) (E)
3 x 2 ( x − y) x = 9 x ( x − y) 3
x −5 5+ x ⋅ cancel x + 5’s. x +5 5− x x−5 x−5 = = −1 5 − x −1( x − 5)
3x 2 3x 2 3x 2 27 x 6 ⋅ ⋅ = 3 y y y y
2( x − 4) 2 =− 3(4 − x ) 3 3x − y = −1 regardless of the values of x y − 3x (b + 4)(b − 3) (b + 4) = (b + 5)(b − 3) (b + 5) 2( x + 2 y) 2 1 = = 6( x + 2 y) 6 3
and y, as long as the denominator is not 0. 4. 5. (C) (D)
4. 5.
(E) (E)
2+
1 a b a
Multiply every term by a.
= 2+ 1 a ⋅ a b
= 2+
1 2b + 1 = b b
6.
(C)
b−a 2ab
Multiply every term by ab.
7.
(A)
x2 – y2 = (x + y) (x – y) = 48
Substituting 16 for x + y, we have
16( x − y) = 48 x−y=3
8.
(D)
(x + y)2 = x2 + 2xy + y2 = 100
Substituting 20 for xy, we have
x 2 + 40 + y 2 = 100 x 2 + y 2 = 60
9.
(D)
1 1 1 1 1 1 x + y x − y = 2 − 2 x y 1 1 1 1 2 4 = 2 − 2 x y 1 1 1 − = 8 x 2 y2
10. (C)
x2 – x – 20 = (x – 5)(x + 4)
www.petersons.com
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions
167
Exercise 2
1. (D)
=
6x + 5y 4 x + y − 2x 2x
Exercise 3
1. (B) Divide x2 and y3.
6 x + 5y − 4 x − y 2 x + 4 y = 2x 2x 2( x + 2 y) x + 2 y = = 2x x
y 1 y ⋅ = 1 x3 x3
2. 3. 4.
(C) (C) (D)
2c ⋅
c⋅
2. 3. 4. 5.
(D) (B) (A) (C)
3c + 3d 3(c + d ) = =3 c+d c+d 2a + 3a 5a a = = 10 10 2 x +4+3 x +7 = 6 6
3b(10) − 4(7b) 30 b − 28b = 4(10) 40 2b b = = 40 20
b =b c ax y a ⋅ Divide y and x. by x b
3d 2 Divide 2, a, and b. 2a 2 b
4 abc ⋅
3d 2 6cd 2 = a a
5.
(A)
3a 2 c 4 1 ⋅ Divide 3, a, and c2. 4 b 2 6ac 2 ac 2 1 ac 2 ⋅ = 4 b 2 2 8b 2
www.petersons.com
168
Chapter 11
Exercise 4
1. (E) Multiply every term by 20.
4 − 30 −26 = 15 15
Exercise 5
1. (A) (a + b) (a – b) = a2 – b2
1 1 2 2 3 4 = a − b 1 = a2 − b2 12
2.
(C)
a
Multiply every term by x2. 2.
1 = 2 ax a x
(D)
(a – b)2 = a2 – 2ab + b2 = 40
3.
(C)
y− x y+ x
Multiply every term by xy.
Substituting 8 for ab, we have
a 2 − 16 + b 2 = 40 a 2 + b 2 = 56
4.
(A)
x+y x
Multiply every term by xy.
3.
(C)
(a + b) (a – b) = a2 – b2
5.
(E)
4+t 2
Multiply every term by
t . 2
2
8(a − b) = 24 (a − b) = 3
4. 5.
(A) (D)
x2 + 4x – 45 = (x + 9) (x – 5)
1 1 1 1 1 1 − + = − c d c d c2 d 2 (5)(3) = 12 − 12 c d 1 1 15 = 2 − 2 c d
www.petersons.com
Factoring and Algebraic Fractions
169
Retest
1. 2. 3. (B) (A) (B)
= 4 n + n 5n n 1 = = = n 10 10 2 2 x 3 x − 3y − = y 1 y
x 2 + 2x − 8 3 ⋅ 4+ x 2− x
( x + 4)( x − 2) 3 ⋅ 4+ x 2− x 3( x − 2) 3( x − 2) Divide x + 4. 2 − x = −1( x − 2) = −3
4. 5.
(D)
5a 3 5a 3 5a 3 125a 9 ⋅ ⋅ = b b b b3
(E) Multiply every term by x.
3x − 1 y
6.
(B) Multiply every term by x2.
3x 2 − x 3
7.
(A)
a2 – b2 = (a + b)(a – b) = 100
Substituting 25 for a + b, we have 25(a – b) = 100 a–b=4 8. 9. (D) (A) x2 – 8x – 20 = (x – 10)(x + 2)
1 1 1 1 1 1 a − b a + b = 2 − 2 a b 1 (6)(5) = 2 − 12 a b 1 1 30 = 2 − 2 a b
10. (E)
(x – y)2 = x2 – 2xy + y2 = 30
Substituting 17 for xy, we have
x 2 − 34 + y 2 = 30 x 2 + y 2 = 64
www.petersons.com
5.50. Find three consecutive odd integers such that the sum of the first two is four times the third. 4. (A) 3. the value of the fraction is 2 . At the end of three hours they are 300 miles apart. Two cars leave a restaurant at the same time and travel along a straight highway in opposite directions. 3 (A) 4 (B) 8 (C) 10 (D) 12 (E) 20 2. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. how many dimes are there? (A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 9 (D) 10 (E) 12 How many quarts of water must be added to 18 quarts of a 32% alcohol solution to dilute it to a solution that is only 12% alcohol? (A) 10 (B) 14 (C) 20 (D) 30 (E) 34 5. –3 (E) 9.Problem Solving in Algebra 12 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. (B) 100 mi. –7 (D) –7. Find the numerator of the original fraction. 3. On his trip home. How far is his home from the park? (A) 65 mi. if one car travels at a rate 20 miles per hour faster than the other. Find the rate of the slower car. 171 . 1. (E) 300 mi. 1 (C) –11. –1. Danny drove to Yosemite Park from his home at 60 miles per hour. 11. 7 (B) –3. (A) 30 (B) 40 (C) 50 (D) 55 (E) 60 The numerator of a fraction is one half the denominator. 13 Find the shortest side of a triangle whose perimeter is 64. (D) 280 mi. (A) 6 (B) 18 (C) 20 (D) 22 (E) 24 A purse contains 16 coins in dimes and quarters. If the value of the coins is $2. if the ratio of two of its sides is 4 : 3 and the third side is 20 less than the sum of the other two. 6. Answers are at the end of the chapter. 7. (C) 200 mi. If the numerator is increased by 2 and the denominator is decreased by 2. –5. –9. his rate was 10 miles per hour less and the trip took one hour longer.
Darren can mow the lawn in 20 minutes. we will review some of the major types of algebraic problems. represent your unknown algebraically. How old is Adam now? (A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 18 (D) 20 (E) 24 10. Solve that equation by the techniques previously reviewed. (A) $1000 (B) $1500 (C) $2000 (D) $2500 (E) $3000 In the following sections. Six years from now. Once this is done. it is most important that you read carefully and know what it is that you are trying to find. she will be twice as old as Adam will be then. In solving verbal problems. you will learn to translate words into mathematical equations. You should then be able to handle other types of problems confidently. it will help you to be thoroughly familiar with these types of problems. Meredith is 3 times as old as Adam. Find the amount invested at 4%. Although not every problem you come across will fall into one of these categories.com . Barry invested some money at 5% and an amount half as great at 4%. Mr. www. while Valerie needs 30 minutes to do the same job. His total annual income from both investments was $210. Write the equation that translates the words of the problem into the symbols of mathematics. How many minutes will it take them to mow the lawn if they work together? (A) 10 (B) 8 (C) 16 (D) (E) 6 2 12 1 9.172 Chapter 12 8. By practicing with the problems that follow.petersons.
it is best to change the value of all monies to cents before writing an equation. How many 10cent stamps were there? (A) 10 (B) 12 (C) 20 (D) 24 (E) 28 4. half dollars by 50.60 (D) 12¢ (E) $1.com . 5. 3. Exercise 1 Work out each problem. In a problem such as this. Each of the 30 students in Homeroom 704 contributed either a nickel or a quarter to the Cancer Fund. Example: Sue has $1. and dollars by 100. COIN PROBLEMS In solving coin problems. consisting of nickels and dimes.12 (C) $1.70. the number of nickels must be multiplied by 5 to give the value in cents. dimes by 10. www. If there are 28 coins in all. the ratio of nickels to dimes is 3 : 4.50. Marie has $2. what is the value of the dimes? (A) 60¢ (B) $1.petersons. If the total amount collected was $4. how many nickels does she have? Solution: Let x = the number of dimes x + 9 = the number of nickels 10x = the value of dimes in cents 5x + 45 = the value of nickels in cents 135 = the value of money she has in cents 10x + 5x + 45 = 135 15x = 90 x=6 She has 6 dimes and 15 nickles. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.00 2. 4 how many dimes does she have? (A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 8 (E) 10 Lisa has 45 coins that are worth a total of $3. you can be sure that 6 would be among the multiple choice answers given. If she has 9 more nickels than dimes.40. You must be sure to read carefully what you are asked to find and then continue until you have found the quantity sought. Some were 10cent stamps and some were 15cent stamps. Thus. how many students contributed a nickel? (A) 10 (B) 12 (C) 14 (D) 16 (E) 18 In a purse containing nickels and dimes. quarters by 25. how many more dimes than nickels does she have? (A) 5 (B) 10 (C) 15 (D) 20 (E) 25 A postal clerk sold 40 stamps for $5.20 in dimes and quarters.35. If the coins are all nickels and dimes. 1.Problem Solving in Algebra 173 1. If the 1 number of dimes is the number of quarters.
5.174 Chapter 12 2. find the next even integer. (A) 25 (B) 29 (C) 31 (D) 28 (E) 30 4. represent the sum of the four integers. Consecutive even and odd integers are both two apart and can be represented by x. x + 2. etc. x + 2. Example: Find three consecutive odd integers whose sum is 219. (A) 2x – 5 (B) 2x – 4 (C) 2x – 2 (D) 2x – 1 (E) 2x + 1 2. and so on. 3x + 6 = 219 3x = 213 x = 71. Solution: Represent the integers as x. 1. Never try to represent consecutive odd integers by x. CONSECUTIVE INTEGER PROBLEMS Consecutive integers are one apart and can be represented algebraically as x. 3. which equation could be used to find these integers if the difference of their squares is 120? (A) (n + 1)2 – n2 = 120 (B) n2 – (n + 1)2 = 120 (C) n2 – (n + 2)2 = 120 (D) (n + 2)2 – n2 = 120 (E) [(n + 2)– n]2 = 120 Find the average of four consecutive odd integers whose sum is 112. making the integers 71. 73. Exercise 2 Work out each problem. www. x + 2. and so on. and 75. x + 1. x + 1. (A) 4n + 10 (B) 4n – 2 (C) 4n – 4 (D) 4n – 5 (E) 4n – 8 If n is the first of two consecutive odd integers.com . and x + 4. If n + 1 is the largest of four consecutive integers. x + 4.petersons. Find the second of three consecutive integers if the sum of the first and third is 26.. for if x is odd. x + 3. Write an equation stating that their sum is 219. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. x + 1 would be even. (A) 11 (B) 12 (C) 13 (D) 14 (E) 15 If 2x – 3 is an odd integer.
Represent her age 3 years from now. AGE PROBLEMS In solving age problems. At that time. (A) 4x – 5 (B) 4x – 2 (C) 4x (D) 4x + 1 (E) 4x – 1 4. Exercise 3 Work out each problem. Burke will be twice as old as Jack will be then. In x years. A person’s age x years from now is found by adding x to his present age. find their ages 11 years ago. How many years ago was Jody three times as old as Glenn was then? Solution: We are comparing their ages x years ago. This can be stated as the equation 20 – x = 3(14 – x) 20 – x = 42 – 3x 2x = 22 x = 11 To check. In 8 years. (A) 2x – 4 (B) 2x – 1 (C) 2x + 3 (D) 2x – 3 (E) 2x – 2 Alice is now 5 years younger than her brother Robert. you are usually called upon to represent a person’s age at the present time. A person’s age x years ago is found by subtracting x from his present age. Jody was 9 while Glenn was 3. Mark is now 4 times as old as his brother Stephen.com . whose age is 4x + 3. Jody’s age (20 – x) was three times Glenn’s age (14 – x). Glenn. or several years ago. In 1 year Mark will be 3 times as old as Stephen will be then. Example: Michelle was 15 years old y years ago. Lili is 23 years old and Melanie is 15 years old. her age will be her present age plus x. www. How old was Mark two years ago? (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 6 (D) 8 (E) 9 Mr. Represent her age two years ago. 1. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 2. 5. Burke now? (A) 16 (B) 24 (C) 32 (D) 40 (E) 48 3. Solution: Her present age is 15 + y. is 14. Represent her age x years from now. How many years ago was Lili twice as old as Melanie? (A) 7 (B) 16 (C) 9 (D) 5 (E) 8 Two years from now. How old is Mr. Jody was three times as old as Glenn was then. Burke is 24 years older than his son Jack. Mr.petersons. Therefore.Problem Solving in Algebra 175 3. or 15 + y + x. Example: Jody is now 20 years old and her brother. Karen’s age will be 2x + 1. several years from now.
com . PRINCIPAL · RATE = INTEREST INCOME Example: Mrs.06(x – 500) = annual interest from 6% investment .04x = annual interest from 4% investment .04x + . called the rate. INVESTMENT PROBLEMS All interest referred to is simple interest. 4 x + 6 ( x − 500 ) = 5000 4 x + 6 x − 3000 = 5000 10 x = 8000 x = 800 x − 500 = 300 She invested $300 at 6%.petersons. how much money did she invest at 6%? Solution: Represent the two investments algebraically. x = amount invested at 4% x – 500 = amount invested at 6% . The annual amount of interest paid on an investment is found by multiplying the amount invested. called the principal. by the percent of interest. Friedman invested some money in a bank paying 4% interest annually and a second amount. If her annual income from both investments was $50. in a bank paying 6% interest. www. $500 less than the first.06(x – 500) = 50 Multiply by 100 to remove decimals.176 Chapter 12 4.
www.000) (E) . part at 4% and the rest at 5%. How many more dollars must she invest at 3% so that her total annual income is 4% of her entire investment? (A) $120 (B) $1000 (C) $2000 (D) $4000 (E) $6000 4. represent the annual income from the 5% investment. 1.05(x + 10.000 – x) Dr. (A) 5(x – 10.05x + 400 (D) 5x + 40000 (E) none of these Mr.05(10.000) (D) .05 (x + 400) (C) .05(x – 10. Barbara invested x dollars at 3% and $400 more than this amount at 5%. 2 2. If the total annual income from these investments was $300. Maxwell inherited some money from his 1 1 father. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. part at 6% and the rest at 5%. (A) . 5.000 – x) (C) . what was the amount he inherited? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $600 $60 $2000 $3000 $6000 3 3. of this amount at 6%. (A) $160 (B) $320 (C) $4000 (D) $3200 (E) $1200 Mr.com .05x (B) .Problem Solving in Algebra 177 Exercise 4 Work out each problem. Marion invested $7200. Blum invested $10. find her total annual income from these investments. Kramer invested $2000 in an account paying 6% interest annually.petersons. He invested of this amount at 5%.000. and the rest at 3%. If the annual income from both investments was the same. If x represents the amount invested at 6%. Represent the annual income from the 5% investment.000) (B) 5(10.
178 Chapter 12 5. 31 the value of the fraction is . 2x − 1 1 = 3x + 1 2 3x + 1 2 2x Cross multiply to eliminate fractions. 4 x − 2 = 3x + 1 x=3 The original fraction is 2x 6 .petersons. or 45 and 60. If one is subtracted from the numerator and added to the denominator. respectively. or 1. which is . it does not mean that the numerator is 4 3 and the denominator 4. 3x 9 www. The value of this new fraction is 1 . All we know is that the ratio of numerator to denominator will be 3 : 4. 2 2 Solution: Represent the original fraction as 3x .com .5 and 2. If the value of a fraction is . 4x 3 Example: The value of a fraction is . FRACTION PROBLEMS A fraction is a ratio between two numbers. Therefore. the new fraction is 2 x − 1 . or an infinite number of other combinations. Find the original fraction. If one is subtracted from the numerator and added to the denominator. the numerator may be represented by 3x and the denominator by 4x. The numerator and denominator could be 9 and 12. The fraction is then repre3x sented by .
Find the denominator of the 8 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3.Problem Solving in Algebra 179 Exercise 5 Work out each problem. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 5 6 10 9 15 12 20 15 25 7 . the value of the resulting fraction is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. If 4 is added to both the numerator and denominator. 1. 4 5 12 16 20 2 . The denominator of a fraction is twice as large as the numerator. Find the numerator of the 3 The denominator of a certain fraction is 5 more than the numerator.com . the new fraction is equivalent to original fraction. is increased by 4 and the denominator is increased by 10. Find the original fraction. Find the 10 www. A fraction is equivalent to 4 . the value of the new fraction is 2 . the value of the fraction is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6 10 12 14 16 5 . 3 4 5 6 7 original fraction. 3 The value of a certain fraction is . If both the 5 numerator and denominator are increased by 5. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. What number must be added to both the numerator and the denominator of the fraction 5 3 to give a fraction equal to ? 21 7 5. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 8 4 9 11 16 12 17 7 12 3 original fraction. If the numerator 5 4. If 3 is added to both numerator and denominator.petersons.
The first is sometimes referred to as dry mixture. In solving this type of problem it is best to organize the data in a chart with three rows and columns. As we did with prices. Again.180 Chapter 12 6. the equation comes from adding the final column since the amount of alcohol in the original solution plus the amount of alcohol added must equal the amount of alcohol in the new solution. 800 − 36 x = 12. In solving the second type of mixture problem. of quarts 15 x 15 + x · Percent Alcohol = 40 100 50 Amount of Alcohol 600 100x 50(15 + x) Notice that the percent of alcohol in pure alcohol is 100. Example: Mr. labeled as illustrated in the following example. 000 16 x = 1200 x = 75 He should use 75 pounds of the more expensive candy. If we had added pure water to weaken the solution. such as nuts or coffee. Also solved by the same method are problems dealing with tickets at different prices. as long as we do it in every line of the chart. MIXTURE PROBLEMS There are two kinds of mixture problems with which you should be familiar. 600 + 100 x = 50 (15 + x ) 600 + 100 x = 750 + 50 x 50 x = 150 x=3 3 quarts of alcohol should be added. and similar problems.petersons. of pounds x 300 – x 300 · Price per pound = 52 36 40 Total value 52x 36(300 – x) 12000 The value of the more expensive candy plus the value of the less expensive candy must be equal to the value of the mixture. 52 x + 10. we may omit the decimal point from the percents. 52x + 36(300 – x) = 12000 Notice that all values were computed in cents to avoid decimals. Example: How many quarts of pure alcohol must be added to 15 quarts of a solution that is 40% alcohol to strengthen it to a solution that is 50% alcohol? Solution: Diluted Pure Mixture No. the percent of alcohol in pure water would have been 0. in which we mix dry ingredients of different values. Sweet wishes to mix candy worth 36 cents a pound with candy worth 52 cents a pound to make 300 pounds of a mixture worth 40 cents a pound. Almost all mixture problems derive their equation from adding the final column in the chart. we are dealing with percents instead of prices and amounts of a certain ingredient instead of values. www.com . How many pounds of the more expensive candy should he use? Solution: More expensive Less expensive Mixture No.
If 3 quarts of pure acid are added to the container. in terms of x. (B) 120 qts. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. (B) 96 lbs. what percent of the resulting mixture is acid? (A) 5 (B) 10 (C) 20 (D) 50 1 (E) 33 3 4. (D) 84 lbs. 3. www. (C) 100 lbs. 2. (A) 150 + 10x (B) 150 – 50x (C) 1500 – 10x (D) 1500 – 50x (E) 1500 + 10x How many pounds of nuts selling for 70 cents a pound must be mixed with 30 pounds of nuts selling at 90 cents a pound to make a mixture that will sell for 85 cents a pound? (A) 7. 5. (C) 100 qts. of x pounds of 40–cent cookies and (30 – x) pounds of 50cent cookies. Express. (E) 20 qts. (E) 140 lbs. How much water must be evaporated from 240 pounds of a solution that is 3% alcohol to strengthen it to a solution that is 5% alcohol? (A) 120 lbs. in cents.petersons.com .Problem Solving in Algebra 181 Exercise 6 Work out each problem. 1.5 (B) 10 (C) 22. A solution of 60 quarts of sugar and water is 20% sugar. How much water must be added to make a solution that is 5% sugar? (A) 180 qts. (D) 80 qts.5 (D) 40 (E) 12 A container holds 10 pints of a solution which is 20% acid. the value.
A separate line should be used for each moving object. d1 + d2 = total distance covered. but the one that leaves later “catches up” to the one that leaves earlier. the distances must be equal. The times are also different. the time must be in hours and the distance will be in miles. and distance. Motion in the same direction This type of problem is sometimes referred to as a “catch up” problem. B. Most motion problems fall into one of three categories. If the rate is given in miles per hour.p. the distance covered by the first object plus the distance covered by the second is equal to the total distance covered. the rate going is different from the rate returning. In either case..M.com . it is helpful to organize the information in a chart with columns for rate. then an equation must be written expressing this fact. Round trip In this type of problem. To solve any type of motion problem. from stations that are 405 miles apart and travel toward each other. RATE · TIME = DISTANCE The problems at the level of this examination usually deal with a relationship between distances. or when they start at a given distance apart and move toward each other. The rate of the passenger train is 45 miles per hour faster than that of the freight train.h. But if we go somewhere and then return to the starting point. A. This can be shown in the following diagram. www. If they pass each other at 1:30 P. In either case. C. Usually two objects leave the same place at different times and at different rates.petersons. Motion in opposite directions This can occur when objects start at the same point and move apart. If one is still ahead of the other. Example: A passenger train and a freight train leave at 10:30 A. MOTION PROBLEMS The fundamental relationship in all motion problems is that rate times time is equal to distance. time. Be very careful of units used.M. In such cases the two distances must be equal. how fast was the passenger train traveling? Solution: Notice that each train traveled exactly 3 hours.182 Chapter 12 7. Rate · Passenger Freight 3x + 135 + 3x = 405 6 x = 270 x = 45 Time 3 3 = Distance 3 x + 135 3x x + 45 x The rate of the passenger train was 90 m.
M. 40 x = 210 − 30 x 70 x = 210 x=3 · Time x 7–x = Distance 40x 210x – 30x 40 30 If he traveled 40 miles per hour for 3 hours. www..M.. or 5 P. while Susie traveled for x hours. Since Richard caught up to Susie. At what time did Richard catch up to Susie? Solution: Rate Susie Richard 30 45 · Time x x–2 = Distance 30x 45x – 90 Since Richard left 2 hours later than Susie. Example: How far can Scott drive into the country if he drives out at 40 miles per hour and returns over the same road at 30 miles per hour and spends 8 hours away from home including a onehour stop for lunch? Solution: His actual driving time is 7 hours. the other is what is left.com . the distances must be equal.. her brother Richard left home and started after her on the same road at 45 miles per hour.petersons. as these are times on the clock and not actual hours traveled. 30 x = 45 x − 90 90 = 15 x x=6 Susie traveled for 6 hours. At 1 P. when Richard caught up to her. or 7 – x. he went 120 miles. Rate Going Return The distances are equal. he traveled for x – 2 hours. traveling along Route 1 at 30 miles per hour.Problem Solving in Algebra 183 Example: Susie left her home at 11 A. If one part is x.M. Notice that we do not fill in 11 and 1 in the time column.M. which must be divided into two parts. which means it was 6 hours past 11 A.
M.h.com .M.M. and walked out into the country at 4 miles per hour. 9:30 P. If the rate of the faster car exceeded the rate of the slower car by 6 miles per hour. Joe left home at 10 A. a plane left Kennedy Airport for Los Angeles traveling at 600 m.M. two cars started traveling toward each other from towns 287 miles apart. They passed each other at 1:30 P. (A) 38 (B) 40 (C) 44 (D) 48 (E) 50 A motorist covers 350 miles in 8 hours. of the faster car.M. If he arrived home at 4 P. another plane left the same airport on the same route traveling at 650 m. find the rate. (D) 10 A. but after noon he averages only 40 miles per hour. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. (C) 9 A. In how many hours will the faster car be 30 miles ahead of the slower car? (A) 3 (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 4 6 6 1 4 1 2 5.p. One car averages 36 miles per hour and the other 31 miles per hour.M.M.M.petersons. 2.M. (B) 8 A.M. (E) 11 A.M.M.M.184 Chapter 12 Exercise 7 Work out each problem. in miles per hour.M.p. At 3 P. At what time did the second plane overtake the first? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5:15 P. 3.M. Before noon he averages 50 miles per hour. At 3:30 P. At what time did he leave? (A) 7 A. 6:45 P.. 6:50 P.h.M. 1. He returned on the same road at 2 miles per hour. how many miles into the country did he walk? (A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 10 (D) 11 (E) 12 Two cars leave a restaurant at the same time and proceed in the same direction along the same route. At 10 A. www. 7:15 P. 4.
each representing a fractional portion of the entire job. Powell to do the job alone? Solution: If it takes Mr.petersons. WORK PROBLEMS In most work problems. Mr. to mow the lawn. 40 + 20 = 2 x 60 = 2 x x = 30 minutes www. The sum of all the individual fractions must be 1 if the job is completed. the numerator should represent the time actually spent working. How long will it take them to complete the route if they work together? Solution: John Time actually spent Time needed to do entire job alone x 20 Steve x 30 + = 1 Multiply by 60 to clear fractions. Steve can complete the same route in 30 minutes. Example: John can complete a paper route in 20 minutes. For each part represented. 3x + 2 x = 60 5 x = 60 x = 12 Example: Mr. Mike will take twice as long. Powell x hours to mow the lawn. Together they do the job in 20 minutes. while the denominator should represent the total time needed to do the job alone. Powell can mow his lawn twice as fast as his son Mike.com .Problem Solving in Algebra 185 8. How many minutes would it take Mr. Powell Mike 20 x + 20 2x = 1 Multiply by 2x to clear fractions. or 2x hours. a job is broken up into several parts.
It can be drained by a drainpipe in 6 hours. Her younger sister Ruth can do the same job in 9 hours. What part of the barn is still unpainted after he has worked for x days? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. both pipes are opened at the same time.petersons. Mr. it takes three times as long to plow the same field. If he uses his manual plow. x 5 5 x x−5 x 5− x x 5− x 5 4. If the pool is empty. A swimming pool can be filled by an inlet pipe in 3 hours. Jones can plow his field with his tractor in 4 hours. By mistake. he ran out of gas and had to finish with the manual plow. In how many hours can they do the job if they work together? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 2 3 3 5 5. 1. in how many hours will it be filled? (A) 4 (B) (C) (D) (E) 4 5 5 6 1 2 1 2 www.186 Chapter 12 Exercise 8 Work out each problem. If Michael requires 6 hours to do the job alone. White can paint his barn in 5 days. 3 Michael and Barry can complete a job in 2 hours when working together.com . Mr. how many hours does Barry need to do the job alone? (A) 2 (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 3 3 4 1 2 1 2 4 1 4 4 1 4 2 3. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. After working with the tractor for two hours. How long did it take to complete the job after the tractor ran out of gas? (A) 4 hours (B) 6 hours (C) 7 hours (D) 8 hours (E) 8 1 hours 2 Mary can clean the house in 6 hours.
M. (C) 2 P. Cooper invested a sum of money at 6%.com . 12 min.petersons. If she has four fewer dimes than quarters. 1. (B) 2:30 P. 4. At 9:30 A. Find the original 9 fraction. 50 min. while another press can print it in 18 hours.M.M. how much did he invest at 3%? (A) $700 (B) $650 (C) $500 (D) $550 (E) $600 Two buses are 515 miles apart.M. Janet has $2. 6. (C) 6 hrs. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. (D) 7 hrs. How long will the job take if both presses work simultaneously? (A) 7 hrs. how much money does she have in dimes? (A) 30¢ (B) 80¢ (C) $1. 36 min. If 8 is added to the numerator and 6 is subtracted from the denominator. (A) 7 (B) 9 (C) 11 (D) 13 (E) 15 The denominator of a fraction is three times the numerator. at 3%. 20 min.Problem Solving in Algebra 187 RETEST Work out each problem. www.M. $150 more than the first.20 (D) 70¢ (E) 90¢ Mr. (E) 7 hrs. Find the middle integer. (E) 3:30 P. 2. they start traveling toward each other at rates of 48 and 55 miles per hour. 15 min. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3.M. 16 18 1 3 8 24 5 3 8 16 5. Three times the first of three consecutive odd integers is 10 more than the third.05 in dimes and quarters. the resulting 8 fraction is equivalent to . (D) 3 P. One printing press can print the school newspaper in 12 hours. At what time will they pass each other? (A) 1:30 P. (B) 6 hrs. He invested a second sum. How old was Miriam 2 years ago? (A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 9 (D) 17 (E) 19 8. How many quarts of water must be added to 40 quarts of a 5% acid solution to dilute it to a 2% solution? (A) 80 (B) 40 (C) 60 (D) 20 (E) 50 Miriam is 11 years older than Charles. In three years she will be twice as old as Charles will be then. If his total annual income was $54. 7.
p.h.188 Chapter 12 9. 10. Carol started from home on a trip averaging 30 miles per hour.p. (E) 60 m. (D) 55 m. How many pennies did Dan have originally? (A) 24 (B) 12 (C) 36 (D) 48 (E) 52 www. Dan has twice as many pennies as Frank. both boys will have the same number of pennies.com .h. (B) 39 m. If Frank wins 12 pennies from Dan.p.p. How fast must her mother drive to catch up to her in 3 hours if she leaves 30 minutes after Carol? (A) 35 m.h.h.h.petersons. (C) 40 m.p.
05 ( 2 x ) = 210 5. (B) Let x = amount invested at 4% 2 x = amount invested at 5% . www. he drove 300 miles.com . x + 4 = −3 2. (B) Represent the first two sides as 4x and 3x.25 x = 250 15 x = 150 x = 10 8. 4 x + 5 ( 2 x ) = 21.04 x + . (D) Represent the integers as x. (C) Represent the original fraction by x . (B) Slow Fast R x x + 20 · T 3 3 = D 3x 3x + 60 x + x + 2 = 4 ( x + 4) 2 x + 2 = 4 x + 16 −14 = 2 x x = −7. 3. and x + 4. (E) Darren x 20 + Valerie x 30 =1 Multiply by 60. (D) Original Added New No of Quarts · 18 x 18 + x Percent Amount of Alcohol = Alcohol 32 0 12 576 0 216 + 12x 9. (A) Let x = Adam's age now 3x = Meredith's age now x + 6 = Adam's age in 6 years 3x + 6 = Meredith's age in 6 years 3x + 6 = 2 ( x + 6 ) 3x + 6 = 2 x + 12 x=6 576 = 216 + 12 x 360 = 12 x x = 30 10. 3x + 2 x = 60 5 x = 60 x = 12 4. then the third side is 7x – 20.Problem Solving in Algebra 189 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. 000 14 x = 21. 000 x = $1500 60 x = 50 x + 50 10 x = 50 x=5 If he drove for 5 hours at 60 miles per hour. 6.petersons. x + 2 = −5. 3x + 6 = 4 x − 4 x = 10 The shortest side is 3(6) = 18. (E) Going Return R 60 50 · T x x+1 = D 60x 50x + 50 Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals. 4 x + 3x + ( 7 x − 20 ) = 64 14 x − 20 = 64 14 x = 84 x=6 3x + 3x + 60 = 300 6 x = 240 x = 40 7. x + 2. (D) Let x = the number of dimes 16 − x = the number of quarters 10 x = value of dimes in cents 400 − 25 x = value of quarters in cents 10 x + 400 . 2x x+2 2 = 2x − 2 3 Cross multiply.
If a difference is positive. (A) Let x = number of dimes 4 x = number of quarters 10 x = value of dimes in cents 0 100x = value of quarters in cents a Exercise 2 1. the second is n – 1.petersons. (C) Represent the integers as x. and the first is n – 2. (B) Consecutive integers are 1 apart. 10 x + 600 − 15 x = 540 −5 x = −60 x = 12 4. (B) Let x = number of 10cent stamps 40 − x = number of 15cent stamps 10x = value of 10cent stamps 600 − 15 x = value of 15cent stamps 5. so simply add 1. worth $1. www.190 Chapter 12 Exercise 1 1. divide their sum by 4. and x + 2.com . x + x + 2 = 26 2 x = 24 x = 12 x + 1 = 13 2. (A) Let x = number of nickels 45 − x = number of dimes 5 x = value of nickels in cents 450 − 10x = value of dimes in cents 5 x + 450 − 10 x = 350 −5 x = −100 x = 20 20 nickels and 25 dimes 3. (C) Let 3x = number of nickels 4 x = number of dimes 3x + 4 x = 28 7 x = 28 x=4 There are 16 dimes. 10 x + 100 x = 220 100 x = 220 x=2 2. (D) The other integer is n + 2. (C) An even integer follows an odd integer. x + 1. (D) To find the average of any 4 numbers. 3. (C) Let x = number of nickels 30 − x = number of quarters 5 x = value of nickels in cents 750 − 25 x = value of quarters in cents 5 x + 750 − 25 x = 470 −20 x = −280 x = 14 5. If the fourth is n + 1.60. The sum of these is 4n – 2. the larger quantity must come first. the third is n. 4.
Her present age is 2x – 1. To find her age 2 years ago.03(x) = 300 Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals. 7 years ago. Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals. (E) He invested 10. 2.000 – x dollars at 5%. (C) Let x = Stephen's age now 4 x = Mark's age now x + 1 = Stephen's age in 1 year 4 x + 1 = Mark's age in 1 year 4 x + 1 = 3( x + 1) 4 x + 1 = 3x + 3 x=2 Exercise 4 1. Mr. The income is .com . (D) Let x = amount invested at 3% 2000 + x = her total investment . 4.x ) Jack is now 16. subtract another 2. 5 ( 3x ) + 6 ( 2 x ) + 3( x ) = 30. (B) She invested x + 400 dollars at 5%. or $320. Burke's age now x + 8 = Jack's age in 8 years x + 32 = Mr.05(x + 400). 000 15 x + 12 x + 3x = 30. 3. His inheritance was 6x. represent his 1 his inheritance is 2x. 000 + 3x = 8000 + 4 x 4000 = x Mark is now 8.06(2x) + .000 – x). 000 x = 1000 5.05(10. Lili was 16 and Melanie was 8. 4 x = 5 ( 7200 − x ) 4 x = 36. 5. 3 inheritance as 6x. Then 1 his inheritance is 3x 2 Let 3x = amount invested at 5% 2 x = amount invested at 6% x = amount invested at 3% .03x = . 000 − 5 x 9 x = 36.04 x = .05(3x) + . 000 x = 4000 Her income is .04(4000) + . Subtract each number from both ages. The income is . Burke is 40.petersons. www. 2. Burke's age in 8 years x + 32 = 2 ( x + 8 ) x + 32 = 2 x + 16 16 = x Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals. (D) Alice’s present age is 4x – 2. In 3 years her age will be 4x + 1. (B) Let x = amount invested at 4% 7200 − x = amount invested at 5% . 3. to see which results in Lili being twice as old as Melanie. Let x = number of years ago Then 23 – x = 2(15 – x) 23 – x = 30 – 2x 7=x 4.06 ( 2000 ) + .05 ( 7200 . This is $160 + $160. (A) The fastest reasoning here is from the answers. (E) and In order to avoid fractions. (D) Let x = Jack's age now x + 24 = Mr.05(3200). so 2 years ago he was 6.Problem Solving in Algebra 191 Exercise 3 1.04 ( 2000 + x ) 6 ( 2000 ) + 3x = 4 ( 2000 + x ) 12. (D) Karen’s age now can be found by subtracting 2 from her age 2 years from now. 000 30 x = 30. or $6000.
192 Chapter 12 Exercise 5 1. 5x 4x + 4 2 = 5 x + 10 3 Exercise 6 1.com . it is fastest to reason from the answers.00 = Amount of Acid 2 6 8 3. Therefore. the new solution is 1 or 50% acid. Add 5 to each numerator and denominator to see which will result in a new fraction equal to 7 . (D) Represent the original fraction as 4x . (B) The original denominator is 2x. x was subtracted from 240 to represent the number of pounds in the mixture. (D) No. 8 x + 32 = 10 x + 20 12 = 2 x x=6 5. or 12. 7 + 3 10 2 = = 12 + 3 15 3 4. (E) Here again. (B) No. 720 = 5 ( 240 − x ) 720 = 1200 − 5 x 5 x = 480 x = 96 www. (C) Represent the original fraction by x . it is probably easier to 21 + x 7 equation 70 x + 2700 = 85 ( x + 30 ) 70 x + 2700 = 85 x + 2550 150 = 15 x x = 10 work from the answers.petersons. Try adding each choice to the numerator and denominator of which gives a result equal to 5 + 7 12 3 = = 21 + 7 28 7 3 . 12 x + 12 = 10 x + 20 2x = 8 x=4 2. There are now 8 pints of acid in 16 pints of solution. of Pounds 240 x 240 – x · % of Alcohol = 3 0 5 Amount of Sugar 720 0 5(240 – x ) Notice that when x quarts were evaporated. or 16. 40 ( x ) + 50 ( 30 − x ) = 40 x + 1500 − 50 x = 1500 − 10 x Cross multiply. 9 + 5 14 7 = = 15 + 5 20 10 10 Remember that 3 quarts of acid are 6 pints. of Pounds · x 30 x + 30 Price per Pound = 70 90 85 Total Value 70x 2700 85(x + 30) The original numerator was 4x. of Pints Original 10 Added New 6 16 % of Acid . of Quarts 60 x 60 + x · % of Sugar = 20 0 5 Amount of Sugar 1200 0 5(60 + x ) x+4 5 = 2x + 4 8 1200 = 5 ( 60 + x ) 1200 = 300 + 5 x 900 = 5 x x = 180 Cross multiply. (E) While this can be solved using the 5+ x 3 = . 2 4. (C) Multiply the number of pounds by the price per pound to get the total value. 2x No. (C) Here again.20 1. 2. add 3 to each numerator and denominator of the given choices to see which will result in a new fraction equal to 2 . (A) 3 5. No. 7 5 to see 21 3.
(E) R 600 650 · T x x– 1 2 = D 600x 650(x – 1 ) 2 This problem may be reasoned without an equation. (C) Slow Fast R x x+6 · T 3.5 3. 50 x + 40 (8 − x ) = 350 50 x + 320 − 40 x = 350 10 x = 30 x=3 They travel the same number of hours. 35 x + 35 ( x + 6 ) = 2870 35 x + 35 x + 210 = 2870 70 x = 2660 x = 38 If he walked for 2 hours at 4 miles per hour.Problem Solving in Algebra 193 Exercise 7 1.h. traveled for 6 2 hours.M.M.5(x + 6) = 287 Multiply by 10 to eliminate decimals.com . (D) R 36 31 The rate of the faster car was x + 6 or 44 m. If the faster car gains 5 miles per hour on the slower car. to 1 1:30 P. which is 3 hours.5 = D 3. 4 x = 2 (6 − x ) 4 x = 12 − 2 x 6 x = 12 x=2 3. 5.5(x + 6) 4.M.M. 3. 36 x − 31x = 30 5 x = 30 x=6 If he traveled 3 hours before noon. The time is then 9:30 P. he walked for 8 miles. (C) Before noon After noon R 50 40 · · T = D x 50x 8–x 40(8 – x ) T x x = D 36x 31x The 8 hours must be divided into 2 parts. 2 He was gone for 6 hours. 2 The plane that left at 3 P.p.M. The later plane traveled 1 600 x = 650 x − 2 600 x = 650 x − 325 325 = 50 x 61 = x 2 1 hour less.petersons. it will gain 30 miles in 6 hours.5x 3. he left at 9 A. 1 www. 2..5x + 3. (B) Going Return R 4 2 · T x 6–x = D 4x 2(6 – x ) The cars each traveled from 10 A.
com . (C) Original Added New 200 = 80 + 2 x 120 = 2 x x = 60 8 . 5 To find what part is still unpainted. as half the job was completed by the tractor.petersons. x + 2. as the drainpipe does not help the inlet pipe but works against it. and x + 4. (C) Michael 2 6 Barry 2 x 4. (D) Let x = Charles' age now x + 11 = Miriam's age now x + 3 = Charles' age in 3 years x + 14 = Miriam's age in 3 years g x + 14 = 2 ( x + 3) x + 14 = 2 x + 6 x=8 + =1 Multiply by 6x. 24 Multiply by 6. therefore. 5.194 Chapter 12 Exercise 8 1. the second fraction must also be equal to 1 . (E) Inlet x 3 − Drain x 6 =1 The original fraction is 3. 3x + 2 x = 18 5 x = 18 3 x=3 5 x +8 8 = 3x − 6 9 Cross multiply. 3x = ( x + 4 ) + 10 2 x = 14 x=7 x+2=9 2. (B) Represent the integers as x. of Quarts 40 x 40 + x Percent 5 0 2 Amount of 200 0 80 + 2x · Alcohol = Alcohol Notice the two fractions are subtracted. 2x − x = 6 x=6 No. Think of 1 as . 5 x 5− x − = 5 5 5 5 x Retest 1. 3x Multiply by 18. (B) Mary x 6 + Ruth x 9 2. he has painted of the barn. x is 2 therefore 6. (E) In x days. www. subtract the 5 part completed from 1. Miriam is 19 now and 2 years ago was 17. (B) Tractor 2 4 Plow x 12 + =1 This can be done without algebra. 4. =1 (C) Represent the original fraction by x . 9 x + 72 = 24 x − 48 120 = 15 x x=8 3x = 24 3. 2 x + 12 = 6 x 12 = 4 x x=3 Therefore.
h. (D) Let x = number of pennies Frank has 2 x = number of pennies Dan has Multiply by 100 to eliminate decimals 6 x + 3( x + 150 ) = 5400 6 x + 3x + 450 = 5400 9 x = 4950 x = $550 x + 150 = $700 x + 12 = 2 x − 12 x = 24 Therefore.p.06x + ..Problem Solving in Algebra 195 5. · T 3. www. (A) Let x = the number of dimes x + 4 = the number of quarters 10 x = the value of dimes in cents 25 x + 100 = the value of quarters in cents Therefore. 7. 2:30 P. (A) Fast Press x 12 + Slow Press x 18 8. 3x + 2 x = 36 5 x = 36 1 x = 7 hours 5 = 7 hours 12 minutes 48 x + 55 x = 515 103x = 515 x = 5 hours 6. (A) Let x = amount invested at 6% x + 150 = amount invested at 3% .M.03(x + 150) = 54 10.com . =1 (B) Slow Fast R 48 55 · T x x = D 48x 55x Multiply by 36.M.5 3 = D 105 3x 10 x + 25 x + 100 = 205 35 x = 105 x=3 30 x She has 30¢ in dimes. (A) R Carol Mother 3x = 105 x = 35 m. they will pass each other 5 hours after 9:30 A.petersons. Dan originally had 48 pennies. 9.
.
(A) 12 (B) 36 (C) 4 3 (D) 48 (E) 144 A spotlight is attached to the ceiling 2 feet from one wall of a room and 3 feet from the wall adjacent. 197 . 3. In triangle ABC. A rectangular box with a square base contains 24 cubic feet. How many feet is it from the intersection of the two walls? (A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 3 2 (D) 13 (E) 2 3 In parallelogram ABCD. 1. If the height of the box is 18 inches. What is the measure in degrees of angle B? (A) 30 (B) 60 (C) 100 (D) 120 (E) 150 2. find the number of degrees in angle A. Answers are at the end of the chapter. If the angles of a triangle are in the ratio 5 : 6 : 7. (A) x (B) 180 – x (C) (D) (E) 180 − x 2 x 90 − 2 90 – x 4. the triangle is (A) acute (B) isosceles (C) obtuse (D) right (E) equilateral A circle whose area is 4 has a radius of x.Geometry 13 5. Find the area of a circle whose radius is 3x. how many feet are there in each side of the base? (A) 4 (B) 2 (C) (D) (E) 6. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. angle B is 5 times as large as angle C. AB = BC. 2 3 3 3 2 3 DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem. If angle B contains x degrees.
you cannot multiply a dimension given in feet by another given in inches when you are finding area. AB is perpendicular to BC. As mentioned earlier. find the number of degrees in angle ABY. In a circle whose center is O. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 110 140 70 40 30 The questions in the following area will expect you to recall some of the numerical relationships learned in geometry. 1) and (5. all the needed formulas with illustrations and practice exercises are to help you prepare for the geometry questions on your test. If angle XBY is a straight angle and angle XBC contains 37°.198 Chapter 13 7. In the following sections. Find the length of the line segment joining the points whose coordinates are (–3.com . www. If you are thoroughly familiar with these relationships. arc AB contains 100°. (A) 10 (B) (C) (D) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 8. 37 53 63 127 143 (E) 2 5 2 10 100 10 If AB is parallel to CD . 9.petersons. Find the number of degrees in angle ABO. Read each question very carefully for the units given. find the number of degrees in angle FEG. (A) 50 (B) 100 (C) 40 (D) 65 (E) 60 10. In the diagram below. be particularly careful with units. you should not find these questions difficult. –5). angle 1 contains 40°. and angle 2 contains 30°. For example.
petersons. 1 2 1 dd 2 1 2 C. Rectangle = base · altitude = bh Area = 40 B. Parallelogram = base · altitude = bh Area = 40 Notice that the altitude is different from the side. the area of ABCD = 1 (20)(30) = 300 2 www. as a perpendicular is the shortest distance from a point to a line. It is always shorter than the second side of the parallelogram.com .Geometry 199 1. Rhombus = · product of the diagonals = If AC = 20 and BD = 30. AREAS A.
petersons.com . however. Square = side · side = s2 Area = 25 Remember that every square is a rhombus.200 Chapter 13 D. Triangle = 1 2 · base · altitude = 1 bh 2 A= 1 (8)(3) = 12 2 F. so you may use bh if you do not know the diagonals. Trapezoid = 1 2 · altitude · sum of bases = 1 h ( b1 + b2 ) 2 A= 1 (3)(14) = 21 2 www. Equilateral Triangle = 1 4 · side squared · 3= s2 3 4 A= 36 3=9 3 4 G. so that the rhombus formula may be used for a square if the diagonal is given. Area = 1 (8)(8) = 32 2 Remember also that a rhombus is not a square. A rhombus. Therefore do not use the s2 formula for a rhombus. E. is a parallelogram. The diagonals of a square are equal.
can be used to cover a given surface.com .. The approximations 22 you have used for π in the past (3. www. 3 one foot squares in a row 3 rows 9 square feet in 1 sq. π is an irrational number and cannot 7 be expressed as a fraction or terminating decimal. yd. That is. To change from square inches to square feet or square yards. we wish to compute how many squares one inch on each side (a square inch) or one foot on each side (a square foot).Geometry 201 H.petersons. A word about units—Area is measured in square units. ft. etc. 3' = 1 yd.14 or ) are just that—approximations. remember that 144 square inches = 1 square foot 9 square feet = 1 square yard c 12" = 1' 12 one inch squares in a row 12 rows 144 square inches in 1 sq. Therefore all answers involving π should be left in terms of π unless you are given a specific value to substitute for π. π = d . Circle = π · radius squared = π · r2 A = π · (5)2 = 25π Remember that π is the ratio of the circumference of any circle and its diameter.
8. 1. (A) 8 (B) 15 (C) 1 (D) 34 (E) 5 The sides of a right triangle are 6.202 Chapter 13 Exercise 1 Work out each problem.4 (B) 4. www.4 (D) 3.2 4.petersons. 2. Find the base of the parallelogram. Find the altitude drawn to the hypotenuse. (A) 6π (B) 3π (C) 9π (D) 36π (E) 12π 5. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Express the area of the circle in terms of π. 3. the base is represented by x + 7 and the altitude is x – 7.8 (C) 3. How many square yards of carpeting are needed to cover the floor? (A) 360 (B) 42 (C) 40 (D) 240 (E) 90 In a parallelogram whose area is 15. The dimensions of a rectangular living room are 18 feet by 20 feet.5 (E) 4. If the diagonals of a rhombus are represented by 4x and 6x. the area may be represented by (A) 6x (B) 24x (C) 12x (D) 6x2 (E) 12x2 A circle is inscribed in a square whose side is 6. (A) 2. and 10.com .
petersons. these formulas are the same. Any polygon = sum of all sides P = 9 + 10 + 11 = 30 B. every point on the rim comes in contact with the ground. C = π · 8 = 8π or C = 2 · π · 4 = 8π The distance covered by a wheel in one revolution is equal to the circumference of the wheel. the number of feet of fencing you would need is the perimeter. In making one revolution.Geometry 203 2. Circle = π · diameter = πd or 2 · π · radius = 2πr Since 2r = d. that is. The perimeter of a circle is called its circumference. If you were fencing in an area. centimeters. inches. The distance covered by this wheel in one revolution is 2 ⋅ π ⋅ 7 = 14 feet. meters.com . etc. Perimeter is measured in linear units. The distance covered is then the same as stretching the rim out into a straight line. yards. feet. PERIMETER The perimeter of a figure is the distance around the outside. A. π www.
204 Chapter 13 Exercise 2 Work out each problem. (A) 36 (B) 26 (C) 13 (D) 24 (E) none of these 2. www. (A) 24 (B) 16 (C) 48 (D) 24 3 (E) 48 3 The hour hand of a clock is 3 feet long. How many feet does the tip of this hand move between 9:30 P. (A) 360π (B) 360 (C) 720π (D) 720 (E) 60π A square is equal in area to a rectangle whose base is 9 and whose altitude is 4. Find the perimeter of the square.petersons.5 4. 3. The area of an equilateral triangle is 16 3 . 1. the following day? (A) π (B) 2π (C) 3π (D) 4π (E) 24π If the radius of a circle is increased by 3. Find the number of feet covered by this wheel in 20 revolutions. Circle the letter that appear before your answer. The radius of a wheel is 18 inches. and 1:30 A. the circumference is increased by (A) 3 (B) 3π (C) 6 (D) 6π (E) 4. Find its perimeter.com . 5.M.M.
12.Geometry 205 3. 5 5. 25 Squaring 34 and 16 to apply the Pythagorean theorem would take too much time. Pythagorean triples These are sets of numbers that satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem. 15. for. 4. if you recognize given numbers as multiples of Pythagorean triples. 4. Pythagorean theorem (leg)2 + (leg)2 = (hypotenuse)2 ( 5 )2 + ( 2 )2 = x 2 25 + 4 = x 2 29 = x 2 x = 29 B. 10 or 30. Memorizing the sets of Pythagorean triples that follow will save you valuable time in solving problems. recognize the hypotenuse as 2(17). 13 8. 17 triangle. 24. When a given set of numbers such as 3. the missing leg will be 2(15) or 30. Instead. any multiples of this set such as 6. without any computation at all. 15. 17 7. www. The most common Pythagorean triples that should be memorized are 3. Since the given leg is 2(8). RIGHT TRIANGLES A.petersons. Suspect an 8.com . 50 also form a Pythagorean triple. 8. 40. 5 forms a Pythagorean triple (32 + 42 = 52). you do not have to do any arithmetic at all.
c) An altitude in an equilateral triangle forms a 30°–60°–90° triangle and is therefore equal to onehalf the side · 3 . 45°–45°–90° triangle (isosceles right triangle) a) b) c) Each leg is onehalf the hypotenuse times Hypotenuse is leg times 2. D.com . 2. The diagonal of a square forms a 45°–45°–90° triangle and is therefore equal to a side times www.petersons. 30°–60°–90° triangle a) The leg opposite the 30° angle is onehalf the hypotenuse.206 Chapter 13 C. b) The leg opposite the 60° angle is onehalf the hypotenuse · 3 . 2.
If the ratio of length to width is 3 : 4. Find the perimeter of a square whose diagonal is 6 2 . in feet. of the field. 2. 5. 1.Geometry 207 Exercise 3 Work out each problem.com . one traveling due west at 8 miles per hour and the other due north at 15 miles per hour. (A) 50 (B) 100 (C) 20 (D) 10 (E) cannot be determined Find the altitude of an equilateral triangle whose side is 20. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons. A farmer uses 140 feet of fencing to enclose a rectangular field. Two boats leave the same dock at the same time. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. How many miles apart are the boats after three hours? (A) 17 (B) 69 (C) 75 (D) 51 (E) 39 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 8 10 12 15 20 www. find the diagonal. (A) 24 (B) 12 2 (C) 12 (D) 20 (E) 24 2 Find the length of DB. 10 20 3 10 3 20 2 10 2 4.
com . Distance between two points = ( x2 − x1 )2 + ( y2 . 1. Find the distance from the point whose coordinates are (4. 0) (D) (–4. The midpoint of a line segment = x1 + x 2 y1 + y2 2 .petersons. 4) (C) (4. . 2 2 The vertices of a triangle are (2. –2) (D) (0. 0) (E) (2. –4) 1 2 . (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 3. find the coordinates of A. 2 Since a midpoint is in the middle. 0) (E) (0. and (5. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.1 2 1 −1. 6) and the coordinates of B are (6. Remember that to find the average of two numbers. (2.( 1) = 2 2 (8)2 + (3)2 = 64 + 9 = 73 B. If the coordinates of O are (2. If the coordinates of A are (2. 6). (A) 5 (B) 25 (C) 7 (D) (E) 67 15 2. 5). 4) (B) (4. −2 2 www. 6).208 Chapter 13 4. The midpoint of the segment joining (–4.4 ) . you add them and divide by two. AB is the diameter of a circle whose center is O.y1 )2 The distance between (–3. 1 1. 3) to the point whose coordinates are (8. 4.0) is 16π. find the coordinates of O. 4) (B) (0. (A) (4. COORDINATE GEOMETRY A. 1). Review the rules given earlier if necessary. 3 2 3. (0. –9) is −4 + ( 2 ) 1 + ( 9 ) 6 8 = ( 3. 1) to (–2. = 2 2 2 2 Exercise 4 Work out each problem. The circle passes through each of the following points except (A) (4. its coordinates are found by averaging the x coordinates and averaging the y coordinates. 1) and the coordinates of B are (4. 2) AB is the diameter of a circle whose center is O. 2). 1). Be very careful of signs in adding signed numbers. –4) (C) (2. The area of the triangle is (A) 12 (B) 10 (C) 8 (D) 6 (E) 5 The area of a circle whose center is at (0. 2) and (5. –1) is −3 − 5 + 2 . –4) 5.
If AB is parallel to CD . angle 1 + angle 4 = 180° angle 2 + angle 3 = 180° www. the alternate interior angles are congruent. PARALLEL LINES A.com . then angle 1 ≅ angle 3 and angle 2 ≅ angle 4. interior angles on the same side of the transversal are supplementary. If two lines are parallel and cut by a transversal. If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. then angle 1 ≅ angle 5 angle 2 ≅ angle 6 angle 3 ≅ angle 7 angle 4 ≅ angle 8 C. B.petersons. If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. If AB is parallel to CD . the corresponding angles are congruent. If AB is parallel to CD .Geometry 209 5.
Circle the letter that appears before your answer. If AB is parallel to CD . and angle B = 30°.210 Chapter 13 Exercise 5 Work out each problem. If AB is parallel to CD. 4. find the number of degrees in angle D. EF bisects angle BEG. find angle 2. If AB is parallel to CD . 1. 35 45 70 80 100 If AB is parallel to CD and angle 1 = 130°. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2x° (180 – x)° 180° (180 + x)° none of these (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 130° 100° 40° 60° 50° www. and GF bisects angle EGD. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. then the sum of angle 1 and angle 2 is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. BC is parallel to ED .com . and angle C = 45°. angle A = 35°. find the number of degrees in angle AEC. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 40 60 90 120 cannot be determined If AB is parallel to CD and angle 1 = x°. find the number of degrees in angle EFG. 30 60 150 120 none of these 5.petersons.
com . If AB ≅ AC . If two angles of a triangle are congruent. the sides opposite these angles are congruent. then angle B ≅ angle C.petersons. C. If two sides of a triangle are congruent. B. Angle F = 180º – 100º – 30º = 50º.Geometry 211 6. If angle S ≅ angle T. www. TRIANGLES A. then RS ≅ RT . the angles opposite these sides are congruent. The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180°.
If two angles of one triangle are congruent to two angles of a second triangle. Angle 1 = 140° E. www.petersons.212 Chapter 13 D. the third angles are congruent.com . The measure of an exterior angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of the measures of the two remote interior angles. Angle A will be congruent to angle R.
find the number of degrees in angle B. (A) 180 – x (B) x – 180 (C) 2x – 180 (D) 180 – 2x (E) 90 – 2x In triangle ABC. angle A is three times as large as angle B. If a base angle of an isosceles triangle is represented by x°. AB = BC . (A) 50 (B) 130 (C) 60 (D) 65 (E) 55 In triangle ABC. The angles of a triangle are in the ratio 1 : 5 : 6. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.com .petersons. This triangle is (A) acute (B) obtuse (C) isosceles (D) right (E) equilateral If the vertex angle of an isosceles triangle is 50°. www. 1. (A) 60 (B) 80 (C) 20 (D) 25 (E) 75 4. The exterior angle at C is 100°. Find the number of degrees in angle A. If angle A = (4x – 30)° and angle C = (2x + 10)°. (A) 20 (B) 40 (C) 50 (D) 100 (E) 80 2. 5.Geometry 213 Exercise 6 Work out each problem. find the number of degrees in one of the base angles. represent the number of degrees in the vertex angle. 3.
Properties of a square a) b) c) All 5 parallelogram properties Two additional rectangle properties Three additional rhombus properties www. POLYGONS A. Properties of a rhombus a) b) c) d) All 5 properties of a parallelogram All sides are congruent Diagonals are perpendicular to each other Diagonals bisect the angles E. The sum of the measures of the angles of a polygon of n sides is (n – 2)180°. Since ABCDE has 5 sides. angle A + angle B + angle C + angle D + angle E = (5 – 2)180° = 3(180)° = 540° B.com . Properties of a parallelogram a) b) c) d) e) Opposite sides are parallel Opposite sides are congruent Opposite angles are congruent Consecutive angles are supplementary Diagonals bisect each other C.214 Chapter 13 7. Properties of a rectangle a) b) c) All 5 properties of a parallelogram All angles are right angles Diagonals are congruent D.petersons.
2. www. BC = x – 6. and CD = 4x – 4. AB = x + 8. and CD = 2x – 16. Find AD. (C) A rectangle is a rhombus.Geometry 215 Exercise 7 Work out each problem. 5. (B) A rhombus is a parallelogram. 3. (A) 20 (B) 24 (C) 28 (D) 14 (E) 10 In parallelogram ABCD. (E) A square is a rectangle. (A) 360 (B) 540 (C) 720 (D) 900 (E) 1080 In parallelogram ABCD.petersons.com . BC = 3x. AB = x + 4. (D) A rectangle is a parallelogram. ABCD must be a (A) rectangle (B) rhombus (C) trapezoid (D) square (E) pentagon 4. 1. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. The sum of the angles in a rhombus is (A) 180° (B) 360° (C) 540° (D) 720° (E) 450° Which of the following statements is false? (A) A square is a rhombus. Find the number of degrees in the sum of the interior angles of a hexagon.
then angle AOB = 50°. If arc AC = 100°.216 Chapter 13 8. B. If arc AD = 30° and arc CB = 120°.petersons. If arc AB = 50°. a secant and a tangent. D. then AB ≅ AD. A central angle is equal in degrees to its intercepted arc. An angle formed by two chords intersecting in a circle is equal in degrees to onehalf the sum of its intercepted arcs. An angle outside the circle formed by two secants. or two tangents is equal in degrees to onehalf the difference of its intercepted arcs. Two tangent segments drawn to a circle from the same external point are congruent. An inscribed angle is equal in degrees to onehalf its intercepted arc. then angle ABC = 50°. C. then angle C = 45°.com . CIRCLES A. E. If AC and AE are tangent to circle O at B and D. www. then angle AED = 75°. If arc AD = 120° and arc BD = 30°.
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 120° 50° 70° 40° 60° www. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 4.Geometry 217 Exercise 8 Work out each problem.petersons. find the length of side AB. (A) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. Find the number of degrees in arc AC. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. 1. 40° 20° 50° 70° 80° (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 y 2 y 1 x 2 1 ( x − y) 2 1 ( x + y) 2 Find angle x.com . 60 50 25 100 20 The number of degrees in angle ABC is Find angle x. If circle O is inscribed in triangle ABC. 12 14 9 10 7 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.
width. The volume of a cylinder is equal to π times the square of the radius of the base times the height. and height. The volume of a cube is equal to the cube of an edge.petersons. V = π (4)2 (5) = 80π www. V = (10)(6)(5) = 300 B.com . and height are all equal. VOLUMES A. The volume of a rectangular solid is equal to the product of its length.218 Chapter 13 9. since the length. V = (3)3 = 27 C. width.
Geometry 219 Exercise 9 Work out each problem.petersons.9 4. The surface area of a cube is 96 square feet. How many minutes will it take to fill the tank if its radius is 3 inches and its height is 14 inches? 22 (Use π = ) 7 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 25 40 480 768 300 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 14 3 44 30 27 35 2 9 www.8 7 4.1 4. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. Approximately how many gallons will the pail hold if there are 231 cubic 22 inches to a gallon? (Use π = ) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. If the water is to be transferred to smaller tanks in the form of cubes 4 inches on a side.2 6. 8 5. . how many of these tanks are needed? (A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 7 (E) 8 The base of a rectangular tank is 6 feet by 5 feet and its height is 16 inches. 2. Water is poured into a cylindrical tank at the rate of 9 cubic inches a minute. How many cubic feet are there in the volume of the cube? (A) 16 (B) 4 (C) 12 (D) 64 (E) 32 A cylindrical pail has a radius of 7 inches and a height of 10 inches. A rectangular tank 10 inches by 8 inches by 4 inches is filled with water. Find the number of cubic feet of water in the tank when it is 5 full.com . 1.7 5.
diameters. and circumferences.5 because the linear ratio is 6 : 3 or 2 : 1. the ratio of their areas is equal to the square of the linear ratio.petersons. the area of triangle ABC will be 9 times as great as the area of triangle DEF. When figures are similar. The linear ratio is 12 : 4 or 3 : 1. When figures are similar. If triangle ABC is similar to triangle DEF. This includes the ratios of corresponding sides.com . angle bisectors. The area ratio will be the square of this or 9 : 1. D. all ratios between corresponding lines are equal. SIMILAR POLYGONS A. If the area of triangle ABC had been given as 27. perimeters. then EF must be equal to 12 as the ratio of corresponding sides is 2 : 6 or 1 : 3. The ratio is referred to as the linear ratio or ratio of similitude. medians. then EH is equal to 2. B. Corresponding sides of similar polygons are in proportion. C. radii.220 Chapter 13 10. If triangle ABC is similar to triangle DEF and the sides and angles are given as marked. the area of triangle DEF would be 3. If triangle ABC is similar to triangle DEF and the segments are given as marked. altitudes. Corresponding angles of similar polygons are congruent. www.
The ratio of areas would be 4 : 1. 5. find the radius of the larger circle. www. (A) 10π (B) 15π (C) 20π (D) 30π (E) 45π If the length and width of a rectangle are each doubled. If the area of a circle of radius x is 5π. The ratio of sides is 4 : 2 or 2 : 1. If a dimension of the larger solid is 25. then (A) the circumference and area are both doubled (B) the circumference is doubled and the area is multiplied by 4 (C) the circumference is multiplied by 4 and the area is doubled (D) the circumference and area are each multiplied by 4 (E) the circumference stays the same and the area is doubled The volumes of two similar solids are 250 and 128.petersons. 3.8 (B) 15 (C) 20 (D) 40 (E) cannot be determined 2. If the radius of a circle is doubled.Geometry 221 E. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. the ratio of their volumes is equal to the cube of their linear ratio. 1. The ratio of volumes would be 8 : 1. The volume of the larger cube is 8 times the volume of the smaller cube. the area is increased by (A) 50% (B) 100% (C) 200% (D) 300% (E) 400% The area of one circle is 9 times as great as the area of another. find the area of a circle of radius 3x. Exercise 10 Work out each problem. (A) 9 (B) 12 (C) 18 (D) 24 (E) 27 4. (A) 12. find the corresponding side of the smaller solid. When figures are similar.com . If the radius of the smaller circle is 3.
(A) 4 (B) 8 (C) 5 (D) 6 (E) 7 10. by 6 in. 8. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 9. in inches. 4. –3) to B(7. then the ratio of the area of a face of the larger cube to the area of a face of the smaller cube is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 35° 80° 245° 65° 55° (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2:1 4:1 2 :1 8:1 2 2 :1 www. of a cube whose volume is equal to the volume of a rectangular solid 2 in. The largest angle of the triangle is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 45° 60° 90° 120° 100° 2.petersons. the angles are in a ratio of 1 : 1 : 2. Find the edge. (A) 32 (B) 16 (C) 32 2 (D) 16 2 (E) 32 3 The length of the line segment joining the point A(4. Find angle x if AB is parallel to CD . –7) is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7 6 5 1 2 221 185 7. If the volume of one cube is 8 times as great as another.com . The circumference of a circle whose area is 16π is (A) 8π (B) 4π (C) 16π (D) 8 (E) 16 Find the perimeter of a square whose diagonal is 8. Find the number of degrees in arc AB. 80 20 60 100 90 5. Find the number of degrees in each angle of a regular pentagon. by 18 in. 1. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 72 108 60 180 120 3.222 Chapter 13 RETEST Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. In triangle ABC. The area of a trapezoid whose bases are 10 and 12 and whose altitude is 3 is (A) 66 (B) 11 (C) 33 (D) 25 1 (E) 16 2 6.
and 70°. and height. which equals 4. The area of a circle with radius x is πx2. Since the triangle is isosceles. (A) Represent the angles as 5x. 60°. ∠EHG = ∠AFE = 40°. 10. 2 2 The angles are 50°.com .1) 2 2 (8)2 + (6)2 = 64 + 36 = 100 = 10 www. the remaining angles are equal. width. each 180 − x x = 90 − . (A) The volume of a rectangular box is the product of its length. Angle ABX = 90° – 37° = 53° Angle ABY = 180° – 53° = 127° 8. and 7x. This leaves 80° for the other two angles. (D) The remaining degrees of the triangle are 180 – x. (A) d= = (5 − (3)) + (5 . ∠HEG must equal 110° because there are 180° in a triangle. ∠FEG = 70°. 100°. (D) 3. Since the triangle is isosceles (because the legs are both radii and therefore equal).petersons. (D) 7. (B) The area of a circle is πr2. and the 2 length and width of the square base are the same. 12 x = 360° x = 30° Angle B = 5x = 5 · 30° = 150° 5. 2.Geometry 223 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. Extend FE to H. we have 1 x ⋅ x ⋅ 1 = 24 2 x 2 = 16 x=4 Angle O is a central angle equal to its arc. or 1 feet. 6x. Since ∠FEG is the supplement of ∠HEG. (E) 9. Since 1 the height is 18 inches. an acute triangle. The area of a circle with radius 3x is π (3x)2 = 9πx2 = 9 · 4 = 36. They must add up to 180°. 18 x = 180 x = 10 6. (C) 22 + 32 = x 2 4 + 9 = x2 13 = x 2 13 = x 4. (C) The sum of the angles in a parallelogram is 360°. angle ABO is 40°.
the area is 1 · 6 · 8 = 24. the wheel will cover 20(3π) or 60π feet. 3. the distance covered is equal to the circumference. (A) Area of equilateral triangle = s2 s2 3 4 Therefore. (B) Area of triangle = 2π (r + 3) = 2πr + 6π Circumference was increased by 6π. Using the hypotenuse 2 as base and the altitude to the hypotenuse will give the same area.8 ∴ ⋅ 10 ⋅ 4. 1 ⋅ 10 ⋅ h = 24 2 5h = 24 1 h = 4. 4. must equal 16 4 s2 = 64 s=8 Perimeter is 8 + 8 + 8 = 24 2. 36π = 3π feet 12 Using one leg as base and the other as altitude. 1 ⋅b⋅h 2 (D) Compare 2πr with 2π (r + 3). Trying this with a numerical value for r will give the same result. (E) Area of rhombus = · product of 2 diagonals 1 1 Area = ( 4 x )( 6 x ) = 24 x 2 = 12 x 2 2 2 1 ( ) In 20 revolutions. (18 · 20) ÷ 9 = 360 ÷ 9 = 40 square yards 2. C = 2πr = 2π (18) = 36π inches To change this to feet. s = 6 and perimeter = 24 5. (C) Find the area in square feet and then convert to square yards by dividing by 9. (B) Area of parallelogram = b · h Exercise 2 1. C = 2π r = 2π ( 3) = 6π 1 ⋅ 6π = 2π 3 ( x + 7)( x − 7) = 15 x 2 − 49 = 15 x 2 = 64 x =8 Base = x + 7 = 15 3.petersons.com . (E) In one revolution. (B) In 4 hours the hour hand moves through onethird of the circumference of the clock. Remember there are 9 square feet in one square yard.224 Chapter 13 Exercise 1 1. 5. (C) radius of circle = 3 Area = πr2 = 9π www.8 = 24 2 4. (D) Area of rectangle = b · h = 36 Area of square = s2 = 36 Therefore. divide by 12.
(A) d= 3. All the other points lie 4 units from (0. 0). www. (A) Find the midpoint of AB by averaging the x coordinates and averaging the y coordinates. 5. 5 right triangle. (A) Exercise 4 1. 4.petersons. 17 triangle. or 51. (C) The altitude in an equilateral triangle is 1 always side ⋅ 3 . 2 = ( 4. 4. Therefore. –4). 6 + 2 2 + 6 2 . (A) The diagonal in a square is equal to the side times 2 . 17 triangle. (C) Area = 1 1 ⋅b ⋅h = ⋅4 ⋅3 = 6 2 2 5. x = 0 y + 6 = 2. (8 − 4 )2 + (6 . 4 ) 2. (A) Area of a circle = πr2 r=4 πr2 = 16π Triangle ABC is a 3. 3. (D) Sketch the triangle and you will see it is a right triangle with legs of 4 and 3. This is a 3.com .Geometry 225 Exercise 3 1. y = −4 The rectangle is 30′ by 40′. Therefore CD= 8. 2. 0). Therefore CB = 20. 4. 14 x = 140 x = 10 (C) O is the midpoint of AB. 2 x+4 =2 2 y+6 =1 2 A is the point (0. so the diagonal is 50′. CB – CD = DB = 12. (D) This is an 8. 15. The point (4. 5 triangle with all sides multiplied by 5.3)2 = = 16 + 9 = 25 = 5 4 2 + 32 4. the side is 6 and the perimeter is 24. making the missing side (3)17. 15. x + 4 = 4. Triangle ACD is an 8. 4) lies at a distance of (4 − 0)2 + (4 − 0)2 = 32 units from (0.
(A) Angle B = Angle C because of alternate interior angles. (E) The exterior angle is equal to the sum of the two remote interior angles. Extend AE to F. and 90°.226 Chapter 13 Exercise 5 1. (C) Since ∠BEG and ∠EGD add to 180°. Angle D = 30°. ∠ AEC = 80° 3. (C) ∠A = ∠C 4 x − 30 = 2 x + 10 2 x = 40 x = 20 5. 5x. 12 x = 180 x = 15 2. and 6x. (D) There are 130° left to be split evenly between the base angles (the base angles must be equal). halves of these angles must add to 90°. Therefore. (D) Represent the angles as x. leaving 80° for ∠ B. Each one must be 65°. or 180 – 2x. 4 x = 100 x = 25 Angle A = 3x = 75° 4. (E) 3. The remaining degrees of the triangle. 2. (D) The other base angle is also x. Then Angle C = Angle D for the same reason. ∠ AEC is supplementary to ∠CEF. Triangle EFG contains 180°. ∠A = ∠EFC ∠CEF must equal 100° because there are 180° in a triangle. are in the vertex angle. These two base angles add to 2x. (D) Exercise 6 1. 75°. leaving 90° for ∠EFG. ∠1 + ∠2 = 180° www. 4.com . They must add to 180°. ∠ A and ∠ C are each 50°. The angles are 15°. ∠1 = ∠3 ∠2 = ∠4 ∠1 + ∠2 = ∠3 + ∠4 But ∠3 + ∠4 = 180°. (E) ∠1 = ∠3 ∠2 + ∠3 = 180° ∠2 = 50° 5. Therefore. it is a right triangle.petersons. Thus.
5. x + 4 = 2 x − 16 20 = x AD = BC = x − 6 = 14 Exercise 8 1. 1 www. (E) The remaining arc is 120°. Sum = (n – 2) 180 = 4(180) = 720 (D) Opposite sides of a parallelogram are congruent. 40°. 5. leaving 7 for BF. BD + DA = BA = 9 2. Additional properties would be needed to make it a square. 1 ( 40° + AC ) 2 100° = 40° + AC 60° = AC 50° = (D) An angle outside the circle is the 2 difference of its intercepted arcs. because the legs are equal radii. (D) Angle O is a central angle equal to its arc. Therefore BD is also 7. (B) AB = CD x + 8 = 4x − 4 12 = 3x 3. it must be a rhombus. This leaves 140° for the other two angles. The inscribed 1 angle x is its intercepted arc. AB = 12 x=4 BC = 12 CD = 12 4. 2.Geometry 227 Exercise 7 1.com . (C) A hexagon has 6 sides. 4.petersons. then AD = 2. each angle is 70°. If CE = 5. (C) Tangent segments drawn to a circle from the same external point are congruent. 2 3. (B) A rhombus has 4 sides. then CF = 5. (A) If all sides are congruent. so AB = CD. A square is both a rectangle and a rhombus with added properties. If AE = 2. Since the triangle is isosceles. Sum = (n – 2) 180 = 2(180) = 360 (C) Rectangles and rhombuses are both types of parallelograms but do not share the same special properties.
Each edge is 4.228 Chapter 13 Exercise 9 1.petersons. the area is multiplied by 32 or 9. 5. 5 25 = 4 x 5 x = 100 x = 20 www. V=6·5·1 5 · 40 = 25 8 1 = 40 cubic feet when full. the larger radius is 3 times the smaller radius. 6 Exercise 10 1. (C) We must take the cube root of the volume ratio to find the linear ratio. 2. (D) If the dimensions are all doubled. 3. (E) If the radius is multiplied by 3. the linear ratio is 3 : 1. Divide by 9 to find minutes. but the area ratio is the square of this. Each square will have an area of 96 or 16. 3 The linear ratio is then 5 : 4. 5. is has been increased by 300%.com . (D) There are 6 equal squares in the surface area of a cube. Therefore it will require 5 cubes. This becomes much easier if you simplify the ratio first. (B) V = l · w · h = 10 · 8 · 4 = 320 cubic inches Each small cube = 4 = 64 cubic inches. (A) Change 16 inches to 1 1 feet. (C) V = πr2h = · 49 · 10 = 1540 cubic 7 inches Divide by 231 to find gallons. 3 3 4. Therefore. 250 125 = 128 64 V = e3 = 43 = 64 2. 4. If the new area is 4 times as great as the original area. the area is multiplied by 22 or 4. (B) V = πr2h = 22 · 9 · 14 = 396 cubic inches 7 22 3. (A) If the area ratio is 9 : 1. (B) Ratio of circumferences is the same as ratio of radii.
com . ∠CDE must equal 65° because there are 180° in a triangle. 8.Geometry 229 Retest 1. 1 40 = ( x − 20) 2 80 = x − 20 100 = x 1 9. Sum (n – 2)180 = 3(180) = 540° In a regular pentagon. Therefore. the side is 4 2 2 and the perimeter is 16 2 . (B) If the volume ratio is 8 : 1. the linear ratio is 2 : 1.petersons. www. 4 x = 180 x = 45 2. and 2x. Area = (C) Represent the angles as x. Since AB is parallel to CD . (B) A pentagon has 5 sides. and the area ratio is the square of this. (E) d= = ( 7 − 4 ) + (7 . (D) An angle outside the circle is the difference 2 of its intercepted arcs. the largest angle is 2x = 2(45°) = 90°. each angle = 5 2 diagonal times . (A) Area of circle = πr2 = 16π 7. Therefore. They must add to 180°. (C) Area of trapezoid = 1 ⋅ 3(10 + 12 ) = 33 2 1 h ( b1 + b2 ) 2 6. ∠x = ∠CDE = 65°.(3)) 2 2 (3)2 + (4 )2 = = 25 = 5 9 + 16 5. r2 = 16 or r = 4 Circumference of circle = 2πr = 2π (4) = 8π 3. Therefore. or 4:1. (D) The side of a square is equal to the Therefore. V = e3 216 = e3 6=e 10. x. 540 = 108° . (D) 4. (D) V = l · w · h = 2 · 6 · 18 = 216 The volume of a cube is equal to the cube of an edge. all the angles are equal.
.
Circle the letter that appears before your answer. In triangle ABC. 1. AB = AC and EC < DB. AC < AB AC > BC BC > AC BC < AB ∠3 > ∠1 If point C lies between A and B on line segment AB. ∠1 > ∠2 and ∠2 > ∠3. then (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. Answers are at the end of the chapter. x = 1.Inequalities 14 4. Then 3. DB < AE DB < AD AD > AE AD < AE AD > EC In triangle ABC. If a = b and c > d. If 4x < 6. which of the following is always true? (A) AC = CB (B) AC > CB (C) CB > AC (D) AB < AC + CB (E) AB = CB + AC 231 . Then DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Work out each problem.5 2 3 2 x> 3 3 x< 2 3 x> 2 x< a and b are positive numbers. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 6 7 8 9 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6. then (A) a + c < b + d (B) a + c > b + d (C) a – c > b – d (D) ac < bd (E) a + c < b – d Which value of x will make the following expression true? 3 x 4 < < 5 10 5 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.
which of the following is always true? I. BC is extended to D. If AC is perpendicular to BD. I only II and III only II only III only I and II only 10. Then (A) ∠A > 45° (B) ∠B = 90° (C) ∠B > 90° (D) ∠C = 90° (E) ∠C > 90° If x < 0 and y > 0. If ∠A = 50° and ∠ACD = 120°. ∠A < ∠B and ∠B < ∠C. AC < AB III. which of the following is always true? (A) x + y > 0 (B) x + y < 0 (C) y – x < 0 (D) x – y < 0 (E) 2x > y www. AB > AD 9. then (A) BC > AB (B) AC > AB (C) BC > AC (D) AB > AC (E) ∠B < ∠A (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 8.petersons. In triangle ABC. In right triangle ABC.232 Chapter 14 7. AC = BC II.com .
the order of the inequality.com . remember that if a term comes from one side of the inequality to the other. As with equations. –4x < –4 Divide by –4. –x > 5 Divide (or multiply) by –1. a < b is read a is less than b. ALGEBRAIC INEQUALITIES Algebraic inequality statements are solved in the same manner as equations. remember that it points to the smaller quantity. that is.petersons. In reading the inequality symbol. x>1 Example: 6x + 5 > 7x + 10 Solution: Collect all the terms containing x on the left side of the equation and all numerical terms on the right. x < –5 www. Example: Solve for x: 12 – 4x < 8 Solution: Add –12 to each side. do not forget that whenever you multiply or divide by a negative number.Inequalities 233 1. remembering to reverse the inequality sign. a > b is read a is greater than b. that term changes sign. the inequality symbol must be reversed. However.
6 (B) n > . Solve for x: 8x < 5(2x + 4) (A) x > – 10 (B) x < – 10 (C) x > 10 (D) x < 10 (E) x < 18 Solve for x: 6x + 2 – 8x < 14 (A) x = 6 (B) x = –6 (C) x > –6 (D) x < –6 (E) x > 6 A number increased by 10 is greater than 50. 9. 8. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.6 (C) n > 6 (D) n > –6 (E) n < –6 Solve for b: 15b < 10 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 2 3 b> 2 b< b<− 2 3 2 b> 3 b< 3 2 7.6 (E) n = 1.4x < 4 (A) x > –10 (B) x > 10 (C) x < 8 (D) x < –10 (E) x < 36 Solve for x: .3 < 2.6 (B) n > –1.6 (D) n < –1. 10. 1. which of the following is always true? (A) x + y > 0 (B) xy < 0 (C) x – y > 0 (D) x + y < 0 (E) x = y 2.petersons. xy –2x 6. What numbers satisfy this condition? (A) x > 60 (B) x < 60 (C) x > –40 (D) x < 40 (E) x > 40 Solve for x: –. 4.com . If x < 0 and y > 0. If x2 < 4.234 Chapter 14 Exercise 1 Work out each problem. 3.6 If x < 0 and y < 0. then (A) x > 2 (B) x < 2 (C) x > –2 (D) –2 < x < 2 (E) –2 ≤ x ≤ 2 Solve for n: n + 4.03n > –.6 (C) n < 1.18 (A) n < –. www. which of the following will always be greater than 0? (A) x + y (B) x – y (C) (D) (E) x y 5.7 (A) n > 1.
the results are unequal in the opposite order.petersons. If AC > AD and (− ) BC = ED then AB > AE D. If unequal quantities are added to unequal quantities of the same order. If equal quantities are added to unequal quantities. certain postulates and theorems should be reviewed. the differences are unequal in the same order. Doubles of unequals are unequal in the same order. AB > CD www.Inequalities 235 2. If AB > AE and (+ ) BC > ED then AC > AD B. the sums are unequal in the same order.com . AB = AC (−) AD < AE DB > EC E. M is the midpoint of AB N is the midpoint of CD AM > CN Therefore. the sums are unequal in the same order. AB > AE and (+ ) BC = ED then AC > AD C. If equal quantities are subtracted from unequal quantities. A. GEOMETRIC INEQUALITIES In working with geometric inequalities. If unequal quantities are subtracted from equal quantities.
petersons. www. then AB > AC. J. If two angles of a triangle are unequal.com . The sum of two sides of a triangle must be greater than the third side. If ∠A > ∠B and ∠B > ∠C. ∠ABC > ∠DEF BG bisects ∠ABC EH bisects ∠DEF Therefore. If AB > AC. with the larger angle opposite the larger side. H. then the first is greater than the third. If ∠C > ∠B. If the first of three quantities is greater than the second. then ∠A > ∠C. the sides opposite these angles are unequal. and the second is greater than the third. ∠1 > ∠2 G. Halves of unequals are unequal in the same order.236 Chapter 14 F. then ∠C > ∠B. the angles opposite are unequal. AB + BC > AC I. with the larger side opposite the larger angle. If two sides of a triangle are unequal.
AC > AB AB > BC AC > BC BC > AB BC > AB + AC 5. 4 (C) 3. In triangle RST. 3. ∠ACD > ∠B and ∠ACD > ∠A Exercise 2 Work out each problem. 2 (E) 5. If P is any point on RS. 6. 2. 1.com . then (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) ∠1 > ∠2 ∠4 > ∠3 ∠2 > ∠3 ∠2 < ∠3 ∠2 < ∠4 3. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.Inequalities 237 K. Which of the following statements is true regarding triangle ABC? 4. 12 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) AC < AB BC < AB ∠C > ∠ABC BC > AC ∠ABC > ∠A www. Which of the following sets of numbers could be the sides of a triangle? (A) 1. 3 (B) 2. 2. 1. RS = ST. If AB ⊥ CD and ∠1 > ∠4. then (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. An exterior angle of a triangle is greater than either remote interior angle.5. which of the following statements is always true? (A) PT < PR (B) PT > PR (C) PT = PR 1 (D) PT = 2 PR (E) PT ≤ PR If ∠A > ∠C and ∠ABD = 120°. 6 (D) 1.petersons.
5. 8 (C) 8. n > 0. If ∠1> ∠2 and ∠2 > ∠3. 10 In isosceles triangle RST. 8. If 2x > –5. then (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. 5 x> 2 5 x>− 2 2 x>− 5 5 x< 2 5 x<− 2 5. then m. 1.com . 10. If m = n and p < q. then x>3 x<3 x > 12 x < 12 x > –12 6. 4. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. RS = ST. then (A) m – p < n – q (B) p – m > q –n (C) m – p > n – q (D) mp > nq (E) m + q < n + p If ∠3 > ∠2 and ∠1 = ∠2. then Which of the following sets of numbers may be used as the sides of a triangle? (A) 7. If A is the midpoint of RS and B is the midpoint of ST. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) AB > BD AB < BD DC = BD AD > BD AB < AC 8. 5. 5. then (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 7. 2 (D) 3. then (A) SA > ST (B) BT > BS (C) BT = SA (D) SR > RT (E) RT > ST (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) AB > AD AC > AD AC < CD AD > AC AB > BC www. If 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) x > 6.238 Chapter 14 RETEST Work out each problem. 9 (B) 3.petersons. 6 (E) 4. If AB = AC and ∠1 > ∠B. ∠B > ∠C ∠1 > ∠C BD > AD AB > AD ∠ADC > ∠ADB 3.
If x > 0 and y < 0. which of the following is always true? (A) x – y > y – x (B) x + y > 0 (C) xy > 0 (D) y > x (E) x – y < 0 10.com . In triangle ABC. AD is the altitude to BC.Inequalities 239 9. Then (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) AD > DC AD < BD AD > AC BD > DC AB > BD www.petersons.
the results are unequal in the opposite order. (D) A positive subtracted from a negative is always negative. (D) AB = CB + AC ∠ACB is the supplement of ∠ACD. (E) AB = CB + AC 7. (C) In right triangle ACB. (B) If equal quantities are added to unequal quantities. 4. Since ∠1 > ∠2. Since ∠ABC is the largest angle in the triangle. 3. If unequal quantities are subtracted from equal quantities.com . Therefore. the largest angle is the right angle. (B) 2. the longest side is the hypotenuse AB.240 Chapter 14 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. ∠C = 90°. (C) If two angles of a triangle are unequal.petersons. ∠ACB = 60°. ∠ABC must equal 70° because there are 180° in a triangle. AC > AB. (D) 4x < 6 6 x< 4 3 Simplify to x < 2 6. with the larger side opposite the larger angle. the sides opposite these angles are unequal. side AC is less than AB. BC > AC. AC = AB ( − ) EC < DB AE > AD or AD < AE 5. 9. 6 < x < 8 or x must be between 6 and 8. the sums are unequal in the same order. Since ∠C is the largest angle. (C) 3 x 4 < < 5 10 5 Multiply through by 10. www. Therefore. c>d (+ ) a = b a+c > b+d 8. (D) In a right triangle. 10. AC must be the longest side. Therefore.
PT > PR in triangle PRT.7 Subtract 4. (C) 2. (D) Divide by 15 b< 5. then ∠2 will be less than ∠3 because we are subtracting unequal quantities (∠1 and ∠4) from equal quantities (∠ABC and ∠ABD). also ∠A > ∠ C. www. (A) 8 x < 10 x + 20 −2 x < 20 x > −10 −2 x < 12 x > −6 x + 10 > 50 x > 40 Exercise 2 1.03n > –. AC.3 from each side. The sides in order from largest to smallest are BC. (D) The sum of any two sides (always try the shortest two) must be greater than the third side.Inequalities 241 Exercise 1 1. ∠SRT will have to be greater than ∠PTR. (D) x must be less than 2. AC. which is the largest angle of the triangle. This makes ∠A the largest angle of the triangle. then ∠A must contain more than half of 120° and ∠C must contain less than half of 120°. as (–3)2 would be greater than 4. (D) n + 4. but can go no lower than –2.3 < 2.com . −4 x < 40 x > −10 5. 4. If ∠1 > ∠4. (E) The product of two negative numbers is positive. (D) . AB.petersons. AB. 2. (B) Since ∠SRT = ∠STR. (D) Angle ABC = 60°. (D) Angle A will contain 90°. The sides from largest to smallest will be BC. Since there are 120° left for ∠A and ∠C together and. (E) (A) 3. their sum will be negative. n < –1. 9.4x < 4 Multiply by 10 to remove decimals. 10. 3. Multiply by 100 3n > −18 n > −6 6. (D) ∠ABC = ∠ABD as they are both right angles. 10 15 2 Simplify to b < 3 7. Therefore.18 4.6 (D) When two negative numbers are added. –. 8.
BT = 1 1 ST and SA = SR.petersons. the angles opposite them are equal. Since ST = SR. 9. (C) If unequal quantities are subtracted from equal quantities. Therefore. (D) Since ∠1 > ∠2 and ∠2 > ∠3. with the larger side opposite the larger angle. the sides opposite these angles are unequal. (A) A positive minus a negative is always greater than a negative minus a positive. (−) p < q 3. (C) 2. (E) In right triangle ADB. (C) x >6 2 x > 12 4. (B) If two sides of a triangle are equal. 2 2 BT = SA. 5. since AD is opposite the larger angle. If two angles of a triangle are unequal. ∠1 > ∠3. Therefore ∠C = ∠B. AB > BD. 7. (A) The sum of any two sides (always try the shortest two) must be greater than the third side. Since ∠1 > ∠B. 8. the longest side is the hypotenuse AB. (B) 2 x > −5 5 x>− 2 6. Therefore. www. 10. m=n m− p> n−q (A) Since ∠3 > ∠2 and ∠1 = ∠2.com . the differences are unequal in the opposite order.242 Chapter 14 Retest 1. In triangle ACD side AD is larger than side AC. ∠3 > ∠1. ∠1 > ∠C. AB > BD.
limiting your time to 15 minutes. in which you provide the numerical solution. What was its population 20 years ago? 4. then f ( x ) × f x = (A) 1 (B) 1 x 1 1 2. The population of Urbanville has always doubled every five years.–1) and (– 1 . y2 x2 xy 1 x2 2 y3 x y3 If f(x) = x + 1. –1. then f(x) CANNOT equal (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) − 2 25 1 − 5 x 3. Which of the following describes the union of the factors of 15.) 15 x 6 y3 y is equivalent to: y6 x 3 x Answers are at the end of the chapter. the factors of 30. 0 5 50 7. Note that question 1 is a gridin question. and Functions DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Answer the following 10 questions. 1. and the factors of 75? (A) The factors of 15 (B) The factors of 30 (C) The factors of 45 (D) The factors of 75 (E) None of the above –1 – 2 – 5 – 6 – –3 + 4 = (A) –5 (B) –3 (C) 1 (D) 3 (E) 5 (C) (D) (E) 6.Numbers and Operations. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. Algebra. Urbanville’s current population is 25.0)? 2 (A) y = 3x + 2 (B) y = 2x + 1 (C) y = 6x + 5 (D) y = –4x – 2 (E) y = 4x + 3 243 . x x2 x x +1 If the domain of f(x) = − x is the set {–2.600. 5 2}.y) pairs (–1. 0. Which of the following equations defines a function containing the (x. (All other questions are in multiplechoice format. For all x ≠ 0 and y ≠ 0.
244
Chapter 15
8.
The figure below shows the graph of a linear function on the xyplane.
9.
The figure below shows a parabola in the xyplane.
If the xintercept of line l is 4, what is the slope of l ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
2 3 3 4 5 6 6 5
Which of the following equations does the graph best represent? (A) y = –x2 + 6x – 9 (B) y = x2 – 2x + 6 (C) y = 2 x2 – 4x + 6 3 (D) y = –x2 + x – 3 (E) y = x2 + 3x + 9 10. Which of the following best describes the 2 relationship between the graph of y = 2 and 2 x the graph of x = 2 in the xyplane? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Mirror images symmetrical about the xaxis Mirror images symmetrical about the yaxis Mirror images symmetrical about the line of the equation x = y Mirror images symmetrical about the line of the equation x = –y None of the above
y
Not enough information to answer the question is given.
www.petersons.com
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions
245
1. SEQUENCES INVOLVING EXPONENTIAL GROWTH (GEOMETRIC SEQUENCES)
In a sequence of terms involving exponential growth, which the testing service also calls a geometric sequence, there is a constant ratio between consecutive terms. In other words, each successive term is the same multiple of the preceding one. For example, in the sequence 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, . . . , notice that you multipy each term by 2 to obtain the next term, and so the constant ratio (multiple) is 2. To solve problems involving geometric sequence, you can apply the following standard equation: a · r (n – 1) = T In this equation: The variable a is the value of the first term in the sequence The variable r is the constant ratio (multiple) The variable n is the position number of any particular term in the sequence The variable T is the value of term n If you know the values of any three of the four variables in this standard equation, then you can solve for the fourth one. (On the SAT, geometric sequence problems generally ask for the value of either a or T.) Example (solving for T when a and r are given): The first term of a geometric sequence is 2, and the constant multiple is 3. Find the second, third, and fourth terms. Solution: 2nd term (T) = 2 · 3 (2 – 1) = 2 · 31 = 6 3rd term (T) = 2 · 3 (3 – 1) = 2 · 32 = 2 · 9 = 18 4th term (T) = 2 · 3 (4 – 1) = 2 · 33 = 2 · 27 = 54 To solve for T when a and r are given, as an alternative to applying the standard equation, you can multiply a by r (n – 1) times. Given a = 2 and r = 3: 2nd term (T) = 2 · 3 = 6 3rd term (T) = 2 · 3 = 6 · 3 = 18 4th term (T) = 2 · 3 = 6 · 3 = 18 · 3 = 54 NOTE: Using the alternative method, you may wish to use your calculator to find T if a and/or r are large numbers. Example (solving for a when r and T are given): The fifth term of a geometric sequence is 768, and the constant multiple is 4. Find the 1st term (a). Solution:
a × 4 (5−1) = 768 a × 4 4 = 768 a × 256 = 768 a = 768 256 a=3
www.petersons.com
246
Chapter 15
Example (solving for T when a and another term in the sequence are given): To find a particular term (T) in a geometric sequence when the first term and another term are given, first determine the constant ratio (r), and then solve for T. For example, assume that the first and sixth terms of a geometric sequence are 2 and 2048, respectively. To find the value of the fourth term, first apply the standard equation to determine r : Solution:
2 × r (6−1) = 2048 2 × r 5 = 2048 r 5 = 2048 2 5 r = 1024 r = 5 1024 r=4
The constant ratio is 4. Next, in the standard equation, let a = 2, r = 4, and n = 4, and then solve for T :
2 × 4 ( 4−1) = T 2 × 43 = T 2 × 64 = T 128 = T
The fourth term in the sequence is 128.
Exercise 1
Work out each problem. For questions 1–3, circle the letter that appears before your answer. Questions 4 and 5 are gridin questions. 1. On January 1, 1950, a farmer bought a certain parcel of land for $1,500. Since then, the land has doubled in value every 12 years. At this rate, what will the value of the land be on January 1, 2010? (A) $7,500 (B) $9,000 (C) $16,000 (D) $24,000 (E) $48,000 A certain type of cancer cell divides into two cells every four seconds. How many cells are observable 32 seconds after observing a total of four cells? (A) 1,024 (B) 2,048 (C) 4,096 (D) 5,512 (E) 8,192 The seventh term of a geometric sequence with constant ratio 2 is 448. What is the first term of the sequence? (A) 6 (B) 7 (C) 8 (D) 9 (E) 11 4. Three years after an art collector purchases a certain painting, the value of the painting is $2,700. If the painting increased in value by an average of 50 percent per year over the three year period, how much did the collector pay for the painting, in dollars?
2.
5.
What is the second term in a geometric series with first term 3 and third term 147?
3.
www.petersons.com
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions
247
2. SETS (UNION, INTERSECTION, ELEMENTS)
A set is simply a collection of elements; elements in a set are also referred to as the “members” of the set. An SAT problem involving sets might ask you to recognize either the union or the intersection of two (or more) sets of numbers. The union of two sets is the set of all members of either or both sets. For example, the union of the set of all negative integers and the set of all nonnegative integers is the set of all integers. The intersection of two sets is the set of all common members – in other words, members of both sets. For example, the intersection of the set of integers less than 11 and the set of integers greater than 4 but less than 15 is the following set of six consecutive integers: {5,6,7,8,9,10}. On the new SAT, a problem involving either the union or intersection of sets might apply any of the following concepts: the real number line, integers, multiples, factors (including prime factors), divisibility, or counting. Example: Set A is the set of all positive multiples of 3, and set B is the set of all positive multiples of 6. What is the union and intersection of the two sets? Solution: The union of sets A and B is the set of all postitive multiples of 3. The intersection of sets A and B is the set of all postitive multiples of 6.
www.petersons.com
248
Chapter 15
Exercise 2
Work out each problem. Note that question 2 is a gridin question. For all other questions, circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1. Which of the following describes the union of the set of integers less than 20 and the set of integers greater than 10? (A) Integers 10 through 20 (B) All integers greater than 10 but less than 20 (C) All integers less than 10 and all integers greater than 20 (D) No integers (E) All integers Set A consists of the positive factors of 24, and set B consists of the positive factors of 18. The intersection of sets A and B is a set containing how many members? 4. The set of all multiples of 10 could be the intersection of which of the following pairs of sets? 5 (A) The set of all multiples of 2 ; the set of all multiples of 2 3 (B) The set of all multiples of 5 ; the set of all multiples of 5 3 (C) The set of all multiples of 2 ; the set of all multiples of 10 3 (D) The set of all multiples of 4 ; the set of all multiples of 2 5 (E) The set of all multiples of 2 ; the set of all multiples of 4 For all real numbers x, sets P, Q, and R are defined as follows: P:{x ≥ –10} Q:{x ≥ 10} R:{x ≤ 10} Which of the following indicates the intersection of sets P, Q, and R ? (A) x = any real number (B) x ≥ –10 (C) x ≥ 10 (D) x = 10 (E) –10 ≤ x ≤ 10
2.
5.
3.
The union of sets X and Y is a set that contains exactly two members. Which of the following pairs of sets could be sets X and Y ? (A) The prime factors of 15; the prime factors of 30 (B) The prime factors of 14; the prime factors of 51 (C) The prime factors of 19; the prime factors of 38 (D) The prime factors of 22; the prime factors of 25 (E) The prime factors of 39; the prime factors of 52
www.petersons.com
Numbers and Operations, Algebra, and Functions
249
3. ABSOLUTE VALUE
The absolute value of a real number refers to the number’s distance from zero (the origin) on the realnumber line. The absolute value of x is indicated as x. The absolute value of a negative number always has a positive value. Example: –2 – 3 – 2 – 3 = (A) –2 (B) –1 (C) 0 (D) 1 (E) 4 Solution: The correct answer is (E). –2 – 3 = –5 = 5, and 2 – 3 = –1 = 1. Performing subtraction: 5 – 1 = 4. The concept of absolute value can be incorporated into many different types of problems on the new SAT, including those involving algebraic expressions, equations, and inequalities, as well as problems involving functional notation and the graphs of functions.
Exercise 3
Work out each problem. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1. 7 – 2 – 2 – 7 = (A) –14 (B) –9 (C) –5 (D) 0 (E) 10 For all integers a and b, where b ≠ 0, subtracting b from a must result in a positive integer if: (A) a – b is a positive integer (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. 4. The figure below shows the graph of a certain equation in the xyplane.
2.
( ) is a positive integer
a b
(b – a) is a negative integer (a + b) is a positive integer (ab) is a positive integer
What is the complete solution set for the inequality x – 3 > 4 ? (A) x > –1 (B) x > 7 (C) –1 < x < 7 (D) x < –7, x > 7 (E) x < –1, x > 7
Which of the following could be the equation? (A) x = y – 1 (B) y = x – 1 (C) y = x – 1 (D) y = x + 1 (E) x = y – 1 5. If f(x) =  x – 3 – x , then f ( 1 ) = 2 (A) –1
1
(B) (C) (D) (E)
–2 0
1 2
1
1
www.petersons.com
250
Chapter 15
4. EXPONENTS (POWERS)
An exponent, or power, refers to the number of times that a number (referred to as the base number) is multiplied by itself, plus 1. In the number 23, the base number is 2 and the exponent is 3. To calculate the value of 23, you calculate the value of 2 , you multiply 3 by itself three times: 2 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 16 . 3 3 3 3 3 3 81 An SAT problem might require you to combine two or more terms that contain exponents. Whether you can you combine base numbers—using addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division—before applying exponents to the numbers depends on which operation you’re performing. When you add or subtract terms, you cannot combine base numbers or exponents: ax + bx ≠ (a + b)x ax – bx ≠ (a – b)x Example: If x = –2, then x5 – x2 – x = (A) 26 (B) 4 (C) –34 (D) –58 (E) –70 Solution: The correct answer is (C). You cannot combine exponents here, even though the base number is the same in all three terms. Instead, you need to apply each exponent, in turn, to the base number, then subtract: x5 – x2 – x = (–2)5 – (–2)2 – (–2) = –32 – 4 + 2 = –34 There are two rules you need to know for combining exponents by multiplication or division. First, you can combine base numbers first, but only if the exponents are the same: ax · bx = (ab)x
ax a = bx b
x
2 multiply 2 by itself twice: 23 = 2 · 2 · 2 = 8. In the number 2 , the base number is 3 and the exponent is 4. To
()
4
2
()
3
4
()
4
Second, you can combine exponents first, but only if the base numbers are the same. When multiplying these terms, add the exponents. When dividing them, subtract the denominator exponent from the numerator exponent: ax · ay = a (x + y)
ax = a( x − y) ay
When the same base number (or term) appears in both the numerator and denominator of a fraction, you can
www.petersons.com
multiply exponents together: y x x y 1 xy x 2 y3 ? x 3 y2 1 x5y5 (a ) x y = a xy Raising a base number to a negative exponent is equivalent to 1 divided by the base number raised to the exponent’s absolute value: a− x = 1 ax To raise a base number to a fractional exponent.petersons. as well as how to raise base numbers to negative and fractional exponents. Algebra. or cancel. (23)2 · 4–3 = 2(2)(3) · 1 = 26 = 26 = 1 4 3 4 3 26 2 3 1 2 1 8 www.com . The simplest approach to this problem is to cancel. follow this formula: a y = ax x y Also keep in mind that any number other than 0 (zero) raised to the power of 0 (zero) equals 1: a0 = 1 [a ≠ 0] Example: (23)2 · 4–3 = (A) 16 (B) 1 (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (B). or factor out. x2 and y2 from numerator and denominator. To raise an exponential number to a power. This leaves you with x1 in the denominator and y1 in the denominator. Example: Which of the following is a simplified version of (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (A). and Functions 251 factor out.Numbers and Operations. the number of powers common to both. You should also know how to raise exponential numbers to powers.
www.petersons. Question 5 is a gridin question. If x = –1. For questions 1–4. then x–3 + x–2 + x2 + x3 = (A) –2 (B) –1 (C) 0 (D) 1 (E) 2 What integer is equal to 4 3 2 + 4 3 2 ? 5.com . circle the letter that appears before your answer. a2 b ÷ a2c = b 2 c bc 2 1 (A) a 1 (B) b b (C) a c (D) b 4. 1. 1 4n + 4n + 4n + 4n = (A) 44n (B) 16n (C) 4(n · n · n · n) (D) 4(n+1) (E) 164n Which of the following expressions is a simplified form of (–2x2)4 ? (A) 16x8 (B) 8x6 (C) –8x8 (D) –16x6 (E) –16x8 3.252 Chapter 15 Exercise 4 Work out each problem. (E) 2.
combine the two results according to the operation specified in the question: 1 f × 2 1 f = 8 × 2 x 2 = 16 x 2 x www.com . Algebra. and Functions 253 5. the relationship can be expressed in various forms. while in the second instance you’ll obtain an variable expression: 2 2 1 f = = 1 = 2×4 =8 2 2 1 4 2 x2 . A more complex function problem might require you to apply two different functions or to apply the same function twice. FUNCTION NOTATION In a function (or functional relationship). In mathematics. in which case the correct answer will also contain the variable x). Then substitute (7) for x in the function: –4(7) = –28. f(7) = –28. as in the next example. A problem on the new SAT may ask you to find the value of a function for either a number value (such as 7. Example: If f(x) = 2x – 6x. Example: If f(x) = (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (E).” another variable.) To find the value of the function for any value x.petersons. you’ll obtain a numerical value. then what is the value of f(7) ? Solution: The correct answer is –28. then f × f = 2 x 1 1 4x 1 8x 16x 1 4 x2 16x2 () 2 2 2 1 = = 2x 2 f = x 12 1 2 x x Then. substitute the xvalue for x wherever it appears in the function. or is “a function of. the value of one variable depends upon the value of. The new SAT uses the form y = f(x)—where y is a function of x. in which case the correct answer will also be a number value) or for a variable expression (such as 7x. which equals –4x.Numbers and Operations. Thus. First. Apply the function to each of the two xvalues (in the first instance. you can combine 2x – 6x. (Specific variables used may differ.
2 4 8 If f(x) = x2 and g(x) = x + 3. then g(f(x)) = (A) x + 3 (B) x2 + 6 (C) x + 9 (D) x2 + 3 (E) x3 + 3x2 If f(x) = 2 . 1. If f(a) = a–3 – a–2 . then f(2 + a) = (A) a2 + 7a + 6 (B) 2a2 – 7a – 12 (C) a2 + 12a + 3 (D) 6a2 + 3a + 7 (E) a2 – a + 6 www. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1 4 1 2 4. then for which of the following values of x does f(x) = x ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.254 Chapter 15 Exercise 5 Work out each problem. then f ( 1 ) = 3 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) –6 1 6 1 6 9 18 3. If f(x) = x2 + 3x – 4. then f(x2) ÷ ( f ( x ) ) = (A) x3 (B) 1 (C) 2x2 (D) 2 (E) 2x x 2 5.petersons.com . If f(x) = 2x x .
and 7 are outside the function’s range.8. all real numbers. If f(x) = x + 1 . (Any negative number would be outside the function’s range. if the domain of x is the set {2. (All values other than 2. 4} (C) {4. 8. 3. then applying the rule that f(x) = x + 1 to all values in the domain yields the function’s range: the set {3.15}. which of the following indicates the set of all values of x at which the function is NOT defined? (A) {x  x < 3} (B) {x  2 < x < 3} (C) {x  x < –2} (D) {x  –3 < x < 2} (E) {x  x < –3} If f(x) = 3 x . then which of the following sets indicates the range of f(x) ? (A) {–4. then the largest possible domain of x is the set that includes (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) all nonzero integers. then applying the rule that f(x) = x2 to all values in the domain yields the function’s range: the set of all nonnegative real numbers. 1.5. 5. 4} (B) {2. Algebra. all real numbers except 0. 1 6 4. 3. and must assign at least one member of the domain to each member of the range.6}. 4. By definition. 2. If f(x) = x 2 − 5 x + 6 . 0 4 20 If the range of the function f(x) = x2 – 2x – 3 is the set R = {0}. Depending on the function’s rule and its domain. while the range of f(x) is the set of all values that result by applying the rule to all values in the domain.) Example: In the function f(x) = x2. and if the domain of x is the set {3.petersons. 5. while all values other than 3. –3. then which of the following sets indicates the largest possible domain of x ? (A) {–3} (B) {3} (C) {–1} (D) {3. then the range of f(a) contains all of the following members EXCEPT: (A) –24 (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. all positive real numbers. all nonnegative real numbers. and 6 are outside the domain of x. or either the domain or range (or both) might consist of an infinite number of values. if the domain of x is the set of all real numbers.com .4. and Functions 255 6. Example: In the function f(x) = x + 1. the domain and range might each consist of a finite number of values. FUNCTIONS—DOMAIN AND RANGE A function consists of a rule along with two sets—called the domain and the range. 1 2. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. a function must assign exactly one member of the range to each member of the domain.7}. 15} (E) {all real numbers} If f(a) = 6a – 4.Numbers and Operations. –1} (E) all real numbers www. 9.) Exercise 6 Work out each problem. –2. The domain of a function f(x) is the set of all values of x on which the function f(x) is defined. and if the domain of a consists of all real numbers defined by the inequality –6 < a < 4. 16} (D) {3.
especially where defining a line on the xyplane is involved. The graph of a particular linear function on the xyplane A linear function that defines a particular line on the xyplane. in which m and b are constants. or identifying a function that defines a given slope and yintercept. In addition to questions requiring you to solve a system of linear equations (by using either the substitution or additionsubtraction method). www. then solve for b: 3 = 3(–3) + b. To determine b. if the domain of x is the set of all positive integers less than 5.5). the variable y is often used to represent f(x). each xvalue (member of the domain set) can be paired with its corresponding yvalue (member of the range set) by application of the function. if f(–3) = 3 and if the slope of the graph of f in the xyplane is 3. slope (m) is given as 3. and so the general form becomes y = mx + b.y) pairs (members of the domain set and corresponding members of the range set). In algebraic functions.y) pairs: S = {(1. substitute –3 for x and 3 for y.256 Chapter 15 7. In this form. 12 = b.com . for example. what is the equation of the graph of f ? (A) y = 3x – 3 (B) y = 3x + 12 (C) y=x–6 (D) y = –x (E) y = 3x – 12 Solution: The correct answer is (B).11).14)}. (4. the new SAT includes questions requiring you to recognize any of the following: • A linear function (equation) that defines two or more particular (x. Example: In the linear function f. then applying the function over the entire domain of x results in the following set of (x. (3. In the general equation y = mx + b. (2. LINEAR FUNCTIONS—EQUATIONS AND GRAPHS A linear function is a function f given by the general form f(x) = mx + b. • • Variations on the latter two types of problems may involve determining the slope and/or yintercept of a line defined by a function. you may be asked to construct a mathematical “model” that defines a relationship between. These questions sometimes involve reallife situations. the price of a product and the number of units of that product. Example: In the function y = 3x + 2.8). Only in choice (B) does m = 3 and b = 12.petersons.
com . 000 N 4. two vertical lines (A) I only (B) I and II only (C) II only (D) II and III only (E) I. 1. After every two years of employment.000 S= 80.petersons. II. what is the yintercept of the graph of g in the xyplane? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) –2 5 –2 2 5 y= − x–3 9 1 3 2 If h is a linear function. Which of the following equations best defines an XYZ executive’s salary (S) as a function of the number of years of employment (N) at XYZ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. then h(–101) = (A) –72 (B) –58 (C) 49 (D) 92 (E) 106 3. and if h(2) = 3 and h(4) = 1. 000 N S = 1. each considered individually. which of the following could be the equation of a function whose graph is l1 ? S = N + 80.000 per year. two perpendicular lines III. an XYZ executive receives a salary raise of $1. If two linear function f and g have identical domains and ranges. y= 2 x–3 3 y = –2x + 1 y=x+3 y = –3x − 2 3 2 3 In the linear function g. S= 1. two parallel lines II.Numbers and Operations.000. could describe the graphs of f and g in the xyplane? I.000N + 80. 000 + 1.000 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5. if g(4) = –9 and g(–2) = 6. which of the following. if the scales on both axes are the same.000 S = 500N + 80. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. and Functions 257 Exercise 7 Work out each problem. 000 + 80. In the xyplane below. and III www. Algebra. XYZ Company pays its executives a starting salary of $80.
com . the graphs are constructed by tabulating and plotting some (x. then connecting the 1 1 points: www. QUADRATIC FUNCTIONS—EQUATIONS AND GRAPHS In Chapter 8.258 Chapter 15 8. b. The point at which the dependent variable is at its minimum (or maximum) value is the vertex. The graph of a quadratic equation of the basic form y = ax2 or x = ay2 is a parabola. the parabola’s vertex lies at the origin (0.0). you learned to solve quadratic equations in the general form ax2 + bx + c = 0 by factoring the expression on the lefthand side of this equation to find the equation’s two roots— the values of x that satisfy the equation. Again. as the next x figure shows. and then connecting the points with a smooth curve: 1 The graph of a quadratic equation of the basic form x = y 2 or y = 2 is a hyperbola. (Note that a.y) pairs. which is a Ushaped curve. while the axis of symmetry in the graph of y = 2 is the yaxis. especially where defining a graph on the xyplane is involved. and x is often used to represent f(y). (Remember that the two roots might be the same.) The new SAT may also include questions involving quadratic functions in the general form f(x) = ax2 + bx + c.) In quadratic functions. The axis of symmetry of 1 the graph of x = y 2 is the xaxis. which consists of two Ux shaped curves that are symmetrical about a particular line.petersons. called the axis of symmetry.y) pairs. In each of the following four graphs. and c are constants and that a is the only essential constant. the variable y is often used to represent f(x). Notice that the graphs are constructed by tabulating and plotting several (x.
Numbers and Operations.0) in the figure. or compare two graphs Example: The graph shown in the xyplane above could represent which of the following equations? (A)  x2  =  y2  (B) x = y2 (C)  y  = x2 (D) y = x2 (E)  x  = y2 Solution: The correct answer is (C). The graph of y = x2 is the parabola extending upward from the origin (0. www.petersons. questions that ask you to recognize a quadratic equation that defines a particular graph in the xyplane or to identify certain features of the graph of a quadratic equation.com . and Functions 259 The new SAT might include a variety of question types involving quadratic functions—for example. Algebra. The equation  y  = x2 represents the union of the two equations y = x2 and –y = x2. while the graph of –y = x2 is the parabola extending downward from the origin.
260 Chapter 15 Example: In the xyplane. 2. substituting 0. An SAT question might also ask you to identify a quadratic equation that defines two or more domain members and the corresponding members of the function’s range (these questions sometimes involve “models” of reallife situations). Plotting these three points on the xyplane. Plotting three or more points of the graph on the xyplane should show the parabola’s orientation. (C) to the right. In this equation. For example. (E) either upward or downward.y) pairs (0. 2 x2 substitute some simple values for x and solve for y in each case.petersons.0). (B) upward. (2.com . it is helpful to isolate y in the equation y = x2 − 2 . and (–2. suffices to show a parabola that opens upward. Solution: The correct answer is (B). First.–2). and –2 for x gives us the three (x. (D) to the left.0). www. then connecting them with a curved line. the graph of y + 2 = shows a parabola that opens 2 (A) downward.
(3. and (4.–16) ? (A) y = –2x (B) y = 2x (C) y = x2 (D) y = –x2 (E) y = –2x2 The figure below shows a parabola in the xyplane. Which of the following is the equations best defines the graph shown below in the xyplane? 2.000 units per year at $4 per unit. In the xyplane.– 4). 000 P + 14 48.y) pairs (1.–9). 000 P2 + 8 www. 12. 000 P2 48. as a function of price per unit (P)? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) N= N= N= N= N= 48.000 units per year at $2 per unit. and Functions 261 Exercise 8 Work out each problem. Which of the following equations defines a function containing the (x. 000 P+4 48. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. and 3. (2. 000 P2 + 2 48. Which of the following equations could define the projected number of units sold per year (N).com . Algebra.Numbers and Operations. x = y= x2 ABC Company projects that it will sell 48.000 units of product X per year at a unit price of $1. which of the following is an x2 equation whose graph is the graph of y = 3 translated three units horizontally and to the left? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) y = x2 x2 +3 3 x2 y= −3 3 ( x − 3)2 y= 3 ( x + 3)2 y= 3 y= 1 x2 1 x= 2 y y= x= 1 y2 1 y2 1 (C) (D) (E) 5.petersons. (A) (B) Which of the following equations does the graph best represent? (A) x = (y – 2)2 – 2 (B) x = (y + 2)2 – 2 (C) x = –(y – 2)2 – 2 (D) y = (x – 2)2 + 2 (E) y = (x – 2)2 – 2 3. 1.–1). 4.
then what is the value of M ? 5. x +1 2 1 x+1 x +1 x+2 3. 1 1 If f(x) = x + 1 . which of the following is true? (A) f(–10) = –6 (B) f(–6) = 0 (C) f(–8) = 2 (D) f(6) = 2 (E) f(8) = 4 Which of the following inequalities accounts for all such values of x ? (A) y ≥ 3 (B) x ≥ 3 (C) x ≤ 3 (D) y ≤ 3 (E) y ≤ –3 www. and if the domain of x is all real numbers.) 1. 7. in which you provide the numerical solution. What is the fourth term in a geometric series with first term 2 and third term 72? 4.petersons. If –32 = − 1 2 (A) –16 (B) –6 (C) –5 (D) 5 (E) 16 ( ) M . which of the following sets indicates the range of the function? (A) {y  y ≥ 1} (B) {y  y > 1} (C) {y  y ≤ 1} (D) {y  y < 1} (E) {y  y ≥ –2} In the linear function f. (C) (D) (E) 6. (All other questions are in multiplechoice format. What is the intersection of the set of all positive integers divisible by 4 and the set of all positive integers divisible by 6? (A) All positive multiples of 4 (B) All positive multiples of 6 (C) All positive multiples of 8 (D) All positive multiples of 12 (E) All positive multiples of 24 The shaded regions of the xyplane shown below represent certain values of x. If f(x) = y = 1 – x2. limiting your time to 15 minutes. if f(–6) = –2 and the slope of the graph of f in the xyplane is –2. then f x + 1 = (A) x ( ) (B) 2.com .262 Chapter 15 RETEST Answer the following 10 questions. Note that question 1 is a gridin question.
0) (B) (0. Once a certain airplane attains its maximum speed of 300 miles per hour (mph).petersons. it begins decreasing speed as it approaches its destination. In the xyplane.Numbers and Operations.com . the plane decreases its airspeed by 20 mph. (h).2) (E) (2.3) 10. Which of the following equations could define rocket’s height. the graph of 3x = 2y2 shows a parabola with vertex at the point defined by the (x.y) pair: (A) (0.2) (C) (2. its height is 96 feet. After 2 seconds and then again after 3 seconds. as a function of the number of seconds after launch (t)? (A) h = 10t2 – 74t (B) h = 8t2 – 64t (C) h = 64t – 8t2 (D) h = 80t – 16t2 (E) h = 96t – 10t2 www. Which of the following equations best defines the number of miles the plane has traveled (m) after beginning to decrease speed as a function of the airplane’s airspeed (s)? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5m + 750 2 2m s=− + 300 5 5s m = − + 750 2 5s m = − + 300 2 2s m= + 300 5 s=− 9. A model rocket is shot straight up in the air from ground level. Algebra.0) (D) (3. and Functions 263 8. After every 50 miles.
(D) Multiply like base numbers by adding exponents.000. To determine the function’s range. 000 ÷ 16 4 5. Note that 5 = a = 16. Choice (B) desribes the union of the factors of 15 and the factors of 30. 000 a × 16 = 256.com . as well as the integer 25 (but not integers 6 and 30). 7. (B) Substitute the expression (x + 1) for x in 1 f . consider each answer choice in turn. 000 a = 256. Urbanville’s population was 16. apply the rule that f(x) = (x)(5x) to each member of the domain.0). in turn: f (−2) = (−2)(5−2 ) = −2 2 =− 2 25 5 −1 1 f (−1) = (−1)(5−1 ) = 1 = − 5 5 f(0) = (0)(50) = (0)(1) = 0 f(2) = (2)(52) = (2)(25) = 50 The range of f(x) = x 2 1 is the set { − 25 . (C) First. but not the factors of 75 (which include 25). 5− x 0. but not the factors of 30 (which include 6 and 30). 8. Among the five equations. substituting the (x. 10. and 5 years ago.–6). With two points defined. Let T = 256. which is the point of xintercept. 4. Choice (D) desribes the union of the factors of 15 and the factors of 75. simplify the function. 000 a × 2 = 256. 5x Twenty years ago. r = 2. Thus. The correct answer is 16. then combine terms: x 1 × f (x) 1 × f (x) 1 1 1+ x 1 f = = x x + 1 x x 6.264 Chapter 15 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1.y) pairs provided in the question for x and y in the equation. 50 }. = x 6 y4 y x 6 4 = x2 y2 (A) One point on l is defined by (–5. The factors of 75 include all factors of 15. and n = 5 (the number of terms in the sequence that includes the city’s population 20. as well as its current population). 15. A second point on l is defined by (4. as well as the integer 6 and 30 (but not the integer 25). among answer choices (A) through (D). (B) To solve this problem. you can find the line’s slope (m) as follows: 6 2 2 1 m = x − x = 4 − (−5) = 9 = 3 . and divide like base numbers by subtracting the denominator exponent from the numerator exponent: x 6 y3 y y x x 6 3 and therefore that x 5− x = x 1 5x = ( x )(5x ) . The factors of 30 include all factors of 15. (E) The union of the three sets of factors is a set that contains all factors of any one or more of the three sets.petersons. 2 1 y −y 0 − (−6) www. none describes the intersection of all three sets. Solve for a in the general equation a · r (n – 1) = T. −x First. (D) The question asks which number among the five listed is outside the function’s range. 000 1 .000. only the equation in choice (B) holds for both pairs: y = 2x + 1 (−1) = 2(−1) + 1 (0) = 2(− 1 ) + 1 2 3. Solving for a: a × 2(5−1) = 256. Only answer choice (D) provides a number that is not in this range. determine each of the three absolute values: –1 – 2 = –3 = 3 5 – 6 = –1 = 1 –3 + 4 = 1 = 1 The combine the three results: 3 – 1 – 1 = 1.000. − 5 . 2.
www. 24. 3. However. 20. let T = 448. (E) The following figure shows the graphs of the two equations: Doubling every 12 years. Solve for a : a × 2( 7−1) = 448 a × 26 = 448 a × 64 = 448 a = 448 64 a=7 As you can see. Solve for T in the general equation a · r (n – 1) = T. 2. 12. 500 × 32 = T 48. r = 2.0). when a parabola extends upward. In the equation given by choice (A). Algebra. the graphs are not mirror images of each other about any of the axes described in answer choices (A) through (D). (D). 28. Of the five choices. only (A) and (C) provide equations that hold for the (x. you can eliminate choice (A).024. and n = 7. Solving for T: 1. Eliminate choices (B). Let a = 4. the number of observable cancer cells is 1. 500 × 2(6−1) = T 1.500. 000 = T 10. r = 2. up to and including the expected value in 2010).Numbers and Operations. and 32 seconds). Thus. and n = 9 (the number of terms in the sequence that includes the number of cells observable now as well as in 4. and (E). the land’s value will be $48. Exercise 1 1.com .y) pair (3. and Functions 265 9.000 in 2010.petersons. (C) The graph shows a parabola opening upward with vertex at (3. r = 2. and n = 6 (the number of terms in the sequence that includes the value in 1950 and at every 12year interval since then. 16. (A) Solve for T in the general equation a · r (n – 1) = T. 8. the coefficient of x2 in the equation must be positive.0). Let a = 1. the graph shows no negative yvalues. Solving for T: 4 × 2(9−1) = T 4 × 28 = T 4 × 256 = T 1. and the correct answer must be (C). 500 × 25 = T 1. substituting any nonzero number for x yields a negative yvalue. Also. (E). 024 = T 32 seconds from now. (B) In the standard equation.
the multiples of 2 . positive. 2. accordingly. There are two prime factors of 38: 2 and 19. 700 × 8 27 a = 800 () () ( 4 −1) = 2. r 2 = 49 r=7 To find the second term in the sequence. 8. www. (C) 19 is a prime number. 5 2. 6.com . Let T = 2. and zero (0). (E) The union of the two sets is the set that contains all integers — negative. a × 3 = 2. 6. and 6. Given that painting’s value increased by 3 50% (or 1 ) per year on average.5 = 2 . and therefore has only one prime factor: 19. and so the value three years later is the fourth term. 3. 700 3 3. and 18. 2 Solving for a: a× 3 2 Exercise 2 1. The positive factors of 18 are 1. The union of the sets described in choice (C) is the set that contains two members: 2 and 19. 2. r = 1. 12. 700 8 a = 2. First. As you can see. and 10. find r: 3 × r (3−1) = 147 3 × r = 147 2 4. 2 are 2 1 .The two sets have in common four members: 1. 2 1 . Through 10. Solve for a in the general equation a · r (n – 1) = T. The positive factors of 24 are 1. multiply the first term (3) by r : 3 · 7 = 21. 4. and 10. 5. 2.266 Chapter 15 4. The correct answer is 21. or 2 1 . (D) You can express set R:{x ≤ 10} as R:{–10 ≤ x ≤ 10}. The three sets have only one real number in common: the integer 10.700. At an increase of 50% per year. the two sets desribed in choice (A) intersect at. (A) Through 10. the collector must have paid $800 for the painting three years ago. 4. 5. 9. and 24. The value at the date of the purchase is the first term in the sequence. The correct answer is $800. 8. 3. every multiple of 10. the 2 2 multiples of 2 are 2. n = 4. The correct answer is 4. 5.petersons. 700 2 a × 27 = 2. 6. but only at. 3.
= 2−3 − 2 = −1 − 2 1 The correct answer is 16.com . y = x. The portion of the graph to the left of the yaxis could show these values. y = –1. 2. Then.) Choice (A). and Functions 267 Exercise 3 1. minus 1 (the graph is translated down one unit). (A) Raise both the coefficient –2 and variable x2 to the power of 4. Solve for x in both inequalities: x > 7. the result is always an integer. multiply together the exponents: (–2x2)4 = (–2)4x(2)(4) = 16x8 3. (D) The expression given in the question is equivalent to 4 · 4n. Since the terms are multiplied together. (E) Either x – 3 > 4 or x – 3 < –4. cannot be the correct answer. a negative number raised to a power is negative if the exponent is odd. (D) 7 – 2 – 2 – 7 = 5 – –5 = 5 – 5 = 0 Exercise 4 1. and then add: 4 3 2 + 4 3 2 = 4 3 + 4 3 = 64 + 64 = 8 + 8 = 16 = 1− 2 1 = 1 2 www. in which case a – b must be a positive integer. Algebra.Numbers and Operations. Express fractional exponents as roots. yet positive if the exponent is even: –1(–3) + [–1(–2)] + [–12] + [–13] = − + + 1 – 1 1 1 =0 1 1 5. then a > b. multiply the first term by the reciprocal of the second term. In this expression. base numbers are the same. For all positive values of x. For all negative values of x. 4. Also.petersons. but raised to the positive power. minus 1 (the graph is translated down one unit).–1) on the graph shows this functional pair. y is the absolute value of x. (B) If x = 0. (E) First. you can combine exponents by adding them together: 4 · 4n = 4(n+1). ( )= 1 −3 − 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 5. since the absolute value of any integer is by definition a positive integer. 3. (D) Substitute 2 for x in the function: f 1 2. which incorporates the concept of absolute value. 4. x < –1. (C) Any term to a negative power is the same as “one over” the term. When raising an exponent to a power. The point (0. (When you subtract one integer from another. The portion of the graph to the right of the yaxis could show these values. cancel common factors in each term. You can now see that all terms cancel out: a 2 b ÷ a 2 c = a 2 ÷ a 2 = a 2 × bc = 1 bc bc bc a 2 b 2 c bc 2 (C) If b – a is a negative integer. calculate the value of each term.
3. To do so. x = −1 2. You obtain this result with any value of x greater than 2 but less than 3— that is. 8. Accordingly. apply the rule x + 1 to 3. (B) The question asks you to recognize the set of values outside the domain of x. 2. (E) First. substitute 3 for a . (A) In the function. then one binomial value must be negative while the other is positive. let f(x) = 0. (D) 2 2 f(x2) = x . Of the five answer choices. 4. the largest possible domain of x is the set {3. Hence: a −3 − a −2 = 1 1 − a3 a 2 Using this form of the function. then find f(x). Since each of the answer choices indicates a quadratic expression. first factor the trinomial within the radical into two binomials: f ( x ) = x 2 − 5 x + 6 = ( x − 3)( x − 2) 4. apply the distributive property of arithmetic. Remember that x means the positive square root of x. substitute (2 + a) for x. (B) To determine the function’s range. www.petersons. only (E) does not fall within the range. (D) The function’s range contains only one member: the number 0 (zero). and 15: (3) + 1 = 4 = +2 (8) + 1 = 9 = +3 (15) + 1 = 16 = +4 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) 1 4 =2 1 4 1 4 = 1 2 1 2 = 1 4 Another way to solve the problem is to let x = 2x x . then combine terms: f (2 + a) = (2 + a)2 + 3(2 + a) − 4 = (2 + a)(2 + a) + 6 + 3a − 4 = 4 + 4 a + a 2 + 6 + 3a − 4 = a 2 + 7a + 6 Given that f(x) = 0. f(x2) ÷ ( f ( x ) ) 4 x2 · 2 = 2. apply the rule (6a – 4) to –6 and to 4. note that any term raised to a negative power is equal to 1 divided by the term to the absolute value of the power. and ( f ( x ) ) = x .268 Chapter 15 Exercise 5 1.com . then solve for x by squaring both sides of the equation (look for a root that matches one of the answer choices): x = 2x x 1= 2 x 1 = x 2 1 =x 4 Choice (B) provides the members of the range. to find the domain of x. The range consists of all real numbers between the two results: 6(–6) – 4 = –40 6(4) – 4 = 20 The range of the function can be expressed as the set R = {b  –40 < b < 20}. 2 Accordingly. If (x – 3)(x – 2) < 0. 2 x 2 2 x2 = ÷ x 2 2 () 2 () 2 = The function is undefined for all values of x such that (x – 3)(x – 2) < 0 because the value of the function would be the square root of a negative number (not a real number). (D) Substitute f(x) for x in the function g(x) = x + 3: g(f(x)) = f(x) + 3 Then substitute x for f(x): g(f(x)) = x2 + 3 2 5. (E) To determine the function’s range. and solve for all possible roots of x: x 2 − 2x − 3 = 0 ( x − 3)( x + 1) = 0 x − 3 = 0. –1}. x + 1 = 0 x = 3. (A) One way to approach this problem is to substitute each answer choice for x in the function. then simplify and combine terms: f 1 ( )= 1 3 () () 1 3 3 1 3 1 − 1 2 = 1 1 27 − 1 1 9 = 27 − 9 = 18 3. when 2 < x < 3. Only choice (A) provides a value for which f(x) = x: f Exercise 6 1.
0 is outside the domain of x. then applying the function yields a positive number. First.000 2.000 (82. which is a straight line. www. (If x > 0.6) both lie on the graph of g. substitute either (x. The question asks for the line’s yintercept (the value of b in the general equation y = mx + b).–9) and (–2.000 (83. the domain and range of any line other than a vertical or horizontal line is the set of all real numbers. thus.000. In 2 equation (E). However. Hence. 4. Algebra. After a total of 4 years.000 to $81. (D) The points (4.000) = (500)(4) + 80. Plugging both of these (N.y) pair (–2. then solve for b. Thus. (C) If x = 0. an executive’s salary is raised from $80.petersons.6): y=−5x+b 2 6 = − 5 (−2) + b 2 6 = 5+ b 1= b 3. equation (E) matches the graph of the function. m = – 2 . To find the value of b.000. Thus.000) = (500)(2) + 80.com . (E) The line shows a negative yintercept (the point where the line crosses the vertical axis) and a negative slope less than –1 (that is.000) and (4.S) pairs into each of the five equations.000) = (500)(6) + 80. the function can be defined for any other realnumber value of x. $81. and Functions 269 5.000). option III (two vertical lines) is the only one of the three options that cannot describe the graphs of the two functions.y) value pair for x and y. slightly more horizontal than a 45º angle).Numbers and Operations. (B) In the xyplane. if x < 0. you see that only the equation in choice (E) holds (try plugging in additional pairs to confirm this result): (81. determine the line’s slope: slope (m) = y2 − y1 6 − (−9) 15 = = =−5 x 2 − x1 2 −2 − 4 −6 5 In the general equation (y = mx + b).S) pairs are (2.) Exercise 7 1. that salary is raised to $82. $82. − is the slope and –3 is the y3 intercept. then the value of the fraction is undefined. two of the function’s (N. then applying the function yields a negative number. Substituting the (x. (E) After the first 2 years.
Choice (E) provides an equation x2 whose graph is identical to the graph of y = . Using the pair (2. You can determine the equation of the graph by first finding its slope (m): 1 − 3 −2 2 1 m = x − x = 4 − 2 = 2 = −1 . Eliminate (B).0). and (–6. The line’s equation is y = –x + 5. For example. (E) The equation y = is a parabola with 3 vertex at the origin and opening upward.petersons. 2 1 y −y Exercise 8 1. 3. substituting 0. (D) To solve this problem. again. 3 except translated three units to the left. suffices to show the same parabola as the previous one. only the equation in choice (D) holds for all four pairs. except with vertex (–3. (–3. If the vertex were at the origin.0) instead of (0. substituting the (x. and (–3.com .y) pair into the standard equation y = mx + b to define the equation of the line.y) pairs (0. as the graph suggests. Since h is a linear function. substitute simple values for x and solve for y in each case.–3).3).0).3). the equation defining the parabola might be x = y2. Plotting these three points on the xyplane. (E) The function h includes the two functional pairs (2. substitute some simple values for x and solve for y in each case. –3. and you’ll see that only in equation (A) is the corresponding xvalue greater than 0. Among the five equations. To confirm this. substituting 0. The graph of the former equation is the hyperbola shown to the right of the yaxis in the figure. Choices (D) and (E) define vertically oriented parabolas (in the general form y = x2) and thus can be eliminated.2). Considering the three remaining equations. its graph on the xyplane is a straight line. (3. x2 4. while the graph of the latter equation is the hyperbola shown to the left of the yaxis in the figure.270 Chapter 15 5.3): y = −x + b 3 = −2 + b 5=b 2. (A) The graph shows a parabola opening to the right with vertex at (–2. www. .0) — opening upward.1). 3.2). plug in the value –101 (as provided in the question) for x: y = –(–101) + 5 = 101 + 5 = 106. Try substituting 0 for y in equations (A) and (C). (A) and (C) both hold for the (x. To see that this is the case. Plotting these three points on the xyplane.y) pairs (0.0).y) pairs provided in the question for x and y in the equation. and –6 for x gives us the three (x. suffices to show a parabola with vertex (0. and –3 for x gives us the three (x. To determine which of the five answer choices provides a point that also lies on this line. but (B) does not. The equation  x  = y 2 represents the 1 union of the two equations x = y 2 and (D) −x = 1 y2 1 Plug either (x.y) pair (–2. consider each answer choice in turn.3).3) and (4. For example. then connecting them with a curved line. then connecting them with a curved line.
(B) In this problem. S is a function of P. and Functions 271 5. − 1 5. solve for T in the standard equation (let r = 6 and n = 4): 2 × 6( 4−1) = T 2 × 63 = T 2 × 216 = T 432 = T 2. Only the equation given in choice (B) holds for all three (P. 000 = 48. 000 = = 4 (2)2 48. this region is the graph of x ≤ –3. 000 = 12.petersons. However. find r: 2 × r (3−1) = 72 2 × r 2 = 72 r 2 = 36 r=6 To find the fourth term in the sequence. 3. (C) Note that (–2)5 = –32.com .000) and (4. The problem provides three (P. but no other elements. the 2 in the number 2 is in the denominator. Thus. (2.000). . For each of the answer choices. Since a negative number reciprocates its base.S) number pairs that satisfy the function: (1. In other words. 48. First. .000). 000 = = = 3. (D) The set of positive integers divisible by 4 includes all multiples of 4: 4. . 000 16 (4) 2 48. . 18. common to the two sets are all multiples of 12. 12. The least common multiple of 4 and 6 is 12. So. The correct answer is 432.S) pairs in the equation given. 000 3.Numbers and Operations. . Substitute x + 1 for x. 12. 000 (1)2 48. The set of positive integers divisible by 6 includes all multiples of 6: 6. 000 Retest 1. plug each of these three (P. this region is the graph of x ≥ 3. 12. The shaded region to the right of the yaxis accounts for all values of x that are greater than or equal to 3 . 24. 4. the problem must involve the number 5. and you must move it to the numerator. 000 12. (B) The shaded region to the left of the yaxis accounts for all values of x that are less than or equal to –3 . 000 48. then simplify: 1 x +1 1 ( ) 1 = x +1 = 1 = +1 1 x +1 1 + = 1+ ( x +1) x +1 1 x +1 = x +1 1 + ( x + 1) x + 2 www. Algebra. the answer to 1 3. In other words. . 8. (E) f ( 2) x +1 x +1 −5 = −32 .S) pairs: = 48. . 16. . 000 48.
you see that only the equation in choice (C) holds (try plugging in additional pairs to confirm this result): (50) = − 5(280) + 750 2 1400 50 = − + 750 2 50 = −700 + 750 50 = 50 (100) = − 5(260) + 750 2 1300 100 = − − + 750 2 100 = −650 + 750 100 = 100 www. Accordingly. To confirm that the vertex of the graph of 2 y2 x= lies at (0. and ( 2 . Isolating x in the equation 3x = 2y2 shows that the equation is of that form: x= 2 y2 3 7. you can see that this equation holds only for choice (C).com . substitute some simple 3 values for y and solve for x in each case. Hence.–2) for x and y. The equation of the function’s graph is y = –2x – 14. substituting 0. In the general equation y = mx + b. suffices to show a parabola with vertex (0.1). The range of the function includes 1 and all numbers less than 1. the result is a number greater than 0.100). 1. substitute the (x. For example. m = –2.y) value pair (–6. the speed has decreased to 260.petersons. 1 – x2 < 1.96).–2).–1). (D) The question provides two (t. Plugging both of these (s. For each of the answer choices.h) number pairs that satisfy the function: (2.) If you square any real number x other than 0.h) pairs: (96) = 80(2) – 16(2)2 = 160 – 64 = 96 (96) = 80(3) – 16(3)2 = 240 – 144 = 96 Note that the equation in choice (C) holds for f(2) = 96 but not for f(3) = 96. then solve for b: y = −2 x + b (−2) = −2(−6) + b −2 = 12 + b −14 = b 9. then connecting them with a curved line.272 Chapter 15 6. After the first 50 miles. After a total of 100 miles.0). 3 3 Plotting these three points on the xyplane. 10. (C) You can easily eliminate choices (A) and (B) because each one expresses speed (s) as a function of miles (m).m) pairs into each of the five equations.y) pairs given.96) and (3. then y = 1.0). for any nonzero value of x. if x = 0.h) pairs in the equation given.50) and (260. Only the equation given in choice (D) holds for both (t. just the reverse of what the question asks for. two of the function’s (s. (A) The graph of any quadratic equation of the incomplete form x = ay2 (or y = ax2 ) is a parabola with vertex at the origin (0. 8. plug each of these two (t.0) — opening to the right. (The function’s range includes the number 1.y) pairs (0. one point on which is (–6. To find the value of b. (C) The graph of f is a straight line.0). (C) According to the function. ( 2 . Plugging in each of the five (x. and –1 for y gives us the three (x. the plane’s speed decreases from 300 mph to 280 mph.m) pairs are (280.
which is a “gridin” (studentproduced response) question. what is the value of x? 3. 16 Answers are at the end of the chapter. The figure below shows a regular hexagon tangent to circle O at six points.Additional Geometry Topics. 4 5 8 6 5 3 2 2 3 If the area of the hexagon is 6 3 . Data Analysis. and Probability DIAGNOSTIC TEST Directions: Answer multiplechoice questions 1–11. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. 1. In the triangle shown below. Try to answer questions 1 and 2 using trigonometry. what is the value of x ? 12 6π (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 6 4 3 8 6 2 273 . as well as question 12. the circumference of circle O = (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3π 3 2 12 3 π 2π 3 In the triangle shown below.
–3) and B(4. In the xyplane. The figure below shows the graph of a certain equation in the xyplane.petersons. what is the slope of a line that is perpendicular to the line segment connecting points A(–4. then the line shown in the xyplane below is the graph of 5.–1) In the xyplane.y) pairs defines a point that lies on the same line as the two points defined by the pairs (2. In the xyplane. –3 0 3 4 1 9.274 Chapter 16 4. What is the value of a ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) –26 –3 3 26 35 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) f(–x) f(x + 1) f(x – 1) f(1 – x) f(–x – 1) The table below shows the number of bowlers in a certain league whose bowling averages are within each of six specified point ranges.1)? (A) (7. or intervals. which of the following (x.–3) (B) (–1.com .2) (D) (–2.–4) (E) (6. If no bowler in the league has an average less than 80 or greater than 200. point (a. At how many different values of x does y = 2 ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 0 1 2 4 Infinitely many www.3) and (4.–3).8) (C) (–3. If f(x) = x. 6.5) lies along a line of 1 slope 3 that passes through point (2. what percent of the league’s bowlers have bowling averages within the interval 161–200? 7.3)? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) –2 4 3 8.
what is the probability that the point will lie in a shaded portion of that circle? (A) (B) (C) (D) The further west a city. which is further east than City C. The further east a city. The more annual rainfall a city receives. two blue marbles. for example. One marble is to be drawn randomly from a bag that contains three red marbles. the more annual rainfall it receives. the more annual rainfall it receives. City A is further east than City B. which of the following statements is most accurate? 11.petersons. If a point is selected at random from the large circular region. (E) www. the higher its average annual temperature. the lower its average annual temperature. Based on the figure.Additional Geometry Topics.com . The figure below shows two concentric circles. The area of the large circle is exactly twice that of the smaller circle. and one green marble. The cities are labeled by the letters A through E in order according to their eastwest location. The higher a city’s average annual temperature. Data Analysis. The further east a city. Average annual rainfall and temperatures for five cities are plotted in the figure below. What is the probability of drawing a blue marble? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 6 1 5 2 7 1 3 2 5 12. each divided into eight congruent segments. the lower its average annual temperature. and Probability 275 10.
cosB = ) hypotenuse c c opposite a b tangent = (tanA = . b. respectively.com . the lengths of the sides opposite those angles are in the ratio 1 : 1 : 2 . Accordingly. and c. RIGHT TRIANGLES AND TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS Righttriangle trigonometry involves the ratios between sides of right triangles and the angle measures that correspond to these ratios. the sine. In a 30°60°90° triangle. and tangent functions of the 30°. sinB = ) c hypotenuse c adjacent b a cosine = (cosA = . respectively (∠A and ∠B are the two acute angles): Here are the general definitions of the three trigonometric functions sine. respectively.petersons. B. Refer to the following right triangle. cosine. and tangent. and C are labeled a. and how you would express these three functions in terms of ∠A and ∠B in ∆ABC: a b opposite (sinA = . in which the sides opposite angles A.276 Chapter 16 1. and 60° angles of any right triangle are as follows: 45°45°90° triangle: sin45° = cos45° = tan45° = 1 2 2 30°60°90° triangle: sin30° = cos60° = sin60° = cos30° = tan30° = tan60° = 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 www. The following figure shows the ratios among the sides of these two uniquely shaped triangles: In a 45°45°90° triangle. 45°. cosine. tanB = ) adjacent b a sine = In right triangles with angles 45°45°90° and 30°60°90°. the lengths of the sides opposite those angles are in the ratio 1 : 3 : 2 . the values of these trigonometric functions are easily determined.
you can easily apply either the sine or the cosine function to determine the length of either leg. set the value of this function equal to x opposite . 2x = 2 2 . Applying the function sin45° = 2 opposite 2 2 . you can easily apply either the sine or cosine function to determine the length of the hypotenuse. Since the figure shows a 45°45°90° triangle in which the length of one leg is known. what is the value of x ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 3 3 3 10 3 2 3 3 2 Solution: The correct answer is (D). you can use these trigonometric functions to determine the length of any other side—as an alternative to applying the Pythagorean Theorem. then solve for x: = . x = 2 .petersons. then solve for x: 4 hypotenuse 2 3 x = . set the value of this function equal to 2 3 2 2 5 2 3 2 2 Example: In the triangle shown below. and Probability 277 In SAT problems involving 30°60°90° and 45°45°90° right triangles.Additional Geometry Topics. x hypotenuse 2 x 2 . Applying the function sin60° = 3 . Example: In the triangle shown below. Since the figure shows a 30°60°90° triangle. x = 2 3 2 4 www. Data Analysis.com . what is the value of x ? (A) 3 (B) 2 (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (B). as long as the length of one side is provided. 2x = 4 3 .
which of the following most closely approximates the number of miles each train has traveled when the shortest distance between the two trains is 70 miles? (A) 49 (B) 55 (C) 60 (D) 70 (E) 140 If two interior angles of a triangle measure 30° and 60°. What is the area of the triangle shown below? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. one traveling due north and the other due east.5 13 3 3 9 3 2 5 3 In the triangle shown below.com . 4 3 2 5 3 3 10 3 Two trains depart at the same time from the same terminal. If the trains travel at the same average speed. what is the value of x ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3. In the triangle shown below what is the value of x ? 4. how many units long is the side opposite the 30° angle? (A) 3 (B) 2 3 (C) 4 (D) 3 2 (E) 5 3 2 www.278 Chapter 16 Exercise 1 Work out each problem.petersons. each along a straight track. 5 2 7. and if the side of the triangle opposite the 60° angle is 6 units long. 1. 3 2 7 2 2 5 3 3 4 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.
Thus. the point of tangency between each line segment and the circle bisects the segment. for the new SAT you should know the following two rules: 1. in the next figure. Thus. what is the area of the shaded region? 3 (A) (3 3 − π ) 2 (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 (3 − 2 3π ) − 3) 4 3−π 2 (3π 3 4π − 3 www. and a regular pentagon). If the radius of the circle is 3 and m∠OAC = 30°.Additional Geometry Topics. in the next figure. which shows three circles. Example: In the figure below. For any regular polygon (in which all sides are congruent) that circumscribes a circle. In addition to the rules you learned in Chapter 13 involving tangents. a square. and Probability 279 2. AB passes through the center of circle O and AC is tangent to the circle at P.petersons. each circumscribed by a regular polygon (shown from left to right. OP 9 AB : 2. Data Analysis. TANGENT LINES AND INSCRIBED CIRCLES A circle is tangent to a line (or line segment) if it intersects the line (or line segment) at one and only one point (called the point of tangency). which shows a circle with center O.com . an equilateral triangle. all line segments are bisected by the points of tangency highlighted along the circles’ circumferences: These two additional rules involving tangents allow for a variety of additional types of SAT questions. A line (or line segment) that is tangent to a circle is always perpendicular to a radius drawn from the circle’s center to the point of tangency.
and drawing the radius from O to P forms a right triangle (∆AOP). Since m∠OAP = 30°. AC ⊥ PO . To answer the question. whose area = 1 2 circle. www. m∠OAP = 60° (one sixth the total number of degrees in the area of ∆AOP: 9 2 3 3 3 − 2 π = 2 (3 3 − π ) . and hence the segment of the circle bound by ∠OAC is onesixth the circle’s area.com . subtract the area of this segment of the circle from the 6 (3)(3 3 = ) 9 2 3 . Draw a radius from O to P.280 Chapter 16 Solution: The correct answer is (A). or 1 π 32 6 3 = 9 π = 2 π . 360). Since AC is tangent to the circle at P.petersons.
The length of BD equals the diameter of the circle. whose center is O. 1. 2. C lies on the circumference of a circle with center O and radius 6. 6 + 12 3 12 + 12 2 18 3 24 2 36 The figure below shows an equilateral triangle (∆ABC) tangent to circle O at three points. If the perimeter of ∆ABC is 18. In the figure below. what is the perimeter of ∆ABO ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 4. In the figure below. Circle the letter that appears before your answer. 3. the area of circle O = (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2π 5π 2 2 2π 3π 2π 3 What is the degree measure of minor arc DE ? (A) 40 (B) 110 (C) 120 (D) 130 (E) 220 www.petersons. AC is tangent to the circle at point B. The figure below shows a regular pentagon tangent to circle O at five points.com . and Probability 281 Exercise 2 Work out each problem. Data Analysis.Additional Geometry Topics. If the perimeter of the pentagon is 10. what is the length of AP ? If m∠BOA = 90° and OA ≅ OB .
petersons. a circle with center O is tangent to AB at point D and tangent to AC at point C. www.282 Chapter 16 5. If m∠A = 40°.com . In the figure below. then x = (A) 140 (B) 145 (C) 150 (D) 155 (E) It cannot be determined from the information given.
) You can determine the slope of a line from any two pairs of (x. –2) slopes downward from left to right at more than a 45° angle in relation to the xaxis. b is the line’s yintercept (where the line crosses the y axis). • The slope of a line perpendicular to another is the negative reciprocal of the other line’s slope.) For example. For example. • Determining the point at which two nonparallel lines intersect on the coordinate plane (in which case you determine the equation for each line. • Determining the equation of a line. In this equation. In general. then identify the mterm.Additional Geometry Topics. if (x1. (The product 3 of the two slopes is 1. A line with a fractional slope between 0 and –1 slopes downward from left to right but at less than a 45° angle in relation to the xaxis.petersons. In the xyplane: • A line sloping upward from left to right has a positive slope (m). a line with slope 2 is perpendicular to a line with slope − 2 . www. calculate the line’s slope as follows (notice that you can subtract either pair from the other): slope (m) = y2 − y1 y −y or 1 2 x 2 − x1 x1 − x 2 Be careful to subtract corresponding values. and Probability 283 3. 3 On the new SAT.y) pair defining a point on the line can substitute for the variables x and y. so the mterm in the equation is ignored. or just the line’s slope (m) or yintercept (b). given the coordinates of two points on the line. • A horizontal line has a slope of zero (m = 0. (Any (x. EQUATIONS AND GRAPHS OF LINES IN THE XYPLANE You can define any line in the standard xycoordinate plane by the equation y = mx + b. and mx = 0) • A vertical line has either an undefined or an indeterminate slope (the fraction’s denominator is 0). A line with a slope of –1 slopes downward from left to right at a 45° angle in relation to the xaxis. A line with a fractional slope between 0 and 1 slopes upward from left to right but at less than a 45° angle in relation to the xaxis. and then solve for x and y by either substitution or additionsubtraction) • Recognizing the slope or the equation of a line based on the line’s graph.y) coordinates. • Parallel lines have the same slope (the same mterm in the general equation). a question involving the equation or graph of a line might ask you to apply one or more of the preceding rules in order to perform tasks such as: • Identifying the slope of a line defined by a given equation (in which case you simply put the equation in the standard form y = mx + b. A line with a slope greater than 1 slopes upward from left to right at more than a 45° angle in relation to the xaxis. Data Analysis. m is the slope of the line.com . • A line sloping downward from left to right has a negative slope (m). A line with a slope less than –1 (for example. and x and y are the coordinates of any point on the line.y2) lie on the same line. a careless testtaker calculating the slope might subtract y1 from y2 but subtract x2 from x1.y1) and (x2. A line with a slope of 1 slopes upward from left to right at a 45° angle in relation to the xaxis.
4): y = −3x + b 4 = −3(3) + b 4 = −9 + b 13 = b Example: In the xyplane. the (x. substitute either (x. and the (x.) (− .− ) (− . what is the slope of the line defined by the two points P(2.284 Chapter 16 Example: In the xyplane.4) intersect that axis? (A) –8 (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (E).y) value pair for x and y.–2) and (3. Substituting the (x. Here are two ways to find the slope: slope (m) = 4 − 1 = 3 −3 − 2 −5 slope (m) = 1 − 4 = −3 2 − (−3) 5 −5 3 −3 5 3 5 3 Example: In the xyplane. ) ( .1) and Q(–3.1) define another line.–1) and (2.y) pairs (0.petersons. To find the value of b.2) and (2. At which of the following (x.com .4)? (A) –3 (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (C). then solve for b. 23 ) (B) (C) (D) (E) (. First. determine the line’s slope: slope (m) = y2 − y1 4 − (−2) 6 = = = −3 x 2 − x1 3− 5 −2 –2 3 7 13 5 In the general equation (y = mx + b).y) points do the two lines intersect? (A) ( 43 . at what point along the yaxis does the line passing through points (5. The question asks for the line’s yintercept (the value of b in the general equation y = mx + b).y) pairs (–2.y) pair (3. m = –3. − ) 3 4 2 3 1 3 2 2 3 4 2 3 3 4 2 3 www.0) define a line.
Only choice (E) provides an equation that meets both conditions.–1) and (2. Notice that line P slopes downward from left to right at an angle greater than 45°. For example: 1 2 3 2 1 2 x. if the scales on both axes are the same. For the pairs (–2. 3 3 Example: Referring to the xyplane above. To find the point of intersection. then yintercept (b). Data Analysis.1): y= ( 1− ( −1) 2− ( −2 ) ) x + b (slope = 1 ) 2 1 = 1 (2) + b 2 0=b The equation for the line is y = substitution.0): y= ( )x + b 0− 2 2− 0 (slope = −1) 0 = −2 + b 2=b The equation for the line is y = –x + 2. For each line. the line’s yintercept (b in the equation y = mx + b) is negative. solve for x and y by x = −x + 2 x=2 x= y= 4 3 2 3 The point of intersection is defined by the coordinate pair ( 4 . below the xaxis). That is. the line’s slope (m in the equation y = mx + b) < –1. which of the following could be the equation of line P ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) Solution: The correct answer is (E).2) and (2.petersons. Also notice that line P crosses the yaxis at a negative yvalue (that is.Additional Geometry Topics. Thus. formulate its equation by determining slope (m).com . and Probability 285 Solution: The correct answer is (A). y= 5x– 2 y=–2x+ 2 y= 2x– 2 y= 5x+ 5 y=–2x– 2 5 5 2 2 5 5 5 5 2 5 www. 2 ). For the pairs (0.
y= 3x–6 y= 2x–6 y=–2x+6 y= 3x+6 y=–3x–6 2 2 3 3 2 1 2 3. In the xyplane. if the scales on both axes are the same. what is the slope of a line that contains the points (–1. what is the slope of the line described by the equation 2y = –9 ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2.5) in the xyplane? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) y = –x + y=x+ y= 1 2 3 2 3 x–1 2 y = –x + 2 y=x+1 www. 1.3)? (A) y = 3x – 3 (B) y = 3x + 12 (C) y = x + 6 (D) y = –3x – 12 (E) y = 6x – 6 What is the equation of the line that is the perpendicular bisector of the line segment connecting points (4.–2) and (–3. if the line contains the point defined by the xycoordinate pair (–3. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons.286 Chapter 16 Exercise 3 Work out each problem.4) and (3. what is the equation of the line with slope 3. In the xyplane. which of the following could be the equation of line P ? The slope is undefined. Referring to the xyplane below. In the xyplane.–6)? (A) (C) (B) (D) (E) − − 5 2 1 2 –2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5.com . –2 –9 0 9 2 2 9 4.
the leftmost point along the circle’s circumference is at (–8. a question might show a graph of a quadratic function or other equation in the xyplane. In other words. or even a trigonometric function (appearing as a wave). the minimum value in the domain of x is –8. To answer these questions.5 ? (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 4 (E) Infinitely many Solution: The correct answer is (C). 0). The function f(x) is transformed by substituting an expression containing the variable x for x in the function — for example: If f(x) = 2x. minimum or maximum points on the graph.5. simply apply your knowledge of the xycoordinate system and. an ellipse. you do not need to know the equations that define such graphs. when x = –7. You might encounter the graph of a circle. The effect of a transformation might be any of the following: * To move. That is. and Probability 287 4. the graph (either vertically.–6). Example: The figure above shows the graph of a certain equation in the xyplane.5. and then ask you to identify or recognize certain features of the graph—for example. there are two different corresponding values of y. function notation (see Chapter 15). At how many different values of y does x = –7. a parabola. First. or translate.Additional Geometry Topics. r = 3. or both) to another position in the plane * To alter the slope of a line (in the case of a linear function) * To alter the shape of a curve (in the case of a quadratic function) www. 3 units to the left of O. Data Analysis.com . then f(x + 1) = 2(x + 1). Since the circle’s center (0) lies at (–5. intersects the circle at exactly two points.petersons. find the circle’s radius from its circumference: C = 6π = 2πr. Thus. GRAPHS OF FUNCTIONS AND OTHER EQUATIONS—FEATURES AND TRANSFORMATIONS On the new SAT.–6). or 2x + 2 Transforming a function alters the graph of the function in the xyplane.5. horizontally. The graph is a circle with center O and circumference 6π. the graph of x = –7. for some questions. Other questions on the new SAT will involve transformations of linear and quadratic functions and the effect of transformations on the graphs of such functions. which is a vertical line passing through (–7.
if f(x) = x.y) pairs based on the new function. and then connect them. To determine which of the five answer choices transforms the original function f(x) = x + 3 to the function f(x) = x. www. you can tabulate some (x.com . (The yintercept becomes 1 instead of 0. In the xyplane. conversely. The figure shows the graph of the function f(x) = x (or y = x). The effect of transforming f(x) to f(x + 1) on the graph of f(x) is the translation of the line one unit upward. then the line shown in the xyplane above is the graph of (A) f(x) (B) f(x – 6) (C) f(x + 6) (D) f(x + 3) (E) f(x – 3) Solution: The correct answer is (E). use x to signify f(y). is a line with slope 1 passing through the origin (0.petersons. in turn. then f(x + 1) = x + 1.0). for x in the original function. the graph of f(x) = x (or y = x). plot the points on the xyplane. use y to signify f(x) and. Choice (E) is the only one that provides an expression that achieves this transformation: f ( x − 3) = ( x − 3) + 3 f ( x − 3) = x y=x To help you determine the effect of a function’s transformation on the function’s graph. substitute the variable expression in each choice. Example: If f(x) = x + 3.) Remember: In determining the graph of a function in the xyplane.288 Chapter 16 For example.
4) Plotting these points in the xyplane reveals a graph whose key features match those of the figure provided in the question.y) pairs.Additional Geometry Topics.com .1).0). (Since the vertex in the graph lies along the xaxis. The figure shows the graph of y = x2. then the graph shown in the xyplane above best represents which of the following functions? (A) f(–x) (B) f(x – 1) (C) f(x + 1) (D) f(x2 + 1) (E) f(x2 – 1) Solution: The correct answer is (B). for x in the function f(x) = x2.4). Data Analysis. let x = 0 in order to establish the vertex’s coordinates. (2.petersons. www.1)(1. Performing this task for choice (B) yields the equation f(x) = (x – 1)2. Substitute the variable expression given in each answer choice.y) pairs for the equation y = (x – 1)2 : (0. (3. Identify and plot some (x. (–1.) Here are some (x. and Probability 289 Example: If f(x) = x2. or y = (x – 1)2. in turn. but translated to the right.
then the line shown in the xyplane below is the graph of (C) (D) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) f(x + 1) f(x – 1) f(x + 2) f(x – 2) All of the above (E) www. then which of the following is the graph of f ( )? x−2 2 (A) (B) 2. at how many different values of x is  f(x) at its maximum value? 3.com . If f(x) = 2x – 2. The figure below shows a portion of the graph of a certain function in the xyplane. For questions 2–5.290 Chapter 16 Exercise 4 Work out each problem. Question 1 is a gridin question. For the portion shown. circle the letter that appears before your answer. 1.petersons. If f(x) = 2.
then the graph shown in the xyplane below best represents which of the following functions? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) f(–y) f(y + 1) f(y – 1) f(y – 2) f(y2 – 2) www. If f(y) = –(y2 + 1).Additional Geometry Topics.com .petersons. what is the yintercept of the graph of f(x+ 1) in the xyplane? (A) –2 (B) –1 (C) 0 (D) 1 (E) 2 5. Data Analysis. If f(x) = (x – 1)2 + 1. and Probability 291 4.
or ratio. In handling SAT data analysis.59. line charts.5 + 4. The total number of units sold to institutions = (3. fraction.9) + (1. DATA ANALYSIS The new SAT includes questions involving the analysis of data displayed in graphical formats such as tables.9 + 2.petersons.S. To answer any data analysis question asking for an approximation. so that you select the appropriate graphical data and perform the appropriate calculation — one that yields the answer to the precise question being asked. In analyzing a line chart.4 by 22.8 (round off the quotient): 22.2) = 22.4. divide 13. which of the following most closely approximates the percent that were standard models? (A) 24% (B) 36% (C) 41% (D) 59% (E) 68% Solution: The correct answer is (D). of the total number of automobiles sold to U. bar graphs.8 ÷ 13. and scatter plots.com . bar graph. To answer a dataanalysis question. average. you’ll need to: * Understand how the data are displayed * Know which data are relevant to the question * Know how to process the relevant data to solve the problem (answer the question correctly) A data analysis question might require a simple arithmetic calculation (addition or subtraction) and/or a simple calculation of a percent. pie graphs. or 59%. To answer the question. be careful to read the question very carefully. www.7 + 4.6 + 8. or scatter plot (see the examples below).9) = 13. rounding off your calculations will suffice. Example (Table): According to the table above. The number of these units that were standard models = (8. estimating number values in the display will suffice to answer the question correctly. and foreign institutions during the 2002–03 model year.292 Chapter 16 5.8.5 + 1.4 ≈ .
000 square feet Solution: The correct answer is (D).500 square feet (C) 70.com .80 (B) $2.petersons.000 square feet. and Probability 293 Example (Pie Graph): Based on the data shown above.500 square feet (E) 108.Additional Geometry Topics.000 square feet. The size of Unit B is 42% of 140. Example (Line Chart): Referring to the graph above.000 square feet (D) 74.500 square feet. www.60 (C) $3.60 (E) It cannot be determined from the information given. Thus. or about 59. the combined size of Unit B and Unit D is approximately 74. Data Analysis.00 (D) $3. approximately what was the greatest dollar amount by which the share price of ABC common stock exceeded the share price of XYZ common stock at the same time during year X? (A) $1. the combined area of Unit B and Unit D is approximately (A) 51.000 square feet (B) 57.
Approximate the height of each three portions: 13–18 age group: 25 hours 19–24 age group: 5 hours 25–30 age group: 10 hours The ratio in question is 25:15. The portion on the first chart is a bit larger than the other two combined. www. and so you’re looking for a ratio that’s greater than 1:1.petersons. what is the approximate ratio of the average number of hours per week that the youngest age group spent watching entertainment to the average number of hours that the other two groups combined spent watching entertainment? (A) 3:4 (B) 1:1 (C) 6:5 (D) 5:3 (E) 5:2 Solution: The correct answer is (D).00 per share. the end of the 2nd quarter marks the greatest difference between prices during that period.com . The difference between those two prices is $2. You’re task here is to compare the size of the entertainment portion of the lefthand bar to the combined sizes of the same portion of the other to bars.60. Size up the ratio visually. ABC stock was priced at approximately $7. You’re looking for the point at which the dotted line (ABC’s stock price) is furthest above the solid line (XYZ’s stock price).294 Chapter 16 Solution: The correct answer is (B). or 5:3. Example (Bar Graph): Referring to the data shown above.60. while XYZ stock was priced at approximately $5. At that time. The dotted line lies above the solid line only during the second half of the 2nd quarter and the first half of the 3rd quarter.
D. If all five companies have sold the same number of units. C. Segment OE has the steepest slope.com . www. The segment with the steepest slope (vertical change divided by horizontal change) indicates the greatest pricetocost ratio. and Probability 295 Example (Scatter Plot): Companies A. Since the number of units sold was the same for all five companies. The graph above compares manufacturing costs and sales prices per unit among the five companies. You can compare ratios by drawing a line segment from point 0 to each of the five plotted points. Data Analysis. which company has earned the greatest profit from those sales? (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D (E) E Solution: The correct answer is (E). the greatest profit was earned by the company with the highest pricetocost ratio. and E all manufacturer and sell a similar product. and hence company E earned the greatest profit.petersons. B.Additional Geometry Topics.
com .000 Among the years covered in the graph below. Referring to the graph below.000 $270. C.petersons.000 $160. 1.000 $140.000 $220.000 $312. AND D 3. $125.000 $400. during the year in which aggregate awards of nonminority and minority funds was greatest. by approximately what amount did Division D’s income exceed Division C’s income during year X? WEBCO’S INCOME DURING YEAR X — DIVISIONS A. Circle the letter that appears before your answer.000 $127. during the twomonth period over which the average daily temperature in City X increased by the greatest percentage. the dollar difference between nonminority and minority awards was approximately: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 38 degrees 42 degrees 52 degrees 62 degrees 66 degrees (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $130.000 $156.000 www. According to the data shown below. City Y’s highest daily temperature was approximately: (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. B.296 Chapter 16 Exercise 5 Work out each problem.
C. B. Among the five cyclists identified in the figure as A.Additional Geometry Topics. all of whom competed in the same two races (race 1 and race 2). 4.petersons. and E. and Probability 297 Questions 4 and 5 are based on the following figure. Data Analysis.com . www. D. which of the following most closely approximates the ratio of the average time for race 1 to the average time for race 2? (A) 1:2 (B) 2:3 (C) 1:1 (D) 3:2 (E) 2:1 5. which compares the race times of ten different cyclists. which had the fastest combined (total) race time for races 1 and 2? (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D (E) E Considering the ten cyclists as a group.
E} is 3 .B} and {C. and it’s never greater than 1. To calculate the probability of an event NOT occurring. Hence.) An SAT probability problem might involve the probability of two independent events both occurring. the probability of selecting A and C is 1×1 1 . PROBABILITY The new SAT includes simple questions involving probability.) You can express probability either as either a fraction or a percent. Example: If you randomly select one letter from each of two sets: {A. then replacing it and selecting again (as in a “second round” or “another turn” of a game) To determine the probability of two independent events both occurring. or 13 . while the 1 probability of selecting C from the set {C. or “odds. the outcome of throwing a pair of dice) * The random selection of one object from a group. the probability of NOT selecting a face card would be 52 .com . Referring to the preceding example. what is the probability of selecting A and C? Solution: The correct answer is 6 . (Probability is never negative. just subtract the probability of the event occurring from 40 10 1. which refers to the statistical chances. There are 12 ways that a face card could be selected at random from the standard 52card deck. probability ranges from 0 to 1. Here’s the basic formula: Probability = total number of possible occurrences b Example: A standard deck of 52 playing cards contains 12 face cards.” of an event occurring (or not occurring). Here are two general situations: * The random selection of one object from each of two groups (for example. www. or 6 . What is the probability of selecting a face card from such a deck? Solution: The correct answer is 52 . multiply individual probabilities.B} is 2 . The probability of selecting A from the set {A. (Sub12 tract 52 from 1.D.298 Chapter 16 6. By definition. or 13 .E}.D.petersons. Two events are “independent” if neither event affects the probability that the other will occur. 2 3 1 1 12 3 number of ways the event can occur An SAT probability problem might be accompanied by a geometry figure or other figure that provides a visual display of the possibilities from which you are to calculate a probability.
25) of the circle’s area.25).25 (or 4 ). 2 1 The two shaded segments comprise 8 . Given a total of 360° in a circle. what is the probability that the point will lie in a shaded portion of the circle? Solution: The correct answer is .com .petersons. The angles opposite each of the three 45° angles identified in the figure must also measure 45° each. The probability of selecting a 1 point at random in a shaded area is also 4 (or .Additional Geometry Topics. all of the eight small angles formed at the circle’s center measure 45°. or 4 (. and hence all eight segments of the circle are congruent. and Probability 299 Example: If a point is selected at random from the circular region shown above. 1 www. Data Analysis.
squash and peas. then one student is again chosen randomly from the same group of seven. If you randomly select one candy from a jar containing two cherry candies. squash. circle the letter that appears before your answer.petersons. of which 53 are dimes and 19 are nickels. what is the probability that two different students will be chosen? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 36 49 6 7 19 21 13 14 48 49 If a point is selected at random from the large circular region. 3. and peas? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 12 1 9 1 6 1 3 1 2 The figure below shows two concentric circles. The remainder of the coins in the bank are quarters. The area of the large circle is exactly 3 times that of the smaller circle. 1. A piggybank contains a certain number of coins. If the probability of selecting a 1 quarter from this bank is 4 . soup and salad—along with two of three vegetables—carrots. each divided into six congruent segments. Question 5 is a gridin question. how many quarters does the bank contain? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 16 21 24 27 30 5. What is the probability that any patron will select fruit. salad. and one peppermint candy. Patrons at a certain restaurant can select two of three appetizers—fruit.300 Chapter 16 Exercise 6 Work out each problem.com . what is the probability that the point will lie in a shaded portion of that circle? www. two licorice candies. For questions 1–4. 1 6 1 5 1 3 2 5 3 5 4. what is the probability of selecting a cherry candy? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. If one student is chosen randomly out of a group of seven students.
1. if the scales on both axes are the same.petersons. one plane would need to turn 120° to either the left or right to point directly at the other plane. each on a straight flight path. O1 and O2 are concentric circles and AB is tangent to O1 at C. In the triangle shown below. 2 2 2 3 4 5 2 2 Two planes depart at the same time from the same terminal. In the figure below.com . Which of the following most closely approximates the number of miles the faster of the two planes has traveled at this point in time? (A) 25 (B) 30 (C) 35 (D) 40 (E) 45 If the radius of O1 is r and the radius of O2 is twice as long. one traveling due north and the other due west. Data Analysis. and Probability 301 RETEST Answer questions 1–12. Question 9 is a “gridin” (studentproduced response) question. When the shortest distance between the planes is 40 miles. In the xyplane below. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2. which of the following could be the equation of l1 ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) y= 2 x–3 3 y = –2x + 1 y=x+3 y = –3x − 2 3 2 3 y= − x–3 www. what is the area of the shaded region? (A) 1 πr2 2 (B) πr2 3 (C) 2 πr2 (D) 2πr2 (E) 3πr2 4. all other questions are standard multiplechoice. what is the value of x ? 3. Try to answer questions 1 and 2 using trigonometry.Additional Geometry Topics.
3). In the xyplane.petersons. what is the slope of line b ? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5 2 5 − 8 2 − 5 1 2 − 8. if lines a and b intersect at point (5. 6.com . ( ) f( ) x f −4 −x 2 Based on the data shown below. Which of the following is the equation of a straight line that has yintercept 3 and is perpendicular to the line 4x – 2y = 6 ? (A) 2y + 3x = –3 (B) y + 3x = 2 (C) 2y – x = 6 (D) y – 2x = 4 (E) 2y + x = 6 If f(x) = − 2 x. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 9.–2) and lines b and c intersect at point (–3. If f(x) = 2x2 + 2. how many chickens at Hill Farm laid 10 eggs from June 1st through June 7th? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) f(x) f(x – 3) f(x + 3) f(–4x) f(x + 6) www.302 Chapter 16 5. then the line shown in the xyplane below is the graph of 1 (1) 1 f (− x ) f 2 f(–2x) 7. then the graph shown in the xyplane below best represents which of the following functions? It cannot be determined from the information given.
If these are the only colors of marbles in the bag. According to the data shown below. during what year was the dollar amount of Country Y’s exports approximately twice that of Country X’s imports? 12. Data Analysis. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1985 1987 1988 1989 1990 On a fair throw of both dice.petersons. and Probability 303 10. The figure below shows two Tshaped cardboard pieces. both to be folded into a pair of cubeshaped dice.Additional Geometry Topics. A bag of marbles contains twice as many red marbles as blue marbles. what is the probability of randomly picking a blue marble from the bag? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 6 2 9 1 4 2 7 1 3 www. and twice as many blue marbles as green marbles. what is the probability that NEITHER die will show either a solid white or solid black surface facing up? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 2 5 11.com .
Applying the function sin45° = 2 . plug in the values of x and y provided each answer choice. ∆AOP is equilateral. you can easily apply either the sine or the cosine function to determine the length of the hypotenuse. 3. and this value occurs only once in the set of yvalues — when x = 0. (D) Given any two xycoordinate points. (C) Since the hexagon is regular (all sides are congruent). x = 8 . Applying the function sin30° = 1 2 4 x perpendicular to AB is the negative reciprocal of 4 . Accordingly. the circle’s circumference must be 2π 3 . 1 2 line’s slope m = x − x . Substitute the (x. (B) Since the figure shows a 45°45°90° 4. Since the common leg. then solve for x: 2 5 10 10 2 = . x = = =5 2. 6. 5.y) x 2 − x1 4 − 2 2 The line’s slope (m) = triangle in which the length of one leg is known.304 Chapter 16 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE EXERCISES Diagnostic Test 1. (E) y2 − y1 1 − 3 −2 = = = −1 . hence you can divide it into two 1: 3 :2 triangles. (B) The slope of AB = y2 − y1 3 − (−3) 6 3 = = = x 2 − x1 4 − (−4) 8 4 . is also the circle’s radius. then solve for x: 2 = x . whose length is 3 . a y −y .3): y = −x + b 3 = −2 + b 5=b The line’s equation is y = –x + 5. www. as shown in the figure.com . 1 2 1 5 − (−3) = . Using the pair (2. (D) Since the figure shows a 30°60°90° triangle.petersons. The slope of the line 3 4 2. set the value of this function equal to 2 5 opposite x hypotenuse . 2 x = 10 . then crossmultiply to 3 a−2 solve for a: 1 8 = 3 a−2 a − 2 = (3)(8) a − 2 = 24 a = 26 7. Simplify. you can see that the maximum value of y is 2. the area of ∆AOP in the following figure is 3 — one sixth the area of the hexagon. which is – 3 . To determine which of the five answer choices provides a point that also lies on this line. Only choice (E) provides a solution to the equation: –1 = –6 + 5. you can easily apply either the sine or cosine function to determine the length of the hypotenuse. 2 x 2 2 pair for either point to define the equation of the line. set the value of this function equal to 1 4 opposite hypotenuse . (B) By visual inspection. in turn.
3. then solve for x: 2 x 7 2 . the small circle must comprise 50% of the total area of the large circle. Data Analysis. or 1 in 3. The number of bowlers whose averages fall within the interval 161–200 is 60 (37 + 23). Given that the ratio of the large circle’s area to the small circle’s area is 2:1. The correct answer is 3/16. the chances of drawing a blue marble are 2 in 6. two are blue.Additional Geometry Topics. you can easily apply either the sine or cosine function to determine the length of the hypotenuse. and you’ll find that only choice (B) provides an expression that transforms the function into one whose graph matches the one in the figure: f(x + 1) = x + 1.com . and Probability 305 8. To confirm that the line in the figure is in fact the graph of y = x + 1. (C) In the scatter plot. The equation holds for both pairs: (3) = (2) + 1. (–2) = (–3) + 1. = . Applying the function sin45° = 2 . set the value of this function equal to 1 x x adjacent hypotenuse . then solve for 3 x x: = . 8 2 16 triangle.petersons. (B) Since the figure shows a 45°45°90° triangle in which the length of one leg is known. 60 These 60 bowlers account for 240 . which means that City B and City D receive less rainfall but higher temperatures than any of the other three cities.y) pairs plotted along the line for x and y in the equation. which is the total of the six numbers in the frequency column. 2x 10 = 10 . in turn. Applying the function cos60° = 1 2 . for x in the function. Applying the 3 . or 25%. The correct answer is 25. C. 2. set the value of this 3 x opposite function equal to 6 adjacent . (C) Since the figure shows a 30°60°90° 10. 11. x = 2 3 . 3x = 6 3 . x = 2 7 2 9. B and D are further to the left and further up than all of the other three points (A. and so the probability of randomly selecting a point in one of these three regions is 3× 1 = 3 . and E). x = 5. 2x = 7 2 . 3 6 function tan30° = www. (D) Of six marbles altogether. The total number of bowlers in the league is 240. substitute the two (x. of the league’s bowlers. The shaded 3 areas comprise 8 the area of the small circle. Exercise 1 1. which can be expressed as 1 the fraction 3 . Statement (C) provides an accurate general statement. Hence. 12. you can easily apply the tangent function to determine the length of the other leg (x). (B) Substitute the variable expression provided in each answer choice. you can easily apply either the sine or the cosine function to determine the length of the hypotenuse. then solve for x: 2 = 10 . (B) The question describes the following 30°60°90° triangle: Since the length of one leg is known. set the value of this function equal to 2 x opposite 7 hypotenuse . based on this information.
) (B) Since AB is tangent to circle O at C. 2: x≈ triangle. and length of either leg (x) by applying either the sine or cosine function. Since the figure shows a 30°60°90° triangle with base 3. ∆DBO is a right triangle. ∆ABC in the following figure: height. the triangle’s two legs are congruent (equal in length). Thus. AB ⊥ PO . you can solve for the Since m∠BAC = 60°. The question 2 70 ∆AOD is a 1: 3 :2 triangle. Similarly. set the value of this function 2 adjacent equal to . AC ⊥ BC .petersons. 3 x then solve for x: = . x = 3 3 . Hence. Applying the function tan60° = 3 . (This angle measure defines the measure of minor arc DE. as the next figure shows: 4. set the x opposite value of this function equal to 3 adjacent . Draw a radius from O to any of the three points of tangency. or 3 . (A) The two tracks form the legs of a right triangle. AD = 3. Using 1. its area = 5. giving us a 1:1: 2 with angles 45°. Accordingly. ∠DOC (the angle in question) is supplementary to ∠DOB. m∠DOE = 130°. m∠OBC = 90°. 2 x = 70 2 . Since ∠BOE and ∠DOE are supplementary. and AC = CB = 6. 45°. or 2 2 2 3. the length of each side is 2. Since the trains traveled at the same speed. and then construct a right triangle—for example. m∠OAD = 30°. Thus. Since the pentagon is regular (all sides are congruent). 3x = 3 . x 1 3 The circle’s radius = 2 π 3 = 3π . ( ) 3 . accordingly. you must first find its radius. (D) To find the circle’s area. let x equal the triangle’s height. Applying the function 2 cos45° = 2 . OA = OB = 6 2 . To answer the question. x = 3 . you can draw a radius of length 6 from O to C . Letting x = OD: 3 = 3 . you can easily apply the tangent function to determine the height (the vertical leg). (D) The area of a triangle = 1 × base × 2 Exercise 2 1. × 3× 3 3 = 3 . (A) Since AC is tangent to the circle. (D) Since AC is tangent to the circle. thus. each with sides in the ratio 1:1: 2 . and m∠B = 50°. m∠BCO = 40° and. and hence AP = 1. and m∠DOB = 40°. P bisects AB . (x = 140. m∠DOB = 140°. Given that the perimeter of ∆ABC is 18. AB is tangent to PO .com . AB ⊥ DO . The correct answer is 1.306 Chapter 16 4. the hypotenuse of which is the shortest distance between the trains.) www. 5. The perimeter of ∆ABO = 12 + 6 2 + 6 2 = 12 + 12 2 . and 90° .4) = 49. can determine the triangle’s area: 1 9 9 3 . Now you 1 3 2. forming two congruent 45°45°90° triangles (∆ACO and ∆BCO). then solve for x: x hypotenuse 2 x = . m∠BOE = 50°.4 as the approximate value of (35)(1. Given that the perimeter of the pentagon is 10. ∠BCO is supplementary to the 140° angle shown. therefore. x = 35 2 . ∆ABC is a right asks for an approximate distance in miles.
By visual inspection. segment. the line’s slope (m in the equation y = mx + b) is a positive fraction less than 1. The slope of a horizontal line is 2 0 (zero). and its ycoordinate is 2 2 The correct figure should show the graph of the equation y = x – 4. you can see that the maximum yvalue is 4 and that the graph attains this value twice. 4. then solve for b (the yintercept): 3 1 = (1) + b 2 2 1= b You now know the equation of the line: y = x + 1. Thus. To determine b. and Probability 307 Exercise 3 1. The correct answer is 4. Thus. Also. at (–4. the graph of which is the graph of x = –(y2). substituting –y for y in the function f(y) = –(y2 + 1) does not transform the function in any way. at (–8. Data Analysis. 12 = b. Since the line segment: −3 − 4 −7 f(x + 1) = [(x + 1) – 1]2 + 1 = x2 + 1 In the xyplane. let x = 0. For every value of x.] slope of the line segment is –1. the slope of its perpendicular bisector is 1.y) pair 3 ( 1 . No other answer choice provides a graph with both these features. substitute –3 for x and 3 for y. (D) Substitute (x+ 1) for x in the function: −2 + 5 3 = . y = – 2 . line P crosses the yaxis at a positive yvalue (above the xaxis). To find the yintercept of this equation’s graph. Plug (x.–4).4) and (4. Similarly. www. f(x) is the corresponding yvalue.0). Thus. the absolute value of y is 4. (A) The graph of x = –(y2) is a parabola opening to the left with vertex at the origin (0. the absolute value of y is at its maximum at four different xvalues.4).com . the line’s yintercept (b in the equation y = mx + b) is positive. 2 ) and slope (m) 1 into the standard form of 2 the equation for a line (y = mx + b). f(x) = 2. (B) In the general equation y = mx + b. the equation describes a horizontal line with yintercept – 9 . find the midpoint of the line 2. Next.–4) and (8. (C) For all values of x. Thus. as the figure shows. (D) To determine the features of the x−2 transformed line. 3. (E) The figure shows the graph of y = 2. The function f(y) = –(y2 + 1) is equivalent to f(y) = –y2 – 1. ( )( ) 5. Only choice (D) provides an equation that meets both conditions. Choice (D) shows the graph of a line with slope 1 and yintercept –4. then solve for y: y = (0)2 + 1 = 1 5.petersons. the result is still a number whose function is 2 (y = 2). 3. [Since (–y)2 = y2 for any real number y. Thus. then solve for b: 3 = 3(–3) + b. (A) Apply the formula for determining a line’s slope (m): m= y2 − y1 −6 − 4 −10 5 = = =− x 2 − x1 3 − (−1) 4 2 9 Exercise 4 1. determine the slope of the 2 2 5 − (−2) 7 = = −1 . in both instances. For any real number x. (E) First. which is where it intersects its perpendicular bisector.Additional Geometry Topics. (D) Line P slopes upward from left to right at an angle less than 45°. substitute 2 for x in the function: f x −2 = x −2 −2 = x −2−2 = x −4 2 2 2. regardless of what number is added to or subtracted from x. which matches the features of this equation. the minimum value of y is –4 and the graph attains this value twice. 4. the equation of f(x + 1) is y = x2 + 1. The midpoint’s xcoordinate is 4−3 1 = . the slope (m) is given as 3. except translated one unit to the left.
www. you can draw a line segment from point O to each of the five points—the shortest segment indicating the fastest combined time.000. The difference between the two amounts is $130. or $468. while only four are located below the ray. the highest daily temperature for City Y shown on the chart is appoximately 66 degrees. Each of the five answer choices suggests a distinct slope for the ray. Or. so the overall distribution of values is fairly balanced above versus below the ray.000.000. you can add together the “rise” (vertical distance) and the “run” (horizontal distance) from point O to each of the five lettered points (A–E). To answer the question.000. Although the temperature increased by a greater amount during the latter period. showing that cyclist A finished the two races in the fastest combined time. or $312.000. 3. 4. minority awards totaled approximately $730. (Although six points are located above the ray.560. Choice (C) suggests a ray with slope 1 (a 45° angle). the percent increase was greater from 1/ 1 to 3/1: January–March: from 30 degrees to 50 degrees. the ones below the ray. a 66% increase May–July: from 60 degrees to 90 degrees.com .000.308 Chapter 16 Exercise 5 1. a 50% increase During the period from 1/1 to 3/1.petersons. As you can see. (C) You can approximate the (race 1):(race 2) time ratio for the ten cyclists as a group by drawing a ray extending from point O through the “middle” of the cluster of points—as nearly as possible. The shortest combined length represents the fastest combined (total) race time. (E) The two greatest twomonth percent increases for City X were from 1/1 to 3/1 and from 5/1 to 7/1. Income from Division C was 20% of $1. as a group. which does in fact appear to extend through the middle of the points: 2. subtract: $468.) Any ray with a significantly flatter slope (answer choice A or B) or steeper slope (answer choice D or E) would not extend through the “middle” of the ten points and therefore would not indicate an accurate average (race 1):(race 2) ratio.000 and nonminority awards totaled approximately $600.560. (A) Visual inspection reveals that the aggregate amount awarded in 1995 exceeded that of any of the other 3 years shown. 5.000. During that year.000 – $312. OA is the shortest segment. (A) To answer the question. are further from the ray. (D) Division D’s income accounted for 30% of $1.000 = $156.
the probability of selecting fruit and salad from the appetizer menu along with squash and peas 1 1 1 from the vegetable menu is × = . 2 www. which is opposite the 60° angle. 2 2. form a 30°60°90° triangle with sides in the ratio 1: 3 :2. and let x + 72 = the total number of coins (the fraction’s denominator). x = 4 . 3 3 9 Retest 1. by multiplying together the two individual probabilities for the 1 1 1 student: 7 × 7 = 49 . equals 1. Data Analysis. As the next figure shows. 1 So to answer the question. 3 and so the probability of selecting a point in the 2 1 2 1 shaded area is × = = . Thus. 5. The shaded area accounts for 4 of the ring. the area of the “ring” must be twice that of the small circle. Solve for x: 1 x = 4 x + 72 x + 72 = 4 x 72 = 3x 24 = x ( )( ) 2. Given that the ratio of the large circle’s area to the small circle’s area is 3:1. solve for the length of the longer leg (x). Applying the function cos45° = set the value of this function equal to 2 x 2 2 adjacent hypotenuse . (E) You must first calculate the chances of picking the same student twice.Additional Geometry Topics. One way to solve for x is by applying either the sine or cosine function.petersons. and Probability 309 Exercise 6 1. (C) Let x = the number of quarters in the bank (this is the numerator of the probability formula’s fraction). (E) Since the figure shows a 45°45°90° triangle in which the length of the hypotenuse is known. subtract 49 from 1. the two flight paths. 3 4 12 6 As the figures show. you can easily apply either the sine or cosine function to determine the length of either leg.com . (C) The two flight paths form the legs of a right triangle. 4 2 2 . Thus the probability of selecting any pair 1 is one in three. (D) There are two ways among five possible occurrences that a cherry candy will be selected. then solve for x: 3 . added to the probability of not picking the same student twice. Hence the probability of randomly selecting a point in the outer ring is 2 1 . 2x = 8 . or 3 . Accordingly. along with a line segment connecting the two planes. the hypotenuse of which is the shortest distance between the trains (40 miles). the probability of selecting a 2 cherry candy is 5 . 2x = 4 2 2 . The probability of picking the same student twice. (B) In each set are three distinct member pairs. then solve for x: x = . Applying the function sin60° = set the value of this function equal to x opposite 40 hypotenuse . To answer the question. 3. a 120° turn to either the left or right allows for two scenarios (point T is the terminal): 4. The correct answer is 1/6.
Since OC = r. (E) Put the equation given in the question into the form y = mx + b: 4x − 2y = 6 2y = 4x − 6 y = 2x − 3 The line’s slope (m) is 2. You obtain this slope by substituting –4x 2 3: x≈ 1 for x in the function: f(–4x) = − 2 (–4x) = 2x. slightly more horizontal than a 45° angle).–2) and (4. or − −3 − 5 −8 8 ( ) ( ) 2 2 + 2 = ( −2 ) x + 2 = 4 2 2 − 2 x + 2. Accordingly. you can find the number of eggs laid by chickens laying 9 or fewer eggs per week: (2)(9) + (4)(8) + (5)(7) + (3)(6) + (2)(5) + (0)(4) + (2)(3) = 119 eggs. Thus. 6. The figure shows the graph of that equation. and you’ll 4 2 find that the equation holds for both value pairs. for x and y in the equation y = − x + 2 . 2 x = 40 3 . 3. The slope of b is the change in the ycoordinates divided by the corresponding change in the xcoordinate: mb = 3 − (−2) 5 5 = . interior ∠AOB measures 120°. Accordingly. asks for an approximate distance in miles. (E) The line shows a negative yintercept (the point where the line crosses the vertical axis) and a negative slope less than –1 (that is. the area of the shaded region is two thirds of area A and must equal 2πr2. for x in the x function f(x) = –2x2 + 2. by the Pythagorean Theorem. To confirm that (E) is the correct choice.7 as the approximate value of (20)(1. Then divide 60 by 10 to get 6 chickens.0). or − x + 2 4 8 The graph of y = − x 2 4 is a downward opening parabola with vertex at the origin (0. In 2 equation (E). Using 1. 8.–2) and (–3. with corresponding angle ratios 90°:60°:30°.3) are two points on line b. each with hypotenuse 2r.–2). Reworking 2 this equation to match the form of the answer choices yields 2y + x = 6. Substituting − 2 (given in choice E) for x yields the equation 2 y=− x +2: 4 f − x = ( −2 ) − x 2 2 Drawing a line segment from C to O forms two right triangles. the 1 slope of a line perpendicular to this line is – . which is the slope of the graph of f(x) = − 1 x. ∠A and ∠B each = 30°. www. which are shown in the graph. To find the number of chickens that laid 10 eggs during the week. Hence. except translated 2 units up. The correct answer is 6.petersons.y) pairs (–4. the ratios among the triangle’s sides are 1: 3 :2. x = 20 3 . 5. or one third the degree measure of the circle. = 4π r 2 − π r 2 = 3π r 2 (E) Substitute the variable expression given in each answer choice. then adding together the products. 4. By multiplying the number of chickens by the number of eggs they lay per week. Letting that area equal A: A = π ( 2r ) − π r 2 2 whose slope (2) is twice the negative reciprocal 1 of − 2 . substitute the (x. 9. (D) The figure shows the graph of y = 2x. subtract 119 from 179 (the total number of eggs): 179 – 119 = 60. − is the slope and –3 is the y3 intercept.7) = 34. The question 2 40 7.com . in turn.310 Chapter 16 3 x = . 2 Given a yintercept of 3. (D) The entire area between the two circles is the area of the larger minus the area of the smaller. (B) Points (5. equation (E) matches the graph of the line. the equation of the 1 perpendicular line is y = – x + 3.
during 1990. while Country X’s exports totaled about $28 million. and Probability 311 10. the 7 2 probability of picking a blue marble is 7 .com . Thus. or 3 . As you can see. Data Analysis. Country Y’s imports totaled about $55 million. (A) The probability that the lefthand die will 1 NOT show a solid face is 3 in 6.) A quick inspection reveals that only for the year 1990 is Country Y’s dark bar approximately twice the height of Country X’s white bar.Additional Geometry Topics. 12. the red : blue : green marble ratio is 4:2:1. the lefthand bars represent data for Country X. To calculate the combined probability of these two independent events occurring. or 2 .petersons. Although you don’t need to determine dollar amounts. 11. multiply: 1×1= 1 . (E) For each year. The probability that the righthand die will NOT show a solid face is 2 in 6. visually compare the difference in height between Country X’s white bar and Country Y’s dark bar. while the righthand bars represent data for Country Y. 2 3 6 1 www. (D) Regardless of the number of marbles in the bag. (For each year. blue marbles account for 2 of the total number of marbles.
.
5. 313 . Handwritten answers at the top of the column are not scored. 10. 25. 19. 17. 14. 6. Section 2 abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 8. 21. abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde Note: Only the answers entered on the grid are scored. 18. 20.Practice Tests PRACTICE TEST A Answer Sheet 17 15. Mark only one oval for each question. 11. Section 1 1. 12. abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 22. 24. erase your answer completely. darken the oval that corresponds to your answer choice. 23. 16. abcde abcde abcde abcde Directions: For each question. 7. 2. 9. 3. If you change your mind. 13. 4.
.
Then x = 4. AB = AC. The toll on the Islands Bridge is $1. 1 3. what is 25% of the number? (A) 2 (B) 10 (C) 12 (D) 11 (E) 15 If x + 3 is a multiple of 3.com . 2.75 for each additional passenger.Practice Tests 315 PRACTICE TEST A Section 1 25 Questions Time: 30 Minutes 1. If 20% of a number is 8.25? (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5 (E) none of these If y3 = 2y2 and y ≠ 0.00 for car and driver and $. then y must be equal to (A) 1 (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 2 6.petersons. 2 3 –1 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 40° 80° 100° 60° 90° www. How many people were riding in a car for which the toll was $3. which of the following is not a multiple of 3? (A) x (B) x + 6 (C) 6x + 18 (D) 2x + 6 (E) 3x + 5 In the figure below. 2 2 1 1 5 ÷ 3 + 2 − 10 = 1 (A) − 10 1 (B) − 7 19 (C) 15 1 (D) 5 (E) 5.
Isosceles triangle ABC is inscribed in square BCDE as shown.com . (A) 2z + 3q (B) z + 3q (C) (D) z+z+ z q + 2 3 q 3 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 9. a fraction equivalent to (A) (B) (C) (D) 1 2a − 2 2 a−2 1 a−2 1 a 2 2a − 1 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 50 100 130 1 12 2 25 (E) 15. a triangle. If x and y are negative integers and x – y = 1. AB and CD are diameters of circle O. The number of degrees in angle CAB is 1 a 2− 2 is a 14. and p is q. 12.M. find the perimeter of the park. find the value of x + y + m + n + p in terms of z and q. If the area of square BCDE is 4. the angle between the hands of a clock is (A) 90° (B) 80° (C) 75° (D) 72° (E) 65° www. attached as in the diagram below. If a b c d ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ x = 1 . If the area of the square is 144 and the perimeter of the triangle is 28. At 3:30 P. what is the least possible value for xy? (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3 (E) 4 A park is in the shape of a square. If the sum of x and y is z and the average of m. If a is not 0 or 1.316 Chapter 17 7. n. 11. 52 + 12π 52 + 6π 40 + 6π 34 + 12π 32 + 6π (E) none of these 13. At the end of October it is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 21 25 41 27 30 1 full. then x must equal b c d e a (A) e e (B) a (C) (D) (E) e none of these 1 a 8. the perimeter of triangle ABC is An oil tank has a capacity of 45 gallons. and a semicircle. How many gallons of 3 oil were used in October? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 8 2+ 5 2+2 5 2 + 10 12 10.petersons. At the beginning of October it is 80% full.
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 0 1 2 3 none of these 22. If the length of the arc is 2π. find its perimeter. Prince takes his wife and two children to 1 the circus.com . If the area of the figure is 125. A clerk’s weekly salary is $320 after a 25% raise. then (A) x = 5 (B) x > 7 (C) x < 7 (D) 1 < x < 7 (E) x > 7 or x < 1 21.60.10 $3. The length of an arc of a circle is equal to of 5 the circumference of the circle. The area is increased by (A) 50% (B) 100% (C) 125% (D) 200% (E) 250% 25. is less than 5 is www. Of the seniors. The smallest integer that.30 23. find the price of a child’s ticket.petersons. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 60 100 80 75 20 1 3 a 18. Prince pays a total of $12. the radius of the circle is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 1 10 5 10 What percent of the students at South High will go to college next year? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 75 25 33 50 45 1 3 20. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) $4. What was his weekly salary before the raise? (A) $256 (B) $260 (C) $300 (D) $304 (E) $316 17.Practice Tests 317 16. The diameter of a circle is increased by 50%. Mr.20 $3. 3 3 5 1 3 19. The figure below is composed of 5 equal squares.20 $1. when squared. If two sides of a triangle are 3 and 4 and the third side is x. Of the students at South High. 4 1 are seniors. 3 will go to college next year. Which of the following is equal to of ? 2 5 (A) 3% (B) (C) (D) (E) 33 % 30% 83 % 120% 1 1 3 then 4 5 + 6 7 is equal to (A) 30 (B) 40 (C) 11 (D) 6 (E) 15 24. If the price of a child’s ticket is 2 the price of an adult ticket and Mr.60 $2. If b c is defined as being equal to ab – c.
what is the value of 3x + 1? 10. what is the value of (a + b)2? www. 3. 8 . 7. 6. Write the answer in the corresponding grid on the answer sheet and fill in the ovals beneath each answer you write. Find the least number of socks that must be drawn from the drawer to be assured of having a pair of red socks. there is no remainder.5. 9. what is the value of ? 5 2 x If there are 30 students at a meeting of the Forum Club.318 Chapter 17 Section 2 25 Questions Time: 30 Minutes Directions: Solve each of the following problems. 17 are wearing black and 14 are wearing both black and white. If there is a remainder when the number is divided by 4. If a = 4. If ab = 10 and a2 + b2 = 30. How many 2inch squares are needed to fill a border around the edge of the shaded square with a side of 6" as shown in the figure below? 8. how many are wearing neither black nor white? If a ❒ b means a · b + (a – b). what is the value of a? 2 5 y x = y . Answer: 3/4 (–. Here are some examples. If 3x + 3x – 3x = 12. 4.” 1. find the value of 4 ❒ 2. 2. When a certain number is divided by 2. 5. what is the value of a2 + 9 ? Note: Either position is correct. what must the remainder be? If a = x and x = If 2 A drawer contains 4 red socks and 4 blue socks.petersons.com . show answer either way) Answer : 325 Note: A mixed number such as 3 1/2 must be gridded as 7/2 or as 3.75. If gridded as “3 1/2.” it will be read as “thirty–one halves. and 20 are wearing white.
14. 23. 9. 13. 6. 2. 19. abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 22. 4. Mark only one oval for each question. abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 15. Section 2 abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 8. 16. 20. 21. 11. 3.com . 25. 10. Section 1 1. 17. www. abcde abcde abcde abcde Note: Only the answers entered on the grid are scored. darken the oval that corresponds to your answer choice. 24. If you change your mind. 7. erase your answer completely.petersons. 12.Practice Tests 319 PRACTICE TEST B Answer Sheet Directions: For each question. Handwritten answers at the top of the column are not scored. 5. 18.
.
3 Roger receives a basic weekly salary of $80 plus a 5% commission on his sales. after 2 years.25 . .Practice Tests 321 PRACTICE TEST B Section 1 25 Questions Time: 30 Minutes 1.petersons.025 .9)2 2 .5 . 5. 1 3 3 2 www.25 (. A musical instrument depreciates by 20% of its value each year.0025 6. the ratio of his basic salary to his commission was (A) 2:1 (B) 1:2 (C) 2:3 (D) 3:2 (E) 3:1 The value of 1 1 is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 6 1 6 3 − 4 1 2 3. Which of the following fractions is equal to (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 25 4 25 1 4 1 400 1 40 1 %? 4 2.com . of a piano purchased new for $1200? (A) $768 (B) $912 (C) $675 (D) $48 (E) $1152 Which of the following has the largest numerical value? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3 5 2 3 3 4 4. 1 % written as a decimal is 4 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 25 2. What is the value. In a week in which his sales amounted to $800.
and are congruent. Mr.322 Chapter 17 7.50 (B) $125 (C) $137.50 (E) $140 14. Paul needs m minutes to mow the lawn. The sum of Bob’s age and Carl’s age is 34.50 (D) $132. how much is left each week for other expenses? (A) $112. what part of the lawn is still unmowed? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) k m m k m−k k m−k m k−m m 9. After he works for k minutes. there are m male employees and f female employees. If the length and width of a rectangle are each multiplied by 2. How old is Bob? (A) 18 (B) 24 (C) 20 (D) 16 (E) 12 On a map having a scale of 4 inch : 20 miles. In Simon’s General Score.petersons. then (A) the area and perimeter are both multiplied by 4 (B) the area is multiplied by 2 and the perimeter by 4 (C) the area is multiplied by 4 and the perimeter by 2 (D) the area and perimeter are both multiplied by 2 (E) the perimeter is multiplied by 4 and the area by 8 12. What part of the staff is men? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) m+ f m m+ f f m f m m+ f f m 13. If he spends 20% of his income for rent. The sum of Alan’s age and Carl’s age is 42. Marcus earns $250 per week. and 10% for savings. What is the area of the shaded portion if the perimeter of the square is 32? (The four circles are tangent to each other and the square. 25% for food. 1 11. the triangle is (A) acute (B) isosceles (C) right (D) equilateral (E) obtuse (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 32 – 16π 64 – 16π 64 – 64π 64 – 8π 32 – 4π www. If the angles of a triangle are in the ratio 2:3:4.com .) 10. The sum of Alan’s age and Bob’s age is 40. how many inches should there be between towns 325 miles apart? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 16 1 16 4 1 81 4 1 32 2 1 6 4 4 8.
If x < 0 and y < 0. At what time will they be 455 miles apart? (A) 3:30 P. How much time elapsed between her getting up and going to bed that day? (A) 18 hrs. 28 min. 18. 22 min. 18 min. (E) 2 P. one traveling east at 60 m.5 (C) 4 2 (D) 4 3 (E) 5 16. then (A) x + y > 0 (B) x = –y (C) x > y (D) xy > 0 (E) xy < 0 23.com .p. 19.M. (C) 1:30 P. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 60 40 90 50 80 20. (B) 14 hrs. DE = DC. 18 min.M. how many pencils can be bought for c cents? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) pc 2D pc 200 D 50 pc D 2Dp c 200pcD 21. How far is the point (–3.petersons. angle 2 = 40°. Susan got up one morning at 7:42 A.M. Find the number of degrees in angle 1 if AB = AC. The product of 3456 and 789 is exactly (A) 2726787 (B) 2726785 (C) 2726781 (D) 2726784 (E) 2726786 17. If p pencils cost 2D dollars.p. –4) from the origin? (A) 2 (B) 2.M. Two trains start from the same station at 10 A.M.h. (D) 1 P.M.M.h. 2 min. (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 22 24 16 + 6 3 16 + 6 2 cannot be determined from information given 22. Which of the following is the product of 4327 and 546? (A) 2362541 (B) 2362542 (C) 2362543 (D) 2362546 (E) 2362548 www.Practice Tests 323 15.M. (E) 14 hrs. Find the perimeter of right triangle ABC if the area of square AEDC is 100 and the area of square BCFG is 36. (B) 12:30 P. and went to bed that evening at 10:10 P. and the other west at 70 m. (C) 15 hrs.. (D) 9 hrs. and angle 3 = 80°.
if all classrooms are occupied? (A) 200 (B) 192 (C) 160 (D) 240 (E) 210 25. what is the minimum number of students on one corridor at a given time.com .324 Chapter 17 24. the area of ABCD is (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 108 27 54 54π 108π www.petersons. If the area of each circle enclosed in rectangle ABCD is 9π. If a classroom contains 20 to 24 students and each corridor contains 8 to 10 classrooms.
Here are some examples Answer: 3/4 (–. what part of a dime is a quarter? Marion is paid $24 for 5 hours of work in the school office.M.75.28 inches and the inner diameter is 48. because of a special promotion. the store sold 80 washing machines. Find the rate of the plane in miles per hour. Janet works 3 hours and makes $10. How many boys are there in the school? How many digits are there in the square root of a perfect square of 12 digits? In May. 2. 9.com .M. Write the answer in the corresponding grid on the answer sheet and fill in the ovals beneath each answer you write. 4.Practice Tests 325 Section 2 25 Questions Time: 30 Minutes Directions: Solve each of the following problems. 10. What is the percent of increase in the number of washing machines sold? 7.5.95.7 inches.” it will be read as “thirty–one halves. ( ) 2 www. A plane flies over Denver at 11:20 A. How much more per hour does Marion make than Janet? If the outer diameter of a cylindrical oil tank is 54. 1.petersons. what is the thickness of the wall of the tank. In June. in inches? What number added to 40% of itself is equal to 84? If r = 25 – s. Simplified as a fraction to simplest form.” Note: Either position is correct. Find the value of 3 2 . at 11:32 A. Carter’s Appliances sold 40 washing machines. show answer either way) Answer : 325 Note: A mixed number such as 3 1/2 must be gridded as 7/2 or as 3. 5. what is the value of 4r + 4s? 6. It passes over Coolidge. 3. 8. If gridded as “3 1/2. 53% of the 1000 students at Jackson High are girls. 120 miles from Denver.
.
abcde abcde abcde abcde Note: Only the answers entered on the grid are scored. 9. 13. 4. 6. 7. Handwritten answers at the top of the column are not scored.Practice Tests 327 PRACTICE TEST C Answer Sheet Directions: For each question. erase your answer completely. 5. 3. 20. 21. Section 2 abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 8. 10. abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 15. Section 1 1. 19. 17.petersons.com . Mark only one oval for each question. 12. 24. 16. 14. darken the oval that corresponds to your answer choice. 25. www. abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde abcde 22. 18. If you change your mind. 2. 23. 11.
.
If a building B feet high casts a shadow F feet long. then c = c 2.2 (.2)2 (. 8 · 8 = 4x.3).1) (8. Find x (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5 (E) 6 If a > 2.2 7. –b 6. then 12a = b 4 The vertices of a triangle are (3. then.02)3 4. which of the following is the smallest? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 a a 2 a +1 2 2 a +1 2 a −1 5. .com . Which of the following has the greatest value? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 2 . at the same time of day. The area of this triangle is (A) 5 (B) 10 (C) 7 (D) 20 (E) 14 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 3b b 9b 12b 16b www.1) and (8.petersons.Practice Tests 329 PRACTICE TEST C Section 1 25 Questions Time: 30 Minutes 1. If a = b and (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) a –a b 1 a 1 = b . If a 3 = . a tree T feet high will cast a shadow how many feet long? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) FT B FB T B FT TB F T FB 3.
What percent of a half dollar is a penny. the other number is (A) (B) A–x A −x 2 (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 5 4 9 4 81 3 7 15 23 (C) (D) (E) 2A – x A+ x 2 x–A www. If angle BCD contains 100°. In triangle ABC. A circle whose center is at the origin passes through the point whose coordinates are (1. If one of the numbers is x.1).com . Of 60 employees at the Star Manufacturing 2 Company. The area of the circle is (A) π (B) 2 π (C) 2π (D) 2 2π (E) 4 π 13. Which of the following is greater than ? 3 (A) . x employees are female. 1 10 8 4 50 80 60 40 20 (D) (E) 16. and a dime? (A) 16 (B) 8 (C) 20 (D) 25 (E) 32 14.3 2 2 1 9. If 1 1 1 + = then c = a b c (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) a+b ab a+b ab ab a+b 1 ab 2 100b a a b b 100 a b a 100a b 10.3 . 15. The average of two numbers is A. a nickel. If of the 3 remainder are married.33 (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 3 1 4 1 . find the number of degrees in angle B. how many unmarried men work for this company? (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 2 x 3 1 40 − x 3 1 40 + x 3 2 20 − x 3 1 20 − x 3 40 − 12.330 Chapter 17 8. AB = BC and AC is extended to D.petersons. What percent of a is b? (A) (B) (C) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 1 2 11.
M.Practice Tests 331 17.com .? (A) 25 (B) 50 (C) 75 (D) 80 (E) 35 20. In parallelogram ABCD.petersons. If a = 5b. The perimeter of square ABCD is 18. how many children can still be fed? (A) 10 (B) 8 (C) 16 (D) 12 (E) 4 23. then the rate of the train in miles per hour is (A) 140 (B) 112 (C) 84 (D) 100 (E) 98 21. A rectangular door measures 5 feet by 6 feet 8 inches. If m men can paint a house in d days. and 75 on three tests. how many miles apart are the ships at 2:30 P. If there are 15 adults at the picnic. Two ships leave from the same port at 11:30 A. The sum of angle B and angle D must be (A) 120° (B) 300° (C) 240° (D) 60° (E) 180° 24. how many days will it take m + 2 men to paint the same house? (A) d + 2 (B) d – 2 (C) (D) (E) m+2 md md m+2 md + 2d m (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 32 32π 64 16 64π 25.M. If a train covers 14 miles in 10 minutes. The distance from one corner of the door to the diagonally opposite corner is (A) 9'4" (B) 8'4" (C) 8'3" (D) 9'6" (E) 9' 19. There is enough food at a picnic to feed 20 adults or 32 children. then (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) 5b 3 3 a= 5 3b 3b 5 b 3 b 5 22. The area of circle O is 64π. What grade must he receive on the next test so that his average for these 4 tests is 85? (A) 87 (B) 92 (C) 83 (D) 85 (E) 88 www. angle A contains 60°. 88. Ken received grades of 90. If one sails due east at 20 miles per hour and the other due south at 15 miles per hour.
If 8 3 3 of is added to . Answer: 3/4 (–. Here are some examples. Find the capacity of the tank in 3 gallons. how many students applied to both schools? If x2 – y2 = 100 and x – y = 20.” it will be read as “thirty–one halves. the gauge indicates that the 2 tank is full. show answer either way) Answer : 325 Note: A mixed number such as 3 1/2 must be gridded as 7/2 or as 3. what is the result? 8 8 8 6.com . 5. 8.5.332 Chapter 17 Section 2 25 Questions Time: 30 Minutes Directions: Solve each of the following problems.petersons.” Note: Either position is correct. what is the value of xy? If 2. After adding 10 A gasoline tank is 4 gallons of gasoline. 4. what is the value of x + y? A gallon of water is added to 6 quarts of a solution that is 50% acid. 2. If 3 students applied to neither Columbia nor Cornell. 9.. If the average of 5 consecutive even integers is 82.75. 10. 25 applied to Columbia and 30 applied to Cornell.5 cm = 1 in. If gridded as “3 1/2. If 2n–3 = 32 what is the value of n? In a group of 40 students. What percent of the new solution is acid? full. and 36 in. 3. what is the largest of these integers? www. If (x – y)2 = 40 and x2 + y2 = 60. Write the answer in the corresponding grid on the answer sheet and fill in the ovals beneath each answer you write. 1. how many centimeters are in 1 yard? How much more is 1 1 1 1 of than of ? 4 3 3 4 1 7. = 1 yd.
Extra toll $2. Using the largest negative integers will give the smallest product. (A) $320 is 125% of his former salary. 2x + 6 = 2(x + 3).Practice Tests 333 SOLUTIONS TO PRACTICE TESTS PRACTICE TEST A Section 1 1. 6x + 18 = 6(x + 3). At 3:30. 2 2 sides of square in perimeter = 24 Total perimeter of park = 16 + 6π + 24 = 40 + 6 π 16. (C) Side of square = 2 If BE = 2. Therefore. (C) There are 30º in each of the 12 even spaces between numbers on the clock.75). then xy = 2. nor can it be shown to differ front x + 3 by a multiple of 3. (B) m+n+ p =q 3 m + n + p = 3q x+y=z m + n + p + x + y = 3q + z 5. x + 6 is 3 above x + 3.) Angle COB = 50º Arc CB = 50º Angle CAB is an inscribed angle = 25º 11. The angle between 1 the hands is 2 (30 ) = 75 . Perimeter of triangle ABC = 2 + 2 14. Angle BAC = 100º (Sum of the angles in a triangle is 180º. 320 = 1. x=y+1 2 13. (C) Basic toll $1.25 x 32000 = 125 x $256 = x www. then by the Pythagorean theorem.00. 5. (A) 80% = 4 5 4 ⋅ 45 = 36 5 1 ⋅ 45 = 15 3 Used in October = 36 – 15 = 21 10. (B) 1 x =8 5 x = 40 1 (40) = 10 4 9.) 4.com . (C) Side of square = 12 = diameter of semicircle. Let y = –2. (E) Multiples of 3 are 3 apart x is 3 below x + 3. (C) (C) Divide by y : y = 2.25. (A) Multiply every term by a. (C) Angle C = 40º (Congruent angles.) Angle x = 100º (Vertical angles are congruent. Remaining 2 sides of triangle add up to 16. (B) a b c d ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅x =1 b c d e a ⋅x =1 e e x= a 3. 7. BA and AC each equal 5 . EA = 1. the car holds a driver and 3 extra passengers. Perimeter of semicircle = 1 1 π d = ⋅ π ⋅ 12 = 6π 2 2 1 2a − 2 15. 3x + 5 does not have a factor of 3. x = –1. for a total of 4 persons. which is 3($. the minute hand points to 6 and the hour hand is halfway between 3 and 4. 6.petersons. (E) Angle AOD = 50º 2. 8. (E) 2 3 3 ⋅ = 5 2 5 1 1 10 − 2 8 2 − = = = 2 10 20 20 5 3 2 + =1 5 5 12.
since even numbers are 2 apart.20 4. (D) The sum of any two sides of a triangle must be greater than the third side. (A) Area of each square = 1 ⋅ 125 = 25 5 Section 2 1. Of course it is possible that two red socks could be drawn earlier. 3x = 12 x=4 3x + 1 = 13 (answer) 10. 21. Prince pays the equivalent of 3 adult tickets.25.20) = $2. but then the next two must be red.5.10 2 Child’s ticket = 23.com . 7.petersons. (E) x can be negative as (–2)2 = 4. (A) 6. but with 6 we are assured of a pair of red socks. (C) If the linear ratio is 1:1. 2 (answer) 5(2 π) = 10π = π d d = 10 r=5 ( 8) 2 = 8 (answer) 20.5)2 or 1:2. If division by 4 does give a remainder. 3. 25. 22. (C) 19. (D) The two children’s tickets equal one adult ticket. as there is no remainder when divided by 2. 6 (answer) 16 (answer) 3 = 12 − 5 = 7 4 5 5 6 7 = 30 − 7 = 23 7 + 23 = 30 8. 24.25 or 125% of the original area. This accounts for 23 students. it must be 2. Mr. (B) 3 1 of will go on to college next year. x must be greater than 1. ( a + b )2 = a 2 + 2ab + b 2 a 2 + b 2 = 30 2ab = 20 a 2 + 2ab + b 2 = 50 (answer) a www. 3a = 12. The increase is 1. 4 3 4 9. 2 y 5 2 2 4 = = ⋅ = (answer) x 5 5 5 25 2 Illustrate the given facts as follows. 12(5) = 60 18. which is less than 5.60 a = 4. however. 2. as 3 + x > 4. 4 2 + 9 = 25 = 5 (answer) Side of each square = 5 Perimeter is made up of 12 sides. Therefore. x must be less than 7 (4 + 3 > x). 5. then the area ratio is (1)2 : (1. The number must be an even number. (answer) 1 (4. (D) 1 3 3 ⋅ = = 30% 2 5 10 Circumference is 5 times arc.334 Chapter 17 17. leaving 7. 4 ❒ 2 = 4 · 2 + (4 – 2) = 8 + 2 = 10 (answer) It is possible for the first four to be blue. 4 3 3 1 1 ⋅ = = 25% .
5 (D) There are m + f people on the staff. so the area is multiplied by 22 or 4. (D) Since 6 times 9 is 54. (B) Each side of square = 8 Radius circle = 2 Area of square = 82 = 64 Area of 4 circles = 4π r2 = 4 · π · 22 = 16π Shaded area = 64 – 16π 15. 13. 5. www. 2B = 32 B = 16 16. Of these. (A) Use a proportion comparing inches to miles.5 . 6 =6 4−3 7. 12.81 2 20 = = 6. 3x. 5 triangle. (D) A + B = 40 B + C = 34 A + C = 42 14. so the perimeter is also multiplied by 2. 4.com . 60°. m+ f 10. (E) 3 = . m of the staff is men. 2. (A) . 5 $1200 – $240 = $960 value after 1 year. 11. 1 ⋅ 960 = $192 depreciation second year. and 80°. 5 $960 – $192 = $768 value after 2 years.6 .0025 4 1 1 1 1 1 % = ÷ 100 = ⋅ = (D) 4 4 4 100 400 In k minutes.25 = . (A) Multiply every term by 12.6 5 2 3 1 3 4 = 2 = . Subtract second equation from third. (C) The linear ratio stays constant. 9. 1 4 = x 20 325 325 20 x = 4 325 1 325 5 1 x= ⋅ = =4 =4 4 20 80 80 16 1 ⋅ 1200 = $240 depreciation first year.3 3 The angles are 40°. m k m−k Still undone is 1− or m m 3. and 4x.25% = . The area ratio is the square of the linear ratio. the product must end in 4. (A) 55% of his salary is spent. (A) Represent the angles as 2x. (A) 20% = 1 5 8. (E) Plotting the point shows a 3.05 (800) = $40 commission There is only one answer among the choices 1 less than of his salary. 9 x = 180 x = 20 (.petersons. (D) k of the lawn is mowed. all acute.25 4 1 % = . A–B=8 Subtract from first equation. 4. (E) 1 = . 45% is left. 2 80:40 = 2:1 6.Practice Tests 335 PRACTICE TEST B Section 1 1.9)2 = . m are men.
The plane covers 120 miles in 12 minutes or hour. 8. (B) Since 7 times 6 is 42. 5 $10. (B) Use a proportion comparing pencils to cents. 23.15. The thickness on each side is 2.40 x = 84 14 x = 840 x = 60 (answer) 4. (C) Distance of first train = 60x Distance of second train = 70x 60 x + 70 x = 455 130 x = 455 1 x=3 2 1 In 3 hours. 25 5 = (answer) 10 2 $24 or $4. and the area (18)(6). 25. 2 22. (D) When two negative numbers are multiplied.petersons. (. to 12 noon is 4 hrs. 9. the product must end in 2. Change 2D dollars to 200D cents. (3 2 )(3 2 ) = 9 ⋅ 2 = 18 (answer) www.40 x = 84 1. 10 triangle.M. the time will be 1:30 P. to 10:10 P. For every pair of digits in a number. there will be one digit in the square root. In 5 or 1 hour.47)(1000) = 470 boys (answer) 8. making the dimensions of the rectangle 18 by 6.80 .65 = $1. Section 2 1. 3.336 Chapter 17 17. p x = 200 D c pc =x 200 D r + s = 25 4(r + s) = 4(25) = 100 (answer) 6. or 108. 6 (answer) Increase of 40 Percent of Increase = Amount of increase ⋅ 100% Original 40 ⋅ 100% = 100% 40 21. making the perimeter 24. 28 min. (A) The radius of each circle is 3.95 Janet’s hourly wage is or $3.M. 19.79. is 10 hrs. From 7:42 A. 18.58 must be divided between both ends.M. 600 (answer) 7. Triangle ABC is a 6. (C) The minimum is 20 students in 8 classrooms. 24. (answer) The difference of 5.80 – $3. From 12 noon.com . 3 Marion’s hourly wage is $4. their product is positive. 20. 47% of 1000 are boys. 10 min. (E) Figure the time elapsed on either side of 12 noon. 18 min. 5. (answer) x + . The sum of the two is 14 hrs.65. 2. (B) Each side of square AEDC is 10. Each side of square BCFG is 6. it covers 5(120). (answer) 10. or 600 5 1 5 miles. (C) There are 90° left for angle 1 since angle BCD is a straight angle.
(B) 12. (C) In 3 hours. (A) The ratio of height to shadow is constant. 20. 19. Multiply by abc. 4a = 3b Multiply by 3. This is a 3. 5 triangle as 45 = 3(15). and E all have the same numerator.com . (B) 5 feet = 60 inches 6 feet 8 inches = 80 inches This is a 6. (A) 16. (A) 1 = .45 (. which is 8 feet 4 inches. 1 of these unmarried 3 1 (60 − x ) = 20 − 1 x 3 3 www. (4 · 4 · 4 = 64) (B) 1 2 + 12 = r 2 2 = r2 Area = πr2 = 2π 2. (E) Angle BCA = Angle BAC = 80° There are 20° left for angle B.2 = .Practice Tests 337 PRACTICE TEST C Section 1 1. (B) / 5 8. 8. A. one ship went 60 miles. the one with the largest denominator will be the smallest fraction. 4.000008 10. (A) 1 Right triangle area = 2 ⋅ 5 ⋅ 2 = 5 x+y =A 2 x + y = 2A y = 2A − x 3 / ⋅ 5b = 3b 17. In this case.5 2 3. 10 triangle. (D) This is inverse variation.02)3 = . (C) Cross multiply. D. 60 = 4(15). (E) 60 – x employees are male 18. c ( b + a ) = ab c= bc + ac = ab ab b+a B T = F x Bx = FT FT x= B 15. 12a = 9b (D) a=b= 1 a= c ac = 1 1 c= a 1 c (. (B) 64 = 4x x=3 9. (D) 9 81 9 8 4 ÷ = ⋅ = 2 8 2 81 9 1 10 1 = =3 . (C) b 100 b ⋅ 100 = a a 7. The hypotenuse will be 5(15). .3 3 3 16 32 = = 32% 50 100 5. or 75. 6.04 4. 11. (D) 13. making the diagonal 100 inches.2)2 = . (D) B and C are greater than 1. (E) 14. the other 45 miles.petersons.
Original Added New 6 4 10 . or 84 miles. 10 gallons is 2 1 8−3 5 − = = 3 4 12 12 5 x = 10 12 5 x = 120 (answer) x = 24 7.338 Chapter 17 m ⋅ d = ( m + 2) ⋅ x md =x m+2 Section 2 1. If 82 is the third. 4 4 2n–3 = 25 n–3=5 n = 8 (answer) 25 – x + x + 30 – x = 37 55 – x = 37 18 = x 18 (answer) x2 – y2 = (x – y)(x + y) 100 = 20(x + y) 5 = (x + y) 5 (answer) 3 = 30% (answer) 10 No. So far he has 8 above and 10 below. 3 3 6 3 + = or (answer. children. the train will cover 6(14). Their sum is 240°.com . 9. He needs another 2 above. 2. 86 is the last. of quarts % acid = Amount of acid If 15 adults are fed. both acceptable) 8 8 8 4 21.50 0 2 1 − of the tank. 3 4 3 0 3 6. (B) 3 of the food is 4 1 1 gone. (C) If angle A = 60°. 24. of the food will feed ⋅ 32 .5) = 90 (answer) 1 1 1 ⋅ = 4 3 12 1 1 1 ⋅ = 3 4 12 0 (answer) 10. 36(2. (C) Area of circle = 64π = r2 4. Radius of circle = 8 Side of square = 16 Perimeter of square = 64 25. 23. or 8. (A) He must score as many points above 85 as below. then angle B = 120°. (C) 10 minutes = 1 hour 6 5. 3. ( x − y )2 = x 2 − 2 xy + y2 40 = 60 − 2 xy 2 xy = 20 xy = 10 (answer) 8. In one hour. Angle B = Angle D.petersons. 86 (answer) www. The average is the middle integer. 22.